(The Berkeley Review) The Berkeley Review MCAT Gen

General
Chemistry
Part II
Sections VI-X
Section VI
Gases
Section VII
Phases & Phase Changes

Section VIII
Thermochemistry
Section IX
Kinetics
Section X
Electrochemistry
BERKELEY
Specializing in MCAT Preparation
ERRELEY
E
P.O. Box 40140, Berkeley, California 94704-0140

'
Phone:
(800)
Internet:
NCATprep@berkeleyrevievv.com
622-8827
(800)
MCAT-TBR
http://www.berkeleyrevievv.com
The Berkeley Review and The Berkeley Review logo are registered trademarks of The Berkeley Review.
This publication for The Berkeley Review was written, edited, and composed on a desktop publishing system
using Apple Macintosh computers and Microsoft Word. Pages were created on the Apple LaserWrite Pro. Line
art was created using numerous graphics programs designed tor use on Macintosh computers. The majority of the
text type and display type was set in Times Roman and Palatine
Cover Design by MacGraphics.
Copyright 2010, 2009, 2007, 2005, 2002, 2001, 2000, 1995, 1994, 1993, 1992 by The Berkeley Review. All rights
reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
copyright owner.
Terminology and Concepts

a) Gas-Phase Definitions
b) Kinetic Molecular Theory of Gases
Section VI
c) Boltzmann's Distribution
d) Ideal Oases
e) Real Oases
Gas Laws
Gases
a) Applying Qas Laws

b) Avogadro's Law
c) Boyle's Law
by Todd Bennett
d) Charles's Law
Gas mixture
I added
O = Lighter gas
ssHeavier gas
Gas mixture,
evacuated?
Gas System Properties

a) Partial Pressure
b) Manometers
Gas Notion
a) Qas Speed and Velocity

b) Diffusion
Gas mixture is richer
Gas mixture is richer in
c) Effusion and Infusion
in the heavier gas on
the lighter gas on the

right side of the tube
d) Isotopic Enrichment
the left side of the tube
BERKELEY
JLJr-e-v-iê>w
Gases Section Goals

Know the definition of a gas and the terms associated with gases.
Youmust know what an ideal gas and a real gas are. Understand the following terms used to describe
a gas system: pressure, volume, concentration, density, temperature, moles, molecules, collision
frequency, ana mean free path.
Have a solid understanding of the kinetic theory of gases.
Be able to recite a viable description ofgases at the microscopic level using the kinetic theory of
gases. Knowthat gasesmove about their environment in a random fashion, and that they frequently
collide with other gas particles and the walls of the container. Know that the momentum of heavier
gases is greater than the momentum of lighter gases. Know that the velocities of each gas particle
sum to zero for a gas in a stationary, closed container.
Know the proper applications of the various gas laws.
Know hentouseAvogadro's, Boyle's, andCharles's laws from thevariables presented in thequestion.
Have an understanding of the experimental conditions required to use each law. Recognize the
shape of the graphs that show the relationships between the variables of each gas law.
Be able to distinguish between a real gas and an ideal gas.
An ideal gas is composed of molecules that occupy no volume and exhibit no intermolecular forces.
A real gas is just what the name implies, a gas made up of real molecules that do occupyvolume
and exhibit intermolecular forces. The pressure and volume ofa real gas are therefore different from
those of an ideal gas. The Vander Waalsequation (which you should understand but not memorize)
shows the relationship betweenideal variablesand real variables for a gas.
Be able to determine the partial pressure of a gas within a mixture.

The total pressure of a system is the sum of the individual pressures (partial pressures) of all of the
component gasparticles. Thepartial pressure due toonecomponent in themixture canbedetermined
by multiplying the mole fraction of the component by the total pressure of the system. You must
be able to convert between different pressure units.
Understand the relationship between speed, mass, and temperature for a gas.
You must know the effectof a particle's mass on its velocity. Lighter gases travel at a faster rate than
heavier gases. The velocityor a gas particleis inverselyproportional to the square root of its mass.
You mustknowthe effect of temperature onvelocity. At highertemperatures, gases travel at a faster
rate. The velocity of a gas particle is directly proportional to the square root of the temperature.
e^ Effusion isthe process bywhich gas molecules pass from within a container to the outside through
Understand the concepts of effusion and effusion rate, infusion, and diffusion.
pores in the container wall. The rate of effusion depends on the velocity of the gas molecules, the
number of pores in the material, and the size of the pore relative to the size of the molecule. When
gases enter a container through a pore, the process is referred to as infusion. When a gas particle
moves from a region of higher concentration to a lower concentration, the process is known as
diffusion.
General Chemistry
Introduction
Gases and Gas Laws
Gases and Gas Laws

The gas phase, from the macroscopic perspective, is defined as the state of a
closed system in which molecules have no definite shape and no definite volume.
From the microscopic perspective, the molecules are freely moving particles
traveling through space, where the kinetic energy associated with each particle is
greater than the potential energy of intermolecular forces. The gas phase is the
first of three phases of matter that we shall address. Gases differ from liquids in
that liquids have a definite volume, and the molecules in a liquid are in
continuous contact with neighboring molecules. Gases differ from solids in that
solids have a definite volume and definite shape, and the molecules in a solid
undergo no translational motion and are in continuous contact with neighboring
molecules. Of the three common phases of matter (solid, liquid, and gas), the gas
phase has the largest amount of kinetic energy and the greatest entropy. To
reach the gas phase, energy must be added to the molecules within a system that
is not already in the gas phase. It is essential to understand a gas from both the
macroscopic and microscopic perspectives.
Macroscopic View ofa Gas: A gas assumes the shape and volume of its container.
Gases are compressible and must be contained on all sides to hold them in place.
Gases are described by the macroscopic variables pressure, concentration,
temperature, and volume. Chemists treat gases as if they are composed of inert
spheres that occupyno molecular volume. This is a basicassumption of the ideal
gas law. Most calculations involving gases are based on the ideal gas equation
(PV = nRT). There are two common types of calculation questions about gases
that you may encounter on the MCAT 1) the before-and-after questions about the
effect of changes on a gas system and 2) the straightforward type using PV =
nRT. Calculation questions requiring you to find a precise value are few, but
conceptual relationships can be determined from calculations as well. The first

style of question is better understood as an application of one of the gas laws
(Avogadro's, Boyle's or Charles's laws). For instance, if the temperature increases
in a sealed, rigid container, what changes? This is another way of asking how a
change in temperature affects the pressure of a gas, assuming constant volume
and moles. Rather than memorize gas laws, know qualitativelyhow one variable
in the ideal gas equation affects another.
Microscopic View ofa Gas: Gases consist of individual molecules or atoms that are
randomlymoving about the space within a container. Theparticles are in contact
onlyduring collisions. Thisconcept is knownas the kinetic theory ofgases. Gases
can be described by the microscopic variables of collision frequency, mean free
path,and mean velocity. Thefact that microscopic behavior involves interactions
between gas particles implies that the molecules do in fact occupy a small
volume and they are capable of exhibiting intermolecular forces (bothattractive
and repulsive). The strength of these forces varies with distance. Gases exist as
real gases, which are approximated as obeying ideal behavior when they do not
interact. Ideal gas behavior is best simulated at low pressure (fewer collisions
between molecules and minimal forces between molecules) and high
temperature (at high temperature, molecules have the energy to overcome

intermolecular forces). Under these conditions, the forces acting between gas
molecules becomenegligible. This is the basis of the kinetic theory of gases.

The behavior of a gas is predictable in terms of the variables that describe the gas
system. We use the ideal gas law to predict the effectsof changes on gas systems.
Although there are no ideal gases, the approximation is still rather close.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review
Exclusive MCAT Preparation
Gener&l CtieilllStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Phase Definitions
The terms used to describe a gas can be broken down into categories of
macroscopic and microscopic. We can consider either the system as a whole
(macroscopic perspective), or the individual particles that constitute the system
(microscopic perspective). Each of the macroscopic properties has a microscopic
equivalent. Table 6.1 lists the macroscopic and corresponding microscopic
properties that describe the state of a gas system.
Macroscopic Measurements
Microscopic Measurements
Pressure (P; standard unit is arm.)
Collision frequency and collision force
Volume (V; standard unit is liters)
Mean free path
Moles (n; standard unit is moles)
Molecules
Temperature (T;standard unit is K)
Average kinetic energy
Table 6.1
It is imperative to have a well-developed glossary in your memory by the time

you take the MCAT. Organize the terms in a manner such that one definition
helps you to recall additional definitions. The definitions of selected terms from
Table 6.1 are:
Gas Pressure: Gas pressure is defined as the force per unit area exerted by a
gas through collisions against a defined area of the container wall. As the
gas molecules collide more frequently with the container walls or increase
their force during collisions with the walls, the gas pressure increases. The
gas pressure depends on the number of gas particles, the volume of the
container, and the temperature of the gas system. The standard unit for
pressure is atmospheres.
Collision Frequency: The collision frequency is defined as the rate at which
molecules in the gas system collide with each other and with the wall of the
container. The collision frequency can be increased in one of three ways:
increasing the temperature (energy of the gas system), increasing the
concentration of gas particles, or reducing the mean free path. All of these
changes result in an increase in the number of collisions experienced by a
molecule within the system in a given period of time.
Collision Force: The collision force is defined as the force exerted by a gas
particle during a collisionbetween it and the container wall. It is an impulse,
so both greater momentum and a shorter time of contact increase the force of
impact. The collision force can be increased by increasing the temperature
(energy of the gas system), because greater temperature imparts greater
velocity, and thus greater momentum, to each particle.
Volume: The volume of a gas is defined as the region within the walls of a
container. The actual volume that a gas molecule can occupy (the real
volume) is the volume of the container minus the volume of the other gas
molecules, because no two gas molecules can occupy the same volume at the
same time. The volume of a gas in an open environment is undefined,
because the container holding the gas is also undefined. The standard unit of
volume is liters.
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Concentration: The concentration of a gas is the number of gas particles per

unit volume in a container. A gas is assumed to be homogeneous, so a
sample from anywhere in the container may be used to determine the gas
concentration. As more molecules of gas are added to a system, or as the
volume of the container is decreased, the gas becomes more concentrated.
This means that as a gas is compressed, it becomesmore concentrated.
Mean Free Path: The mean free path is defined as the average distance a
particle can travel before colliding withanother particle. Although it isn't the
samething, it can be thought of as the average distance between gas particles
at any given time. It is the microscopic equivalent of concentration. If the
concentration of a gas remains constant, then the average distance between
any two particles within the container also remains constant.
Temperature: Temperature is a measure of the total kinetic energy of a
system. The greater the energy of each particle in thesystem, the greater the
total energy of the system, and thus the greater the temperature of the
system. Temperature can be measured in degrees Celsius or Kelvin,
although Kelvin is the better measurement to use whenworking with gases.
Average Kinetic Energy: The average kinetic energy of a system refers to the
meanenergy of a particle in that system. As theenergy ofeach particle in the
system increases, the average kinetic energy of the system increases, thereby
resulting in an increased temperature.
Example 6.1
Which statement below accurately describes the relationship between

temperature and energy?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Temperature quantifies the energy of a system.

Energyquantifies the temperature of a system.
Temperature is independent of energy.
Temperature is variable, while energy is constant.
Solution
Temperature is a measurement of the average kinetic energy of a system. The

best answer is choice A. A thermometer is used to determine the temperature of
a system. The way a thermometer works isbased on the kinetic theory ofgases.
The thermometer is an evacuated closed column that is partially filled with a
pure liquid, preferably oflow volatility (such asmercury). Gases collide with the
outside of the evacuated glass casing that contains the non-volatile liquid. The
energy from these collisions is transferred through the glass walls and into the
liquid. A sufficient number of collisions can increase the vibrational energy of
the liquid in the container and force the liquid to expand, thereby causing the
height of thecolumn ofliquid to rise. This implies that the density ofa liquid is
inversely proportional to its temperature, because as the temperature rises, the
volume of a liquid increases (the liquid is expanding). Because the density of
water does not change uniformly (it increases from 0C to 4C and then decreases
from 4C to 100C), it cannot be used in thermometers. In addition, the range of
temperatures over which water exists as a liquid is toosmall. The liquid chosen
to fill a thermometer must have a large temperature range between its freezing
point and boiling point. In most thermometers, the liquid used is mercury. In
other thermometers, a non-volatile alcohol tinted with a red dye is used.
Oeneral C^tieilllStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Kinetic Molecular Theory of Gases
The kinetic moleculartheory of gases takes a microscopic view of the component

molecules (or atoms) that make up a gas. Four assumptions associated with this
theory with which we shall concern ourselves are the following:
1. Particles are so small compared to the distances between particles (internuclear distances) that their volumes are negligible (assumed to be zero).
2. Particles move in straight lines. The direction of a particle's motion is
changed only by its collision with either another molecule or the walls of the
container. The collisions are said to be elastic (no energy is dissipated), and
momentum is conserved.
3. Particles are in constant random translational motion. Gas pressure is caused

by collisions of the particles against the walls of the container.
4. Gas molecules exhibit no intermolecular forces. This is to say that the

particles neither attract nor repel one another.
Figure 6-1 shows the random pathway of one single gas particle over time,
according to the rules of the kinetic molecular theory of gases. If the kinetic
energy of the particle increases, the particle's speed increases, so it collides more
frequently with the wall. Because it is moving faster, it collides with greater
momentum, so impulse increases. The result on the macroscopic level is that the
force per unit area exerted against the walls increase, meaning pressure is
greater. The kinetic theory of gases explains macroscopic observations using
principles derived from a microscopic model.
The particle moves until it collides with
the wall. In a real system, the particle

would also collide with other particles
present in the container.
Figure 6-1
When there are many gas particles in the container, collisions between particles
become more common than collisions with the wall. However, the presence of
more particles in the container also results in a greater number of collisions with
the walls, so the pressure of the system increases as particles are added to the
system. When there are particles of different masses in a mixed gas, heavier
particles move more slowly, hence they exhibit lower collision frequencies.
However, because they have a greater mass and only slightly reduced speed,
they collide with greater force (momentum).
As a general rule, lighter gas molecules have greater average speeds (and greater
collision frequencies) than heavier ones, but less momentum (and thus less
collision force). Because pressure depends on both collision frequency and

collision force, gas particles of different masses exert the same pressure. On the
macroscopic level, this means that pressure is the same under identical
conditions for all ideal gases, independent of their molecular mass. A good
example is to compare helium and nitrogen. The reason they have the same
pressure at the same temperature is because they have the same kinetic energy
(mv2 term). The molecule with greater mass has less speed. The average speed
is inversely proportional to the square root of the mass.
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Example 6.2
In a rigid, closed container, how does an increase in temperature affect the gas
particles in the system?
A. The mean free path increases.
B.
The collision force decreases.
C. The collision frequency increases.

D. The particle momentum decreases.
Solution
The fact that the container is rigid means that the volume does not change.
Because it is a closed system, the moles of gas do not change (matter can neither
enter nor exit a closed system). The concentration remains constant, so the mean
free path does not change. This eliminates choice A. The mean free path is the
average distance a particle travels between collisions. It canalso be thought of as
the average distance between particles at any given instant. Because the volume
of the container does not change, and the moles of gas do not change, the
concentration (density of gas) does not change. This means that the particles are
the same distance apart, so the mean free path does not change. According to the
equation PV = nRT, if the temperature of the system increases while volume and
moles remain constant, the pressure must increase. This means that collision
force, collision frequency, or both must have increased. As temperature
increases, the velocity of the particles increases (the kinetic energy increases in
terms of velocity). With an increase in velocity, the particles travel the distance
between collisions at a greater rate, so they collide more frequently. Because the
particles have greater velocity, they have greater momentum, so the collision
force increases. The result is that the collision force and collision frequency both
increase, so choice B is eliminated and choice C is the best answer. At greater
velocity, the particles have greater momentum, so choice D is eliminated.

Boltzmann's Distribution
In a gas system, not all particles have the same kinetic energy. There is instead a
random distribution of energies, known as Boltzmann's distribution. Figure 6-2
shows a Boltzmann's distribution of kinetic energy for the particles in a gas
system at two different temperatures (total energies). The mean kinetic energy
does notcorrespond to the apex of the curve, but to a point slightly to the rightof
the apex. This is because the energy distribution graph is skewed to the right.
As temperature increases, each particle gains kinetic energy, shifting the

distribution to the right. In Figure 6-2, T2 is greater than Ti.
Kinetic energy
Figure 6-2
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Ideal Gases
An ideal gas is a theoretical gas which obeys the following three conditions:
1.
The molecules exhibit no intermolecular forces.
2. The molecules occupy no microscopic volume (are point masses).

3. All collisions are perfectly elastic.
Because the constraints of the ideal gas cannot be met by real molecules, an ideal
gas is strictly theoretical. Gases are closest to ideal at high temperature (having
more kinetic energy to overcome intermolecular forces), low pressure
(interacting minimally with one another), and when the system is composed of
small, inert particles. The most ideal gas is helium (which has the smallest
particles of any substance known and which exhibits negligible intermolecular

forces). To verify these conditions, consider a phase diagram. When pressure is
small and temperature is large, the state of matter is gaseous, far from the other
phases in the phase diagram.
The ideal gas law was the result of empirical observations, such as noting that
the volume of a gas is inversely proportional to its pressure, volume is directly
proportional to temperature, and volume is directly proportional to moles. From
these relationships, Equation 6.1 (a composite formula) was derived.
V
oc
(6.1)
p
Equation 6.1 canbe converted into Equation 6.2 by introducing a constant.

V = k
(6.2)
Equation 6.2 can then be rearranged to yield: PV = k-n-T, which in essence is

Equation 6.3, where the constant is R (the ideal gas constant), rather than k (a
generic constant). Ideal gases obeyEquation 6.3, the ideal gas equation.
PV = nRT
(6.3)
where P is pressure, V is volume, n is moles, T is temperature, and R is the ideal

gas constant of 0.0821 Latm.-moleÎC1.
In the best ofall possible worlds, all gases would be ideal. But real gases make
up 100% of all gases, so there are no ideal gases. However, while there are no
ideal gases, we can make calculations for gases that are ideal and then adjust for
our errors. Theidealgas law produces answersclose enough to the exact values
for real gases that we can use it in everyday practice. Deviations from ideality
are approximated, and rough corrections are made to determine the conditions
for a real gas. For example, asvolume decreases, gases behave less ideally. This
is because the actual size of the molecules does not change, so the percent of the
volume occupied by the molecules increases. The molecules interact more and
are limited in the free space they can occupy.
Ideal gas problems are straightforward, plug-and-chug in their purest form.

Ideal gas questions also encompass the before-and-after case questions
associated with gas laws. As you approach these problems, isolate the value that
you are looking for and solve for it in terms of the other variables. Be sure to use
the correct units. It is easy to forget to use kelvins. What you must do is observe
what remains constant when you consider a system.
PV = nRT /. R =PV, soMi =Ml

nT
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review
niTi
n2T2
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Cancel out the terms that are constant, and isolate the variables. Three examples
of commonly used variations of the gas laws are:
IfPand Tconstant: Xl =Yl.

ni
n2
If n and T are constant: PiVi = P2V2.

V1
V?
If n and P constant: - = *-.
Ti
T2
Example 6.3
Given that the pressure of a twentiethof a mole of gas is 0.82 atm. at 27C, what
is its volume?
A. 1.50 liters
B.
1.72 liters
C.
22.4 liters
D. 50.0 liters
Solution
Isolating the volume term (V) in the ideal gas equation yields: V=^KI.
Substituting given values yields:
_0.05 moles x 0.0821 L-atav mole'1- K'1 x300 K _0.05 x0.0821 Lx300
0.82 atm.
0.82
V = 0.05 x 0.1 x300 L = 0.05 x 30 L = 0.5 x 3 L = 1.5 L.
The best answer choice is choice A.
Example 6.4
Ifa gas occupies 618 mL at STP, what isitsvolume at50.4C and1.22 atm?
A. 895 mL
B.
732 mL
C.
600 mL
D. 512 mL
Solution
At STP, the pressure is1.00 atm. and the temperature is 0C. This means that the
pressure increases from 1.00 atm. to 1.22 atm., and the temperature increases
from 273 K to 323.4 K. An increase in pressure reduces the volume of the gases.
An increase in temperature increases the volume. The change in pressure and

change in temperature have opposite effects on the volume in this question, so
the change in volume should be minimal. This makes choice C the most likely
answer. However, to be certain, we need to do the math.
Give:M
=SYlw/n.^,
=> ^Ti =^T2
niTi
T12T2
v-6KVi=(m^618mL=18mL
V2 * S2- x 618mL= 600 mL
55
The best answer choice is choice C.
vieiiercil VÛemiSLry
Gases and Gas Laws
Real Gases
There is no such thing as an ideal gas; all gases are real gases. An ideal gas is
said to have molecules that occupy no space and exert no force upon one
another. A real gas exhibits intermolecular forces (i.e., the molecules attract or
repeloneanother), has particles ofmicroscopic volume that transferenergyupon

collision. The degree to which a real gas deviates from ideal behavior has to do
with the magnitude of the intermolecular forces and the size of the particles. The
Dutch chemist J. D. van der Waals studied real gases and developed corrections
to the ideal gas law to explain real gas behavior. His name was given to the
weak intermolecular forces betweenparticles of a gas.
Deviations in pressure are due mainly to the intermolecular forces. For instance,
if the gas particles exhibit attractive forces, the system implodes to a small
degree. The result is that gas particles collide less frequently with the walls of
the container, so the observed pressure (P0bs) is less than ideal pressure. This
means that a correction term must be added to the observed pressure to make it
equal the ideal pressure. This is shown as Equation 6.4below:
Pideal = Pobserved + a^
(6.4)
V2
where a is an empirical value for each gas, n is the number of moles of gas, and V
is the volume of the container. It is easiest to think of a as being an attraction
coefficient. When theparticles repel, thevalue ofa is negative.
Example 6.5
Which of the following typesof gaseshas a negativea term?

A.
Polar
B. Non-polar
C. Hydrophobic
D. Ionized
Solution
The first step is to determine whatthis question seeks. It is asking fora negative
a term, which is associated withparticles in the gas phase that repeloneanother.
The question can bereworded toread, "In whattype ofgas do theparticles repel
oneanother?" Choices Band C are the same answer worded differently, so both
should be eliminated. Polar particles have attractive forces, so choice A is
eliminated. An ionized gas is generated when an electron is removed from the
valence shell ofthegas atom or molecule. The particles of an ionized gascarry a

positive charge, so they repel one another. This makes choice D the best answer.
Deviations in volume are due to the fact the molecules have volume. Because
they have volume on the microscopic level, the actualfree space (space not
occupiedby molecules) is less than the volume of the container. The bigger the
molecules, the greater the volume they occupy, thus the greater the deviation.
The more molecules, the greater the volume they occupy, thus the greater the
deviation. The free space (ideal volume) is found by taking thecontainer volume
and subtracting the volume of the molecules. This means that the ideal volume
(volume of empty space) is equal to the difference between the volume of the
container and the volume of the particles. This is shown as Equation 6.5below.
videal = Vcontainer - nb
(6.5)
where bis an empirical valueforeachgas and n is the number of moles of gas.
Copyright by TheBerkeley Review
10
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
The greater the number of gas particles, the more volume the molecules occupy.
This accounts for the n in the equation. Think of b as being a bigness coefficient
(despite therebeingno such word as "bigness"). Allparticles havesomevolume,
so b values are always positive.
Example 6.6
Which of the following gases has the greatest b term?

A. Methane
B.
Ethane
C.
Ethene
D. Ethyne
Solution
The first step is to determine what the question is asking for. It is asking for the
largest bterm, which is associated with the largest molecule. Methane has only
one carbon, so choice A is eliminated. Choice C is eliminated, because ethene
(C2H4) is in the middle of a sequence that starts with ethane (C2H6) and ends
with ethyne (C2H2). The largest molecule can never be in the middle of a
sequence like this. Because ethane has the most hydrogen atoms and has sp3
hybridization, it is the largest molecule ofthe choices. Choice Bisthe best.

Combining the deviation in pressure and the deviation in volume leads to the
real gas equation, also known as the van der Waals equation. The van derWaals
equation, Equation 6.6, isderived bysubstituting the corrected terms for pressure
and volume into the ideal gas equation.
(Pobserved +a^)(VContainer "nb) =nRT
(6.6)
The valueof the a term can be either positive or negative, because intermolecular
forces are both attractive and repulsive. If themolecules attract oneanother, the
pressure is reduced from ideal behavior, so a correction term must be added to

Pobserved- This means that the sign ofa must be positive for attraction. The b
term is always positive, because molecules have positive volume. Understand
the deviation and be able to predict its effect on a real gas. Attractive forces, for
instance, make the volumeof a real gas lessthan the volume of an idealgas.
Example 6.7
What are the a and b terms for an ideal gas?
A.
B.
C.
D.
a
a
a
a
=
=
=
=
l;b =
l;b =
0;b =
0;b =
l
-l
l
0
Solution
When both a and b are zero, both of the correction terms in Equation 6.6 are zero,
and thus drop out. This leaves us with PV = nRT, the ideal gas equation,
indicating that choice D is the best answer. An ideal gas has no intermolecular
forces, so the attraction coefficient is zero (thea value is zero.) Theparticles of an
ideal gas occupy no microscopic volume, so the bigness coefficient is zero (the b
value is zero.) This confirms that choice D is the best answer.
11
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Example 6.8
For an inert real gas, if you were to reduce the pressure to half of its original
value, then what is the final volume (Vf) relative to the initial volume (Vj)?
A. I Vj- a littlebit
2
B. lVi+ a little bit

2
C. 2 Vj- a little bit

D. 2 Vi + a little bit
Solution
When pressure is cut in half, the ideal gas law predicts that volume should
double. Because only the space between molecules increases, while the
molecules remain the same size, the increase in volume is not as large as
predicted by the ideal gas law. This makes choice C, 2Vj - a little bit, the best
answer. The "little bit" term is attributed to the sizeof the molecules. Figure 6-3
shows this.
Pressure is
Pressure is
doubled
reduced by half
Volume = 1.55 L
Volume = 3.0 L
Volume = 5.9 L
Empty space 1.45 L
Empty space 2.9 L
Empty space 5.8 L
Molecules 0.1 L
Molecules 0.1 L
Molecules 0.1 L
Figure 6-3
Assume we have a 3.0 L container filled with a gas. Also assume that if the
particles of the gas werecompacted together, then their volume would be 0.10 L.
When the dimensions ofthe container change, only theempty space changes, not
the actual size (volume) ofthe molecules. When the container expands, the size
of the molecules will still be 0.1 L. This means that when the pressure is cut in
half, the volume doesn't quite double, but is 2Vj - a little bit. The value for our
hypothetical system is 5.9 L. If the pressure were doubled, the volume wouldn't
be reduced by exactly one-half, either. The new volume would be 2-V; + a little
2
bit, as shown in Figure 6-3. The best answer is choice C.
Figure 6-3 shows thatthemicroscopic volume of the molecules does not change.
The size ofanatom can change only when its radius is increased (by exciting its
electrons to occupy a higher energy orbital with a greater radius). Note also in
our example that when the pressure was increased (doubled), the volume
decreased, but not all the way down to one-halfof its original value. When the
pressure was reduced by one-half, the volume increased, but not all the way up
to double the original value. It may be easier to remember that the change is
never as large as you think it is (i.e., what it is predicted to be according to the
ideal gas law) when dealing with a real gas. Corrections to the ideal gas law
should be intuitivefor the most part.
12
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Laws
Gas Laws
Applying Gas Laws
There are three common gas laws to know: Avogadro's law, Boyle's law, and
Charles's law-the A, B, and C laws of gases. They all stem from the ideal gas
law. It is possible to deduce them by solving for R in the equation PV = nRT,
canceling out any terms that remain constant, and equating the values for before
and after the change in the system. If you find yourself getting confused about
which gas law refers to what, try creating a simple story about how each scientist
might have made his discovery: Avogadro was into counting big numbers, so
his law focuses on the number of molecules. Therefore, Avogadro's law deals
with the relationship between molesof gas and volume. Big Boy Boyle sat on his
lunch and smashed it (decreased the volume of his sandwich), by increasing the
pressure on it. Therefore, Boyle's law deals with the relationship between
pressure and volume. Good ol' Chuck overheated his popcorn and it scattered
all over (increased its volume). Therefore, Charles's law deals with the
relationship between temperature and volume. These descriptions may seem
juvenile, but if they help you recall the gas laws by name, then they are worth it.
For solving any gas questions, it is critical that you use temperature in terms of
kelvins; otherwise, you will encounter much sadness and dismay.
As mentioned earlier, all of the gas laws, in conjunction with the ideal gas law,
lead to the following relationship:
PlVl -P2V2
niTi
n2T2
This relationship is the foundation in physics for theoperation ofany system that
generates air flow, whether it is a human lung or a mechanical ventilator. One
type of ventilator is an accordion-like apparatus used to maintain uniform

respiration (circulation of air) through the lung of patients during their recovery
from many kinds of medical problems that affect breathing, such as a collapsed
lung.
Thefour steps in the normal cycle of a human lung are shownin Figure 6-4.
Step 1: The diaphragm contracts and the thoracic cavity expands,

increasing the volume of the lung.
vlung T/ plung J- so that Paternal <Pexternal

Step2: Air flows into the lung through the trachea.
"air T, Flung Tuntil Pinternal =Pexternal

Step3: The diaphragm relaxes and the thoracic cavity contracts,
decreasing the volume of the lung.
Vlung ^ Plung Tso tnat Pinternal >Pexternal

Step 4: Air flows out from the lung through the trachea.
nair ^/ Plung ^ until Pinternal =Pexternal

Figure 6-4
The workings of a ventilator are similar to these steps, but it hasone-way valves.
Air flows in both direction through the trachea, but ventilators typically have
inlet and outlet tubes. (A ventilator is discussed in one of the passages in the
gases section of your in-class generalchemistry booklet.)
13
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Laws
Avogadro's Law
According to Avogadro's law,the empirical relationship between the volume of a

gas system and moles of the gaswithinthe system, is that as the moles of the gas
increase, the volume of the gas increases, if the temperature and the pressure
remain constant. This really is just a common-sense observation. For instance, if
you add more gas to a balloon, the balloon gets larger. You prove Avogadro's
law every time you blow up a balloon. Figure 6-5 depicts this phenomenon in a
schematic fashion.
Initial
After first
addition
After second
conditions
1.00 moles
1.33 moles
1.67 moles
V = 22.41 L
V = 29.88 L
V = 37.35 L
addition
Figure 6-5
Example 6.9
When 0.15 moles of helium gas are added to a piston containing 0.82 moles of
another gas, by what percent does the total volume increase?
A.
6.4%
B.
14.4%
C.
18.3%
D. 25.0%
Solution
Moles of gas are beingadded to a closed system that can expand, so the moles
increase, and theinitial internal pressure equals the final internal pressure. This
means that the addition of moles of gas increases the volume, making
Avogadro's law applicable. The conclusion of Avogadro's law is that V = k-n.
The conditions areisothermal andisobaric, so thefollowing relationship applies:
Xl =Y2
ni
n2
In this question, themoles increase from ni = 0.82 to n2 = 0.97. Thequestion asks

for the percent increase in volume, which is equal to the percent increase in
moles. The math is shown below:
Xl=Y2....Y2=n2:=>V2
ni n2 "Vi ni Vi
0.97 son2 _ 097
0.82
ni
0.82
0.97 - 0.97 + 0.194 - 1.164 1.18

0.82
0.82 + 0.164
0.984
Or to approximate the answer:
&7_ > L15 = n5f so increase >150/, ,97 < L00 _ L25, soincrease <25%
.82
1.00
.82
0.80
The increase is between 15% and 25%, so the best answer is choice C.
14
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gas Laws
Gases and Gas Laws
Boyle's Law
Boyle's law applies under isothermalconditions in a closed container. According

to Boyle's law, when the external pressure is increased on a gas within a flexible
container, the volume decreases in a manner that is inversely proportional to the
pressure increase. That is, volumeand pressureare inversely proportional to one

another. This is true for ideal and real gases, although real gases show some
deviation as the conditions become more extreme. Once the volume stops
changing, the internal pressure again equals the external pressure. The overall
result is that as the volume of the container decreases, the pressure of the gas
within the container increases. Boyle demonstrated the relationship between gas
volume and gas pressure with an experiment that varied the volume of a gas in a
closed, glass tube. He poured mercury into the open end of a J-shaped tube, as
shown in Figure 6-6. As more liquid is added in, the height of the column of
mercury rose, so that it exerted a greater pressure on the gasin the closed end of
the tube, causing the gas to compress. Boyle observed that it became more
difficult to compress the gas as its volume continued to decrease. Thisis because
the repulsion between molecules increases as they are packed more closely.
Figure 6-6shows three stages of the experiment.
Initialsystem
After first addition
Aftersecondaddition
Patm + P8h"
Patm + P8h'
gas
atm
Figure 6-6
Step 1: Initially, just enough of the mercury is added to isolate the two sides of
the J-shaped tube. Mercury is ideal for this purpose, because gases are
generally insoluble in Hg. Initially: Pgas = Patm
Step 2: Additional mercury is poured into the J-shaped tube. The mercury
distributes itself unequally due to gas pressure now being greater than
atmospheric pressure. After first addition: Pgas' =Patm + Pgh'
Step 3: More mercury is added to theJ-shaped tube. The difference between gas
pressure and atmospheric pressure is even more significant, h is larger.
After second addition: Pgas" = Patm + Pgh"
If a hole were poked in the glass at the apex of the closed-end side of the tube
following the last addition, gas would escape from the hole, because the internal
pressure exceeds the external pressure. The mercury would flow from the side
with higher mercury to the side with less mercury, until both sides of the tube
were level. This would result in the equilibrating of gas pressures.
15
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Laws
An experiment you can conduct to demonstrate Boyle's law for yourself is to

observe gas bubbles as theyrise through water. At lowerdepths, water pressure
on the bubble is greater due to the force exerted by the water above. As a bubble
ascends, the external pressure acting on it is reduced (because the total volume of
water aboveit is steadilydecreasing), and consequently the bubble expands as it
rises. Consider a 1.00-liter air-filled rubber ball that is submerged below the
surface of a lake to a depth of thirty feet. At thirty feet, the pressure due to the
column of wateris approximately one atmosphere. With each subsequent drop

of thirty feet, the total pressure on the ball increases by one atmosphere. Table
6.2 shows the relationship betweenvolume, depth, and pressure.
Volume (liters)
Depth (feet)
Pressure (atm)
1.00
at surface
1.00
2.00
0.50
-30
0.33
-60
3.00
0.25
-90
4.00
Table 6.2
Notice that the pressure changes by uniform increments, while the volume does
not. This means that the volume change varies with pressure. It can be
concluded that a gas becomes less compressible as the pressure increases. This
means that a gas expands most when it is at low pressure. Scuba divers, for
instance, are at greatest risk for developing air embolisms during ascent, as they
near the surface. During their entire ascent, this is where the volume of gas
undergoes the greatest change with changing pressure. Figure 6-7 is a graph
relating pressure and volume at constant temperature, for two distinct
temperatures. The graph shows two asymptotic curves.
Both curves are isothermal, but
T2 is greater than Tv The result

is that P2V2 is greater than PjVj.
Pressure (atm.)
Figure 6-7
16
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Laws
Example 6.10
If the pressure of a gas in a 1.250-L container is initially 0.872 arm., what is the
pressure if the volume of the container is increased to 1.500 L, assuming
temperature does not change?
A.
0.667 atm.
B.
0.726 atm.
C.
1.046 atm.
D. 1.333 atm.
Solution
The conclusion one draws from Boyle's experiment is that PV = k. This means
that if the system remains closed and isothermal (constant temperature), then
PiVi =P2V2. It is given in thequestion that Pi is0.872 arm., Vi is1.250 L, andV2
is 1.500 L. The answer is found as follows:
PlVl-F*V2.-.Fi=ML=Pl-Pi(jl)
Because the volume increases, the pressure must decrease. This eliminates
choices C and D. The initial pressure (Pi) must be multiplied by a factor less
than 1.0 to obtain final pressure (P2). Some calculation is necessary to decide
between choices A and B.
p _(0.872)(1.25) _(0.872)(5) _ (0.9)(5) =Q15(5) = Q?5

2
1.50
Thevalueis just lessthan 0.75, so the best answer is choice B.

Example 6.11
The volume of a ballast bulb at sea level is 1.00 liters. If you dive 66 feet below
the surface with the bulb, and the temperature of the water surrounding you
does not change, what is the new volume of the bulb? (For every 33 feet you
descend, water pressure increases by 1.00 atmospheres).
A. 3.00 liters
2.00 liters
B.
C.
0.50 liters
D. 0.33 liters
Solution
At sea level, air pressure onthe bulb is1.00 atm. At 66 feet below the surface, the
pressure is 3.00 arm., which includes 2.00 atm. for the column of water directly
above the bulb and 1.00 atm. for the column of air directly above the water.
Because the pressure has tripled, the volume must decrease by a factor of three.
This means that the final volume is 0.33 liters, choice D.
17
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Laws
Charles's Law
Charles's law states that if the temperature of a gas is increased at constant

pressure (isobaric conditions) and constant moles (closed system), then its
volume increases proportionally.
This means that volume is directly
proportional to temperature. Just as with Boyle's law, Charles's law is true for
both ideal and real gases. The deviation from ideal behavior is more substantial
as the volume of the gas decreases, because the molecules interact to a greater
extent at short distances. Charles's law can be demonstrated rather easily by
carrying out an experiment with a piston holding a known quantity of gas. A
piston is chosen because the volume change is predictable and easily measured.
With a piston, volume changes in only one dimension. Demonstrating Charles's
law using a balloon has its problems, because the volume ofa balloon changes in
all directions, making the change in volume difficult to measure. Also, a balloon
has a different restoring force at different volumes. If the volume of the balloon
system were to be measured using displacement ofa liquid into which it is fully
submerged, the pressure on theballoon would vary.
According toCharles's law, the relationship between volume and temperature is

that as the temperature of the gas increases, the volume of the gas increases, if
the system remains closed and the pressure remains constant. Figure 6-8
illustrates the system experiment that demonstrates Charles's law.
After temperature increase y
Applied heat
After expansion
Initial h: 6.00 cm
Initial V: 6nr2
New h: 6.50 cm (not 12!)

New V: 6.5rcr2
Initial T: 25C
NewT:50C(=323K)
Figure 6-8
Itis critical that you consider the temperature in kelvins when applying Charles's
law. The applied heat can be from many different sources. Typical sources
include a heating coil (thermal energy generated by resistance of electrical flow
through a wire), a Bunsen burner (thermal energy generated by combustion),

and IR radiation (thermal energy generated by the release ofan IR photon upon
relaxation). In the example in Figure 6-8, the new volume is found by
multiplying the initial volume times the ratio of the new temperature (323) to the
initial temperature (298). The factor is roughly 325 divided by 300, which is
equal to 13 divided by 12. If the temperature of the gas in the piston were
lowered to0C, then the new height ofthe piston would be 5.50 cm. Figure 6-9
shows the graph of volume as a function of temperature over a range of
temperatures thatspans the three common phases ofmatter. The graph ceases to
be linear at lower temperatures, because the gas undergoes a phase change to

become a liquid, and the liquid becomes a solid. As Figure 6-9 indicates,
expansion ofa gas is more significant than expansion ofeither a liquid or a solid.
When heated by small increments, liquids and solids expand only slightly.
18
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gas Laws
Gases and Gas Laws
Temperature (K)
Figure 6-9
Example 6.12
If thevolume of a pistonfilled with an inertgasis 4.31 Lat 25*C, thenwhat is the

new volume occupied by the gas, after it is heated to 50C, assuming the system
experiences no net change in pressure?
A.
3.98 L
B.
4.31 L
4.67 L
D. 8.62 L
Solution
The conclusion of Charles's law is that V = k-T. This means that if the system
remains closed and isobaric (constant pressure), then T2V1 = T1V2 It is given in
the question, thatVi is4.31 L, Ti is298 K, and T2 is323 K. The answer is found
as follows:
Yi=Y2 ,%V2 =YjJi^W2=wJjz\

Ti T2
Ti
\Ti/
Because the temperature increases, the volume must increase. This eliminates
choices A and B. The initial volume (Vi) must be multiplied by a factor greater
than 1.0 to obtain final volume (V2). Math is necessary to decide between choices
CandD.
=(323K)(4.31L) =323^ 31
298 K
298
g 325^ 31 L) = 13(4 31 L)
300
12
8.62 L > 12. (4.31 L) > 4.31 L

12
The final volumeis greater than 4.31 L,but far lessthan 8.62 L,so the best answer
ischoice C. Forgetting to convert degrees Celsius into kelvins would erroneously
lead you to select choice D.
19
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws

Partial Pressure
A gas system can be composed of one pure gas or it can be composed of a

mixture of gases. Within a mixture of gases, each component gas can be treated
separately from other components. The particles can migrate to any position
within the system, so each component gas occupies the same volume. But they
are independent particles. The notion ofpartial pressure stems from the concept
that you may treat different components of a gaseous mixture independently.
Partial pressure is the independent pressure exerted by a gas within a mixture.
For instance, each gas in an equal molar mixture of three gases has a partial
pressure due to collisions of that component against the walls of the container.
In that case, the partial pressure of any component equals one-third that of the
total pressure of the system. Consider the systemin Figure 6-10, where the three
components are theoretical gases X,Y, and Z.
o
O
Q
Q
>
Q GasY
(3
O GasX
GasZ
Figure 6-10
The idea that the mixture is a composition of the individual gases leads to the
idea that the total number of moles of gas in a mixture is the sum of the
individual moles ofeach separate gas. This isshown in Equation 6.7.
ntotal = I ni = na + nb + nc + ...
(6.7)
(where i refers to eachcomponentgas within the

mixture, and a, b, and c are arbitrary components)
The gases are in the same container, so they are at the same temperature and in
the same volume. Because each gas is only a fraction of the total moles, it must
also bea fraction ofthe total pressure. The total pressure ofgas is the sumofall
the individual partial pressures of each gas. Equation 6.8 shows this relationship,
which is similar to the relationship for moles.
Ptotal = lPi = Pa + Pb + Pc +
(6.8)
Equation 6.8 can beused tofind the total pressure ofa mixture ofgases from the
partialpressures ofitsconstituents. Example 6.13 illustrates how this is done.
Example 6.13
What is the total pressure ofa mixture created by adding 0.15 moles He(g) to a
5.0-L flask that contains 570 torr of N2(g) and 0.20 atm. Ar(g) at 100C?
A.
1.10 atm.
B.
1.33 atm.
C.
1.61 atm.
D. 1.93 atm.
20
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Solution
First off, everything must be converted to the same units. The units in the
answer choices are atm; so we should convert everything to atm. 570 torr cleanly
converts to 0.75 atm; so there are 0.75 atm. N2(g). To get the pressure of He(g),
you must employ the formula PV = nRT.
PHp -5*1 - (0-15)(0.082)(400) g(15)(0.082)(4) = nxQM =^ ^

V
5.00
The totalpressure is: Ptotal = PHe + PAr + Pn2 = -98 + -20 + -75 = L93 atmThe best answer is choice D.
To determine the partialpressure of a component in themixture, you must know

the mole percentage of thegas in thevessel (referred toas the molefraction). The
partial pressure ofa component is directly proportional toitsmole fraction. This

relationship is shownin Figure 6-11, for the three gases in Figure 6-10.
nx
Px
ntotal
ny _ py
Ptotal
ntotal
Ptotal
nz Pz
ntotal
Ptotal
Figure 6-11
Given that the pressure fraction of a component in the system equals its mole
fraction, the partial pressure ofone component can bedetermined from knowing
itsmole fraction and the total pressure of thesystem. Equation 6.9 below is used
to calculate the partial pressure from the total pressure.
l
Ptotal
L_ ... ^ =JH-Ptotal =Xi Ptotal

ntotal
(6-9)
ntotal
Pi is the partial pressure of an arbitrary component i, nj is the moles of an

arbitrary component i, and Xj is the mole fraction ofthatcomponent.
Equation 6.9 is used to obtain a partial pressure from the total pressure. Example
6.14 illustrates how this is done.
Example 6.14
What is the partial pressure due tonitrogen ina balloon atSTP that contains 1.00
moles helium, 1.25moles nitrogen, and 1.75moles argon?
A.
125 torr
B.
238 torr
C.
267 torr
D. 500 torr
Solution
Use Equation 6.9 tosolve this problem, because the partial pressure ofnitrogen is
found bymultiplying themole fraction ofnitrogen bythe total pressure. AtSTP,
the total pressure of the system is 760 torr. The number of total moles ofgasin
the system is 1.00 + 1.25 + 1.75, which is 4.00. The mole fraction due to nitrogen
is1.25 divided by4, which is31.25 %. One-fourth of760 is190 torr, sothe partial
pressure due to nitrogen isgreater than 190. This eliminates choice A. One-third
of760 is 253.3 torr, so the partial pressure due tonitrogen is less than 253.3. This
eliminates choices C and D. The correct answer is choice B. If you want to
confirm thisby math, 31.25% of 760 = 76 + 76 + 76 + 7.6 + 1.9 = 237.5 torr.

21
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Manometers
Because a gas hasnodefinite shape andno definite volume, it assumes theshape

and volume of the container in which it is present. As the dimensions of the
container are altered, so are the properties of the gas. A gasmaybe compressed
or expanded by moving the walls of the container. Likewise, the walls of the
container can be moved by adding or removing gas (think of blowing up a

balloon). If the container is not flexible, then the pressureincreases or decreases.
Gas pressure is measured in units called torrs (named after Evangelista
Torricelli). A column of mercury is used to measure gas pressure, because
mercury has a high density andit doesn't compress easily. This means that only
a significant change in gas pressure on a column of mercury produces a
noticeable and measurable difference in the height of the column.
Figure 6-12 shows measurements of gas pressure using a manometer. In each
case, atmospheric pressure is compared to the pressure within a column. In
systems I and II, the column is evacuated, so the initial pressure inside the
column before mercury is added toeither system is zero. Atmospheric pressure

forces the mercury up into the evacuated column.
Because there is less
atmospheric pressure in the mountains than at sea level, the mercury does not
rise ashigh in column II as it does in column I. In each case, themercury in the
tube remains ata fixed point once the force of gravity cancels the force exerted by
the atmospheric pressure. Insystem III, the column isopen tothe atmosphere, so
the pressure in the column equals the pressureexerted on the base.
System I
System II
Column evacuated
Base at sea level
Column evacuated
Base in mountains
System III
Column open to air
Base is anywhere
760 mm
520 mm
tt
Atmosphere atsea level

Atmosphere inmountains Tube open toatmosphere
^column - 0 * Patmosphere - 760 Pcoiumn - 0 .*. Patmosphere =520
column *atmosphere
Figure 6-12
Systems I and II of Figure 6-12 show the pressure difference between a closed
system in the column and the atmosphere. Manometers may also be used where
the two sides of a mercury-filled U-tube are connected to two different closed
containers. When both columns of the manometer are exposed to different
pressures, there is a height difference between the twocolumns of mercury.
22
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Figure 6-13 shows a manometer under different conditions with respect to

system pressure. One end of the manometer is connected to a closed system.
The other end is open to the atmosphere. The pressure difference between the
gas in the system and the atmosphere can be measured. Knowing the
atmospheric pressure allows us to determine the pressure of the system.

"atmospher
system
^system ~" "atmosphere
Fsystem < âtmosphere
Fsystem > *atmosphere

Figure 6-13
The difference in heights between the two columns can be used to measure the
difference in pressures, if the columns have an equal bore size (internal radius).
The correlation between column height and pressure can be derived from the
equilibrium relationship between gravitational force and the force exerted on the
mercury by the pressure difference. The force pulling the mercury down is
gravity (F =mg). The force pushing the mercury up is the pressure of the gas
multiplied by the cross sectional area of the mercury (F =PA). As long as the
mercury remains stationary, then the two forces are equal, meanmg that PA mg The mass of the mercury in the column is the density of the mercury (p)
multiplied by the volume of the mercury (V). Thus, column pressure is
determined byEquation 6.10, derived asfollows:
Fup
up =Fdown => PA = mg =PVg .-. P =pgf =Pgh
(6.10)
AP= pgAh
The pressure difference between any connected columns can be determined

using Equation 6.10, where Ah is the difference in height between the columns,
and AP is the difference inpressure between the columns. For instance, if the gas
pressure is known for one of two columns (we usually know that an open
column has atmospheric pressure exerted on it), then the pressure of the second
column can be determined by adding the difference in pressure between the two
columns to the known pressure (atmospheric pressure in this case.) This is a
common lab practice for gas phase reactions and reactions that require an inert
environment (such as nitrogen gas or argon gas). Manometers are an easy way
to monitor the pressure of a system.
23
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
In Figure 6-14 below, the application of Equation 6.10 to a manometersystem is

demonstrated.
P1>P2
AP = P
Ah =h2-hj
AP= pgAh
>Ah
Figure 6-14
The pressure applied to the left side of the manometer (Pi) is greater than the
pressure appliedto the rightside ofthe manometer (P2), forcing the liquid to rise
higher in the column on the right. The difference in pressure between the two
sides of the manometer is proportional to the difference in the heights of the
liquid in each column. When the liquid is mercury, each mm difference is
referred to as a torr. Mercury is chosen, because it is the densest liquid, so gas
does not readily diffuse through mercury. A closed system connected to a
mercury manometer remains a closed system.
Example 6.15
What is the pressure in atmospheres of a column of gas in a closed tube above

mercury if the height difference at sea level between a connected column of
mercury open to the atmosphere and the closed column above mercury is 317
mm?
ABc
D.
317/760atm443/760atm760/443atm317/443atm.
Solution
The height difference of 317 mm means that the pressure difference is 317 torr.
The atmospheric pressure at sea level is 760 torr, so the gas pressure in the
column is443 torr(760 - 317). The conversion from torrto atm. involves dividing
by a factor of 760 torr per atm. This makes choice B the correct answer. As the
question is worded, the pressure difference is provided, but the relative
pressures is not mentioned. The pressure could also be 1077 torr (760 + 317), but
this value is not listed as an answer choice.
Copyright by The BerkeleyReview
24
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Motion
Gas Speed and Velocity
The velocity of a particle is dependent on both its mass and the temperature. The
rate at which a gas particle travels is directly proportional to the square root of
the temperature and inversely proportional to the square root of its mass. By
equating theequations for kinetic energy ofa gas to one another (1-mv2 to RT),
it is possible to determine the root mean square velocity of a monatomic gas, both
in an absolute manner and relative to another gas. The derivation of Equation
6.11, used to calculated the root mean square speed of a particle, is shown below:
Kinetic energy = i-mv2and also = 2.RT .*. i-mv2 = 2-RT

03
Because 1-mv2 = 2-RT, v2 = 2EZ, So |irms2 =^2
2m
Mrms = V 2BT, where firms isthe root mean square speed

V
Huns =VîF
V
(6-11}
Example 6.16
What is the root mean square speed of neon atoms at 27C?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.3 m/s
211 m/s
612 m/s
1018 m/s
Solution
This question requires the use of Equation 6.11. Because scientists employ the
MKS system, the mass must be in terms of kilograms, and the temperature must
be in units of kelvins. The mass of neon is 0.020 kg and the temperature is 300 K.
The solution is as follows:
^ms =JW: =J3(8.314)(300) = /(8.314)(9 x102) _ /|x9 x1Q4

^rms
Vm
V 0.020
y
2xl0"2
V 2
/8x_9x xtf =y36 x 1Q4 = 6x 102 = 600m
Thespeed of neon at 27C is slightly more than 600 meters per second,so the best
answer is choice C.
It is also possible to determine the relative velocities of two gases using the
energy relationship. The velocity of a particle is inversely proportional to the
square root of its mass, so the lighter the gas, the faster it travels at a given
temperature. This leads to Graham's law for gas flow, which is listed below as
Equation 6.12
X2_ =./mf
vi
Copyright byTheBerkeley Review
(6#12)
V m?
25
General Chemistry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Motion
It is also possible to determine the relative speeds for particles of the same gas at
two different temperatures. The speed of a particle is directly proportional to the
square root of the temperature, so the greater the temperature, the faster a gas
travels. This is summarized in Equation 6.13
^=.f^
vi
V Ti
(6.13)
Example 6.17
What is the speed of a gas particle at 125C,if it has a speed of 100 m/s at 25C?
A.
B.
C.
D.
500 m/s
223 m/s
133 m/s
114 m/s
Solution
The speed is greater at higher temperatures. This doesn't help, because all of the
answer choices are greater than 100 m/s. To determine the exact value, the
temperature must be converted to kelvins. The temperature increase is from 298
to 398, which means the temperature is 1.33 times greater. Because it is a square
root function, the speed increases by a factor ofVl.33, which when multiplied by
100 m/s yields a value less than 133m/s. Only choice D is possible.
Diffusion
With diffusion, gas particles exhibit net flow from a region of higher
concentration to a region of lower concentration until the concentration is
essentially uniform throughout the container. A gas can diffuse as quickly as the
gas travels. This means that lighter gases diffuse faster than heavier gases.
Diffusion involves flow in all directions, until the pathway is impeded by a
barrier. Unlike effusion and infusion, it involves no pores through which gases
pass. Diffusion describes the dispersion of a particular gas through a container
and is concentration-dependent, proceeding most rapidly when the mean free
path is larger and the average kinetic energy is greater.
Example 6.18
Which of the following gases stinks up a room the fastest, if they are all released
simultaneously?
A.
B.
C.
D.
SO3
C2H6S
C4H10S
H5C6NCS
Solution
Stinking up the room the fastest results from having the greatest rate of diffusion.
The rate of diffusion depends on the speed of each gas. They are all under same
conditions of temperature, mean free path, and volume, so the only factor
affecting their speeds that differs between the answer choices is their molecular
mass. The lightest gas has the greatest velocity, and thus stinks up the room
fastest. The lightest gas is C2H6S,choice B.
26
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Gases and Gas Laws
Gas Motion
Effusion and Infusion
Effusion is the process of gas escaping from the region within a container to the
environment outside of the container through pores (often microscopic pores) in
the container's walls. The faster the molecules move, the more often they collide
with the walls, and thus the more often they can pass through the pores. The
more concentrated the species, the more frequently they interact with the pores,
and thus the faster they effuse. The pore size has some effect on the effusion rate
of a contained gas, when it is about the same size as the diameter of the gas
molecule. The relative effusion rates of two or more gases can be determined by
comparing the relative concentrations and speeds of the molecules.
Infusion is the reverse of effusion and involves a gas entering a container through
the pores of its walls. The faster the molecules move, the more often the
molecules pass through the pores and thus the faster the molecules enter. The
same rules that apply to effusion are also valid for infusion.
Example 6.19
If the rate of effusion for nitrogen gas is initially 17.5 mL/min, what is the initial
rate of effusion for carbon dioxide under identical conditions?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.0 mL/min
16.0 mL/min
19.4 mL/min
21.9 mL/min
Solution
The relative effusion rates for the two gases are equal to the relative average
speeds for the two gases. Nitrogen is lighter than carbon dioxide, so it has a
greater average speed and thus rate of effusion, resulting in an effusion rate for
CO2 less than 17.5 mL/min. This eliminates choices C and D. The effusion rates
for the two gases are compared in the following way:
wo,..
Effusion Rate carbon Dioxide
V3RT/
/i"N2 _VmcQ2 _iJ4 =Y07T 125
J 3RT/
VmN2
V28
V
'mc02
The rate of effusion for N2 is 1.25 times greater than the rate of effusion for CO2.
This means that the rate of effusion for CO2 is 0.80 times the rate of effusion for
N2, which is (0.80)(17.5) = 14.0 mL/min, making choice A the best answer.
Effusion and infusion are defined in terms of direction rather than concentration,
but the rates of both effusion and infusion are affected by concentration.
Effusion and infusion can occur with or against a concentration gradient. When
effusion rate exceeds infusion rate, there is a net flow of gas out of a system.
When infusion rate exceeds effusion rate, there is a net flow into the system.
The gas flow speed affects the rate at which particles migrate through their
container. Migration is a general term for motion in any direction, which takes
into account diffusion, effusion, and infusion. Diffusion, effusion, and infusion
exhibit similar trends. The rate of diffusion, effusion, or infusion for any gas is
directly proportional to its average speed, which is inversely proportional to the
square root of its mass. We assume that the pore size of a gas container has an
equal (often minimal) effect on the effusion rate or infusion rate for a gas.
27
General Chemistry
Gas Motion
Gases and Gas Laws
Isotopic Enrichment
Isotopic enrichment is a process by which isotopes are distributed in a non

uniform manner. Relative effusion rates can be exploited to separate isotopes
from one another. Because the rate of effusion for a gas varies with its atomic
mass, the different masses associated with different isotopes allow for isotopes to
be separated after migration through several pores. A typical example involves

enrichment of deuterium from hydrogen, as shown in Figure 6-15.
Gas mixture i1
Gas mixture
1| added
= H2
* #
o #wo
==^2
evacuated out.
|=Eo0 o
^ 2
O == HD
%...v
o
o S o0#
o .
o pi O
Figure 6-15
The lightest molecule is H2, so it travels the fastest. It is in highest concentration
in cells to the right. The heaviest molecule is D2, so it travels the slowest. It is in
lowest concentration in cells to the right. To obtain an enriched sample of

deuterium, the last gas to escape from the tube is collected. Figure 6-16 shows
the distribution of speeds for a hydrogen-deuterium mixture that has equal mole
fractions of H2, HD, and D2.
Speed
Figure 6-16
"Chemistry teaches you to handle pressure!"
28
The Berkeley Review
Gases
Passages
13 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested schedule:
I:
After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, III, IV, & VII
Grade passages immediately after completion and log your mistakes.
II:
Following Task I: Passages II, V, VI, & IX, (29 questions in 37 minutes)
Time yourself accurately, grade your answers, and review mistakes.
Ill:
Review: Passages VIII, X - XIII and Questions 94 - 100

Focus on reviewing the concepts. Do not worry about timing.
Berkeley
R-E-V-I-E-W
eG ases
;.!
I.
II.
S^^
(1 -6)
Real Gas Data
(7 - 14)
Kinetic Theory of Gases
III.
Submerged Ball Experiment
(15-22)
IV.
Charles's Law
(23 - 28)
Boyle's Law
(29 - 35)
Lung Function
(36 - 43)
Isotopic Enrichment of Uranium
(44 - 50)
Air Bag
(51 -57)
IX.
Effusion Spheres Experiment
(58 - 63)
X.
Closed-System Reactions
(64 - 70)
Weather-Sampling Balloon
(71 -78)
Real Gas Equation
(79 - 86)
Buoyancy and Effusion
(87 - 93)
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
Questions Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
Gases Scoring Scale

Raw Score
MCAT Score
84 - 100
13- 15
66-83
10- 12
47 -65
7 -9
34-46
4-6
1 -33
1 -3
(94 - 100)
Passage I (Question 1 - 6)
Which of the following does NOT account for

deviations from ideal behavior in a real gas?
The behavior of an ideal gas obeys the law PV = nRT,

where P is pressure, V is volume, n is the moles, and T is
the temperature (in kelvins). The equation only approximates
the behavior of real gases, but well enough to predict
relationships between real gases. A researcher chooses three
gases to study the effect of varying pressure on gas behavior,
A. A real gas is composed of molecules that have a

measurable volume.
B. There are attractive forces between molecules.
C. There are repulsive forces between molecules.

D. Gases are not uniform, so the pressure against the
walls of the container does not accurately reflect the
pressure of the system.
specifically the relationship between PV and P. Figure 1

shows the results obtained in the experiment.
22.5-
What is true about the interactions between gas

molecules at higher pressures?
22.4-
A. The interactions are reduced, because the molecules
|
>
collide less frequently.

B. The interactions are reduced, because the molecules
22. y
collide more frequently.

C. The interactions are increased, because the
molecules collide less frequently.
22.2-1
0.40
0.20
0.60
0.80
D. The interactions are increased, because the
1.00
molecules collide more frequently.
Pressure (atm)
H2(g)
* 02(g)
C02(g)
Which of these experimental gases shows no change in

behavior as pressure is increased across an extreme
Figure 1
range?
The data show slight deviations from ideal gas behavior

at relatively standard pressures. Deviations are attributed to
both attractive and repulsive forces in the gas phase. Table 1
lists PV vs. P for helium gas, oxygen gas, and carbon
dioxide gas, respectively, obtained in a second experiment.
Pressure
PHeVHe
Po2Vo2
D. Both oxygen and carbon dioxide
Pco2vco2
1.00
22.44
22.39
22.26
25.0
22.89
21.70
8.76
50.0
23.40
20.97
10.11
100.0
24.32
20.07
11.25
200.0
26.36
20.13
13.58
400.0
30.27
23.01
18.23
Table
A. Helium only
B. Oxygen only
C. Both oxygen and helium
How does the molar volume of ammonia gas compare

to that of an ideal gas?
A. It is larger than ideal, due to attractiveforces.

B. It is larger than ideal, due to repulsive forces.
C. It is smaller than ideal, due to attractive forces.
D. It is smaller than ideal, due to repulsive forces.
What is the expected molar volume of carbon dioxide

Deviations from ideal behavior are compounded under
gas at 75 atm.?
extreme conditions, but near standard conditions, the molar
A. 0.097 liters
volume for almost any gas is approximately 22.41 liters.
B. 0.142 liters
Table 2 lists the molar volume of some common gases at

STP (1.00 atm and 273.15 K).
Gas
C. 10.63 liters
D. 11.22 liters
Molar Volume (L)
Ar
22.395
co2
H2
22.261
22.435
He
22.436
N2
22.404
NH3
22.081
o2
22.396
Under which of the following conditions does a real gas

behave MOST like an ideal gas?
A. High temperature and high pressure

B. High temperature and low pressure
C. Low temperature and high pressure
D. Low temperature and low pressure
Table 2
31
GO ON TO THE NEXT PAGE
9.
Passage II (Questions 7-14)
As temperature of a gas system in a closed flask

decreases from 20C to 10C, the average speed of the
component gas molecules:
The kinetic molecular theory of gases is employed to
explain the behavior of an ideal gas. It is, in essence, the

theoretical perspective of an ideal gas on the microscopic
level. The postulatesof the kinetic moleculartheory of gases
as theyrelate to the particlesof an ideal gas are as follows:
1. The particles are so small, compared to the distances
A. increases slightly.
B. remains the same.
C. decreases slightly.
D. decreases substantially.
between them, that the volume of the individual
particles can be assumed to be negligible.

2.
The particles are in constant random motion. The

collisions of the particles with the walls of the
container are responsible for the pressure exerted by
10. What is observed over time if a mixture of H2 and D2,
initially at 50% by moles H2, undergoes effusion

through a small pore in the container?
the gas.
A.
B.
C.
D.
3. The particles are assumed to exert no force upon

each other; they are assumed neither to attract nor
repel one another.
4.
The average kinetic energy of the particles is

assumed to be directly proportional to the
temperature of the gas in units of kelvins.
The kinetic theory of gases serves to explain temperature

and pressure on the microscopic level. While it does not hold
true for real gases, it is a good model for an ideal gas. Real
gases exert force upon one another, and their particles have a
Ph2decreases;Xdjdecreases.
Ph2 increases; Xdj decreases.
Pd2 decreases; Xrj^ increases.
Pd2 increases; Xr>2 increases.
11. Which of the following gases has the GREATEST

momentum, if they are all under identical conditions of
temperature and pressure?
finite volume.
A. Helium
As the properties of an ideal gas change, the particles are

assumed to remain uniform. For instance, the average kinetic
energy of a gas increases as it is heated, but the size of each
atom remains the same and the bonds remain in place. This
is to say that the particles are not altered by physical changes.
B. Neon
7.
C. Nitrogen
D. Sulfur dioxide
For a closed system in a 1.00-L sealed piston, what is

observed when the temperature of the system increases?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12. Which of the following graphs best describes the
collision frequency as the number of particles in a sealed

glass container increases?
The number of molecules of gas increases.

The average kinetic energy remains constant.
The mean free path increases.
The average molecular momentum remains
A.
B.
constant.
8.
For an inert gas system in a sealed rigid glass container,

what occurs when the average kinetic energy of
molecules increases?
Number of particles
Number of particles
Number of particles
Number of particles
C.
A. Collision frequency increases, while collision force

decreases.
B. Collision force increases, while collision frequency

decreases.
C. Both mean free path and collision force increase.

D. Both collision frequency and collision force
increase.
32
13. Which of the following is an expected behavior of a

gas, accordingto the kinetic moleculartheory of gases?
Passage III (Questions 15-22)

A researcher sets up a salt water tank (see Figure 1,
below) with a depth of fifty feet to study Boyle's Law. An
air-filled rubber ball is fitted with a thin metal ring around its
circumference, positioned slightly on the lower side of the
ball. The ball is placed in the tank of salt water, which is
maintained at 25C. At the base of the tank is an adjustable
magnetic field that is used to submerge the ball to selected
depths. The displacement of the water in the tank is
A. The gas has an infinitely high boiling point.

B. Molecular gases show different behavior than
atomic gases.
C. The average velocity of a particle doubles when
temperature doubles.
D. The pressure exerted by a gas is independent of the
shape of its container.
measured to determine the volume of the ball.
14. A gas differs from a liquid in all of the following ways

EXCEPT:
A. a liquid has a definite volume while a gas does not.

B. particles in a liquid are always in contact with one
another, while particles in a gas are never in contact
with one another.
C. a gas is more compressible than a liquid.

D. an object is more buoyant in a gas than a liquid.
Figure 1
Floating on the surface, the ball is 50% submerged

before the magnetic field is applied. The initial volume of
the ball is 36.00 liters, but as it descends towards the bottom
of the tank, its volume gradually decreases. The volume of

the elastic ball is measured at the several depths. Table 1
lists the values for the ball's changing gas volume.
Depth (ft)
Pressure (atm)
Volume (L)
1.16
31.14
10
1.31
27.41
15
1.47
24.43
20
1.63
22.07
25
1.78
20.21
30
1.94
18.54
35
2.09
17.20
40
2.25
16.02
45
2.41
14.97
50
2.56
14.11
Table
Note: A pressure of 1.00 atm. is required to raise a

column of pure water 32.6 ft.
15. The greatest change in volume is experienced by the

ball during which segment of the descent?
A. From 0 to 7 feet below the surface
B. From 7 to 14 feet below the surface
C. From 14 to 21 feet below the surface

D. From 21 to 28 feet below the surface
33
16. At what depth will the ball neither rise nor sink if the
magnetic field is turned off?
2 0. What has no direct effect on the volume of the ball?
A.
B.
C.
D.
A. Between 0 and 10 feet below the surface
B. Between 10 and 20 feet below the surface
C. Between 20 and 30 feet below the surface
The external pressure

The moles of gas in the ball
The temperature of the water
The magnetic field strength
D. Between 30 and 40 feet below the surface
17. If fresh water were used rather than salt water, how
21. If more salt were added to the water in the tank in
would the results be affected?
Figure 1, what would be observed?
A. The change in volume of the ball would be greater

when submerged in salt water than fresh water,
A. The ball would rise, and a stronger magnetic, B,

field would be required to submerge the ball below
because salt water is less dense than fresh water.
the surface.
B. The change in volume of the ball would be less

B. The ball would rise, and a weaker magnetic, B, field

would be required to submerge the ball below the
because salt water is less dense than fresh water.
surface.
C. The change in volume of the ball would be greater

C. The ball would sink, and a stronger magnetic, B,

because salt water is denser than fresh water.
the surface.
D. The change in volume of the ball would be less

D. The ball would sink, and a weaker magnetic, B,

because salt water is denser than fresh water.
the surface.
18. For a ball that is filled with an ideal gas and immersed
in fresh water, and that is initially 25% submerged
before the magnetic field is applied, at what depth will
the ball no longer be buoyant?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22. The compressibility of a gas is GREATEST when:

A. the moles are high and the volume is low.
B. the moles are high and the volume is high.
C. the moles are low and the volume is high.
At depths between 0 and 32 feet below the surface

At depths greater than 96 feet below the surface
D. the moles are low and the volume is low.
19. For a ball that is initially 60% submerged, what is

observed when compared to the ball in Figure 1, under
the same experimental conditions?
A. The depth at which the density of the ball equals

the density of surrounding water is below -32 feet,
because the ball is less dense than the original ball
in the experiment.
B. The depth at which the density of the ball equals
the density of surrounding water is above -32 feet,
because the ball is less dense than the original ball
in the experiment.
C. The depth at which the density of the ball equals

the density of surrounding water is below -32 feet,
because the ball is denser than the original ball in

the experiment.
D. The depth at which the density of the ball equals

the density of surrounding water is above -32 feet,
because the ball is denser than the original ball in
the experiment.
34
Passage IV (Questions 23 - 28)
25. As you drive, what happens to the pressure in your car

tire?
Charles's law states that when the temperature of a gas

within a closed system is increased, the volume of the gas
increases proportionally, if the moles of gas and pressure
A. It decreases, because your tire cools down and

pressure decreases with decreasing temperature.
B. It increases, because your tire cools down and

pressure increases with decreasing temperature.
remain constant. To demonstrate this law, a student sets out
to observe the change in volume of a gas within a cylinder.

The cylinder contains a heating coil that can be set by
adjusting the voltage. As the voltage is increased, the current
through the wire increases, causing more heat to be released
from the coil. The change in volume of the piston is
measured by the change in its height. Table 1 shows the data
collected by the student for an unknown gas.
Temp
Height
Volume
150.0rc cm3
155.37C cm3
160.671 cm3
165.97C cm3
171.2jc cm3
176.571 cm3
181.87ccm3
187.17C cm3
192.47C cm3
197.771 cm3
203.Otc cm3
208.37C cm3
10C
6.00 cm
20C
6.21 cm
30C
6.42 cm
40C
6.64 cm
50C
6.85 cm
60C
7.06 cm
70C
7.27 cm
80C
7.48 cm
90C
7.70 cm
100'C
7.91 cm
110'C
8.12 cm
120C
8.33 cm
C. It decreases, because your tire heats up and pressure

decreases with increasing temperature.
D. It increases, because your tire heats up and pressure
increases with increasing temperature.
2 6. Charles's law states which of the following?
A. At constant volume, as the pressure of a gas

increases, the temperature decreases.
B. At constant volume, as the temperature of a gas
increases, the pressure increases.
C. At constant temperature, as the pressure of a gas
increases, the volume decreases.
D. At constant pressure, as the temperature of a gas

increases, the volume increases.
27. How can it be explained that the volume of the particles
Table 1
in the experiment at -15C is a value less than 20 cm3?
The data from the experiment show little deviation from

idealbehavior. Equation 1 below representsCharles'slaw:
A. Ideal behavior applies only to gases between 0C

and 100'C.
Vjnitial - Vfinal
înitial Tfjnai
B. The gas condenses into a liquid at a temperature

slightly greater than -15C.
C. The gas condenses into a liquid at a temperature
slightly less than -15C.
Equation 1
The volume can be expressed in any metric units, but the

temperature must be measured in kelvins.
D. When the temperature of a gas is very low, its

molecules get small enough to effuse out of the
23. What is the volume of the unknown gas at 150C?
container.
A. 219.97tcm3
B. 222.071 cm3
C. 224.27C cm3
D. 227.67ccm3
28. In a system of three gas components (water, oxygen,
and nitrogen), where water has a partial pressure of 22.1

torr and the percentage of oxygen gas is 20.9%, what is
the partial pressure due to the third component
(nitrogen), if the total pressure is 762 torr?
24. What is the volume of a heated gas in a closed, flexible

bulb at 27C, if it had an initial volume of 7.0 liters at
A. 159.3 torr
7C, and if the heating of the gas was carried out under
B. 444.4 torr
isobaric conditions.
C. 580.6 torr
A. 6.53 liters
D. 719.0 torr
B. 7.20 liters
C. 7.50 liters
D. 27.0 liters
35
In a second experiment, the researcher adds 1.000grams

of pure oxygengas to a cylinderthat can expand. The system
is a closed system and the temperature is held constant by
submerging the unit into a oil bath. Changes in the volume
of the cylinder are determined by observing the level of a
plunger connected to the top wall of the cylinder. The
volume of the cylinder is proportional to its height, so the
Passage V (Questions 29 - 35)

Boyle's law is based on the observation of a closed
gaseous system at constant temperature. The conclusion is
that when the system is closed so that moles of gas are held
constant, the pressure varies inversely with the volume, if the
temperature remains constant. Boyle'slaw is stated below:
As thepressure exerted on a gas in a closed system is
volume can be determined from the height of the plunger
according toV= 7tr2h.
increased, the volume of the system decreases in a linear

fashion, if the temperature and moles of gas are held
Table 1 shows the data collected at -78C, 0C, and
constant.
59C. Figure 2 is a graphical representation of the data listed
Summary: P T : V 1 with nc and Tc
in Table 1.
To prove this to be true, a researcher directs a constant

stream of argon gas into a bent glass tube sealed at one end.
The argon stream displaces the air in the tube, because argon
is heavier than air. The system remains relatively pure in
argon even though the tube is open at the other end to the air.
The researcher then pours enough mercury into the tube
barely to fill the bend in the tube. Once the mercury reaches
a level where the gas in the left side of the tube is isolated,
the height of the gas is measured to be 10 cm in the left side
P(atm)
V(L)
of the tube. The researcher next adds enough mercury to the

open end of the tube to create a difference of 76 cm between
the heights of the columns on the left and right side (this is
the first addition of mercury to the tube). The height of the
gas in the left side is then measured to be 5 cm. Mercury is
again added to the right side, so that the difference in heights
is now 152 cm. The height of the gas in the left side of the
tube is found to be 3.3 cm. The three stages are drawn in
Figure 1 below:
59C
0 C
-78C
P(atm)
V(L)
P (atm)
V(L)
0.25
2.029
0.25
2.841
0.25
3.455
0.50
1.014
0.50
1.420
0.50
1.727
0.75
0.6788
0.75
0.9466
0.75
1.139
0.8628
1.00
0.5068
1.00
0.7095
1.00
2.00
0.2532
2.00
0.3545
2.00
0.4311
3.00
0.1685
3.00
0.2359
3.00
0.2869
4.00
0.1264
4.00
0.1769
4.00
0.2151
5.00
0.1010
5.00
0.1414
5.00
0.1720
Table 1
3.0
V \
, \T = 59C
T=-78*C*
vi
^T =0C
2.0
B
152 cm
1.0
1
0.0
190
380
76.0 cm
I
5.0 cm [I
\.
10.0 cm
U~ T
TOT
Initial
Following
first addition
570
760
Pressure (torr)
I
3-3cmjl
Figure 2
29. According to the graph in Figure 2, what can be said
fU 1
about the volume of 1.000 gram of oxygen gas at room

temperature and 0.50 atm. of pressure?
Following
second addition
A. The volume is less than 1.01 liters.
B. The volume is greater than 1.01 liters, but less

than 1.42 liters.
Figure 1
C. The volume is greater than 1.42 liters, but less

Every 760 mm of height in a mercury column exerts a
gravitational force that when applied over a unit area equals
1.00 atm of pressure. This is independent of the radius of the
column. If a less dense liquid is used, a greater height in the
column is required to exert 1.00 atm of pressure.
than 1.71 liters.
D. The volume is greater than 1.71 liters.
36
3 3. What would the volume of 2.000 grams of oxygen gas

be at 0C, if the pressure were 1.00 atmosphere?
30. What would be observed if a liquid less dense than

mercury were used in the J-tube in the first experiment?
A. The argon gas in the left side of the tube would
compress less, and thus the height of the column of
gas would be greater than what was observed with
mercury in the manometer.
B. The argon gas in the left side of the tube would
compress more, and thus the height of the column
of gas would be less than what was observed with
mercury in the manometer.
A. 0.71 liters
B.
1.00 liters
C. 1.42 liters
D. 2.84 liters
C. The argon gas in the left side of the tube would

compress the same amount as with mercury, and
thus the height of the column of gas would be the
same as what was observed with mercury in the
34. If the temperature of a gas enclosed in a flexible

container were increased from 25 C to 50C while the
pressure on the system were increased from 0.5 atm. to

1.0 arm., then what would happen to the volume of the
system?
manometer.
D. The argon gas in the left side of the tube would

compress more, and thus the height of the column
of gas would be greater than what was observed
A. The volume would increase, because the effect of
increasing pressure is greater than the effect of

increasing temperature in this example.
with mercury in the manometer.
B. The volume would increase, because the effect of
increasing temperature is greater than the effect of

increasing pressure in this example.
C. The volume would decrease, because the effect of
31. If a gas made up of molecules rather than atoms were

substituted for argon gas in the first experiment, what
should be observed for the heights of the gas in the left
increasing pressure is greater than the effect of

increasingtemperature in this example.
D. The volume would decrease, because the effect of
side of the tube in each of the trials?
increasing temperature is greater than the effectof
A. 100 mm, 53 mm, 35 mm
increasing pressure in this example.
B. 100 mm, 53 mm, 31 mm

C. 100 mm, 47 mm, 35 mm
D. 100 mm, 47 mm, 31 mm
3 5. Whenmercuryis added to a J-tube containingargon gas

in uniform 100.0-mL increments, the change in volume
decreases with each subsequent addition. How is this
32. According to the findings of the first experiment, one

atmosphere of pressure when applied to an open column
of mercury would raise the height of the mercury in the
best explained?
A. The argon gas becomes more dense with each

addition of mercury, so the particles becomeharder
column by what amount?
to compress.
B. The argon gas becomes less dense with each

addition of mercury, so the particles become harder
Apply
Apply
Pressure
Pressure
to compress.
C. The mercury becomes more dense with each

addition, so the pressure exerted by mercury
increases with each addition.
D. The mercury becomes less densewitheach addition,

so the pressure exerted by mercury increases with
each addition.
A. 5 centimeters
B.
10 centimeters
C. 76 centimeters
D. 152 centimeters
37
Passage VI (Questions 36 - 43)
38. At a low altitude with a low ambient temperature, what

is true of atmospheric air?
The circulation of vital gases through the body starts in

the lung, where large volumes of gas are exchanged between
the body and the atmosphere. The volume of the lung can be
A. It has a lower partial pressure of 02(g), but the

same mole fraction of 02(g) as normal air.
B. It has a higher partial pressure of 02(g), but the
same mole fraction of 02(g) as normal air.
broken down into four distinct volumes and dead space.

There is the tidal volume, which is the volume of gas
inspired or expired in a normal breath.
C. It has both a lower partial pressure and lower mole

fraction of 02(g) as normal air.
D. It has both a higher partial pressure and higher
There is the
inspiratory reserve volume, which is the volume that can be

inspired beyond the tidal volume, invoked during periods of
exercise and strained breathing. There is the expiratory
mole fraction of 02(g) as normal air.
reserve volume, which is the volume of air that can be
expired after the expiration of the tidal volume. There is the

3 9. What is observed during normal expiration?
residual volume, which is the volume of gas that remains in

the lungs after maximal expiration. Finally, there is dead
space. There is the physiological dead space, which is the
volume of the lung that does not eliminate carbon dioxide,
and there is anatomic dead space, which is the volume of the
conducting airways (about 150 mL in the average adult).
I. Total lung volume is less than tidal volume,

n.
IE. Moles of oxygen exceed moles of carbon dioxide.

A.
B.
C.
D.
The breathing cycle is regulated by changes in the

internal pressure of the lung. Operation of the lung can be
explained by the ideal gas law. The pressure change is caused
by expansion and relaxation of the thoracic cavity. At rest,
alveolar pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure. As defined
in physiology, this is zero pressure. The interpleural
pressure is negative, due to the tendency for the lung to
collapse and chest cavity to expand. The onset of normal
A.
B.
C.
D.
contracts, the abdominal contents are forced downward, and
the thorax expands. This increases the volume of the lung,

making the alveolar pressure negative (sub-atmospheric).
Expiration is normally a passive process, resulting from
the relaxation of inspiratory muscles back to rest. The lung
and chest system is elastic, so after active inspiration, where
it is expanded from its resting state, the system relaxes back
to its resting state. This decreases lung volume, making the
alveolar pressure positive (super-atmospheric). Air flows out
of the lung as a result of this pressure difference. The
amount of gas exchanged in one cycle of normal breathing is
the tidal volume. As some of the definitions imply, there is
also facilitated breathing, where inspiration is greater than
normal and expiration is an active process.
It increases by 33%.
It increases by 25%.
It decreases by 25%.
It decreases by 33%.
41. What is NOT true as the diaphragm contracts?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Internal pressure is less than external pressure.

Partial pressure of carbon dioxide decreases.
Lung volume is less than it is at rest.
Air temperature in the lungs remains relatively
constant.
42. Why do scuba divers experience different breathing

patterns underwater than on land?
A.
B.
C.
D.
36. Inspiration into the lung is BEST explained by:

A. Archimedes'principle.
B. Bernoulli's principle.
C. Boyle's law.
D. Charles's law.
Air is more concentrated, so they breathe more O2.

Air underwater behaves more like an ideal gas.
Air viscosity is greatly reduced underwater.
Air in the anatomic dead space has a reduced partial
pressure of CO2 underwater.
4 3. The air flow associated with the lung moves:
3 7. What is true during expiration?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Lung pressure is less than atmospheric pressure.

Lung pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure.
The thoracic cavity is contracted more than normal.
Lung volume is at its smallest point.
I only
II only
I and H only
II and m only
4 0. For lungs with a tidal volume of 400 mL and a total

volume following normal expiration of 1200 mL, how
does internal pressure change to cause inspiration?
inspiration is a result of contraction of the inspiratory

muscles, in particular the diaphragm. When the diaphragm
A.
B.
C.
D.
Internal pressure exceeds external pressure.
38
at a decreasing rate during a normal breath.

at an increasing rate during a normal breath.
at a constant rate during a normal breath.
in a sinusoidal fashion during a normal breath.
Passage VII (Questions 44 - 50)
46. Assuming
that
the
molecular
diameters
Nuclear reactors requiring uranium use the isotope 235U

as fuel. Naturally occurring uranium is only 0.72% 235U,
with the majority of the uranium being the 238U isotope.
A. S02
B. S03
For a reactor to run efficiently, the uranium should be at least
3% 235U. To enrich the sample with 235U, the uranium is
C. PF3
converted to the hexafluoro species (UFg), a white solid at

room temperature. The uranium hexafluoride compound is
heated to its sublimation point, and the gas is allowed to
D. Xe
47. All of the following affect the effusion rate of a gas
effuse through tiny pores between a series of connected

containers. With each effusion, the vapor becomes enriched
EXCEPT:
with the 235U species, because the lightercompound effuses

faster, according to Graham's law. The relative rates of
A. the size of the molecule relative to the pore.
B. the temperature of the gas.
235UF6 and 238UF6 aredetermined as follows:
C. the presenceof isotopes in the compounds.

D. the concentration of the species outside of the
!^f6 B /5lJi =JHT=VT00858 =1.004

V238UF6
V mass235UF6
are
insignificant, which of the following compounds would

effuse roughly twice as fast as UF6?
V349
container.
Figure 1
48. What is the mass percent of uranium-235 in235UF6?
Because the average speed of the U-235 species is 0.4%

greater than the U-238 species, the effusion rateof the U-235
species is 0.4% faster. This is assuming that the diameters
of the 235UF6 and238UF6 molecules are equivalent, which is
validbecause the only difference between the two isotopesof
A. Less than 50%
B. Between 50% and 60%

C. Between 60% and 70%
D. Greater than 70%
uranium is three neutrons. Only charged particles affect the

radius of an atom. By carrying out successive effusions, the
uranium can be enriched up to the necessary 3%. Once this
is complete, the UF$ is converted back to uranium metal.
49. Had chlorine been used instead of fluorine to form
UC16, what differences would have been observed?

4 4. What effect would the diameter of the molecule of a gas
A. The difference in effusion rates for the two uranium
have on its effusion rate?
A. The greater the diameter, the slower the effusion
isotopes would be greater than 0.4%, so fewer

filtering chambers (pores) would be needed to enrich
rate, because the molecule is hindered when passing

through the pore.
the sample.
B. The difference in effusion rates for the two uranium
B. The greater the diameter, the slower the effusion
isotopes would be less than 0.4%, so fewer

rate, because the molecule collides with the pore
C. The greater the diameter, the faster the effusion rate,
the sample.
C. The difference in effusion rates for the two uranium
because the molecule is hindered when passing

through the pore.
isotopes would be greater than 0.4%, so more

D. The greaterthe diameter, the faster the effusion rate,
the sample.
D. The difference in effusion rates for the two uranium
more often.
because the molecule collides with the pore more
isotopes would be less than 0.4%, so more filtering

chambers (pores) would be needed to enrich the
often.
sample.
4 5. What can be said about the reactivity of fluorine gas

(F2) with U-235 and U-238?
A. Fluorine gas reacts more readily with U-238,
50. Which of the following pairsof gas molecules would be
because it is heavier.
the MOST difficult to separate using the successive
B. Fluorine gas reacts more readily with U-235,
effusion technique?
because it is lighter.
A. 02andN2
B. H2andNe
C. Fluorine gas reacts with U-235 and U-238 equally,

because the extra neutrons do not significantly
affect the chemical reactivity.
C. C02andS02
D. COandC2H4
D. Fluorine gas reacts with U-235 and U-238 equally,

because the extra protons do not significantly affect
the chemical reactivity.
39
Passage VIII (Questions 51 - 57)
5 3. An air safety bag fills at a rate of 100 moles/sec. After

10 milliseconds, what is the volume of the gas in the
bag at 31eC? (At 31C, gas is 25 L/mole)
Air safety bags are standard features on new cars. These

bags function through rapid gas generation. Because they are
safety features, air bags must use a non-toxic gas that does
not oxidize readily. Nitrogen gas is ideal because of its inert
chemical behavior. The Reaction 1 is employed by airbags
to produce nitrogen gas (N2) rapidly.
2NaN3(s)
A. 2.5 liters
B. 22.4 liters
C. 25 liters
D. 250 liters
2Na(l) + 3 N2(g)
Reaction
Sodium azide decomposes quickly to fill a 60.0 liter air

bag in approximately 20 milliseconds. To proceed at this
54. If the average speed of a gas at 25C is exactly 100.0

m/sec, then at 125C the approximate average speed
would be which of the following values?
rate, the reaction must be run at 350C. To maintain this
temperature, Reaction 2 is employed.

6 Na(l) + Fe203(s)
Reaction
A. 115 m/sec
3 Na20(s) + 2 Fe(s)
B.
C. 224 m/sec
Once the air bag is filled, it must deflate rapidly. To

accommodate this, there are small pores in the material to
allow the gas to effuse out. If the bag remained inflated,
visionwould be hindered. The rate of effusiondepends on the
average speed of the molecules. The root mean square speed,
Mrms> of a gas is calculated using Equation 1.
Mrms
-V
133 m/sec
D. 500 m/sec
55. If an air bag were filled with argon gas, helium gas, and
nitrogen gas, which of the following relationships
accurately describes the relative rates of effusion for each
gas from the air bag?
3kT
m
Equation 1
A. He > N2 > Ar
where k is Boltzmann's constant, T is for temperature

(measured in kelvins), and m is for mass (measured in kg).
B. N2>He>Ar
C. He>Ar>N2
D. Ar>N2>He
51. What can be said about the thermodynamics of Reaction

1 and Reaction 2?
A. Entropy increases in Reaction 1; Reaction 2 is
56. In a mixture of 50 grams nitrogen gas with 50 grams

carbon dioxide at STP, the partial pressure attributed to
carbon dioxide would be which of the following values?
endothermic.
B. Entropy increases in Reaction 1; Reaction 2 is

exothermic.
A. 50torr
C. Entropy decreases in Reaction 1; Reaction 2 is
B. 296 torr
endothermic.
C. 380 torr
D. Entropy decreases in Reaction 1; Reaction 2 is

exothermic.
D. 464 torr
5 7. What can be said about the average speed of neon gas at

25C compared to argon gas at 25C?
52. As the nitrogen gas cools from 350C to room

temperature:
(Ne has mass = 20 g/mole)
A . its pressure increases, and the kinetic energy of the

gas increases.
(Ar has mass = 40 g/mole)
A.
B.
C.
D.
B. its pressure increases, and the kinetic energy of the

gas decreases.
C. its pressure decreases, and the kinetic energy of the

gas increases.
Ne gas is twice as fast as Ar gas.

Ne gas is 1.4 times as fast as Ar gas.
Ar gas is 1.4 times as fast as Ne gas.
Ar gas is twice as fast as Ne gas.
D. its pressure decreases, and the kinetic energy of the

gas decreases.
40
Passage IX (Questions 58 - 63)
5 9. What occurs in Region II, once the gas exchange valve

is opened?
A. Helium partial pressure grows rapidly, reaching the
greatest partial pressure once at equilibrium.
B. Helium partial pressure grows rapidly, reaching the
smallest partial pressure once at equilibrium.
Effusion is defined as the flow of a gas from the inside of

a container to the outside of a container through a pore in the
wall of the container. The size of the pore can range from
microscopic (barely greater then the diameter of the gas

particles) to macroscopic (as is the case with a valve). The
rate at which a gas effuses depends on the velocity of the gas,
the total area of the pores relative to the surface area of the
C. Argon partial pressure grows slowly, but reaches

the same partial pressure as helium once at
equilibrium.
container, and the concentration of the gas in the container.
D. Argon partial pressure grows rapidly, but reaches

the same partial pressure as helium once at
A researcher sets out to study effusion using inert gases,

so that intermolecular forces are minimal. The apparatus
equilibrium.
used is two unequal spheres connected by a tube with a

porous valve. The left sphere (Region I) has a radius, t\,
while the right sphere (Region II) has a radius, r2. Region II
is triple the volume of Region I, as shown in Figure 1.
60. Which of the following statements must be TRUE with

regard to the system shown in Figure 1?
I. The final pressure in Region II is three times as
great as in Region I.
II. At equilibrium, the mole fraction of helium is the

same in Region I as the mole fraction of argon in
Region II.
IE. Increasing the temperature would increase the rate

of effusion and increase the equilibrium partial
pressures, but it would not change the mole

fractions at equilibrium.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Ilonly
in only
I and II only
II and HI only
Figure 1
61. All of the following can increase the effusion rate
Region I is initially charged with equal moles of helium,

nitrogen, and argon, at 25*C. Region II is evacuated. The
exchange valve is set to allow gas exchange. The vessels are
made of a polymer thatis essentially pore-free for thelifetime
of the experiment. Figure 2 shows the pressure of each gas
EXCEPT:
A.
B.
C.
D.
in Region I over time.
opening the valve to a greater area.

increasingthe temperatureof the system.
increasing the volume of the system.
increasing the partial pressureof a component.
6 2. How would hydrogen compare to thegases inFigure 2?

A. It would have the steepest drop initially, reaching
equilibrium before the other gases.
B. It would have the flattest drop initially, reaching
equilibrium after the other gases.
C. It would be identical to the graph for helium.
D. It would be between the graphs for nitrogen and
argon.
Time (seconds)
6 3. How does the rate of diffusion change with time?
Figure 2
58.
A. It decreases for helium and increases for argon.

B. It increases for helium and decreases for argon.
What is true once equilibrium has been established?
C. It decreases for all three gases.

D. It increases for all three gases.
A. The mole fraction of helium is lowest in Region I.
B. The mole fraction of argon is greatest in Region II.

C. The moles of nitrogen are greatest in Region I.
D. The moles of helium are greatest in Region II.
41
Passage X (Questions 64 - 70)
65. As the bore radius of both tubes in a manometer is
reduced, how is height of the fluid in the column in the

atmospheric side affected?
A researcher carries out a series of reactions under
standard conditions, in a round- bottom flask connected to a

manometer.
A. If the radius decreases by half, the height increases

by a factor of four.
B. If the radius decreases by half, the height increases
by a factor of two.
C. If the radius decreases by half, the height does not
change.
The line from the flask to the manometer is
fitted with a valve that opens to the environment. The

following four reactions take place in the reaction vessel:
HI(g) + Ba(N03)2(aq) - Bal2(s) + HN03(aq)
Reaction
D. If the radius decreases by half, the height decreases
KHC03(aq) + HCl(aq) -> KCl(aq) + H2OO)+C02(g)
by a factor of four.
Reaction 2
AgN03(aq) + NaCl(aq) - NaN03(aq) + AgCl(s)

Reaction 3
Cl2(aq) + Zn(s) - ZnCl2(aq)
66. For a reaction that results in only a small change in

volume, what type of tube in the atmospheric side of
the manometer yields the MOST accurate reading?
Reaction 4
The change in pressure is found by observing the

difference in heights of mercury in the two columns of the
A. One with a very dense liquid and a large bore radius

B. One with a liquid of low density and a large bore
manometer. The two columns have the same internal radius.
The reaction apparatus is shown in Figure 1 below:
radius
Burette
C. One with a very dense liquid and a small bore radius

D. One with a liquid of low density and a small bore
radius
67. What is the role of the stopcock in the middle line?

A. To equilibrate the two sides of the manometer
before the reaction begins
Reaction flask
B. To measure the pressure inside of the flask

C. To measure the pressure outside of the flask
D. To prevent pressure buildup inside the flask
through one-way venting
Manometer
Figure 1
The data for each reaction are calculated using the ideal
gas equation for the vapor in the system. The vapor pressure
of water at 25C is 27.2 torr. The pressure for each reaction
is recorded along with the resting volumeof the system. The
volume of the gas space following the reaction is
approximated as the original volume plus any positive or
68. Once the system is at equilibrium, if the right column

of the manometer is higher than the left column of the
negative correction for the manometer. For a reaction in
which the volume increases, for instance, the change in

volume is the cross-sectional area of the manometer core
manometer, then:
times the height change.
A. Psystem at equilibrium > ^system initially' when

the stopcock is opened, the net flow of gas is out.
64. Which of the reactions would result in an increase in the
B ^system at equilibrium < ^system initially* when
height of the mercury column on the right of side of the
the stopcock is opened, the net flow of gas is out.
U-tube?
C ^system at equilibrium > ^system initially! when
A. Reactions 1 and 2
the stopcock is opened, the net flow of gas is in.
B. Reaction 2 only
D Psystem at equilibrium < ^system initially* when
C. Reactions 1,3, and 4
the stopcock is opened, the net flow of gas is in.
D. Reaction 4 only
42
Passage XI (Questions 71 - 78)
69. Which of the following is the BEST liquid to use in the

manometer for a system that produces a large quantity
of gas?
A researcher fills a balloon with a mixture of nitrogen
gas (20% by volume) and helium gas (80% by volume) and
A. Mercury
then seals it. The balloon is used to transport sampling

devices into the atmosphere to collect gases at various
altitudes. It is filled to a total internal pressure of 760.0 torr
at 27*C and a volume of exactly 24.63 liters. The balloon
B. Water
C. Ethanol
D. Glycerol
contains exactly one mole of total gases. It is allowed to rise

to a height of 20,000 feet, where the atmospheric pressure is
measured to be 507 torr (0.67 atm.) and the temperature is
-3C (270 K). The balloon carries a basket aloft containing
equipment to monitor the atmospheric conditions. The

70. For an endothermic reaction that neither consumes nor
balloon is released early in the morning and returns to the
produces gases, what is observed after reaction?
ground at night, whereit is 7C and the pressure is 760 torr.
A. The left column rises initially until the solution
In addition to sealed balloons, hot-air balloons may also
temperature falls to 4C, then the left column
be used. Drawn in Figure 1 below is a hot-air balloon with
begins to drop.
B. The left column rises initially until the solution
freezes, then the left column remains constant.
an attached basket.
C. The left column drops initially until the solution

temperature falls to 4C, then the left column
begins to rise.
D. The left column drops initially until the solution

freezes, then the left column remains constant.
Heat source
Sand bags
(ballast)
Basket
Figure 1
Hot-air balloons demonstrate the principle of buoyancy.
Hot air is less dense than the surrounding air, so when hot air
displaces cold air in the balloon, it becomes less dense than

the surrounding medium. Hot air rises to the top of the
balloon, as shown in Figure 2. This lowers the center of
mass for the system.
Figure 2
71. What is the volume of the sealed balloon at 20,000 feet,
where thetemperature is -3C andpressure is 507 torr?

A. 14.78 liters
B.
18.24 liters
C. 33.25 liters
D. 41.05 liters
43
7 2. What is the density of helium gas at STP?

A.
B.
C.
D.
76. The relative rate of effusion from a balloon (with 50%

He and 50% N2) for heliumcompared to nitrogen would
be which of the following?
0.18 grams/liter
0.36 grams/liter
1.00 grams/liter
4.00 grams/liter
A. 7 times faster for helium
B. V7 times faster for helium
C. V7 times faster for nitrogen

D. 7 times faster for nitrogen
73. As a hot-air balloon is lifting off, which point in the

drawing below accurately reflects its center of mass?
77. The molecular weight of a gas, where the mass in

grams is represented by (g), can be calculated by which
of the following formulas?
A.
gPV
RT
B.
gVT
PR
C.
A. Point a
gRP
TV
B. Point b
D.
C. Point c
gRT
PV
D. Point d
7 8. How many moles of helium gas are in the balloon, if

the pressure is reduced to .507 atm. and the temperature
74. What is the partial pressure of N2(g) at 507 torr and
is reduced to -3C?
7'C?
A. 102 torr
A. 0.48 moles He
B.
133 torr
B. 0.80 moles He
C. 157 torr
C. 1.08 moles He
D. 608 torr
D. 1.20 moles He
75. Which of the following statements BEST describes the
buoyancy of a hot-air balloon undervarying conditions?

A. The balloon is most buoyant on a hot day, because
thesurrounding air is denserthanon a coldday.
B. The balloon is most buoyant on a hot day, because
the surrounding air is less dense thanon a coldday.
C. The balloon is most buoyant on a cold day, because
the surrounding air is denser than on a hot day.
D. The balloon is most buoyant on a cold day, because
the surrounding air is less dense than on a hot day.
44
Passage XII (Questions 79 - 86)
81. The a-value for a halocarbon increases proportionally

with:
Chlorocarbons are a class of compounds composed of

chlorine, carbon, and hydrogen, andfluorocarbons are a class
A. molecular mass.
B. nucleophilicity.
of compounds composed of fluorine, carbon, and hydrogen.
C. boiling point.
D. polarity.
Both classes of molecules consist of polar compounds, for
themost part. Theirpolarity affects theirphysical properties,

such as boiling point, so they are often used as refrigerants.
Because of theirstrong intermolecular forces, neither classof
compounds acts like an ideal gas. An ideal gas obeys
82. Which of the following gases has the GREATEST avalue?
Equation 1:
PV = nRT
A. Chloromethane
Equation 1
B. Fluoromethane
C. Methane
where P is pressure in atm., V is volume in liters, n is the
D. 1,2-Difluoroethane
number of moles of particles, R is the ideal gas constant
0.0821 Latm.mole^K, andTis temperature in kelvins.

When comparing a real gas to an ideal gas, deviations in
pressure and volume are taken into account. The corrected
83. What is the volume of 1.00 moles of CH3F at 25C

and 1.00 atm.?
terms, when substituted into Equation 1, yield Equation 2:
A. 20.17 L
(P + ai) x (V - nb) = nRT
B. 22.41 L
V2
C. 24.24 L
Equation 2
D. 32.17 L
where a is an empirical value related to the strength of the

attractive intermolecular forces, and b is an empirical value
8 4. What does NOT decrease as the pressure exerted on a gas

system in a piston increases?
related to the size of the molecule.
In general, bigger molecules have greater b values.

Deviations from ideal behavior decrease as the mean free path
increases. This deviation is attributed to reduced interactions
A. Volume
B. Compressibility
C. Mean free path
caused by the increased average distance between particles.

As the volume of the container increases, the space that is
D. Gas concentration
occupied by the particles becomes insignificant.

79. In a flask initially filled with equal moles of methane,
85. What is TRUE when comparing CH2F2 to CH2Br2
fluoromethane, chloromethane, and bromomethane,
under identical conditions?
which gas has the GREATEST mole fraction after a
I. The diffusion rate of CH2F2 is greater than the
short duration of time, if each gas is allowed to effuse
diffusion rate of CH2Br2-
from the flask?
n. Thecollision impulse of CH2F2 is greater than the
A. Methane
collision impulse of CH2Br2-
B. Fluoromethane
m. The average kinetic energy of CH2F2 is greater

than the average kinetic energyof CH2Br2-
C. Chloromethane
D. Bromomethane
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and III only
D. I,n,andm
8 0. The b-value for 1,1-difluoroethane is:

A. half of the b-value for 1,1 -dichloroethane.
B. slightly
less
than
the
b-value for
1,1-
the b-value for
1,1-
86. Which of the following gases is MOST ideal?
dichloroethane.
C. slightly more than
A. 1,1-Difluoroethane
B. Difluoromethane
dichloroethane.
C. Fluorine
D. twice as large as the b-value for 1,1 -dichloroethane.
D. 1,2-Difluoropropane
45
Passage XIII (Questions 87 - 93)
88. In the experiment illustrated by Figure 1, how must the

spin rate of the cylinder be adjusted when methane (16
A balloon filled with enough helium floats in the air

surrounding it, because its countermass exceeds its mass.
The countermass is the mass of the surrounding medium that
is displaced by the balloon, and it is found by multiplying
the volume of air displaced by the balloon times the density
of the medium. Helium is lighter than all gases except
hydrogen, and it has the smallest molecular size of any gas
grams/mole) is replaced by nitrous oxide (44

grams/mole) to get the same results?
A.
B.
C.
D.
It must
It must
It must
It must
be slowed by a factor of 2.75.

be slowed by a factor of 1.61.
be increased by a factor of 1.61.
be increased by a factor of 2.75.
known. Because of its low mass and small molecular size,
helium effuses rapidly from a balloon. The restoring force of

the rubber from which the balloon is made provides a driving
force for effusion to exceed infusion. As the helium effuses,
89. Which of these balloons has the GREATEST buoyant

force in air?
the volume of the balloon is decreased, reducing the
A. A 4.0-liter methane filled balloon
countermass. Eventually, the mass of the balloon exceeds

the countermass,- and the balloon is no longer buoyant.
B. A 3.0-liter helium filled balloon

C. A 2.0-liter neon filled balloon
The rate of effusion depends on the temperature and mass

of the gas, and on the size of the gas particles relative to the
size of the pores in the container's walls. The mass and
temperature affect effusion rate, because they affect the
average speed of the gas particles. Equation 1 shows the
relationship of gas speed (v) to temperature (T) and mass (m):
D. A 1.0-liter nitrogen filled balloon
90. If a larger cylinder were used in Chamber 2, how must

the spin rate be adjusted to keep the gas passing through
the pore after half of a rotation?
V oc 1/1
A. The rate must increase by a factor of 2.
V m
B. The rate must decrease bya factor ofV2.

C. The rate must increase bya factor ofV2.
Equation 1
To study the average speed of a gas, particle flow in one

direction through a vacuum is observed. The apparatus
shown in Figure 1 is used to generate such conditions.
Valve 1/
Waive 2
Chamber 1
D. The rate does not change.
91. Why is Chamber 2 evacuated before gas is released

through Valve 2?
B\Valve3
A. To minimize collisions between particles within

the cylinder
B. To prevent the effusion of gas
C. To prevent the infusion of gas
D. To maximize the buoyancy of Chamber 2
I
Spinning
cylinder
Figure 1
The system is completely evacuated, and a gas sample is

injected into Chamber 1. The cylinder is then set in motion
and Valve 2 is opened briefly, allowing gas to flow into
Chamber 2.
92. How would the speed of the gas change within the
system shown in Figure 1, if the temperature were
A sensor in Valve 3 detects collisions.
increased from 25C to 1008C?
Chamber 2 is re-evacuated, and the process is repeated with

the cylinder spinning at a different rate. The goal of each
adjustment is to determine the spin rate that causes the
A. It would increase by a factor of 4.

B. It would increase by a factor of 2.
C. It would increase by a factor of 1.25.
greatest collision frequency at the detector. It is assumed that
the gas is passing straight through Chamber 2 at this spin

rate. Under such conditions, the diameter and period of the
spin are used to determine the speed of the gas particles.
D. It would increase by a factor of 1.12.
9 3. How do the speeds of N2O, CO, F2, and Ne compare?
87. A balloon filled with which of the following gases
A. vN2o > vp2 > VCo > VNe

B. vNe > vco > V?2 > VN2o
C. vN2o > vC0 > Vp2 > VNe
would require the GREATEST minimum volume to

float in air?
A. Ammonia
B. Helium
D. vNe > vF2 > Vco > VN2o
C. Hydrogen
D. Methane
46
99. Select the sequence which corresponds to the infusion

rates for the four gases indicated below in ascending
Questions 94 through 100 are NOT based on a

descriptive passage.
order:
A. CH4<CO< S02 <C12

B. S02 <C12 <CO <CH4
94. What is the final pressure in a balloon that occupies
C. CO < Cl2 < CH4 < S02

D. C12<S02 <CO<CH4
1.00 liter at S.T.P. after the volume is decreased to 0.75
liters at constant temperature (isothermally)?

A.
1013 torr
B.
833torr
C. 760 torr
100. The relative rate of effusion from a balloon for
D. 570 torr
methane compared to helium would be which of the

following?
A . 4.00 times faster than helium
B.
9 5. What is the partial pressure of argon in a mixture that is

32% by moles argon at STP?
D . 4.00 times slower than helium
A. 243.2 torr
B.
2.00 times faster than helium
C . 2.00 times slower than helium
320.0 torr
C. 500.0 torr
D. 516.8 torr
96. An balloon that occupies 67.2 liters at 25C and 1.0

atm., will occupy what volume in the mountains (T =
4C and P = 0.90 atm.)?
A. 56.2 liters
B.
65.1 liters
C. 69.4 liters
D. 80.3 liters
"My day isn't complete, until I do some chem!"
97. If it takes a balloon filled with argon gas 23.6 minutes

to decrease its volume by 0.100 liters due to effusion at
constant temperature and constant pressure, how long
1. D
6. B
would it take if the balloon is filled with sulfur trioxide
instead? (Ar = 39.95 g/m, SO3 = 80.06 g/m)
C
A
C
C
B
C
D
D
12.
16.
11.
A. 47.2 minutes
2.
7.
17.
21.
22.
B.
33.4 minutes
26.
27.
C.
16.7 minutes
31.
D
A
C
C
c
B
36.
D. 11.8 minutes
41.
46.
51.
56. B
c
98. Which of the following gases moves approximately
61.
twice as fast as water?
66.
71.
A. He
76. B
B. C02
47
42. A
47.
1)
52.
57. 13
58.
62. A
67. A
72.
77.
I)
78. B
83.
88.
82.
87.
92.
96.
97.
63. C
68. A
73. C
C
91. A
86.
D. C5H,2
37. B
1)
81.
C. Ar
D
C
32.
3.
8. D
13. D
18. D
23. C
28. C
33. C
38. B
43. D
48. C
53. C
93. B
98. A
5.
9. C
10.
4.
15. A
20. D
14.
1)
19.
1)
24.
c
c
c
B
A
D
25. D
55. A
60. D
29.
34.
39.
44.
49.
54.
C
64. B
69. A
59.
74.
30. A
35. A
40. c
45.
50.
65. A
70. A
75.
79. D
84. D
80. B
85. A
89. A
94. A
90. D
99.
YOU'VE
95. A
c
100.
PASSED
GASES!
Gases Passage Answers

Passage I (Questions 1 - 6)
1.
Real Gas Data
Choice D is correct. Because the particles of a real gases have a molecular volume, the volume of the container
does not reflect the actual volume that the gas can occupy. This is based on the idea that in a real gas, no two
particles can occupy the same point at the same time. As the container volume decreases, the space unoccupied
by gas molecules is decreased, so the molecules collide more often. This increases the interactions and causes
deviations from ideal behavior. Choice A is eliminated. Forces between molecules (attractive or repulsive)
result in deviations in the behavior of the gas. The deviations can be attributed to changes in the collision
frequency of the particles with the walls. For instance, particles that experience attractive forces have a
greater tendency to collide with one another, decreasing the frequency of their collisions against the walls.
This eliminates choices Band C. Choices A, B, and C represent the assumptions of the ideal gas law, which
under real conditions do not hold true. The gas is assumed to be uniform in the flask, so choice D is not a true
statement. In addition, this would not necessarily account for deviations from ideal gas behavior. The
collisions would simply be asymmetrically distributed against the walls. Pick D to be totally hip and now.
2.
Choice D is correct. Pressure is a measure ofthe collisions ofthe gas molecules with the container walls. As the
pressure increases, the gas particles strike the wall more frequently. It can be inferred that molecules also
collide with one another more frequently, eliminating choices Aand C. Because they collide more frequently,
their time in contact, and thus their interactions are increased, making choice D the best answer.
3.
Choice A is correct. Because the question asks for the trend over a large pressure range, we need Table 1. As
observed from Table 1, the pressure-volume product for helium gas shows auniform increase over the period
during which the pressure is increased up to 400 atm. During this same period, the pressure-volume product for
oxygen gas decreases slightly before beginning to increase. This means that oxygen gas shows a change in
behavior as pressure is increased, which eliminates choices B, C, and D. Although we know the answer must be
choice Aat this point, we'll analyze the trend for carbon dioxide to be certain. The pressure-volume product for
carbon dioxide shows a drastic drop until some pressure around 25 atm., then the pressure-volume product
rapidly increases. The best answer is choice A.
4.
Choice C is correct. This is really two questions combined into one. "Is the volume larger or smaller than
expected" and "Is this due to attractive or repulsive forces?" The value for the molar volume of an ideal gas
under nearly standard conditions is listed as 22.41 liters in the passage. The value for the molar volume of
ammonia (NH3) is listed in Table 2 as 22.081 liters. This means that the molar volume is smaller than ideal
for ammonia (NH3). Choices Aand Bare eliminated. The volume of a gas is reduced due to attractive forces.
In the case of ammonia, the attraction can be attributed to hydrogen bonding. The best answer is choice C. Be a
champion and choose C.
5.
Choice Bis correct. Table 1 lists values for the pressure-volume product. The value for the pressure-volume
product at 75 atm. should be somewhere between 10.11 and 11.25. Agood approximation of the value for the
pressure-volume product at 75 atm. is 10.63 (an average of 1011 and 11.25). To determine the molar volume for
carbon dioxide at 75 atm., the pressure-volume product (10.63 L-arm.) is divided by the pressure (75 atm.). This
yields a number far less than one. Choices Cand Dare eliminated, because those values better approximate
the product of the pressure and the volume at 75 arm., not the volume alone. The correct value is greater than
0.1333 (the value obtained when 10 is divided by 75), because 10.63 divided by 75 is greater than 10 divided by
75. Choice A should be eliminated, because it is too small (less than 0.100, which is 10 divided by 100). The
best answer is choice B.
6.
Choice B is correct. A gas is most ideal when there are minimal intermolecular forces between the molecules.
This occurs when the gases do not contact one another as frequently. At low pressure, the gases do not collide
with one another (or the walls) as often, so they have fewer intermolecular interactions. This makes low
pressure more ideal than high pressure. At high temperature, gases have the necessary kinetic energy to
overcome the intermolecular forces, so they do not stay in contact for as long a period of time. This makes high
temperature more ideal than low temperature. The best choice is B, high temperature and low pressure. Ifyou
consider a phase diagram, at high temperature and low pressure, the material is in the gas phase, far from the
other phases, making it most gas-like.
48
Section VI Detailed Explanations
Kinetic Theory of Gases
Passage II (Questions 7 -14)
7.
Choice C is correct. In a closed system, the number of particles (moles of gas) cannot change. This means that
moles are constant during the process. If the piston is motionless, then the internal gas pressure equals the
external pressure. This means that overall, given that the piston starts and finishes at rest, the pressure shows
no net change. Only the temperature and volume exhibit a net change. When the temperature of the system is
increased, the average kinetic energy of the molecules increases. The number ofmolecules does not change, so
choice A is eliminated. Because the average kinetic energy increases, rather than remains constant, choice B is
eliminated. The concentration decreases as the container expands, so the average distance between particles
increases, meaning that the mean free path increases. This makes choice C true. As the average kinetic energy
increases, the average particle speed increases, so momentum (mv) increases. This eliminates choice D. Choice
C is the best answer.
8.
Choice D is correct. Because the container is sealed, the system is closed, so the number of molecules does not
change. The container is rigid, so the volume of the system does not change. Because neither the moles of
particles nor the volume changes, the concentration does not change, so mean free path cannot change. Mean
free path is the microscopic equivalent of concentration. The particles may collide more frequently, but that is
because they cover the distance between molecules faster. The molecules on average are the same distance
apart. Because mean free path does not change, choice Cis eliminated. With greater average kinetic energy
(and thus greater temperature), both the collision frequency (based on velocity) and the collision force (based
on momentum) increase. This makes choice D the best answer. This question addresses both the chemist's and
physicist's perspective of gases. The correlation between macroscopic measurements and microscopic ideas of
gases are listed below:
Temperature correlates to Average Kinetic Energy (as Tincreases, KE increases)

Concentration correlates to Mean Free Path (as n/y increases, dmean free path decreases)
Pressure correlates to Collision Force and Collision Frequency (Pressure increases when collisions increase)
Moles correlates to Molecules (hopefully this relationship is a freebie)
Volume correlates to Container Walls (the container walls dictate the volume of the system)
9.
Choice C is correct. As the temperature is decreased, the speeds of the gas particles decrease, so the average
speed of the particles in the gas system decreases. This eliminates choices Aand B. The important thing to
recall here is that the change is considered in terms of the Kelvin temperature scale, not the Celsius scale. The
change is only from 293 Kto 283 K, and the speed is proportional to square root of T. Because the temperature
decrease is only about 3.4%, the speed decrease is even less than 3.4%, so the decrease in particle speed is only
slight. Choice C is the best answer.
10
Choice C is correct. This question is asking for the effect of effusion on the absolute pressure (P) and the
relative abundance (X) of component gases. Because both H2 and D2 are escaping from the container (due to
effusion through the pore), the moles of each gas decrease over time. This causes the partial pressure of each
gas to decrease as well. This eliminates choices Band D. However, because H2 is lighter than D2, H2 escapes
faster than D2, so the relative amount of D2 (Xq2) increases. This makes choice C the best answer.
11
Choice D is correct. Under identical conditions, the gases are all at the same temperature, so they have the
same average kinetic energy. The equation for kinetic energy is K.E. = V2 mv2. This means that if two
particles have different masses, they must have different average velocities. Because velocity, v, is squared in
the kinetic energy relationship, it varies inversely with the square root of the mass. In other words, if one
particle is four times as massive as another, it has half the velocity of the lighter particle. Momentum is the
product of mass and velocity, so particles with greater mass have greater momentum. This means that the gas
with the greatest particle momentum is the heaviest gas. Sulfur dioxide is the heaviest gas of the choices, so
choice D is the best answer.
12.
Choice A is correct. Collision frequency affects the pressure. The number of molecules affects the moles.
According to the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT, moles and pressure are directly proportional, if all other
conditions are held constant. The relationship of pressure and moles is linear, so collision frequency with the
walls as a function of the number of particles should also be linear. Twice as many particles results in twice as
many collisions. The best answer is choice A.
49
13.
Choice D is correct. According to the kinetic molecular theory of gases, particles exert no force on one another.
If there are no intermolecular forces, the particles cannot be held together, so they can never form a solid or a
liquid. This results in a boiling point that is extremely small, not infinitely large. Choice A is eliminated.
According to the kinetic molecular theory of gases, particles have a negligible volume, whether they are atoms
or molecules. This means that no matter what the particles may be on the microscopic level, they all behave
the same. Choice B is eliminated. When the temperature doubles, the average kinetic energy of the particles
doubles. The mass of the particles remains the same, so a change in velocity is attributable to the change in
kinetic energy. However, because the equation is K.E. = l/2mv2, the velocity doesn't double when the
temperature doubles; the velocity increases by square root of two. This eliminates choice C. The pressure,
according to the kinetic theory of gases, is attributed to collisions with the walls of the container. If the shape
of the container changes, as long as the volume is the same, there is the same density. This results in the same
number of collisions per unit area against the walls, so choice D is valid.
14.
Choice D is correct. A gas has no definite volume, because its particles are in contact with one another only
briefly during collisions. A liquid has a definite volume, because its particles are always in contact with one
another, eliminating choices A and B. Because particles in a gas do not remain in constant contact with one
another, gases are more compressible and less dense than liquids. In other words, the particles of a gas can be
pushed closer together, while particles in a liquid are already touching, so they are hard to push closer
together. Because gases are less dense than liquids, objects in gases are less buoyant (due to the lower density of
the medium). This makes choice D invalid, so choice D is the best answer.
Passage III (Questions 15 - 22)

15.
Submerged Ball Experiment
Choice A is correct. From Table 1, it can be seen that the greatest change in volume takes place during the first
five feet of descent. This is attributed to the inverse relationship between pressure and volume. The graph of
volume as a function of pressure shownbelow, demonstrates that as the pressure increases in uniform increments,
the volume changes by a smaller increment each time.
Volume change is in decreasing increments:

AV
Pressure change is in uniform increments:

AP, = AP2 = AP3 = AP4
AR
AB,
AP-,
AP,
Pressure
The greatest volume change is observed at relatively low pressures, because the percent change in pressure
caused by an incremental increase in pressure isgreatest at low pressures. This trend would be observed in data
for the first seven feet ofdescent into water, also resulting in the greatest volume change of any increment of
seven feet of the descent. The best answer is therefore choice A. This same phenomenon explains the pain in
your ears you may haveexperienced, if youeverdescended into the deep end of a swimming pool.
16.
Choice D is correct. This question is asking for the point at which the ball used in the experiment experiences
no net force (where the buoyant force equals the weight). At this point, the density of the ball must equal the
density of the surrounding water. The ball is initially 50% submerged, so the density of the ball is initially
50% that of the surrounding water. This means that the density of the ball must increase by a factor of two to
reach a point where it is no longer buoyant. The mass of the ball is not changing, so the increase in density must
result from a decreasing volume. The volume must decrease to half of its original value (36.0 L at the surface),
in order to have a density equal to that of the surrounding water. From Table 1, the volume of the ball equals
18.0 liters at a depth of somewhere around 32 feet. This makes choice D correct.
50
17.
Choice C is correct. Fresh water is less dense than salt water, which causes the ball to be less buoyant in fresh
water, although that is not the focus of this question. Because salt water is more dense than fresh water,
choices A and B are eliminated. A greater volume of the ball would initially be submerged in fresh water.
However, as the ball is submerged below the surface, the pressure exerted by the less massive fresh water is
less than the pressure exerted by the more massive salt water. The greater the pressure, the more the volume
decreases, so salt water reduces the volume of the ball more than fresh water. This means that the change in
volume of the ball is greater when submerged in salt water than in fresh water, making choice C correct.
18.
Choice D is correct. If the ball is initially only 25% submerged, then the density of the ball is 25% that of
water. To cease to be buoyant in the water, the density of the ball must equal that of the surrounding water.
This means that the density of the ball must increase by a factor of four. The mass of the ball is not changing, so
the increase in density must result from a decreasing volume. The volume must decrease to 25% of its original
value (at the surface), in order to have a density equal to that of the surrounding water. The pressure must
therefore be four times its initial value (at the surface). The pressure is one atmosphere at the surface, so the
ball must be submerged to a depth where the pressure is 4 atmospheres (3 atmospheres of which are due to the
water). The passage says that 32.6 feet of water exerts one atmosphere of pressure, so to have 3 atmosphere of
water pressure a depth of 97.8 (3x 32.6) feet is required. This makes choice D correct.
19.
Choice D is correct. Because the ball that is initially 60% submerged is denser than the ball in the experiment,
it need not be submerged to as great a depth to have a density equal to that of the surrounding water. The
greater density canbe inferred from the greater submerged volume. This makes choice D thecorrect answer.
20.
Choice D is correct. According to the ideal gas law, PV = nRT, the volume of the ball is directly affected by
changes in the pressure (Boyle's law), the moles ofgas (Avogadro's law), and the temperature of the container
(Charles's law). The magnetic field strength should have no direct effect on the volume, as long as the metal
ring on the ball is attached at the greatest circumference of the ball. The best (but not perfect) answer is choice
D. If the magnetic ring were attached at a point other than the circumference, the ball could elongate due to
the force, and thus the volume would change with the asymmetric deformation (elongation) of the ball.
21.
Choice A is correct. If salt is added to the water, the density of the solution increases, thus making the ball
more buoyant in the solution. If the ball became more buoyant, more of the ball would rise above the surface of
the water, resulting inless of the volume of the ball being submerged. This eliminates both choice Cand choice
D. Because the ball is more buoyant, a stronger applied force is necessary to overcome the increased buoyant
force, so the B field (magnetic field) must be increased. Pick A.
22.
Choice C is correct. The compressibility of a gas is greatest when the particles are farthest apart from one
another. This is true when the mean free path is largest. To maximize the mean free path, the concentration
must be low, which equates to a low number of moles and a large volume. This makes choice Cthe best answer.
Passage IV (Questions 23 -28)

23.
Charles's Law
Choice C is correct. This is answered by following the trend in the data. Table 1 shows that volume increases
by 5.3 every ten degrees, so at 150C, the volume should be 15.9 greater than 208.3rc cm3, the volume at 120C
This makes the volume approximately 224.2rc cm3, sothat choice C is the best answer.
24.
Choice C is correct. The bulb temperature increases from 7C to 27 C, so the bulb expands. This eliminates
choice A. Three answer choices remain, making a calculation necessary. The question can be solved intuitively
in the following manner. Before calculating, be sure to convert from Celsius into Kelvin. If you fail to do this,
you will incorrectly choose answer choice D.
Vf =^LVi, where Vf>Vi .-. Vf =200. x7.0L = 35. x7.0L = E.L = 7.50L
T?
280
14
The key on these types of questions is to plug the numbers into the equation in such a manner that the value is
reasonable (greater or less than the original value). Knowing that the volume increases with temperature
implies that the final volume is greater than 7.0, so the temperature ratio must be greater than 1.0. Choice Cis
a terrific answer in a situation such as this.
51
25.
Choice D is correct. As you drive, your car tire heats up due to friction from contact with the road surface. This
eliminates choices A and B. The volume of the tire stays roughly constant, so the only significant change
caused by the increasing temperature involves pressure. As the temperature of a gas at constant volume
increases, the pressure must increase, according to the ideal gas law. This makes choice D the best answer.
26.
Choice D is correct. This is a case of memorization. Charles's law equates changes in volume to changes in
temperature, at constant pressure. This eliminates all of the choices except D. As temperature increases, the
volume increases according to both Charles's law and the idea gas law. Choice D is the best answer.
27.
Choice B is correct. According to the trend in the data, the volume at -15C should be about 13.3tc less than the
volume at 10C. This means that we expect the volume to be 136.771 cm3 at -15C. Choice A is eliminated,
because there is no reason for the ideality suddenly to deviate that much. The size of the particles does not
change with temperature, so choice D should be eliminated. The best explanation for the drastic drop in
volume is condensation of the gas. A liquid occupies less volume than a gas. At -15C, the compound is a liquid,
so its boiling point is greater than -15C. At 10C it is a gas. This means that the boiling point is slightly
greater than -15C. The best answer is choice B.
28.
Choice C is correct. The partial pressure due to nitrogen is found by subtracting the partial pressures of water
and oxygen from the total pressure, 762 torr. The partial pressure due to oxygenis 20.9% of 762 torr. Thisvalue
is just over 20% of 760, which is 152 torr (the exact value is 159.3 torr). The partial pressure of nitrogen is 762
minus the sum of 22.1 and a little more than 152. This leads to a value in the high 500s, so choice C is the best
answer. The exact answer is found as follows:
ptotal = Ph20 + Po2+ pN2

762 = 22.1 +159.3+Pn2
Pn2 = 762 -181.4= 580.6 torr
Passage V (Questions 29-35)
29.
Boyle's Law
Choice C is correct. The volume ofa gas increases with temperature, so thevolume of1.000 gram ofoxygen gas
at room temperature is greater than the volume of 1.000 gram of oxygen gas at 0C. The volumeof 1.000 gram of
oxygen gas at room temperature is less than the volume of 1.000 gram of oxygen gas at 59C, because room
temperature is less than 59C. This means that the volume of 1.000 gram of oxygen gas at room temperature is
between 1.42 liters and 1.71 liters. Pick choice C.
30.
Choice A is correct. If a liquid less dense than mercury were chosen, then the mass of the liquid (and thus the
force exerted by the liquid) would be less in the right side of the column as compared to the mass and force
associated with mercury. This results in lower pressure being applied to the gas in the leftside of the column,
so the gas in the left side of the manometer would be compressed less, and the height measured would be
greater than the value obtained using mercury. In layman's terms, the less dense liquid 'squishes' the gas less
than mercury. Pick choice A.
31.
Choice A is correct. Because molecules are larger than atoms, they are less compressible than atoms. In other
words, as you compress molecules, they interact (collide and repel) more than atoms interact, so molecules
cannot be compressed as easily as atoms. This means that the volume of a molecular gas does not decrease as
much as it does for argon gas when a pressure ofequal magnitude is applied to both systems. This means that
the volume of the molecular gas is greater than the volume of the argon gas. The radius of the tube is uniform,
so for the volume to be greater, theheight mustbe greater. The heights when using a molecular gas are greater
than 50 mm in the second manometer and greater than 33 mm in the third manometer. This is best described in
choice A. Choices Band C should have been eliminated based on trend recognition. Ifthe value is greater than
50 mm after the first addition, it must be greater than 33 mm after the second addition. Likewise, if the value
is less than 50 mm after the first addition, it must be less than 33 mm after the second addition.
32.
Choice C is correct. According to both the passage and the middle of the three manometers, a difference in
column heights of 76 cm is indicative of a pressure difference of 1.00 atm. This means that when 1.00 atm. of
pressure is applied to an open column of mercury,it will rise 76cm. The best answer is choice C.
52
33.
Choice C is correct. According to the table, the volume of 1.000 gram of oxygen gas at 0C and 1.00atm. pressure
is 0.7095 liters. If the mass were doubled from 1.000 gram to 2.000 grams, then the moles would also double, so
the volume should likewise double. The volume would be 1.4190 liters, which is close enough to 1.42 to make
choice C a safe choice.
34.
Choice C is correct. When the pressure of the system is increased from 0.5 atm. to 1.0 arm., the volume of the
system is reduced to half of its original value. When the temperature increases from 25C to 50C, it has
actually increased from 298 K to 323 K, so the volume of the system increases, but it won't double. This means
that the overall effect is that the volume decreases, because the effect of pressure is more significant than the
effect of temperature on the system. The best answer is therefore choice C.
35.
Choice A is correct. The greatest change in volume is experienced when the first aliquot of mercury is added.
As more and more mercury is added, the change in the total mass of mercury is less (percentage-wise), so the
change in volume is less each time. This trend can be observed when comparing the difference between the first
and second manometers (5.0 cm) and between the second and third manometers (1.7 cm). This change in
compressibility is attributed to the fact that as the gas is compressed, the particles get closer together (more
dense), so there is less room to compress them further. The best answer is choice A. Choices C and Dshould be
eliminated, because the density of mercury does not change with addition of more mercury. The densities of
liquids and solids are most significantly affected by temperature, not by pressure.
Lung Function
36.
Choice C is correct. The operations of the lung depends on the expansion of the thoracic cavity (defined as the
region above the abdomen inside of the rib cage) and contraction of the diaphragm, which result in an increase
in the volume of the lung. This reduces the internal pressure (pressure within the lung). This demonstrates
Boyle's law, which states that pressure and volume are inversely proportional under isothermal conditions.
Choice C is best. Archimedes' principle has to do with buoyancy, which plays no role in lung expansion.
Bernoulli's principle deals with the flow rate of a fluid (like air), pressure differences, and the radius of a
tube. While it is true that air is flowing within a lung, and Bernoulli's law may be applied to explain air flow
phenomenon, the lung does not operate because of Bernoulli's principle. Charles's law states that volume and
temperature are directly proportional under isobaric conditions. The lung is thermoregulated, so a temperature
change cannot be responsible for thesuccess or failure of itsoperation.
37.
Choice Bis correct. During expiration, the lung contracts, causing a decrease in volume and therefore an
increase in internal pressure. This means that internal pressure is greater than external pressure (referred to as
a positive pressure according to physiologists), which accounts for air flow out of the lung. This eliminates
choice A and makes choice Bthe best answer. During expiration, the thoracic cavity and lung are relaxing back
to their normal (smaller) size. Although they are shrinking (their volume is decreasing), they are still larger
than their normal resting state, so choices C and D are eliminated.
38. Choice Bis correct. At high altitudes, the gas is less concentrated (due to the lower atmospheric pressure). At
low altitudes, the gas is more concentrated (due to the higher atmospheric pressure). As temperature
decreases, gases become denser (and thus more concentrated). This means that at a low altitude and low
temperature, there will be more of all gases, oxygen included. But each gas increases by the same proportionate
amount, so as far as relative amounts are concerned, there is the same percentage of all gases. This means that
oxygen has the same mole fraction, but ahigher partial pressure than standard conditions. This makes choice
B the best answer.
39.
Choice Bis correct. The tidal volume is the volume of airentering or leaving during a normal breath, while the
total lung volume includes residual air, dead space, and tidal volume. This means that lung volume must
always be greater than tidal volume. This makes statement I invalid. Air flows out from the lung during
expiration, so the pressure inside the lung must be greater than the external pressure. Air flow is from higher
pressure to lower pressure. Air flow gradually lessens until it stops, once the internal pressure and external
pressures are equal. This makes statement II valid. Expiration occurs to displace the carbon dioxide, so it must
have agreater mole fraction of carbon dioxide than oxygen. This makes statement III invalid and makes choice
B the best answer.
53
40.
Choice C is correct. According to the laws of fluid dynamics, gas flows from a region of higher pressure to a
region of lower pressure. This is true of any fluid that experiences a pressure difference across its surface.
Inspiration results from internal pressure being less than external pressure, so choices A and B are eliminated.
During inspiration, the volume increases from 1200 mL to 1600 mL, which results in a value that is 1.33 times
greater than its original value. Because PV = k at constant temperature, the pressure must decrease to 0.75 its
original value, assuming that temperature and moles of gas are constant. Starting at Pinitial and finishing at
0.75 Pinitial Is a 25% decrease in pressure, so choice C is the best answer.
41.
Choice C is correct. When the diaphragm contracts, the lung is pulled downward, which causes it to expand.
The expansion of the thoracic cavity also plays a role in the expansion of the lung. Because the lung expands,
its volume becomes greater than it is at rest, which makes choice C an invalid statement. The question asks for
what is NOT true, so choice C is the best answer. Upon expansion, lung volume increases, internal pressure
decreases, so internal pressure (the pressure inside the lung) is less than external pressure. Choice A is valid,
because the internal pressure is less than the external pressure (which ultimately causes air to flow into the
lung). Under these conditions, the lung is referred to as having subatmospheric pressure (which some
physiologists refer to as negative pressure). Choice Bis valid, because all gas concentrations, including carbon
dioxide, decrease as the lung expands. This is because the moles of carbon dioxide gas remain constant while
the volume increases. Choice C is invalid, and thus the best choice, because lung volume increases as the
diaphragm contracts. Lung temperature is around 37C and does not vary drastically as the lung expands. This
means that air temperature is relatively constant, making choice D valid.
42.
Choice A is correct. A scuba diver underwater exists in an environment of high external pressure. When the
thoracic cavity expands, because it is working against a much greater external pressure, more moles of air are
needed to fill the lung than are needed on land. Choice A is valid, because the air is more concentrated,
resulting in higher concentrations of all gases, including oxygen. At great enough depths, the gases are mixed
with helium, to reduce the mole fraction of oxygen, helping the diver to avoid breathing excessive amounts of
oxygen. Too much intakeof oxygen can resultin oxygen poisoning. Underwater, because of the greaterexternal
pressure, air is significantly denser (more concentrated). Consequently, the viscosity is much greater than it is
at sea level and it deviates from ideal gas behavior. This eliminates choices B and C. Because all gases are
more concentrated underwater, there are more moles of CO2 throughout the lung, including the anatomical dead
space, eliminating choice D.
43.
Choice D is correct. During a normal breath, air flow is driven by pressure differences between the external
environment and the internal pressure within the lung. At the very start of a breath, there is no air flow. The
air does not flow until a pressure difference is created. So initially, air flow increases from zero to some value
at the start of a normal breath. However, because the system is open, a large pressure difference never
develops. Air flows into the lung while it is still expanding, so the pressure difference is relatively constant
during the middle of the breath. This causes the flow rate to be relatively constant during the middle of a
breath. At the end of a breath, once the lungstops expanding, the air flow gradually slows and comes to rest.
This means that duringa normal inspiration, air flow rate goes from zero, to some positive value, and then back
to zero. This describes a sinusoidal function. Choice D is the best, albeit not a flawless, answer.
Passage VII (Questions 44-50)
44.
Isotonic Enrichment of Uranium
Choice A is correct. Thecollision frequency of the gasparticles depends on the concentration of the molecules in
the container and the temperature of the system, not on the diameter of the molecules. This eliminates choices
Band D. The greater the diameter of the molecule, the harder it is for the molecule to fit through the pore in
the wall of the container. For instance, golfballs can easily pass through the circumference of a basketball rim,
but basketballs cannot pass through the circumference of a golfhole. This makes choice A the best answer. You
may recall that this is the principle behind the operation of molecular sieves.
45.
Choice C is correct. Theextra neutrons do not significantly affect the reactivity of an atom, because the orbiting
electrons are responsible for the reactivity. The neutrons are in the nucleus, so they have little to no effect on
reactivity. Only when the molecular velocity is involved do the isotopes make a difference. This holds true
for all isotopes except hydrogen, deuterium, and tritium. There is an isotope effect that correlates to the
different bond lengths associated with bonds to hydrogen, deuterium, or tritium. This is not important in this
question, however. Pick choice C.
54
46.
47.
Choice C is correct. At the same average kinetic energy (same temperature), velocity of a particle is inversely
proportional to the square root of its mass. To travel twice as fast as uranium hexafluoride, a molecule must be
four times lighter than uranium hexafluoride. The mass of the uranium hexafluoride compound is roughly 350
grams per mole, so the correct answer must be a molecule with a mass just under 90 grams per mole. Sulfur
dioxide has a mass of 64 grams per mole, so choice A is too light, and thus eliminated. Sulfur trioxide has a
mass of 80 grams per mole, so choice B is too light, and thus eliminated. Phosphorus trifluoride has a mass of 88
grams per mole, so choice C is the best so far. Xenon has a mass of 131.3 grams per mole, so choice D is too
heavy, and thus eliminated. The best answer is therefore choice C.
Choice D is correct. The size of the molecule affects its ability to escape through a pore in the wall of the
container. The temperature of a gas affects the average kinetic energy of the system. The average kinetic
energy of the system in turn affects the velocity of the gas molecules, so the effusion rate of a gas is affected by
the temperature. As mentioned in the passage, isotopes have different masses, and therefore different effusion
rates. The concentration of a species outside of a container affects the backflow of the gas into the container, but
it does not affect the effusion rate. Backflow affects the net flow of gas, which is known as diffusion, not
effusion. The best choice is answer D.
48.
Choice C is correct. The mass of the uranium isotope is 235 amu, and the mass of the uranium hexafluoride
compound is given as 349. The mass percent is thus 235 divided by 349. This is a little less than 235 divided by
350, which is equal to 47 divided by 70. 47 divided by 70 is less than 49divided by 70, but more than 42divided
by 70. This means that the answer is between 60 and 70 percent, making choice C correct.
235 E 235 = 4Z ^ 70% = 49 > 47 > 42 = 60%
349
49.
350
70
70
70
70
Choice D is correct. Had chlorine been used instead of fluorine, then the mass of the uranium hexahalide
compounds would have been greater. The greater the mass ofthe two isotopic compounds, the lower the ratio of
the masses of the two isotopic compounds. The less the relative difference in masses, the less the difference in
effusion rates, and therefore the harder it would be to separate the isotopic compounds from one another. More
filtering would be required with thechlorine compounds than thefluorine compounds, making choice D correct.
The mass of 235UF6 is 349 grams per mole, and the mass of 238UF6 is 352 grams per mole. The mass of 235UCl6
is235 +6(35.5) =235 +213 =448 grams per mole. The mass of 238UC16 is238 +6(35.5) =238 +213 =451 grams per
mole. The difference in relative effusion rates is greater for the fluorine compounds than for the chlorine
compounds,because -1/352, > /./45_i_ jn addition, chlorine has two major isotopes while fluorine has only one
V 349
V448
major isotope. The isotopic impurity associated with two majors isotopes chlorine will affect the distribution,
making it harder to isolate the uranium isotopes. The UC1& species can have a mass anywhere in the range of
445 for 235U35Cl6 to 460 for 238U37C16.
50.
Choice D is correct. It would be hardest to separate molecules with the same effusion rate. To have the same
effusion rate, the molecules must have the same molecular mass. For choice A, O2 has a mass of 32, while N2
has a mass of 28. Choice A is thus eliminated. For choice B, H2 has a mass of 2, while Ne has a mass of 20.
Choice B is thus eliminated. For choice C, CO2 has a mass of 44, while SO2 has a mass of 64. Choice C is thus
eliminated. For choice D, CO has a mass of 28 and C2H4 has a mass of 28, so they both have the same
molecular velocity and thus the same effusion rate. They do not separate by this successive effusion technique.
Choice D is the best answer. It should be noted that of the choices, it would be easiest to separate hydrogen gas
(H2) from neon (Ne) because ofthe large difference in their masses. CO could beseparated from C2H4 by using
molecular sieves, which distinguish compounds by molecular size.
Air Bag
51.
Choice B is correct. In Reaction I, two liquids and three gases are formed from two solid reactants. This
represents a large increase in entropy, so choices C and_ D are eliminated. Reaction II is employed to generate
the heat that is necessary for Reaction I to proceed. The generation of heat implies that the reaction (Reaction
II) must be exothermic. The best answer is therefore choice B.
55
52.
Choice D is correct. As any gas cools (whether it be nitrogen at 350C or any other gas), the pressure of the
system and the total kinetic energy of the system and the average kinetic energy of the gas particles decrease.
The temperature is a measure of the average (and therefore total) kinetic energy of the system, so a lower
temperature is indicative of decreased kinetic energy for the system. The best answer is therefore choice D.
53.
Choice C is correct. If the bag fills at a rate of 100 moles/sec and the total inflation time is 0.01 seconds (10
milliseconds), then one mole of gas has filled the bag in that period of time (100 moles/sec x 0.01 seconds = 1
mole). At 31C, one mole of gas occupies 25 liters, as stated in the question. Had the question not stated that
fact, it would have been possible to compare the volume of a gas at 0C to the volume at 31"C At STP (0C and
1 arm.), one mole of gas occupies 22.4 liters. At 31C, the temperature has increased on the Kelvin scale only
slightly from 0C (from 273 K to 304 K). The volume therefore increases only slightly above 22.4 liters. The
only answer that is in the range of "slightly above 22.4" is choice C, your best answer.
54.
Choice A is correct. The key to this question is using the Kelvin temperature scale. Because average speed (the
root mean square speed) is directly proportional to the square root of the temperature, an increase in
temperature from 298 K (25C) to 398 K (125C) increases the average speed of the gas by a factor of roughly
Vl.33. This eliminates all of the answer choices except choice A, because 100 x Vl.33 < 133 < 224 < 500. The
exact mathematical solution for the problem is as follows:
3k(398) ,
3k(298) = -J 298 = V02

m
V298
^125 = VL32 so v125 = 100V132 < 133
100
Because the speed is less than 133 m/s, choices B, C, and D are incorrect (too large), making choice A the best
answer. Be sure that all of the temperature values that you use are in terms of kelvins. False answer choices on
questions like this one may take advantage of the notion that you will forget to convert degrees Celsius into
kelvins.
55.
56.
Choice A is correct. The lighter the molecular mass of a gas, the greater the average speed of the gas at a given
temperature. The greater the average speed of the gas, the faster the rate at which the gas effuses from the
pores within the container's walls. The ranking of the relative effusion rates follows the trend lighter is faster
than heavier. The best choice is He (4 g/mole) > N2 (28 g/mole) > Ar (40 g/mole), making choice A the best
choice. This assumes there are equal portions of the three gases within the container.
Choice B is correct. At STP, the total pressure of the system is 760 torr. The pressure due to carbon dioxide
(CO2) is the mole fraction of carbon dioxide (Cco2) times tne total pressure of the system (Ptotal)- The mole
fraction of carbon dioxide canbe found by dividing themoles ofcarbon dioxide by the totalmoles of thesystem.
This is done as follows:
50
50
44
<
44
- 1
(50 + 50)
(50 + 50)
\44
V44
28/
44/
The mole fraction of CO2 is less than one-half, which implies that less than half of the moles of gas are CO2.
This means that the partial pressure due to CO2 is less than half of the total pressure. The partial pressure of
CO2 is less then 380 torr, which eliminates choices C and D. Choice A is considerably too small. For choice A
to be true, the mole fraction of CO2 would have to be less than 0.033. The mole fraction of CO2 is not that
small. The best answer is therefore choice B. You should do all of your calculations like this, zeroing in on the
bestanswer withoutspending time finding an exact answer. Remember, you do not get points on the MCAT for
showing your work!
57.
Choice B is correct. Because neon is lighter than argon, neon has a greater average speed than argon. The
relative average speeds of the gases are inversely proportional to the relative square roots of their masses.
The mass of argon is roughly twice the mass ofneon, so the average speed of neon shouldbe roughly V2 times
faster than the average speed of argon. The best answer is choice B, where B is for BEST choice on this
particular question.
56
58.
Effusion Spheres Experiment
Choice D is correct. Figure 2 shows the progression of the experiment as it approaches equilibrium. All of the
partial pressures are equal at the start of the reaction, so the mole fraction for each gas is one-third. Once
equilibrium has been established, the partial pressure of each gas in region I has dropped to about one-fourth of
its original value, but all three gases have the same partial pressure once again. This means that at
equilibrium, the mole fraction for each gas is still one-third. This eliminates choices A and B. The mole
fraction doesn't change, but the moles of each gas do. The loss of moles of gas from Region I causes the drop in
total pressure. All of the gases show a net movement from Region I to Region II, so the moles of gas in Region I
decrease, while the moles of gas in Region II increase. This eliminates choice C and makes choice D the best
answer.
59.
Choice C is correct. Helium is the lightest of the three gases in the mixture, so it travels the fastest. This
means that initially, helium effuses from Region I into Region II faster than argon and nitrogen. As a result,
prior to equilibrium, Region II is richest in helium and poorest in argon (the slowest gas). However, once
helium has equilibrated between the two regions, argon continues to exchange, until it too reaches equilibrium.
Once at equilibrium, the rate of effusion (movement from Region I to Region II) equals the rate of infusion
(movement from Region II to Region I). The overall change from initial conditions to equilibrium is that the
total volume of the system has increased, causing the total pressure of the system to decrease and the partial
pressures of all gases to decrease equally. The mole fractions at equilibrium, however, are equal for all of the
gases at any point in the system, Region I or Region II. Because the total pressure is uniform and the mole
fractions are equal, the partial pressure of each gas is equal at equilibrium. Choice C is your answer.
60.
Choice D is correct. Once a gas system is at equilibrium, the pressure is uniform throughout the container, so the
pressure in Region II is equal to the pressure in Region I. RegionII has three times the volume of Region I, but at
equilibrium it also has three times the moles of gas. The result is that the mole fraction and the partial
pressure of any component gases are equal in each region,once equilibrium is established. This makes statement
I invalid. The system is initial charged with equal moles of all three gases, so the mole fraction of helium and
the mole fraction of argon are both one-third at the start of the experiment. Once equilibrium is established,
the gases are mixed evenly onceagain, so despite the totalmoles in Region I decreasing, the relative amount of
each gas is the same. This also means that the relative amount of each gas is the same in Region II. Once at
equilibrium, the mole fraction of helium and argon are each one-third, at any point in the system. The mole
fraction of helium and the mole fraction of argon are equal, making statement II valid. When the temperature
is increased, the average speed of each gas increases. This results in a greater rate of effusion and infusion,
although the net flow may not be affected. At the higher temperature, the pressure of the system is greater, so
each partial pressure exhibits a proportional increase. The increase is attributed to a greater frequency of
collision and increased momentum for particles at higher velocity. However, the moles have not changed, so
the mole fractions have not changed. This makes statement III valid. The best answer is choice D.
61.
Choice C is correct. By opening the valve to a greater area, there is more space through which gases may
travel from Region I into Region II. The flow rate increases, so effusion rate increases. Choice A is valid.
Increasing the temperature of the system increases the average speed ofeach gas, so they effuse faster, infuse
faster, and diffuse faster. This makes choice Bvalid. Increasing the volume of the system reduces the pressure
(number of collisions against the walls and with the pores), which results in less gas traveling from Region I
into Region II. A decrease in concentration (caused by an increase in volume) would decrease, not increase, the
rate of effusion. Choice C is an invalid statement, and thus the best answer. Increasing the partial pressure of
a component increases the number ofcollisions with a pore experienced by that component. An increase in mole
fraction (partial pressure) increases the rate of effusion, which makes choice D a valid statement.
62.
Choice A is correct. Hydrogen, H2, has a molecular mass of 2 g/mole. Helium, He, has an atomic mass of 4
g/mole; nitrogen, N2, has a molecular mass of 28 g/mole; and argon, Ar, has an atomic mass of 40.1 g/mole.
Because hydrogen is lighter than all of the component gases in the system, it has a greater average speed than
all of the other gases. This means that hydrogen effuses faster than the other gases, and reaches equilibrium
prior to the other gases. The graph for hydrogen would have a steeper initial drop than helium, nitrogen, or
argon. This makes choice A the best answer.
57
63.
Choice C is correct. Diffusion is the net flow of gas. Initially, there is high pressure in Region I and no pressure
in Region II. This means that the net flow of gas is from Region I to Region II. Over time, as pressure decreases
in Region I and grows in Region II, the net flow of gas diminishes until it reaches zero once at equilibrium. This
means that the rate of diffusion decreases with time until it reaches equilibrium. On a more specific level, it
decreases for all three of the component gases. This makes choice C the best answer.
Closed-System Reactions
64.
Choice B is correct. The fluid in the right side of the manometer rises when the internal pressure exceeds the
external pressure. This will occur when the internal pressure increases or the external pressure decreases. The
likelihood of external pressure (environmental pressure) decreasing under controlled conditions is minimal, so
the change in mercury height must be due to an increase in the internal pressure of the system. In order for the
internal pressure to increase, the volume of gas in the reaction vessel must increase. Only Reaction II produces a
gas product, so choice B is the correct answer.
65.
Choice A is correct. Because the bore size is reduced equally in both tubes, the pressure in both tubes remains
equal. Because there is no change in pressure difference between the two sides, the height of the columns is the
same in each tube. The manometer measures relative pressure difference between the two sides, not absolute
pressure. The question asks for the height, however, not the height difference. Because the volume depends on
the radius squared, if the radius is cut in half, then the volume is reduced by a factor of four. The amount of
mercury has not changed, so the total length of tube filled with mercury must increase by four. The height
changes by a value close to four, so the best answer is choice A.
66.
Choice D is correct. A small change in volume must be stretched out to be made more visible. A less dense
manometer fluid increases the observed change in volume. The smaller bore radius in the atmospheric tube
(assuming that the inner tube keeps the same bore size) results in the liquid climbing the atmospheric tube of
the manometer (the column exposed to the atmosphere) by a greater amount (resulting in an increased height).
The greater the change in column heights, the more accurately the difference between the two sides of the
manometer can be measured. Pick D to get the tingly sensation of correctness.
67.
Choice A is correct. This middle stopcock is the only port into and out of the system for a gas, and it must
remain closed during the experiment for the system to remain closed. It is a valve, so it has no capacity for
measuring pressure, meaning that choices B and C can be eliminated. The stopcock is a two-way valve, so
choice D is eliminated. The best answer is therefore choice A. The pressure must be equal in both sides of the
manometer initially to get an accurate reading of the change in pressure during the course of the reaction.
Hairline differences between the two columns initially make for errors in the measurement before the reaction.
Venting the system initially assures that the heights of the fluids in both sides of the manometer are equal.
68.
Choice A is correct. The right column of the manometer is higher, because the left side of the manometer is
"pushing" the liquid over. This means that the Psystem is greater than the Pexternal- Considering that the
external pressure does change during the reaction, the system pressure must have increased as the reaction went
to equilibrium. The Psystem atequilibrium Is mus greater than thePsystem initially- When the stopcock is opened,
the system vents this excess pressure by allowing the net flow of gas to be outward. The best answer is choice A.
69.
Choice A is correct. A large quantity of gas results in an increased internal pressure, causing the liquid in the
left tube to descend and the liquid in the right tube to ascend. The less dense the liquid, the greater the change
in heights (and thus the greater the chance for spillover of the manometer fluid). To avoid overflow, a dense
liquid, such as mercury (choice A), should be used. Less dense manometer fluids are chosen for hairline readings
of small pressure differences, where more accuracy is needed. The less dense fluid results in a greater change in
height per unit difference in pressure. The greater the change in height, the easier it is to read the manometer,
and thus the less significant small errors in the reading will be.
58
70.
Choice A is correct. An endothermic reaction results in a cooler solution. The cooler solution contracts, creating
a smaller liquid volume and thus a greater air space volume. In addition, the gas is cooled to some extent,
depending on the degree of insulation provided by the glass. Either way, the internal pressure decreases. This
results in the left column of manometer fluid rising initially. We eliminate choices C and D. Once at 4C, the
aqueous solution begins to expand (water is densest at 4C). This assumes the behavior of pure water. Assuming
that the gas temperature remains equilibrated with the environment, as the solution volume increases, the gas
volume decreases, so the internal pressure begins to rise again. The fluid in the left side of the column begins to
descend. The best answer is choice A.

71.
Weather-Sampling Balloon
Choice C is correct. This question requires rearranging the gas law, PV = nRT, to isolate R. The gas constant
never changes (thus the name constant), sowe can work from lVl = 2 2, which reduces to * T = 2 2, given
mTi
n2T2
Ti
T2
that no gas was added or removed (ni = n2). From here, it is a matter of isolating V2. We can predict that the
reduced pressure increases volume and the reduced temperature decreases volume, but this doesn't help much.
V2 =
Ii =fPiVl2)v:
P1V1T2 _
P2T 1
\P2ATi/
1 atm.
0.667 atm.
xlZQK x 24.63 L = 2. x -i. x 24.63 L = 2Z x 24.63L

300 K
10
20
The best answer is choice C.
72.
Choice A is correct. At STP (0C, 1 atm.), 1 mole of a gas (such as helium) occupies a volume of approximately
22.4 L. The question requires you to find the density (mass per volume) of helium. The mass of 1 mole of helium
is 1 mole x 4 2
= 4 grams He. Density = s_ = 0.18 2_
mole
73.
22.4 L
. Select A for optimal satisfaction.
liter
Choice C is correct. The center of mass for the balloon lowers as the balloon is filled with helium. This is
stated in the passage. This lowering of the center of mass takes place because helium is lighter than air and
thus the mass of the balloon is not as great as it is with the helium in it. In any event, the best answer places
the center of mass in the basket, where the greatest portion of the mass lies. Because most of the mass is in the
lower half, choice B is eliminated. Choices A and D are throwaway answers. The best answer is choice C.
74.
Choice A is correct. The easiest way to do this problem is to recall that N2(g) is 20% of the balloon. This means
the partial pressure of nitrogen is 20% of the total pressure (the equation is: Pn2 = (xN2)(ptotal))- Twenty
percent of 507 is just slightly more than 100 torr, so choice A is the best answer.
75.
Choice C is correct. The buoyancy of the balloon depends on the density of the surrounding air, so maximum
density requires that the surrounding air be as dense as possible. This eliminates choices Band D, because they
state that the surrounding air is less dense. As air is cooled (temperature decreases), the volume decreases, so
the density of the air increases. This means that on a cold day, the surrounding air is densest. This is best
described in choice C.
76.
Choice B is correct. The relative rates of effusion of two gases are given by the inverse ratio of the square roots
ofthe masses ofthe gas particles (Graham's law ofeffusion): MW ofHe =4 g/mole,MW ofN2 = 28 g/mole.
Rate of effusion He = VMWNz . V28 - ff where 3=V9>V7>V4=2

Rate of effusion N2 VMW"He
V4
The effusion rate for helium is il times faster than for nitrogen, so choice B is the best answer.
77.
Choice D is correct. It is known that molecular mass is mass per moles, which has units of grams per mole. In
this problem, we are told that mass is represented by g (grams), so we need only find the reciprocal of moles.
The units for n = mole, so the reciprocal of moles has units mole"1, which is what we need in the best answer
choice, n = -EjL, soi = -SX, and the formula for molecular mas is MW = 2-, choice
RT
pv
Copyright by The Berkeley Review CO
D.
PV
59
78.
Choice B is correct. From the passage, we know that there is 1.0 mole of gas in the balloon at 27C and 1 atm.
The number of moles does not change with temperature or pressure,so to solve this question, you must determine
only what percentage of the 1 mole of gas is due to He. He is 80% of the gas by moles, so nne = (0.80)(1 mole) =
0.8 moles He. Pick B if you crave correctness.
Real Gas Equation
PassageXII (Questions 79 - 86)
79.
Choice D is correct. If all components start with an identical mole fraction, then after a short time, the
component with the greatest molecular mass, and thus the lowest average speed, will be enriched. The correct
answer is the heaviest of the molecules. Bromine is heavier than hydrogen, fluorine, and chlorine, so choice D
is the correct answer.
80.
Choice B is correct. The b-value for a gas describes its size (deviation from ideal volume). The molecular size
of 1,1-dichloroethane is greater than the molecular size of 1,1-difluoroethane, because chlorine atoms are
bigger than fluorine atoms. The non-halogen portion of each molecule is equal in size in both molecules, so 1,1dichloroethane is only slightly greater in molecular size than 1,1-difluoroethane, so choice B is correct.
81.
Choice D is correct. The a-value correlates with attractive intermolecular forces. This eliminates choice A.
Nucleophilicity depends on molecular size of a gas and its ability to share electrons with an electrophile. This
eliminates choice B. While boiling point depends on intermolecular forces, it also depends on molecular mass,
so the a-value and boiling point do not always correlate. This eliminates choice C. As polarity increases, the
strength of the intermolecular forces increases, resulting in a greater a-value. Choice D is the best answer.
82.
Choice B is correct. The greatest a-value is found in the compound that exhibits the strongest intermolecular
forces. Choices C and D are non-polar, so they are eliminated. Fluorine is more electronegative than chlorine,
so fluoromethane is more polar than chloromethane, making choice B the best answer.
83.
Choice C is correct. At STP, an ideal gas has a volume of 22.4 liters per mole. At 25C and 1.00 arm., an ideal
gas has a volume of 24.5 liters per mole. While fluoromethane, CH3F, is not an ideal gas, the correlation in
volume between that of an ideal gas and that of fluoromethane is very high. This means that the volume of
1.00 moles of fluoromethane at 25C and 1.00 atm. is close to 24.5 liters.
The best answer is choice C. The
reduced volume compared to ideal behavior can be attributed to the attractive forces of the CH3F molecules.
84.
Choice D is correct. As the pressure exerted on the gas within a piston increases, the volume of the gas
decreases, forcing the particles closer together. The reduction in volume makes choice A a valid statement,
which eliminates choice A. As the particles get closer together, they become less compressible, eliminating
choice B. As the particles get closer together, the mean free path decreases, eliminating choice C. And as the
particles get closer together, they become more concentrated, not less concentrated, so choice D is an invalid
statement, making it the best answer.
85.
Choice A is correct. Under conditions of identical temperature, concentration, volume, and total pressure,
differences between CH2F2 and CH2Br2 are due to differences in their respective molecular masses. Because
CH2F2 is lighter than CH2Br2, it has a greater average speed and therefore diffuses faster. This makes
statement I valid. Because CH2F2 is lighter than CH2Br2, it has a lower average momentum and therefore
exhibits lower collision impulse. This makes statement II invalid. At the same temperature (identical
conditions), all gases have the same average kinetic energy. This makes statement III invalid, which makes
choice A the correct answer.
86.
Choice C is correct. The gas that is closest to an ideal gas has the smallest a-value and b-value. This is true of
the gas with the smallest size and the fewest intermolecular forces. Fluorine gas, F2, is the smallest and the
only non-polar gas of the answer choices. This makes F2 the closest to ideal of the answer choices, and makes
choice C the best answer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review*
60

87.
Buoyancy and Effusion
Choice A is correct. For a balloon to float in air, its buoyant force must equal its weight. The buoyant force is
proportional the volume of the balloon, so the greatest minimum volume is associated with the balloon system
requiring the greatest buoyant force to float. The greatest buoyant force is required with the balloon system of
greatest weight (the one filled with a gas of highest density). Ammonia is the heaviest of the choices, so
choice A is the best answer.
88.
Choice C is correct. Methane is lighter than nitrous oxide, so methane molecules have a greater average speed
than nitrous oxide molecules. This means that the cylinder's spin rate must be increased to be in phase with the
passing methane molecules. This eliminates choices A and B. The ratio of the masses of the two gases is 44 to
16, which means that nitrous oxide is 2.75 times heavier than methane. Because relative speed is inversely
proportional to the square root of the relative difference in mass, the speed of methane is V2.75 times the speed
of nitrous oxide. This eliminates choice D and makes choice C the best answer.
89.
Choice A is correct. The buoyant force of a gas-filled object depends on the density of the surrounding medium
and the volume of the object. The buoyant force does not depend on the contents of the balloon, although the
weight (and thus net force) do depend on the particles in the balloon. The greatest buoyant force belongs to the
object with the greatest volume, which makes choice A the best answer.
90.
Choice D is correct. If a larger cylinder is used, then the diameter and circumference are both increased, albeit
by the same amount. The gas must travel farther to pass through the cylinder, but the hole in the cylinder must
also travel a greater distance around the circumference with each revolution. The two effects cancel out one
another, so the spin rate does not need to change if the size of the cylinder increases. Choice D is the best
answer.
91.
Choice A is correct. Whether Chamber 2 contains gas or not, the gas from Chamber 1 can effuse into Chamber 2,
and then infuse into the cylinder. This means that evacuating Chamber 2 does not limit the ability of a gas to
either effuse or infuse. Choices B and C are eliminated. Buoyancy is irrelevant in this experiment, so choice D
should be eliminated. In addition, upon its evacuation, the density of the gas in Chamber 2 becomes zero, so
there is no buoyant force (no gas) within Chamber 2. Chamber 2 is evacuated to reduce the number of collisions,
allowing the gas to travel at a greater speed through the cylinder. Choice A is the best answer.
92.
Choice D is correct. If the temperature of the system increases from 25C to 100C, then the speeds of all gases
within the system also increase. The increase in temperature is from 298 K to 373 K, so the increase is less than
a factor of 2. This eliminates choices A and B. The speed of a gas depends on the square root of the temperature
(as measured in kelvins), so the relative speed is equal to V373/298, which is roughly Vl.25. The value of Vl.25
is less than 1.25, so choice C is eliminated. The best answer is choice D.
93.
Choice B is correct. The relative speeds of gases under identical conditions depend on the relative masses of the
compounds. N2O has a molecular mass of 44 grams per mole, CO has a molecular mass of 28 grams per mole, F2
has a molecular mass of 38 grams per mole, and Ne has an atomic mass of 20 grams per mole. This means that
neon has the greatest velocity, eliminating choices A and C. The next lightest gas is carbon monoxide, the
velocity of CO must be second in the sequence. This makes choice B the best answer.
Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
Questions 94 -100
Choice A is correct. Intuitively, as the volume decreases, the pressure increases, because the collisions increase.
This eliminates choices C and D, because the pressure must be greater than 760 torr. It now becomes a question of
determining how much the pressure changes. The equation can be set up intuitively. The final answer is in torr,
so it must be Pf = v?/y?-Pj, where f is final, i is initial, and ? is yet to be determined. We know the pressure
must increase, so insert the larger volume in the numerator and the smaller volume in the denominator. This
equates to Pf =L0 L/o.75 ^-760 torr. This simplifies to 4/3 x760 torr which is 760 +7m/y The value for 760/s
is greater than 250, so the answer is greater than 760 + 250 which best describes choice A. This may seem like a
lot of work on paper, but this should all be done in your head. Do not write math, think math!
61
95.
Choice A is correct. At STP, the total pressureis 760 torr. A systemwith 32% argon by moles corresponds to a
mole fraction of 0.32 for argon. Thepartialpressure of argon is 0.32(760 torr), whichis roughly one third of 760.
This is roughly 250 torr, which makes choice A thebest answer. Choices C and D are all clearly too high.
96.
Choice C is correct. The pressure decreases from 1.00 atm. to 0.90 arm., and the temperature decreases from 298
K to 277 K. The decrease in pressure increases the volume. The decrease in temperature decreases the volume.
The change in pressure and change in temperature have opposite effects in this question. This means that the
volume should be roughly the same. This eliminates choices A and D. The math, carried out as follows, shows
that choice C is the best answer.
Given:IlXl = W w/ ^ ^ ÎZl.Ml
niTi
n2T2
Ti
T2
V2 =N&2-W1 =fi.Q0y2Z7l67.2mL =(_2ZZ_W.2 mL >67.2 mL

IP2ATi/
97.
\0.90A298/
V268.2/
Choice B is correct. SO3 has a molecularmass of 80.06 grams per mole. Argon has an atomic mass of 39.95 grams
per mole. Sulfur trioxide is approximately twice as heavy as argon, so argon has a velocity that is roughly 1.4
(square root of 2) times greater than the velocity of SO3. This means it takes longer for the SO3 molecules to
effuse out of the balloon. The exact amount of time is greater by a factor of 1.4. 23.6minutes x 1.4 is greater than
both choices C and D. The value is less than choice A, so the best choice is choice B.
98.
Choice Aiscorrect. The average speed of agas can be found by using the equation v=/w 2KL por mis problem,
the relative rates of one gas to another is all that is asked, so 3, k (Boltzmann's constant), and T all can be
canceled out. The ratio of the velocities of the gases is: Vunknown = VmasSwater- =2. This can be checked by
vwater
VmasSimknown
making sure that both ratios are greater than 1.0. It canbe simplified by squaring the equation:
water =
massunknown
4, somuniôwn =masswater =18 _ 45 grams per mole. This is close to the molecular mass of He (4.0 grams per
4
mole), so choice A is the best answer. Just by looking at the choices given, one can see the other choices have
molecular weights that are well over 4.5 grams per mole.
99.
Choice D is correct. The greatest infusion rate is observed with the fastest compound, which corresponds to the
lightest compound. This question is in essence asking for the relative molecular masses of the answer choices.
Methane is the lightest, so choices A and C are eliminated. Chlorine gas is the heaviest, so choice D is correct.
100. Choice C is correct. The relative rates of effusion can be determined from the relatives masses of the two gases,
according to Equation 6.12. Methane has a molecular mass of 16 grams per mole, while helium has an atomic
mass of 4 grams per mole. The relative effusion rate is found as follows:
Effusion RateHelium _ VHe _ ^CHJ" _ Vl6 - -f[ - 2

Effusion RateMethane
vCRi
Vmffe
V4
Because helium is lighter, the rate for helium is greater than the rate for methane (twice as fast, according to
the math). Select choice C for optimum results in a situation such as this.
62
Phases
a) Definitions of Solids and Liquids

b) Properties of a Solid
c) Properties of a Liquid
Section VII
Phases
and
Phase Change Processes

a) Terminology and Energetics
b) Typical Phase Diagrams
c) Atypical Phase Diagrams
d) Water Trivia
Phase Changes
e) Supercritical Fluids
f) Heating Curves
Liquid-Gas Equilibrium
Generic Heating Curve
\.5^x/ SK
Liquid to Qas
a) Vapor Pressure
b) Vapor Pressure Graphs

c) Boiling Point
d) Boiling Point Variations
i. Increasing Atmospheric Pressure
ii. Decreasing Atmospheric Pressure
e) Raoults Law
E
Solid to Liquid,
Liquid
/solid
f)
Distillation
Colligative Properties
Heat added
a) Concentration Effects
b) Boiling Point Elevation

c) Freezing Point Depression
d) Osmotic Pressure
e) Conductance
RERKELEV
Ur.E.V-I.E'W
Phases Section Goals

Know the definitions for a solid and a liquid.
You must know the differencesbetween a solid and a liquid at the microscopic and macroscopic
levels. Youmust understand lattices,intermolecular forces,and volume. In both liquids and solids,
the moleculesare in contact with their neighbors,so they have a defined volume.
Know the terms and definitions of the phase change processes.
___
You must know the terms and conditions for phase change processes. The phase changes include:
evaporation, melting, sublimation, condensation, freezing, and deposition. You must alsoknowthe
terms that describe the conditions under which these processes occur, such as isothermal, isobaric,
isochoric,and adiabatic conditions. You must know the energetics associated with each phase change
process in terms of free energy,enthalpy,and entropy.
Be able to read a heating curve.
You must be able to read a heating curve to extract information about enthalpy of fusion, enthalpy
of vaporization,and heat capacities for the three phases. You should be able to identify the phase
at different points on the heating curve.
Recognize the key points and features of the phase diagram.
__^
You must know where the solid, liquid, and gas sections of the phase diagram are. You must also
be able to identify the triple point, normal boiling point, and thecritical point. Be able to identify
atypical regions of the diagram, suchas the areawherethe material exists as a supercritical fluid.
Be ableto recognize the phase diagram of waterby focusing on the negative slopeof the barrier
between the sofid and liquid regions of the phase diagram.
*<* Understand vapor pressure and boiling point.
The conversion between liquid and gas occurs over a wide range of temperatures. At the boiling
point, the vapor pressure is equal to the atmospheric pressure. At temperatures lower than the
boiling point, vapor pressure still exists,but at a value that is lower than atmospheric pressure. The
easier it is to vaporize a compound (in terms of lower enthalpy), the greater its vapor pressure.
Understand the principle behind Raoult's law.
Raoult's law describes vapor pressure above a mixture of two or more liquids. According to Raoult's
law, in an ideal mixture, the vapor pressure of any given component depends on the mole fraction
of that component in the solution and its normal vapor pressure under the system conditions. Vapor
pressure increases with temperature and mole fraction.
Understand the theory behind distillation.
Distillation is a purification method you normally consider to be an organic chemistry laboratory

technique. On the theoretical level, it is based on the relative vapor pressures of the components
and on Raoult's law. The vapor above a solution is richer in the more volatile component than the
solution. This difference in relative mole fraction can be exploited by repeatedly evaporating and
condensing the mixture. With each cycle,it gets becomes richer in the less volatile component.
Understand the colliqative properties of matter.
Colligative properties are properties of a solution that depend on the number of solute particles in
thesolution, not on thenatureofthesoluteparticles. Examples include: freezing pointdepression,
boilingpoint elevation,osmoticpressure,andconductance. The colligative properties canbe exploited

to convert salt water into a more ion-free state.
General Chemistiy
Phases and Phase Changes
Introduction

The three common phases of matter are solid, liquid, and gas. The fundamental
difference between the three phases is how the molecules (or atoms) interact with
one another. Solids have the least kinetic energy of the three common phases.
Their kinetic energy is in the vibrational and rotational forms. The molecules of a
solid do not change their positions. Liquids are more energetic than solids, yet
not as energetic as gases. Their kinetic energy is in the translational, vibrational,
and rotational forms, although the amount of their kinetic energy is less than that
of a gas. Gases have the most kinetic energy of the three common phases, and it
exists in the translational, vibrational, and rotational forms.
Of more interest than the phases themselves are the phase change processes.
Going from a less energetic phase to a more energetic phase is both an
endothermic and endergonic process. Changing phases requires changing the
environmental conditions acting on a system. Each material has a unique phase
diagram that summarizes this information. We shall look at several phase
diagrams in this section, noting key points and features of generic and specific
phase diagrams. The MCAT test writers to date have focused on the atypical
aspects of phase diagrams. Terminology for both conditions and phase changes
will make up much of the phase change portion of this section.
Great amounts of energy can be stored and released via phase change processes.
The liquid-gas phase change process is the source of the energy that drives
engines and makes refrigeration possible. It is important to understand that
phase changes occur with changes in temperature orpressure, not just changes in
temperature. The idea of vapor pressure is not a complicated one, but it certainly
has complicated applications. The study of vapor pressure includes Raoult's law,
the Clausius-Clapyeron equation, and the theoretical perspective on distillation.
The largest portion of this section shall address the nuances of the liquid-gas
equilibrium.
We shall also address the behavior of solute particles in solution. Addition of

solute affects certain physical properties of a solution, including boiling point,
freezing point, osmotic pressure, and conductivity. These are known as
colligative properties, and they vary with the concentration of the solution.
Increasing the amount of a soluble material (solute) increases the interactions
between molecules in the liquid phase only, not in the gas or solid phase. Ice that
is frozen from a solution of salt water is relatively pure, with the occasional
trapped ion in its lattice structure. Equally, steam formed from evaporation from
a salt water solution consists of pure water vapor. Purification processes are
affected by colligative properties.
The most important features of the phase change section are applications of
phase changes. These often make up the bulk of the material from this section
that appears on the MCAT. Understanding water as both a pure material and as
a solvent is critical. Water has many unique features, due to its extensive
hydrogen bonding. Water has the highest density of hydrogen bonding of any
material, which drastically affects its physical properties, such as boiling point,
melting point, and solubility.
65
General Chemistry
Phases
Phases
Definitions of Solids and Liquids
Solids and liquids are two of the three common phases in which we observe
matter. In both cases, molecules are in contact at the microscopic level with one
another, which accounts for solids and liquids having a definite volume. The
difference between the two phases lies in the ability of their molecules to move.
In solids, molecules are in a lattice structure, and they experience vibrational and
rotational motion only. The atoms are not displaced, so there is no translational
motion. This results in solids having definite shapes on the macroscopic level. In
liquids, molecules are free to move, so they experience translational motion,
although there is no net motion of the system. The molecules also experience
vibrational and rotational motion.
The result of translational motion of its
component molecules is that liquids have no definite shape on the macroscopic

level. Definitions for both a solid and a liquid are listed below:
Solid:
A state of matter having both a definite shape and a definite volume.

The molecules do not change position, resulting in a fixed structure,
whose molecules are in contact with neighboring molecules at all
times.
Liquid: A state of matter having a definite volume, but no definite shape.

The molecules change position, resulting in continuous random
motion, and molecules that remain in contact with neighboring
molecules at all times.
Properties of a Solid
Because solids are defined as having both a definite shape and a definite volume,
they have dimensions on the macroscopic level. The molecules of a solid are
arranged in a fixed lattice structure, on the microscopic level, they have repeating
structural subunits referred to as unit cells. The macroscopic shape of a solid
object can vary, but the microscopic arrangement (lattice structure) is constant.
This is often referred to as the crystal structure (or lattice structure) of the solid.
Lattice structures exist for both elements and compounds. Figure 7-1 shows two
lattice structures and unit cells for atomic solids.
Unit cell is a face centered cubic
Unit cell is a simple cubic
with four atoms per cell.
with one atom per cell.
Figure 7-1
66
The Berkeley Review
vieneral CtieilliStry
Phases and Phase Changes Phases Change Processes
The three most common unit cells are the simple cubic with one atom per
repeating unit cell, the body-centered cubic with two atoms per repeating unit
cell, and the face-centered cubic (which forms the cubic closest packed structure)
with four atoms per repeating unit cell. Alkali metals often pack to form the
simple cubic. Gold and silver pack to form a face-centered cubic.
Solids have density (which is often used as a physical measurement in the

identification of an unknown solid). A common procedure for determining the
density of a solid is to place the solid into a volumetric container filled with a
known liquid. The solid's volume is determined by measuring the displacement
volume of the liquid. It is assumed that the displaced volume is due strictly to
the volume of the solid. The mass is measured separately, and from this, the
density of the solid may be calculated. This technique should not be mistaken
with displacement weight, as in buoyancy. If the solid is buoyant in the liquid,
then the density of the solid is less than the density of the liquid, and the relative
density of the two materials is equal to the percent of the solid that is submerged.
It should be intuitively obvious that in an immiscible mixture of a solid and
liquid, the less dense material rises to the top. When the solid is less dense than
the liquid, the mass of the floating solid is equal to the mass of the liquid
occupying the same volume as the submerged portion of the floating solid.
These topics are more likely to be found in the physics section of the exam.
Example 7.1
Which of the following statements about solids is (are) NOT true?
I: Solids change molecular structure constantly.
II: Solids have less kinetic energy than gases and liquids.
HI: Solids have more entropy than gases or liquids.
A.
B.
C.
D.
I only
Hlonly
I and II only
I and III only
Solution
Solids have organized lattice structures, so they do not change molecular

structure, making statement I an invalid statement. The question is asking for
invalid statements, so the correct answer choice must contain I. This eliminates
choice B. Because atoms in solids exhibit no translational motion, solids have the
least kinetic energy of the three common phases. This makes statement II valid,
and eliminates choice C.
Because solids form lattice structures, their atoms
maintain position, resulting in lower entropy than liquids and gases (where the
atoms are free to move and thus change position). This makes statement III
invalid. From this, it can be concluded that choice D is the best answer.
Properties of a Liquid
Liquids have no definite shape, but they do have a definite volume.
Understanding liquids is important in both chemistry and physics. Liquids are

fluids, so they are fundamental to all discussions of hydraulics, buoyancy, and
the Bernoulli effect. From a chemistry point of view, however, it is more
important to know the molecular structure and the solvent properties of liquids.
You must consider intermolecular forces such as hydrogen bonding, polar
interactions, dipole moments and van der Waals forces. The strength of these
forces is in the same order as just listed in the preceding sentence.
67
General Chemistiy
Phases
It is important to recall that the strength of these forces is comparable up to the

boiling point. Above the boiling point, molecules are no longer in contact.
Certain intermolecular forces also affect solubility properties, as often studied in
organic chemistry. Figure 7-2is a schematic representation of a liquid.
All molecules are in contact with one another,

but no definite lattice structure exists.
Figure 7-2
Because their molecules are in motion, liquids can flow, which defines them as a
fluid. Incidental facts about liquids that you should know are that liquids
typically have the highest heat capacity of the three common phases, and liquids
are compressible. The density of a liquid decreases (because the volume
increases) with increasing temperature, with the exception of water from 0C to
4C. It should be noted that a compound is a liquid at room temperature, if its
melting point is less than room temperature and its boiling point is greater than
room temperature. A liquid also has other physical properties, such as surface
tension and viscosity. These terms are defined below.
Surface tension: The resistance of a liquid to an increase in its surface area. It

generally increases as the intermolecular forces increase.
Viscosity:
The resistance of a liquid to flow. It can also be observed as
the resistance to flow by an object through the liquid.
Example 7.2
If an object floats on the surface of a liquid in such a manner that sixty percent of
the object is submerged, which of the following sets of density values accurately
describes the liquid and solid?
A. Liquid: 0.90 grams per mL; solid: 1.50 grams per mL
B. Liquid: 1.25 grams per mL; solid: 0.75 grams per mL
C. Liquid: 1.00 grams per mL; solid: 1.67 grams per mL
D. Liquid: 1.50 grams per mL; solid: 1.00 grams per mL
Solution
Because the solid floats on the liquid, the buoyant force upward is greater than
the gravitational force (weight) downward. This means that the solid is less
dense than the liquid and eliminates choices A and C. According to Archimedes'
principle, the percent of the solid submerged is equal to the density of the solid
divided by the density of the liquid. This means that choice D is eliminated,
because the ratio of the solid density to the liquid density is 2/3, which equals
0.67, not 0.60. This would make the solid 67% submerged. The correct answer
(and only choice remaining) is choice B. The ratio of 0.75 to 1.25 is equal to 0.60.
68
The Berkeley Review
General CJhemiStry
Phases and Phase Changes Phases Change Processes
M!EtSSe
Terminology and Energetics
A phase change process is a physical process, not a chemical process, by which

the state of matter changes. In a phase change, the molecules themselves do not
change, but the interactions between molecules do change. A phase change
process is reversible. For instance, if a solid is converted into a liquid by
changing the external conditions, then the liquid can be converted back into a
solid upon reestablishing the original conditions. All phase changes involve a
change in the enthalpy (heat energy of the system) and entropy (organizational
potential energy of the system, considered as randomness of the molecules).
Phase changes are either endothermic or exothermic processes, depending on
whether the final state is of higher or lower energy than the original state. If a
particular phase change is an exothermic process, then the addition of heat is
required for the reverse process because it must be an endothermic process. On
the macroscopic level, phase changes result in changes in volume and changes in
shape. The six typical phase change processes are listed in Table 7.1below.
Phase Change
Liquid to gas
Gas to liquid
Solid to liquid
Liquid to solid
Solid to gas
Gas to solid
Term
Heat Term
Entropy Term
Vaporization
(ASvap)
Condensation
Endothermic (AHvap)
Exothermic (- AHvap)
Melting
Endothermic (AHfusion)
Freezing
Exothermic (- AHfusion)
Sublimation
Endothermic (AHsub)
Deposition
Exothermic (- AHsub)
(- ASyap)
(ASfusion)
(- ASfusion)
(ASsub)
(- ASsub)
Table 7.1
As a point of interest, you should know that the relative energeticsfor the three
phase change processes are: AHsublimation > AHvap0rization > AHfusion and
ASsublimation > ASvap0rization > ASfusion
Example 7.3
The conversion from a solid to a gas represents what kind of phase change and
has what kind of energy change is associated with it?
A. It is known as sublimation, and it is exothermic.
B. It is known as deposition, and it is exothermic.

C. It is known as vaporization, and it is endothermic.
D. It is known as sublimation, and it is endothermic.
Solution
This question focuses on either memorization or your ability to move your eyes
up this page slightly to read Table 7.1. (For your exam, you may prefer the
memorization route, because if you have Table 7.1 in sight, you are probably
cheating.) According to Table 7.1, conversion from solid to gas is sublimation,
and the process is endothermic (i.e., because the particles finish at a higher
energy level, then energy must have been added to the system.) Choice D is the
best answer.
69
General ChemiStry
Example 7.4
Which of the following statements is NOT true with regard to phase changes
starting from the solid phase?

A. Sublimation results in a system with increased entropy.
B. During melting, the lattice structure of solid matter is broken down.
C. Following sublimation, the space between molecules is increased.
D. Following melting, atoms lose their ability to migrate freely.
Solution
Sublimation changes a material from the solid phase into the gas phase. In the
solid phase, molecules are held in a rigid lattice structure and are not free to
move. Once in the gas phase, the molecules are free to move in any direction
until a collision occurs. Because of the increased mobility associated with the gas
phase, there is more entropy in the gas phase than the solid phase. This makes
choice A a valid statement. During melting, the material transforms from the
solid phase into the liquid phase. Any lattice structure that may exist in the solid
phase is lost in the liquid phase, as the molecules are free to migrate. This makes
choice B a valid statement. Because a gas is less dense than a solid, more free
space must exist between the molecules of a gas than the molecules of a solid. In
the gas phase, the molecules are independent and exhibit no intermolecular
forces, so they are far apart. In the solid phase, the molecules exhibit
intermolecular forces, and they are touching one another. This makes choice C a
valid statement. In the liquid phase, molecules have the ability to migrate freely
through a solution, so when the phases changes from a solid (with no free
migration of molecules) to a liquid (which has free migration of molecules),
molecules are able to go in any direction through solution. This makes choice D
an invalid statement, and thus the best answer.
In addition to the phase change terminology, you should know the terms that
describe the conditions of a system. There are four terms that describe static
system conditions with which you should be familiar. They are listed below:
Isothermal
Conditions where the temperature of the system does not change

(sometimes referred to as Tconstant)-
Isobaric
Conditions where the pressure of the system does not change

(sometimes referred to as Pconstant)-
Isochoric
Conditions where the volume of the system does not change

(sometimes referred to as VCOnstant)-
Adiabatic
Conditions where the system is perfectly insulated, so that heat

neither enters nor exits the system (referred to as qconstant)-
Isochoric is not likely to be seen, but nonetheless it is a relevant term. You can
often distinguish whether a term is important or not by its familiarity. If it was
never mentioned during your course lectures on campus (e.g., words like
isochoric and deposition), it is less likely that you will need it memorized for the
MCAT. They will likely define it for you. That said, a perfect example is a
supercriticalfluid, which has appeared on several different versions of the MCAT.
This is a great example of how the MCAT presents an unfamiliar term to describe
an interesting concept, which can be deciphered from the parts of its name.
Beyond the critical point exists a supercritical fluid. It is supercritical because it
exists beyond the critical point, and it is a fluid because it is part gas and part
liquid, both of which flow (are amorphous).
70
The Berkeley Review
General GhemiStry
Typical Phase Diagrams
A phase diagram is a graph that summarizes the different states of matter for a
given compound or element with respect to temperature and pressure. From a
phase diagram, you can determine the phase that is most favorable or the
interface of phases for a material under a given set of conditions. Reading phase
diagrams accurately requires drawing lines from a given point on the diagram to
the x-axis and the y-axis. The point where the lines intersect is in the region of
the graph for the most favorable phase. Figure 7-3 is a generic phase diagram.
Supercritical fluid
Critical point
Gas
Triple point
Normal boiling point

Temperature (K)
Figure 7-3
Thetriple point, critical point, and normal boiling point are shown in Figure 7-3. The
triple point is where all three phasecancoexist simultaneously The critical point
is the highest temperature and pressure at which a liquid may be observed.
Beyond the critical point, it is impossible to distinguish between a gasand liquid,
so it is referred to as a supercritical fluid. The normal boiling point is the
temperature at which a material boils when the pressure is 1.00 atm.
Example 7.5
Inwhat phase(orphases) does the material exist at pointe on the graph below?
'd
b
Temperature (K)
A.
B.
C.
D.
Liquid only
Liquid with a small amount of solid
Liquid with a small amount of gas
Liquid with a small amount of vapor
Solution
The middle region of a phase diagram is where the compound exists as a liquid.
An equilibrium between evaporation and condensation exists, so liquids exhibit
vapor pressure. Choice D is the best answer. Choice C looks tempting (because
a vapor is a gas), but vapor is the better word. The term vapor describes a gas
that exists in equilibrium with a liquid at a temperature below the boiling point.
71
Gener&l ChemiStry
It should be noted that the phase diagram does not show the only phase that is
observed under specific conditions, but the most abundant (and stable) phase
under those conditions. The most challenging part of phase diagrams is working
through the terminology.
Example 7.6
If a compound that exists primarily as a liquid at 39"C and 1.12 atm. is heated at
constant pressure, it converts into a gas. Upon cooling the compound back to
39C and 1.12 atm., the compound remains a gas. Which of the following
explanations BEST explains this observation?
A. The boiling point for the compound at 1.12 atm. must be 39C.
B. The molecules rearranged so that the bonds are different from those in the
original compound.
C. The compound must have two liquid phases.
D. The compound was heated beyond its critical temperature and thus cannot
become a liquid again.
Solution
A compound can exist in either of two phases when it is at its boiling point
(liquid/gas), melting point (solid/liquid), or sublimation point (solid/gas). For
the compound to exist as either a liquid or gas at a given temperature and
pressure, that temperature must be the boiling point at that pressure. There is no
indication that a chemical reaction took place, so choice B is not the best choice.
Having two unique liquid phases would not explain the observation, so choice C
is eliminated. Even after a compound is heated beyond its critical temperature, it
is capable of changing back to its original phase once cooled, so choice D is
eliminated. The best answer is choice A.
Example 7.7
Which arrow is INCORRECTLY identified below?
Solid
g /
/ Liquid & /
Vapor /
^^^ arrow a
/}
z*^
x>
/arrow d w
I*
CO
<r
Gas
Temperature (K)
A.
Arrow a is isobaric condensation.
B.
C.
Arrow b is isothermal deposition.

Arrow c is isothermal freezing.
D.
Arrow d is isobaric sublimation.
72
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Solution
Isobaric condensation is where the material is cooled at constant pressure from a
gas into a liquid. Because pressure is constant, the arrow must be horizontal,
which it is. Because it is condensation, the arrow must start in the gas region and
finish in the liquid region, which it does. Arrow a is correctly identified, so

choice A is eliminated. Isothermal deposition is where the material is
compressed at constant temperature from a gas into a solid. Because
temperature is constant, the arrow must be vertical, which it is. Because it is
deposition, the arrow must start in the gas region and finish in the solid region,
which it does. Arrow b is correctly identified, so choice B is eliminated.
Isothermal freezing is where the material is compressed at constant temperature
from a liquid into a solid. Because temperature is constant, the arrow must be
vertical, which it is. Because it is freezing , the arrow must start in the liquid
region and finish in the solid region, which it does not. Arrow c is incorrectly
identified, so choice C is the best answer. Isobaric sublimation is where the
material is heated at constant pressure from a solid into a gas. Because pressure
is constant, the arrow must be horizontal, which it is. Because it is sublimation,
the arrow must start in the solid region and finish in the gas region, which it
does. Arrow d is correctly identified, so choice D is eliminated.
Atypical Phase Diagrams
There is a difference between a typical phase diagram for most compounds and
the phasediagram for water. Thedifference between the two phase diagrams is
the negative slope associated with the line separating liquid from solid. Most
compounds can be compressed from a liquid into a solid at constant
temperature. The unusual thing about water is that an isothermal increase in

pressure compresses the solid (ice) into a liquid (water), resulting in the liquid
being denser than the solid. The properties ofwater can be referred to as weirdl
Figure 7-4 shows thephase diagram for water anda typical compound.
Phase Diagram for Water (H 20)
Phase Diagram for Typical Compound
&H
Temperature (Kelvin)
Temperature (Kelvin)
Figure 7-4
73
General CnemiStry
Example 7.8
Point a on the phase diagram below is which of the following?
Temperature
A.
B.
C.
D.
The critical point for carbon dioxide

The triple point for water
The triphasic point for carbon dioxide
The plasma point for water
Solution
Point a is whereall threephase linesintersect, so it is the triple point. The triple

point is defined as the temperature and pressure at whicha compound may exist
in any or all of the three phases simultaneously. Thenegative slopeof the Hquidsolid interface line confirms that the compound is water. The correct answer is
choice B.
Water Trivia
Random, unrelated facts about water have been tested on the MCAT on more
than one occasion. Two key facts about water are that its liquid form is denser
than its solid form, and it is densest at 4C. Thesolid can be compressed into a
liquid under relatively mild conditions. The ramifications of this include our
ability to ice skate upon frozen water. The fact that water is densest at 48C results
in the presence of the warmest water being at the bottom of a frozen lake (useful
information on your next ice fishing trip). Water also has an extremely high
boilingpoint for a compoundwith such a low molecularmass. Ammonia (NH3)
is of roughly comparable mass, and it has a boiling point of -33.4C. Methane
(CH4) is also ofroughly comparable mass, and it has a boiling point of -162.6C
This means thatforwater, hydrogen bondinghas a substantially more significant
effect on the boiling point than mass or other intermolecular forces. Water has
the densest hydrogen bonding of any compound.
Supercritical Fluids
A supercritical fluid exists when the conditions exceed the critical point. Super
critical fluids take on properties that are a compromise between gases and
liquids. Molecules are in free-moving clumps, where the density is greatest at
the bottom of the container (like a liquid), but the material fills the entire
container (likea gas). Supercritical fluids have a density between that of a liquid
and gas. Specific examples of supercritical fluids that are used industrially are
carbon dioxide and oxygen. Supercritical fluid carbon dioxide is used as a
decaffeinating solvent for coffee. It is a safe solvent for dry cleaning, which
makes it a great alternative to the more toxic organic solvents like methylene
chloride. Supercritical fluid oxygen chambers are used to completely oxidize
materials that do not burn cleanlyunder standard conditions with oxygen gas.
74
The Berkeley Review
General! diemlStry
Heating Curves
To generate a heating curve, a material is heated or cooled at a constant rate
under isobaric conditions over a broad temperature range, and the temperature
is recorded as a function of the heat added (or removed). A heating curve shows
the same features as a horizontal line in a standard phase diagram, but in
significantly more detail than a phase diagram. Figure 7-5 shows a typical
heating curve, drawn according to convention. As a good practice, draw graphs
with the axes interchanged, so that you recognize non-conventional views.
During phase changes: AH > AH^ and B.P. > M.P.
During heating: Cphase ^

Liquid to gas phase change / .jf
.A
v/^
W
Solid to liquid phase change/\-&
^<tf$
Oh
Total heat added at constant rate
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-5 depicts the overall view of the phase change process at constant
pressure from an energy perspective for a generic material. The graph of

temperature as a function of heat added shows the phases, phases changes, and
heat capacity of each phase. As labeled, plateaus in the graph represent phase
change processes, because as a material changes phase, the temperature remains
constant. During a phase change, the temperature does not change, because the
energy added to the system is being used to break intermolecular forces, rather
than to increase the average kinetic energy of the molecules. The enthalpy of
vaporization (represented by the second plateau) is greater in magnitude than

the enthalpy of fusion (represented by the first plateau). This is because more
energy is necessary to break the intermolecular forces (as observed with the
conversion from a liquid into a gas) than is necessary to weaken the
intermolecular forces (as observed with the conversionfrom a solid into a liquid).
Perhaps it is more obviousthat the boiling pointis greater than the melting point,
than it is that AHvaporization is greater than AHfusion/ but Dotn concepts are
rooted in the same supporting idea.
Non-horizontal lines represent where the material is being heated without any
phase change transpiring. In these regions, the temperature of the material is
increasing. This means that the slope of each line correlates with the ratio of
temperature change to the heat input. Theheat capacity of a material is the heat
required to raise one gram of the material by one degree Celsius, so the units of
heat capacity (C) are calories per gram-kelvins. The slope of the line in the
temperature change regions of a heating curve is temperature change per heat
added, which has units of kelvins per calories. The slope of the line is inversely
proportional to the heat capacity of the material in that particular phase. This is
to say that the flatter the line, the greater the heat capacity.
75
General (JlieniiStry
In Figure 7-5, the slopes for each of the three phases are different, implying that
the heat capacitiesfor each of the three phases are different. The heat capacity of
the liquid is the greatest of the three phases. This is not unusual, given that
liquids can absorb intermolecular vibration energy as well as translational kinetic
energy. Solids can only vibrate, and gases can only move translationally. This is
the reasoning behind choosing a liquid as the medium to absorb heat in a heatexchange system, such as an automobile radiator. Heat-exchange systems are
always set so that heat is transferred in a counter-current fashion. This is also
seen with ion exchange (a good example is the kidney).
Example 7.9
If melting a solid requires exactly 20 kj per mole, then which of the following
statements is true?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Sublimation requires less than 20 kj per mole.

Vaporization requires less than 20 kj per mole.
Freezing releases more than 20 kj per mole.
Condensing releases more than 20 kj per mole.
Solution
Given that AHsubiimation is equal to AHfusion + AHvaporization/ and that

^vaporization is greater than AHôn, then AHsubiimation must be greaterthan
AHfusion (which equals 20 kj per mole). This eliminates choices A and B.
Freezing releases the same amount of heat that melting absorbs, so choice C is
eliminated. Because vaporizing absorbs more heat than melting, condensation
releases more heat than freezing. The correct answer is choice D.
76
The Berkeley Review
General CliemiStry
Vapor Pressure
Above every liquid and solid (although we mostly consider liquids), there is a
finite amount of vapor formed when molecules at the surface layer escape. A
vapor is composed of gas particles that are in equilibrium with the liquid phase,
so they temporarily exist a gas, until they condense back into their more
favorable phase. For example, we refer to oxygen as "oxygen gas" at room
temperature, because it exists as a gas in its most stable form. On the other hand,
we refer to water in the gas phase as "water vapor," because the most favorable
form of water at room temperature is a liquid. We refer to steam as "water gas"
only when it exists at a temperature above the boiling point of water (100C).
Gaseous water molecules at temperatures lower than 100C are in a state of
equilibrium between evaporation and condensation. The formal definition of

vapor pressure above a liquid is:
Force per unit area above the surface ofa liquid exerted by molecules formed
upon evaporation of the liquid.
The vapor pressure of a liquid is simply the partial pressure exerted by the gas
molecules formed by evaporation from the surface of the liquid, when it is in
equilibrium with the gas molecules condensing back into the liquid. The vapor
pressure above a pure liquid depends on the temperature of the liquid and the
AHvaporization of the liquid. Figure 7-6 shows the surface of a liquid and the
most favorable points from which molecules can evaporate.
Molecules can evaporate only from the surface,
and tend to evaporate from the corners.
Figure 7-6
In theliquid phase, molecules are not packed in the same orderly fashion as they
are in a solid. The picture in Figure 7-6 is drawn with orderly particles for
simplicity. Corner molecules have the fewest neighbors, so they have the fewest
intermolecular forces. Because of the minimal forces, molecules evaporate most
readily from the corners.
Vapor pressure can be measured in either an open orclosed system. In a closed

system, a partial pressure ofvapor exists, because the rate of vaporization equals
the rate of condensation. This is most typically how vapor pressure is
determined. However, the definition of vapor pressure does not apply only to a
closed system. In an open system, the vapor escapes, so it does not reach a state
of equilibrium between the rate of vaporization and the rate of condensation.
The vapor pressure is a measure of the pressure just above the surface of the
liquid. It is difficult to measure, so we generally consider vapor pressure in an
open system from a theoretical perspective, and apply values that have been
determined previously in a closed system at known temperature.
77
General ChemiStry
Vapor pressure is independent of the shape and volume of a container. The

vapor pressure above a dish of ethanol is the same as the vapor pressure above a
test tube of ethanol. Despite the fact that the dish has substantially more liquid
surface area, vapor pressure is still measured as force per unit area. The same
amount of ethanol is vaporizing from each system per unit area of its surface, as
long as the temperature of both systems is the same. The rate of vaporization is
greater with the greater surface area in Container 2, but the vapor pressure is the
same in both containers. Figure 7-7 compares two containers that share the same
vapor pressure, when they contain the same liquid at the same temperature.
Container 2
Container 1
Figure 7-7
Because vapor pressure depends primarily on solution temperature (energy of

the molecules) and AHvaporjzation (the energy necessary to overcome
intermolecular forces), the atmospheric pressure does not significantly affect the
vapor pressure. Boiling point depends on the atmospheric pressure, but do not
confuse boiling point and vapor pressure. The following relationships hold true
with regard to the vapor pressure of a system:
Pvapor increases as temp increases; Pvapor decreases as AHvaporization increases

Example 7.10
Which of the following statements isTRUE about vapor pressure?

A. The vapor pressure ofa liquid decreases with increasing temperature.
B. The vaporpressure of a liquid isalways lower at higherelevations.
C. The vaporpressure of a liqu id is always higherat higherelevations.
D. The vapor pressure ofLiquid Xis greater than the vapor pressure of Liquid
Z, if the normal boiling point of Xis lower than the normal boiling point of
Solution
Vapor pressure correlates with temperature, so vapor pressure increases with

temperature. This makes choice A incorrect. Elevation has no (or a negligible)
effect on the vapor pressure, because the atmospheric pressure does not affect
the vapor pressure (or rate of vaporization) to any appreciable extent. The
temperature and AHvap0rjzation have the greatest effect on the vapor pressure.
A lower atmospheric pressure lowers the boiling point, but it has no effect on the
vapor pressure. This eliminates choices Band C. As the boiling point increases,
the ability for a compound to vaporize decreases. This means that as the boiling
point increases, less of the vapor is formed and consequently the vapor pressure
decreases. This makes choice D correct.
78
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Vapor Pressure Graphs
Vapor pressureincreases as the temperature of thesolution increases, but not in a

linear fashion. The graph in Figure 7-8 shows the relationship between vapor
pressure and temperature. The graph cannot intersect the y-axis when the units
of temperature are kelvins and the axis originates at zero.
Temperature
Figure 7-8
The relationship between vapor pressure and temperature is exponential. It is

highly unlikely that you have the Clausius-Clapeyron relationship memorized,
so theonly way to know this is using intuition. Ifyou have everboiled waterfor
any reason, then you have observed the process that generates the graph in
Figure 7-8. It take a while for the bubbles to form in water as it nears its boiling
point. Once bubbles form, it is only a short period of time before the water
actually starts to boil. The graph shows a small increase in vapor pressure at
lower temperatures (which fits with the lengthy duration before bubbles form),
but a rapid ascent at higher temperatures (which fits with the short period of
time between bubble formation and boiling).
Equation 7.1, the Clausius-Clapeyron equation, can be used to explain the

relationship between vapor pressure and temperature. If T2 is greater than Ti,
then the value of
Ê. (J
vap
VT2
Ljis negative, so the value of In -^ is negative.
Ti/
P2
When In =-1- is negative, P2 is greater than Pi. Theconclusion from this is that as
p2
the temperature of a liquid increases, the pressure of its vapor increases, but in an
exponential manner. Vaporization is always an endothermic process, so
AHyaporization isalways a positive value.
. ^p = AH vaporization H _j\
R
\T2
(7.1)
Ti/
Equation 7.1 can be used to calculate the vapor pressureof a liquid at any given
temperature, as long as the vapor pressure of the same liquid at another
temperatureis known. The vapor pressure at the normalboilingpoint is 760 torr
(one of a pair of valuesis usuallyvapor pressure at the normal boiling point). In
addition to determining the vapor pressure of a liquid at a given temperature
from knowing its boiling point, the boiling point for a compound can be
calculated at any given atmospheric pressure if any other vapor pressure for it is
known. Calculations involving Equation 7.1 are unlikely, but it should still be
understood conceptually and graphically. It is a natural log function of pressure
and temperature, but it is tricky to use because of the minus sign.
79
General Chemistry
Of more use than calculations is a conceptualunderstanding of the relationship

between boiling point, enthalpy of vaporization, volatility, and vapor pressure.
Figure 7-9demonstrates the relationship of these measurements.
As AHvaporization T; Volatility 1;Boiling point T; Vapor pressure i

Figure 7-9
The reason the graph in Figure 7-8 reaches an endpoint is because the solution
reaches its boiling point, the highest temperature at which liquid may still exist.
The boiling point is dependent on the atmospheric pressure, because the highest
vapor pressure that the solution can reach is equal to atmospheric pressure. The
boilingpoint is defined as the temperature at which the vapor pressure is equal
to the atmospheric pressure. The limits of the graph in Figure 7-8 are shown
below in Figure 7-10.
760-
Temperature (C)
Normal boiling point
Figure 7-10
Example 7.11
If Compound X evaporates more readily than Compound Y, which of the

following statements must be FALSE?
A. Compound X has a greater vapor pressure than Compound Y at room
temperature.
B. Compound X has a greater boiling point than Compound Y.

C. Compound X has greater volatility than Compound Y.
D. Compound Xhas a lower enthalpy of vaporization than Compound Y.
Solution
Because Compound X is evaporating more readily than Compound Y,

Compound X is more volatile than Compound Y, making choice C a valid
statement. A more volatile compound has a greater vapor pressure (more
evaporated molecules) at a given temperature, so choice A is also a valid
statement. With greater volatility, Compound X must have weaker
intermolecular forces, and thus a lower AHvaporization than Compound Y,

making choice D a valid statement. The easier it is to vaporize a compound, the
less energy that is required to vaporize it, so it has a lower boiling point. This
means that Compound X has a lower boiling point. Choice B is an invalid
statement, making it the correct answer.
80
The Berkeley Review
General ChenilStry
Boiling Point
The boiling point of a compound is defined in two ways: one based on phases
and the other based on vapor pressure:
The boiling point is the temperature above which a substance may not exist as a liquid.
The temperature at which the vapor pressure ofa liquid is equal to the atmospheric
pressure.
Thismeans that at reduced atmosphericpressure (forexample, in the mountains)
the boiling point of a liquid is lower than normal. Under cases of increased
pressure (such as thetypical pressure in a pressure cooker), the boiling point ofa
liquid is higher than normal. The normal boiling point of a compound is
measured at 1.00 atmospheres of pressure. The boiling process involves
vaporization of a compound in its liquid phase, which converts it to its gas
phase. The boiling point is affected by intermolecular forces and atmospheric

pressure.
Figure 7-11 compares the boiling points for the hydrogen-based compounds of
sixteendifferent elements. Notice that compounds containing elements aligned
in the same column of the periodic table are connected in groups offour by solid
or broken lines.
SnH4
200
HI SbH3 H2Te
Boiling point (K)

Figure 7-11
This graph shows the effects of hydrogen bonding, molecular mass, and polarity
on the boiling point. The effect of hydrogen bonding on the boiling point of a
compound isseen with the deviation ofH2O, HF, and NH3 from linear behavior.
Theeffect of molecular mass on the boilingpoint is seen in the gradual increase
inboiling point as a periodic group is descended. The effect of polarity on the

boiling point is demonstrated by the higher boiling points associated with the
compounds having two lone pairs, rather than with the compounds of equal
mass having either one or three lone pairs. The molecules with two lone pairs
arethemost polarofanycompounds having comparable molecular masses.
81
General ChemiStry
This graph (Figure 7-11) presents a large package of data, from which you must
be able to extract useful information and understand it in terms of the definitions
and background knowledge that you already possess. For instance, the boiling
points of HCl, HBr,and HI vary because of the increasing molecular mass of each
compound. The greater the molecular mass of the compound, the harder it is to
vaporize the compound. The harder it is to vaporize the compound, the greater
the boiling point of that compound. This accounts for the increase in boiling
point with increased mass for the haloacids. The same trend is observed with the
other compounds in their periodic column (family).
Much can be observed when the boiling points of H2S and HCl are compared,
because their molecular masses are roughly equivalent, and neither forms
hydrogen bonds (the hydrogen must be bonded to an N, O, or F for hydrogen
bonding). The boiling point of H2S is greater than that of HCl, because the H2S
molecule is more polar than HCl, due to its bent geometry. To see this, the
compounds must be viewed in three dimensions. The slight deviation from
linear behavior within the family that is observed with H2S and HCl is used by
some chemists to argue that the two compounds form very weak hydrogen
bonds. This deviation is small compared to the ones observed in NH3, H2O,and
HF, so any hydrogen bonding is minimal (ifnot negligible).
The boiling point of water is the greatest of the sixteen compounds listed in
Figure 7-11, because the oxygen has two lone pairs and two hydrogens that are
capable of forming hydrogen bonds. Therefore, all of the lone pairs and
hydrogens have partners with which to form hydrogen bonds. In the case of HF,
there are three lonepairs but only one hydrogen on fluorine, so only one H bond
can exist bond per HF molecule. This means that there are lone pairs on fluorine
that have no hydrogenwith whichto form a hydrogen bond. The lower amount
of hydrogen bonding accounts for the lower boiling point of HF relative to H2O.
The same holds true for the relative boiling point of ammonia (which has three
hydrogens but only one lone pair present on the central nitrogen) relative to
water.
Example 7.12
Which of the following compounds has the highestboiling point?

A.
B.
C.
D.
H3CNH2
H3CCH2NH2
H3COH
H3CCH2OH
Solution
The highest boiling point is associated with the compound with the greatest
intermolecular forces and greatest molecular mass. Each compound can form
hydrogen bonds, but the alcohols are more polar and form stronger hydrogen
bonds than their amine equivalents. This eliminates choices A and B. Ethanol
(H3CCH2OH) is heavier than methanol (H3COH), so the higher boiling point is

found with ethanol, choice D.
82
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Boiling Point Variations
The boiling point of a compound can be altered either by varying the

atmospheric pressure or by varying the intermolecular forces (which in turn
alters AHvaporization)- Boiling point decreases asthe atmospheric pressure above

a liquid decreases (this is evident when you boil water in mountainous regions
and in vacuum distillation). Boiling point increases as the atmospheric pressure
above a liquid increases (this is evident in a pressure cooker). Boiling point
increases as soluble impurities are added to solution (this is evident when you
add salt to boiling water).
Increasing Atmospheric Pressure (Example: A Pressure Cooker)

The boiling point of a liquid is increased by increasing the atmospheric pressure
above the liquid. This can be accomplished by vaporizing the liquid in a closed
system. You should never heat a closed system, for it will eventually explode.
This is why experiments that attempt to raise the boiling point of a compound
often use a partially closed system, one with some means of venting gas when
the pressure gets too high. A pressurecooker is an example of a partially closed
system. As the water in the system is heated, it vaporizes. This increases the
atmospheric pressure, and thusincreases theboiling point. Eventually, whenthe

pressure is greatenough, it forces the pressure valve open(orlifts thelid) to vent
the atmospheric gases, thus reducing the pressure inside. This occurs in cycles,
which is why the lid (or valve) of a pressure cooker flutters as its contents heat
up. By increasing the mass of the lid or the tension in the pressure valve, the
boiling point of the water can be raised. In essence, a pressure valve serves as a
primitive kind ofthermostat. More sophisticated thermostats are usually a coiled
bimetallic strip that expands or contracts as it is heated or cooled. A mercury
trip-switch is connected to thecoil so thata bead ofmercury balances at a certain
point. When the temperature being maintained gets too high, the metal loop
uncoils slightly, tilting the glass tube with the mercury in it. This causes the
mercury liquid to fall to one side thereby connecting the open ends of a wire
hooked to a cooling fan, which turns it on.
Decreasing Atmospheric Pressure (Example: Vacuum Distillation)

The boiling point ofa liquid is decreased bydecreasing the atmospheric pressure
above the liquid. Reducing the atmospheric pressure makes it easier for a
compound toboil. This iswhy all liquids boil inavacuum, despite the extremely
low temperature. Aneat experiment toconduct is to fill a syringe partially with
a volatile organic liquid (acetone works well), making sure that no air is in the
syringe. Plug the tip with your thumb, then pull up onthe plunger. Avacuum
is generated in the syringe, so the organic liquid should begin to boil (small
bubbles can usually be seen). As it boils, the walls of the syringe actually get
very cold. This experiment confirms that reducing atmospheric pressure reduces
the boiling point. The same principle isobserved invacuum distillation, where a
mixture is distilled under reduced pressure, so that the boiling points are
reduced. Vacuum distillation is employed when a compound has an extremely
high boiling point or when it has a decomposition temperature lower than its
normal boiling point.
83
General ChemiStry
Raoult's Law
According to Raoult's law, the vapor pressure above a solution of two or more
miscible liquids depends on the mole fraction of each compound in solution. The
concept behind this theory is that the mole fraction of a compound corresponds
to the percentage of the surface of the liquid mixture due to that compound. If
any component makes up only half of the surface, then only half as much as what
normally evaporates from the pure liquid, vaporizes from the mixture. Raoult's
law is shown below as Equation 7.2.
"vapor =XjPvapor (pure)
(7.2)
The X{ in Raoult's equation is the mole fraction of the component in solution, not
in the vapor state. The mole fraction in vapor for the more volatile component is
always greater than the mole fraction in solution for the more volatile
component. As the mole fraction of a compound in solution decreases, the vapor
pressure of that component above the solution decreases. This is attributed to
the reduced surface area of that component, and consequently less of that
component evaporating away from the surface. PVapor (pure) is the vapor
pressure ofa pure sample ofthe component under those conditions, andPVapor
is the measured vapor pressure of the component. Raoult's law is used to
calculate the vapor pressure of one component, which can be thought of as a
partial vapor pressure.
Example 7.13
0.10 moles of NH3, PH3, and ASH3 are placed into a beaker at -100C, where all
three exist in liquid phase. What can be said about their relative vapor
pressures?
A.
B.
C
D.
PasH3 <PPH3 < PNH3

Pph3<PAsH3<PnH3
PAsH3 <PNH3 <PPH3
PNh3 <PasH3 <PPH3
Solution
According to Raoult's law, the vapor pressure depends on the mole fraction and
the pure vapor pressure of the component. The solution contains equal molar
quantities of the three components, so the mole fraction is identical for all three
components. Consequently, the highest vapor pressure results from the
compound with the lowest boiling point (highest pure vapor pressure).
Ammonia (NH3) has the highestboilingpoint, becauseit forms hydrogen bonds,

so it has the lowest vapor pressure. Only choice D shows ammonia with the
lowest vapor pressure, so choice D is the best answer. To verify the order in
choice D, the relative boiling points of PH3 and ASH3 should be determined.
Bothcompounds are equallypolar, so the most significant factor in determining
their relative boiling pointsis molecular mass,not intermolecularforces. Lighter
molecules are easier to vaporize, resulting in greater vapor pressure for the
compound. PH3 is lighter than ASH3, so the vapor pressure of PH3 is greater
than the vapor pressure of ASH3. This relationship is listed in choice D,
confirming that it is a valid answer.
84
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Example 7.14
Given a solution that is made by mixing 8.0 grams of methanol (CH3OH) with
23.0 grams ethanol (C2H5OH) at a temperature where the vapor pressure of pure
methanol is 150 torr and the vapor pressure of pure ethanol is 120 torr, what are
the vapor pressures of methanol and ethanol?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Methanol =
Methanol =
Methanol =
Methanol =
37.5 torr; ethanol =

50 torr
60 torr
60 torr
80 ton-
Solution
Equation 7.2 can be used to determine the vapor pressure of methanol and
ethanol, as shown below:
Pvapor (CH3OH) =I^HsC|H XPevapor (pureCH>H)

Pvapor(CH3CH20H) ="^f^0" xPvapor (pureCH3CH2OH)
The first task at hand is to solve for the mole fraction of the two components in
the mixture. The molecular mass of CH3OH is 32 grams per mole, so 8 grams
results in 0.25 moles CH3OH. The molecular mass of CH3CH2OH is 46 grams
per mole, so 23 grams results in 0.50 moles CH3CH2OH. It is important that you
remember to use the mole fraction, and not inadvertently use the moles of each
component. The molefraction is found by dividingthe moles of the component
by the total moles in solution. There are 0.75 moles total, so the mole fraction of
CH3OH is one-third, which is 0.33. The mole fraction of CH3CH2OH is twothirds, which is 0.67.
Pvapor (CH3OH) =1- x 150 torr = 50 torr
Pvapor (CH3CH2OH) =|x 120 torr =80 torr

The bestanswer is choice D. As a pointofinterest, thetotal vapor pressure of the
system is 130 torr. The total vapor pressure ofa solution must fall between the
pure vapor pressure oftheleast volatile component (120 torr) andthe purevapor
pressure ofthe most volatile component (150 torr). This is a good double-check
to use, as this would have eliminated choices A, B,and C.
The total vapor pressure above a solution consisting ofa mixture oftwoor more
liquids is the sum of the individual vapor pressures ofeach component liquid.
This is listed as Equation 7.3.
Pvapor total =Pvapor A+Pvapor B+Pvapor C
*7.3)
At the boiling point of the solution, the total vapor pressureof the components
equals the atmospheric pressure. However, because the cumulative vapor
pressure contains a mixture ofcompounds, there isnota single pure compound

in the vapor. This is a problem during distillation, because it is not possible to
generate an absolutely pure product. Because a mixture of vapors can generate
enough vapor pressure to reach the boiling point, the addition of volatile
components to a mixture of liquids lowers the boiling point of a solution. This
idea is derived from the concept that all of the liquids in solution exert some
vapor pressure of their own, independently of the other components.
85
General ChemiStry
It is ideally a linear relationship between the mole percent of a component and

the vapor pressure of that component,summarized in Figure 7-12.
100% A
0%A
Mole fraction
0%B
100% B
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-12 represents an ideal mixture. However, for real compounds, there are
other factors that come into play due to intermolecular forces between the
liquids. Because the molecules interact in both the liquid and gas phases, the
vapor pressure relationship is not as linear as Raoult's equation first
approximates it to be. The intermolecular forces are greater in the liquid phase
than the gas phase, so vapor pressure is most affected in solution. If there is an
overall increase in attractive forces in solutionwhen the components are mixed,
then vaporization, and thus vapor pressure, decreases. This is a negative
deviation from linearity. If there is an overall decrease in attractive forces in
solution when the components are mixed, then vaporization, and thus vapor
pressure, increases. This is a positivedeviation from linearity. These deviations
are applied to calculations using Raoult's law (used for ideal cases) so that a real
value can be approximated.
Distillation
Distillation is used to remove a liquid from a solution. To do so, the liquid must
first beconverted into vapor, andthen the vapor is allowed to flow up a distilling
column. Once at the top of the column, it can either return to solution, or take a
new pathwaywhere it willbe cooled and condensed backinto liquid form. The
concept seems easy enough at first glance, but there are some complications to
consider. Figure 7-13 shows the vapor pressureas a function of temperature for
two hypothetical compounds, Compound Xand CompoundY.
Compound Y
Temperature
Figure 7-13
86
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
From Figure 7-13, the relative vapor pressures of any two compounds for any
temperature at which they are both liquids may be determined. The graph
shows the values for vapor pressure at the boiling point of Compound X. The
ratio of vapor pressures is 3 :1 in favor of Compound X. This means that for a
solution where the mole fraction is one-half for each component in solution, the
mole fraction in the vapor phase is three-fourths for Compound X and one-fourth
for Compound Y. When the vapor is condensed, the solution becomes richer in
Compound X, but it is not pure Compound X. After each evaporation and
condensation cycle, it gets richer, but never perfectly pure. Figure 7-14shows the
numbers following a series of evaporation and condensation cycles.
X: Y ratio (In vapor)
9:1
27: 1
81 : 1
243: 1
X : Y ratio (In solution)
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-14 shows that the effectiveness of distillation does not become evident
until a series of evaporation and condensationcycles have transpired. Thisis the
principle behind fractional distillation. In fractional distillation, the distilling
column has additional surface area, either from packing the column with an inert
material,such as glass beads, or by increasing the length of the distilling column.
Providing additional surface area results in more evaporationand condensation

cycles, and thus results in a more purified product.
Over time, two things occur that reduce the effectiveness of distillation. The
distillation pot becomes richerin the less volatile component, so the initialratio is
less than 1:1 in favor of Compound X. The second,and more significant, factor
is that the glassware heats up, so condensation does not occur as readily. With
less condensation, there are fewer evaporation and condensation cycles, so the
vapor becomesless rich in the more volatilecomponent.
Example 7.15
Which of the followingdistillations results in the purest product?

A. Methanol (b.p. = 56C) from ethanol (b.p. = 78C)
B. Heptane (b.p. = 98C) from hexane (b.p. = 69C)
C. Diethyl ether (b.p. = 35"C) from tetrahydrofuran (b.p. = 67C)
D. Benzene (b.p. = 80C) from 2,3-dimethylbutane (b.p. = 58C)
Solution
The distillation that generates the purest product is the one with the greatest
vapor pressureratio of more volatile component to less volatile component. The
greatestratio is found in the pair of compounds that has the biggestdifference in
boilingpoints. The difference in boiling points in choice A is 22C, in choice Bis
29C, in choice C is 32C, and in choice D is 228C. The best answer is choice C.
87
General ChemiStry
Concentration Effects
Colligative properties are properties of a solution that are affected by the

concentration of a soluble impurity. Colligative properties include boiling point
elevation (the same as vapor pressure reduction), freezing point depression, and
osmotic pressure. The electrical conductivity of a solution, although it is not
formally a colligative property, shows a dependence on ion concentration.
Changes in the colligative properties occur when solutes in solution bind the
solvent molecules. The greater the number of impurities in solution, the greater
the magnitude of the effect. Figures 7-15 and 7-16 show the relative boiling
point, freezing point, osmotic pressure, and conductivity of an aqueous salt
solution as the concentration of salt is gradually increased.
Boiling point (C)

100'C
**-
fr
l-l
<U
0)
or^
Oh
O
>-
o_
>
43
xs
to
ra
O'C
"o
U
-^^spoimcc)
Salt concentration
Figure 7-15
Salt concentration
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-15 shows that as impurities are added to solution, the solvent has a
greater tendency to remain as a liquid. This is attributed to increased
intermolecular forces in the solution phase. Solute particles interact only with a
liquid. For instance, water tends to stay in the liquid phase with the increased
solvation energy of impurities, rather than changing to another phase. This is

why the boiling point of an aqueoussalt solution increases and the freezing point
of an aqueous salt solution decreases. The magnitude of the effect is not the
same for boiling point as for the freezing point, as shown by the slope of the lines
in Figure 7-15. There are different values for the boiling point elevation constant
and the freezing point depression constant for a given liquid. Bothconstants are
symbolized by the term k, but each has a differentsubscript character to identify
its purpose. The boiling point elevation constant is kb, while the freezing point
depression constant is kf.
Figure 7-17 presents the heating curve for a 1.0 M aqueous salt solution
overlapped against the heating curve for pure water (for comparison). Heating
curves are generated by adding heat uniformly at a constant rate to the solution
of salt water and monitoring the temperature of the solution. The freezing point
of the saltwater solution is lower than the normal freezing point of water, and the
freezing point of the saltwater solution is decreasing as more water freezes out
from the solution. The reason that the freezing point of the salt solution
continues to decrease as water freezes away from solution is that the molality of
the impurity in the solution is increasing as water is removed. As the molality of
the solute in solution increases, the freezing point decreases, due to the greater
relative number of impurities in the solution. The same is true for the boiling
point elevation of a solution. This is the explanation of why the last portion of
water to boil away from saltwater solution is so difficult to remove.
88
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Standard heating curve
Heating curve of salt solution
Heat added
Figure 7-17
Boiling Point Elevation

As stated before, the boiling point of a solution increases with the addition of
impurities. This is why it is referred to as the boiling point elevation. The increase
in boiling point (and decrease in vapor pressure) is attributed to both a decreased
surface area from which the liquid can evaporate and an increase in the
intermolecular forces binding the liquid in solution. In the case of a saltwater
solution, water has stronger attraction to the ionic impurities than it does to other
water molecules. The intermolecular forces of water with water, and of water
with an ion are presented in Figure 7-18. The difference in strength is attributed
to the larger positive charge on a cation than the partial positive charge present
on a protic hydrogen.
^Stronger
Full +
. .# Partial +
/Interaction
Nat ^
*.40
.Weaker
^ \. S+
H
/Interaction
H%
Ion-Dipole Interaction
Hydrogen Bonding
Figure 7-18
Because it requires more energy to break the ion-dipole interaction than the
hydrogen bond between water molecules, more heat energy is required to
remove a water molecule from a solution with ions present than from pure
water. This is the molecular level explanation for the elevation of the boiling
point for an aqueous solution containing ions. This idea can be applied to any
solute added to water, based on the notion that a solute is soluble in water when
the attractive force between the water molecule and the solute particle is greater
than the attractive force between two water molecules. This is very similar to a
principle of solubility, that the most soluble species has the greatest solvation
energy associated with it. Organic species do not readily dissolve into water,
because there are no charged interactions (Coulombic attraction). Calculating
boiling point elevation is generally simple. Although calculations are few on the
MCAT, it is still essential that you understand the setup of the equation, and the
influence of variables on the boiling point of the solution.
89
General ChemiStry
Equation 7.4 is used to calculate the increase in boiling point when solute is
added to a solution.
ATb = kb-i-m
(7.4)
The kb term is a constant for the solvent, i is the Van't Hoff factor (ionizability
constant-essentially the number of ions that form upon dissolving), and m is
molality. The kb value for water is 0.51 ^'^g/mole- On the MCAT years ago,
they introduced a fourth term called gamma. The gamma term described the
solute, based on the idea that not all solutes interact with the solvent in the same
manner. This term may be referred to as an activity coefficient.
Example 7.16
Which solution has the HIGHEST boiling point?
A. 0.10 moles magnesium chloride in 100 mL water
B.
0.15 moles lithium bromide in 150 mL water
C.
0.20 moles sodium iodide in 100 mL water
D. 0.25 moles potassium fluoride in 150 mL water

Solution
The highest boiling point is associated with the solution that has the highest
concentration of impurities. The tricky part to this question is determining the i
value. Magnesium chloride (MgCl2) has an i value of 3.0, while the other salts all
have i values of 2.0. Choice A has 0.3 moles of impurities (3 x 0.1) in 100 mL
water, choice B has 0.3 moles of impurities (2 x 0.15) in 150 mL water, choice C
has 0.4 moles of impurities (2 x 0.2) in 100 mL water, and choice D has 0.5 moles
of impurities (2x 0.25) in 150 mL water. The highest concentration of impurities
is present in choice C. When looking at questions like this, you should realize
that there are several ways to test your understanding. The question could have
asked for "GREATEST vapor pressure", in which case you would be hunting for
the lowest boiling point.
Keep in mind that addition of a solute not only increases the boiling point of a
compound, but it also changes other colligative properties. For instance, by
adding salt to a pot of water when you cook pasta, you increase the boiling point
of the water slightly. However, contrary to what people think about adding salt
to the water when cooking pasta, it is not actually done for the purpose of
increasing the boiling point. For a 4.0 liter pot of water (roughly a gallon), about
234 grams of sodium chloride are required to raise the boiling point by 1C to
10rC. This is roughly half a pound of salt. The amount of salt needed to
effectively increase the boiling point is so great that the health risks are not worth
it. The reason salt is added to water when cooking noodles is based on another
colligative property, osmotic pressure. As the salt concentration increases, so
does the osmotic pressure of the solution, preventing the noodles from getting
too soggy (water-logged). There are other interesting observations that can be
explained through colligative properties. When salt is added to hot water, it
suddenly froths (boils) for a moment, and then returns to a state of not boiling.
This is because the dissociation of salt into water is exothermic, and the energy
released causes localized pockets of boiling water. Once the salt is dissociated,
however, the boiling point rises, so the solution is no longer at its boiling point.
90
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Freezing Point Depression
The freezing point of a compound, like the boiling point, can be altered by
varying the intermolecular forces (which in essence varies AHfusjon). Freezing
point decreases as soluble impurities are added to solution. The reasoning
behind the change in melting point is that impurities are found dissolved in a
substance in its liquid phase, not the solid phase. When salt is added to the
surface of an ice cube, the water molecules on the surface of the lattice are
attracted to the salt, and thus can be removed from the lattice (which is melting
the ice). This is an exothermic process, so additional energy is released to melt
the ice further. The melting process is made easier by lowering the melting
point. This is why salt is used to help melt ice on roads and prevent future
freezing by lowering the freezing point. Water molecules experience stronger
interactions in salt water than freshwater, so they do not freeze out from a
saltwater solution as readily as they do from pure water. Solute particles exhibit
attractive forces in solution. The effect that this has on melting is that solvent
molecules tends to stay in solution, so they freeze at a lower temperature.
Calculating the freezing point depression for a solution is just like calculating
boiling point elevation, except that kf replaces kb- The other terms are the same
as in Equation 7.4. Equation 7.5 is used to calculate the decrease in freezing point
when solute is added to a solution.
ATf=kfim
(7.5)
To find the freezing temperature, subtract the change in temperature (AT) from
the regular freezing point (under ambient conditions). This new value is the
freezing point of the solution at that given concentration. Equation 7.6 shows
how this is done.
Tf= Tnfp - AT, where Tnfn = normalfreezing point.
(7.6)
If you are careless, it is easy to forget to use the i on these problems when the
solute is a salt. The i value for sugar is 1, because when sugar dissolves into
water, it does not form any ions; it remains an intact sugar molecule.
Example 7.17
What is the freezing point of a solution made by mixing 5.84 grams of sodium
chloride into 200 grams of water? (kf = 1.86 C kg/mole for water)
A.
-0.42C
B.
-0.93C
C.
-1.86C
D.
-3.72C
Solution
The molecular mass of NaCl is 58.4 g/mole/ so there are 0.10 moles of NaCl.
There are 200 grams of water, which is 0.2 kg water. The molality is found by
dividing the moles of solute (NaCl) by the kilograms of solvent (H2O). The
solution concentration in molality is 0.50 m NaCl. Each molecule of NaCl results
in 2 molecules of impurities, because NaCl fully dissociates into Na+ cations and
CI" anions when added to water. The total impurity concentration is 1.0 molal,
which lowers the freezing point by 1.86 C from the normal freezing point of 0C.
The freezing point of the solution -1.86C, so choice C is the best answer.
ATf =kfi-m =-1.86 x2x-10 moles NaC1/n.20 kg H20 =-1-86 x2x0.5 =-1.86C
91
General ChemiStry
Osmotic Pressure
Water has a natural tendency to flow from solutions of higher water

concentration (lower solute concentration) to solutions of lower water
concentration (higher solute concentration) to reach equal concentrations.

Pressure differences cause fluids to flow, and the driving force causing water to
flow is known as osmotic pressure. Osmotic pressure is the force per unit area
exerted by a solution through osmosis across a semipermeable membrane.

Osmotic pressure is calculated using Equation 7.7.
n = MiRT
(7.7)
where n is osmotic pressure, M = molarity, i is the ionizability constant (number

of ions upon dissociation), R is the energy constant, and T is temperature in
kelvins. Osmotic pressure experiments in a U-tube apparatus are used to
measure the mass of polymers, including natural polymers like proteins. The
two sides of the U-tube are separated by a semipermeable membrane, which
segregates molecules according to size. Water molecules can pass through the
membrane, because they are small. However, proteins cannot pass through the
membrane. A known mass of protein is added to one side of the U-tube, creating
a difference in osmotic pressure between the two sides. Water flows from the
side without protein to the side with protein, so the water levels become uneven.
The protein cannot migrate across the barrier, so the concentration is always
greater on one side than the other. Water stops flowing when the osmotic
pressure equals the hydrostatic pressure. Equation 7.8 is used to calculate the
hydrostatic pressure.
^hydrostatic = Pg^h
(7.8)
where p is the density, g is the gravitational force constant, and Ah is the height
difference between the solution in the left side of the U-tube and the solution in
the right side of the U-tube. The experiment is shown in Figure 7-19.
"\
>Ah
$f
Semi-permeable
J
membrane
slm
Kt& ^
im^mIsK-kIs-"
* b,
Before solute has been added,
A height difference exists
each side of the U-tube contains
after solute has been added to
the same amount of H20 at 25C.
the left side of the U-tube.
Figure 7-19
As shown in Figure 7-19, the osmotic pressure and hydrostatic pressure oppose
one another. Once the water levels reach a fixed height, then Equation 7.7 is set
equal to Equation 7.8. From that, molarity can be determined, which can be
converted to moles. A given mass of protein was used, so the molecular mass is
found by dividing this number by moles.
92
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Example 7.18
How many grams of a 12,000 8ram/moie polymer must be added to water to

make a 10-mL solution with an osmotic pressure of 0.0246 atm. at 27C? (R =
0.082 L-atm7mole.K)
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.012 grams polymer

0.120 grams polymer
1.200grams polymer
12.00grams polymer
Solution
Using Equation 7.7, %= MiRT, we can determine how many grams are required.
The polymer does not dissociate, so for a polymer (or protein a biological
polymer) the value of i is 1. Substituting into the equation yields:
0.0246 atm =
712,000
g-mole"1 x lx 0.082 L-atm- mole"1 K'1 x 300 K
' *"/ww&
0.01 L
0.0246 =^x lx 8.2x 3^ z =0-0246 x 120 = 24.6 x 0.12 = QU

120
1 x 8.2 x 3
24.6
0.12 grams of polymer are needed, so the best answer is choice B. Not very much
polymer is necessary to generate enough pressure difference to be measurable.
The units are tricky, because Equation 7.8expresses pressure in terms of pascals,
while Equation 7.7 is in terms of atm. To do a problem where osmotic pressure is
equated with hydrostatic pressure, a conversion between pascals and atm. is
necessary. The likelihood of seeing such a calculationon the MCAT is minimal.
Example 7.19
The GREATEST osmotic pressure is associated with which of the following

solutions?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10grams polymer with molecular mass 10,000 g/mole in 10mL water.

100 grams polymer with molecular mass 10,000 g/mole in 100 mL water.
10 grams polymer with molecular mass 10,000 g/mole in 100mL water.
100grams polymer with molecular mass 10,000 g/mole in 10mL water.
Solution
The greatest osmotic pressure results from the solution with the greatest polymer
concentration. The polymer is the same in each answer choice, so they each have
the same molecular mass. This question reduces to a hunt for the most grams of
polymer in the least amount of solvent (which is the highest concentrated
solution). The most grams of polymer in the least water is found in choice D.
Conductance
Pure water does not conduct an electrical current, because there are no ions
present in solution to transfer electrons. In order for water to conduct electricity,

there must be ions present in solution. The specific conductance of an aqueous
salt solution is directly proportional to the concentration of salt in solution.
Electrical conductance is observed only with ionic solutes. All specific
conductance is measured relative to aqueous sodium chloride solutions.
93
General ChemiStry
There is also a term for electrical conductance in an aqueous salt solution known
as condosity. The condosity of a solution is defined as the molar concentration of

an aqueous sodium chloride solution that has the same specific conductance as
the aqueous salt solution. Salts that form aqueous solutions capable of
conducting electricity better than sodium chloride solutions have a condosity
greater than their molarity. The greater the ratio of condosity to molarity, the
better the salt at conducting electricity in an aqueous environment. For instance,
if a salt were twice as good as NaCl at conducting current in an aqueous solution,
then 2.0 M NaCUaq) solution would have the same conductivity as a 1.0 M sa\ttaq)
solution. In that case, the 1.0 M sa\t(aq) solution has a condosity of 2.0.
Example 7.20
As salt is dissolved into a glass of water, all of the following observations could
be made EXCEPT that:
A.
B.
C.
D.
objects will float higher in the new solution.

electricity will conduct better through the new solution.
the heat capacity will be greater in the new solution.
the freezing point of the new solution will be increased.
Solution
As salt is dissolved into water, the impurity concentration increases and the
density of the solution increases. Because the density is greater, objects in the
solution will experience an increase in the buoyant force. The result is that
floating objects will float higher after salt has been added to the solution, making
choice A a valid observation. This eliminates choice A. Electricity conducts
through water because of the ions in solution, so the addition of salt to water will
in fact increase the electrical conductivity. This eliminates choice B. The
addition of a soluble salt to water will increase the intermolecular forces in
solution, which in turn will cause the solution to need additional heat energy to
have the particles increase their average speed in solution. The result is that the
solution has a greater heat capacity, so choice C is a valid observation. This
eliminates choice C. Addition of impurities to water lowers the freezing point of
the solution (recall that it's known as freezing point depression), so choice D is
an invalid observation. Choice D is the best answer.
Example 7.21
If an ice cube floats in a glass of water in such a way that the surface of the water
is flush with the brim, and the ice cube sticks out above the level of the water,
what will occur as the ice cube melts?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The water level will drop below the top of the glass.
The water will overflow the top of the glass.
The water level will remain flush with the top of the glass.
The water level will rise above the top of the glass, but will not overflow it.
Solution
For this question, it is important to remember that when ice melts, it becomes
water. The mass of the water displaced by the floating ice cube is equal to the
mass of the water generated by melting the ice cube. When the ice cube melts,
the water that is formed has exactly the same mass and density as the water
displaced. This means that it also has the same volume, so it fills the volume
occupied by the submerged portion of the ice cube. The net result is that the
level of the water remains constant at the top of the glass. As more and more ice
melts, the exposed portion of the ice cube drops lower, but the top of the water
remains at the same height. Choice C is the best answer.
94
The Berkeley Review
Phases
Passages
13 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Phases Passage Schedule:
I:
After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, IV, V, & IX
II:
Following Task I: Passages II, III, VI, VII, & X (36 questions in 47 minutes)
Ill:
Review: Passages VIII, XI - XIII & Questions 93 - 100

The
BERKELEY
R-E-V-I-E'VY
Phases and Phase Change Study Passages

I.
II.
Freeze-Drying and Cloud-Seeding
(1-7)
Phase Diagrams
(8 - 14)
HI.
Heating Curve
(15-21)
IV.
Bizarre Phase Diagrams
(22 - 28)
V.
Methanol-Ethanol Vapor Pressure
(29 - 35)
Mixed Vapor of Methanol and Acetophenone
(36 - 43)
Raoult's Law
(44 - 50)
Desalination and Osmotic Pressure
(51 - 56)
IX.
Freezing Point Depression Comparison
(57 - 63)
X.
Freezing Point Depression Experiment
(64 - 70)
Dumas Experiment
(71 -76)
Physical Properties of Liquids
(77 - 84)
Allotropes
(85 - 92)
VI.
VII.
VIII.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
Questions riot Based on a Descriptive Passage
Phases and Phase Changes Scoring Scale

Raw Score
MCAT Score
85 - 100
13- 15
68-84
10- 12
48-67
7-9
35-47
4-6
1 -34
1 -3
(93 - 100)
2.
The changing of phases for matter has a commercial use

in heating and cooling, and a use in the creation of many
products that are a part of our daily lives. Phase changes are
either endothermic (heat absorbing) or exothermic (heat
releasing). The phase changes that are endothermic are
sublimation (solid to gas), melting (solid to liquid), and
evaporation (liquid to gas). The phase changes that are
exothermic are condensation (gas to liquid), deposition (gas to
solid), and freezing (liquid to solid). Artificial snow-making
involves the deposition of water vapor.
The optimum conditions for freeze-drying coffee are

which of the following?
A. 25Cand 1.0atm.
B. 25Cand 1.0 torr

C. -lO'Cand 1.0 atm.
D. -10'Cand 1.0torr
3.
An alternative to the freeze-drying procedure that would

still yield dehydrated coffee is which of the following?
A. Recrystallization using a water-ether mixed solvent
Commercial freeze-drying processes employed to make

many of the coffees marketed today, involve exactly what the
name implies. A batch of freshly brewed coffee is first
frozen, and then dried by means of sublimation. In the first
B. Distillation of the water to collect the residue

C. Distillation and collection of the solvent
D. Filtration of the solute with sieves
step of the process, the coffee is cooled until it has frozen

(which occurs at a temperature below 0C, because impurities
in the water lower the freezing point). In the second step, the
atmospheric pressure is reduced so the ice can be sublimed
away to form the dehydrated coffee. As the ice sublimes
away, the temperature of the frozen coffee slurry lowered
4.
To lower the temperature of a cloud, what can be

dropped into its core?
A. Ice crystals at 0C
(because sublimation is endothermic). This results in the
B. Water at O'C
formation of freeze-dried coffee. The sublimation of ice is the
C. Dry ice at its sublimation point
process shown in Reaction 1 below.
D. Sodium chloride at 25C
H20(s) + heat -> H20(g)

Reaction
5.
The condensation process occurs naturally when rain
Supercooled water would be whichof the following?
clouds form. To enhance the chances of rainfall in draughtstricken areas, techniques for cloud-seeding have been
A. Water at O'C
developed over the years. Clouds are masses of condensed

water vapor. Rain is formed when the droplets of this vapor
aggregate into rain drops as the water mist in the clouds
collects on the surface of fine ice crystals, which one might
expect to form at 0C. In actuality, however, the cloud must
be supercooled to -10C in order for the ice crystals to form.
C. IceatO'C
B. IceatlO'C
D. Water at-10C
6.
To induce the formation of ice crystals, tiny dry ice
Cloud-seeding to form rain exemplifies which kind of

phasechange involvingH2O?
A. Vaporization
pellets of solid carbon dioxide can be dropped from an

airplane. These pellets freeze the water mist in the clouds.
The solid dry ice is maintained at its sublimation point
(approximately -78C). Once some ice crystals have begun
B. Melting
C. Fusion
D. Sublimation
to form in a cloud, the water mist can aggregate on the

surface, to form many raindrops, and the result can the
initiation of a small shower.
1.
7.
The drying procedure involved in freeze-drying of coffee
sequence of places reflects the correct relationship of
is an example of what physical process?
these boiling points in DESCENDING order?

A. A seaport > the mountains > a midwestern town
A. Melting
B. Boiling
B. The mountains > a midwestern town > a seaport

C. A midwestern town > the mountains > a seaport
C. Sublimation
D. Condensation
Each locale in the following answer choices has a
different standard boiling point for water. Which
D. A seaport> a midwestern town > the mountains
97
8.
Which labeled point in the phase diagram below is the

critical point?
Standard phasediagrams graph the phaseof a material or

compound against ambient pressure (abscissa) and
temperature (ordinate). The lines of thegraph represent phase
changes for the compound. The two phasediagrams drawn in
Figure 1 and Figure 2 below show that at low pressure and
temperature, it is possible to convert directly from the solid
phase to the gas phase (referred to as sublimation). Phase
diagrams do not intersect with either axis, because it is
physically impossible to reach conditions of 0 kelvins and 0
torr pressure. The two phase diagrams drawn below for
standard compounds are typical. The phasediagram in Figure
Temperature
A. Point x, where all three phases coexist

B. Point x, above which gas and liquid do not exist
C. Point y, where all three phases coexist
1 is for an unknown substance, Compound A, while the

phase diagram in Figure 2 is for Compound B. The dashed
lines are drawn to aid your seeing the point on the graph
wherethe indicatedtemperatures and pressuresintersect.
D. Point y, above which gas and liquid do not exist
9.
If you were to reduce the pressure on Compound A at

298 K from 1.3 atm. to 0.9 atm., the compound would:
A.
B.
C.
D.
1000'
760
undergo melting (from solid to liquid).

undergo vaporization (from liquid to gas).
undergocondensation(from gas to liquid).
undergo deposition (from solid to gas).
10. At which of the following temperatures is sublimation

NOT possible for Compound B?
A. 0"C
Temperature (K)
273 298
B.
10C
C. 25C
Figure 1
D. 100C
11. Which of the compounds would be a gas at 1.0 atm. and
1000-
10C?
A. Compound A only
760--
B. Compound B only
C. Both compounds A and B
D. Neither compound A nor B
12. In what phase does Compound B exist at standard

temperatureand pressure?
Temperature (K) 273 298
A. Solid
Figure 2
B. Liquid
Both phase diagrams show a similar slope and have only
three phases associated with them. There are some phase
diagrams that show more than three phases. For instance,
sulfur can assume two different crystalline structures, so it
has two unique solid phases. As a consequence, the phase
diagram for sulfur shows four phases.
C. Gas
D. Lambda
98
13. Whicharrow represents an isothermal evaporation?

d

A researcher synthesized an unknown material referred to
H-^
as Compound W. After purifying the material and verifying

its purity by spectroscopic methods, the researcher recorded
4)
00
^X
the physical properties of the material.
/b
Included in the
A. Arrow a
inventory of physical properties are: normal melting point,

molecular mass, and the specific heats for all three phases.
The researcher then investigated the enthalpy values
associated with the phase changes (fusion and vaporization).
Figure 1 is a heating curve for Compound W, showing the
B. Arrow b
temperature of the material as it is heated at a constant rate.
^T
Temperature
C. Arrow c
D. Arrow d
14. Which of the following conclusions is INVALID for

Compound A?
(2
A. Compound A does not sublime at 25C.

B. Compound A is solid at 250 K, 760 torr.
C. Compound A has a triple point roughly equal to
\L
Heat added at a constant rate
Figure 1
that of water.
D. For Compound A there exists a solid that is less

dense than its liquid phase.
Table 1 lists the physical properties for Compound W,

as determined by the researcher. The molecular weight of
compound W is 100, and its normal boiling point is 64.5'C.
Physical constants for Compound W
Qiquid
1.0 <**
Cgas
0.5 cal
AHvaporization
30 kcal
g-c
mole
Table 1
The physical constants were determined by observing the

effects of temperature change over a range of temperatures.
The data listed were recorded at standard pressure. The
enthalpy of vaporization was determined by measuring the
vapor pressure of Compound W at various temperatures, and
then using those data in the following equation to determine
the enthalpy of vaporization:
. Pj _ AHvaporization / |
11 P2
\T2
J_
Tl
Equation 1
By measuring the vapor pressure at many temperatures,
AHvaporization can De determined with great accuracy. The

heat capacities were found by repeated calorimetry
experiments in a closed, insulated vessel.
99
20. Which of the following statements about phase change

in Compound W is NOT true?
15. According to Figure 1, the heat capacity of Compound

W in the solid phase is:
A.
B.
C.
D.
A. During phase changes, temperature remains
equal to the heat capacity in the liquid phase.

greater than the heat capacity in the liquid phase.
less than the heat capacity in the liquid phase.
exactly twice the heat capacity in the liquid phase.
constant.
B. The process of going from the solid phase to the

liquid phase is an endothermic process.
C. The process of sublimation is exothermic.
D. The heat capacity for the compound varies for each

phase.
16. According to Figure 1, the enthalpy of fusion is:
A.
B.
C.
D.
equal to the enthalpy of vaporization.

greater than the enthalpy of vaporization.
less than the enthalpy of vaporization.
equal to the enthalpy of formation.
21. Which statement accurately relates the heat capacity of

Compound W and the slope of the ascending line in its
heating curve?
A. The slope is directly proportional to heat capacity.
B. The slope is inversely proportional to heat
capacity.
C. The slope is independent of heat capacity.
D. The slope and heat capacity differ by a constant
17. If 10.0 grams of an unknown substance, Compound Q

(1) heats up to a higher temperature than 10.0 grams of
Compound W when exposed to the same amount of
heat, which of the following conclusions is valid?
amount.
A. Compound Q has a larger heat capacity than

Compound W.
B. Compound Q has a larger enthalpy of fusion than
Compound W.
C. Compound Q has a smaller heat capacity than

Compound W.
D. Compound Q has a smaller enthalpy of fusion than
Compound W.
18. How much heat would be required for 10.0 grams of

Compound W to go from a liquid at ten degrees below
the boiling point to a gas at ten degrees above the
boiling point?
A. 3,015calories
B. 3,150 calories
C. 30,015 calories
D. 30,150 calories
19. Which of the following conclusions can be made about

Compound W relative to water?
A. Compound W has a lower vapor pressure than

water at room temperature.
B. Compound W has a lower AHfuSi0n than water.
C. Compound W has a lower AHvaporization tnan

water.
D. Compound W has a lower heat capacity in the

liquid phase than water.
100
2 3. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. It is possible to sublime the solidA form of

Material C at temperatures below the first triple
point by changing the pressure.
B. It is possible for gas of Material C to undergo
deposition to solids at temperatures between the
first and second triple points.
C. Both Material T and Material C have two triple
points each.
D. At standard temperature and pressure (0"C and 1.00
Phase diagrams relate ambient temperature and pressure

to the most abundant phase for a material to exist in under
those conditions. Under conditions where the phase diagram
shows that a liquid is present, a small amount of vapor may
also be present, but not in a high concentration. For
instance, water at 0C and 1.00 atm. is present in all three
phases, although the phase diagram shows that only the solid
and liquid may coexist. The amount of water vapor is
minimal. The triple point of water, where any of the three
phases may be present in abundance, is 0.0l'C and 4.57 torr.
atm.), Material T exists as solidA-
Complications arise in materials that have more than

three phases. In the phase diagrams shown in Figure 1 and
Figure 2, each material has two solid phases, both of which
24. Which direct conversion is NOT possible?
have different lattice structures and physical properties.
A. Material T: Solids into liquid.

B. Material C: Liquid into solids-
Material T
C. Material C: Gas into solidA-
Solid A
D. Material T: SolidA into gas.
1.0-
25. For both Material T and Material C, which phase can

coexist with the other three at some point?
A. SolidA
B. Solids
"I
298
C. Liquid
Temperature (K)
D. Gas
Figure 1
26. How can the two different solids be explained for both
of the compounds?
Material C
A. The two solids have different lattice structures.
B. The two solids have different connectivity of

atoms.
1.0-
C. The two solids have different molecular masses.
Solid
D. The two solids have different chiral centers.
27. At a temperature of 25C, which of these statements

1
298
must be true?
Temperature (K)
I. For MaterialT, solidAis less dense than solids-
Figure 2
n.
For Material C, conversion from solidA mto solids

is an endothermic process.
At 1.0 atm and 25C, both materials exist as Solids.
IE. For Material T, it is possible to undergo deposition

only to form solids, but not solidA-
22. For which material can both solids exist simultaneously
with the liquid phase?
A. I only
A. Both Material T and Material C
B. Ilonly
C. I and II only
D. II and m only
B. Only Material T
C. Only Material C
D. Neither Material T nor Material C
101
28. Which solid deforms upon heating at atmospheric

pressure?
Three beakers were prepared with a mixture of methanol

and ethanol. In Beaker 150 grams of methanol and 50 grams
A. Both Material T and Material C
B. Only Material T
of ethanol were mixed.
C. Only Material C
methanol and 50 milliliters of ethanol were mixed. In Beaker
D. Neither Material T or Material C
III 1.00 moles of methanol and 1.00 mole of ethanol were
In Beaker II 50 milliliters of
mixed. The three beakers were separated and placed into

individual 10-liter sealed containers. The total vapor pressure
and vapor pressure due to methanol were recorded for the three
separate beakers. This was done by analyzing the gas above
each beaker in the closed system. Listed in Table 1 below are
data for both methanol and ethanol:
Compound
Formula
p at 20C
MW
b.p.
CH3OH
0.7914 g/mL
32.04
56C
C2H5OH
0.7893 g/mL
46.07
79C
Methanol
Ethanol
Table 1
According to Raoult's law, the vapor pressure of any

component of a mixture can be determined by multiplying
the mole fraction of that component in solution by the pure
vapor pressure of that component at the same temperature.
The mole fraction is defined as the moles of a component
divided by the total moles of the solution. Raoult's law is
for an ideal mixture and holds true as long as the components
of the solution do not interact.
If there are attractive forces between the components in

the solution mixture, then the vapor pressure is lower than
would be calculated by Raoult's law. If there are repulsive
forces between the components in the solution mixture, then
the vapor pressure is higher than would be calculated by
Raoult's law. These are referred to as negative and positive
deviations from Raoult's law, respectively.
29. Above which beaker is the vapor pressure of methanol
the GREATEST?
A. Beaker I
B. Beaker II
C. Beaker m
D. The vapor pressure of methanol is the same above

all three beakers.
30. As the temperature of the solution in Beaker I increases,

what is observed for the vapor pressure of methanol, and
the total vapor pressure above the beaker?
A.
B
C
D
102
Ptotal vapor increases; Pmethanol increases.

Ptotal vapor increases; Pmethanol decreases.
Ptotal vapor decreases; Pmethanol increases.
Ptotal vapor decreases; Pmethanol decreases.
31. During the first minute of evaporation, before

equilibrium is established and the temperature changes
to any significant degree, what is observed for the
34. If the vapor pressure of pure methanol is greater than

the vapor pressure of pure ethanol, then what must be
true about the relative temperatures of each solution in
order to have equal total vapor pressures above all three
solution in Beaker HI?
beakers?
A. The ratio of moles methanol to moles ethanol
increases, and the rate of vaporization from the
A. Ti>Tn>Tm
beaker also increases.
B. Tni>Ti>Tn
C. Ti>Tm>Tii
D. Th>Ti>Tih
B. The ratio of moles methanol to moles ethanol
increases, while the rate of vaporization from the

beaker decreases.
C. The ratio of moles methanol to moles ethanol
decreases, while the rate of vaporization from the

beaker increases.
D. The ratio of moles methanol to moles ethanol
35. If the vapor above Beaker I were collected and condensed

into another beaker, what would be true about the vapor
pressures of ethanol, methanol, and the total vapor
pressure above the new beaker, relative to what was
originally observed above Beaker I?
decreases, and the rate of vaporization from the

beaker also decreases.
A. The total vapor pressure and the vapor pressures of

methanol and ethanol would all be greater above the
32. The same experiment is carried out with propanol and

methanol in one case, and with ethanol and propanol in
another case, and the following data are collected:
Mixture
new beaker.
B. The total vapor pressure and the vapor pressure of

methanol would be greater above the new beaker.
The vapor pressureof ethanol would be less.
C. The total vapor pressure and the vapor pressure of
Pvapor at 35C
10 mL methanol w/ 10 mL propanol
10 mL methanol w/ 20 mL propanol
10 mL ethanol w/10 mL propanol
42.7 torr
37.1 torr
38.4 torr
10 mL ethanol w/ 20 mL propanol
33.5 torr
methanol would be less above the new beaker. The
vapor pressure of ethanol would be greater.

D. The total vapor pressure would be the same, while
the vapor pressure of methanol wouldbe greater and
What can be said about the vapor pressure of pure

propanol compared to both ethanol and methanol?
A
B.
C
D.
the vapor pressure of ethanol would be less.
Pmethanol > Ppropanol** Pethanol > Ppropanol

Ppropanol > Pmethanol' Pethanol > Ppropanol
Pmethanol > Ppropanol** Ppropanol > Pethanol
Ppropanol > Pmethanol! Ppropanol > Pethanol
3 3. What is the total pressure above Beaker I at 27C, if the

vapor pressure of pure methanol is 40.0 torr and the
vapor pressure of pure ethanol is 30.0 torr at that
temperature?
A. Greater than 40.0 torr
B. Greater than 35.0 torr, but less than 40.0 torr

C. Greater than 30.0 torr, but less than 35.0 torr
D. Less than 30.0 torr
103
37. How many moles of acetophenone (C6H5COCH3) are

contained in the mixture?
To reduce the temperature necessary to distill a liquid,
A. 0.25 moles
distillation can be conducted under vacuum conditions.
B. 0.50 moles
Appropriately enough, this procedure is referred to as vacuum

distillation. In vacuum distillation, the solution is heated in
C. 1.00 moles
a closed container with reduced atmospheric pressure. The

system is not closed, but the flow of gas into the system is
hindered by one-way valves. By definition, the boiling point
of a liquid is the point (temperature) at which the vapor
pressure equals the atmospheric pressure. By reducing the
atmospheric pressure, the vapor pressure required for boiling
is lowered and thus the energy needed to boil the liquid is
D. 2.00 moles
38. What is TRUE for the boiling point for pure

acetophenone at 500 torr?
A. It is greater than 203C, because decreasing

atmospheric pressure makes it easier to boil.
B. It is less than 203C, because decreasing
atmospheric pressure makes it easier to boil.
C. It is greater than 203'C, because decreasing
atmospheric pressure makes it harder to boil.
D. It is less than 203"C, because decreasing
reduced.
A researcher carries out vacuum distillation on 120.0
grams of a mixture that is 50% by mass 2-propanol with

50% by mass acetophenone. This solution is made by adding
60.0 grams of 2-propanol to 60.0 grams acetophenone in a
250-mL flask. The boiling points, molecular masses, and
room temperature vapor pressures of the two compounds are
the
the
the
the
atmospheric pressure makes it harder to boil.
listed below:
Compound
Boiling Point
MW
P vapor
Acetophenone
2-Propanol
203C
120.15
12 torr
82C
60.10
48 torr
39. The mole fraction of acetophenone in the original

solution is which of the following values?
A. 0.25
B. 0.33
Table 1
C. 0.50
Table 1 lists the normal boiling point, molecular

weight, and room temperature vapor pressure. The structures
of acetophenoneand 2-propanol are shown in Figure 1.
D. 0.67
40. What is observed when comparing Aliquot 5 with

Aliquot 10?
O
H
OH
A. Aliquot 10 has a greater total vapor pressure and

larger mole fraction of acetophenone than Aliquot
H3C
Acetophenone
5.
CH3
B. Aliquot 10 has a smaller total vapor pressure and

lower mole fraction of acetophenone than Aliquot
2-Propanol
5.
Figure 1
C. The total vapor pressure is greater above Aliquot 10

than Aliquot 5, while the mole fraction of
acetophenone is greater above Aliquot 5.
D. The total vapor pressure is greater above Aliquot 5
than Aliquot 10, while the mole fraction of
acetophenone is greater above Aliquot 10.
The researcher reduces the pressure above the mixtureand

collects the vapor in successive aliquots of 5.0 mL. A total
of twenty-five 5.0-mL aliquots are collected before the
amount of solution remaining in the flask becomes too small
to measure. The twenty-five samples are labeled 1 through
25, in the order in which they were collected.
41. After time, the mole fraction due to acetophenone

should do which of the following?
36. At room temperature, what is TRUE about the vapor

pressure of 2-propanol above the mixture?
A. It should increase, due to evaporation.
A. The vapor pressure of 2-propanol equals the vapor
B. It should decrease, due to evaporation.
pressure due to acetophenone.
C. It should stay constant, due to evaporation.

D. It should stay constant, regardless of evaporation.
B. The vapor pressure of 2-propanol is double the

vapor pressure due to acetophenone.
C. The vapor pressure of 2-propanol is eight times the
vapor pressure due to acetophenone.
D. The vapor pressure of 2-propanol is equal to the

total vapor pressure.
104
42. Addition of another 60.0 grams of 2-propanol to the

original mixture would affect the vapor pressure of
acetophenone in what way?
According to Raoult's law, the vapor pressure above a

solution consisting of more than one liquid is equal to the
sum of the individual vapor pressures. The individual vapor
pressures for each component can therefore be calculated by
multiplying the mole fraction (Xa) of a given component by
the vapor pressure (Pa) of a pure sample of that same
component. The equation for the total vapor pressure due to
all of the components is expressed in Equation 1.
A. It would reduce the vapor pressure of acetophenone.

B. It would have no effect on the vapor pressure of
acetophenone.
C. It would increase the vapor pressure of
acetophenone.
D. It would increase by exactly one-half the vapor
pressure of acetophenone.
Ptotal = 5CAPA + 5CBPB + %cPc + Equation 1
This equation is based on ideal behavior for solutions. If

the attractive force between the component liquids in solution
is strong, a decrease in the vapor pressure above the mixture
43. Aliquot 1 from the mixture has which of the following
is observed. This decrease in vapor pressure is referred to as
mole distribution percentages?
negative deviation from Raoult's law. The strong attractive
A. 50.0% acetophenone and 50.0% 2-propanol

B. 33.3% acetophenone and 66.7% 2-propanol
C. 20.0% acetophenone and 80.0% 2-propanol
forces are associated with a large negative heat of dilution.
The opposite holds true for positive deviations from ideal

behavior. Drawn in Figure 1 are graphs showing positive
and negative deviations for hypothetical solution mixtures.
D. 11.1% acetophenone and 88.9% 2-propanol
100-
C/J
Ideal behavior
Observed behavior
Xa=1
Mole fraction
Xb = 0
Xa = 0
Xb=1
fa
o
100
Ideal behavior
{/I
Observed behavior
Xc=I
Mole fraction
Xd= 0
Xc-0
Xd=1
Figure 1
The first graph shows a positive deviation from ideal

behavior, because the observed vapor pressure is greater than
the ideal vapor pressure. The second graph shows a negative

deviation from ideal behavior, because the observed vapor
pressure is less than the ideal vapor pressure.
44. What is TRUE about the dilution energies for a mixture
with positive deviation from Raoult's ideal behavior?

A. AG>0;AH>0
B. AG<0;AH>0
C. AG>0;AH<0
D. AG<0;AH<0
105
45. Which of the following pairs of solvents would be

expected to have the LARGEST negative deviation from
49. Referring to the liquids in the lower graph in Figure 1,

what can be said about the molefractionsof each liquid
solution over time, if the flask is open to the
environment and the mixture is allowed to evaporate?
ideal behavior?
A. Ethanol and carbon tetrachloride

B. Ethanol and acetone
A. C andD both increase.
C. Ethanol and hexane
B. C and D both decrease.
D. Ethanol and cyclohexene
C. C increases and D decreases.

D. C decreases and D increases.
46. If the vapor above a 50% mixture of methanol with

butanol at 22C were collected and placed into a flask
where it condenses, what is the mole percent of
methanol in vapor above the new (second) flask? [Pure
5 0. Two liquids exhibiting a drastic negative deviation from

ideal behavior can attribute the behavior to which of the
following?
A. A bond-forming reaction between the two
compounds in solution
methanol has a vapor pressure of 87 torr and pure

butanol has a vapor pressure of 29 torr at 22'C]
B. A bond-breaking reaction between the two
A. Less than 25%
compounds in solution
C. An increase in one compound's polarity

D. A decrease in one compound's polarity

D. Greater than 75%
47. Positive deviations from ideal behavior in the vapor

pressure above a mixed solution can be attributed to
A.
B.
C.
D.
Attraction between liquids, AH> 0

Attraction between liquids, AH < 0
Repulsion between liquids, AH> 0
Repulsion betweenliquids,AH< 0
48. Using the information in Figure 1, what is the vapor

pressure due to Substance B (1) in a 40% (by mole)
mixture of Substance B in Substance A, if the pure
vapor pressures of A and B are 150 torr and 75 torr
respectively?
A. 30torr
B. 60 torr
C. 90 torr
D. 105 torr
106
52. Which of the following solutions has the GREATEST

osmotic pressure at 20C?
Reverse osmosis can be employed to extract fresh water

from salt water. The process involves applying a force to the
salt water that is greater than the osmotic pressure of aqueous
salt solution, consequently forcing the flow of fresh water out
from the aqueous salt solution. The apparatus used to
A. 0.20 moles NaCl(s) with one liter water (where
KSp forNaCl is greater than 1)

B. 0.30 moles KCl(s) withone liter water(where Ksp
for KC1 is greater than 1)
C. 0.25 moles MgCl2(s) with one liter water (where
accomplished this consists of a container for the salt water

solution and a cellophane filter through which no ions can
pass, so that only water may flow through it. The
cellophane filter is referred to as a semipermeable membrane.
It distinguishes and segregates molecules by charge. There
are other semipermeable membranes which segregate
according to particle size. The apparatus is shown below in
Ksp for MgCl2 is greater than 1)

D. 0.30 moles PbCl2(s) with one liter water (where
Ksp for PbCl2 is equal to 1.6 x lO"5 M3)

53. In order to reduce the osmotic pressure of a 100-mL
sample of brine solution from 25 atm. to 10 atm., what

amount of pure water must be added?
Figure 1.
Semipermeable membrane
A. 100 mL
B.
125 mL
C. 150 mL
External pressure
D. 250 mL
54. What is the external pressure necessary to stop osmosis

of a 1.0 M NaCl(aq) solution at 31C where, R = .0821
L atm. mole"1 K"1?
Purified water
Figure 1
A. Between 2.5 and 5 atm.

B. Between 5 and 10 atm.
To convert sea water to water that is suitable for
C. Between 10 and 35 atm.
consumption, an applied pressure of 1100 p.s.i. (-70 atm.) is

employed. Thisprocess of water purification is referred to as
D. Between 35 and 70 atm.
desalination. The osmotic pressure (n) of the solutioncan be

calculated using the following formula:
55. In desalination, once an external pressure source is
n = MiRT
removed, the flow of water:
(where M = molarity and i = ionizability)
A. continues from higher salt concentration to lower
Equation 1
salt concentration.
B. from higher to lower salt concentration reverses to

lower to higher salt concentration.
A solution with 5.84 grams NaCl dissolved into 100
grams water (with a final volume thatis just over 100 mL) is
placed into a desalination tube. The desalination tube is then
connected to a plunger used to vary the applied pressure. The
C. continues from lower salt concentration to higher

salt concentration.
desalination tube employs a cellophane membrane for

segregation of the impurities from the water.
D. from lower to higher salt concentration reverses to
higher to lowersalt concentration.
51. An external pressure of 10 atm has what effect on an
aqueous solution of MgCl2 with an osmotic pressure of
5 6. Which of the following methods could also be usedfor

purifyingsalt water?
A. Filtering through glass beads to remove thesalt
B. Freezing the solution and removing the relatively
5 atm?
A. External pressure forces water out from the salt

solution, which increases [MgChl over time.
B. External pressure forces water out from the salt
pure ice that forms

C. Centrifuging the solution into cotton
solution, which decreases [MgCl2] over time.
C. External pressure forces water into the salt
D. Increasing the pressure to force the salt to
solution, which increases [MgCl2] over time.
precipitateout of solution
D. External pressure forces water into the salt

solution, which decreases [MgCl2] over time.
107
58. The HIGHEST boiling point would be associated with

which of these solutions in Table 1 ?
A researcher wanted to study the effects of salt

concentration on the physical properties of a solution. To do
this, she set up six flasks that varied in content and
concentration (see Table 1 for contents). She used distilled
water that had been recently heated to remove any dissolved
carbon dioxide. In each flask, the solution was made by first
adding the solid to the flask, followed by adding the liquid to
the flask. In each case, the salt fully dissolved into the
solution at the ambient temperature of the solvent. The
researcher concluded that the solutes are fully soluble in water
A. Solution B (Flask#2)
B. Solution C (Flask # 3)
C. Solution E (Flask # 5)
D. Solution F (Flask # 6)
59. Upon comparing solutions in Table 1, which of the

following is NOT true?
A. The solution in Flask # 1 has a higher electrical
conductivity than the solution in Flask # 4.
B. The solution in Flask # 2 has a higher vapor
pressure than the solution in Flask # 5.
C. The solution in Flask # 3 has a higher osmotic
pressure than the solution in Flask # 6.
D. The solution in Flask # 4 has a higher freezing
point than the solution in Flask # 6.
at room temperature.
FtesK
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Grams salt
Grams water added
2.0 grams NaCl

2.0 grams NaCl
4.0 grams NaCl
2.0 grams KC1
2.0 grams KC1
4.0 grams KC1
100 grams H2O

200 grams H2O
100 grams H2O
100 grams H2O
200 grams H2O
100 grams H2O
60. Which of the following aqueous solutions has the

LOWEST boiling point?
MW (NaCl) = 58.4 grams/mole

MW(KCl) = 74.5 grams/mole
A. 0.20 m BeCl2(aq)
Table 1
B. 0.20 m NaCl(aq)
Properties of the solution that are affected by the

concentration of solute are referred to as colligative
properties. The colligative properties include the freezing
point, the boiling point, osmotic pressure, and conductance.
As more non-volatile soluble impurities are added to a
solution, the freezing point decreases and the boiling point
and osmotic pressure increase. Conductance increases, if the
solute is ionic. For covalently bound solutes, conductance is
not detectably affected.
C. 0.30mKCl(aq)
D. 0.30 m MgCl2(aq)
61. If Kf for water is 1.86 8C/molal, then the freezing point

of Solution C (Flask # 3) is which of the following?
A. -0.12 C
B. -0.24 C
C. -1.20 C
As an aqueous salt solution boils, the kg of water

(solvent) decrease, so that the molality of the solution
increases. This means that as the solution boils away, the
boiling point is increasing. A similar effect is observed with
freezing point depression. An interesting observation
involves ice cubes. Ice cubes freeze from the outside inward,
so as they freeze, the exterior is pure, but solute impurities
get trapped in the core. This explains why the center of ice
cubes are cloudy. If it is a gas particle that is trapped in the
ice cube, it makes a loud noise as it escapes, once the ice
cube is broken open.
D. -2.40 SC
62. As more solute is added to solution, which of the
following does NOT increase?

A.
B.
C.
D.
57. When considering only solutions in Table 1, what can

be said about the melting of the solution in Flask #3?
The freezing point

The boiling point
The osmotic pressure
The density
63. The LOWEST freezing point for the solutions is

associated with which of the following solutions?
A. The freezing point is the greatest of all the
A. Solution A (Flask # 1)
solutions, and it increases as the solution freezes.
B. Solution B (Flask # 2)
B. The freezing point is the lowest of all solutions,
C. Solution D (Flask # 4)
and it increases as the solution freezes.
C. The freezing point is the greatest of all solutions,
D. Solution E (Flask # 5)
and it decreases as the solution freezes.
D. The freezing point is the lowest of all solutions,

and it decreases as the solution freezes.
108
2221-
A student set out to determine kf, the freezing point
depression constant, for cyclohexanol. The freezing point

depression constant is a property of a solvent, so solutes
must be added to cyclohexanol to study its colligative
properties. In two separate experiments, the student added
known quantities of menthol and camphor to separate test
tubes containing 10.000 grams of cyclohexanol liquid at
1.0102 grams menthol in

10.000 grams cyclohexanol
18-
27*C. The solutions were thoroughly mixed and then

immersed in an ice bath until they were frozen. Then the test
tubes were removed from the ice bath and placed into a water
bath held constant at 35*C. The temperature of the mixture
in the test tube was recorded every twenty seconds, until the
solution was completely liquefied again. The time and

temperature data for Experiment 1, using camphor as the
120
solute, are listed in Table 1 below:
Figure 1
Camphor
Mass = 1.0102 grams
160 200 240 280 320 360
Time (seconds)
The normal freezing point of cyclohexanol is found to be

22.6C,according to the thermometer used in Experiment 2.
MW = 152.25
Time (seconds)
Temperature (C)
13.9
64. Why must the normal freezing point be determined

using the thermometer, rather than using the standard
20
14.3
40
14.7
60
15.1
80
15.6
100
16.0
120
16.4
140
16.7
C. The normal freezing point is not the same for all
160
17.1
180
17.8
samples of cyclohexanol.
D. The freezing point varies with the shape of the
200
18.7
220
19.6
240
20.5
260
21.4
280
22.4
300
23.3
320
24.2
340
25.1
360
26.1
value from the literature?
A. The standard value may not hold during the

experimental conditions.
B. The thermometer may not be calibrated, so the
normal freezing point must be determined to

determine the AT accurately.
container.
65. Menthol and camphor do not dissociate once in

solution. If an impurity werechosen that can dissociate
into two particles in solution, how would the freezing
point be affected?
A. Thefreezing point would decrease by twice as much

as expected, if the impurity did notdissociate.
B. The freezing point would decrease by as much as
expected, if the impuritydid not dissociate.
C. The freezing point would decrease by half as much
as expected, if the impurity did not dissociate.
Table 1
For Experiment 2, using menthol as the solute, the

procedure was carried out in exactly the same manner as in
Experiment 1. The formula for camphor is CioHÔ, and
D. The freezing point would remain constant.
the formula for menthol is C10H20O. This time the data

were recorded by graphing temperature as a function of time,
rather than listing the data in table form. The graph for the
menthol experiment is shown in Figure 1. The freezing
point of the solution is determined by finding the inflection
point. A horizontal line is extrapolated back from the
inflection point to the temperature axis to determine the
freezing point of the solution. The horizontal line used to
66. The freezing point for the camphor-cyclohexanol

solution in Experiment 1 was reached:
A.
B.
C.
D.
during the first minute of observation.

during the second minute of observation.
during the third minute of observation.
during the sixth minute of observation.
determine the freezing point is also shown in Figure 1.
109
67. For an experiment in which the compound chosen was a

solid at room temperature rather than a liquid, the
mixture must be heated from room temperature to its
melting point instead of being cooled from room
temperature to its freezing point. This would be the
case with naphthalene. Which of the following graphs
represents what should be observed, if a naphthalenecamphor mixture were heated to its liquid state and then
68. The freezing point for which solution is lower, the one
used in Experiment 1 or the one used in Experiment 2?
A. The camphor solution has a lower freezing point,
because the camphor solution has a higher molality
than the menthol solution.
B. The camphor solution has a lower freezing point,

because the camphor solution has a lower molality
than the menthol solution.
observed while it was allowed to cool to its solid form?
C. The menthol solution has a lower freezing point,

because the menthol solution has a higher molality
than the camphor solution.
D. The menthol solution has a lower freezing point,
because the menthol solution has a lower molality
than the camphor solution.
69. What would be expected for the freezing point of a

solution made by mixing 20.000 grams of cyclohexanol
with 1.0102 grams of menthol?
A.
B.
C.
D.
B.-l
The freezing point would be 22.6C.

70. Which of the following statements BEST explains the

reason for the observed depression in the freezing point
i
as an impurity is added to the solution?
Time
A. The molecules can form a lattice structure more
easily with impurities present, because the

impurities repel the solvent molecules to form a
C.n
lattice-like structure.
The solution thus freezes
more easily, which results in an increase in the

freezing point.
2
B. The molecules can form a lattice structure more
11

impurities repel the solvent molecules to form a
TBI
lattice-like structure. The solution thus freezes less
easily, which results in a decrease in the freezing

I
point.
C. The molecules cannot form a lattice structure as
Time

impurities attract the solvent molecules and keep
D.n
them in solution. The solution thus freezes more
easily, which results in an increase in the freezing

point.
D. The molecules cannot form a lattice structure as

impurities attract the solvent molecules and keep
them in solution.
The solution thus freezes less
easily, which results in a decrease in the freezing

point.
i
Time
110
7 2. Which of these equations provides the correct way to

calculate the molecular weight of the liquid in the flask?
The Dumas experiment involves filling a flask of known

mass and volume with an organic liquid. The organic liquid
is heated, so that it begins to vaporize. Assuming that the
air in the flask is lighter than these organic vapors, the air is
Note: mCOndensed vapor = mass of the organic liquid

condensed in the flask.
A. MW = mconcjense<j vapor x
PV
displaced out of the flask by the organic vapors through a

small hole at the top of the flask. The ideal flask is a
sphericalflask with a stopcock attached, but a good substitute
would be any flask with a foil cap that has a small pinhole in
the foil cap. Foil is chosen in lieu of plastic or rubber,
because organic solvents will dissolve both plastic and
rubber. The solution is heated by flame until the last trace of
liquid residue has evaporated.
B. MW - mCOndensed vapor x
PV
RT
C. MW =
D. MW =
RT
mcondensed vapor
PV
mcondensed vapor
Once the liquid has completely evaporated, it is assumed

that the flask is filled entirely with organic vapors. As the
flask cools, the vapors condense back into a liquid, and air
flows back into the flask through the pinhole. Once the flask
is back to its initial temperature (ambient temperature), the
combined mass of the flask and condensed organic liquid is
measured. The increase in mass over the initial weighing of
the empty flask can be attributed to the organic liquid in the
flask. The small amount of air displaced by the organic
liquid is assumed to be negligible.
RT
73. What would be the result if the heating source were

removed before all of the organic liquid had completely
vaporized?
A. The mass measured at the end of the experiment

would be too high, and the molecular mass
calculated from the experiment would be too high.
B. The mass measured at the end of the experiment
would be too high, and the molecular mass
calculated from the experiment would be too low.
C. The mass measured at the end of the experiment
An example of the flask is drawn in Figure 1 below:
would be too low, and the molecular mass
Pinhole
calculated from the experiment would be too high.

D. The mass measured at the end of the experiment
would be too low, and the molecular mass
calculated from the experiment would be too low.
74. Which of the following changes to the flask would

NOT increase the accuracy of the experiment?
A. Rather than using a foil cap, use a permanent
attachment with a small valve that can be opened
and shut manually.
B. Use an electric heating mantle to encompass the

flask, rather than a flame from a gas burner.
Organic liquid
C. Increase the size of the pore in the aluminum foil
Figure 1
cap.
D. Use a spherical flask withless internal surface area.
The mass of the organic liquid can be used to determine

the molecular mass of the unknown organic liquid. Because
the pressure, temperature, and volume of the gas in the flask

are known at the boiling point of the liquid, the moles of the
liquid in the flask can be determined using PV = nRT.
7 5. Which typeof organic liquid couldbe measured MOST

accuratelyusing the Dumas technique?
A. A less volatile organic liquid with a high molecular

71. Why should this experiment NOT be carried out with a
plastic cap on the flask?
mass.
B. A highly volatile organic liquid with a high
A. The plastic cap can expand during the experiment.

B. The pore size in the plastic cap would be too small.
C. The plastic cap does not allow air to flow back into
molecular mass.
C. A less volatile organic liquid with a low molecular

mass.
D. A highly volatile organic liquid with a low
the flask as it cools.
molecular mass.
D. The plastic cap can dissolve in the organic vapors.
111
76. Which of the following liquids would form the

DENSEST vapor upon heating?
Liquids have certain properties that provide an indirect

measure of their intermolecular forces. These properties are
viscosity, surface tension, and vapor pressure. Table 1 lists
the values for these properties for various selected solvents.
A. CH3CH2CH2OH
B. CH3(CH2)3CH2C1
C. CH3(CH2)4CH2Br
D. (CH3)3CCH2OH
Surface
Tension
Viscosity
2.0 x 10"3 ^~ 4.2 x 10-2-i-
CHBr3
5.8 xlO"4 -Mi
2.5 x 10"2 J-
9.7 x 10"4-^- 2.5 x 10-2_J_

1.57-M- 6.3 x 10'3 -i1.0 x 10"3-Mi
7.3 x lO-2 JL
2.6 x 10"4-l^-
18.2 torr
m2
ni's
C6H14
.00018 torr
m2
m-s
H20
86.8 torr
m2
m-s
C3H803
173 torr
m2
ni's
CCI4
3.9 torr
m2
m-s
CHCI3
Pvapor
(@ 20C)
1.6 x 10-2J-
m-s
44 torr
m2
Table 1
The definition of each physical property is listed below.

The SI units for each value are indicated in Table 1 above.
Viscosity:
A resistance to flow exhibited by all

liquids.
Surface tension: The amount of energy required to increase

the surface area of a liquid by a specified
unit amount.
Vaporpressure: The pressure exerted by a gas formed

through evaporation above the surface of
the liquid.
7 7. Which of the following does NOT affect the vapor

pressure above a liquid?
A. Hydrogen bonding
B. Polarity
C. Molecular mass
D. Surface area
78. For non-hydrogen-bonding liquids, as the viscosity

increases, what is observed with the vapor pressure and
surface tension?
A. The vapor pressure increases, while the surface

tension shows no distinct trend.
B. The surface tension increases, while the vapor

pressure shows no distinct trend.
C. Both the surface tension and vapor pressure show
increases.
D. Neither the surface tension nor the vapor pressure

shows a distinct trend.
112
79. Through a column of which solution would a heavy
84. Which set of values is
the BEST estimate for the
metal ball fall the fastest, if the impact of the buoyant

force was negligible?
surface tension, vapor pressure at 20C, and viscosity of

CH2CI2?
A. Water
A. Surface tension = 2.5 x 10 2J_
B.
Bromoform
m*
C. Glycerol
Vapor pressure = 223 torr
D. Carbon tetrachloride
Viscosity =4.7 x 10"4-^ms
B. Surface tension = 4.9 x \0'2-^nr
Vapor pressure = 67.4 ton-
80. A dense piece of paper when laid flat atop a liquid to
Viscosity = 4.7 x 10 4 kg
maximize its surface area would remain atop the surface

of which liquid for the longest time?
m-s
C. Surface tension = 4.9 x 10"2 J-
A. Carbon tetrachloride
,2
nr
B. Chloroform
Vapor pressure = 223 ton-
C. Hexane
Viscosity =4.7 x 10"2-^-
D. Water
ms
D. Surface tension = 2.5 x 10~2 ^,2
nv
Vapor pressure = 67.4 ton-
Viscosity =4.7 x 10"2-^-
81. What explains the higher vapor pressure for chloroform
ms
than for carbon tetrachloride?
A. Carbon tetrachloride is more polar than chloroform.

B. Carbon tetrachloride has a greater molecular mass
than chloroform.
C. Carbon tetrachloride has greater surface tension than

chloroform.
D. Carbon tetrachloride has more hydrogen bonding

than chloroform.
82. Which compound is MOST likely to form beads on the

surface of the indicated solid?
A. A polar liquid with low surface tension on the

surface of a polar solid
B. A polar liquid with high surface tension on the

surface of a polar solid
C. A polar liquid with low surface tension on the

surface of a non-polar solid
D. A polar liquid with high surface tension on the

surface of a non-polar solid
83. What is the more critical factor when determining the

vapor
and viscosity of CCI4 compared to CHCI3?
B.
For both PVapor and viscosity: the molecular mass

For both Pvapor and viscosity: the polarity
For PVapor: polarity; and for viscosity: the
For Pvapor' tne molecular mass; and for viscosity:
molecular mass
polarity
113
8 7. How can the black color associated with graphite be

explained in terms of structure?
Allotropes are made of the same element, but have

different physical properties. The difference in physical
properties can be attributed to the type of molecular bonding,
as is seen with diamond and graphite, both of which are made
A. Graphite has conjugation, so it absorbs all light.

B. Graphite has conjugation, so it reflects all light.
C. Graphite has no conjugation, so it absorbs all
light.
D. Graphite has no conjugation, so it reflects all light.
of carbon. In diamond, all carbons have sp^-hybridization

and the lattice is held together completely by sigma bonds.
In graphite, all carbons have sp2-hybridization and their are

sheets of conjugated carbon atoms in a network of sixmembered rings. The structure of a sheet of graphite is
shown in Figure 1.
88. Which of the following materials is the best electrical

conductor?
A. C60 Buckminster fullerene
B. C72 Buckminster fullerene

C. Diamond
D. Graphite
8 9. What are the bond angles found in graphite?

A. 90
B.
109.5
C. 120
D. 144'
Figure 1
90. Which of the following materials is LEAST likely to
Buckminster fullerene, buckyball, is also an allotrope of

carbon. One example is C6o, which is a spheroidal structure
made entirely of carbon atoms. Buckyball can be separated
from other allotropes, such as C70 and C72, by sublimation.
form an allotrope?
A. Argon
B. Carbon
These allotropes have different physical properties than C60

due to different packing in their respective lattice structures.
C. Phosphorus
D. Sulfur
Because the molecules are spheroidal in nature, it can
function likemicroscopic ball bearings, so buckyball is often

used as a lubricant.
The molecular mass is the most
91. Which of the following three dimensional structures

MOST accurately depicts P4?
significant factor in the energy required to undergo a phase

change.
A.
85. How can it be explained that diamond is more dense
P-
than graphite?
P-
A. Doublebondsare longer than single bonds.

B. Layering in graphite allows atoms to get closer,
C.
because they are in direct contact.
<
C. Carbon atoms in diamond are smaller than carbon
atoms in graphite.
D. Packing is closer in diamond's tetrahedral lattice

than graphite sheets.
92. Which of the following allotropes of carbon has the

GREATEST sublimation point at 0.010 atm.?
86. How can the difference in melting point between two
A. C60
B. C64
allotropes BEST be explained?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The two have different polarities.

The two havedifferent molecular weights.
The two havedifferent interatomic bonding.
The two have different electronegativities.
C. C70
D. C72
114
9 6. CH4 has a lower boiling point than SiH4, due to:

A. its lower molecular mass.
B. its stronger ionic interactions.
C. its lower affinity entropy.

D. its increased hydrogen bonding.
93. If a solution made by adding 0.10 moles KCl to 1.00

liters of water conducts electricity better than a solution
made by adding 0.10 moles AgCl to 1.00 liters of
water, then:
A. 0.10 M KCl(aq) has greater osmotic pressure than

0.10 M AgCl(aq).
B. 0.10 M KCl(aq) has the same osmotic pressure as
0.10 M AgCl(aq).
C. 0.10 M KCl(aq) has lower osmotic pressure than
0.10 M AgCl(aq).
D. 0.12 M KCl(aq) has lower osmotic pressure than
O.lOMAgCl(aq).
9 7. Which of the following is a property of a solid, under

isobaric and isothermal conditions?
A. The ability to flow

B. An amorphous structure
C. Molecules that undergo displacement
D. Static dimensions
9 4. Which of the following phase change processesabsorbs

the GREATEST amount of energy?
98. Water has a vapor pressure of 149.4 torr at 60C. An

unknown liquid is found to have a vapor pressure of
A. Evaporation
130.6 torr at 60'C. If the vapor pressure of water at
B. Condensation
room temperature is 22.65 torr, then at room
C. Sublimation
temperature, the vapor pressure of the unknown is:
D. Deposition
A. 7.61 torr.
B. 20.00 torr.
C. 22.65 torr.
D. 45.35 torr.
9 5. Given that the normal boiling point for Compound A is

127.0C, and the enthalpy of vaporization is 33.26
kJ/mole, what would the boiling point of Compound A
be in Running Springs, California (elevation 9,870 ft.
and Patm = 603 torr)?
9 9. A liquid is defined as:
A. 115.0C
A.
B.
C.
D.
B. 133.38C
C. 137.4'C
D. 151.0C
115
havinga definiteshape and definite volume.

having a definite shapeand indefinite volume.
having an indefinite shapeanddefinite volume.
having an indefinite shapeand indefinite volume.
100. Chloroform is a liquid at room temperature (roughly

20C). Which set of physical constants is possible for
HCCI3?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Boiling point: 88C; melting point: 31C

Boiling point: 18C; melting point: -31C
Boiling point: 61C; melting point: -64C
Boiling point: 32C; melting point: 31C
"My day isn't complete, until I do some ehem!"
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. B
10.
12. A
13.
15.
18.
23.
28.
33.
38.
43.
48.
53.
58.
63.
D
19. C
24. D
29. B
34. B
68.
D
16. C
21. B
11.
26.
31.
36. C
A
41.
116
27. D
32. A
37. B
46. D
42. A
47. C
51. A
52.
56.
61.
66.
D
C
71.
57. D
62. A
67. B
72. A
76. C
81. B
77. D
82. D
C
B
20.
C
25. B
30.
35. B
39. B
I)
44.
40. D
45. B
49.
54.
50.
c
B
A
55. B
59. B
64. B
60. B
65. A
69. B
C
70.
75.
73. A
74.
78.
79.
84.
D
A
80. D
85. D
83. A
88. D
90.
92. D
93. A
89.
94.
91. B
95.
96. A
97.
98.
99.
100.
86.
17.
22. B
14.
87.
YOU'RE THROUGH WITH
PHASES!
Phases Passages Answers

Freeze-Drying and Cloud-Seeding
Passage I (Questions 1-7)

1.
2.
Choice C is correct. In freeze-drying, the ice in the frozen coffee is exposed to a reduced pressure environment
where the water molecules in the ice sublime into a gas. The process of converting from a solid directly into a
gas is known as sublimation, making choice C the best answer.
Choice D is correct. Because water is in the form the ice when it sublimes away from its frozen state, the
temperature must be set so that the ice does not melt (into liquid). This means that the temperature must be less
than 0C. This eliminates choice A and B. The atmospheric pressure must be low enough to allow for
sublimation, so 1 torr is better than 1 atm. The best answer is thus choice D, a temperature well below the
normal freezing point of water and a pressure well below atmospheric pressure.
3.
Choice B is correct. The goal of freeze-drying is to remove the water from the coffee solution. Any alternative
to freeze-drying would lead to the same result. In the second choice, the water is distilled (as opposed to
sublimed) away from the solution, so the residue left behind should be similar. The high temperatures
required for distillation destroy the flavor of the coffee, however. So although distillation works well for
dehydrating coffee in theory, freeze-drying works better in practice. The best answer is choice B.
4.
5.
Choice C is correct. The temperature of a cloud can range from 0 to -10C, according to the passage. Tocool the
cloud to a lower temperature, a substance must be introduced into it that is either cooler than that temperature
or that reacts in an endothermic fashion. The only choice that meets either of these requirements is choice C.
It is stated in paragraph four of the passage that the sublimation point of CO2 is -78C.
Choice D is correct. Supercooled water is water that is cooled below its normal freezing point, but it remains a
liquid. Water normally freezes at 0C, so pure water at any temperature below this value is considered to be
supercooled. Water at -10C meets this description, making choice D the best choice. Choices Band Cshould
have been eliminated, because they are in the wrong phase.
6.
Choice C is correct. Cloud-seeding involves turning pockets of water moisture in the air into ice crystals. The
conversion ofa liquid to a solid is referred to as fusion, making choice C the best answer. This answer can be
determined by elimination of the wrong answers. The dry ice is sublimed in the process, but dry ice is carbon
dioxide, not water.
7.
Choice D is correct. The boiling point of a substance is defined as the temperature at which the vapor pressure
is equal to the atmospheric pressure. This means that the boiling point of a solution is the greatest where the
atmospheric pressure is the greatest. The greatest atmospheric pressure of these at the three locations is at sea
level (an ocean port), which eliminates choices Band C. The mountains have the lowest atmospheric pressure
of the three locations, so the boiling point is lowest in the mountains, making choice D the correct answer.
Phase Diagrams
Passage II (Questions 8 - 14)
Choice D is correct. The critical point is point y, where the liquid-gas interface line terminates. Above this
temperature and pressure, the material may not exist as a true liquid or true gas, and it is referred to as a super
critical fluid. It is no longer possible to distinguish between a liquid and a gas above the critical point. A
super-critical fluid exhibits properties of both a liquid and a gas, including the ability to flow and an
amorphous nature. This makes choice D the best choice. Point x is referred to as the triple point, the point at
which all three phases may coexist.
9.
Choice Bis correct. Compound A is represented by the phase diagram in Figure 1. Figure 1 shows thatat 298 K
and 1.3 atm. (just over 1000 torr), Compound Aexists asa liquid. After reducing the pressure from 1.3 atm. to 0.9
atm. (just less than 700 torr), Compound Acrosses into the gas phase (following the vertical line downward for
the decrease in pressure). Therefore, the correct answer is B. Even if you are not certain from drawing lines on
the diagram that it actually crosses into the gas phase, there is no answer choice saying that it undergoes no
phase change and remains as a liquid. When reading graphs, it is often a good idea to use your answer sheet for
fold the pages of the test to generate a reliable straight edge.
1 17
Section VII Detailed Explanations
10.
Choice D is correct. Sublimation is the process by which a substance converts from the solid phase directly into
the gaseous phase without passing through the liquid phase. At an appropriate pressure, any temperature
below the triple point (in this case, 298 K) is adequate for sublimation of Compound B to occur, since under these
conditions the compound has an interface between solid phase and the gas phase on the phase diagram. From
the choices given, the only temperature above 298 K (25C) is 100C (373 K), which is choice D. At this
temperature sublimation cannot occur, since the compound cannot exist in the solid state for any of the possible
pressures.
11.
Choice D is correct. At 1.0 atm. (760 torr) and 10C (283 K), Compound A (Diagram I) is in the liquid phase.
Looking at Figure 2 under the same conditions places Compound B in the solid phase. The question asks which
of the compounds is a gas (under the given conditions); and neither one is, so choice D is the best answer.
1000-
1000-
Compound B
exists as a solid
760"
760"
Compound A
exists as a liquid
3
(A
Temperature (K)
12.
283
Temperature (K) 283
Choice A is correct. STP is 0C and 1 atm. (273 K and 760 torr). Looking at Figure 2, at a temperature of 273 K
and a pressure of 760 torr (the perpendicular lines are already drawn in the passage), Compound B definitely
exists as a solid, so choice A is the best answer.
13.
Choice B is correct. The key to answering this question is to know that the lower right quadrant of the graph
(at low pressure and high temperature) indicates the conditions under which the material exists as a gas.
Evaporation is defined as the conversion from a liquid to a gas, so a vertical arrow down from the liquid region
to the gas region represents the isothermal liquid-to-gas phase change (evaporation). The correct Arrow is
arrow b, so the answer is choice B.
14.
Choice D is correct. Compound A does sublimeat 25C (298 K), if at a pressure below 760 torr; Compound A is a
solid at 250 K and 760 torr; and Compound A does have a triple point roughly equal to water (the triple point of
water is at 0C). The only uncertainty is the relative densities of the solid and liquid phases. There is no point
at which an increase in pressure at constant temperature converts the solid to a liquid. An increase in the
pressure increases the density of the material. This makes choice D the best choice.
15.
Heating Curve
Choice C is correct. The graph plots temperature as a function of heat, while heat capacity describes heat per
temperature change. This means that the relative heat capacities for the three phases can be determined from
the graph. From Figure 1, we know that the solid phase heat capacity is proportional to 1 divided by the
slope of line a. The liquid phase heat capacity is proportional to 1 divided by the slope of line c. The graph
shows that slope a > slope c, so the heat capacity of the solid phase is less than the heat capacity of the
liquid phase. Choice C is the best answer. It is given numerically in Table 1 that the heat capacity of the
liquid phase is twice the heat capacity of the gas phase. For the heat capacity of the liquid phase to be twice
the heat capacity of the solid phase, the slopes of lines a and e would have to be equal. The slopes of lines a
and e are not equal.
16.
Choice C is correct. Enthalpy is a measure of energy in the form of heat, so the heat added to the system is the
increase in enthalpy. The enthalpy of fusion is represented by line segment b in Figure 1, and the enthalpy of
vaporization is represented by line segment d. The length of segment b is less than the length of segment d, so
choice C, which states that the AHfusjon is less than the AHvaporization^ 1S correct.
Copyright by The Berkeley Reviewr
118
17.
Choice C is correct. Heat capacity is the amount of energy required to raise the temperature of a substance by
1C (or 1 K). It is observed that Compound Q heats to a higher temperature than Compound W when both are
exposed to the same amount of heat; this means that Compound Q requires a smaller input of heat energy to
reach the same increased temperature that Compound W reaches. Because less heat energy is required to raise
the temperature of Compound Q by one increment, the heat capacity of Compound Q is smaller than the heat
capacity of Compound W, so choose C. Because no phasechange transpired for either Compound Q or Compound
W, no conclusion can be drawn about their enthalpies of fusion. For this reason, choices B and D are not
necessarily wrong, but they are not valid for the question.
18.
Choice B is correct. The heat required for this transformation is the sum of the heats for the three steps:
lAHsteps=
AHijquJd heating (from 10C below the boiling point to the boiling point) + AHvaporization +
AHgas heating (from the boiling point to 10C above the boiling point).
The MW of Compound W is given in the passage as 100 grams per mole, so 10 grams of Compound W is equal to
0.1 mole of Compound W. The heat capacities are given as Qjqujd =1.0 cal/g-C and Cgas =0.5 caVg.G
AHuquid =m-Ciiquid-AT =(10 g)(1.0 cal/g.c)(i0C) =100 calories.
AHvaporization =30 kcal/mole (0-1 mole) =3kcal =3000 calories.
AHgas =m-CgaS-AT =(10 g)(0.5 cal/g.c)(ioQ =50 calories
AHtotal = 100 + 3000 + 50 = 3150 calories, so choice B is the best answer.
19.
Choice C is correct. Compound Whas a lower boiling point than water (64C for Compound W versus 100 C for
water), so it has a higher vapor pressure than water at all temperatures at which both compounds are liquids
(temperatures lower than 64C). This eliminates choice A. There is nothing mentioned about the melting point
ofCompound W or its heat of fusion, so choice Bcan beeliminated. Compound Whas a lowerboiling point than
water, so it must be easier to vaporize than water, resulting in a lower heat of vaporization for Compound W
than for water. Choice C is the best answer. Both Compound W and water have a liquid phase heat capacity
of 1.0. Choice D is therefore eliminated.
20.
Choice C is correct. From the graph in Figure 1 of the passage, we see that the phase changes are represented
bysegments b and d. It can beseen that the temperature remains constant during the phase changes, so Aistrue.
Melting (the process of going from solid phase to liquid phase) requires the addition of heat, which makes it
endothermic, so B is true also. After looking at the data given in the passage for the heat capacities at
different phases, we find that D is true. When going from the solid phase to the gas phase, heat is added at a
constant rate, so the process must be endothermic, not exothermic. The false statement is choice C.
21.
Choice B is correct. The slope of the line is defined as change in temperature over heat added. The heat
capacity of a material is the heat added per unit change in temperature. The two values are inversely
proportional to one another, which can verified by comparing their units. This makes the best answer choice B.
Bizarre Phase Diagrams
Passage IVo(Questions 22 - 28)
22.
Choice B is correct. The two solid phases can coexist with the liquid phase for Material T at the upper triple
point (roughly 1.0 atm. and greater than 298 K). The two solid phases cannot coexist with the liquid phase for
Material C at either triple point. The lower triple point is the intersection of the two solid phases and the gas
phase, while the upper triple point is the intersection of solide, liquid, and gas. Only Material T can have the
two solid phases coexisting with the liquid phase, so choice B is the best answer.
23.
Choice D is correct. For Material C, the first triple point is the intersection of the gas, solidA, and solidB
phases. This means that at temperatures below this point, the only possible forms in which Material C can
exist are either the solidA or gas form. It is a true statement that solidA may be sublimed into gas, so choice A
is valid. Between the two triple points of Material C, the line segment is the interface of solidB and gas. This
means that at temperatures in this range, it is possible to convert gas into solide, which is referred to as
deposition. This makes statement B valid. Both of the phase diagrams shown have two triple points each, so
statement C is valid. At the intersection of 1.0 atm. and 273 K on the upper phase diagram (the phase diagram
of Compound T), the phase present is solidB, not solidA- This makes choice D an untrue statement.
1 19
24.
Choice D is correct. Direct conversion refers to the direct interfacing of the two phases, so that the phases may
interconvert without first passing through an intermediate phase. For Material T, solids may be converted
directly into the liquid form at temperatures between the two triple points. This makes choice A valid. For
Material C, liquid may be converted directly into solids at temperatures above the second triple point, and
solidA may be converted directly into the gas form at temperatures below the lower triple point. This makes
choices B and C valid. To convert solidA into gas for Compound T, the conversion must pass through either
liquid or solids- Direct conversion is not possible; choice D is the best answer.
25.
Choice B is correct. For Material T, solidA and gas cannot coexist; and for Material C, solidA and liquid cannot
coexist. The only phase that can coexist with the other three phases in both Material T and Material C is
solids- Pick choice B for optimal satisfaction.
26.
Choice A is correct. The two solids, in order to belong to the same compound, must have the same atomic
composition. Therefore, they must both have the same molecular mass. This eliminates choice C. Different
connectivity implies different sigma bonds, which identifies structural isomers, not the same compound.
Different chiral centers describes stereoisomers, not different solid phases. The best way to explain different
solids is to say that they form different lattice structures. Examples are calcium carbonate and sulfur, which
each have different solid forms that are stable under different conditions. The best answer is choice A.
27.
Choice D is correct. For Material T, when the pressure is increased at 298 K, the phase converts from solids into
solidA- The increase in pressure compacts the solid, so the denser solid phase is solidA- Statement I is
therefore invalid. For Material C, heating solidA converts it into solids, so the conversion from solidA mt0
solide must be endothermic (heat-consuming). Statement II is therefore valid. For Material T, there is no
interconversion between solidA ana" me gas phase, so deposition of gas into solidA is not possible. This makes
statement III valid. Only statements II and III are valid, making choice D the best answer.
28.
Choice C is correct. The deformation of a solid can be associated with the change of the solid phase from
solidA mto solidB- At 1.0 atm., the solidA ar|d solids forms of Material T do not intersect, while they do for
Material C. Only Material C shows deformation of the solid phase with temperature change at 1.0 atm. This
makes choice C the best answer.
29.
Methanol-Ethanol Vapor Pressure
Choice B is correct. The solution with the greatest mole fraction of methanol has the highest vapor pressure of
methanol.
Methanol has the lower molecular mass between ethanol and methanol, so Beaker I have more
moles of methanol than ethanol. This means that Beaker I will exhibit a higher vapor pressure due to
methanol than Beaker III. Because the density of methanol is greater than the density of ethanol, Beaker II
with equal volume quantities of methanol and ethanol has more methanol by mass than ethanol by mass. The
mole fraction of methanol in Beaker II is even greater than the mole fraction of ethanol in Beaker I. The
highest vapor pressure of methanol is therefore above Beaker II. Pick choice B.
30.
Choice A is correct. As the temperature of the solution increases, the energy of the system increases, so that the
amount of evaporating liquid increases. This means that both the vapor pressure of ethanol and of methanol
increase, resulting in an increase in the total vapor pressure as well. The best answer is choice A.
31.
Choice D is correct. Over time, both ethanol and methanol evaporate from the solution. Because methanol has
a higher pure vapor pressure than ethanol (this can be concluded from the lower boiling point associated with
methanol), it is evaporating faster than ethanol. This means that the solution is losing methanol faster than
it is losing ethanol. The remaining solution is thus growing rich in ethanol. This eliminates choice A and B.
Because ethanol has a lower vapor pressure than methanol, the rate of vaporization decreases as the mole
fraction of methanol decreases. Choice D is the best answer.
32.
Choice A is correct. As more propanol is added to the mixtures of both methanol and propanol, and of ethanol
and propanol, the vapor pressure decreases, as seen with the reduced vapor pressure associated with the
addition of 20 mL propanol. The reduced mixed vapor pressure shows that propanol has a lower pure vapor
pressure than both methanol and ethanol. This makes choice A the best answer. The relative vapor pressures
of pure samples of the three alcohols is Pmethanol > Pethanol > Ppropanol' which can be deduced from the
passage and the information in this question.
120
33.
Choice B is correct. Beaker I has equal amounts of methanol and ethanol by mass. Because methanol has a
lower molecular mass than ethanol, the number of moles of methanol is greater than the number of moles of
ethanol. If the moles of ethanol were equal to the moles of methanol, then the total vapor pressure would be an
average of the two pure vapor pressures (30.0 torr and 40.0 torr), which is 35.0 torr. Due to the excess methanol
in the mixture, the vapor pressure is greater than 35.0 torr. It can be no higher than pure methanol, with a
vapor pressure of 40.0 torr. This means that the vapor pressure above Beaker I is between 35.0 and 40.0 torr.
The best answer is choice B.
34.
Choice B is correct. Tlie solution richest in methanol has the greatest vapor pressure. The greatest mole
fraction of methanol is found in Beaker II, so at equal temperatures, the vapor pressure above Beaker II is the
greatest. The mole fraction of methanol is greater in Beaker I than in Beaker III, so at equal temperatures, the
vapor pressure is given by: Pvapor Beaker II > Pvapor Beaker I> Pvapor Beaker III- To increase the vapor pressure
above the solution, the temperature must be increased, so for the Beaker III solution to exert the same vapor
pressure as the Beaker II solution, the temperature of the solution in Beaker III must be increased. This means
that the temperature of the solution in Beaker III must be greatest, if the vapor pressures above all three
beakers were equal. This eliminates all of the choices except B.
35.
Choice B is correct. Because the methanol has a higher vapor pressure than ethanol, the vapor above Beaker I
is richer in methanol than the solution in Beaker I. If this vapor were collected and added to a new beaker,
then the solution in the new beaker would have a higher mole fraction of methanol than the Beaker I solution.
This means that the vapor pressure of methanol above the new beaker is even greater than above Beaker I,
while the vapor pressure of ethanol above the new beaker is less than above Beaker I. The total vapor
pressure above the new beaker is greater than the total vapor pressure above Beaker I, because the solution in
the new beaker is richer in methanol, which vaporizes more easily than ethanol. The best answer is choice B.
Mixed Vapor of Methanol and Acetophenone
36.
Choice C is correct. The molecular mass of 2-propanol is 60 g/mole. The molecular mass of acetophenone is 120
g/mole. The mixture is made with equal parts of the two components by mass. Because the mass of
acetophenone is twice that of 2-propanol, there are twice as many moles of 2-propanol as acetophenone. The
pure vapor pressure of 2-propanol is normally four times that of pure acetophenone (as given in the chart), so
the mixture should show both effects in that the vapor pressure of 2-propanol is eight times that of
acetophenone. The correct answer is therefore choice C. To solve for the vapor pressure exactly, you must first
solve for the mole fraction of 2-propanol, because the vapor pressure of 2-propanol depends on it.
PCH3CH(OH)CH3 = (XcH3CH(OH)CH3)(Ppure CH3CH(OH)CH3)- The mole fraction of2-propanol is:

1 mole 2-propanol
1 mole 2-propanol + 0.5 mole acetophenone
\ _2
1.5 3
This means that the PVapor of 2-propanol is 2/3 (48 torr) =32 torr, and the Pvapor of acetophenone is 1/3 (12
torr) = 4 torr. You should pick C for best results.
37.
Choice B is correct. Acetophenone is 50% by mass of the 120 grams. The mass of acetophenone is (0.5)(120 g) =
60 g. The MW of acetophenone can be calculated by adding up the atomic weights of the formula given in the
problem:
C = 12 g/mol, H = 1 g/mol, and O = 16 g/mol- 8 (12g/mol) = 96 g/mol and 8 (1 g/mol) = 8 g/mol
96 +8+16 =120 g/mol " moles of acetophenone =60 grams (1 mole) =0.50 moles
120 g
Choose B for best results. Of course, the 60 grams is given in the passage, and the 120 is given in Table 1.
38.
Choice B is correct. At reduced pressure (500 torr is less than 1 atm.), the boiling point is reduced to a value less
than the normal boiling point. The normal boiling point of acetophenone is listed in the chart as 203C, so
choices A and C are eliminated. Because boiling point is defined as the temperature at which vapor pressure
equals atmospheric pressure, a reduced atmospheric temperature makes it easier to reach the boiling point.
Tlie best answer is choice B.
121
, .
39.
v,
Choice B is correct. The equation for the mole fraction of acetophenone is: Aacetophenone =
molesacetophenone
:t
molestotal
Tlie total number of moles in the mixture is the sum of the moles of acetophenone and 2-propanol. The mole
fraction of acetophenone is:
0.5 mole acetophenone

_ qj^ _ 1_
1 mole 2-propanol + 0.5 mole acetophenone 1.5 3
Choice B is the best answer.
40.
Choice D is correct. The vapor pressure of pure acetophenone is less than the vapor pressure of 2-propanol at
all temperatures below the boiling point of acetophenone. This means that 2-propanol evaporates faster than
acetophenone. With each successive aliquot, there is a larger percentage of acetophenone. This means that
the mole fraction of acetophenone is greater above Aliquot 10 than above Aliquot 5. This eliminates choices B
and C. Because Aliquot 5 contains a greater percentage of2-propanol, there is a greater vapor pressure above
Aliquot 5 than above Aliquot 10. The correct choice is answer D.
41.
Choice A is correct. Because 2-propanol has a lower boiling point than acetophenone, it evaporates more
quickly than acetophenone, and thus the mole fraction of2-propanol in the original solution reduces over time.
As the mole fraction of 2-propanol lessens, the mole fraction of acetophenone increases, and thus the vapor
pressure of acetophenone increases. Tlie sum of the two mole fractions is equal to 1.0 (a constant), so ifone mole
fraction decreases, the other must increase. As a point of interest, as the vapor pressure due to acetophenone
increases, the vapor pressure due to 2-propanol decreases. Pick A to reach correctness nirvana.
42.
Choice A is correct. Because the mole fraction of 2-propanol increases with the addition of 60 grams of 2-
propanol, the mole fraction of acetophenone is reduced. The sum of the mole fractions ofthe components in the
mixture mustequal 1.0 (i.e., the sum ofthe parts is the whole). A lower mole fraction ofacetophenone results in
a reduction in the vapor pressure of acetophenone. The correct choice is A.
43.
Choice D is correct. Because the vapor pressure above the original mixture is initially 32 torr for 2-propanol
and 4 torr for acetophenone, the amount of 2-propanol in the vapor phase (and thus Aliquot 1) relative to the
total vapor is 32/36. This fraction reduces to 8/9 = 1- I/9 = 1 - .111 = .889. Tlie percentage of 2-propanol is
therefore 88.9%, making the percentage of acetophenone 11.1%. Given this, choose D. Rule choice A out,
because the mole fraction of 2-propanol is greater than the mole fraction of acetophenone. Choice C would be
true if the mole fractions were equal, because the pure vapor pressure of 2-propanol is four times that of
acetophenone. This eliminates choices A, B, and C.
Passage VII (Questions 44- 50)
44.
Raoult's Law
Choice B is correct. A positive deviation from Raoult's ideal behavior is due to unfavorable interactions in the
solution phase. Unfavorable interactions are repulsive interactions that have a positive AH value. Because
the material dissolves into solution, the AG for solvation must be negative. The favorability of the dissolving
process is thus due to entropy. The correctcombination of signs for the thermodynamic values is choice B. From
the second paragraph of the passage, a positive AH value can be inferred.
45.
Choice B is correct. The largest negative deviation would involve the greatest increase in the intermolecular
forces. Acetone in solution by itself cannot exhibit hydrogen bonding (it does not have an active hydrogen).
Once ethanol has been added to the acetone, the acetone can form hydrogen bonds using one of its lone pair from
the carbonyl oxygen. The increased attraction due to hydrogen bonding results in stronger interactions in the
liquid phase and thus a reduction in the vapor pressure. Choose B for blissful feedback. Carbon tetrachloride,
hexane, and cyclohexene are essentially non-polar and exhibit no hydrogen bonding.
46.
Choice D is correct. From a 50% by moles mixture of the two liquids, the vapor due to methanol above the first
flask is 87/(g7 + 29). When the vapor is condensed, collected, and placed into the second flask, the condensed
solution is 75% methanol by moles. The vapor pressure of methanol above the second flask is greater than 75%,
because methanol evaporates more readily than butanol evaporates. To be the star you want to be, pick D.
This question presents the principle behind fractional distillation. By continuously condensing and re
distilling, the distillate becomes richer with regard to the component with the lower boiling point.
122
47.
Choice C is correct. Positive deviations are associated with a mixture that generates a vapor pressure greater
than expected according to Raoult's law. A positive deviation is due to reduced intermolecular forces in
solution, which can be correlated with repulsion. Because mixing the liquids results in repulsion (which can be
thought of as bond-breaking), the dilution endothermic, so AH is positive. This is stated in the passage, so no
background knowledge is needed. The best answer is choice C.
48.
Choice A is correct. The vapor pressure is calculated by multiplying the mole fraction of Component B by its
pure vapor pressure. The mole fraction of Component B is 0.40 and its pure vapor pressure is 75 torr. The math is
as follows:
0.40 x75 torr =2/5 x75 torr =2x15 torr =30 torr
The best answer is choice A. The answer must be less than 75 (the vapor pressure of pure Component B), so
choices C and D are eliminated.
49.
Choice C is correct. Compound D has a higher pure vapor pressure than Compound C (as shown in the graph by
the higher vapor pressure for pure Compound D than pure Compound C), so Compound D evaporates more
readily. This must be read from the second graph. The vapor pressure when the mole fraction of Compound D is
equal to 1.0 is greater than the vapor pressure when the mole fraction of Compound C is 1.0. Therefore, as
Compound D evaporates, Compound C does not evaporate as readily, and so the solution loses Compound D more
readily than it loses Compound C. With time, the solution becomes enriched in Compound C from a mole
percent perspective. The mole fraction of Compound C increases while the mole fraction of Compound D
decreases. This is choice C. With evaporation, the moles of both Compound C and Compound D decrease, but
the question asks for the mole fraction, not moles. The sum of the mole fractions must always be 1.0.
50.
Choice A is correct. A drastic negative deviation results in a sharp drop in the vapor pressure. This implies
that more than just an increase in intermolecular forces has transpired. A sharp drop in vapor pressure can be
attributed to dimerization between the molecules (which is caused by a bond-forming reaction). This is best
explained by choice A. Changes in polarity would cause only minor deviations in vapor pressure, not major
ones, so choices C and D should have been eliminated. The product has a greater molecular mass than the
original molecules, making it harder to vaporize than the original molecules.
51.
Desalination and Osmotic Pressure
Choice A is correct. Because the Pexternal exceeds the P0smotio me applied pressure forces the water to flow
from the salt solution (the more concentrated solution) across the semipermeable membrane (to the less
concentrated solution). This is because the net force is from the solution to the pure water cell. This makes both
choice C and choice D invalid. As water leaves the aqueous magnesium chloride solution, the MgCb
concentration increases, because the volume of water is decreasing, while the moles of salt are remaining
constant. This makes choice A the best answer.
52.
Choice C is correct. The solution with the greatest osmotic pressure is the solution with the greatest total ion
concentration. The greatest total ion concentration results from the highest combination of molarity (salt
concentration) and ionizability (i). Choice A yields a total ion concentration of 0.4 molar, because the salt
solution is 0.20 molar, and there are 2 ions per NaCl salt molecule. Choice Byields a total ion concentration of
0.6 molar, because the salt solution is 0.30 molar, and there are 2 ions per KCl salt molecule. Choice C is the
best choice, because the salt solution is 0.25 molar and there are 3 ions per salt molecule. This results in 0.75
molar solution in total ion impurities, assuming the salt is fully soluble. The solubility products are listed to
show that the salts are either fully soluble or partially soluble. Choices A, B, and C all dissolve completely,
because their solubility product, and therefore their molar solubility, are greater than 1.0. Answer choice D is
tempting, because if you blindly considered the concentration listed, you would get the largest value. But for
lead chloride D(PbCl2), the solubility product is 1.6 x10"5 M3, so the molar solubility is 1.6 x10"2 M.
Molar solubility =
3/k
4
?/l.6 x 10"5 = ^4.0 x 10"6 = V4.0 x 10"2

V
This means that not all of the lead chloride solid added to the water dissolves. According to the molar
solubility, the molarity of the ions in fully saturated aqueous lead chloride is 0.048 M. For this reason, lead
chloride is eliminated from the answer choices. Choice C is the best answer choice.
Copyright by The Berkeley Reviewc
123
53.
Choice C is correct. This question is asking about dilution, for which one normally uses the equation MjVi =
M2V2. Because the osmotic pressure of the solution decreases as the volume of solvent (and thus solution)
increases, the equation can be rewritten as: n\V\ =71^2- The osmotic pressure of the solution decreases, because
the salt concentration decreases (and osmotic pressure depends on the molarity of the solution). If the
mathematical approach does not make sense, it should intuitively make sense that decreasing the solution
concentration would reduce the osmotic pressure, because osmotic pressure is directly proportional to molarity (%
= MiRT). To reduce the osmotic pressure to 0.4 times its original value, the concentration must be reduced to 0.4
times its original value, and thus the volume must increase by a factor of 1-0/0.4 = 2.5. The final volume of
solution should be 250 mL. For the final volume to equal 250 mL, 150 mL of water must be added to the initial
100 mL of solution. Tlie calculation is as follows:
jcjVi =7t9V2, making V2 =Vl\\ Thus V2 =100 mL(25 atm.j =250 mL.
\7i2/
uOatm./
Again, 250 mL is the final volume, so 150 mL watermust be added to the original 100 mLof brine solution to reach
a total volume of 250 mL. This is choice C.
54.
Choice D is correct. To stop osmosis, the external pressure must equal the osmotic pressure. The osmotic pressure
(ti) can be calculated using the equation n = MiRT (as presented in the passage). The osmoticpressure is thus:
IC1.0 mole L"1 x 2 ions x 0.0821 L atm. mole'1 K"1 x 304 K = 2 x 25 atm. = 50 atm, choice D
55.
Choice B is correct. In desalination, applied external pressure forces the flow of water from the cell of higher
concentration to the cell of lower concentration. Once the applied pressure is reduced, nature takes over and the
flow of water reverses so that it flows from the cell of lower concentration to the cell of higher concentration.
This is best stated in answer choice B.
56.
Choice B is correct. Water can be extracted from salt water by exploiting the other colligative properties of
the solution. Water could be distilled away (boiled off and then recondensed). It can also be frozen away,
although the freezing point of the salt water is lower than the freezing point of pure water. This makes choice
B the best answer.
Freezing Point Depression Comparison
57.
Choice D is correct. The aqueous salt solution in Flask #3 has the highest concentration of all of the solutions,
because NaCl has a lower molecular mass than KCl, and Flask #3 has the greatest mass of solute per least mass
of solvent. Because the freezing point is depressed by the addition of solute, the freezing point is the lowest in
the most concentrated solution, which is the one in Flask #3. As the ice freezes out of the solution, it freezes
relatively pure (salt-free); thus, as ice freezes from the solution, the solution becomes more concentrated. As
the solution becomes more concentrated, the freezing point is lowered even further, so choice D is correct.
58.
59.
Choice B is correct. The presence of a solute, in addition to lowering the freezing point, also elevates the
boiling point of a solvent. This means that the most concentrated salt solution is associated with the highest
boiling point. AT = kîm, so the salt of choice once again is NaCl (since it has the smallest mass), and the
solution we want is the one with the largest molality. The most concentrated NaCl solution is the one in Flask
#3 (most grams and least volume). Choice B is the correct answer.
Choice B is correct. The solutions in Flask #1 and Flask #4 look comparable, but because KCl has a higher
molecular mass, there are more moles of salt in Flask #1 than Flask #4. This means that the solution in Flask
#1 has more ions than the solution in Flask # 4, so the solution in Flask #1 has a higher electrical conductivity.
Choice A is a valid statement. The solution in Flask #2 has more solute particles than the solution in Flask # 5,
so the solution in Flask #2 has less water vapor escaping. This results in a lower vapor pressure, so choice B is
an invalid statement, and thus the best answer. The solution in Flask #3 has more solute particles than the
solution in Flask # 6. Osmotic pressure (it) is calculated using n = MiRT, so the solution in Flask #3 has a higher
osmotic pressure than the solution in Flask # 6. Choice C is a valid statement. The solution in Flask # 6 has a
higher concentration of KCl than the solution in Flask # 4, so the solution in Flask # 6 has a more depressed
(lower) freezing point. The solution in Flask # 4 has a higher freezing point, so choice D is a valid statement.
124
60.
Choice B is correct. The lowest boiling point is associated with the solution that has the smallest number of
solute ions in solution. All of the salts dissociate completely in aqueous solution, so the smallest product of
molality and ionizability (m x i value) yields the smallest concentration of solute ions in solution. This
ultimately results in the lowest boiling point of the solutions. The lowest concentration of the choices is 0.2 m
and the smallest i value is 2, so 0.2 m NaCl(aq) (with the lowest concentration and smallest i value of the
choices) yields the fewest solute ions. Answer choice B is tlie best answer.
61.
Choice D is correct. To determine the exact freezing point of a solution, the molality of the solution, the i value
ofthe salt, and freezing point depression constant of thesolvent mustbe known. The question gives the freezing
point depression constant (kf) of water as 1.86 C/molal. Sodium chloride breaks into two ions, so the i value for
the salt is 2. The molality of the salt solution in flask #3 is:
molality =
(4 g soluteX1 mole solute)
58.4 g solute = 40 mole solute =40 mole solute 067m
0.1 kg solvent
58.4 kg solvent
60 kg solvent
Determining the freezing point requires first calculating the freezing point depression value, which can be
calculated from AT = kfim.
AT = kfim = (1.86 c/molal)2(0.67 molal) = 1.86 x 1.34C > 1.86C

The boiling point of the solution is the normal boiling point of the solvent (in this case 0C) minus the freezing
point depression value, calculated as 1.86 C. The freezing point of the solution is:
Tbp = Tnbp - AT =0 -1.86 = -1.86, soTbp < -1.86 C

The freezing point of the solution is lower than -1.86 C and only choice D is less than -1.86"C, so choice D is the
best answer.
62.
Choice A is correct. As more solute is added to the solution, the concentration increases. The freezing point
decreases with increasing concentration, making choice A the best answer. The density is assumed to increase,
because the addition of solute increases a solution's mass without significantly affecting its volume.
63.
Choice A is correct. The presence of a solute depresses (lowers) the freezing point of a solvent, so the most
concentrated solution of salt water must have the lowest freezing point. Choices B and D are eliminated,
because the volume of water is greater than in choices A and C, given equal mass salt quantities. This leaves
answers A and C as possibilities. AT = kfim, hence the salt with the largest molality (m) has the greatest
temperature depression. The greatest temperature depression results in the lowest freezing point. NaCl has a
larger number of moles than KCl, because NaCl has a lower molecular mass than KCl, and both NaCl and KCl
are present in equal mass quantities. The lowest freezing point is associated with Flask #1. For the highest
point result, choose answer A. Note that all of the salts have an i value of 2.
Freezing Point Depression Experiment
64.
Choice B is correct. The thermometer may possibly be off by a few degrees, but that is important only in
determining the normal freezing point. The important value in this experiment is the difference in
temperature, which is the same whether the thermometer is off by a few degrees or not. By using the same
thermometer throughout the experiment, any consistent error should cancel itself out. Choice B is the best.
65.
Choice A is correct. If the impurity dissociates into two particles, then there are twice as many impurities as
would normally be expected, so the freezing point is depressed by twice the amount that would normally be
expected. This makes choice A correct, so choice A is your choice for a brighter tomorrow.
66.
Choice C is correct. From 0 seconds up to 160 seconds, the temperature changes by an average of 0.4 C per 20
seconds. From 180 seconds up until the experiment is terminated, the temperature changes by an average of 0.9
C per 20 seconds. It was between the 160-second mark and the 180-second mark that the rate of temperature
change was not one these two values. Because the rate of increase changed, it can be assumed that the slope of
the graph corresponding to the data would show an inflection point between the 160- and 180-second marks.
This means that the melting point occurred somewhere between these two marks, which means that it occurred
during the third minute of the experiment. The best answer is choice C.
125
67.
Choice B is correct. In the proposed experiment, the mixture is observed as it cools. Because the temperature
decreases as it is observed over time, choices A and C (which show an increase in temperature over time) are
eliminated. The curve for cooling should be the inverse of the curve observed with cyclohexanol in the menthol
experiment, so the best choice is answer B. Choice D is incorrect, because it shows a relatively flat line to start,
followed by a rapid temperature change during the phase change process. As seen with heating curves for pure
substances, the temperature change during a phase change process should be zero. The curves representing the
cooling ofa pure compound versus one with solute impurities is drawn below. Notice the similarities between
the two graphs in terms of slope changes.
"w
Graph of solvent with impurity

0)
H
Graph of solvent without impurity
2 ~
"3
U
Dh-1
S H
i
TIIIIIIIIIIIII
Time
68.
Choice A is correct. The same mass of camphor was added to Test tube #1 as the mass of menthol that was
added to Test tube #2. Because menthol has a larger molecular mass, the moles of camphor added are greater
than the moles of menthol added. This means that the molality of camphor is greater than the molality of
menthol, thus eliminating choices Band C. The freezing point for the camphorsolution is somewhere between
17.1C and 17.8C, according to the data in Table 1. The freezing point of the menthol solution is 17.8C,
according to the graph, so the freezing point for the camphor solution is less than the freezing point for the
menthol solution. This makes choice A correct.
69.
Choice B is correct. Using twice as much solvent as was used in the menthol experiment would result in a
solution with half the molality of the menthol solution in the experiment. This results in a AT value (decrease
in freezing point) that is half as large as the AT from the experiment. The freezing point still drops from its
normal freezing point of 22.6 C (eliminating choice A), but not by as much as what was observed in the
experiment. The freezing point is greater than 17.8 C, thus eliminating choices C and D. The only choice left
is answer B. The observed AT in the experiment was 22.6 - 17.8 = 4.8. The observed AT, if 20.000 grams of
cyclohexanol were used instead of 10.000 grams, would be 2.4. The freezing point would therefore be 22.6 - 2.4 =
20.2C. Either way, pick B.
70.
Choice D is correct. The solution shows a decrease in freezing point as impurities are added to solution, so
choices A and C are eliminated. With impurities present, the lattice cannot form as easily, because the
impurities can interfere with the lattice structure as it grows, and the impurities attract the molecules,
retaining them in the solution phase. The best answer is choice D.
Dumas Experiment
71.
Choice D is correct. As is stated in the first paragraph of the passage, organic vapors dissolve rubber and
plastic, so the cap cannot be made of these substances. The best answer is choice D. The plastic cap may expand
during the experiment, but that would not necessarily harm the results. Choice A is good, but it is not the best
answer. The pore size is not too small, as long as vapor can pass through the pore, so choice B is eliminated.
Air flow is in both directions, so choice C is eliminated.
72.
Choice A is correct. The molecular mass is measured in terms of grams per mole. This means that mass (m) must
be in the numerator of the calculation. Because the mass (m) is in their denominator, rather than numerator,
choices C and D are eliminated. From the equation PV = nRT, the moles (n) equal PV divided by RT. This
means that the inverse (Vn) equals RT/py. The molecular mass is m xl/n = m xRT/py, choice A.
73.
Choice A is correct. If not all of the organic liquid had vaporized, then there would be excess liquid remaining
in the flask at the end of the condensing step, so the mass of liquid in the flask would be too high. This would
result in a calculated mass that was also too high. The correct answer is choice A.
126
74.
Choice C is correct. For choice A, a permanent cap with a valve that could be opened and closed would allow
for the flask to be sealed during the cooling step, so that no vapor could escape from the flask as it returns to
room temperature. A closed system would result in less error than an open system. Choice A would make the
experiment more accurate. For choice B, the electric heating mantle would distribute the heat more uniformly
around the flask than a flame at the bottom. This would allow for even heating and a homogeneous mixture,
making the measurement more accurate. For choice C, an increased pore size would make the system more open
and thus allow more vapor to escape as the system cools back down to room temperature. This would result in a
loss in the moles of gas and consequently, the measurement would not be more accurate.
Pick choice C for
happiness and correctness on this particular question. For choice D, the more spherical the shape of the flask,
the less heat that is lost to the environment. A spherical container offers the smallest amount of surface area
per unit volume (ofany container shape), and therefore the least area through which the heat can be lost. If
less heatcan be lost, then the temperature measurement is more accurate the and thus the experiment is more
accurate.
75.
Choice A is correct. The organic liquid that has thesmallest measurement error is the one that doesn't readily
evaporate from the flask during the final step, where mass is determined. The organic liquid should condense
completely back to its liquid form at room temperature. This is a characteristic associated with a less volatile
liquid (a liquid with a high boiling point). This eliminates choices B and D. To minimize error, the molecular
mass should be high, so that any measurement error in the experiment would be small relative to the actual
mass of the organic compound. Choice A is the best answer.
76.
Choice C is correct. The densest vapor forms from the liquid with the greatest molecular mass. All gases at
standard conditions have roughly the same molar volume, so the greatest mass per volume is found in the
compound with the greatest molar mass. The molecular mass of propanol (choice A) is 60 grams per mole, the
molecular mass of chloropentane (choice B) is 106.5grams per mole, the molecular mass of bromohexane (choice
C) is 165 grams per mole, and the molecular mass of 2,2-dimethylpropanol (choice D) is 88 grams per mole.
Choice C has the greatest molecular mass, making choice C the best answer.
77.
Physical Properties of Liquids
Choice D is correct. The vapor pressure above a liquid depends on intermolecular forces within the liquid and
the mass of the molecule. Hydrogen bonding increases the intermolecular forces, and thus lowers the amount
that vaporizes. As hydrogen bonding increases, the vapor pressure decreases, so choice A is eliminated.
Polarity increases the intermolecular forces, thereby lowering the amount that vaporizes. As the polarity of
the molecule increases, the vapor pressure decreases, so choice B is eliminated. As the molecular mass increases
for a compound, the energy required to convert the molecule into its gaseous form increases. The vapor pressure
thus decreases as the molecular mass of the compound increases, so choice C is eliminated. As the surface area
increases, the amount of vapor formed is greater, but the area over which it is distributed is also greater. The
result is that the amount of vapor striking a unit area (pressure) does not change. The surface area of a liquid
affects the rate at which it evaporates away, but it does not affect the vapor pressure above the liquid, so
choice D is the best answer.
78.
Choice B is correct. For the non-hydrogen bonding liquids in Table 1 (comprising all of the liquids except
glycerol and water) the sequence of relative viscosities is: CHBr3 > CCI4 > CHCI3 > C^H^. For the nonhydrogen bonding liquids in Table 1 the sequence of relative surface tensions is: CHBr3 > CCI4 = CHCI3 >
C6H14, but the trend in the vapor pressure is: CHCI3 > CCI4 > C6H14 > CHBr3. Surface tension follows
roughly the same trend as viscosity, but the vapor pressure deviates from the trend. It appears to be an inverse
trend, except for hexane, which means that the four compounds show no distinct trend. Staying within the
parameters of the answer choices, the best answer is choice B.
79.
Choice D is correct. There are three forces acting on the metal ball as it falls through the liquid, gravity,
buoyant force, and viscous drag. Gravity is the same for all of the experiments (given that the ball has a
constant mass) and the buoyant force is assumed to be roughly equal for all four trials, so the ball that falls
fastest is the one in the solution where there is the least resistive drag force. This will be observed in the
solution that has the lowest viscosity. According to Table 1, carbon tetrachloride has the lowest viscosity of
the four choices. The correct answer is choice D.
80.
Choice D is correct. Assuming the dense paper is denser than each liquid, then we can eliminate the impact of
buoyancy in this question. We need only consider the surface tension of each liquid. The piece of paper stays
atop the solvent with the greatest surface tension (even after it has absorbed solvent). Of the choices, the
liquid with the greatest surface tension is water. The best answer is choice D.
127
81.
Choice Biscorrect. The lower vapor pressure of carbon tetrachloride compared to chloroform is because at the
same temperature, less carbon tetrachloride vaporizes than chloroform. Carbon tetrachloride is nonpolar, so it
cannot be more polar than chloroform (which is a slightly polar solvent), eliminating choice A. Carbon
tetrachloride does have a greater molecular mass than chloroform, so it requires more energy to vaporize than
chloroform. This results in a lower vapor pressure for carbon tetrachloride than chloroform, which makes
choice B the best answer. According to Table 1, carbon tetrachloride and chloroform have the same surface
tension, so choice C is eliminated. Neither carbon tetrachloride nor chloroform form any hydrogen bonds, so
choice D is eliminated. The best answer is choice B.
82.
Choice D is correct. Beads form when a compound has a high surface tension, because its molecules are highly
attracted to one another. This eliminates choices A and C. Beading is most exaggerated when the surface en
whichthe bead sitshasdifferentpropertiesthanthebeading liquid,sothereislittleor no attractive force between
the liquid (beading solvent) and the surface. The best answer is choice D, where the solvent is polar and the
83.
surface is nonpolar. It may help to think of water beads that form when water is dropped on wax paper.
Choice Ais correct. According to the data in Table 1, the vapor pressure is less for carbon tetrachloride than for
chloroform, while the viscosity is greater for carbon tetrachloride than for chloroform. Chloroform is polar,
and carbon tetrachloride is nonpolar, so the nonpolar compound has both the lower vapor pressure and greater
viscosity, both of which are normally associated with stronger intermolecular forces. This deviation can be
attributed to the greater molecular mass associated with carbon tetrachloride than with chloroform. In the
case of carbon tetrachloride compared to chloroform, the molecular mass is more important than polarity in
determining both the vapor pressure and viscosity. The best answer is choice A. Picking Ashould give you much
happiness, extreme joy and deep satisfaction in your soul. If not, it should at least give you a point on the exam.
84.
Choice A iscorrect. To determine the physical properties of dichloromethane (CFbCb), it must be compared
to chloroform and carbon tetrachloride (the other chlorohydrocarbons in Table 1). The molecular mass of
carbon tetrachloride is greater than the molecular mass of chloroform, which is greater than the mass of
dichloromethane. Because dichloromethane is lightest, it has the highest vapor pressure (and undergoes
vaporization to the greatest extent), which makes the vapor pressure greater than 173 torr. This eliminates
choices Band D, which are invalid. The surface tension should be some value around 2.5 x10'2 J per m2, making
choice A the best answer. To confirm that choice A is best, the viscosity of dichloromethane should be a value
just under 5.8 x10"4 kg perm-s.

Allotropes

85.
Choice D is correct. The density ofa material depends on the closeness of the particles ofwhich it is composed,
making choice D the best answer. Choice A is eliminated, because double bonds are shorter than single bonds.
Because diamond is denser than graphite, atoms are closer in diamond, so despite the fact that carbon atoms
86.
touch and there exists layering in graphite, choice B does not explain why diamond is denser than graphite.
Carbon atoms are thesame size, regardless of the molecular packing and bonding. Choice C is eliminated.
Choice B is correct. This is a difficult question that we need to attack with minimal, if any, background
information. Let's start by eliminating the obviously incorrect choices. Allotropes are made from the same
element, so all of the atoms have the same electronegativity. Choice D is eliminated. Because all of the
atoms have the same electronegativity throughout the crystal, allotropes are nonpolar. This eliminates
choice A. Now is where we need to read into what the test writer wants us to pick. While it is true that
allotropes have different interatomic bonding (sigma versus pi for instance), interatomic bonds are not broken
during a phase change (intermolecular forces are broken), so a difference in melting point cannot be explained
this way. Choice C is eliminated. The only remaining explanation for the difference in melting point between
allotropes is found in differences inmolecular mass and packing. This makes choice Bthe best answer.
87.
88.
Choice A is correct. As seen in Figure 1 in the passage, graphite has a significant amount of conjugation. This
eliminates choices C and D. Aspecies that appears black in the presence of white light is one that absorbs all
incident lightthatstrikesitssurface. ThiseliminateschoiceB and supports choice A.The best answer ischoiceA.
Choice D is correct. Electrons travel through delocalized molecular orbitals, so the best electrical conductor
has the most derealization of orbitals.
In the case of carbon-based allotropes, conductivity would occur
through conjugated 7t-bonds. Graphite has the most conjugation (from one end of the sheet to the other) of any
carbon allotrope, so graphite has the greatest electrical conductivity of the carbon-based allotropes. The best
answer is choice D.
128
89.
Choice C is correct. As stated in the passage, all carbons in graphite have sp2-hybridization. This means that
all carbons have trigonal planar geometry and all of the bond angles are 120. The best, and correct, answer is
choice C.
90.
Choice A is correct. Allotropes are most commonly solids, so it is unlikely that a compound that exists
predominantly in the gas phase has allotropes. Argon is an inert gas, so it is the least likely to form
allotropes. Choice B is eliminated based on the information about carbon allotropes listed in the passage.
Phosphorus and sulfur can form isotopes.
91.
Choice B is correct. Phosphorus, P, is directly below nitrogen in the periodic table. Like nitrogen, phosphorus
desires to make three bonds. In choice A, each phosphorus makes only two bonds, so choice A is eliminated. In
choice C, two phosphorus atoms make three bonds and two phosphorus atoms make two bonds, so choice C is
eliminated. In choice D, one phosphorus atom makes four bonds and three phosphorus atoms make two bonds, so
choice D is eliminated. In choice B, each phosphorus makes exactly three bonds, so choice B is the best answer.
92.
Choice D is correct. A stated in the last sentence of the passage, molecular mass is the most significant factor in
the energy required to undergo a phase change. This means that the greatest number of carbons in the allotrope
results in the greatest sublimation point. The best answer is C72, choice D.
(Questions 93 -100)
93.
Choice A is correct. Conductivity of electricity through water is dependent on the number of ions present in
solution. A greater number of ions results in better conductivity. Because the conductivity of the KCl solution is
greater than the conductivity of AgCl solution, the 0.10 M KCl(aq) solution has more ions than the 0.10 M
AgCl(aq) solution. This means that KCl is more soluble than AgCl in water. This also means that the 0.10 M
KCl(aq) solution has a greater osmotic pressure than a 0.10 M AgCl(aq) solution. This makes choice A the correct
answer.
94.
Choice C is correct. Energy is absorbed by the system when the compound goes from a lower energy state to a
higher energy state. Choices B and D can be eliminated, because in each case the compound is going from a
higher energy state to a lower energy state. The conversion from a solid into a gas requires a greater amount of
energy than the conversion from a liquid to a gas. This means that more energy is absorbed during sublimation
than during evaporation. This makes choice C correct.
95.
Choice A is correct. This is an easy question hidden in extraneous and intimidating facts. All you need to know
is that the boiling point is defined as the temperature at which the PVapor equals Patmosphere- Reduced
atmospheric pressure (which occurs at higher elevations, like the mountains) means that less vapor pressure is
necessary to reach the boiling point. Consequently, less energy is needed to achieve boiling. This lowers the
boiling point from the value of the normal boiling point (127C for Compound A). Only choice A is less than
127C; therefore, choice A is the best answer.
96.
Choice A is correct. Ionic interactions, affinity, and H-bonding are negligible when dealing with CH4 and
S1H4, because both compounds are symmetric and thus non-polar. The fact that CH4 has a lower boiling point
than S1H4 is because heavier molecules have more mass to put into motion when the molecules vaporize, and
thus heavier molecules require more kinetic heat energy to escape from the liquid phase into the gas phase. In
conclusion, more heat is required for heavier molecules to vaporize and reach their boiling point. The boiling
point is greater for S1H4 than CH4, because the silicon compound is heavier. The best answer is molecular
mass, choice A.
97.
Choice D is correct. A solid is defined as having its component atoms (or molecules) in fixed positions,
undergoing no translational motion (displacement). This means that a solid has a definite shape and a
definite volume. A solid is rigid unless subjected to extreme pressures, and it maintains a lattice structure. As
such, solids do not flow, they have a shape (and thus are not amorphous), and their molecules undergo no
displacement. This eliminates choices A, B, and C. Because the shape of a solid remains constant at a fixed
temperature and pressure, it maintains set dimensions. Choice D is the best answer.
129
98.
Choice B is correct. Because the unknown liquid has a lower vapor pressure than water at 60C, the unknown
liquid should also have a lower vapor pressure than water has at room temperature. Because the vapor
pressure is determined as a natural log function, the vapor pressure of the unknown should be only slightly
lower at the lower temperature than the vapor pressure of water. This makes choice B the intuitively correct
choice. The graph below shows the vapor pressure as a function of temperature for the unknown liquid
compared to water.
-Water
Unknown liquid
Temperature (C)
99.
Choice C is correct. This question requires that you spew back the definition of a liquid, A liquid has no
definite shape, but it does have a definite volume. This is reflected in choice C.
100. Choice C is correct. For a compound to be a liquid at room temperature, its boiling point must be greater than
room temperature (otherwise, it would be a gas), and its melting point must be lower than room temperature
(otherwise it would be a solid). The only choice with a melting point less than 20C and a boiling point greater
than 20C is answer C. This in itself is not necessarily an MCAT-style question, but it is necessary to be able to
read charts on the exam. At times, the phase of a substance must be determined, making it necessary to
evaluate the phase based on the physical properties of the substance. For instance, if you are asked to decide
whether a compound can be distilled, you must first determine whether it is a liquid at the given temperature.
130
Terminology and Graphs

a) Energy Diagrams
b) Free Energy
Section VIII
c) Enthalpy
d) Entropy
Thermochemistry
e) Hess's Law
f) Bond Energies
by Todd Bennett
Calorimetry
Pressure
valve "^
Liquid expands into

a gas (endothermic)
a) Heat Energy
b) Heat Capacity
<EEUZ
V:.-
c) Heat of Phase Changes

'V-A
Y.1
ft
CO
d) Calorimetry Experiments
e) Heat Transfer
... .. . . . . .
(^-----:J|
y.-j o
i.
Convection
ii.
Conduction
iii. Radiation
iv. Evaporation/Condensation
.Intake
valve
Gas is compressed into
Exhaust a liquid (exothermic)

valve
Meat and Work
a) Energetics
b) Carnot Cycle
c) Refrigerator (Heat Pump)

d) Heat Engine
e) Enginie Efficiency
Berkeley
JUr-e-v-iê-w
Thermochemistry Section Goals

Know the definitions of free energy, enthalpy, and entropy.
Thetest asks questions that requireyou to have a conceptual definition of the basic terms used in
thermodynamics. Free energy (G) istheaccessible energy ofthesystem, enthalpy (H) istheheatenergy
of thesystem, and entropy (S) is thedisorder ofthesystem. Tne three are related to each other by
the equation: AG= AH- TAS.
Know the common thermodynamic equations.
Thermodynamics isthe study ofenergy distribution ina chemical reaction orequilibrium system.
Thereare six fundamental equations mat you must know. Theseare:
A.AG =AH - TAS
B. AG =AG0 +RT InQrx C AHreaction =AHproduct -AHreactants
D. AG =-RT In Keq E. AG =RT In Qrx/Keq F. AH =bonds broken -bonds formed

Be able to determine the enthalpy change for a reaction from other information.
$ method
iscalorimetry (direct measurement ofthe heat change during the reaction). This involves
surrounding thesystem with a solution capable ofabsorbing or releasing a large supply ofheat
Thechange in enthalpy associated witha reaction canbe determined in oneof three ways. Thefirst
energy. By measuring thechange in thesurroundings, thechange in enthalpy ofthesystem canbe
inferred. The second method involves Hess's law, which states that the enthalpy change for areaction
isthe sum ofthe enthalpy changes for any component setofreactions. The third method involves
the bond energiesand is very common in organic chemistry. Energymust be added to a systemto
break bonds, and energy is releasedfrom a systemwhen bonds are formed. The result is that the
heat of the reaction can be determined from the change in bonds and bond energies.
Be able to determine the equilibrium constant from thermodynamic data.
'> with the reaction, starting with 1.0 Mreactants and 1.0 M products (referred to as AG0). The
The equilibrium constant for a reaction can be determined from the free-energy change associated
equilibrium constant can be used also to find AG.
4fo Understand heat capacity and its application to calorimetry.
The heat absorbed by a material can be determined from the change in temperature. Eachmaterial
has anassociated heat capacity (known more precisely asspecific heat). The neat capacity isdefined
as the heat requiredto raise the temperature of 1.00 gram of a materialby 1.00 C. Specific heat is
this same value relative to water. Wateris assigned a neat capacity of 1.00caloriesper gram-Kelvin
by definition. Heat capacity is used to determine the heat change in a calorimetry experiment.
Know the basic operations of an engine and a refrigerator.
The Carnot cycleis the theoreticalmechanics linking the interconversionof work energy and heat
energy. When heat energy isconverted into work energy, a typical application ofitistoruna motor.
Consider the steam engine and the combustion engine. The steam engine isa closed system, while
the combustion engineis an opensystem. Whenworkenergyis converted into heat energy, a typical
application of it is to run a refrigerator. The heat engine and heat pump use evaporation and
condensation to store and release neat. Associated with the phase change in matter in these devices
is a drastic volume change, which can perform work.
Be able to work with energy diagrams of all types.
There arestandard energy diagrams, thatshow theheatofa reaction asit proceeds along thereaction
pathway. There is also the heating curve, which shows aphase-change process and the associated
change m temperature overa periodoftime. You shouldbe familiar with both types of graphs and
understand the fundamental information that each presents. Energy diagrams are critical in organic
chemistry.
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Introduction
Thermochemistry
Thermochemistry is the study of the energy associated with a chemical reaction.
Thermochemistry answers the fundamental question "How much is involved in
a reaction?" By using thermochemistry principles, we can determine the
quantity of products formed, the quantity of energy released (or absorbed), and
the quantity of reactants left unreacted for a given reaction. Energy diagrams
show thermochemistry values. The net change in an energy diagram shows the
enthalpy and free energy changes associated with the overall reaction.
Thermochemistry tells us whether a reaction is favorable or unfavorable and
whether it is exothermic or endothermic. Exothermic reactions yield heat, so the
temperature of the system rises as the reaction proceeds. Endothermic reactions
absorb heat, so the temperature decreases as the reaction proceeds. In this
section, we shall focus on the heat and energy associated with a reaction.
Once a reaction has released or absorbed heat, the surroundings change.
Thermodynamics is the study of the energy associated with a system and
surroundings. There are three fundamental laws of thermodynamics. Each
addresses a different aspect of energy as it relates to all systems. We accept these
laws at the general chemistry level, although some physicists theorize that the
first law is incorrect, given that energy and matter can be interchanged.
First Law of Thermodynamics: The energy of the universe is constant.
Second Law of Thermodynamics: In any spontaneous process, there is always an
increase in the entropy of the universe.
Third Law of Thermodynamics: The entropy ofa perfect crystal at 0 kelvins is zero.
The first law of thermodynamics is applied to the internal energy of a system.
Kinetic energy can assume the form of work or heat. The Carnot cycle takes
advantage of the first law of thermodynamics by addressing the interconversion
of work energy and heat energy. The heat engine and the heat pump are the
theoretical models of this conversion process. In the heat engine, because energy
isconserved, the heat that is absorbed by a system is converted into work. The
net energy change of the system is zero. In the heat pump, because energy is
conserved, the work that is applied to a system is converted into heat that is
removed from the system. Again, the net energy change of the system is zero. In
chemical reactions, the heat energy associated with a reaction is a result of the
interconversion of kinetic energy and potential energy in the form of bonds.
The second law of thermodynamics is applied to explain the universe's tendency
to reach a natural state. This is to say, that nature proceeds to themost probable
state, which is one of disorder. So while the energy of the universe is constant, it
is heading towards disorder. In a chemical process, the hope is that the entropy
of the universe remains constant. The change in the entropy of the universe is a
sumofallchanges in entropy for a process. Equation 8.1 shows this relationship.

ASuniverse ASSyStem + ASsurroundingS
(8.1)
The third law of thermodynamics is the standard against which other entropy
values can be measured. A perfect crystal at zero kelvins has its atoms arranged
in an organized lattice, in which the motion of all atoms has ceased. Disorder
cannot exist under these conditions. This is a theoretical situation, because zero
kelvins is unattainable. This law also sets a standard for measurement, in this
case ensuring that entropy is always a positive term.

133
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry

Energy Diagrams
Energy diagrams show the relationship between the energetics of a system and
the reaction steps (listed along the reaction coordinate). The diagrams can be
used for kinetic purposes (by looking at the activation energy) or thermodynamic
purposes (by looking at the energy difference between the reactants and the
products). Two energy diagrams are given in Figure 8-1 below. The first graph
shows the energy of a reaction as function of the reaction pathway for either a
spontaneous (exergonic) or exothermic (heat releasing) reaction. We cannot
identify whether it is exergonic or exothermic unless the type of energy is
specified. If it is free energy (G), we use the term exergonic. If it is heat energy
(H), we use the term exothermic. The second graph shows the energy of a reaction
as a function of reaction pathway for either a non-spontaneous (endergonic) or
endothermic (heat absorbing) reaction. If it is free energy (G), we use the term
endergonic. If it is heat energy (H), we use the term endothermic. The first graph
(left) distinguishes between the kinetic region and the thermodynamic region.
The kinetic region is where activation energy can be read. The thermodynamic
region is where the free energy change can be read. The second graph (right)
shows the same features, but with the regions labeled more specifically.
Although it may not seem so, the graph are labeled in a similar fashion.
Exergonic reaction(AG < 0)
Endergonic reaction (AG > 0)
or
or
Exothemic reaction (AH < 0)
Endothemic reaction (AH > 0)
1-4
<v
<v
C
w
Reaction coordinate
Reaction coordinate
Figure 8-1
The energy diagrams shown in Figure 8-1 represent one-step reactions. Multistep reactions have graphs with multiple apexes. The reaction coordinate
represents the chronological steps that the molecules take during the reaction
pathway from reactants to products. The kinetic region defines the activation
energy, and thus defines the rate of a reaction. The thermochemistry region
defines the energy change for the reaction. These two regions are generally the
most significant aspects of an energy diagram. Activation energy is read from a
free energy diagram, not from a heat energy diagram based on enthalpy. The
free energy and enthalpy are related according to Equation 8.2, which requires
that temperature be given in kelvins.
AG = AH - TAS
134
(8.2)
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Free Energy
Gibb's free energy, associated with a closed system, is the accessible energy in a
system that allows chemical reactions to proceed to a state of equilibrium. The
free energy (G) of the system accounts for both the entropy (S) and the enthalpy
(H) of the system. The free energy change for a chemical reaction or physical
process depends on the enthalpy change and the entropy change. Equation 8.2
shows that these three thermodynamic variables, along with the temperature, are
all related and thus can be used to predict the value of one another. The free
energy change of a reaction is used primarily to determine the favorability of the
reaction. If a chemical reaction has a negative value for AG, then the reaction is
defined as being favorable in the forward direction. If a chemical reaction has a
positive value for AG, then the reaction is defined as being unfavorable in the
forward direction (or favorable in the reverse direction.)
Table 8.1 shows
different combinations of thermodynamic values as they relate to Equation 8.2.

Result
Case
AS positive, AH negative
Favorable at all temperatures
AS positive, AH positive
Favorable at high temperatures
AS negative, AH negative
Favorable at low temperatures
AS negative, AH positive
Unfavorable at all temperatures

Table 8.1
Table 8.1 summarizes the four possible combinations of values for AHand AS. In
two of the cases, the temperature must be known in order to determine the sign
of the free energy change (AG). This means that to determine the favorability of a
reaction, temperature must be known in many cases. A reaction that is favorable
at low temperatures may not necessarily be favorable at higher temperatures. A
great example of this is the liquid-to-gas phase change, which is unfavorable at
temperatures below the boiling point, but favorable at temperatures above the
boiling point. This is the mathematical reasoning behind the dependence of the
equilibrium constant (Keq) ofa reaction on thetemperature.

Example 8.1
A reaction that is favorable at 25C but unfavorable at 200C has what signs for
AH and AS?
A. Both AH and AS are positive.

B. Both AH and AS are negative.
C. AH is positive, and AS is negative.

D. AH is negative, and AS is positive.
Solution
A favorable reaction has a negative AG, while an unfavorable reaction has a
positive AG. AG is negative at lower temperatures (25C) and positive at higher

temperatures (20CTC), so AG increases with T. Temperature is measured in
kelvins, so T is always a positive value. Using Equation 8.2, AG = AH- TAS, the
value of AS must be negative, (negative number), because only the TAS term
changes with temperature. As T increases, AG increases, so AG = AH - T(negative
number). AH must be negative for AG to be negative at lower temperatures,
because (negative number) = AH - T(negative small number). Both AH and AS
are negative, so choice B is the best answer. This can be confirmed by Table 8.1.
135
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Reactions that are favorable in the forward direction are said to be spontaneous.
Spontaneity refers to the favorability of a reaction, not to the rate of a reaction. If
the reaction is favorable in the forward direction (proceeds in the forward

direction to reach equilibrium), then the reaction is spontaneous in the forward
direction. This is a thermodynamic perception of the reaction, which means itis

based solely on the free energychange (AG) for the reaction. Whether a reaction
is observed may also depend on kinetic factors. If there is not enough activation
energy present in the system (that is, if the temperature is too low), then the
reaction cannot proceed in the forward direction even though it is spontaneous.
AGrx must be negative in order for the reaction to be spontaneous in the forward
direction.
There is also the standard free energy change (AG0) to consider, which is the free
energy change when a reaction goes from standard conditions to equilibrium.

Standard conditionsare defined as 1 atm. of pressure, and a temperature of 25C,
and all solute species (reactants and products) present at 1.00M concentration.
Under conditions where all solute concentrations are equal to 1.00M, the value of
Qrx is1.0, soIn Qrx iszero. Insuch a case, only Keq needs tobeconsidered when
detenruning the free energy change, which leads us to Equation 8.3.
AG =-RTlnKeq
(8.3)
When the AG" value for a reaction is close to zero, the reaction has an equilibrium
constant ofroughly 1.0. Reactions with Keq roughly equal to 1.0 are driven by
the addition of excess reactant or the removal of products, which changes the
value of AG, but not the value ofAG8. These techniques exploit Le Chatelier's
principle to shift the equilibrium to the product side of the reaction. The
technique is illustrated mathematically using Equation 8.4.
Example 8.2
IfIn Keq =5.0 and the temperature is25C, what isthe value ofAG0?
A. +12.5 kj
B.
+8.3 kj
C.
-8.3 kj
D. -12.5 kj
Solution
To solve forthenumerical value, useEquation 8.3, AG0 = -RT InKeq. The answer
is in kj, so R is 8.314 J/mole K. We are given In Keq, not Keq, so the math is
easier.
AG0 = - (8.314)(298)(5) J s - (10)(250)(5) I = -(2.5)(5) kj = -12.5 kj
The best answer is choiceD. Some of you may have approximated the value as
follows:
AG0 = - (8.314)(298)(5) J = - (8)(300)(5) J = -(2.4)(5) kj = - 12 kj
The answer choices are spaced far enough apart that any reasonable
approximation will lead to the best answer. Math is simplified on the MCAT, so
it is also important to understand relative AG calculations where number
crunching is not directly involved.
136
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Any equation used to determine the free energy change of a reaction must
account for the free energy change from the initial conditions of the reaction to
the equilibrium conditions of the reaction. A reaction going from initial
conditions to equilibrium conditions can be broken into two partial reactions:
initial conditions to standard conditions, and standard conditions to equilibrium
conditions. The derivation below summarizes this reasoning in Equation 8.4:
AGrx = AG(initial conditions -equilibrium conditions)

AC*rx = ^(initial _standard conditions) + AG(standard -equilibrium conditions)
AG(initial conditions -standard conditions) = RT InQrx - RT In1 = RT InQrx
AG(standard -> equilibrium conditions) =RT In 1- RT In Kgq =- RT In Kgq

AGrx =RT In Qrx - RTln Keq =- RTln Keq +RTln Qrx
Substituting in AG0 for - RT InKeq yields Equation 8.4
AGrx = AG0 + RT In Qrx
(8.4)
This same derivation can be altered slightly to generate Equation 8.5:
AGrx =RTlnQrx-RTlnKeq =RT(lnCix-lnKeq) =RTln5j2L

Keq
AG = RTlrS^
(8.5)
Keq
You may recall from the equilibrium section that Qrx defines the reaction state,
and Kgq defines equilibrium. When Qrx is less than Kgq, the Q.x-to-Keq ratio is
less than 1.0, and the log ofa number less than 1.0 is negative. This makes AGrx
negative, according to Equation 8.5. When the value ofQrx is less than Keq, the
reaction has too many reactants and too few products, so it proceedsforward to
reach equilibrium, reaffirming that the reaction is favorable as written.
Example 8.3
A reaction that is spontaneous in the forward direction corresponds with which

of the following features?
A. It has an equilibrium constant that is greater than 1.0.
B. The reaction is spontaneous in the reverse direction.
C. It has a AGrxthat is positive for the reaction as written.
D. It has a ratioofQrx to Kgq that is less than1.

Solution
"Spontaneous in the forward direction" means that the reaction is favorable as

written. Favorability in the forward direction implies that there is an excess of
reactants and a shortage of products relative to equilibrium. Thistellsus nothing
about the value ofthe equilibrium constant. The value ofKgq may ormay notbe
greater than 1.0. This eliminates choice A. A reaction that is spontaneous in the
forward direction is non-spontaneous in the reverse direction. This eliminates
choice B. A reaction is spontaneous in the forward direction when AG is
negative. This eliminates choice C. When the ratio of Qrx to Keq is less than 1,
there is an excess of reactants, so the reaction proceeds forward to equilibrium.
When Qrx to Kgq is less than 1,the log of the ratio in Equation 8.5 is negative, so
AGrx is negative. A reaction is spontaneous in the forward direction when AGrx
is negative, so choice D is the best answer.
137
XlGXkGT&M. v^lldlllStry
Thermochemistry
Enthalpy
Enthalpy (H) is defined as the quantity of heat present in a system. Enthalpy

change (AH) is the heat that is either lost from or added to a system (a reaction)
during a chemical reaction or physical process. There is an enthalpy change

associated with every chemical reactionor physical process. The value of AH is
positive when heat is absorbed by the reaction (as is the case in an endothermic
reaction) and negative when heat is given off by the reaction (as is the case in an
exothermic reaction). The AH value of a reaction is derived from the system's
heat change, not the heat change of the surroundings. The difference between
the energy change of the system and the surroundings is just a sign,because the
total quantity of energy released by the system is the same as the amount of
energy absorbed by the surroundings. The sign convention is based on the idea
that the AH value describes the change in heat for the chemical reaction.
Enthalpy change alone does not describe the favorability of a reaction, just the
heat. However, thevalue ofAH plays a significant rolein determining AG.
Example 8.4
Which of the observations below is NOT associated with an exothermic reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
An increase in the temperature of the solution

The formation of products that are more stable than the reactants
A net loss in the heat energy of the surroundings
A value for the change in enthalpy that is negative
Solution
An exothermic reaction is defined as a reaction that releases heat energy from the
system to thesurroundings. This results in an increase in the heat energy of the
surroundings, so choice A is valid. Energy is released by the reaction, because
the products are at a lowerenergylevel(are more stable)than the reactants. This
makes choice Bvalid. An exothermic reaction has a negative value for AH, so
choice D is valid. The false statement of the answer choices is choice C, because
heat energyis gained by the surroundings, not lost from it. Thismeans that the
correct answer (the statement that is NOT true) is choice C.
Example 8.5
Ifthesolvation ofNH4Cl(s) bywater solvent results in thecooling of thesolution,

then the sign of the AHvalue for the solvation reaction is:
A. positive at all temperatures.
B. negative at all temperatures.
C. positive at low temperatures and negative at high temperatures.

D. positive at high temperatures and negative at low temperatures.
Solution
Because the solution becomes cooler after the reaction, heat must have been
absorbed by the system from the surroundings. The aqueous solution is

considered to be the surroundings, as that is where the heat is absorbed from.
Whenheat is absorbed, the enthalpychangeis positive, making choiceA correct.
The reaction is thus endothermic. This means that the driving force behind the
dissociation of ammonium chloride into water must be linked to the favorable
change in entropy, not the unfavorable change in enthalpy. The sign of the
enthalpy change does not change with temperature, so choices C and D should
be eliminated immediately.
Copyright byTheBerkeley Review
138
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Energy diagrams can refer to heat energy, in which case the heat of reaction can
be extracted from the graph. When heat is absorbed, the reaction is endothermic.
It is uphill from the reactants to products in the energy diagram. When heat is
released, the reaction is exothermic. It is downhill from the reactants to products
in the energy diagram.
Figure 8-2 shows the enthalpy diagrams for an
endothermic reaction and for an exothermic reaction.
Endothemic reaction (AH is positive)
Exothemic reaction (AH is negative)
heat + A + B
A + B
P + Z
P + Z + heat
CO
s
e
w
Product
Reactant
Reaction coordinate
Reaction coordinate
Figure 8-2
Example 8.6
Combustion of a hydrocarbon in the presence of excess oxygen gas is BEST

classified as which of the following?
A.
An exothermic reaction
B.
An endothermic reaction
C. An exoconductive process
D. An endoconductive process
Solution
Because the temperature of the surroundings increases during a combustion
reaction (combustion is the complete oxidation of either a hydrocarbon or

carbohydrate), heat is given offby the system to the surroundings. When heat
energy is released, the enthalpy change for the chemical reaction is negative. A
negative enthalpy change is associated with anexothermic reaction, which makes
choice A correct. The terms "exoconductive" and "endoconductive" are contrived
terms that have no useful meaning in chemistry. The oxidation of a hydrocarbon
is a reaction, not a process, so for several good reasons, choices C and D should
both be eliminated.
The heatchange fora reaction maybedetermined in many ways. It canbefound

from the AH values for component reactions that sum to the overall reaction.
This is Hess's law. The change in heat energy may also be determined from
differences in the bond-energy values for the bonds that are broken and bonds
that are formed. Heat energy is needed to break bonds, while heat energy is
released when bonds are formed. The last method to consider is an experimental
one, where the heat change for a chemical reaction is measured by calorimetry.
In calorimetry, the change in temperature for a known quantity of surrounding
material is measured. This temperature change can be converted into a heat
change for the reaction.
139
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Entropy
Entropy (S) is the measure of randomness (disorder) within a system. Entropy
takes into account molecular randomness (degrees ofrotational freedom for each
atom within a molecule) which reflects the ability of a molecule to rotate freely
about its bonds. Cyclic compounds have less entropy than linear compounds,
because they are more rigid and cannot rotate as freely. Cyclic structures are
thus less favorable entropically than linear structures. Alkanes are more random
than alkenes, because alkenes have a double bond (7t-bond) in particular, about
which the molecule may not rotate. Entropy also accounts for the overall
randomness of a system (freedom for the molecules to move in a translational
manner). Gases have the most entropy of the three common phases, because
their molecules are freest to move throughout the container. The gas phase is
entropically the most favorable. Entropy (in a more the advanced definition
presented in physical chemistry) is the reversible heat change of the system
(^reversible) divided by its temperature.
An increase in entropy (and disorder) is defined as a positive change in entropy

(AS). We are typically more interested in the entropy change for a chemical
reaction or physical process than we are in the absolute entropy of any
component. Entropy can be thought of as organizational potential energy. When
you organize something, it has the potential to become disordered, and release
that organizationalenergy. This organizational energy becomes part of the free

energy of the system.
Example 8.7
Which of the following processes is NOTassociated with its correctsign for AS?
A. ASSVS for a liquid-to-gas phase change is positive.
B. ASSys for a reaction in which thevolume increases is positive.

C. ASSyS for a reaction inwhich a rc-bond is formed isnegative.
D. ASSyS for sublimation isnegative.
Solution
Increases inthe randomness of a system (molecular chaos) have a positive ASsys

value. Conversely, decreases in the randomness ofa system (molecular chaos)
have a negative ASsys value. Because the molecules are becoming more random
in a liquid-to-gas phase change, the entropy change for the process (ASsys) is
positive. Choice A is a valid statement, so it is eliminated. When the volume of
thesystem increases, themolecules arecapable of occupying a greater number of

points in space, makingthe molecules more random. The entropy change for the
process (ASsys) is positive. Choice B is a valid statement, so it is eliminated.
When a n-bond is broken, the molecule has more ability to rotate freely, which
makes the system more random. Thus, when a rc-bond is formed, the molecule
loses some ability to rotate freely, which makes the system less random. The
entropy change for thereaction (ASsys) isnegative. Choice C is a valid statement,

so it is eliminated. Sublimation is the physical process whereby a solid is
converted into a gas. Because the molecules are becoming more random in a
solid-to-gas phase change, the entropy change for the reaction (ASsys) ispositive,
not negative. This makes choice D an incorrect statement and the best answer.
Positive entropy changes are often associated with increases in the number of
molecules and phase changes to phases of lower density (greater volume).
140
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Example 8.8
What can be said about the entropy of cyclohexane(l) as compared to

cyclohexane(s)?
A. The entropy of cyclohexane(s) is greater than cyclohexane(l).
B. The entropy of cyclohexane(l) is greater than cyclohexane(s).
C. The entropy of cyclohexane(l) is equal to that of cyclohexane(s).
D. Neither cyclohexane(l) nor cyclohexane(s) has any entropy, because entropy
applies only to non-cyclic molecules.
Solution
While cyclic molecules have lower entropy than their linear counterparts, they
stillhaveentropy. Choice D is eliminated. Cyclohexane is thesamemolecule, no
matter what phase it isin. The randomness of the molecule itself is unchanged,
so there is no change in the degrees of freedom (ability to rotate about bonds and
change angles.) The difference in entropy between the two systemsis due to the
phase difference. The solid phase is more structured than the liquid phase,so in
the solid phase the molecules are more ordered (less random). Because the
molecules are more random in the liquid phase, choice B is correct. You should
be aware that the sequence of relative entropy in the three phases is as follows:
Sgas > ^liquid > SSolid- Every compound is defined as having some positive
entropy, according to the third law of thermodynamics.
There is an entertaining and simple exampleof entropy in actionthat you can do

with a rubber band. It involves the stretching and relaxing of a rubber band.
When a rubber band is stretched and held in the stretched state for a few
moments, its temperature equilibrateswith the environment. Usingyour lip as a

thermometer, place the stretched rubber band against your lip to gauge its
temperature. When you are convinced thatit is at room temperature, remove the
rubber band from your lip and let it return to its natural state of relaxation.
Then, immediately place it against the same Up. Therubberband will feel cold.
The reason for this is rooted in the thermodynamics of the process. The rubber
band naturally tends to go from a stretched state to relaxed one, making
AGsrretched-to-recoiled a negative number. Therubberband becomes cold when
it goes from stretched to relaxed, making AHsrretched-to-relaxed a positive number
(endothermic processes absorb heat and therefore feel cold). Because AG is
negative and AH is positive, AS must be a positive number. This means that as
the rubber band goes from stretched to relaxed, it becomes more disordered.
This may seem odd at first, but when you considerany net (like a tennis net or a
volleyball net), you should note that when it is stretched, it is orderly. When
bundledup, it is disordered. In essence, a rubberband is a microscopic net. The
driving force for relaxing from a stretched state is entropic in nature.
141
GenerSIl ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Hess's Law
Hess's law states that the AG, AH, or AS for a particular reaction can be
determined by summing the AG, AH, or S values for any cumulative series of
subreactions for that particular reaction (or in the case of AS, you can sum the
entropy values for each reactant and product in the reaction). Typical MCAT
questions about this include summing the AG0fOrm/ AH0form, 0r S for the
reactants and products (reversing the reactant values is necessary to add
correctly). The overall AG, AH, or AS can be found by subtracting the AG'fornv
AH'form or S for the reactants from the AGf0rm/ AH'fornv or Sfor the products.
Equations 8.6, 8.7, and 8.8 are the application of Hess's law using formation
values to calculatefree energy, enthalpy, and entropy, respectively.
AG reaction = XAG formation products "XAG0fOrmation reactants
(8.6)
AH reaction =XAH0formation products "XAH'formation reactants
(8.7)
AS reaction = XS products ~XS reactants
(8.8)
The free energy change of formation (AGformarj0n) is the change in free energy
that transpires when a compound is formed from its component elements in their
most stable state at standard temperature (25C) and pressure (1.00 atmosphere).
The enthalpy of formation (AHf0rmation) isthe heat change that transpires when
a compound is formed from its component elements in their most stable state.
There is no entropy of formation for compounds, as they are defined by
themselves as having a set amount of disorder (entropy). In most general
chemistry textbooks, there are exhaustive tables of free energies and heats of
formation, so the values are common information. The AGformation anc*
AHformation for an element in its most stable form is 0. This applies to oxygen
gas, which is found in combustion reactions. Combustion reactions are among
the common MCATexamples using Hess's law with the heats of formation.
Example 8.9
What is the formation reaction for C2HsBr(g)?
A. 2C(gr) +2lH2(g) +lBr2(g)
C2H5Br(g)
B. 2C(gr) +2lH2(g) +1-Br2(l)
C2H5Br(g)
C. 2C(gr) +2l-H2(g) +Br(g)
C2H5Br(g)
D. 2C(gr) +2iH2(g) +Br(l)
C2H5Br(g)
Solution
Bromine is found in nature as a diatomic liquid under standard conditions. You

may recall this from an organic chemistry lab, in which you added Br2 in CCI4to
an unknown organic compound to test for the presence of an alkene it-bond.
Bromine (Br2) adds anti across a carbon-carbon 7t-bond that is present in the
molecule, which results in the disappearance of the bromine liquid. Because the
bromine liquid is brown, the presence of an alkene is supported by the
disappearance of the brown color from the solution. Based just on the phase and
molecular state of bromine in the answer choices, the best choice is answer B.
There are certain miscellaneous facts that you should know for some questions
on the MCAT. Although the test writers give you a great deal of information,
there is other required information (background knowledge) that you must have.
142
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
To apply Equations 8.6, 8.7, and 8.8 correctly, the overall reaction must be
balanced first.
Stoichiometric coefficients are critical to Hess's law, as each
component is multiplied by its stoichiometric coefficient prior to summing the

values. Example 8.10 shows the application of Equation 8.7 in calculating the
enthalpy for the combustion of methane. The solution is a step-by-step process
that serves as a case-based derivation of Equation 8.7.
Example 8.10
What is the standard enthalpy of combustion for methane?
A.
B.
C.
D.
AH'formation C02
AHformation COz
AH'formation CH4
AH'formation CH4
+ AH0fOrmation HzO - AHformation CH4

+ 2 AH'formation H20 - AH'formation CH4
- AH'formation C02 - AH'formation H20
- AH'formation C02 - 2 AH'formation H20
Solution
The first step is to balance the overall reaction:

Balanced reaction: 1 CH4(g) + 2 O^g) - 1 C02(g) + 2 H20(g)
The next step is to view the formation reactions and standard enthalpy of
formation foreachcompound in thebalanced equation:
AH'formation CH4(g) =AH'for:

1C(gr) +2H2(g) -> CH4(g)
AH'formation 02(g) isnotapplicable, because 02(g) isinitsmost stable state
AH'formation C02(g) = AH'for:
C(gr) +Ctyg) -> C02(g)
AH'formation H20(g) =AH' for:
H2(g) +1Ctyg) - H20(g)
The final step is to sum up the formation reactions in a way that equals the
overall reaction. This requires multiplying reactions by their stoichiometric
coefficients, reversing the reaction for compounds on the reactant side, and
crossingout molecules that appear on both sides of the subreactions:
lCH4(g)
-> t(gr)+-2fg)
IrCfgr) + 1 O^g) -+ lCO^g)
fr2fe) +102(g) ~ 2H2Q(g)

1CH4(g) + 2 Q2(g) -* 1 C02(g) 2 H20(g)
-1 (AH'formation CH4(g))
1 (AH'formation C02(g))
2(AH'formation H2Q(g))
AH'f co2 + 2 AH'f h20 - AH'f CH4
The best answer is choice B. Because the formation reactions for reactants are
reversed, the equation for calculating any thermodynamic value from the
formation values involves formation values for products minus formation values
for reactants. Equation 8.7 shows this for determining the enthalpy of reaction
from the enthalpy of formation values.
143
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
For examples 8.11 through 8.14, use the values in Table 8.2.
Compound AH'f(kI/mol) S (J/mol-K) Compound AH'f(kJ/mol) S (VmolK)
CO(g)
H20(g)
-111.2
198
C02(g)
-393.5
-242
189
H20(1)
-286
70
C2H5OH(l)
-278
161
CsHsC^fs)
-1011
196
C6Hi206(s)
-1278
212
02(g)
214
205
Table 8.2
Example 8.11
What is the standard enthalpy change for the water shift reaction?
C02(g) + H2(g) -
CQg) + H20(g)
A. +40.3kJ/mole
B. +3.7kJ/mole
C
-3.7kJ/mole
D. -40.3kJ/mole
Solution
This question issolved using Equation 8.7, AH'reacHon = AHform products - I

AH'form reactants- The reaction is balanced as given, so we can proceed directly
to the insertion of numerical values:
AH'reacHon =AHform CO +AH'form H20 "AH'form COz - AH'form H2

AH'reacHon = (-1H.2) + (-242) - (-393.5) - 0 = -353.2 + 393.5 = + 40.3 kJ/mole
The correct answer is choice A.
Example 8.12
What is the standard enthalpy change for the combustion of ethanol?

C2H5OH0) + O2(g) - CQ2(g) + H20(l)
A.
B.
C.
D.
-1367kJ/mole
-1235kJ/m0le
-795kJ/mole
-401.5 kJ/mole
Solution
This question issolved using Equation 8.7, AH'reaction = AH'form products - I

AH'form reactants- The reaction must first be balanced:
C2H5OH(l) + 3 02(g) - 2C02(g) + 3H20(l)
From here, we can proceed to the insertion of numerical values:
AH'reaction =2AH'formCOz +3 AH'form HzO "AH'form C2H5OH - 3 AH'form 02

AH'reaction = 2 (-393.5) + 3 (-286) - (-278) - 3 (0)
= 2 (-400 + 6.5) + 3 (-300 + 14) + 300 - 22
= -800 + 13-900 + 42+ 300 -22 = -1400 +33 = -1367 kJ/mole

The correct answer is choice A.
144
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Example 8.13
What is the standard enthalpy change for the combustion of glucose?

C6Hi206(s) + Q2(g) -
A.
B.
C.
D.
CQ2(g) + H20(g)
+598.5 kJ/mole
-1523kJ/moie
-2799kJ/mole
-5355kJ/mole
Solution
This question is solved using Equation 8.7, AH'reaction = XAH'form products -

AH'form reactants- The reaction must first be balanced:
C6Hi206(s) +6 Q2(g) -> 6C02fe) + 6H20(g)
Fromhere, we can proceed to the insertion of numerical values. Oxygen is most

stable as 02 under standard conditions, so it is omitted from the expression:
AH'reaction = 6 AH'form C02 + 6 AH'form H20 -AH'form C6H1206

AH'reaction = 6 (-393.5) + 6 (-286) - (-1278) = 6 (-679.5) + 1278
= 6 (-700 + 20.5) + 1300 - 22 = - 4200 +123 +1300 - 22= - 2900 + 101
= -2799kJ/mole
The correct answer is choice C.
Example 8.14
What is thechange in entropy for thecombustion ofpentyl lactone (C5Hs02(s))?

C5H802(s) + 6 02(g) -> 5C02(g) + 4H20(l)
A.
B.
C
D.
+370J/mole-K
+2J/mole-K
-74J/mole-K
-117J/mole-K
Solution
This question is solved using Equation 8.8, AS'reaction = S'form products ~

S'form reactants- The reaction is balanced as given, so we can proceed directly to
the insertion of numerical values:
AS'reaction = 5 S'co2 + 4SH20 "SC5H802 "6 So2

AS'reaction = 5 (214) + 4 (70) - (196) - 6 (205) = 1070 + 280 - 196- 1230
= 1350-1424 = -74
The correct answer is choice C. Be sure to pay attention to the phase, especially
for water, because inadvertently using the value for H20(g) instead of H20(1)
would lead you to pick choice A.
145
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Bond Energies
Heat of reactions can be calculated using the heat added to the system to break
the bonds and the heat released when new bonds are formed. It takes energy to
break a bond, and energy is given off when a bond is formed. This information
can be applied to an energy diagram, as shown in Figure 8-3below:
Bonds are broken early
Bonds are formed later in a
in a chemical reaction.
chemical reaction. Energy
Energy must be added
is released when bonds are

formed.
to break the bonds.
Reaction coordinate
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-3 shows an exothermic reaction. Enthalpy data helps to determine

relative bond strengths. In an exothermic reaction, net energy is released, so the
bonds thatareformed arestronger thanthebonds thatare broken. Equation 8.9
canbe usedto calculate theenthalpy change fora reaction from bond energies.
AHreaction = Energybonds broken - Energybonds formed
(8.9)
A great example of bond energies is found in biochemistry. Energy is stored

when adenosine diphosphate (ADP) is converted into adenosine triphosphate
(ATP). This energy can be released when ATP is converted back to ADP, shown
as Reaction 8.1 below:
ATP + H2O -
ADP + Pi + heat
Reaction 8.1
The release of energy is predictable from the relative energies of the bonds
broken and thebonds formed. Reaction 8.1 is shown in moredetailin Figure 8-4.
O
L11
-P-Ot-P-O0 + H-O-r
o
o(
H-O7P-O
O0
broken
broken
Bonds broken: OPandOH
formed
formed
Bonds formed: OHandOP
Figure 8-4
By general chemistry conventions, because the bonds broken are the same as the
bonds formed, we predict that the AH for the reaction is zero. However, this
reaction is used to provide cellular energy, so we know it is actually heat
releasing. The discrepancy is explained by examiningthe bonds in more detail.
Because the reaction is exothermic, the bonds broken are weaker than the bonds
formed. The unusually weak bond in the ATP molecule is the OP bond.
Because of electrostatic repulsion by the oxygen atoms, the OP bond is
elongated. Longer bonds are weaker, so the OP bond of ATP is a weak bond.
146
The Berkeley Review
GCIlCral ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
The OP bond in ATP is referred to as a high-energy bond in biochemistry. This
presents a slight naming problem, because in chemistry, a high bond-energy

describes a bond that is strong. A "high-energy bond" (note the inversion of the
word sequence) is not a bond with high dissociation energy. The high-energy
bond in the phosphate linkage is actually a weak chemical bond. Perhaps it is
best to think of a high-energy bond as a bond that is high on the energy diagram,
making it unstable (reactive). It is that very weakness that leads to the overall
release of energy when this bond is cleaved in the hydrolysis of ATP. Example
8.15 shows how the bond energies are used to quantify the change in enthalpy.
Example 8.15
What is AH for the following reaction, given that the bond energy for C=0 is 795
kj/mole, for HH is 428 kj/mole, for CO is 361 kj/mole, for CH is 411
kj/mole, and for OH is 468 kj/mole?
H3CCHO(g) + H2(g) - H3CCH2OH(g)

A.
B.
C
D.
-90kJ/mole
-17kJ/mole
+17kJ/mole
+90kJ/mole
Solution
The first step is to determine the bonds that are broken and the bonds that are
formed. The diagram below shows thebonds thatarebroken and formed:
H
O
+
H3C
H-H
'
Broken: C=0, H- H
H3C
0---H
Formed: C- O, C- H,0- H
Inreality, only the7t-bond ofthecarbonyl isbroken, butweare given numbers in

terms ofsingle and double bonds, so weconsider theentire C=0 double bond to
be brokenand the singleCO bond to be reformed. Using Equation 8.9:
AHreaction = BEC=0+ BEH-H " BEC-0 - BEC-H - BE0-H
AHreaction = 795 + 428 - 361 - 411 - 468
AHreaction = 800 - 5 + 400+ 28 - 400+ 39 - 400- 11 - 500+ 32
1200 -1300 + 99 -16 = -100 + 83 = -17kJ/mole

The correct answer is choice B. The reaction is exothermic, which means that the
bonds broken are weaker than the bonds formed. This implies that rc-bond are
weaker than a-bonds.
The values given in Example 8.15 arefor heterolytic bond dissociation in the gas
phase. There are some assumptions in general chemistry that are not true. In
general chemistry, all C-H bonds are treated as equal in strength, although we
know from organic chemistry that they are not. For instance, a 38 (tertiary)
carbonforms a weaker bond with hydrogen than a 2 (secondary) or 1 (primary)
carbon forms with hydrogen. The bond energy also varies with hybridization,
where bonds involving sp carbons are stronger than bonds involving sp2
carbons, which are in turn stronger than bonds involving sp3 carbons. Bond
energies are also considered in organicchemistry, but in more detail.
147
General ChemiStiy
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Heat Energy
Calorimetry is the measurement of the heat released from or absorbed by a

chemical reaction or physical process. The heat change can be measured by
carrying out a reaction in a sealed reaction vessel that is surrounded by some
material (a liquid is best) that is capable of absorbing the heat given off by an
exothermic reaction, or capable of supplying heat to an endothermic reaction.
Once the heat has been transferred, the liquid (known as the heat sink) either
increases in temperature due to the gain of heat energy or decreases due to the
loss of heat energy. A decrease in temperature is observed if the reaction is
endothermic. The heat of the reaction can be calculated from the change in
temperature for the system using the heat capacity and mass of the solution.
Equation 8.10 shows the relationship between heat energy (q) and the change in
temperature (AT). The mass of the solution is represented by m, and the heat
capacity of the solution is represented by C.
q = mCAT
(8.10)
By using measured values of reactants, the enthalpy change per mole for the
reaction can be calculated, assuming that the enthalpy change for the reaction is
equal to the heat energy of the reaction (q). The stereotypical lab experiment
from general chemistry, labinvolves the runningof a reaction in a styrofoam cup

filled with an aqueous solution and a thermometer. A stirring rod is also
provided to ensure that there is homogeneous distribution of heat throughout
the system. The temperature is read in consistent intervals and then plottedas a
function of time. The true final temperature after the complete mixing of the
reactants and the end of the reaction cannot be read from the thermometer
directly, because by the time that the thermometer has actually reached the
temperature of the solution, heat has already been exchanged with the
environment. This means that to determine the final temperature after reaction,
a line must be extrapolated from the data points on the graph back to the
temperature axis at the t = 0 mark. This technique is common in laboratory
procedures. The plotting of temperature as a function of time must be carried
out in uniform increments (intervals) in order to get useful data.
Example 8.16
How many calories does your body use to heat up 100g of water from 0C to
378C?
A.
7400 calories
B.
3700 calories
C.
740 calories
D. 370 calories
Solution
To determine the heat needed to raise the temperature of 100 g of water,

Equation 8.10is used. The mass is 100g, AT is 37C, heat capacity for water is 1.0
cal/g-K, so q is found by basic multiplication. Plugging known values into q =
mCAT yields: (100 g)(1.0 cal/g-K)(37K) = 3700cal. Choice B is the best answer. If
you drink all of your beverages at icy temperatures, you will expend calories
heating them to body temperature. If you were to drink two liters of ice water a
day, that would result in the expenditure of 74 nutritional calories to heat water.
148
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Example 8.17
What is the final temperature of a solution made by mixing 30 mL of H2O at

30.0C with 60 mL of H2O at 60.0C?
A. 52.5C
B.
50.0C
C.
45.0C
D. 42.5C
Solution
Because the larger volume has the greater temperature, the final temperature is
greater than the mean temperature (45C). This eliminateschoices C and D. To
decide between choices A and B, we must rely on a more rigorous calculation.
The answer can be found by one of two methods. The first method is to use a
weighted average of the two volumes and their temperatures. The final volume
ofwater = 90 mL, so 30mL (one-third) of the solution starts at 30C and60mL

90 mL
90 mL
(two-thirds) of the solution starts at 60C. The weighted average is calculated as

follows:
1 (30C) + 2- (60C) = 10C +408C =50 C

o
Choice B is the correct answer. The second method is based on Equation 8.10. It
equates the heat lost by the warmer solution to the heat gained by the cooler
solution. Ifno heat is lost to theenvironment, then Ecooiing +Eneating = 0. This
can be manipulated to read: Eheating =- Ecooiing- Substituting Equation 8.10 for

energy on eachside of the equationyields the following:
mCATheating =" mCATcooling

mATneating ="mATôling
30g(Tf-30)= -60g(Tf-60) = 60g(60-Tf)
30(Tf-30)= 60(60-Tf).'. Tf-30 = 2(60-Tf)
Tf - 30 = 120 - 2Tf .-. 3 Tf = 150 .\ Tf = 50
Holy smokes Batman, it's choice B yet again.

Heat Capacity
Heat capacities are just what the name implies; they are a measurement of the
storage capacity ofabsorbed heatfor a given material. The unit for heat capacity
is energy per mole-Kelvin. Energy can be measured in either joules or calories
and the temperature change is the same whether measured in kelvins or
centigrade (Celsius). Heatenergy is kinetic energy, which for our considerations
shall include onlytranslational energyand vibrational energy. Forthe mostpart,
solids havelower heatcapacities than liquids, because they have only vibrational
kinetic energy.
Heat capacities are used in the calculation of transferred heat, which is usually
transferred within a material via conduction. Conduction involves the transfer of
heatby way of collision when molecules are in direct contact with one another.
As two atoms within a molecule vibrate about a bond, the atoms may collide
with a neighboring atom and transfer some of the vibrational kinetic energy to
that neighboring atom. That is the essence of conductive heat transfer on the
microscopic level. The greater the amount of energy required to increase the
vibrational energy of a substance, the greater its heat capacity.
149
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
The rate of temperature change for a material depends on its heat capacity. A
material with a high heat capacity requires more time to reach a target
temperature than a material with a lower heat capacity, when heat is applied at a
uniform rate. Because of this, materials with high heat capacities generally
experience small temperature increases. This is why the temperature near a
body of water is relatively consistent compared to temperature fluctuations in
more arid regions. Water has a high heat capacity, so it absorbs a great deal of
heat on hot days, preventing the air temperature from increasing that much. On
cold days, water can release heat to the environment, preventing the air
temperature from decreasing that much, making it warmer than it would be in
an arid environment.
Example 8.18
What is the heat capacity of a material that requires 3.0 kcal to increase a 15.0 g
sample from 25C to 75C?
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.0cal/g.K
2.0cal/g.K
3.0cal/g.K
4.0cal/g.K
Solution
To calculate the heat capacity (C) from heating data, Equation 8.10 is used. The
mass is 15.0 g, AT is 50C, and q is 3000 cal, so C is found following basic
multiplication. Plugging known values into q = mCAT yields:
3000cal =(15g)(C)(50K) .-. C=3000 cal/(15 g)(5Q R) =3000 cal/?5Q gR

After manipulating the numbers to isolate C, the value is found to be 4.0 caVgKChoice D is the best answer.
Example 8.19
Which of the following observations is valid when comparing two materials of

equal mass starting at the same temperature?
A. The material with the greater heat capacity has a higher melting point.
B. The material with the greater heat capacity has a higher boiling point.
C. The material with the greater heat capacity reaches a higher temperature
when they are both exposed to the same amount of heat energy.
D. The material with the greater heat capacity reaches a lower temperature
when they are both exposed to the same amount of heat energy.
Solution
Phase change processes have little to do with heat capacity. They both relate to
intermolecular forces to an extent, but they are not related to one another. As
such, heat capacity cannot be used to estimate melting point or boiling point, so
choices A and B are eliminated. If the two materials are exposed to the same
amount of heat energy (q) and both have equal masses (m), then the compound
with the greater heat capacity (C) experiences the smaller temperature change
(AT), according to Equation 8.10. A smaller temperature change results in a
lower final temperature, so choice D is the best answer.
q =
same
150
AT
same x larger x smaller
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Heat of Phase Changes
In addition to heat being absorbed or released as the temperature of a material,

mixture, or solution changes, heat can also be exchanged when a material
undergoes a phase change. However, during a phase change, the temperature of
the system does not change. Phase changes are reversible physical processes. If
a phase-change process is endothermic, then the reverse process is exothermic,
yielding the same absolute value of energy. For instance, the melting of a solid
into a liquid is endothermic, with an enthalpy change of AHôn- The freezing
of that same liquid into a solid is exothermic, and the enthalpy change for
freezing has the same absolute value as AHfuSi0n/ but it is a negative number.
The heat exchanged during a phase change can explain some seemingly bizarre
phenomena. As strange as it may seem, when water freezes, the surrounding
environment becomes warmer. An interesting application involves frozen lakes.
As water freezes downward from the bottom of the ice layer at the surface of the
lake, heat is released to the surrounding water. This warms the water just below
the surface of the ice. Water is densest at 4C, so as the water warms from 0C to
4"C, it becomes denser. Warm water (if you can call water between 0C and 4C
"warm") sinks to the bottom of the lake. This is responsible for the circulation of
water under frozen lakes.
The heat of phase changes can also be applied to the concept of refrigeration.
The enthalpy of vaporization is significantly greater than the heat of fusion, so a
phase change between liquid and gas can be used to absorb or release a great
deal of heat. For instance, steam burns are far more severe than hot water burns,
even when the steam and water are both at 100C. The greatest amount of heat is
associated with condensation. This is also the idea behind perspiration. When
we perspire, the moisture on our skin evaporates, absorbing a large amount of
heat from the surface of our body. This works only in environments that are
arid. In a humid environment, moisture from the air can condense on your skin,
which negates the perspiration process. This is why a "dry heat" feels preferable
to a "hot and muggy" climate for most people. Our bodies are physiologically
equipped to deal with heat in a dry climate.
Example 8.20
How much energy is required to melt 30 grams of ice at 0C? (AHfusi0n = 6.0
kj/mole)
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.4 kj
6.0 kj
9.0 kj
10.0 kj
Solution
In this question, AHfuSion is expressed in units of energy per mole, so the amount
of water in the ice should also be expressed in terms of moles, rather than grams.
We must start by converting grams of ice into moles of ice. Upon dividing the 30
grams by water's molecular mass (18 grams per mole), we get 1.667moles of ice.
The math is simply: 1.667 moles x 6.0 kilojoules per mole = 10 kj. The correct
answer is choice D. When you consider the amount of calories needed to melt
ice, it becomes evident that snacking on ice is a great diet strategy from a caloric
standpoint. However, from a nutritional standpoint, a diet of nothing but ice
chips would probably not be the best for anyone in the long run.
151
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Calorimetry Experiments
The enthalpy change values we are given in general chemistry textbooks are the
results of calorimetry studies. A calorimetry study involves carrying out a
reaction in a container surrounded by a heat sink (usually water) to absorb or
provide heat energy. One passage on the MCAT several years ago presented a
typical calorimetry experiment using a styrofoam cup, an experiment that is
conducted in most general chemistry laboratory classes. The reaction is an
exothermic reaction between a strong acid and strong base. A styrofoam
container is chosen because it is a good thermal insulator, and it fits within most
laboratory budgets. The styrofoam calorimeter experiment is shown in Figure 85 below:
Thermometer
Lid
pi
Double styrofoam cup

Initially filled with 100
mLl.OMHCllfy)
Double cup provides great

insulation, but isn't so popular
with the global cooling crowd
Figure 8-5
A baseline temperatures for the hydrochloric acid solution in the styrofoam cup
and for the 100 mL 1.0 M KOH(aq) in a second container are determined. Once a
steady baseline temperature for each solution is established, the potassium

hydroxide solution is added to the hydrochloric acid solution in the styrofoam
cup. The temperature is then recorded at regular twenty-second intervals.
Because the reaction is exothermic, the temperature of the system increases. A
double styrofoam cup system is often used to increase insulation. Figure 8-6
shows data that were collected and graphed at regular time intervals.
34.0
32.0
U
30.0-
I 28.0
to
I 26.01
24.0
22.0-
"i
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
18
-|
200
220
240
1-
260
Time (seconds)
Figure 8-6
152
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Analysis of the data has the goal of determining a value for AT for the mixture.
The reaction is not instantaneous, because the heat is not transferred instantly, so
the thermometer does not register the final temperature right away. Heat is lost
from the system to the environment by the time the thermometer catches up and
reads the actual solution temperature. To compensate for this loss of heat, the
data points are used to extrapolate a line back to the time of mixing (the 70second line in this experiment). This leads to a value for AT, which can then be
plugged into Equation 8.10, q = mCAT. The value used for AT is the change in
temperature from initial temperature (at the time when the solutions are first
mixed) to the projected temperature (extrapolated back to the time of mixing

from the data), as shown in Figure 8-7 below:
T
'
1 extrapolated 1
'-.
**....
..
AT = 34C-22C = 12C
lxing
6070 80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220 240
260
Time (seconds)
Figure 8-7
The styrofoam cup is not a perfect insulator, so some heat is lost to the
environment, which accounts for the drop in solution temperature over time.
With better insulation, the slope of the extrapolated line is closer to zero (a flat
line). There are several conceptual and error-analysis questions that can
accompany this experiment, which makes it a prime topic for the MCAT.
Example 8.21
Why is the solution stirred after mixing?
A. To generate the activation energy needed for the reaction

B. To prevent the mixture from forming a biphasic system
C.
To increase the effectiveness of insulation
D. To distribute the heat evenly throughout the system

Solution
Stirring does not introduce much energy into the system, so choice A is
eliminated. Two aqueous solutions do not form a biphasic layer, so choice B is
eliminated. Insulation depends on the material, not the motion of the solution, so
choice C is eliminated. Solutions are stirred to generate homogeneity of solute

molecules and heat. Heat must be evenly distributed through the solution. If the
solution were not stirred, then the temperature of the solution at the point where
the thermometer rests might not be accurate, because heat pockets in the solution
could exist. Choice D is the best answer.
153
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Example 8.22
What would be observed if the concentrations of HCl and KOH were cut in half?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The change in temperature would be the same.

The change in temperature would increase by a factor of two.
The change in temperature would decrease by a factor of two.
The change in temperature would decrease by a factor of four.
Solution
If the concentrations of both solutions were cut in half, assuming that their
volumes stayed the same, then the moles of reactants would be cut by half. With
a reduction to half the quantity of reaction, the amount of heat released is cut by
half. This would reduce AT by half, and makes choice C the best answer. If
either reactant is decreased, then the amount of heat released must also decrease.
In this case, both reactants are decreased by the same amount, so neither one
becomes the limiting reagent.
Example 8.23
Why is styrofoam chosen for a simple calorimetry experiment?
A.
B.
C.
D.
For its high heat capacity

For its isothermal compressibility
For its thermal insulating capability
For its ability to conduct heat
Solution
The goal in a calorimetry experiment is to measure the heat associated with a

reaction. Paramount in this task is the ability to retain all energy within the
container, minimizing the interaction with the surrounding medium. Styrofoam
is chosen, because it is a good insulator. This makes choice C the best answer.
You do not want the container to absorb heat, so choice A is eliminated. The
experiment entails monitoring a temperature change, so no "isothermal" property

is pertinent. This eliminates choice B. Styrofoam is not very dense, so it is
assumed that its molecules are relatively far apart from one another. Molecules
that are far apart (not in direct contact with one another) do not conduct heat
very well. Thus, styrofoam reduces heat loss through conduction. This
eliminates choice D. A thermos design is used in more accurate calorimetry
experiments. The design of a thermos includes an evacuated chamber between
the inner container and the outer wall. An evacuated space prevents heat
transfer either through convection or conduction.
Example 8.24
Why must a lid be used in the calorimetry experiment?
A. To prevent heat loss via conduction

B. To prevent heat loss via convection
C. To prevent heat loss via evaporation
D. To prevent heat loss via radiation
Solution
The lid serves as a barrier to prevent gaseous molecules from escaping. This
reduces both convective heat loss and evaporative heat loss. The greatest
amount of heat is lost through evaporation, so the more significant role of a lid is
to prevent evaporative heat loss. Choice C is the best answer.
154
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Heat Transfer
Heat is naturally transferred from a warmer object to a cooler object. The greater
the difference in temperature between the objects, the more heat that transfers
per unit time. Heat is transferred in four ways: convection, conduction,
radiation, and evaporation-condensation. These terms are defined below, along
with examples of each type of heat transfer.
Convection (viafluid medium): Convection is the movement of heat through a fluid
medium. The particles of the medium collide with the surface of the hot
object, resulting in the transfer of heat from the hot object to the medium.
The medium can flow, allowing it to travel through the space between the
hot and cold objects. When a warm medium strikes the surface of a cold
object, heat is transferred through collision to the cold object. The net result
is that heat is transferred from the warmer surface to the cooler surface
through the fluid medium. The heat is said to travel via thermal currents.
Convection example: Convection ovens function by creating thermal currents,
which heat food. The heat source (electric coil or flame) is placed in the
bottom of the oven where the cooler (denser) air is found. The cooler air
collides with the heat source, increasing its thermal energy. As the air
becomes warmer, it becomes less dense, and thus rises. The food is typically
placed near the top, above the heat source. The warmer air strikes the
container holding the food and transfers heat to the container. This cools the
air, which then becomes denser, and sinks back to the bottom. The flow of
the warm and cool air creates thermal currents. Convection ovens are the
conventional ovens found in most kitchens. Some convection ovens augment

the air flow with fans that help circulate the warm and cool air.
Conduction (via direct contact): Conduction is the transfer of heat through direct
contact (vibrational energy is transferred via collisions between neighboring

molecules). The particles of a solid vibrate faster as the object becomes
warmer. Vibrating molecules can transfer heat energy to neighboring
molecules when they collide. This allows neighboring molecules to
equilibrate. Heat is transferred from the warmer point to the cooler point in
the object. Because of the continual heat transfer and equilibration of
vibrational kinetic energy between neighbors, heat gradients are formed.
Conduction example: When heating a metal rod (as when roasting
marshmallows over an open flame), the end of the rod in the flame becomes
hot. However, although one end is placed in a heat source energetic enough
to cook food, the other end of the metal rod is not too hot to hold. This is
because the temperature is not uniform throughout the rod. There is a

gradient of temperatures between the hot end and the cold end of the rod.
Radiation (absorption and emission of IR photons): Radiation is the emission of
photon energy in the form of electromagnetic waves. The energy of the
photon varies with the temperature of the object that emits it, as expressed in
physics by Wien's displacement law. An object becomes cooler and its
molecules move less energetically as it continues to radiate infrared energy.
Radiationexamples: Heat-seeking devices are designed to detect regions of high
infrared emission. Heat is responsible for making molecules vibrate, and IR
photons, when absorbed, stimulate a molecule to reach an excited vibrational
state. This means that hot objects emit infrared photons. Microwave ovens
function by irradiating food with EM waves of a specific frequency that
rotates the water molecules inside the food. By heating the water molecules
selectively, water molecules can transfer heat to neighboring food molecules
through conduction.
155
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Calorimetry
Evaporation-Condensation: Evaporation is an endothermic process in which a

liquid absorbs heat and is converted into a gas. Condensation is an
exothermic process whereby heat is released from a gas as it is converted into
a liquid. A hotbody canbe cooled when a liquid evaporates from itssurface.
A cold body can be warmed when a gas condenses on its surface.
Evaporation-condensation example: Perspiration involves the evaporation of a

thin film of liquid on the surface of the skin to cool the body. To maximize
the effects, surface area must be maximized. In very humid environments,
where the rate of condensation equals the rate of evaporation, evaporation is
ineffective in cooling the body. For instance, when you first enter a gym, it
feels hot and sticky. This is the perspiration from the other inhabitants
condensing on the surface of your skin (you unsuspecting cold body you.)
When designing many kinds of machinery, engineers must consider all forms of
heat transfer. A good example is the Miracle Meat Thawer, as seen on some of
the finer infomercials television has to offer. The Miracle Meat Thawer takes
advantage of several principles of heat transfer. It is a metal tray with a black

top, and ridges. The dark surface absorbs light energy more effectively than a
light surface would. The ridges increase the surface area, optimizing the
absorption of photons. Being made of metal allows for easier conduction of heat
energy. The metal should have a low heat capacity, so that minimal heat is
retained by the metal itself. A frozen piece of meat placed on the surface of the
thawer acts as a heat sink for all of the energy absorbed by the metal tray. A
well-designed tray has a slight slope and a drainage hole leading to a basin. If
water collected on the surface of the plate, then heat energy would be wasted in
evaporating the water. The apparatus does not work as well if the object being
thawed covers the entire surface, because fewer photons can be absorbed.
An engine radiator is another example of a device designed to transfer heat. It
works by moving a fluid through the core of a hot engine. The fluid absorbs
heat, provided that the coils through which it moves have enough contact with
the hot engine. The fluid then passes through more coils in the front of the car,
which are covered with thin fins. The purpose of the fins is to maximize the
surface area from which heat may be lost via convection. As air passes over the
fins, heat from the engine is released to the air.
Example 8.25
Which of the following is NOT a reason why the space surrounding the resistive
coil in an incandescent light bulb is evacuated?
A.
B.
C.
D.
To maximize energy loss via radiation

To prevent pressure buildup at higher temperatures
To prevent oxidation of the filament
To maximize energy loss via convection
Solution
A light bulb is designed to convert heat (generated through resistance in the coil)
into light. By evacuating any gas from the bulb, we reduce the amount of heat
energy transferred from the coil through convection. The result is that energy is
dissipated as light, and not heat. This maximizes radiation and minimizes
convection, making choice A valid and choice D invalid. Choice D is the best
answer. If the bulb contained gas, the gas could expand upon heating, and the
bulb might blow up. This makes choice B a valid statement. In an evacuated
bulb, there is no oxygen, so oxidation is eliminated. This makes choice C valid.
156
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
Heat and Work

Energetics
Energy is a topic common to both chemistry and physics. In a sense, chemistry is

the study of energy production while physics is the study of energy application.
In chemistry, we think of energy in terms of heat, which is defined by the calorie
unit. Heat is absorbed or released during chemical reactions. In physics, we
think of energy in terms of work, which is defined by the joule unit. Work is
done by either the system or the surroundings in a physical process.
Energy can be converted between heat and work. Heat may be absorbed by a
system, expanding the gas contained within, which in turn does work on the
surroundings as it expands. This is the essence of any machine that converts heat
directly into work. In this case, heat is defined as positive, because heat energy is
gained by the system. Work, however, is defined as negative, because work is
done by the system on thesurroundings. The total energy of a system is a sum of the
heat and work. Equation 8.11 defines the change in energy for the system.
AE = q-PAV
(8.11)
E is the energy of the system, q is heat, P is pressure, and V is volume. Work can
be described as either FAd or PAV, depending on the system. For a piston
system, the volume changes, so work is PAV. As a piston expands (positive AV),
energy is released by the system to the surroundings, so work is defined as PAV. Values are defined from the system's perspective. When q is positive, heat
flows from the surroundings into the system. When q is negative, heat flows
from the system out to the surroundings. When w is positive, work is done on
the system by the surroundings. When w is negative, work is done by the system
on the surroundings. When a piston returns to its originalposition, the energy of
a system does not change (AE = 0). This is to say that energy is neither absorbed
nor released, but converted between work and energy (q = PAV).
Some terms that describe the conditions involved in energetics are listed below:
Adiabatic: A process where there is no change in heat (q = 0). Heat is neither

gained nor lost. The system is perfectly insulated thermally.
Calorie: A unit of energy defined as the heat energy required to raise 1.000
gram of water by 1.000C (specifically from 14.508C to 15.50 C).
Energy (E): The capacity to do work or to produce heat. There are two types
of energy with which we shall concern ourselves: kinetic (energy of motion)
and potential (position of an object or chemical composition).
Heat (q): The form of energy involving the motion of molecules. Motion
includes translational displacement, and vibrational and rotational
movement. The heat associated with a process depends on the pathway.
Joule: A unit of energy defined as the work energy exerted when one
Newton of force is applied to an object to move it a distance of one meter.
Surroundings: The surroundings are defined as the environment neighboring
a chemical reaction or physical process. The surroundings can either donate
energy to the system or absorb energy from the system.
System: The system is defined as the contents of a chemical reaction or
physical process that produce or absorb energy. We often study the system,
when we look at a chemical reaction.
Work (w): The ability to move an object over a given distance by applying a
force. This form of energy is harnessed to move mass. Like heat, work
depends on the pathway, w = Fd = - P-AV
157
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
Carnot Cycle
The Carnot cycle is a cyclic process carried out in a piston, where heat is
converted into work or work is converted into heat. Practical examples of the
Carnot cycle include engines and refrigerators. We inherently know the concept
behind the Carnot cycle. When we blow on a hot liquid, it is done so with
pursed lips. Consider blowing on the skin on the back of your hand. If you
exhale through your mouth with a normal relaxed degree of aperture, your
breath comes out at body temperature. But if you exhale through your mouth
with a small opening, the air feels cooler as it passes across your skin. That is
due to the compression of the gas (exothermic) as it passes through your lips,
and the expansion of the gas (endothermic) once it leaves your mouth. The air
feels cooler, because it is expanding as it passes across the surface of your skin.
When a gas expands, the molecules increase their intermolecular distance, which
breaks intermolecular forces. lust as bond breaking is endothermic, so is the
expansion of a gas.
The process of blowing air on your skin through pursed lips results in heat
transfer from a cold body (your skin) to a hot body (your mouth). This is
unnatural heat flow, so it is similar to the function of the Carnot heat pump. We
shall look at a heat pump (refrigerator) in more detail. The Carnot cycle, in a
practical sense, can be applied in the form of a heat pump or applied in reverse
in the form of a heat engine. It involves phase changes, so the process can be
drawn overlaid onto a phase diagram, but the traditional lines of the phase
diagram are often removed. Figure 8-8 shows a typical phase diagram on the left
and then the Carnot cycle for a heat pump overlaid onto that same phase
diagram on the right.
Liquid
*
*
a
O
Solid
/**
t'mJ
*
Gas
&H
*
*
IV
Temperature (kelvins)
Figure 8-8
A heat pump follows a counterclockwise path about the phase change process
cycle. The following lists the phase details of the four-step cycleshown in Figure
8-8:
I.
A material that is normally a gas at room temperature and pressure is

compressed into a liquid. Condensation is an exothermic process, so the
material heats up and finishes as a liquid at a higher temperature and
pressure than it originally had.
II. The material is maintained at a high pressure, so it remains a liquid. It is
allowed to cool back to room temperature by dissipating heat to the
environment. It finishes at a lower temperature, but the same high pressure.
III. The pressure on the system is returned to normal, so the material expands
from a liquid into a gas. Evaporation is an endothermic process, so the
material cools down. It finishes as a gas at a lower temperature and pressure
than it originally had.
158
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
IV. The material is maintained at normal pressure, so it remains a gas. It is

allowed to warm back to room temperature by absorbing heat from the
environment. It finishes at a higher temperature, but the same pressure.
After the four-step process, the material returns back to its original state. As
such, the internal energy does not change. Figure 8-9shows the energetics of the
heat pump cycle shown in Figure 8-8.
w2 &q2
>H
QJ
JZ
a
' Wj
w3y
<u
u
3
Vi
Vi
<v
&H
Jt
W4& q4
Figure 8-9
As you follow the heat pump around in its counterclockwise path, you see that
work is done so that heat energy can be released. The following is a list of the
energy details of the four-step cycle shown in Figure 8-9:
I. As the material is compressed into a liquid, work is done on the system (w\).
Heat is released from the molecules as they form stronger intermolecular
forces. The heat remains a part of the system in this step, so we cannot
consider it transferred yet.
II
Heat is released from the system as the material cools to ambient
temperature (q2). As it cools at constant pressure, the volume decreases
slightly (liquids do not exhibit significant volume changes), so a small
amount of work is done by the surroundings on the system (W2).
III As the material expands back into a gas, work is done by the system (W3).
Heat is absorbed by the molecules as they form weaker intermolecular
forces. The heat is not replenished into the system in this step.
IV Heat is absorbed by the system as the material warms to ambient
temperature (q4). As it heats at constant pressure, the volume increases, so
work is done by the system on the surroundings (W4).
After the four-step process, the material returns to its original state. Overall,
more heat is released than absorbed and more work is done on the system than
by the system. The net result is that work goes into the system and heat flows
out from the system. Another common graph associated with Carnot heat
pumps shows pressure on the y-axis and volume on the x-axis. The process is
the same, but a phase diagram cannot be understood easily with such axes.
159
Exclusive PfCAT Preparation
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
Refrigerator (Applied Heat Pump)
The refrigerator, in its simplest form, uses work to absorb heat as a fluid passes
through the four stages in a closed system. In a refrigerator, a change in volume
is ultimately a change in heat. The basic idea behind the refrigerator is to put
work energy into the system to compress a gas and condense it into a liquid.
Compression of a gas and condensation are both exothermic, so heat is released.
The system is then allowed to thermally equilibrate with the environment by
releasing heat to the surroundings. Following thermal equilibration, the liquid
evaporates and the gas expands back to its natural state. Evaporation and the
expanding of a gas are both endothermic, so heat is absorbed.
Condensation and evaporation are carried out at different pressures, so it takes
more work energy to compress and condense the gas than the work energy
released when the liquid evaporates and the gas expands. Ideally, the difference
in work energy equals the heat energy released, assuming that energy is
conserved in the overall process. Figure 8-10 shows a simplistic schematic
diagram for the process, where some material flows repeatedly counterclockwise
through the system.
Heat absorbed\
^^2iÊndothermic
Exothermic^SJo^
CL. j-G) process
process ^2 - lQ
HotNN^
Heat released /
/Heat absorbed
Cool
^XRT
Warm
\ Heat released
Figure 8-10
Translating from the theoretical schematic in Figure 8-10 into the actual
refrigerator requires a piston and a network of coils. A piston is used to
compress the gas into a liquid. This is represented by the gas-to-liquid
conversion shown in the exothermic oval of Figure 8-10. This region equates to
the compressor in a refrigerator. Thecompressor converts the refrigerant gas to

its liquid form, which is an exothermic process. After compressing the
refrigerant, theliquid refrigerant flows intoa high-pressure reservoir coil, which
is represented by the shaded tube from which heat is released in Figure 8-10.
Because the reservoir coil is hot, the outer surface is fitted with fins to enhance
convection. In order to keep the material a liquid, the warm coil must be
pressurized. This isaccomplished using a pressure valve at theend of thecoil.
Once the liquid refrigerant has cooled to ambient room temperature (RT), it
passes through the pressure valve, and then expands into a gas within a lowpressure sealed aluminum coil. Astheliquid refrigerant expands withinthelowpressure coil to form a gas, heat is absorbed from the environment during this
endothermic process. Heat is absorbed from the coils, so the coils become cold.
In turn, the coilsabsorb heat from the surrounding air. Any gas, liquid, or solid
in contact with the coils loses heat by transferring it to the walls of the coils. The
coldcoils are placed in an insulated, sealed container, so the coreof the container
becomes cool. Thisis the interior of the refrigerator. The compressor and high-
pressure coils mustbekept asfaraway from thecore of thecontainer as possible,

because of the heat they release. Figure 8-11 is a more detailed pictorial
representation of the refrigeration process shown in Figure8-10.
160
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
Pressure valve
Liquid expands into a gas

(endothermic process)
High pressure
coils
Outlet valve
Low pressure
coils
Gas is compressed into

a liquid (exothermic process)
Figure 8-11
The four stages of the refrigerator shown in Figure 8-11 are listed below:
1. Freon gas flows from the low-pressure coils into the piston of the compressor
through an inlet valve at the top of the piston. The piston is then
compressed. The increased pressure exerted on the freon gas converts the
freon gas into its liquid phase. As the piston descends further, the hot freon
liquid is forced through an outlet valve. The liquid is hot due to the
condensation process. (Check a compressor if you wish to verify this).
2. When the piston reaches the bottom of its cycle, the outlet valve is forced
open, and hot freon liquid escapes into the high pressure coils. Because
freon liquid is hot (condensation is a heat-releasing process), the highpressure coils are hot. They are found on the back (exterior) of the
refrigerator, often covered by a metal grid or thin plate. The freon liquid
cools and equilibrates with the air by dissipating the heat to the external
environment through the walls of the coils. Coils are chosen to maximize
surface area.
3. Freon liquid at ambient temperature is forced from the high-pressure coils

through a pressurized outlet valve into the low-pressure coils. The freon
liquid is forced into the low-pressure coils by the increased hydraulic
pressure generated when hot freon liquid is forced into the high-pressure
coils through the inlet valve by the compressor.
4. Freon liquid evaporates to form freon gas in the low-pressure coils. Freon
evaporates by the absorption of heat from the core of the container in which
the low-pressure coils reside. During this step, heat is absorbed from the
inside of the refrigerator. The freon gas fills the low-pressure coil once it has
evaporated. The cycle repeats.
The net result is that work is applied at the compressor, and heat flows out from
the high-pressure coils, so heat is removed from the core of the refrigerator to the
environment. The compressor acts as a pump, and freon flow is in one direction
through the system. Heat is absorbed and released at different points.
Air conditioners and freezers have the same mechanics as a refrigerator. The
difference between freezers, air conditioners, and refrigerators is the temperature
of the internal coils. Because a phase change from liquid to gas is responsible for
absorbing heat, the temperature of the cold coils depends on the boiling point of
the refrigerant. A refrigerant is selected on the basis of its boiling point and the
target temperature of the system. The temperature in a freezer is less than the
temperature of a an air conditioner or refrigerator, so the boiling point of the
refrigerant used in a freezer is lower than the refrigerant used in an air
conditioner or a refrigerator.
161
GCIlCral ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
Heat Engine
The Carnot heat engine is the reverse of a Carnot heat pump. This is to say that
when a heat pump is run backwards (heat is added in and work is released), a
heat engine is created. The diagram for a heat engine, Figure 8-12, shows arrows
in a clockwise loop, as opposed to the heat pump, which has its arrows in a
counterclockwise loop, like Figure 8-9. The heat engine operates by converting
heat into work. In its simplest definition (Carnot definition), heat is used to
expand a gas in a closed system within a piston. When the gas expands, the
walls of the container move. Because the container is a piston, only one wall
moves. Work is associated with force times distance, so the motion of the wall is
harnessable work. The basic concept behind a heat engine is rooted in the ideal
gas equation PV= nRT, where altering one variable changes another variable. In
an engine, a changein heat is ultimatelya change in volume. This means that no
change in internal energy transpires, only the conversion from heat into work.
The following is the operation of a Carnot heat engine:
1. The first step starting from the upper left corner of the diagram in Figure 8-12
below is the reversible isothermal expansion of the gas from state a to state b.
During this step, work (defined as wa-bin the diagram) is done by the piston
on the surroundings (defined as negative for the system); and heat (qi) is
absorbed by the gas. In a combustion engine, it is the explosion of the
gasoline that generates this heat.
2. The second step is the reversible adiabatic expansion of the gas from state b
to state c. As implied by the term "adiabatic," no heat is gained or lost by the
system. As a consequence of no heat transfer, the temperature drops as heat
energy is absorbed by the expanding gas. In this step, the piston does work
(wb-c)on me surroundings. In a combustionengine, this is that small period
of time after the gasolinehas exploded where the piston is still rising.
3. The tnird step is the reversible isothermal compression of the gas from state c
to state d. During this compression step, the surroundings do work (wc-d)
on the gas (defined as positive for the system), and heat (q2) flows out of the
engine. In a combustion engine, this is the venting of the piston allowing the
hot exhaust to escape and cool air and gas to flow in.
4. The fourth step (which completes the cycle) is the reversible adiabatic
compression of the gas from state d back to state a. During this step, the
surroundings do work (wd-a) on the gas as the piston descends, but heat is
not gained or lost. In a combustion engine, this is the equilibrating of the
piston chamber back to its resting state just before the spark ignites the gas.
wa-b & qi
(0
CL,
wc-d & q2
Volume
Figure 8-12
The graph may also be diagrammed as pressure as a function of volume. The

volume term is important, because work is defined by the equation: w = -PAV.
As of 2000, the heat engine has yet to appear on the new version of the MCAT.
162
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
A good example of the application of the principles behind the heat engine is the
single-piston steam engine. In the steam engine, we start by considering a
reservoir filled with hot water (water at 100C). Water is taken through a fourstep process that changes its phase and pressure and then returns it to its original
state. The following steps outline the operation of a steam engine:
1. Water evaporates to form steam as heat is stoked in the boiler. During this
step, heat is added from the surroundings (defined as heat energy into the
system). The steam builds up pressure in the reservoir.
2. Steam flows from the reservoir into the piston when the inlet valve to the
piston is opened. The pressure exerted by the steam that enters causes the
piston to rise from its lowest point to its highest point (apex). As the piston
rises, work is done by the system on the surroundings (defined as energy out
from the system).
3. When the piston has reached the top of its cycle, the outlet valve is opened,
and the steam escapes into the exhaust column and collects in the condenser,
where the pressure is reduced upon condensation. The piston returns to its
lowest point through inertia and the force of a counterweight (in a onepiston engine). As the piston falls, work is done by the surroundings on the
system (defined as work energy into the system).
4. The steam condenses in the condenser and is pumped back into the boiler.
During this step, heat is released to the surroundings (defined as heat energy
out from the system) as the steam condenses back into water. The cycle then
repeats step one again.
The condenser reduces the pressure so that when the exhaust valve is opened,
the steam within the piston can flow from a region of higher pressure (the piston)
to a region of lower pressure (the condenser). Heat is released from the
condenser, so an efficient engine finds a way to recycle that emitted heat. Figure
8-13shows a pictorial diagram of a steam engine.
Crankshaft
Boiler
Water pump
Condenser
Figure 8-13
The steam engine is a closed system through which water circulates. A

combustion engine differs from the Carnot heat engine and steam engine in that
it is an open system. Petroleum mist and air are injected into the piston. The
mixture is ignited, and the piston rapidly expands. The power stroke of the
piston does work on the crankshaft, turning the crank 180 degrees. Exhaust is
removed from the piston and released to the atmosphere. The conversion of
explosive linear work into circular motion requires a crankshaft.
163
General ChemiStry
Thermochemistry
Heat and Work
One of the more important physics-based features of an engine is the timing of

the valves. Because the motion generated by an engine is periodic, there must be
periods (timing) for each operation of the machine. The inlet valve must open
and close (allowing fuel and air to enter the chamber) before the spark can ignite
the mixture, followed by the opening of the exhaust valve to vent the products
from the chamber once burning has ceased. This is what is referred to as the
timing of the engine. Modern engines have each piston fitted with four valves
(two intake and two exhaust), so that the gas diffuses more evenly in the
chamber. Because the up-and-down motion of the piston ultimately turns a
crank, torque must be invoked. To maximize torque, a lever arm system is used.
This allows the rod to be attached at the edge of the crank (maximizing moment
arm) and allows the rod to move in same direction as the piston, for the most
part. This maximizes the applied force of the system shown in Figure 8-13.
Engine Efficiency
The efficiency of an engine is simply the output over the input. Work energy is
produced from heat energy, so engine efficiency is work out divided by heat in.
The most efficient engines have low exhaust temperature (minimal heat is
wasted), few moving parts (minimizes friction), and low weight (work energy
produced is not wasted in moving the engine). Efficient engines are multi-piston
systems rather than a single piston connected to a counterweight. A good
analogy involves a bicycle crank. The pedals are placed out of phase for greatest
efficiency. A bicycle could be designed with two pedals in phase attached to a
crank housing a counterweight that is out of phase with the two pedals. The
counterweight system works well in theory, but this would not be an enjoyable
bike to ride uphill because of its extreme mass.
Refrigerators, Engines, and Carnot Cycle Reality Check
This is one of the most difficult topics tested on the physical sciences section of
the MCAT. As such, their questions must be modified to a level that will
generate a bell curve. Although the passages may seem overwhelming, if you
have a very fundamental perspective that a refrigerator takes in work (applied to

a piston) and releases heat while an engine takes in heat (to expand a gas a
piston) and releases work, you should do fine on their questions. Do not overstudy this topic, even if you feel like you only partially comprehend it.
164
The Berkeley Review
Thermochemistry
Passages
13 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Thermochemistry Passage Schedule:

I:
After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I - III, VI, & XI
II:
Following Task I: Passages IV, V, IX, & X (28 questions in 36 minutes)

Ill:
Review: Passages VII, VIII, XII - XIII & Questions 93-100

V- ;
BERKELEY
Thermodynamics Study Passages

I.
II.
Energy Diagrams
(1 -7)
Bond Energies
(8- 14)
III.
Born-Haber Cycle
(15 - 21)
IV.
Free-Energy Calculation
(22 - 28)
Rocket Fuels
(29 - 35)
Enthalpies and Sugars
(36 - 43)
Salt-Solution Calorimetry Experiment
(44 - 49)
Heat Pack
(50 - 55)
Bomb Calorimeter
(56 - 62)
Hot and Cold Compresses
(63 - 69)
Calorimetry Experiment
(70 - 78)
Single-Piston Engine
(79 - 85)
Carnot Cycle
(86 - 92)
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
Questions not Based on a Descriptive Passage
Thermochemistry Scoring Scale

Raw Score
MCAT Score
84 - 100
13 - 15
66 - 83
10 - 12
47 - 65
7 -9
34 - 46
4-6
1 - 33
1 -3
(93 - 100)
If AS is positivefor Reaction 2, then as the temperature

is increased, what is observed?
Drawn below are two energy diagrams for two separate

processes. Figure 1 shows the energy diagram for Reaction
1, and Figure 2 shows the energy diagram for Reaction 2.
For Reaction 1, there are two pathways drawn leading to two
separate products, X and Y. Both pathways represent twostep reaction mechanisms. In Reaction 2, there are two steps
to the reaction, as represented by the two peaks, but only one
reaction pathway is shown on the energy diagram.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Both the Keq-to-Q ratio and AG increase.

The Keq-to-Q ratio decreases, while AG increases.
The Keq-to-Q ratio increases, while AG decreases.
Both the Keq-to-Q ratio and AG decrease.
For Reaction 1, what can be said about the enthalpies of

both pathways?
A. AH for Pathway X is positive; more energy is

released from Pathway X than Pathway Y.
Q.
B. AH for Pathway X is positive; less energy is

C. AH for Pathway X is negative; more energy is
D. AH for Pathway X is negative; less energy is
.5
c
Reaction Co-ordinate
Figure 1
At higher temperatures, what is true about Pathway X

and Pathway Y of Reaction 1?
A. Pathway X is the kinetic pathway and is more
probable than Pathway Y.
B. Pathway X is the thermodynamic pathway and is
more probable than Pathway Y.
C. Pathway Y is the kinetic pathway and is more
probable than Pathway X.
D. Pathway Y is the thermodynamic pathway and is
more probable than Pathway X.
a.
15
C
LU
Reaction Co-ordinate
Figure 2
In Reaction 1, the pathways are referred as the kinetic

and thermodynamic pathways. Lower activation energy is
associated with the kinetic pathway, while a more stable
product is associated with the thermodynamic pathway. The

preferredpathway depends on the reaction conditions. At low
temperatures, the reaction is forced to take the pathway that
requires the least activation energy, so the kinetic product is
observed at lower temperatures. At elevated temperatures,
the thermodynamic product is observed.
1.
What is observed in Reaction 2?
A. The intermediate builds up to a detectable level,

because the rate-determining step is the first step.
B. The intermediate builds up to a detectable level,
because the rate-determining step is the second
In Reaction 1, what is true of the rate-determining step?

A. The first step is rate-determining, because it has the
highest activation energy.
B. The first step is rate-determining, because it has the
lowest activation energy.
C. The second step is rate-determining, because it has
the highest activation energy.
D. The second step is rate-determining, because it has
the lowest activation energy.
step.
C. The intermediate
level, because the
D. The intermediate
level, because the
167
cannot build up to a detectable

first step is rate-determining.
cannot build up to a detectable
second step is rate-determining.
6.
Which of the graphs represents the percentages of

products X and Y as the temperature is increased?
7.
A.
If Reaction 1 is favorable at lower temperatures but

unfavorable at higher temperatures, then what is true
about the change in enthalpy and entropy?
A.
B.
C.
D.
AH > 0; AS > 0
AH>0;AS<0
AH<0;AS>0
AH < 0; AS < 0
Temperature
B.
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
168
10. Why does an SP2CSP3C bond have a higher bond

energy than an SP3CSP3C bond?

The enthalpy of a reaction can be found using the bond
energies. The change in enthalpy can be attributed to the
difference between the energies of the bonds broken and the
energies of the bonds formed. Equation 1 shows how
enthalpy change is obtained from bond energies.
A. An sp2 orbital is shorter than an sp3 orbital, hence

the SP2CSP C bond is shorter and thus stronger.
B. An sp2 orbital is shorter than an sp3 orbital, hence
the SP2CSP3C bond islonger and thus weaker.
C. An sp2 orbital is less electronegative than an sp3
orbital, hence the SP2CSP3C bond is more polar
AH = B.E. (bonds broken) - B.E. (bonds formed)
and thus stronger.
Equation 1
D.
Table 1 lists the bond energies of some of the more

common bonds within organic molecules.
Bond
B.E.
Bond
B.E.
Bond
B.E.
HC
413
CC
347
NC
305
HH
432
CH
413
NH
391
HN
391
CN
305
NN
160
H0
467
C0
358
NO
201
HF
565
CF
485
NF
272
CCI
339
NCI
200
HCI
427
and thus stronger.
(KJ/mole)
(KJ/mole)
(KJ/mole)
An sp2 orbital is more electronegative than an sp3

orbital, hence the SP2CSP3C bond is more polar
HBr
363
CBr
276
NBr
243
HI
295
CI
240
NI
171
11. The breaking of an HH and an FF bond to form

two HF bonds is:
A.
B.
C.
D.
highly endothermic.
slightly endothermic.
slightly exothermic.
highly exothermic.
Table 1
12. How can the bond energy trend of the sulfur-halide bond
Table 2 lists the bond energies of some of the less

common bonds within organic molecules. Both tables fail to
be explained?
A. As the halide gets larger, the bond gets stronger.
account for hybridization or the effects of neighboring
B. As the halide gets more electronegative, the bond
substituents on the stability of a bond.
gets stronger.
Bond
B.E.
Bond
Bond
(KJ/mole)
(KJ/mole)
OO
0*0
B.E.
B.E.
C. The strength of the bond depends on both the size
(KJ/mole)
andpolarizability of the halide.

D. As the electron affinity of the halide increases, the
146
FF
154
C=C
614
495
CICI
239
C=N
615
C=0
799
418
SH
347
BrBr
193
SS
128
II
149
N=N
SF
XXX
CIF
253
N=0
607
. 839
SCI
258
BrCI
218
c=c
SBr
218
ICI
208
C=N
891
SI
266
IBr
175
NhN
941
bond gets stronger.
13. What isthe approximate bond energy of a BrF bond?

A. 261 -&mole
B. 242-^-
Table 2
mole
Values were derived from bomb calorimetry experiments
C. 206-^-
using the gas phase reactions of several molecules. The kJ
mole
unit is converted into kcal by dividing by 4.18.
D. 161
kJ
mole
8.
Which bond is the WEAKEST in diethyl peroxide?

A. HC
B. CO
14. Why isthe FF bond weaker than the CICI bond?
C. OO
A. The FF bond is shorter, and shorter bonds are

always weaker.
B. Chlorine is more electronegative than fluorine.
C. Fluorineatoms repel when close together.
D. CC
9.
What is the bond energy of the second 7i-bond in

nitrogen gas?
A.
B.
C.
D.
258.0 kJ per
390.5 kJ per
313.7 kJ per
523.0 kJ per
D. Chlorine is smaller than fluorine.
mole
mole
mole
mole
169
17. How do the lattice energies of NaCl, LiF, and MgO

compare to one another?
The Born-Haber cycle refers to the energy released when a
A.
B.
C.
D.
salt is formed from its most stable elements in their natural
form. The enthalpy change for the overall reaction can be

found by summing the individual steps of the overall process.
The formation of lithium fluoride from lithium metal and
EMgO>ELiF>ENaCl
EMgO > ENaCl > ELiF
Euf > ENaCl > EMgO
ENaa > ELiF > EMgO
fluorine gas is shown in a stepwise fashion below:

Step I:
Sublimation of lithium metal:
Li(s) -> Li(g)
AHsubiimation = +153 kJ
Step II:
18. If calcium metal is used instead of lithium metal, how
can the value in Step II be determined?
Ionization of lithium gas:
Life) - Li+(g)
A. Only the value for the first ionization should be
Ionization energy= +513kJ
used.
Step III: Dissociation of FFBond:
1 F2(g) -> F(g)
B. Only the value for the second ionization should be

used.
Half bond energy F2 = +77 kJ
C. An average of the first and second ionization values
should be used.
Step IV: Electron affinity of atomic fluorine:

F(g) + 1 e" -> F"(g)
Electron affinity = -324 kJ
D. The sum of the first and second ionization values

should be used.
Step V: Formation of lattice from gaseous ions:

Li+(g) + F(g) - LiF(s)
Latticeenergy= -1045 kJ
Overall:
19. The electron affinity can BEST be described as:
Li(s) +1 F2(g) -> LiF(s)
AHreaction = -626 kJ
A. the energy associated with the excitation of an

electron.
The total energy of the reaction is found by summing the

five steps of the reaction. The lattice energy can be found
using Equation 1, where Q is charge and r is the distance
B. the energy associated with the de-excitation of an

electron.
C. the energy associated with the loss of an electron.

D. the energy associated with the gain of an electron.
between ions in the lattice:
g _ fc QcationQanion
r
Equation 1
20. Which change results in LESS energy being released in

the overall process?
15. If sodium metal were used instead of lithium metal,

what values would be affected?
A. Using a metal that is easier to sublime than
I. The sublimation energy would increase.
n.
The ionization energy would increase.
DX
A.
B.
C.
D.
The lattice energy would increase.

I only
Ilonly
I and n only
I and m only
lithium
B. Using a halogen that forms a stronger bond as a

diatomic molecule than fluorine.
C. Using a halogen atom with a greater electron

affinity than fluorine
D. Using a cation that can easily lose a second electron
21. What changes would reduce the lattice energy?

I. Substituting a larger cation for a smaller cation
16. Why is only half of the bond dissociation energy used

in Step m?
n. Substituting an anion of less charge for the anion
A. The FF bond is only partially broken.

B. The table value for the bond dissociation energy is
HI. Reducing the cation charge, anion charge, and

distance between ions each by half
double the actual value for the bond dissociation
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and DI only
energy.
C. Because the bond is broken in a heterolytic fashion,

the bond dissociation value is only half of the value
for the homolytic breaking.
D. The breaking of the bond produces two fluorine
D. I, H, andm
atoms, and only one is needed.
170
25. If a reaction that is spontaneous as written lowers the
solution temperature as it proceeds, then the AS for the
The free energy of a reaction depends on the favorability

of the reaction and the position of the equilibrium. Reactions
that spontaneously proceeds in the forward direction are said
to have negative free energy changes. This is defined as a
favorable reaction. The equation below shows the
reaction is:
A. negative at all temperatures.
B. negative at low temperatures and positive at high

temperatures.
C. positive at low temperatures and negative at high
relationship of thefree energy change (AGrx) and mestandard

equilibrium shiftfrom equalpartsproducts and reactants.
temperatures.
D. positive at all temperatures.
AGobserved = AG + RT mQrx
Equation 1
The value for AG* can be found by measuring the AGrx

when one mole of each product and reactant are mixed
26. The AGobserved for a reaction can be found by which of
together in a onelitercontainer. The value for AG is given
the following equations?
by the following equation:
Qrx
A. AGobserved =RTln ÔL
AG* = -RTlnKeq
êq
Equation 2
B. AGobserved =RTln^
The free-energy change can also be found using the
vrx
following equation:
C. AGobserved =Tp e
AGrx = AHrx-TASrx
Equation 3
Keq
D. AGobserved =pêRT
TheAHrx represents theenthalpy change forthereaction,
vAx
which is measured as the heat change (either gained or lost)
during the reaction. The ASrx represents the entropy change

for the reaction, which is measured as the change in
randomness of motion during the reaction.
27. For a reaction where the reaction quotient (Qrx) is
22. Which process is NOT entropically favorable?
greater than the equilibrium constant (Keq), what istrue
A. Distillation of ethanol from octane
about the reaction and AGobserved?
B. Solvation of a salt by water
A. AGobserved > 0; the reaction shifts to the reactant

side to reach equilibrium.
C. Sublimation of iodine solid
B. AGobserved < 'tne reaction shifts to the reactant
D. Diffusion of a pure gas into the air
C. AGobserved > 0;the reaction shifts to the product

D. AGobserved < ' me reaction shifts to the product
23. Which reaction has a AS value > 0?
A. NaCl(s) + H20(1) ^ Na+(aq) + Cl'(aq)

B. PC13(1) + Cl2(g) -^-^ PCl5(s)
C. 2 H2(g) + 02(g) -^=^ 2 H20(1)
D. N2(g) + 02(g) -^P
2 NO(g)
28. The AH for a given reaction is 12.5 kJ/mole. The AS

for the reaction is 25 J/moleK. At what temperature
does theequilibrium constant equal 1.0?

2 4. Addition of a catalyst MOST changes:
A. the free energy of the reaction.

B. the enthalpy of the reaction.
C. the entropy of the reaction.
A.
O'C
B.
227C
C.
327C
D.
500C
D. the rate of the reaction.
171
30. What makes kerosene a better fuel for early rocket

stages than hydrogen gas?
Over the past few decades, several advances have been

made in rocket propulsion systems. These center on the
engineering of the rocket equipment, as well as on advances
A. At standard temperature, kerosene is far denser than

hydrogen, and thus more convenient to store.
B. Kerosene provides more energy per gram than
in the fuels used to propel rockets. The ideal fuel system is

lightweight and capable of providing large sustained bursts of
energy. A perfect fuel system is liquid hydrogen (b.p. 18 K)
mixed with liquid oxygen (b.p. 91 K). Reaction 1 below is
the gas phase combustion reaction of hydrogen and oxygen.
hydrogen.
C. Kerosene burns at a higher temperature.
D. Oxidation of keroseneproduces fewer products.
H2(g) +102(g) -> H20(g); AH0 = -242 -^2
31. Which of the following describes the ideal mixture of

hydrazine and dinitrogen tetraoxide?
mole
Reaction 1, oxidation of hydrogen gas
A.
B.
C.
D.
The oxidation of hydrogen gas has been used in the later

stages of several launches of orbiting space craft, but it is not
used for the initial launch from earth, where greaterenergy is

required.
Reactions 2, 3, and 4 have also been used to
2 : 1 by mass in favor of hydrazine

1 : 1 by mass of hydrazine with N204
3 : 2 by mass in favor of N204
2 : 1 by mass in favor of N204
generate the energy required to move massive projectiles.
Ci2H26(l) + 18i 02(g) -> 12 C02(g) + 13 H20(g)

AH0 =-7513
3 2. Which of the following reactions CANNOT be used to

propel rockets?
kJ
mole
A. C6Hi4(l) + 9i-02(g) -> 6 C02(g) + 7 H20(g)
Reaction 2, oxidation of kerosene
B. N2H4 + lKC104 -> N2 + 2H20 + i-KCl

2 N2H4(1) + N204(g) -> 3 N2(g) + 4 H20(g)
C. Fe + (NH4)2Cr04 ->
AH = -1049-kL
1 Fe203 + H20 + i- Cr203 + 2 NH3
mole
Reaction 3, hydrazine oxidation via dinitrogen tetraoxide
D. H2S04 + 2KOH -> K2S04 + 2 H20
2 Al(s) + 6 NH4C104(s)
-> 1 N02(g) + 6 HCl(g) + 1 Al203(g) + 9 H20(g)

AH = -1216
33. Which of the following is NOT a requirement of a
kJ
rocket fuel?
mole
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reaction 4, Al/(C2H4)n oxidation via NH4CIO4
Thereactions all generate a greatamount of heatby way

of oxidation. By rapidly oxidizing the fuel, a concentrated
stream of energy is produced to lift the rocketand project it
in the determinedpathway.
Highly exothermic combustion reaction

A large heat-to-gram fuel ratio
Gas phase at room temperature
Highly reactive as an oxidant or reductant
34. In the N2H4(1) + N204(g) reaction, what is true?
29. The AHformation of H20(1) is-286 kJ per mole. How

can the difference from the value listed in thepassage be
A.
B.
C.
D.
explained?
A. The condensation of water is endothermic, so the
AHformation for H20(1) is more negative than
N204(g) is a reducing agent.

N2H4(1) loses four electrons per nitrogen.
Nitrogen-nitrogen bonds are broken.
Hydrazine is being oxidized.
AHformation of H20(g).
B. The condensation of water is exothermic, so the
AHformation fr H20(1) is more negative than
3 5. What is the heat per gram value for kerosene?
C. The condensation of water is endothermic, so the
A.
B.
C.
D.
AHformation for H20(1) is less negative than

D. The condensation of water is exothermic, so the
Greater than 75.0 kJ per gram

Greater than 50.0, but less than 75.0 kJ per gram
Greater than 40.0, but less than 50.0 kJ per gram
Less than 40.0 U per gram
AHformation for H20(1) is less negative than

172
37. The difference in the enthalpies of combustion for
xylose (an aldopentose) and ribose (an aldopentose) can
Thermodynamics is the study of energy and its

distribution within a physical or chemical system. One of
the common mathematical practices in thermodynamics is the
coupling of several processes to sum up to an overall
process. For example, the overall enthalpy is the sum of the
individual enthalpies for each reaction. This is known as
Hess's law. In addition to enthalpy, entropy and free energy
can also be determined using Hess's law. The entropy and
free energy change for a reaction is equal to the sum of the
entropy and free energy changes for any set of reactions that
BEST be attributed to:
A. ring strain in the furanose ring.

B. steric repulsion in the furanose ring.
C. the difference in the number of O-H bonds.
D. the difference in the number of C=0 bonds.
38. From the values in Table 1, what can be said about the
sum to the same reaction.
hydrogenation of acetylene (C2H2) to ethylene (C2H4)?
A common application of this procedure is the summing
A. Hydrogenation of acetylene is favorable.

B. Hydrogenation of acetylene is unfavorable.
C. The free energy change for the reaction cannot be
calculated without knowing the enthalpy of
of the heats of formation for each reactant and product to

obtain the heat for the overall reaction, such as the
combustion of a hydrocarbon. By definition, the heat of

formation for an element in its most natural state at 25C is
0 kJ/mole. This is to say that converting an element such as

02(g) into 02(g) (the most stable form of oxygen at room
formation for H2(g).
D. The free energy change for the reaction cannot be
temperature) requires 0 kJ/mole. A small sampling from a

chart of enthalpies of formation is listed below. The chart
calculated without knowing the enthalpy of

combustion for H2(g).
below can be used in conjunction with Hess's law (which is

not one of the laws of thermodynamics) to calculate the
values common to thermodynamics.
Compound
AH(-kL_) AG (-fcL.)
vmole'
C02(g)
C2H2(g)
C2H4(g)
C2H5OH(l)
H20(g)
H20(1)
39. Which of the following is the change in enthalpy for
Vmole/
-393.5
-394.3
+226.8
+209.1
+52.4
+68.3
-277.7
-174.9
-241.8
-228.6
-285.9
-237.2
the formation of chloroethene under standard conditions?

A. AH for the reaction:
2 C(gr) + li H2(g) +1 Cl2(g) -> C2H3Cl(g)

2
B. AH for the reaction:
2 C(gr) + li H2(g) +i Cl2(l) -> C2H3Cl(g)

2
Table 1
The phase of the compound is specified, because the

energies are different for each phase of the compound. The
2 C(d) + li H2(g) +1 Cl2(g) - C2H3Cl(g)

2
difference between the thermodynamic values associated with
2 C(d) + li H2(g) + 1Cl(g) - C2H3Cl(g)

2
formation for all of the reactants from the enthalpy of

formation for all of the products.
40. Which of the following is the change in enthalpy for

the combustion of propene under standard conditions?
A. 3AHfH20 + 2AHfC02-AHfC3H6
36. What is the free energy change for the vaporization of

water under standard conditions?
B. 3 AHfH20 + 3 AHfC02 - AHfC3H6

C. 4 AHfH20 + 3 AHfC02 - AHfC3H6
kJ
mole
D. AHf C3H6 - 3 AHf C02 - 3 AHf H20
kJ
B. -8.6
D. AH for the reaction:
each phase is the thermodynamic value for the phase change

process. The enthalpy of fusion (associated with melting)
can be found by subtracting the enthalpy of formation for the
solid from the enthalpy of formation for the liquid. The
enthalpy fora reaction is found bysubtracting the enthalpy of
A. -44.1
C. AH for the reaction:
mole
kJ
C. +8.6
mole
D. +44.1
kJ
mole
173
41. Given that AHformation for H3CCH3 is -87.4 -^L
mole
how can the AHrx of -271.4 -M- for the following

mole
The enthalpy ofa reaction can be calculated empirically

using data from calorimetry experiments. In the standard
hydrogenation reaction be explained?
procedure, referred to as bomb calorimetry, a known quantity
H2C=CHCH=CH2 + 2 H2 -> H3CCH2CH2CH3
of a compound is burned in a containment vessel surrounded
A. The value for AH^ is more negative than expected,

because thereactant is stabilized byconjugation.
B. The value for AHrx is less negative than expected,

because thereactant is stabilized byconjugation.
C. The value for AH^ ismore negative than expected,
because theproduct is stabilized byconjugation.
D. The value for AHrx Is less negative than expected,

because the product is stabilized by conjugation.
by a liquid with a known heat capacity (usually water). The

heat absorbed by the surroundings is assumed to equal the
heat released by the reaction. This indirectly gives the AH for
the reaction. An error that arises using this method is the
loss of heat to the environment. To avoid this, the liquid is

encased in an insulated container.
Theresults of calorimetry experiments can be combined

to determine the AH for other reactions using Hess's law.
Hess's law states that the AH for a reaction is equal to the
sum ofthe AH values for any series of reactions that sum up

to the overall reaction.
A researcher conducts the following two experiments to

determine the molar heat of formation for magnesium oxide:
Experiment 1
42. Which of the following statements is true about the
heat produced from burning one gram ofethyne and one

gram of ethene in the presence of excess oxygen gas
under standard conditions?
A. 1.0 g C2H2(g) yields more heat than 1.0 g

C2H4(g).
Aresearcher places into an insulated beaker 1.00 kg of0.10

M HCl solution (C = 4.34 J/g-K) at 22C. This beaker is
labeled Beaker 1. 2.43 grams of magnesium metal (24.3

grams/mole) are then added to the solution. A thermometer
calibrated in 0.10*C increments is placed into the beaker.

The temperature at uniform time intervals is recorded in
B. 1.0 g C2H2(g) yields less heat than 1.0 g C2H4(g).

C. 1.0 g C2H2(g) yields as much heat as 1.0 g
Figure 1. Reaction 1 is shown below:
Mg(s) + 2 H+(aq) -> Mg2+(aq) + H2(g)
C2H4(g).
Reaction
D. The amount of heat cannot be calculated without
first knowing the AHformation of oxygen gas.
40.0J
37.5
43. Which of the following is the free energy of
8 35.01
1 32.5
& 30.0
combustion for ethanol (C2HsOH) under standard
conditions?
27.5
A. -1325.3-id-
25.0
mole
22.
B. -1368.3-Mmole
C. -1675.1 -ki_
mole
20
40
60
80 100 120 140 160
Timeafteraddition to Beaker 1 (seconds)
D. -1920.1 M
Figure 1
mole
Experiment 2
A second beaker, identical to that in Experiment 1, is set

up and labeled Beaker 2. 4.03 grams magnesium oxide
(40.3 grams/mole) are then added to the solution.
thermometer calibrated in 0.10C increments is placed into

the beaker. The temperature at uniform time intervals is
recorded in Figure 2. Reaction 2 is shown below:
MgO(s) + 2 H+(aq) - Mg2+(aq) + H20(1)

Reaction 2
174
45. Adding 1.21 grams of Mg(s) into Beaker 1 instead of

2.43 grams would have led to a temperature increase up
to what temperature?
34.0
? 32.0
A. 26C
I 30.0
& 28.0
26.0
B. 30C
C. 38'C
D. 54C
24.0
22.0
20
40
60
80
46. With respect to Experiment 2, what is the molar

enthalpy for the following reaction?
100 120 140 160
MgO(s) + 2 H+(aq) -> Mg2+(aq) + H20(1)
Time after addition to Beaker 2 (seconds)
Figure 2
A<
1.0x4.34x7.5x4.03 kJ
The same researcher conducts the following experiment

to study an endothermic reaction:
B#
1.0x4.34x9.0x4.03 kJ
Experiment 3
A third beaker is filled with 1.00 kg pure water also at
22C and labeled Beaker 3. 5.35 grams ammonium
c#
1.0x4.34x7.5x40.3 kJ
D.
1.0x4.34x9.0x40.3 kJ
40.3
40.3
4.03
chloride (53.5 grams/mole) are then added to the water. A
4.03
mole
mole
mole
mole
thermometer calibrated in 0.10C increments is placed into
the beaker. The temperature at uniform time intervals is

recorded in Figure 3. Reaction 3 is shown below:
4 7. Given that the enthalpy of formation for H20(1) is -286

kJ/mole, what is the enthalpy of formation of MgO(s)?
NH4Cl(s) + H20(1) -> NH4+(aq) + Cl"(aq)
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reaction 3
22.0
U
21.0
20.0
AH(Beaker 1) + AH(Beaker 2) - 286 kJ/mole

AH(Beaker 1) - ^H(Beaker 2) " 286 kJ/mole
AH(Beakerl) + AH(Beaker2)+ 286 kJ/mole
AH(Beaker 1) - AH(Beaker 2) + 286 kJ / mole
I19
48. Which of the following is the gas given off in the

reaction of Beaker 1 after the magnesium metal was
18.01
added?
17.0
A. Carbon dioxide gas

20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160
B. Chlorine gas
C. Water vapor
Figure 3
D. Hydrogen gas
Each graph shows that the thermometer lags for about

thirty seconds, before equilibrating with the solution. To
obtain the highest solution temperature, a line must be
extrapolated through the data points to the y-axis. This is
used to determine the change in temperature, which
ultimately is used to calculate the AH for the reaction.
4 9. In calculations, it can be assumed that the heat capacity
of 0.1 M HCl is equal to that of water. If the heat
capacity of 0.1 M HCl is greater than theheat capacity

of water, how is the calculated value affected?
44. Which of the following statements is a valid conclusion
A. The calculated AH is too small.
from the observations of Beaker 3?
B. The calculated AH is too large.
A.
B.
C.
D.
C. The difference is insignificantcomparedto heat lost
Solvation of NH4CKS) is exothermic.

Solvation of NH4CKS) is endothermic.
Solvation of NH4CKS) is endergonic.
Solvation of NH4CKS) is unfavorable.
to the environment.
D. The reaction rate increases, so the thermometer does

not accurately record the temperature.
175
53. What is the role of the minimum amount of salt water
present in the heat pack?
Heat packs are designed for commercial use to produce

heat rapidly. One of the reactions employed to generate the
A. The salt water absorbs the heat produced by the

reaction, so that the process is adiabatic.
B. The salt water regulates the rate of heat production
as the reaction proceeds, so that the pack does not
raise to a temperature that is too high.
C. The salt water dissolves the iron metal, providing
heat is the oxidation of iron. The reaction is exothermic and,
if controlled, it can produce uniform heat for several hours.

This reaction is shown below as Reaction 1:
4 Fe(s) + 3 02(g) - 2 Fe203(s)

Reaction
AH" = -1652 kJ/mole

1
more surface area.

D. The salt water facilitates the transfer of electrons
The oxidation-reduction reaction employed is the same

reaction observed when iron rusts in moist air. In dry air,
iron does not rust as rapidly. The greater rate of oxidation in
within the reaction.
the presence of water is attributed to the dissolving of oxygen

into water, and the consequential increase in interaction
between oxygen and iron. The presence of ions in the water
increases conductivity, which also escalates the rate of
54. Which of the following graphs represents the

temperature of the heat pack versus time for both finely
powdered iron and less finely powdered iron filings?
Assume that equal masses of iron are present in both
heat packs.
Finely powdered iron
oxidation.
To aid in the transfer of electrons within the heat pack,

the reaction is carried out in aqueous sodium chloride with
sawdust, activated charcoal, and zeolite. To increase the rate
of the reaction, and consequently the production of heat, the
iron is finely powdered. The lifetime of the packet is
Iron filings semi-powdered

B.
indirectly proportional to the degree of powdering of the iron.

5 0. Roughly how many grams of iron should be added to
the pack to produce 1000 kJ of energy?
&
A. Less than 50 grams

B. More than 50 grams but less than 100 grams
C. More than 100 grams but less than 150 grams
D. More than 150 grams
Time
51. How does the weight of the pack compare before and
after opening?
A. It weighs less after opening, because of the loss of
Time
heat.
Time
B. It weighs more after opening, because of the loss of

heat.
C. It weighs less after opening, because of the gain of
55. What is the purpose of placing the packet into a paper

packet inside of a plastic wrapper?
oxygen.
D. It weighs more after opening, because of the gain

of oxygen.
A. The paper allows for the flow of air to carry out the
reaction. It is kept in plastic to prevent oxidation
from the air before it is opened.
B. The paper is impermeable to air, preventing
oxidation of the activated charcoal.
5 2. What can be concluded about the change in entropy and

change in free energy for this reaction at room
C. The paper allows for the flow of air to carry out the
reaction. The plastic prevents iron from vaporizing
out of the packet.
D. The paper is semipermeable to air, allowing only
temperature?
A. AS* > 0 and AGe > 0
B. AS > 0 and AG < 0
the activated charcoal to be oxidized.
C. AS" < 0 and AG* > 0
D. AS" < 0 and AG'< 0
176
57. What liquid could be substituted for water in this
experiment?
The heat released from an exothermic reaction can be
A. Decane b.p. 174.1C, heat capacity 1.44 -^L
determined accurately by carrying the reaction out in a bomb

calorimeter. The bomb calorimeter is comprised of a sealed
B. Diethyl ether b.p. 34.6C, heat capacity 0.70 -aL
lead reaction vessel encased in a water bath. A thermometer
g'C
is used to determine the change in temperature for the
cal
C. Isopropanol b.p. 82.3C, heat capacity 0.96
surrounding circulating water. The heat released from the
gC
reaction is assumed to equal the heat absorbed by the
D. Pentanol b.p. 138.2C, heat capacity 1.33 -^L
calorimeter. A typical steel-walled bomb calorimeter is
g-'C
shown in Figure 1.
Ignition wires
58. Why arethe walls of the bomb made of steel?

A. Steel has a high heat capacity
B. To prevent any change in pressure
Stirrer
Thermometer
C. Rigid walls maintain the volume of the system

D. Reactive with water
59. Why isexcess oxygen gas added tothecontainer?

A. To ensure a complete reaction
Clamp
Surrounding
B. To increase the amount of convection
water
C. To store the heat energy
D. To prevent the formation of C02

Sample and
Ignition coil
60. What ignites the sample?
Figure 1
A. The oxidation of the wire in the ignition coil
The sample is placed in a cup which contains an ignition
B. The heat generated by resistance in the wire of the
coil connected to the ignition wires of a circuit. Possible
ignition coil
errors in the experiment are introduced by igniting the
C. The friction generated by spinning the wire of the
sample, because the amount ofheat generated by resistance in
ignition coil
the ignition coil is notmeasured directly. Excess oxygen gas
D. The reaction of wire vapor with graphite after the
is used in combustion reactions to ensure that oxygen is not
ignition coil sublimes
the limiting reagent. The temperature of the water isrecorded

against time from the start of the reaction until the
calorimeter has cooled back to room temperature.
61. To study a reaction that generates very little heat, what
The exact time at which the reaction starts must be
water. Because the reaction is to be carried out under
change inthe apparatus will NOT help?

A. Using a liquid with a lower heat capacity than water
B. Using more reactant in the bomb
adiabatic conditions, theexperiment is designed in way where
C. Increasing the stir rate
the water temperature rises only a small amount, thus the
D. Using a thermometer with more calibrations
estimated. The final temperature of allof the components in

the calorimeter are assumed to reach the same temperature as
effects of convection and conduction are minimized.

5 6. What is the role of the stirrer in the experiment?
62. What reaction, assuming all reactions are favorable, is

most likely to result ina decrease in temperature?
A. To help to form more stable products so that the

reaction reaches an even more favorable equilibrium
A. Oxidation of a metal by oxygen
B. Toprovide activation energy to initiate the reaction
B. Combustion of a hydrocarbon
C. To lower the pressure and thus push the reaction
C. Precipitation of solute from water
forward
D. Dissolving of solute into aqueous solution
D. To homogenize the heatdistribution throughout the

solution
177
6 5. Which of the following solvation reactions could be

used for a heat compress?
Hot and cold packs are commercially available for both

medical treatment and food storage. These packets rely on the
heat released or absorbed by a chemical reaction. The change
in heat energy is referred to as the enthalpy change for the
reaction. A typical pouch contains an anhydrous salt in one
membrane and water in the other membrane. Rupturing the
A. A reaction breaking weak lattice forces and forming

strong solvent-to-ion interactions
B. A reaction breaking strong lattice forces and

forming strong solvent-to-ion interactions
C. A reaction breaking weak lattice forces and forming
weak solvent-to-ion interactions
wall between the two membranes allows a solution to form,
which results in either heat being absorbed (if solvation is

endothermic) or heat being released (if solvation is
exothermic). It is important that the salts be inert and non
toxic. Two typical reactions are given below:
D. A reaction breaking strong lattice forces and

forming weak solvent-to-ion interactions
6 6. What is the highest temperature reached after 40 grams
CaCl2(s) + H20(1) -> Ca2+(aq) + 2 Cl"(aq)
of CaCl2 are added to 200 mL of water at 20C?
AHsoIvation = - 82.4 kJ/mole

A. 36C
Reaction
B. 56C
NH4N03(s) + H20(1) - NH4+(aq) + N03"(aq)
C. 72C
AHsolvation = +26.9 kJ/mole
D. 92C
Reaction
The increase or drop in temperature can be estimated by

multiplying the moles of salt by the enthalpy (as measured in
67. How can a solution temperatureof 107C be explained

after sodium sulfate is added to water at 50"C?
calories) to determine the energy change, and then dividing

this value by the mL of water (which is approximately the
mass). This estimate is close, because the heat capacity of
A. The solvation reaction is highly exothermic, and

the boiling point of the aqueous solution is greater
than 100Cbecause of boiling point elevation.
B. The solvation reaction is highly exothermic, and
than 100Cbecause of boiling point depression.
C. The solvation reaction is highly endothermic, and
than 100Cbecause of boiling point elevation.
D. The solvation reaction is highly endothermic, and
than 100C because of boiling point depression.
water is defined as 1.00 calorie per degree per gram water. As

the salt dissolves into solution, however, the heat capacity of
the aqueous salt solution increases. For this reason, along
with the decreasing reaction rate over time, the packets show
the greatesttemperature change initially.
Ten gramsof calcium chloride can raise the temperature

of 100 mL of water approximately eighteen degrees. Ten
gramsof ammonium nitratecan lower the temperature of 100
mL of water approximately seven degrees. Once used, the
packets cannoteasily be recycled, because the anhydrous salts
are difficult to regenerate. Alternative salts for heat packs
include magnesium sulfate and sodium sulfate, both of which
68. Which of the following anhydrous salts would MOST

likely be found in a cold pack?
(when anhydrous) are used as dehydrating agents for organic

solvents. Alternativesalts for cold packs include ammonium
A. MgS04
chloride and ammonium iodide.
B. CaS04
63. Which of the following fluids would be BEST for a

generic radiator for a power plant?
C. MgCl2
D. NH4C1
A. Distilled water
B. Saltwater
C. Nitrogen gas
6 9. What is true about the salts used in cold packs?
D. Dehumidified air
A. Lattice forces are strong; solvation is endothermic

and driven by an increased entropy.
B. Lattice forces are weak; solvation is endothermic
64. For a heat pack designed to reach 100'C, the solvation
A. exothermic and rapid.
and driven by an increased entropy.

C. Lattice forces are strong; solvation is exothermic
and driven by an increased enthalpy.
B. exothermic and slow.
D. Lattice forces are weak; solvation is exothermic and
reaction must be:
C. endothermic and rapid.
driven by an increased enthalpy.
D. endothermic and slow.
178
71. The metal with the GREATEST heat capacity is:

A. Metal I.
A two-part experiment is carried out involving four

metals and four liquids. In ExperimentI, 10.0-gram samples
B. Metal H.
of each of the four metals are placed into an insulated heating
C. Metal III.
chamber with uniform heat distribution. The initial
D. Metal IV.
temperature for eachmetal wasrecorded before it was placed

in the heating chamber. After ten minutes in the heating
chamber, the metals were removed and the temperature for
each metal was immediately measured. Table 1 below shows
the initial and final temperature for each metal:
Solid
72. If a metal and a liquid of identical heat capacities were

used in the second experiment, what would the
temperature be oncethesystem reached equilibrium after

the energy was fully transferred? Assume that no heat
Initial Temperature Final Temperature
Metal I
22.0 C
57.0 C
is lost to the environment.
Metal n
22.1 C
81.2 C
A. Less than 25.0'C
Metal m
22.0 C
73.4 C
22.0 C
46.9 C
B. Less than 37.5C, but greater than 25.0C

C. Exactly 37.5C
Metal IV
D. Greater than 37.5C
Table 1
In Experiment II a 10.0-gram cylinder of Metal IV is

heated to exactly 50C from its initial temperature of 25.0C.
73. The heat capacity of Metal IV is less than the heat
capacity of any liquidEXCEPT:
The metal is added to a 40.0-gramsample of unknown liquid

at 25C in an insulated container.
The metal is fully
submerged into the liquid, and the system is allowed to

equilibrate until the two temperatures are equal. The final
temperature of the solution is recorded when the liquid and
A.
B.
C.
D.
Metal IV reachthe same temperature. The temperature of the

outside wall of the insulated container did not increase during
Liquid I
Liquid II
Liquid HI
Liquid IV
the experiment. The experiment is repeated three more times

using a different liquid each time. The results from the four
trials are recorded in Table 2 below:
Solution
74. Had Metal III been used in Experiment II instead of
Final Temperature
Liquid I
Liquid II
Liquid DI
Liquid IV
Metal IV, the final temperatures for the liquids would
28.3C
have been:
29.2'C
A. greater than the temperatures found using Metal IV,
28. rc
because more heat would have been absorbed by the

solution using Metal HI.
30.7C
B. less than the temperatures found using Metal IV,
Table 2
because more heat would have been absorbed by the

solution using Metal III.
The two experiments were repeated an additional four

times each, to minimize any errors that may have arisen
C. greater than the temperatures found using Metal IV,
during the procedure. The numbers listed inboth Table 1and
because the heat capacity for Metal III is less than
Table 2 are the data collected for the first trial only. No
the heat capacity for Metal IV.
significant errors were detected in the subsequent trials, sothe
D. less than the temperatures found using Metal IV,

because the heat capacity for Metal III is less than
data are assumed to be valid.
the heat capacity for Metal IV.
70. To determine the heat capacity for any of the metals,

what else must be known precisely in the first
experiment?
A. The initial temperature of the heating chamber
75. The GREATEST amount of transferable kinetic energy
B. The molecular mass of the metal and the initial
is found in which of the following?
temperature of the heatingchamber

C. The initial temperature of the heating chamberand
the total energy absorbed by the metal
D. The total energy absorbed by the metal
A. MetalIat60'C
B. Metal II at 60C
C. Metal III at 80C
D. Metal IV at 80C
179
76. The relative heatcapacities of the liquids are arranged in
which of the following sequences?
The focus of the basic design of the one-cylinder engine

are a piston and a counterweight, placedon a cyclic crank in
such a way that the maximum potential energy of the
counterweight occurs when the piston is fully extended. The
a . m>i>n>rv
b. iv>n>i>ra
rv>m>n>i
d. i>n>m>iv
extension of the piston turns the crank 180, and the descent
of the counterweight turns the crank the second 180 of the
cycle.
Drawn below is a diagram of a basic one-cylinder engine.

7 7. Had the temperature of the outside wall of the container
increased, how would the results have bee affected?
A. The observed final temperaturewould be lower than

expected, and the calculated heat capacity of the
liquid would be too high.
B. The observed final temperature would be lower than
expected, and the calculated heat capacity of the
solid would be too high.
The boiler, when rapidly heated, creates a flow of steam that

forces the piston upward. Once the piston is fully extended,
the intakevalve is closed and the exhaust valve is opened so

that the counterweight can fall with less resistance. The
steam from the piston is cooled and condensed in the
condenser. The water is then pumped from the condenserto
the boiler. A pump must be used because of the pressure

difference between the boilerandcondenser. Figure 1 shows
a basic single-piston engine.
C. The observed final temperature would be higher

than expected, and the calculated heat capacity of
the liquid would be too high.
D. The observed final temperature would be higher

than expected, and the calculated heat capacity of
Counterweight
Crankshaft
the solid would be too high.
Exhaust valve
Intake valve
./-
78. Which of the following relationships represents the

ratio of the heat capacity of the liquid to the heat
capacity of the solid in Experiment n?
A.
Miquid _ . KY\\<\u\d
Csolid
B.
D.
Condenser
Boiler
Miquid _ \ ^\\q\i\d
csolid
C.
AT^d
4 ATS0Hd
Figure 1
Miquid _ ^ ATsoiid
Csolid
ATijquJd
The one-piston engine is perhaps best recognized as the

steam engine that has moved large trains and electrical
generators for years. The point at which the rod connects the
Miquid _i ATsoijd
csolid
Water pump
4 ATijquJd
top of the piston to the crank is linked to the top of the

piston by a hinge. The rod must be able to rock back and
forth as the piston ascends and descends. The counterweight

is not exactly out of phase with the piston but is slightly
offset to ensure that the crank turns in only one direction.
79. Which of the following valves is a one-way valve that
allows flow from left to right?
180
80. If a cooling fan were added to the system, where would

be the BEST place for it?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8 4. Water is chosen for which of the following reasons?

A. Water has a high heat capacity in the liquid phase.
B. Water has a high heat capacity in the gas phase.
Adjacent to the boiler

Adjacent to the crankshaft
Adjacent to the condenser
Inside of the piston
C. Water can sublime and condense at the temperatures

of the engine.
D. Water can vaporize and condense at the temperatures
of the engine.
81. To raise the piston, what must be true about the two
valves in the engine?
A. Both the intake and exhaust valves must be open.
8 5. What would make this engine MOST efficient?
B. Both the intake and exhaust valves must be closed.
A. If no heat were emitted from it
C. The intake valve must be open, and the exhaust
B. If heat radiated evenly throughout the engine
valve must be closed.
C. If heat radiated more from the condenser than from
D. The intake valve must be closed, and the exhaust
the piston
D. If heat radiated more from the boiler than the piston
valve must be open.
82. When the counterweight is at its lowest point on the

crankshaft, the piston is not completely compressed.
What is the reason for this?
A. Not all of the steam can escape rapidly enough to
compress the piston completely. The residual

steam offers too much resistance for full descent.
B. All of the gas escapes, so to compress the piston

completely, steam must be pumped back into the
chamber.
C. The exhaust valve is situated too high on the

chamber wall.
D. The intake valve is situated too low on the chamber

wall.
83. Which of the following statements BEST describes the

flow of heat in the system?
A. Heat is added at the condenser and removed at the
piston.
B. Heat is added at the boiler and removed at the
piston.
C. Heat is added at the piston and removed at the

condenser.
D. Heat is added at the boiler and removed at the

condenser.
181
8 7. For the diagram in Figure 2, the full cycle shows:
The diagram shown in Figure 1 below is a simplified

representation of a Carnot engine. The diagram shown in
Figure 2 below is a simplified representation of a Carnot heat
pump. By definition, the change in energy for the system
A. AE > 0; work in > work out

B. AE < 0; work in < work out
C. AE = 0; work in > work out
D. AE = 0; work in < work out
can be calculated as the sum of work and heat, as shown in
Equation 1.
88. If AE = 0 for the system, and the work for the system is
AE = q + w
positive, then which of the following is true?
Equation 1
A. Heat (q) is negative for both the system and the
where q is heat and w is work (found by w = -PAV for the

system). The actual operationsof an engine and refrigerator
(heat pump) are not accurately represented by the diagrams;
but because the overall pathway between two points can be
calculated by any combination of reversible pathways that
sum to the overall pathway, it is possible to calculate the
values for the Carnot engine and heat pump from these
diagrams.
surroundings.
B. Heat (q) is positive for both the system and the

surroundings.
C. Heat (q) is positive for the system and negative for

the surroundings.
D. Heat (q) is negative for the system and positive for

the surroundings.
89. After a hand pump has been operating, the shaft is

warm and the tip of the needle is cool. This is because:
A. air is compressed in the shaft of the pump, and it

expands as it enters the needle tip.
B. air is compressed in the shaft of the pump, and it
expands as it leaves the needle tip.
C. air expands in the shaft of the pump, and it is

compressed as it enters the needle tip.
D. air expands in the shaft of the pump, and it is
compressed as it leaves the needle tip.
Volume-
Figure 1
90. From point a to point c in Figure 1, what is true?

A. The gas expands, and wsvstem > 0.
B. The gas expands, and wsvstem < 0.
C. The gas compresses, and wsvstem > 0.
D. The gas compresses, and wsvstem < 0.
91. An efficient engine would have which of the following?

A. A high exhaust temperature and many points where
energy is transferred
Volume
B. A low exhaust temperature and many points where
Figure 2
The arrow between any two adjacent letters refers to a

step in the overall process. Each step can be treated as
C. A high exhaust temperature and few points where
independent or in combination with adjacent steps for
D. A low exhaust temperature and few points where
calculation purposes.
86. Which diagram from thepassage represents anengine?
92. The arrow from point b to point c in Figure 1
A. The diagram in Figure 1, because work flows into

the system and heat flows out of the system.
B. The diagram in Figure 1, because work flows out
represents:
A.
B.
C.
D.
of the system and heat flows into the system.

C. The diagram in Figure 2, because work flows into
the system and heat flows out of the system.
D. The diagram in Figure 2, because work flows out
a pure work step.

a pure heat step.
a step with both heat and work, where AE > 0.
a step with both heat and work, where AE < 0.
of the systemand heat flows into the system.
182
9 9. Expansion of a gas is:
Questions 93-100 are NOT based

on a descriptive passage
A.
B.
C.
D.
93. The fact that, as order is gained by a system, its

surroundings are losing order is a consequence of which
of the following?
A. The First Law of Thermodynamics
B. The Second Law of Thermodynamics
C. The Third Law of Thermodynamics
exothermic and entropically favorable.

endothermic and entropically favorable.
exothermic and entropically unfavorable.
endothermic and entropically unfavorable.
100. Which of the following relationships may be TRUE?
I. Vaporization absorbs more heat than fusion.
D. The Rutherford rules
n. More heat is released during sublimation than

condensation.
HI. When a liquid freezes, the environment gets
94. What is the final temperature after 32 mL H2O at

36.0C is mixed with 96 mL H2O at 64.0C?
warmer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
A. 57.0'C
B. 54.7C
C. 51.3'C
I only
II only
I and in only
II and m only
D. 50.0eC
9 5. How much work is done on a system when an ideal gas
is expanded adiabatically from 0.4 liters to 2.4 liters

under a constant pressure of 950.0 torr?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.00 liter-atmospheres
2.50 liter-atmospheres
-2.50 liter-atmospheres
-5.00 liter-atmospheres
96. If PAV = +24.4 kJ and q = 22.2 kJ, then AE is equal to

which of the following values?
"Bio. genera!, organic, physical: do all lhal you can do!"
A. -46.6 kJ
B. -2.2 kJ
C. 2.2 kJ
D. 46.6 U
97. If AH is positive and AS is positive, then AG is which

of the following?
A. Positive at all temperatures
B. Negative at all temperatures

C. Zero at all temperatures
D. Can be zero, positive, or negative, depending on
the temperature.
2.
3. D
7. D
8. C
11. D
12. C
16. D
21. D
17. A
13. B
18. D
D
9. D
14. C
19. D
22. A
23. A
24. D
26. A
31. C
36. C
27. A
32. D
37. B
28. B
33. C
38. A
34. D
39. A
41. B
42. B
43. A
46. D
51. D
47. B
48. D
52. D
57. C
62. D
53. D
56. D
98. AS for a gas-to-solid phase change is always:
61. C
66. B
A. positive at all temperatures and pressures.

B. negative at all temperatures and pressures.
71.
76.
81.
86.
C. zero at all temperatures and pressures.

D. can be zero, positive, or negative, depending on the
temperature.
1. A
6. A
67. A
72. B
77. A
82. A
87. C
92. B
97. D
91. D
96. B
183
58.
63. B
68. D
73. D
78. D
83. D
88. D
93. B
98. B
4.
29. B
44. B
49. A
54. C
59.
64. A
69. A
74. D
79. A
84. D
89. B
94. A
99. B
5. B
10. A
15. A
20. B
25. D
30. A
35. C
40. B
45. B
50.
55.
60.
65.
70.
C
A
B
A
75. D
80. C
85. A
90. B
95. C
100. C
NOW THAT WASN'T SO BAD!
Thermochemistry Passages Answers

Energy Diagrams
Choice A is correct. In Reaction 1, for both the thermodynamic and kinetic pathway, the larger activation
energy (higher energy transition state) is associated with the first step of the two-step reaction. The greater
the activation energy, the slower the step. The slowest step is the rate-determining step, so the transition
state of highest energy corresponds to the rate-determining step. The first step is rate-determining in Reaction
1. The correct answer is choice A.
Choice C is correct. Tlie value of the free energy change (AG) is found from the equation AG = AH - TAS. The
question states that AS is a positive value, and given that T is measured in kelvins, it too must be a positive
number. This means that as the temperature increases, the value ofAG decreases (because TAS is increasing).
This eliminates choices Aand B. Using a second equation, AG = RT In (Qrx/Keq), it can be seen that as AG
decreases, the Qrx-to-Keq ratio decreases, so the Keq-to-Qrx ratio increases. The best answer is choice C.
If you didn't recall the second equation above, you could have also used the equation AG = AG0 + RT In Qrx,
where AG0 =- RT In Keq. The standard free energy change (AG0) and the equilibrium constant (Keq) are related
according to AG0 =- RT In Keq. As AG0 decreases, the value of AG decreases and the value of Keq increases, so
consequently the Keq-to-Qrx ratio increases.
Choice D is correct. Both Pathway Xand Pathway Ybegin at the same point (implying that the reactants are
the same). This means that only the endpoint of the two pathways must be compared to answer this question.
The endpoint of Pathway Yis lower than the endpoint of Pathway X, so more energy is released from Pathway
Ythan Pathway X. This eliminates choices A and C. Because the endpoint of Pathway X is lower than the
starting point, the enthalpy change is negative (it is an exothermic reaction). This makes choice D the best
answer choice.
Choice D is correct. At higher temperatures, the thermodynamic pathway is preferable, because it yields the
greatest amount of heat. At lower temperatures, the reaction is forced to go by the lower energy transition
state. Pathway Y is the thermodynamic pathway, because it produces more energy than Pathway X. At
higher temperatures, Pathway Y is preferred, so choice D is the best answer.
Choice B is correct. Because the second transition state (apex in the graph) is ofhigher energy than the first
transition state, the second step of the reaction is the rate-determining step in the reaction. This eliminates
choices A and C. The intermediate occurs at the nadir (low point) between the two transition states (between
the first and second steps). If the second step is the rate-determining step, then the intermediate is allowed to
build up itsconcentration. This is referred to asbottle-necking ofthe intermediate. The best answer ischoice B.
6.
Choice A is correct. As the temperature is increased, more of Product Yis formed, and therefore less of Product X
is formed. This eliminates choices B and D, which both show increases in Product X and decreases in Product Y.
Tlie sum ofProduct XandProduct Ymust always be 100%, so choice C is not possible (the sum is less than 100%
at the middle temperatures). The best answer is choice A.
7.
Choice D is correct. Because Reaction 1has the endpoint of the energy curve lower than the starting point, it is
exothermic. This means that the value of the enthalpy change (AH) is negative. This eliminates choices A
and B. Because the reaction is less favorable as the temperature increases, AG must be increasing with the
temperature. The equation for the free energy change (AG) is AG = AH - TAS. In order for AG to increase with
temperature, the TAS term must be negative. The temperature is measured on the Kelvin scale, so it is always
positive. Only the entropy change (AS) can be negative. This makes choice D the best choice.
8.
Bond Energies
Choice C is correct. This question is a "read the chart" question. At 146 kj per mole, the OO bond is the
weakest. Even if you didn't remember what diethyl peroxide was, you could have matched the answer choices
to the values in the table. Pick C.
184
Section VIII Detailed Explanations
9.
Choice D is correct. The energy of the second rc-bond in N=N can be approximated by subtracting the bond
energy of a nitrogen double bond from the bond energy of a nitrogen triple bond. Although the effects of the
closer nuclei (associated with the shorter triple bond) may include strengthening of the sigma bond, for this
question it is best to assume that the change in energy between the double and triple bond is due entirely to the
new (second) rc-bond. The energy difference is 941 - 418 = 523. The best answer is choice D.
10.
Choice A is correct. Because of the reduced p-character in the sp^ orbital compared to the sp3 orbital, an sp^
orbital is shorter and more electronegative than the sp3 orbital. This eliminates choices B and C. The best
answer is choice A, because the bond strength is more associated with bond length than the bond polarity.
Choice D is a true statement, but not the best answer.
11.
Choice D is correct. The bonds broken are both relatively weak (154 and 432), while the bonds formed are both
relatively strong (565 each). The heat released is greater than 500 kj per mole (586 - 1130), which makes the
reaction highly exothermic. The best answer is choice D.
12.
Choice C is correct. The energy trend of the sulfur-halide bonds is not a clear trend. The strongest halide bond
to sulfur is with iodine (the largest halide), but because of the weak bond between sulfur and bromine, a trend in
size cannot be drawn. This eliminates choice A. The most electronegative halide bond to sulfur listed is with
chlorine, but because this is the second strongest bond to sulfur and the weak bond between sulfur and bromine, a
trend in size cannot be drawn. This eliminates choice B. The halide with the greatest electron affinity is
chlorine, so as with electronegativity, a trend in size cannot be drawn. This eliminates choice D. The best
conclusion that can be drawn is that the bond strength depends on two opposing factors, which would explain
why bromine has the lowest bond energy. Based on halogen size, the relative strength order would be: SCI >
SBr > SI. Based on polarizability of the halogen, the relative strength order would be: SI > SBr > S
CI. The actual order is SI = SCI > SBr, so both effects must be involved. The best answer is choice C.
13.
Choice B is correct. A BrF bond would be stronger than a BrCI bond, so the bond energy is greater than 218
kj/mole. This eliminates choices C and D. A BrF bond would be weaker than a CIF bond, so the bond
energy is less than 253 kj/mole. This eliminates choice A. The only choice that fits in the energy range is B.
14.
Choice C is correct. As a general rule, shorter bonds are stronger than longer bonds, because the overlap of
orbitals allows for the electrons to be shared between nuclei most readily. This makes choice A a false
statement. According to periodic trends, chlorine is both less electronegative than fluorine and larger than
fluorine. This eliminates choices B and D. The weakness of the FF bond can be attributed to the repulsion of
the nuclei of the two fluorine atoms. As the fluorine atoms get close enough to form a bond, the two +9 nuclei
begin to repel. The repulsion results in the overall weakening of the bond. The best answer is choice C.
Born-Haber Cycle
Passage HI (Questions 15 - 21)
15.
Choice A is correct. Because sodium metal is heavier than lithium metal, the energy required to sublime
sodium is greater than the energy required to sublime lithium. This makes statement I true. As a column in the
periodic table is descended, the ionization energy of the element decreases, so the first ionization energy of
lithium is greater than the first ionization energy of sodium. This makes statement II a false statement. The
atomic radius of sodium cation is larger than the atomic radius of lithium cation, thus the lattice energy of the
sodium salt involves a larger r value in the denominator. The lattice energy is decreased when lithium is
replaced by sodium, so statement III is a false statement. The correct answer is choice A.
16.
Choice D is correct. In the reaction, the FF bond is completely broken (partial breaks are not possible), so
choice A is eliminated. The value for the bond energy for F2 is 154 kj/mole, although the value is not from a
table. Half of the value is used, because only one fluorine atom is needed. The bond is broken in a homolytic
fashion (with each atom receiving one electron), so choices A, B, and C are eliminated and choice D is the best
answer.
17.
Choice A is correct. The lattice energy increases with increasing charge (q) or decreasing radius (r). Magnesium
carries a +2 charge, and oxygen carries a -2 charge, so the greatest lattice energy is associated with MgO. This
eliminates choices C and D. Because Li+ is smaller than Na+ and F" is smaller than CI", the second highest
lattice energy is associated with LiF. This makes choice A the best answer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review d<>
185
18.
Choice D is correct. If calcium metal is used in lieu of lithium metal, the ionization energy changes, because
calcium forms a dication, which requires two ionizations. The total ionization energy for calcium is a sum of
the first and second ionization energies. As a note, the extra energy invested in the ionization is recovered by
the doubling of the lattice energy. This is because the ionization energy doubles when the cation charge
doubles from +1 to +2. The best answer is choice D.
19.
Choice D is correct. Electron affinity involves the gaining of a free electron by a neutral atom. The excitation
and relaxation (de-excitation) involve the absorption and emission of a photon when an electron moves between
the ground state and an excited state. The charge of the atom does not change in either process. The ionization
energy is associated with the loss of an electron, while the electron affinity is associated with the gain of an
electron. The best answer is choice D.
20.
Choice B is correct. Using a metal that is easier to sublime than lithium requires the input of less energy, so the
overall process yields more energy. Choice A is consequently eliminated. Using a halogen that forms a stronger
covalent bond than fluorine requires the input of more energy, so the overall process yields less energy. This
makes choice B the best answer. Using a halogen with a greater electron affinity than fluorine (which is not
physically possible, given that fluorine has the highest electron affinity of the halogens) releases more
energy, so the overall process yields more energy. Choice C is consequently eliminated. Using a metal that can
easily lose a second electron requires more ionization energy, but double the amount of energy is released in the
lattice formation, so the overall process yields more energy. Choice D is also eliminated.
21.
Choice D is correct. Substituting a larger cation for a smaller cation increases the distance between ions. This
reduces the lattice energy, because the denominator has been increased. This makes statement I true.
Substituting an anion of lesser charge for the current anion in the salt reduces the lattice energy, because the
numerator has been decreased. This makes statement II true. Cutting the cation and anion charges by one-half
each reduces the lattice energy to one-fourth its original value, because the numerator has been decreased by a
factor of four. Cutting the internuclear distance by one-half doubles the lattice energy, because the
denominator has been decreased by a factor of two. Overall, the effect of cutting all three values in half is
that the lattice energy decreases by a factor of two, making statement III true. The best answer is choice D.
22.
Free-Energy Calculation
Choice A is correct. In distillation, a mixture is converted into pure components. Distillation results in more
order for the system, which is entropically unfavorable. This makes choice A a correct answer. The conversion
from a solid salt into two ions in solution is entropically favorable, because the system becomes more random.
This eliminates choices B. In sublimation, a solid is converted into a gas, which increases the randomness, so
the process is entropically favorable. This eliminates choice C. Diffusion of a gas into the air results in the
loss of a pure component into a mixture, which increases the randomness. This is entropically favorable, so
choice D is eliminated.
23.
Choice A is correct. A value of AS > 0 results from an increase in disorder. In choices B and C, the number of
molecules decreases from reactant to product, so both can be eliminated. In choice D, the number of molecules
remains the same, so choice D can be eliminated. In choice A, the salt becomes more random as it dissociates
into ions. Pick A if you desire the jubilation and enjoyment associated with correct answers.
24.
Choice D is correct. Addition of a catalyst does not affect the thermodynamic values of a reaction, such as free
energy (AG), enthalpy (AH), and entropy (AS). A catalyst stabilizes the transition state, lowering the
activation energy for a reaction. This affects only the reaction rate and makes the best answer choice D.
25.
Choice D is correct. Because the reaction is spontaneous as written, the change in free energy (AG) for the
reaction is negative. Because the solution temperature lowers as the reaction proceeds, the reaction is
endothermic. This makes the value of AH positive. Rearranging Equation 3 yields: TAS = AH - AG; so if AH is
positive, and AG is negative, then the value of AS must be positive at all temperatures, making choice D the
best answer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review ,
186
26.
Choice A is correct. This question is answered by combining Equations 1 and 2 into one composite equation as
follows:
AG0bserved = AG0 + RT In Q^
AGobserved =-RT In Keq +RT In Qrx = RT In Qrx - RT In Keq

AGobserved = RT (In Qrx - In Keq) = RT In Qrx
K eq
The best answer is choice A.
27.
Choice A is correct. When the reaction quotient is greater than the equilibrium constant, too many products are
present, so the reaction must shift to the reactant side in order to reach equilibrium. This eliminates choices C
and D. When the reaction spontaneously shifts in the reverse direction (to the reactants), it is said to be
positive, so the best answer is choice A.
28.
Choice B is correct. According to Equation 2, AG = -RT In Keq, the value of AG must be zero for the equilibrium
constant to be equal to 1.0, because the natural log of 1 is 0. Equation 3, AG = AH - TAS, must be used to determine
the temperature at which AG is zero.
AG = AH - T AS = 0 .". by adding TAS to both sides of the equation, AH = T AS
Dividing both sides of the equation by AS leads to the relationship: T =
A H
AS
AH =
AS
12,500-i-
19qm
mole _ 12'50U K = 2500 K = 500 K
or
25
25
mole-K
Do not blindly choose answer choice D, however, because the answers are in Celsius. The temperature must be
converted from Kelvin into Celsius. Subtracting 273 from the Kelvin value yields 500 K = 227C, choice B.
Rocket Fuels
29.
Choice B is correct. The value for the water reaction in the passage involves the formation of water vapor. In
the question, the value is listed for the formation of water liquid. Conversion from vapor to liquid is
exothermic, so the formation of water liquid yields more heat energy than the formation of water vapor. The
best answer is choice B.
30.
Choice A is correct. The first stage of a rocket requires that the greatest total amount of heat be given off,
because the first stage is responsible for liftoff and the acceleration away from the earth's gravitational pull.
The fuel must provide a greatamount of heat, while not occupying too muchvolume (the storage space must be
minimized). It is ideal if the fuel provides a large amount of heat per gram as it burns, making the fuel most
efficient without significantly increasing the mass of the rocket. Hydrogen would be ideal, because it is so
light (except for the fact that it is a gas at nearly all temperatures). At room temperature, kerosene is a liquid,
while hydrogen is a gas. Because liquids are denser, they are far easier to store conveniently and efficiently.
This makes choice A a good choice. Choice B should be eliminated, because kerosene provides less energy per
gram than hydrogen. This is to say that 242 divided by 2 is greater than 7513 divided by 170. Whether
kerosene burns hotter than hydrogen or not should have no bearing on its use as a rocket fuel. The hotter it
burns, the more heat that is wasted by loss to the environment. Choice C can be eliminated. Oxidation of
kerosene produces both water and carbon dioxide, which is more products than hydrogen gas (which produces
only water). The answer choice D is a wrong statement.
31.
Choice C is correct. From the balanced equation, two moles of hydrazine are required for every one mole of
dinitrogen tetraoxide. Hydrazine weighs 32 grams per mole, while dinitrogen tetraoxide has a molecular mass
of92 grams per mole. This means that for 64 grams ofhydrazine, 92 grams of dinitrogen tetraoxide are required.
This means that roughly one and one-half times as many grams of dinitrogen tetraoxide are needed as
hydrazine. This is answer choice C.
187
32.
Choice D is correct. The first three reactions are all oxidation-reduction reactions that mimic the sample
reactions from the passage. The last reaction is an acid-base reaction, and it does not produce sufficient energy
to propel a rocket. The correct answer choice is answer D. Although the passage does not blatantly state that
an oxidation-reduction reaction should be used, it can be inferred from the sample reactions.
33.
Choice C is correct. From the sample reactions in the passage, it can be seen that rocket fuels engage in highly
exothermic combustion reactions, provide a large amount of heat per gram, and are highly reactive in
oxidation-reduction reactions. This makes statements A, B, and D valid. A rocket fuel is better if it is a solid or
liquid at room temperature, rather than a gas, so it can be stored (packed) more efficiently. This means that
choice C is not a requirement of a rocket fuel. You must pick C, you must, you must, you must!
34.
Choice D is correct. Dinitrogen tetraoxide gets reduced in the reaction, so it is the oxidizing agent in the
reaction. Statement A can therefore be eliminated. Hydrazine is oxidized into nitrogen gas. The oxidation
state of nitrogen changes from -2 to 0. This implies that the entire compound loses four electrons (two per
nitrogen), not that each nitrogen loses four electrons. Choice Bcan therefore be eliminated. Because the final
product has a nitrogen-nitrogen triple bond,it can be concluded that nitrogen-nitrogen bonds are formed during
the course of the reaction, and not broken. This eliminates choice C. Hydrazine is losing hydrogens, so it is
being oxidized. This makes choice D the best answer.
35.
Choice C is correct. The heat per gram for kerosene can be found by dividing 7513 kj per mole by 170 grams per
mole. The value falls in the range of 40 to 50 kj per gram. The math is set up as follows:
50 = 8500 > 7513 > 6800 = 40
170 ' 170 ' 170
Because the range is between 40 and 50 kj per mole, the best answer is choice C.
Enthalpies and Sugars
36.
Choice C is correct. Vaporization is a change in the physical state of matter, whereby a liquid evaporates to
form a gas. Writing out the reaction for the vaporization of water and using values Table 1 yields:
H2OG) -> H20(g)

AGformation H20(1) = "237.2
AGformation H20(g) = "228.6
AGformation of products - AGformation of reactants = AGrx => -228.6 - (-237.2) = + 8.6 kj per mole, choice C. Energy is
required to vaporize water, so we expect a positive number. A value of 44.1 results from using AH numbers.
37.
Choice B is correct. Both xylose and ribose form five-membered (furanose rings) rings, according to the
information in the question. The five-membered rings are not subject to much ring strain (if they were, fivemembered rings would not be so common), so choice A is eliminated. Both xylose and ribose are aldopentoses, so
they each have one C=0 (in the form of an aldehyde) and four O-H bonds (in the form of hydroxyls on carbons
two through five). This eliminates choices C and D. The only choice left is answer choice B. The repulsion
experienced by the eclipsed hydroxyl groups in the five-membered ring appears in the enthalpy of reaction.
The more repulsion, the less stable the molecule, and thus the greater the enthalpy of reaction (more heat that
is released when the ring steric hindrance is relieved). Using the enthalpy of reaction to determine the
stability of structural features is common in organic chemistry. Using Hess's law with the general chemistry
values does not show the other features that affect a molecule's stability. Many experiments in organic
chemistry focus differences in the enthalpy changes between reactions with similar bond changes.
38.
Choice A is correct. From Table 1, the AG" values of + 209.1 for acetylene (the reactant) and + 68.3 for ethylene
(the product) can be read from the free energy change column. Be sure that you use the values for AG0, and not
AH by mistake. The free energy of formation for H2(g) is 0, because hydrogen gas is a diatomic gas at room
temperature in its natural elemental state. This eliminates choices C and D. For the hydrogenation reaction,
the change in free energy is found by AGformation of products - AGforrnation of reactants- The value AGrx equals
68.3 - 209.1, a negative number. A negative number for AG makes the reaction favorable in the forward
direction, so the best answer is choice A. The hydrogenation reaction is shown below:
1 C2H2(g) + 1 H2(g) -> 1 C2H4(g)
188
39.
Choice A is correct. At standard conditions, carbon exists as graphite, not as diamond, eliminating choice C.
Cl2 and H2 are gases at 25C in their most stable elemental form, so this rules out choice B. Also, chlorine
exists as a diatomic molecule in its most stable form at 25C, so the answer is not choice D. The only answer
choice leftis A, whichis a good thingconsidering it is the correct answer. Be sure that the equation balances.
40.
Choice B is correct. The first thing to do is to balance the combustion reaction:

IC3H6 + 4.502 -> 3H20 + 3CO2
The phases are ignored, because they are not listed in the answer choices. Normally, phase is significant,
because water can be listed as a liquid or a gas.
AHrx =AHformation of products "AHformation of reactants =3AHform h20+3AHform CO2" AHform C3H6
This is choice B. Oxygen gas (O2) is ignored, because its most stable form at 25'C is the diatomic molecule O2,
so its enthalpy of formation is 0.
41.
Choice B is correct. From the values in Table 1, the hydrogenation of one rc-bond (from an alkene to an alkane)
produces a change in enthalpy (AH'hydrogenation) of -139.8 kj per mole. This value is determined from the
following reaction and thermodynamic data:
C2H4(g) +H2(g) -> C2H6(g)
AHform C2H4(g) =+52.4
AHform C2H6(g) =-87.4
AHform H2(g) =0
^^hydrogenation = ^formation ofproducts ~^formationofreactants = (-87.4) - 52.4 = -139.8 I

mole
The reaction in the question involves the hydrogenation of two rc-bonds in butadiene, so a good approximation is
that the change in enthalpy for the complete hydrogenation of butadiene has a value of 2 (-139.8 kj per mole) =
-279.6 kj per mole. The value is given in the question as -271.4 kj per mole, which is less negative than expected.
This eliminates choices A and C. The logic behind the reduction in heat energy released is rooted in either a
increased stability in the reactant or decreased stability in the product. In this case, it is the stability of the
reactant (conjugation) that causes the reduction in heat released. The best answer is choice B.
42.
Choice B is correct. The heat produced for the reaction is calculated using the equation: AHrx = AHproductsAHreactants- Using values from Table 1 (values are in kj per mole), the two AH are calculated as follows:
C2H2
AH:
+226.8
H20
+ 2C02
-285.9
-393.5
AHrx = [(-285.9) +2(-393.5)] - 226.8 = -1299.7 -Mmole
C2H4
AH:
*"
2H20 + 2C02
-285.9
+52.4
-393.5
AH^ =[2(-285.9) +2(-393.5)] - 52.4 =-1411 2-mole
The problem asks for heat per gram, not the heat per mole, so the values must be divided by molecular mass
before comparison to one another.
C2H2 yields 1299.7 k^ wnich is just less than1300 M., which is 50^t
26
26
C2H| yields 1ML2 M., which isjust over 14Q0 KL, which is50 &28
28
Thus, C2H2 produces just under 50 kj per gram of heat, while C2H4 produces a little more than 50 kj per gram of
heat, making answer B the correct choice.
43.
Choice A is correct. The free energy produced for the reaction is calculated using the equation: AGrx =
AGproducts "A(jreactants- Using values from Table 1 (values are in kj per mole), AG is calculated as follows:
C2H5OH
AG:
-174.9
3H20
-237.2
2C02
-394.3
AGrx = [3 (-237.2) + 2 (-394.3)] - (-174.9) -mole
= (-711.6) + (-788.6) +174.9 =-1325.3 J mole
Choice A is the best answer.
189
Section VID Detailed Explanations
Salt-Solution Calorimetry Experiment

44.
Choice B is correct. The initial temperature of the water in Beaker 3 before the NH4CI salt is added to the
water is 22C. In Figure 3, the temperature decreases to a value less than 22C (extrapolation shows that the
temperature is about 17.5 C). Once the temperature reaches its lowest point, it slowly climbs up until it levels
off at ambient temperature (22C). This means that the reaction is absorbing heat from the solution during the
dissociation of NH4CI. Because heat is being absorbed during the solvation reaction, the solvation of NH4CI
must be an endothermic reaction. The passage also states that the reaction is endothermic. To score big, you
should pick B.
45.
Choice B is correct. Adding 1.21 grams of Mg(s), instead of 2.43 grams as were added in Experiment 2, results in
only half of the heat being released that was released in Experiment 2. The temperature increase in Beaker 2
(using 2.43 grams) was 16C, so the temperature increase using 1.21 grams should be about 8C. This, when
added to the starting temperature of 22C, would yield a final temperature of 30C. Choice B is the best
answer, for those of you interested in best answers.
46.
Choice D is correct. To solve for the molar enthalpy of this reaction, you must first solve for the heat of
reaction for MgO in terms of kj per gram (using the data from Beaker 2), and then convert from kj per gram MgO
to kj per mole MgO. To determine the heat released during the reaction, we use the equation E = mCAT, where
m equals 1.0 kg, C = 4.34 J per g-K, and AT is extrapolated from the graph. To extrapolate, you draw a straight
line through the data points to the time = 0 axis, in order to estimate the highest temperature of the solution.
U
32.0-
30.0-
-G...
& 28.0"
Ej
e5 26.0H
Q-.
O-
">-.
-.
> AT = +9.0C
..<:
0-
24.022.0-
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
As extrapolated from the graph in Figure 2 (shown above), the apex temperature is roughly 31C, so the value
of AT is roughly 9C. The heat released when 4.03 grams MgO was added to Beaker 2 is calculated as follows:
E = 1.0 kg x4.34-Lx 9.0 K = 4.34 x9kj = 43.40 -4.34kJ = 39.06 kj

g-K
The molecular mass of MgO is given in the passage as 40.3 grams/mole, so 4.03 grams is exactly 0.10 moles MgO.
The molar enthalpy is calculated by dividing the heat of the reaction by the moles of reactant (MgO, in this
case). The calculation is set up as follows:
1.0 x 4.34 x 9.0 kT

4.03
gram
x 4Q 3 grams _ 1.0 x 4.34 x 9.0 x 40.3 kT

' ' moie
4.03
mole
Choice D is correct. Because the temperature increase during the reaction, heat is given off by the reaction, so
the reaction is an exothermic reaction. Because the reaction is exothermic, the sign of the enthalpy change
(AH) is negative. All of the answer choices are negative, so this doesn't help in eliminating wrong answers.
190
47.
Choice B is correct. Using Hess's law, we know that the molar heat of reaction is obtained from the heats of
reaction for any series of reactions that sum to the overall reaction. For this experiment, the two reactions
along with the formation of water are as follows:
Mg2+(aq) + H2(g)
Mg(s) + 2H+(aq)
AH = heat released from Beaker 1 x 10 = - 668.8 -Mmole
Mg2+(aq) + H20(l) AH = heat released from Beaker 2 x 10 = - 376.2 kJ
MgO(s) + 2H+(aq)
mole
H2(g) +|Q2(g) "
H20(1)
AHformation - '286
kj
mole
The overall reaction is: Mg(s) + i-02(g)
MgO(s)
We must reverse the second reaction and then sum the AH values for the three component reactions above, in
order to obtain the overall reaction. This means that the AHformation (MgO) = AH(Beaker 1) - AH(Beaker 2)" 286
kj per mole. The best answer is choice B. Tlie actual value is -669 + 391 - 286 = -564.
48.
Choice D is correct. The reaction of a metal with hydronium results in the oxidation of the metal by the H+
ions. The reaction is as follows: Mg(s) + 2 H+(aq) ->Mg2+(aq) + H2(g), H2 gas is given off, so choice D is best.
49.
Choice A is correct. If the heat capacity (C) is greater for the HCl solution than water, then the value for C
(4.18 for water) plugged into E = mCAT is too small. The calculated value is therefore too small. This makes
choice A correct. An increased heat capacity does not allow the temperature to increase as much, which lowers
the container temperature and actually decreases the reaction rate. This makes choice D invalid.
50.
Heat Pack
Choice C is correct. According to the information for Reaction 1, four moles of iron produce 1652 kj of heat. This
means that 2 moles of iron produce 826 kj, and 3 moles of iron produce 1239 kj. In order to produce 1000 kj of
energy, just over two but less than three moles of iron are needed. Two and one-half moles of iron produce 826 kj
+ 207 kj, which is greater than 1000 kj. This means that the amount of iron needed is less than 2.5 moles of iron.
Iron weighs 55.85 grams per mole, so the mass needed to produce 1000 kj of heat is greater than 111.7grams (the
mass of two moles) and less than 139.62 grams (the mass of two and one-half moles of iron). The best answer is
choice C.
51.
Choice D is correct. The pack initially contains iron and the solution in which the reaction transpires. Once
exposed to the air, oxygen can enter the pores of the paper container and oxidize the iron. Because the product
(Fe203) has gained mass from the environment, the mass after reaction is greater than the initial mass. The
exact amount of mass increase is the mass of the oxygen that has reacted. The best choice is answer D.
52.
Choice D is correct. Because the reaction takes place at room temperature and the iron is oxidized to
completion, it is assumed that the reaction is favorable. This results in a AG0 value less than zero, which
eliminates choices A and C. The reactants are four solids and three gases that go on to form two solids. This is
a loss in entropy by the system, which carries a negative AS. The value of AS" is also less than zero, making
choice D the correct choice.
53.
Choice D is correct. The role of salt water, as mentioned in the passage, is to increase the interaction of oxygen
with iron and to conduct electricity. None of the answer choices addresses the interaction of iron with oxygen.
This means that the role of the salt water of interest to us is to facilitate the flow of electrons.
Salt water
provides the medium through which the electrons may transfer. The best answer to this question is choice D.
Heat is released by the reaction, so the reaction cannot be adiabatic. Choice A is thus eliminated. The salt
water has no role in thermal regulation, because it does not undergo any chemical or physical changes during
the reaction. Choice B is thus eliminated. Iron metal does not dissolve into water, as you perhaps have noticed
when iron structures are able to stand through the rain. Choice C is thus eliminated.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review^
191
54.
Choice C is correct. The finely powdered iron has more surface area, so it reacts at a faster rate than the
filings. This results in more heat being released per period of time. The finely powdered iron consequently
heats up faster and reaches a higher temperature. From this, choices B and D can be eliminated. Given that
equal masses of iron are present in bothheat packs, the finely powdered iron is depleted before the iron filings
are depleted, because the reaction proceeds faster with the powdered iron. This is best illustrated in answer
selection C, where the sudden temperature drop back to the initial temperature indicates that no more heat is
being produced, so the reaction must have stopped.
55.
Choice A is correct. Answer choice A best explains the logic behind the packaging. Because oxygen gas must
enter the packet to react with the iron, the membrane must be porous. Paper is porous, allowing air to flow into
the heat pack. To prevent the packet from oxidizing prematurely, it must not be exposed to air. The plastic
wrapper is impermeable to air, so the pack is stable in the anaerobic environment. The plastic wrapper also
helps to prevent the loss of water due to evaporation.

56.
Bomb Calorimeter
Choice D is correct. Stirring the solution does not increase the thermodynamic values (equilibrium constant,
free energy, and enthalpy), but it does allow the reaction to proceed at a faster rate. Choice A should be
eliminated. The stirring does not provide enough energy to activate the reaction. The energy used to activate
the reaction is provided by the system's heat energy, as measured by the temperature. Choice B is thus
eliminated. The stirring of the solution has no effect on the pressure of the solution, so choice C is eliminated.
The stirring of the solution allows the heat to be distributed uniformly throughout the solution, which makes
choice D the best answer.
57.
Choice C is correct. The liquid substituted must have a heat capacity similar to water and not have a boiling
point that is too low. A low boiling point would build up pressure, as the circulating solution expands and
vaporizes. Isopropanol has a boiling point and heat capacity close to those of water. If the heat capacity is
too high, the AT is too small, and thus the accuracy of the temperature change is decreased. Choice C is best.
58.
Choice C is correct. Whether steel has a high heat capacity or low heat capacity, the effects of both can be
calculated for. The lower the heat capacity, the better, because water can rise to a larger temperature, but it is
a trivial point. By having steel walls, the container does not expand during the reaction, so the volume
remains constant while the pressure changes. This makes choice Bfalse and choice C true. Hopefully, the steel
is not reactive with water; otherwise, the heat change cannot be attributed solely to the reaction. The best
answer (so that the heat capacity at constant volume can be used in calculation) is choice C.
59.
Choice A is correct. The excess oxygen is added to ensure a complete reaction. The amount of heat generated is
measured relative to the mass of the sample (the limiting reagent in the reaction). The oxygen gas increases
convection, but that is not the reason for adding excess oxygen. This is a true, but irrelevant statement. Oxygen
gas stores little to no heat energy, because gases have relatively low heat capacities relative to water. Choice
D is eliminated, because the presence of oxygen results in C02 formation. The best answer is choice A.
60.
Choice B is correct. The sample is ignited by heat emitted from the ignition coil. The question is, "What
generates the heat in the coil?" The coils is connected to a circuit, so it is in fact a resistor. As current passes
through the ignition coil, heat is generated due to resistance of the material in the heating coil. The result is
that the sample is ignited when the resistor temperature is high enough. The best answer is choice B.
61.
Choice C is correct. In determining the temperature change from a reaction that generates very little heat, the
problem is that a small AT results in an error in its determination. By using a liquid with a lower heat capacity
than water, the AT is greater and thus more accurately measured. Choice A is a valid statement. If more
sample (reactant) is used, more heat is generated, so the AT is larger and thus can be measured more accurately.
Choice B is a valid statement. Increasing the stir rate helps the system to distribute the heat uniformly and
more quickly. This does not help the reaction AT to be measured more accurately. A thermometer with more
calibrations would give us a more precise measurement of AT. This makes choice D a valid statement. The best
answer is choice C.
192
62.
Choice D is correct. As a rule, both the oxidation-reduction reaction of a metal with oxygen and the combustion
reaction of a hydrocarbon (which is an oxidation-reduction reaction) are exothermic reactions. They both
result in an increase in temperature of the solution, not a temperature decrease. If the precipitation of a solute
is favorable, then the AG that reaction is negative. In a precipitation reaction, the system becomes more
ordered, so AS is definitely negative. The sign of AH must be negative to make the sign of AG negative, based
on the equation AG = AH -TAS (negative number - T(negative number) = negative number). Dissolving a solute
into solution is the only one of the choices given that can possibly be endothermic, if all of the answer choices
represent favorable reactions. An endothermic reaction results in a temperature drop. The best answer is thus
choice D.

63.
Hot and Cold Compresses
Choice B is correct. Whether the solution is for the radiator of a power plant, or any system designed to absorb
great amounts of heat, the best solution is the one with the greatest heat capacity and greatest contact area
with the heat source. Choices C and D should not be considered, because they are both gases. The addition of
salt to water increases the heat capacity, allowing salt water to absorb more heat per degree increase, and to
reach a higher temperature before boiling. This can be inferred from the passage where it states that the
temperature increase begins to slow, because the heat capacity changes as more salt dissolves. This is why
many power plants use salt water in their circulating radiator system. Cars use a mixture of ethylene glycol in
distilled water. Using an organic compound like ethylene glycol prevents against salt buildup that would occur
if salt water were used, due to the evaporation of water. The best answer is choice B.
64.
Choice A is correct. For a heat pack to reach a temperature greater than room temperature, it must exploit a
reaction that releases heat energy. This describes an exothermic reaction. Because the heat is needed
immediately, rapid reactions are more favorable.
Slow reactions allow more heat to dissipate to the
environment. This combination makes choice A the best answer.
65.
Choice A is correct. To be to use in a heat compress, the reaction must be exothermic. To be exothermic, the
reaction must require minimal energy to break the bonds and obtain a great deal of energy when the new bonds
are formed. In the case of a salt dissolving into water, this would result from weak lattice forces (bonds broken)
and strong solvent to ion interactions (solvation). The best answer is choice A.
66.
Choice B is correct. The passage states that 10 grams of calcium chloride raise 100 mLof water approximately
eighteen degrees from room temperature. This means that forty (40) grams of calcium chloride should increase
200 mL water by 36C. The final temperature is the initial temperature (20C) plus the temperature increase
(36C), resulting in a final temperature of 56C. The actual value is a little less, due to the reaction time being
longer (allowing heat to dissipate to the environment) and the changing heat capacity of the aqueous solution
as the reaction proceeds. The best answer is choice B.
67.
Choice A is correct. For the temperature to increase, the reaction must be exothermic, so choices C and D are
eliminated. The boiling point is greater than that of pure water (100C), so the boiling point must have been
elevated. The best answer is choice A.
68.
Choice D is correct. Sulfate salts are exothermic when they dissolve, so they cannot be used in cold compresses.
This eliminates choices A and B. Ammonium salts are endothermic when they dissolve, so heat is absorbed and
the solution begins to cool. The best answer for an endothermic solvation involves ammonium chloride
(NH4CI). The best answer is choice D. The answer is provided in the last sentence of the passage.
69.
Choice A is correct. Cold packs absorb heat because of a chemical reaction, so the solvation reaction must be
endothermic for cold packs. This causes the temperature to decrease. The favorability of a reaction depends on
the value of AG. If the value of AG is negative, then the reaction is said to be favorable. An endothermic
reaction has a positive value for AH, so the only way that the value of AG can be negative is if the value of AS
is positive (AG = AH - TAS). This automatically means that the salt dissociates because of increased entropy,
not favorable enthalpy. This eliminates choices C and D. The lattice forces are most likely strong, requiring
high energy to break. The more energy required to break the lattice bonds, the more likely that the reaction is
endothermic. The best answer is choice A.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review,
193
Calorimetry Experiment
Passage XI (Questions 70- 78)
70.
Choice D is correct. The heat capacity dependson three values: energy absorbed (E), mass of substance(m), and
the change in temperature (AT). The mass of each metal is known and the change in temperature is known, so
only the heat absorbed, while inside the heating chamber must be known to calculate the heat capacity for
each metal. This makes choice D correct.
71.
Choice D is correct. Heat capacity has the units calories per gram-Kelvin in the standard case. Using the
formula E = mCAT, the heat capacity (C) for each metal sample can be found by dividing the energy absorbed
by the mass of the sample and temperature change for the process. Each metal absorbed the same amount of
heat energy and had an identical mass. The only difference between the metal samples was the change in
temperature observed for the process. Because AT is in the denominator when calculating the heat capacity for
each metal (C = E/m-AT)/ tne greatest heat capacity is associated with the metal that showed the smallest
increase in temperature. According to Table 1, the metal with the smallest final temperature (and therefore
smallest AT) is Metal IV, so pick choice D with great pride and satisfaction.
72.
Choice B is correct. If the heat loss for the liquid and heat gain for the metal were identical (which is true
when the process is adiabatic), then the following mathematical equality holds true:
^heating ofliquid = "^cooling ofmetal
mliquid Qiqirid (Tfinal" Tinit (liquid)) ="mmetal Cmetal (Tfinal "Tinit (metal)) =mmetal Cmetal (Tinit (metal) "Tfinal)
Given that the heat capacities are equal, they can be canceled from each side of the equality:
mliquid GHqtrid (T"ral "Tinit (liquid)) =mmetal ^metal (Tinit (metal) "Tfinal)
miiquid (Tfinal - 25) =mmetal (50 -Tfinal) - 40 (Tfinal -25) =10 (50 -Tfinai) => 4(Tfinal - 25) =(50 -Tfinal)
4 Tfinai-100 = 50-Tfinai .-. 5 Tfinai = 150 .-. Tfinal= 30
The best answer is choice B. This could have been solved intuitively by saying that if the heat capacities for
the liquid and solid are equal, then mixing equal mass quantities of the metal and liquid would lead to a
temperature exactly between the two starting temperatures (the average of 25 and 50 is 37.5). Because there
was excess liquid, the final temperature would be closer to the initial liquid temperature than the initial
metal temperature, which makes it less than 37.5C. The temperature must increase somewhat from the
liquid's initial temperature, so the final temperature is between 25C and 37.5C. The best answer is choice B.
73.
Choice D is correct. If the heat capacity of the liquid and metal are the same, then the final temperature is
30C. Considering that the mass of the liquid is four times the mass of the solid, the difference in the final
temperature (and thus temperature change) can be attributed to different heat capacities. If the final
temperature is greater than 30C, then the heat capacity of the liquid is less than the heat capacity of the
solid. The math is shown below:
^liquid Qiqirid (Tfinal "Tinit (liquid)) =Mmetal Cmetal (Tinit (metal) "Tfinal)
Given that mijqUjd =4xmmetal/tne following substitution and subsequent cancellation can be made:
4xmmetal Qjqujd (Tnnal - Tjnit (liquid)) =mmetal Cmetal (Tinit (metal) - Tfinal)
4QiqUid (Tfinal - 25) =Cmetal (50 - Tfinal)
By cross-dividing (if there is such a mathematical term), we find that:
Tfinal - 25 _ Cmetal A4 x Tfjnal - 25 = Cmetal

50 - Tfjnal 4 x Qjquid
50 ' Tfinal Qiquid
If Tfinal = 30C, then Cmetal =1

Qjquid
If Tfina] > 30C, then Cmetal >1

Qiquid
If Tfinal < 30C, then ^metal <1

Qiquid
This means that any liquid that shows a final temperature greater than 30C has a heat capacity less than the
heat capacity for the solid. According to Table II, this is true only for Liquid IV. If this wasn't your first
thought, then your test-taking skills should have pulled you through. Only one choice is correct, so of the
liquids, you should pick the one with either the highest or lowest final temperature, never one in the middle.
The lower the heat capacity, the more the temperature increases for a given quantity of heat, so the correct
choice is the liquid with the highest final temperature, Liquid IV. The best answer is choice D.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review*3
194
74.
Choice D is correct. Because Metal IV reached a lower temperature in Experiment I than did Metal III, the
heat capacity of Metal IV must be greater than the heat capacity of Metal III. This means that when both
Metal III and Metal IV are at 50C, Metal IV has more kinetic energy than Metal III. This means that when
Metal III is added to the liquids, it has less energy to transfer to the liquids, so that the final temperature of
each liquid must be lower than it would have been had Metal IV been used. More kinetic energy in the metal
results in more kinetic energy being transferred to the liquid and thus a higher final temperature for the liquid.
This is best explained in answer choice D. Choices A and B are eliminated, because the heat transferred from
Metal III is less than the heat transferred from Metal IV.
75.
Choice D is correct. The greatest amount of transferable kinetic energy is found with the metal with the
greatest combination of temperature and heat capacity. Metal IV has the greatest heat capacity, based on
information from Experiment I. Of the choices presented, Metal IV also has the greatest temperature. This
makes Metal IV at 80C the correct choice, so choose answer choice D.
76.
Choice A is correct. Using your test-taking skills, you see that the correct answer involves the sequential
ordering of the liquids in Table II, according to their final temperatures. Because equal amounts of heat were
applied to all four liquids and the amount of liquid was identical in each trial, the lower AT is due to a larger
heat capacity. This means that the greatest heat capacity is associated with the liquid that showed the
smallest AT (Liquid III). The correct choice is III > I > II > IV, answer choice A. The answer choices should
have been narrowed down to either A or B based strictly on test-taking skills, using the sequence of
temperatures from Table 2. For optimum satisfaction, choose A.
77.
Choice A is correct. If the outer wall of the calorimeter increase in temperature during the experiment, heat
must be lost during the process. Any heat that is lost to the environment is not absorbed by the liquid, so the
final temperature of the liquid is less than is expected. The final temperature of the solid is equal to the final
temperature of the liquid at equilibrium, so the final temperature is lower than expected. This eliminates
choices C and D. Because the final temperature is too low, the change in temperature for the liquid is too
small, and the change in temperature for the solid is too high. Because the calculation for the energy transfer
involves equating the two temperature changes, the inaccurate temperature changes affect the heat capacities.
Because the temperature of the liquid does not increase as high as it should, the lower temperature change may
be mistaken for a larger heat capacity for the liquid. Because the energy (E) equals mCAT, a AT value that is
too small will be balanced out by a C that is too large. The best answer is choice A.
78.
Choice D is correct. The ratio of the heat capacities canbe determined by equating the energy changes for both
the liquid heating up and the solid cooling down.
^heating of liquid = "^cooling ofsolid
mliquid Qiquid (Tfinal "Tinit (liquid)) ="msolid Qolid (Tfinal "Tinit (solid)) =i^solid Csolid (Tinit (solid)" Tfinal)
mliquid Qiqirid (Tfinal- Tinit (liquid)) =msolid Qolid (Tinit (solid) - Tfinal)
40 Qjquid ATiiqUid =10 Csolid ATsolid
. Qiquid _ 1 ATgoiid
CSolid
4 ATiiqUid
The best answer is choice D.
Single-Piston Engine
79.
Choice A is correct. A one-way valve allows fluid to flow in only one direction. Because the flow is
asymmetric, the valve must be asymmetric. Choices C and D have symmetry, so they can be eliminated. For
fluid from left to right, the valve must seal on the left and remain open on the right. Choose A. The valve
must be viewed in three dimensions to appreciate its operation. If pressure is applied (due to the flow of fluid)
from right to left, the ball seals with the port and no fluid can flow. If pressure is applied (due to the flow of
fluid) from left to right, the ball does not form a seal with the port, so fluid continues to flow. This means that
fluid flows in only one direction (left to right) through the valve.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review0
195
80.
Choice C is correct. A cooling fan, by definition, is designed to cool by convection. In the one-piston steam
engine, cooling is required to condense the steam into liquid water. Condensation takes place in the condenser,
so the fan should be set up near the condenser (so the condenser can be cooled). The best answer is choice C. A
condenser would have many thin fins on its surface to increase the surface are and thus increase heat transfer by
way of convection.
81.
Choice C is correct. For the piston to rise, the internal pressure must exceed the external pressure. To build up
the internal pressure, steam is added to the core of the piston through the intake valve. Pressure builds up as
the moles of gas increase. This is because according to the ideal gas equation, when volume and temperature are
constant, pressureincreases as moles increase. The temperature is considered to be constant, because steamin the
presence of wateris at 100C. Steam is added to tlie core of the piston by allowing steam to flow into the piston,
but not flow out of the piston. This means that the intake valve should be open and the exhaust valve should
be closed. The best answer is choice C.
82.
Choice A is correct. When the counterweight is at its lowest point, the cycle of the piston is complete. The
counterweight is lifted again as steam is added to the core of the piston. It would be ideal if the piston were
completely compressed; but because there will always be some gas present in the core of the piston, full
compression is not possible. This is best explained in choice A. In modern engines, the gas is evacuated from the
chamber to help the piston descend with less resistance. Modern engines also employ multiple pistons that are
out of phase, rather than use a counterweight.
83.
Choice D is correct. Because the liquid is converted into a gas in the boiler, heat must be added to the boiler to
induce evaporation. This eliminates choices A and C. The gas is then converted back into a liquid in the
condenser, so heat must be removed from the condenser. A well-designed automobile has a passenger
compartment heater that takes advantage of the heat released from the condenser to help heat the passenger
compartment. To carry this out, a fan blows across the outside surface of the condenser, and the heat flows into
the passenger compartment with the air flow. The correct answer for this question is thus choice D.
84.
Choice D is correct. The engine is operated through the interconversion between liquid water and steam. This
is known as vaporization, so the correct choice is answer D. Choice A is a good explanation for why water
would be used in a radiator.
85.
Choice A is correct. An engine to converts heat into work, so an efficient engine is an engine that converts all of
the heat into work. If all of the heat is converted into work, then no heat is emitted. A perfect engine is not
possible. An ideal engine would run at ambient temperature, so that no heat is lost to the environment. Pick
choice A if you know what is best for you.
Carnot Cycle
86.
Choice B is correct. A Carnot engine is designed to convert heat into work. An engine takes heat in to give off
work energy overall. The diagram that represents an engine is the diagram that represents a work- releasing
process (one with work equal to a negative number). The vertical steps in the diagrams (b to c, d to a, e to f, and
g to h) represent steps in which the volume does not change, so no work can be done in these steps (if AV = 0,
then -PAV = 0). The trick to this question is to pick one diagram and solve it. The correct answer is either
choice B or D, because "work flows out of the system" must be true in the statement for an engine. In the diagram
in Figure 1, the step from a to b represents the expansion of the gas. When a gas expands, the process is
endothermic and work energy is released. This implies that work is a negative number, because work energy is
given off by the system. The change in volume (AV) is positive for the process, so -PAV must be negative. In the
diagram in Figure 1, the step from c to d represents the compression of the gas. When a gas compresses, the
process is exothermic and work energy is absorbed. This implies that work is a positive number, because work
energy is absorbed by the system. The change in volume (AV) is negative for the process, so -PAV must be
positive. The pressure is greater from a to b than it is from c to d. This means that the magnitude of the work
from a to b is greater than the magnitude of work from c to d. The absolute value of the wa_b > the absolute
value of wc_d- The overall work is the sum of both work steps. Because the negative value has a larger
magnitude than the positive value, the process must be negative overall. This makes the diagram in Figure 1
an engine. This also makes choice B correct.
196
87.
Choice C is correct. In a full cycle on the diagram for an ideal system (like the Carnot refrigerator in the
diagram in Figure 2), the change in internal energy is zero. This eliminates choices A and B. For a refrigerator,
work is added into the system, as heat is removed from the system. The "work in" must therefore be greater
than the "work out" for the overall process to be heat absorbing. From the graph in Figure 2, going from f to g
involves a positive change in volume, so a negative value for work (w = - PAV) is calculated. From point f to
point g, work energy is released, so the process is defined as "work out." From the graph, going from h to e
involves a negative change in volume, so a positive value for work (w = - PAV) is calculated. From point h to
point e, work energy is absorbed, so the process is defined as "work in." The pressure is greater moving from h to
e than it is moving from f to g. The magnitude for the "work in" step (h to e) is therefore greater than the
magnitude for the "work out" step (f to g). This makes choice C the best choice.
88.
Choice D is correct. If work for the system is positive and AE (the change in internal energy) is zero, then q (the
heat of the system) must be negative (given that AE = q + w). If q is negative for the system, heat was released
from the system to the surroundings, meaning that q must be positive for the surroundings. The best answer is
therefore choice D.
89.
90.
Choice B is correct. Because the shaft of the pump is becoming hot, it must be that air (and heat) is being
compressed in the column of the shaft (assuming the heat is not due to friction). If the heat is greatest at the
bottom of the shaft (where the pressure is greatest), then the heat is due to the exothermic nature of
compressing gas, not friction. If the heat were due to friction, it would be uniform throughout the column of the
shaft. Because the needle tip is cool, the gas must be expanding at that point. The compressed gas expands as it
exits from the needle point. Because air is compressed in the shaft, choices C and D are eliminated. Because
gas expands as it leaves the needle tip, choice B is the best answer.
Choice B is correct. From point a to point c in the diagram in Figure 1, the volume of the system has increased,
so choices C and D are invalid (and thus eliminated), because the gas has expanded. As a gas expands, heat
must be absorbed (expansion of a gas is endothermic). When the gas expands, work energy is given off from the
system to the surroundings (when AV is positive, work (which equals - PAV) must be negative). This makes
choice B correct.
91.
Choice D is correct. The purpose of an engine is to convert heat energy into work energy. The warmer the
exhaust temperature, the more heat that is dissipated to the environment rather than being converted into
useful work energy. If heat energy is wasted, the engine is not being efficient. This implies that both choice A
and choice C are invalid. The more points at which energy is transferred, the more energy that is dissipated in
the way of friction. If energy is dissipated as friction, it is not being used efficiently. This means that many
points of energy transfer would result in decreased engine efficiency. Tlie bestanswer is therefore choice D.
92.
Choice B is correct. From point b to c in the diagram in Figure 1, the volume does not change, so no work can be
done. Work is defined as -PAV, so a change in volume (AV) of zero means that PAV is zero and thus no work is
done. The best answer is therefore choice B. In choices A, C, and D, there is work being done, and that is not
possible at constant volume.
(Questions 93 -100)
93.
Choice B is correct. The First Law of Thermodynamics deals with tlie conservation of energy. Energy can be
neither created nor destroyed, and as such, energy is neither lost nor gained in any process. The Second Law of
Thermodynamics states that in any spontaneous process there is an increase in the entropy of the universe. The
magnitude of the entropy change of the surroundings is always greater than or equal to the magnitude of the
entropy change of the system. The Third Law states that the entropy of a perfect crystal at 0 kelvins is zero.
Rutherford's experiment dealt with determining atomic structure (the location of sub-atomic particles and the
nucleus), not the laws of thermodynamics, so choice D is eliminated. The Second Law of Thermodynamics,
choice B, is the best choice.
197
94.
Choice A is correct. There are a few methods to solve this problem, of which three are listed. It is suggested
that you adopt the method that is quickest for you. It is not a bad idea to learn multiple methods to reach a
solution for all of the questions you practice with. This helps to broaden your understanding of the concepts
being tested.
Method one requires taking a weighted mathematical average of the volumes and temperatures:
The final total volume of water is 128 mL. This means that 25% (32mL) of the final solution originates from
128 mL
the solution that starts at 36C. This also means that 75% (96mL) of the final solution originates from the
128 mL
solution that starts at 64C. The weighted average is calculated as follows:

0.25 (36CC) + 0.75 (64C) = 9eC + 48C = 57.0 C.
This makes choice A the best answer.
A second approach is the intuitive approach. Intuition is often aided by drawing a diagram, as you do in
physics. The sketch below shows the change in heat for the reaction and the math involved:
96 mL at 64eC (higher Tinitial)
x = 7C
4x = 28C
r\"-" Tî
Tfinal = ^'C " x = ^"C " TC = 57C

or
Difference in T is 28C
<
Difference in T is set as 4x
Tfinal = WQ + 3x= 36C + 21C = 57C
>-3x
^.
32 mL at 36C (lower T^^)
This leads to a values of 57C again, so choice A results from this method as well.
The last approach is to equate the heat lost by the warmer solution with the heat gained by the cooler
solution. Ifno heatis lostto theenvironment, then Ecooiing + Eneating = 0*
Ecooiing =-Cheating
mCATcooiing =- mCATneating
Canceling the C from both sides and plugging in for AT yields:
mATCOoiing =-mATheating => 96 g(64 -Tfinai) =-32 g (36 -Tfinai) =32 g(Tfinal -36)
96 g (64 - Tfinal) = 32g (Tfinal - 36) => 3 (64- Tfinai) = Tfinal - 36
192-3Tfinal = Tfinai-36 * 228 = 4Tfinal /. 57 = Tfinal
Wellwhat do you know? The correct answer is choice A yet again. Eachmethod has its unique advantages, so
the best method is the one with which you feel most comfortable.
198
95.
Choice C is correct. Knowing that w = -PAV, the work done on the system is calculated by substituting the
values for P and AV. Because the answer choices are in units of liter-atmospheres, pressure must be converted
from torr into atm. This is done as follows:
P =950 torr( * atm- ) = 1.25 atm
AV = Vfinal - Vinitial = 2.4 L - 0.4 L = 2.0 L
760 torr
The value for work is found by substituting w = -PAV as follows:

w = - (1.25 atm)(2 L) = -2.50 liter-atmospheres
The best answer is choice C.
96.
Choice B is correct. The only mathematical equation to know for the Carnot cycle is that the change in internal
energy (AE) equals the sum of the heat energy (q) and the work energy (w): AE = q + w (which can also be
written as AE = q - PAV). All of the values you need are given in easy-to-use units, so plug-and-chug to your
heart's content. The mathematics should follow:
AE = 22.2 kj - 24.4 kj = -2.2 kj.
Make sure to pick B to optimize your gratification quotient.

97.
Choice D is correct. The equation you need is: AG = AH - TAS. No numerical values are given for AH, T, or AS,
so AG cannotbe assigned a definite numerical answer. Since AH and AS are both given as positive, then the free
energy change (AG) is:
AG = (+#) - T(+#)
A large value for T would make the value of AG negative, while a small value for T would make the value of
AG positive. The answer depends on T, so choose D. The solution to this question represents the reasoning
behind Table 8.1
Result
Case
AS positive, AH negative
AS positive, AH positive
AS negative, AH negative
AS negative, AH positive
Favorable at all temperatures

Favorable at high temperatures
Favorable at low temperatures
Never favorable at any temperature
The term "spontaneous" may be used in lieu of "favorable". Spontaneous implies that the value for the free
energy change (AG) is a negative value. The term spontaneous also implies that the reaction is favorable in
the forward direction.
98.
Choice B is correct. A gas is the most random phase of the three common phases of matter (solid, liquid, and
gas), and a solid is the most ordered of the three common phases. Therefore, in changing from a gasintoa solid,
the atoms are becoming more ordered. AS is a measure of change in randomness for the system, and since the
randomness of the system is decreasing, the value of AS must be a negative value. Choice B is the correct
answer.
99.
Choice B is correct. Toexpand, a gasrequires theaddition ofheat to the system. This makes expansion ofa gas
an endothermic process and eliminates bothchoice Aand choice C Because the gasis becoming more random as
it expands (it occupies a larger volume once expanded), the expansion process is entropically favorable. The
best answer is choice B. When the system becomes more random, the change in entropy (AS) is positive.
199
100. Choice C is correct. All of the statements entail phase-change processes,so the following table is presented for
quick reference:
Process (Phase Change)
Melting (Solid to Liquid)
Freezing (Liquid to Solid)
Evaporation (Liquid to Gas)
Condensation (Gas to Liquid)
Sublimation (Solid to Gas)
Deposition (Gas to Solid)
Enthalpy Change
Endothermic: Small positive value
Exothermic: Small negative value
Endothermic: Semi-large positive value
Exothermic: Semi-large negative value
Endothermic: Large positive value
Exothermic: Large negative value
It requires more energy to convert a liquid to a gas (vaporization) than it does to convert a solid to a liquid
(fusion), because all of the intermolecular forces must be broken. Heat is absorbed during vaporization (and
endothermic process). This makes statement I a valid statement. Choices B and D are eliminated. This also
means that statement II is invalid. While more heat is involved in a phase change between a solid and a gas
than a phase change between a liquid and a gas, the key word in statement II is "released." Energy is absorbed
during sublimation, not released. Statement II is invalid. Heat is released when a liquid freezes into a solid,
because freezing is an exothermic process and heat is released in exothermic processes. The release of heat
from the system to the surroundings warms the environment. This makes statement III valid, and makes the
best answer choice C.
200
Section IX
Reaction Rates
a) Observed Reaction Rate
b) Reaction Rate Experiment
Kinetics
c) Reaction Order
by Todd Bennett
d) Rate Constant and Rate Law
e) Reaction Order Experiment

f) Typical Data and Graphs
g) Half-life
Reaction Mechanisms
a) General Mechanism Types

b) Energy Diagrams
c) Catalysis
400
500
700
600
Wavelength (nm)
1st order reaction
time
time
BERKELEY
1Jrv^w8
Kinetics Section Goals

Be able to interpret kinetic information from graphs.
Thestudy of kinetics involves the use ofgraphs that showconcentration versus timeand graphs
that show rate versus time. You must recognize typical graphs for zero-order, first-order, andsecondorder reactions. Many questions on the MCAT simply require that you recognize a graph and read
information from it.
Know the significance of the rate-determining step.
All kinetic data in a multi-step reaction are based onthe rate-detennining step. The rate-determining
stepofa reaction is theslowest stepin theoverall reaction process. The rate-determining stephas
the greatest activation energy (transition-state energy) of all the steps in the reaction pathway.
Know how to determine the rate equation and rate law.
The rate equation takes into account all of the reactants that affect the observed rate of the reaction
(all of the reactants in the rate-determining step). The rate law is found by setting the rate of the
reaction equalto the rateconstant times thereactants in the rate-determining step. Fora first-order
reaction, the rate law is:rate = k[Reactant]. The ratelawis determined by isolating eachreactant
and observing how theratechanges when theconcentration of that particular reactant is altered.
These questions require that you analyze rate data from a table of different trials.
'>
Understand the correlation between temperature, activation energy, and rate.

The reaction rate is determined by the activation energy of the rate-determining step. As the
temperature system isincreased, there is more energy available toovercome theactivation barrier.
With this energy, thereaction canproceed more rapidly, because more reactants canovercome the
activation barrier per unit time. The following graphs are ones that you must recognize:
Activation energy
required for reaction
o
\T2
Reaction coordinate
Kinetic energy
Be able to determine quickly the concentration at any time for first-order decay.
These questions require the use of the half-life, which is defined as the period of time required for
one-half of a matenal to decompose (orreact). Fora first-order reaction, the half-life is a constant
value, no matter what theconcentration ofthereactant maybe.
Know the effect of a catalyst on the reaction rate.
Acatalyst (or enzyme in biological reactions) forms a complex withthe transition state oftherate-
determining step mareaction. The complex ismore stable, and thus of a lower energy. In essence,
a catalyst lowers the activation energy of a reaction by lowering the energy level ofthe transition-
state complex. In doing so,therateofthereaction is decreased. Acatalyst is notconsumed during

the course of the reaction.
General Chemistry
Introduction
Chemical Kinetics
Chemical Kinetics
Kinetics, from a chemistry perspective, is the study of how fast a reaction
proceeds and the conditions that affect the speed of the reaction. In its simplest
form, chemical kinetics is the study of the rate at which a product is formed or
the rate at which reactants are consumed. In kinetic studies, the disappearance of
reactants is often monitored, in terms of their known spectral data and physical
properties. Products are harder to monitor, given that there are no products
present when a reaction commences. A problem that often arises is deciding
which kind of spectroscopic signal to use to monitor product formation: visible
light, ultraviolet light, or electromagnetic radiation ofsome otherfrequency.
As wesawin theequilibrium section, chemical reactions move simultaneously in

the forward and reverse directions. Chemical kinetics is concerned with the
forward reaction rate, the reverse reaction rate, and the overall reaction rate.
When monitoring a reaction, we observe the overall reaction rate. From the
overall reaction rate, we can ascertain information about the forward and reverse
reaction rates. It is also possible to monitor one component in the mixture by

incorporating an isotopic label. By observing the rate of label incorporation,
information about either the forward rate or the reverse rate can be obtained.
The main reason for studying reaction rates is to be able to determine the
mechanism by which a reaction proceeds from reactants toproducts.
In organic chemistry, choosing between the various nucleophilic substitution

mechanisms is based on kinetic data. If the concentration of the nucleophile
influences the rate of the reaction, then it is assumed that the rate determining
step involves the nucleophile attacking the electrophile to form the transition
state that evolves into product. This is referred to as an S^2-reaction mechanism
and is common in organic chemistry. If changing the concentration of the
nucleophile shows no effect on the rate of the reaction, the reaction is said to
follow an S^l-reaction mechanism. Both mechanisms shows a ratedependence on
the electrophile concentration. The number given in the descriptive name of the
mechanism refers to its reaction order.
In biochemistry, enzymatic behavior is monitored through the study of chemical

kinetics. Observing the reaction rate over time reveals features of the enzyme
andwhether or not it is saturated. A good foundation in chemical kinetics from a
general chemistry perspective makes Michaelis-Menten kinetics (studied in
biochemistry) easier to understand. Conversely, if you have a strong
understanding of Michaelis-Menten kinetics from aconceptual and mathematical

perspective, then reviewing chemical kinetics in general chemistry will be much
easier. We will intertwine examples of chemical kinetics from a few fields, so
that we can get a more universal understanding of reaction rates and of the
aspects ofa chemical reaction that influence these rates.
In reviewing chemical kinetics, we will focus on experimental studies that tell us

about the concentration of a component in a reaction as a function of time. By
studying changes in this concentration over time, we can deduce information

about the order of the reaction. Knowing the reaction order, in turn, can give us
information about the reaction mechanism. If the mechanism is valid, then a
reaction can bemanipulated to control the rate offormation and the distribution
of products. Acatalyst influences the rate of a reaction, but itdoes not affect the
product distribution.
203
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Observed Reaction Rate
The rate for any reaction can be measured as either the rate of disappearance of a
reactant or the rate of appearance of a product. Given that the ratio of a reactant
to a product is not always one to one, we need a way to account for stoichiometry
when studying reaction rates. As a general rule, Equation 9.1 describes the rate
of reactant consumption relative to the rate of product formation for a system
with no stoichiometric difference between products and reactants.
A[Products] _ A[Reactants]
At
,qiv
At
Given that products form as reactants are consumed, there is a negative sign in
the equality shown in Equation 9.1, which is useful for determining the rate of
formation of a product when the rate of consumption of a reactant is known.
Example 9.1
Given thatS2032"(aq) in a 0.50-liter flask is consumed at the rate of 0.0080 moles

per second, what is theformation rate ofS4062"(aq)?
2S2032-(aq) +l2(aq)
S4062-(aq) + 2r(aq)
A. 0.0080M
s
B. 0.0160M
s
C. 0.0320M
s
D. 0.0160 -SM
Solution
The product (S4062") appears at half the rate at which the reactant (S2O32")
disappears,because the stoichiometric relationship between the two species is 1:
2. Itisgiven that S2O32" disappears ata rate of0.008 moles/0.5 titers persecond,
which equals 0.0160 molar persecond. This means thatS4O62" appears at a rate
of 0.0080 molar per second,making choice A a terrific and correct choice. Choice
D should have been eliminatedimmediately,because it has incorrect units.
Example 9.2
02(g) appears as a reaction product at the rate of 18 torr per second. What is the
rate of appearance for SC>2(g) in the followingreaction?
2S03(g)
2S02(g) + 02(g)
A. +36 torr-s"1
B. +18 torr-s-1
C. +9 torr-s'1
D. -18 torr-s'1
Solution
The SO2 product appears at twice the rate at which the O2 product appears due
to the 2 : 1 stoichiometric relationship between the two products (SO2 and O2).
This means that the SO2 product appears at a rate of 2 x 18torr-s-1 = 36torr-s"1.
This makes choice A the correct answer.
204
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Reaction Rates
Chemical Kinetics
The rate of a reaction is determined by the rate-determining step (the slowest step
in the reaction mechanism). This is because the slowest step in a reaction
determines the observed rate for the overall reaction. The rate is dependent only
upon the concentration of the reactants involved in the rate-determining step.
However, we can observe the rate from any of the reactants or products, even
those that are not involved in the rate-determining step. In addition to knowing
numerical relationships between formation rates and consumptionrates, it is also

important to be able to interpret graphical representations of reaction
components. Drawn in Figure 9-1 below are two graphs, each depicting the
concentration of a speciesas a functionof time for a generic, multi-step catalyzed
reaction. The shape of the graph depends on the reaction order and the ratedetermining step of the mechanism,so the graphs drawn are not universal.
Intermediate
Catalyst
-'
Time
Time
Figure 9-1
Because the curves in the graph on the left getflatter withtime, the ratemustbe
decreasing as the reaction proceeds. Products are formed during the reaction, so
the product concentration starts at zero, builds rapidly at first, and then slowly
levels off to a steady concentration (once the reaction reaches equilibrium).
Reactants are consumed during the reaction, so the reactantconcentration starts
high, drops rapidly at first, and then slowly levels off to a steady concentration
(once the reaction reaches equilibrium).
Catalysts present in thebeginning of the reaction are part of the transition state
during the reaction, and then are regenerated at the end of a reaction. This
means a catalyst starts with some concentration, drops rapidly at first, stays close
to zero for most of the reaction, and then slowly increases back to its original
concentration (once the reaction reaches equilibrium). Intermediates are not
present inthe beginning of the reaction. They are in their highest concentration
during the reaction and then are in diminished quantity at the end ofa reaction.
This means an intermediate starts with zero concentration, increases rapidly at
first, stays at a steady concentration for most of the reaction, and then slowly
decreases back to zero concentration (once the reaction reaches equilibrium).
When the intermediate concentration remains constant, it is known as a steady
state. Thegraphs in Figure 9-1 reflect all of these conditions.
These graphs are also seen in biochemistry, where the reactant is referred to as a
substrate, the catalyst is an enzyme, and the intermediate is the enzyme-substrate
complex. Free enzyme is regenerated as the reaction reaches its endpoint and the
enzyme-substrate complex eventually disappears. Other graphs from
biochemistry kinetics that you may recognize include the rate of a reaction as a
function of concentration and rate of reaction as a function of time in Figure 9-7.
205
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Experimental Study of Reaction Rate
Rates are observed empirically in laboratory studies. One technique used in the
lab to determine the rate of a reaction involves observing product formation or
reactant consumption via ultraviolet-visible (UV-visible) spectroscopy. In cases
where there is no UV-visible peak to observe, rates can be obtained using a

second technique. Aliquots can be collected at uniform intervals and analyzed
using gas chromatography. Thisrequires removing some of the reaction mixture
while the reaction is still proceeding, but the amount is generally so small that it
has a negligible effect on the rate of the reaction. A bigger problem is that the
reaction may continue to react in the syringe or pipette after it has been removed
from the original flask.
To avoid this problem, the sample of solution is quenched upon removal (to
prevent further reaction). Once the samples are quenched, they are analyzed by
a quantitative technique, such as gas chromatography (GC) or nuclear magnetic
resonance (NMR). If the concentration is analyzed at uniform intervals, it is
possible to plot the data and fit a curve to the points. The graphs shown in
Figure 9-2 represent data obtained from gas chromatography done on selected
aliquots. The peaks can be integrated to quantify the compounds in the mixture.
Retention time
Retention time
Retention time
Figure 9-2
The first and last peaks (of the three) in Figure 9-2 represent reactants, because
they decrease with time. The middle peak represents a product, because itgrows
with time. The retention time is the time ittakes the sample to travel through the
column. It is not important in thisparticular example.
206
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
UV-visible spectroscopy can be done in vitro, so timing and quenching are not a
problem. When carrying out a reaction in a cuvette, the reaction can be placed
into an UV-visible light spectrophotometer. It is best to pulse the sample with
light, rather than subjectthe sample to continualbombardment, because the light
from the detector beam adds energy to the system. An increase in the energy
results in an increase in reaction rate and consequently inaccurate data. Figure 93 shows absorbance as a function of wavelength at different time intervals
during a reaction, using a UV-visible spectrometer to collectdata.
t = 0
Wavelength (ran)
t = o
Reactant?
t = i
Product?
Product?
Reactant?
Wavelength (nm)
Intermediate
Wavelength (nm)
Intermediate
Wavelength (nm)
Figure 9-3
207
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
The change in height of each curve follow a pattern similar to the one in the
intensity graphs in Figure 9-2. In UV-visible spectroscopy, peaks are analyzed
for height, rather than area. The peaks from the UV-visible spectrometer are
measured in absorbance and can be mathematically converted in concentration
using Beer's law, Equation 9.2 (also listed as Equation 1.3):
Absorbance = e[C]l,
(9.2)
where e is the molar absorb tivity constant (also known as the extinction
coefficient), [C] is the concentration of the species, and 1is the length of pathway
through which light travels through the cuvette.
It is impossible to identifyeach peak in Figure 9-3 until t = 2, which is why the

peaks are labeled with question marks in the t = 1 entry. The biggestchange in
absorbance is observed between t = 0 and t = 1,and the magnitude of thechange

in absorbance decreases during each subsequent interval. This means that the
reaction rate was fastest during the initial period, but that it slowed down as the
reaction proceeded. This is typical forreactions that are not zero-order. Looking
at absorbance as a function oftime leads to the graphsseenin Figure 9-1.
The best peak to monitor is the peak that shows the greatest change in height
(this reduces theeffects ofanyerrors). The apexof the peakshouldbe monitored
rather than the area under thecurve. In measuring the height, it is assumed that
the peaks are all symmetrical. In UV-visible spectroscopy, the wavelength at
which the apex of the peak occurs is referred to as A^* (the wavelength of
maximum absorbance).
Example 9.3
Which of the following methods is the BEST way to study the rate of a chemical
reaction?
A. Taking samples at regular intervals and immediately placing themintoa gas

chromatographer
B. Taking samples at regular intervals, immediately quenching each one, and

then placing them intoa gaschromatographer
C. Carrying out the reaction in a cuvette exposed to photons that continually
irradiate thesample, and then analyzing the transmitted lightforintensity
D. Carrying out the reaction in a cuvette exposed to photons that periodically
irradiate thesample, and then analyzing the transmitted lightforintensity
Solution
As mentioned in the text, it is best to analyze the sample in vitro, thereby

avoiding problems associated with transfer. This permits an accurate recording
of the time of reaction. Even with expeditious quenching of a sampling, the
timing is not perfect. This eliminates choices A and B. When analyzing a sample
by irradiation, care should be taken not to energize the solution more than is
necessary. By continually irradiating the sample, energy is being added to the
system, so it does not behave as it normally would. Reaction rates are going to
be higher, due to the input of energy. From an energetics perspective, the ideal
scenario is periodically to irradiate the sample at the lowest possible frequency
(at the ^max for the species with the lowest energy absorbance), so that minimal
energy is added to the system. This is not always possible, as is the case when
the peak intensity is low. The best answer is choice D.
208
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Reaction Order
The order of a reaction is ascertained from the number of reagents involved in

the rate-determining step. There are three fundamental reaction orders to
consider: zero, first, and second. A zero-order reaction proceeds at a constant
rate, independent of reactant concentration. The rate law for a zero-order

reaction is rate = k. A typical case where zero-order kinetics is observed is
during a catalyzed reaction, where the reaction proceeds at the turnover rate of
the catalyst. Even with the addition of more reactant, the reaction rate cannot
change, because the catalyst has a finite number of reactive sites. A first-order
reaction depends only on one reactant (like the SnI reaction). The rate law for a
first-order reaction is rate = k[R]. This means that the rate changes linearly as the
concentration of the reactant R is changed. A second-order reaction depends on
either on two different reactants (like the Sjsj2 reaction) or two of the same
reactant. The rate law for a second-order reaction is either rate = kIRil[R2] or
rate = k[R]2.
In the second case, the rate changes exponentially as the
concentration of the reactant R is changed.
The reaction order with respect to a specific reactant can be masked, however.
For instance, in a second-order reaction, if one of the rate-influencing reactants is
in significantly higher concentration than the other rate-influencing reactant,

then reaction appears to be first-order, dependent on the reactant in lowest
concentration. By saturating a solution with all of the reactants except for one
that is involved in the rate-determining step, the reaction can becomepseudofirstorder. Something similar to this is seen in enzyme kinetics, when substrate
concentration is larger than enzyme concentration. The enzyme is saturated, so
the reaction obeys zero-order kinetics relative to the substrate. Additional
substrate does not increase the reaction rate. The rate remains constant with the
addition of substrate. The rate laws and half-life equations for three different
reaction orders are listed in Table 9.1 below.
Zero-order
First-order
Second-order
Rate law:
rate = k
rate = k[A]
rate = k(A]2
Half-life:
t, =[A1
2
Observation:
tl _ln2 _0.693
2
2k
ti -
k[A]0
Constant rate
Rate i as time T
Rate 1 as time T
Half-life i as time T
Half-life constant
Half-life 1 as time i
Table 9.1
Example 9.4
What is the reaction order for the following one-step reaction?
2 NQ2(g)
2 NO(g) + 02(g)
A. Zero-order
B.
First-order
C.
Second-order
D. Pseudo zero-order
Solution
Because the reaction is a one-step reaction, the rate-determining step (and the
only step) involves two molecules of nitrogen dioxide colliding. The reaction
depends on two reactants, making it a second-order reaction. Choice C is the

best answer.
209
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Example 9.5
The half-life is independent of the concentration of reactant for what order of
reaction?
A.
Zero-order
B.
First-order
C.
Second-order
D. The half-life is independent of the concentration for all reactions.

Solution
Referring to Table 9.1, we see that only with a first-order reaction is the half-life
constant. This means that choice B is correct. It is important to be able to see
new information and process it in a simple manner. Each reaction order has its
unique features. For zero-order reactions, the rate is constant, so it takes less
time for each subsequent half-life,because the quantity for the half-life decreases
over time. For first-order reactions, the half-life is constant, which is why you
often hear the phrase "half-life for a first-order decay process." Second-order
reactions are known for their rapid reaction rate at first, but a drastic decrease in
rate after just a short time.
Example 9.6
Given the following table equating reaction time with concentration of reactant,
what is the order of reaction?
IA0]
1.000 M
A.
Zero-order
B.
First-order
Time
Osec
0.500 M
15 sec
0.250 M
45 sec
0.125 M
105 sec
C.
Second-order
D. Third-order
Solution
The first half-life, from 1.000 M to 0.500M, takes 15 seconds. The second half-life,
from 0.500 M to 0.250 M, takes 30 seconds. The third half-life, from 0.250 M to
0.125 M, takes 60 seconds. In this case, as the concentration of reactant decreases,
the value of the half-life is increasing. This means that the concentration is
inversely proportional to the half-life. This is true for a second-order reaction, so
choice C is the best answer.
In terms of mechanisms, reactions can be only first-order or second-order. Other

observed orders are phenomena associated with catalysts and relative
concentrations. First-order reactions entail one molecule breaking apart, and are
referred to as dissociative reactions.
A dissociative reaction involves
decomposition in its rate-determining step. Second-order reactions entail two

molecules colliding, and are referred to as associative reactions. An associative
reaction involves the combining of two molecules (via collision) in its ratedetermining step.
210
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Rate Constant and Rate Law
The rate constant is the term by which the concentrations of reactants in the ratedetermining steps are multiplied to get the rate law. The rate law is derived by
determining the reactants that affect the reaction rate, and multiplying this value
by the rate constant. Rate constants and rate laws are empirical values, obtained
by observing the initial rate of a reaction under several different conditions. Rate
constants have varying and odd units! The rate of a reaction is affected by
temperature (the reaction rate increases with increasing temperature), activation
energy (the reaction rate decreases with increasing activation energy), catalysts,
solvent (solvents affect the transition state stability), collision frequency, collision
orientation, and the concentration of the reactants in the rate-determining step.
The rate constant must account for all of these factors, except concentration of the
reactants. Equation 9.3 is used to determine the rate constant.
k = Ae"Eac,/RT
(9.3)
A is the Arrhenius constant; it takes into account collision orientation and
frequency. Not all collisions between reactants result in reactions. The activation
energy (Eact) is the energy required to get through the transition state. R is the
energy constant given in units of energy per mole-temperature. It is either 8.314
joulesper mole-kelvins or 1.987 caloriesper molekelvins.
Example 9.7
If the rate law for the following reaction isfound to be: rate = k V[CI2I [HCCI3],
what are the units for rate constant (k)?
Cl2(g) + CHCl3(g)
A.
HCl(g) + CCl4(g)
M*2
s
B.
Vm
s
C.
VM-5
D.
Solution
The rate of the reaction has units of molar per second. The following equation
can be used to solve for units:
Rate = kHC12T [HCCI3]
Units: M= kVM (M) =kYm3"
Solving for the units ofthe rate constant yields: k = M. = J_ .
VnF*
Vm-s
It may seem counterintuitive for the rate of a reaction to depend on the square
root of a concentration, but because the rate-determining step may be the second
or third stepofa multiple-step reaction, the rate law for the reaction may involve
the concentration of intermediates. If the equation using the intermediates is
manipulated in such a way that reactant concentrations replace intermediate

concentrations, there are sometimessquare root factors involved. The point here
is that the square rootis merely an artifact of the mathematical calculations, and
it shouldn't upset you. The best answer is choice C.
211
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Experimental Study of Reaction Order

Reaction order can be determined experimentally in one of two ways. In one
experiment, the concentration of a reactant is monitored over time, and the decay
rate is matched with reaction order data. This works well for simple cases. Zeroorder reactions occur at a constant rate, so a uniform decay trend in reactants can
be observed within a few data points. First-order reactions occur at a gradually
decreasing rate, so a gradually diminishing decay trend in reactants can be
observed within a few data points. Second-order reactions occur at a rapidly
decreasing rate, so a rapidly diminishing decay trend in reactants can be
observed within a few data points. However, to determine the reaction order
more precisely, the initial rate is observed as initial concentrations of reactants
are systematically varied. The rate law for a reaction is most often obtained in
this way. If the reaction rate remains constant when a reactant concentration is
varied, then reaction rate does not depend on that reactant. Consider the data in
Table 9.2 for a hypothetical reaction between one mole of A and one mole of B.
Trial
Initial Rate
[Al
IB1
3.07xl0-3 M-s"1
0.10 M
0.10 M
6.11 xlO"3 M-s"1
0.20 M
0.10 M
in
1.23xl0-2 M-s"1
0.20 M
0.20 M
Table 9.2
To evaluate the effectof a reactant on the reaction rate, we start with the generic
rate law: rate = k [A]a[B]b. Upon comparing Trial I with Trial II, we get the
following results:
Rate ii _ k[A]J[B]^ _ 6.11 x 10'3 M/s _ k[0.20]a[0.10]b

Rate i k[A]f[B]^ 3.07 x 10"3 M/s k [0.10]a[0.10]b
Theratioof the rates is approximately 2 (6.11 divided by 3.07 is roughlyequal to
2), k cancels out in thenumerator and denominator, and [0.10]b cancels out in the
numerator and denominator. Thisleaves the followingrelationship:
2=K=2a.%a =1
[0.10]a
We see that the rate doubles when [A] is doubled, so the rate depends on [A]1.
This means that the rate law can be modified to: rate = k [A][B]b. Upon
comparing Trial II with Trial III, we see that the rate doubles when [B] is
doubled, so the ratedepends on [B]1. The rate law for the reaction is thus: rate=
k[A][B]. This means that the reaction is first-order with respect to A, first-order
with respect to B, and second-order overall. This technique is applicable in
organic chemistry, as for example when determining the mechanism for a
nucleophilic substitution reaction. The data in Table 9.3 describes the kinetics
observed for a generic nucleophilic substitution reaction.
[Nucleophile] [Electrophile]
Trial
Initial Rate
7.82 xlO"4 M-s"1
0.10 M
0.10 M
II
1.17 xlO"3 M-s"1
0.10 M
0.15 M
1.54 x 10"3M-s"1
0.20 M
0.20 M
Table 9.3
212
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
The numbers may not seem as simple as they were in the previous example, but
the procedure is the same. Upon comparing Trial I with Trial n, we see that the
rate increases by a factor of 1.5 when [Electrophile] increases by a factor of 1.5, so
the rate depends on [Electrophile]1. This is expected, because the rate of all
nucleophilic substitution reactions depends on the electrophile concentration,
whether the reaction proceeds by an Sjsjl-mechanism or an S^j2-mechanism.
Upon comparing Trial I with Trial HI, we see that the rate doubles when both
[Electrophile] and [Nucleophile] are doubled. We know that there exists a
relationship between reaction rate and [Electrophile] that is directly proportional,

so the doubling of the reaction rate when comparing Trial I with Trial III can be
attributed to the doubling of [Electrophile]. The reaction rate only doubles, so it
does not depend on [Nucleophile]. The rate law is: rate = k[Electrophile], so the
reaction proceeds by an SNl-mechanism.
For Examples 9.8 through 9.12,please refer to Table 9.4below.
Trial
Initial Rate
[XI
3.57 xlO"4 M-s"1
0.10 M
0.10 M
II
1.43 xlO"3 M-s"1
0.10 M
0.20 M
3.59 xlO"4 M-s"1
0.20 M
0.10 M
IV
1.44 xlO"3 M-s"1
0.20 M
0.20 M
Table 9.4
Example 9.8
What is the reaction order with respect to Reactant X?
A. Zero-order
B.
First-order
C.
Second-order
D. Third-order
Solution
The order with respect to Reactant X is found by observing the reaction rate as
[X] changes. This is done bycomparing Trial I with Trial III (or Trial IIwith Trial
IV). Because the reaction rate doesn't change when [X] doubled, it shows no
dependence on the concentration of X. The order with respect to Reactant Xis

the power to which the concentration is raised, which in this case is zero. With
respect to Reactant X, the reaction is zero-order. The bestanswer is choice A.
Example 9.9
Which of the following changes would MOST increase the reaction rate?
A. Doubling [X] and decreasing the temperature by 108C
B. Doubling [X] and increasing the temperature by 10C
C. Doubling [Y] and decreasing the temperature by 10'C
D. Doubling [Y] and increasing the temperature by 10C
Solution
The rate does not depend on Reactant X. This eliminates choices A and B.
Increasing the temperature provides more energy to the system, so that more
molecules can overcome the activation barrier. This means that the reaction rate
increasesas temperature increases. The best answer is choiceD.

213
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Example 9.10
What is the overall reaction order?
A. Zero-order
B.
First-order
C.
Second-order
D. Third-order
Solution
The reaction rate does not depend on Reactant X, given that changes in [X] do not
change the reaction rate. The order with respect to Reactant Y is found by
comparing Trial I with Trial II (or Trial in with Trial IV). The rate quadruples
when [YI is doubled, so the rate depends on [Y]2. The rate of the reaction
depends on two moles of Y, so the reaction is second-order with respect to Y.
The overall reaction depends on two molecules of Y and no moles of X, so
overall, the reaction is second-order. The best answer is choice C.
The reaction is second-order, which means that the rate-determining step

involves two molecules of Y coming together. This same question can be asked
in a more convoluted manner, by asking about the mechanism and the
components in the rate-determining step. Example 9.11 is seemingly different
from Example 9.10, although both questions are asking about the order of the
reaction and the rate law.
Example 9.11
Which of the followingstatements accurately describes the reaction mechanism?

A. The reaction mechanism is associative, and the rate-determining step
involves one mole of Y.
B. The reaction mechanism is associative, and the rate-determining step

involves two moles of Y.
C. The reaction mechanism is dissociative, and the rate-determining step

involves one mole of Y.
D. The reaction mechanism is dissociative, and the rate-determining step

involves two moles of Y.
Solution
The order with respect to Reactant Y is found by comparing Trial I with Trial II
(or Trial HIwith Trial IV). The rate quadruples when [Y] is doubled, so the rate
depends on [Y]2. The rate law for the reaction is thus: rate = k[Y]2. This means
that the rate-determining step involves two moles of Y, and the reaction is
second-order. Second-order reactions are associative, so the best answer is choice
B. Although mechanisms can never be proven, from the data you can
hypothesize that the reaction proceeds by a multi-step mechanism. For example,
if the reaction is X + Y -P, then the mechanism must have more than one step.
If the reaction is two-step, then the mechanism is probably:
First step: Y + Y -> Y2
rate-deterrnining step (slowest step)
Second step: Y2 + X - Y + P
214
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Example 9.12
If the reaction of X with Y is monitored by visible spectroscopy, then which of the

following graphs is expected for the absorbance of light by Reactant X as a
function of time? The graphs are labeled with t\, t2/ and 13, which represent the
elapsed time for the reaction, where t3 > t2 > t\.
B.
A.
Wavelength (nm)
Wavelength (nm)
D.
C.
o
(A
Wavelength (nm)
Wavelength (nm)
Solution
Whether we monitor Reactant X or Reactant Y, the reaction obeys second-order

kinetics. Just because reactant X is not in the rate-determining step does not
mean it is unreactive. It is consumed at the same rate as Reactant Y, if the two
species reactin a one-to-one stoichiometric fashion. Fora second-order reaction,

consumption of reactants (and product formation) is mostrapid initially, because
as the reaction proceeds, the reactant concentration diminishes, causingthe rate
to decrease. The greatest change in concentration should be observed between
times ti and t2- This eliminates choice A (which describes zero-order behavior)
and choice B, which is erratic behavior. The change between times t2 and 13
should be substantially less than the change between timesti and 12, so choice D
is more indicative of second-order kinetics. Choice C describes first-order
kinetics.
Graphs contain a great deal of information, and your ability to extract

informationfrom graphs can be of great benefit on the MCAT. Chemicalkinetics
entails several graphs, from which trends in reactivity can be extrapolated.
Example 9.12 shows this. The information in the answer choices for Example
9.12 can be rewritten in a more traditional form of concentration as a function of
time. This results in a graph typically seen in chemical kinetics.

215
General Chemistry
Reaction Rates
Chemical Kinetics
Typical Rate Data and Graphs
Typical graphs in chemical kinetics involve reactant concentration as a function

of time during the course of a chemical reaction. The rate data for zero-order,
first-order, and second-order reactions have unique characteristics, because the
concentration of reactant changes in a distinct way over the course of each kind
of reaction, and the reactant concentration affects the rate differently for each
reaction order.
Zero-order decay is recognized when the concentration of the reactants decreases

in uniform increments against uniform time increments. Drawn in Figure 9-4
below are typical data in a typical graphic display for a zero-order reaction:
Time
0
1
2
3
4
Concentration
LOOM
0.75
0.50
0.25
0.00
M
M
M
M
i-t
to
Time-
Time-
Figure 9-4
In Figure 9-4, the data in the table match the graph on the left. The concentration
decreases by the same amount, 0.25 M, during each time interval. This means
thatthe reaction rate isconstant over time, as seen in thegraph on the right.
First-order decay is recognized when the concentration of the reactants decreases
in a logarithmic fashion against uniform time increments. It may be easier to

recognize a first-order reaction by the constant half-life. Drawn in Figure 9-5
below are typicaldata in a typical graphic display for a first-order reaction:
Time
Concentration
0
1
2
3
4
LOOM
0.52 M
0.28 M
0.16 M
0.10 M
Time
Time
Figure 9-5
In Figure9-5, the data in the table match the graph on the left. The concentration
decreases by a gradually smaller amount, 0.48 M, then 0.24 M, then 0.12 M,
during each time interval. When the time decreases in uniform increments, the
concentration changes by half as much each time. This means that the reaction
rate is decreasing with time, as seen in the graph on the right.
216
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Second-order decay is recognized by the drastic drop in concentration initially

followed by smaller decreases in concentration against uniform time increments.
When the time decreases in uniform increments, the concentration changes by

substantially decreasing amounts each time. It may be easier to recognize a
second-order reaction by an increasing half-life. Drawn in Figure 9-6 below are
typical data in a typical graphic display for a second-order reaction:
Concentration
LOOM
0.35 M
0.25 M
0.18 M
0.14 M
Time
Time
Figure 9-6
In Figure 9-6, the data in the table match the graph on the left. The concentration
decreases significantly in the first interval, but the magnitude of the decrease is
substantially smaller during each subsequent interval, 0.65 M, then 0.10 M, then
0.07 M.
When the time decreases in uniform increments, the concentration
changes by a much smaller amount much each time. This means that the
reaction rate is decreasing exponentially with time, as seen in the graph on the
right.
A kinetics graph from biochemistry that should look familiar involves velocity
(the rate of a catalyzed reaction) as a function of substrate concentration for an
enzymatic process. Because there is a finite amount of enzyme, and each enzyme
has a finite number of active sites, there is a finite number of reactants that may
be reacting at any given time. At high reactant concentrations, the reaction rate
appears to be constant (it is equal to a value that depends on concentration of
enzyme, and the turnover rate of the enzyme.) At lower reactant concentrations,
the rate depends on the reactant, because the enzyme is not saturated. Figure 9-7
shows a typical graph from Michaelis-Menten enzyme kinetics:
Exhibits zero-order kinetics at
high substrate concentration.
The reaction reaches Vmax since the

enzyme is saturated with substrate.
[Substrate]
Figure 9-7
217
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Half-Life
Half-life is defined as the period of time it takes for the concentration of a

reactant to decrease to a value that is one-half of its original value. This means
that after one half-life, only fifty percent of the initial value remains. The graphs
in Figures 9-8,9-9, and 9-10 show half-life dependence on concentration.
Zero-order decay involves a constant rate of decay, so the time required to carry
out the first half-life (from 100% to 50%) is double that of the time required to
carry out the second half-life (from 50% to 25%). As seen in Table 9.1, the halflife diminishes with concentration. Figure 9-8 presents data that show the
relationship of half-life to reactant concentration for a zero-order reaction:
Time
Concentration
1.0000 M
4.0
0.5000 M
6.0
0.2500 M
7.0
0.1250 M
t1=4
2 n
ti=2
2
ti=l
2 c
i=.5
2
7.5
50%- -
t>0
CO
0.0625 M
Half-life decreases as the

concentration decreases.
25%- -
-S
&
JS
c
Time
100%
50%
25%
12.5%
Figure 9-8
First-order decay involves a logarithmically decreasing rate of decay, but the

time required to carry out the first half-life (from 100% to 50%) is equal to that of
the time required to carry out the second half-life (from 50% to 25%). As seen in
Example 9.5, the half-life is constant. Figure 9-9 presents data that show the
relationship of half-life to reactant concentration for a first-order reaction:
SP
Time
Concentration
1.0000 M
2.0
0.5000 M
4.0
0.2500 M
6.0
0.1250 M
8.0
0.0625 M
ti=2
2
ti=2
2
.2
t1=2
'C
t1=2*
2
50%"-
*->
Half-life remains constant as

the concentration decreases.
JS
CO
U-i
25%
00
CQ
Time
<u
100%
* *
50%
25%
12.5%
Figure 9-9
218
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Second-order decay involves a rapidly decreasing rate of decay, so the time

required to carry out the first half-life (from 100% to 50%) is half that of the time
required to carry out the second half-life (from 50% to 25%). As seen in Example
9.6, the half-life increases as the reactant concentration decreases. Figure 9-10
presents data that show the relationship of half-life to reactant concentration for
a second-order reaction:
Time
Concentration
1.0000 M
0.5
0.5000 M
1.5
0.2500 M
2 A
3-5
0.1250 M
7.5
0.0625 M
t x= .5
ti=l
2
^=2
ti=4
Half-life increases as the

concentration decreases.
Time
2t
100%
4t
50%
25%
12.5%
Figure 9-10
It is important that you be able to interpret data from both a graph and a table. A
useful skill on the MCAT is the ability to recognize trends quickly when scanning
numerical data. It is also important to recognize the effect of concentration on
the half-life of a reaction. This information can be used to determine the reaction
order, support a proposed reaction mechanism, or eliminate a possible reaction

mechanism.
Because half-life is constant for first-order processes, most half-life questions on

the MCAT involve decay (a first-order reaction). Equation 9.4 is used to calculate
the concentration of a species that undergoes first-order decay at any time:
Q = C0e-kt
(9.4)
where Q is the concentration at time t, C0 is the initial concentration, t is time,
and k is the rate constant. Equation 9.4 can be manipulated to derive the half-life
for a first-order reaction. The half-life is calculated using Equation 9.5.
Ct = C0e kt
Q. = e'kt and att= ti/,,-^t =1 ... 1 = e-khfc ^ 2 = ekt,/2

Q
-C0
Taking the natural log ofboth sides yields: In 2 =kt i/2 .\ ty, =ID-Z. = 0-693
K
K,
Equation 9.5 relates the rate constant, k, and the half-life for a first-order decay
process.
h/ _ 0.693
(9.5)
/2_ k
219
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Rates
Most half-life questions deal with first-order processes. Rather than using the
equations to calculate values, it is often easier to cut a concentration in half
several times, until the period of time is completed. For instance, after three halflives, the amount of a material decreases from 100% to 50%, from 50% to 25%,
and finally from 25% to 12.5%. This technique is far easier than doing long
calculations using Equations 9.4 and 9.5. Examples 9.13 and 9.14 demonstrate
how to cut the concentration in half sequentially.
Example 9.13
The concentration of some floral scent is 100 ppm. If the half-life for its
decomposition is 4 minutes, how much time elapses before there is only 1 ppm in
the air?
A.
20.0 minutes
B.
26.6 minutes
C.
42.2 minutes
D.
53.2 minutes
Solution
A quick method to arrive at the solution involves calculating successive halflives. The decrease taken one-half life at a time is:
100 -> 50 -> 25 -> 121- _> 61- -> 3L -> 1-5- -> less than 1.0
2
16
After seven half-lives (seven arrows), the concentration reaches a value that is
less than 1 ppm, so the elapsed time is just less than seven half-lives. Because the
concentration after six half-lives is greater than 1 ppm, the total time is more than
six-half lives. Six half-lives is 24 minutes and seven half-lives is 28 minutes, so
the time is more than 24 but less than 28 minutes. The best answer is choice B.
Example 9.14
If a drug decomposes according to first-order kinetics, what is its concentration
after one hour, if the half-life is 21 minutes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.1%of its original concentration

24.0% of its original concentration
Solution
Because the decay obeys first-order kinetics, the half-life is constant. Within one
hour, given a half-life of 21 minutes, just under three half-lives will transpire.
The decrease taken one half-life at a time is: 100% to 50%, then 50% to 25%, then
25% to a value slightly greater than 12.5%. The best answer is choice C.
=13%
100%
21 min
*-
50%
21 min
25%
21 min '
ah ;
6U
min
220
12.5%
63. min
. ,
total
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Mechanisms
mHmfMmmm*!
General Mechanism Types
A reaction mechanism is the stepwise pathway that a reaction is believed to take,

and it is proposed based on energetic data, kinetic data, and structural
differences between reactants and products (bonds and chirality in particular).
Mechanisms account for the steps in the reactant-to-product transformation.
There are one-step reactions that are said to have concerted mechanisms. In many
cases, however, the reaction mechanism involves more than one step. To
determine the mechanism for a multi-step reaction, we start by determining the
components in the rate-determining step. If we know the components that affect
the rate, we know the components in the slowest step of the reaction.
If the reaction is first-order, then we know that the slowest step involves one
molecule breaking apart. If the reaction is second-order, then we know that the
slowest step involves two molecules coming together to form a bond. When
considering kinetic data to support a mechanism, the rate information applies
only to the rate-determining step of the reaction. Figure 9-11 shows graphs for
rate as a function of reactant concentration for some simple cases:
A
B + C
One-step reaction
Dissociative mechanism
rate = k [A]
(First-order kinetics)
A + B
One-step reaction
Associative mechanism
rate = k [A][B]
(Second-order kinetics)
2A
B + C
One-step reaction
Associative mechanism
rate =k[A]2
(Second-order kinetics)
Figure 9-11
The first reaction in Figure 9-11 involves the dissociation of the reactant in its
rate-determining step (its one and only step). The second reaction in Figure 9-11
involves the association of two different reactants in its rate-deterrnining step (its
one and only step). The reaction is first-order with respect to each reactant, but
second-order overall. The third reaction in Figure 9-11 involves dimerization
(the association of two identical reactants) in its rate-determining step. The
reaction is second-order with respect to the reactant, which results in the rate as a
function of reactant concentration being exponential.
221
General Chemistry
Reaction Mechanisms
Chemical Kinetics
Not all reactions are concerted. Reactants can form intermediates (or activated
complexes), which then go on to form products. There may be individual steps

in the mechanism that are independent events in the overall process.
Mechanisms can be disproven or supported, but never proven. For this reason,
mechanisms are best thought of as educated guesses at the reaction pathway.
Figure9-12 shows the graph for rate as a function of reactant concentrationfor a
multi-step reaction:
A + B -^rH^
C + D
k-i
k2
A + D
Eactl >Eact2 '

Step 1 is the rds
E + B
Rate = k1[A][B]
E (overall reaction)
Two-step reaction
Rate varies with rds
Reaction coordinate
[D]
[C]
Figure 9-12
The reaction in Figure 9-12 involves the association of two reactants in both
mechanistic steps. Either step could potentially be rate-determining. The step
with the higher activation energy is the slower, and thus rate-detennining, step.
It is important that you understand the graphs to the extent that you can
interpret data from them. Free energy diagrams are a common way to describe
the energetics of the reaction mechanism. The term "reaction coordinate" refers
to the stepwise mechanism. The energetics are used as the evidence to propose
that the first step in the reaction is rate-determining.
Kinetic data are the basis for most mechanistic proposals. For instance, consider
Reaction 9.1. We believe Reaction 9.1 is a one-step reaction, because the ratedetermining step (and only step) involves the two nitrogen dioxide reactants
colliding to form a bond. Because the reaction shows second-order kinetics, a
concerted, bimolecular mechanism is proposed as the best explanation of such
behavior. The rate constant for the reaction is ki, implying that it is the forward
rate constant of the first step. The subscript describes the step and the direction.
For instance, if we were given a k.3, we could assume that it was the rate
constant for the back-reaction of the third step.
N204(g)
2N02(g)
Reaction 9.1
According to the rate law, the reaction rate isequal toki[N02]2 for Reaction 9.1.
This can be supported by observing the rate of the reaction as a function of
reactant concentration. This was seen in Example 9.12. Examples 9.15 and 9.16
are more specific cases where kinetic data can be used to support a proposed
mechanism.
222
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Mechanisms
Example 9.15
The mechanism for the reaction that follows is believed to be two consecutive
bimolecular reactions.
Reaction:
NC>2(g) + CO(g)
Mechanism:
NC>2(g) + N02(g)
NO(g) + C02(g)
NO(g) + N03(g) (slow)
N03(g) + CO(g)
N02(g) + C02(g) (fast

What is the rate law for this reaction, assuming that this reaction mechanism is
correct?
A. k(PNo2)(Pco)
B. k(PNo2)2(Pco)
C k(PNo2)2
D. k(PNo2)
Solution
The rate depends on the first step, because it is the slowest step in the reaction
mechanism (rate-determining step). The first step of the mechanism involves
two N02 molecules colliding together to form NO3 and NO. The rate depends
on the reactants in the rate-determining step. The rate therefore depends on two
molecules of N02 gas. Odd as it may seem, CO (carbon monoxide) has no effect
on the rate of this reaction. The addition of CO does not increase the rate of the
reaction according to the mechanism provided. This makes choice C correct.

Observations about the rate of a reaction can be used to disprove mechanisms
from an analytical standpoint. If one were to find that increasing the partial
pressure of CO in the reaction mixture resulted in an increase in the rate of the
reaction, then the mechanism as proposed would be invalid. Mechanisms should
be able to predict the reactivity patterns of reactions before the reaction begins.
Example 9.16
For the reaction in Example 9.15, what would the expected rate law be had the
reaction had occurred in one step?
A. k(PNo2)(Pco)
B. k(PNo2)2(Pco)
C k(PNo2)2
D. k(PNo2)
Solution
Had the reaction taken place in one step, it would have depended on the two
reactants colliding with one another in the transition state. This means that the
rate law of the reaction would be k(PN02)(Pco)/ choice A. To confirm this rate
law (and mechanism), it would be expected that increases in either of the two
reactants would result in a linear increase in the rate of the reaction. Again, this
observation could either support or disprove the proposed one-step reaction
mechanism. On your exam, you may have to make some predictions about the
rate of a reaction based on its proposed mechanism. The simple rule is that if the
reactant is in the rate-determining step, then the rate of the reaction depends
directly on the concentration of that reactant.
223
General Chemistry
Reaction Mechanisms
Chemical Kinetics
Energy Diagrams and Activation Energy
Activation energy is the threshold energy required for a reaction to transpire. It

is the energy difference between the starting materials and the transition state
(apex of the energy diagram). The higher the energy of the transition state (also
referred to as the activated complex), the greater the activation energy, and thus
the more slowly the reaction rate takes place. The highest activation energy of a
multi-step reaction represents the rate-determining step in the overall reaction.
There are two popular energy diagrams that you may recall. Figure 9-13 is the
traditional graph (often found in organic chemistry textbooks) that relates the
energy of the system to the pathway of the reaction. Energy must be absorbed
by the system in order for it to ascend the energy diagram. The lower the
position occupied by a species on an energy diagram, the more stable it is.
Transition state
The greater the Eact (activation

energy), the slower the reaction
rate,because k = Ae"Eact/RT.
j-i
Reaction coordinate
Figure 9-13
Figure9-14 is a bar graph of sorts, where the number of molecules in the system
is plotted against their energy. The area under the curve represents the sum of
the molecules in the system. Figure 9-14 shows that at any given time, not all
molecules have the same energy within the system. These two popular graphic
methods to depict activation energy are presented below:
Threashold energy required
for reaction to take place
A greater precentage of molecules
are beyond the threshold energy

atT2thanatTj.
Kinetic energy
act
Figure 9-14
At T2, the averageenergy of molecules is greater than at Tj. Consequently, at T2

more molecules have enough energy to overcome the activation barrier for the
reaction. This means that more molecules react at T2 than Ti, resulting in a faster
reaction rate at higher temperatures.
224
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Mechanisms
Example 9.17
Using the graph below, find the value of Eact.
-7
S -9
-10-11-
i-(K)
-1
3.00 x 10"
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.25 xlO"3
3.50 x 10 T
L6xl06J/mole
1.6xl05J/mole
1.6xlO4 I/mole
1.6xl03J/mole
Solution
Bytaking natural log of the equation: k = A e a ' RT, we get the following:
Ink = -JM1) + InA
(t1)
R \T
It looks like the equation of a line (y = mx + b, where m is the slope, and b is the
y-intercept), so if we plot In k as a function of T"*, then the slope depends on

activation energy and the y-intercept is the Arrhenius constant. By multiplying
the slope of the line by - R, we get the activation energy. The slope of the line is:
-11 - (-6)
Slope =
3.25 x 10"3 - 3.00 x lO-3
0.25 x 10"3
Multiplying the slope by -1 and R, yields:
_ -2
2.5 x 10"4
= -2x 10H
10-4
Eact = - (-2 x104) x R= 2 x 104 x8.3 = 1.6 x 105, choice B.

Example 9.18
Which of the following does NOT always affect the rate of a reaction?
A. Changing the temperature
B. Adding a catalyst
C. Increasing the volume by adding solvent
D. Adding a reactant
Solution
The equation for rate is rate = k [reactants]rds, where rds means rate-determining
step. If the reactant being added is not involved in the rate-determining step,
then it does not influence the rate. This is observed in dissociative reactions (like
the SNl-reaction), where the reaction rate is determined by the dissociation of

just one molecule. The best answer is choice D. Changing the temperature
changes the rate directly. This eliminates choice A. Adding a catalyst lowers the
activation energy and thus increases the reaction rate. This eliminates choice B.
Increasing the volume reduces the concentrations of all reagents, including the
reactants in the rate-determining step. This eliminates choice C. Increasing
volume of a gas phase reaction also results in a decreased reaction rate.
225
General ChemiStry
Chemical Kinetics
Reaction Mechanisms
Effect of Catalyst
Catalysts are added to a reaction to lower the activation energy (energy of the
transition state) and consequently to increase the rate of reaction. Catalysts react
with the reactants to form an activated complex of lower energy than the normal
transition state for the uncatalyzed reaction. Biological catalysts are referred to
as enzymes. An enzyme lowers the rate of a biological reaction by forming an

enzyme-substrate complex. Enzymes are a little more specific than catalysts in
that they also help to align the moleculesinto the correct orientation for reacting.
Enzymes causeproducts to have a specific chirality. Catalysts are not consumed
in the reaction. Catalystsdo not make a reaction more or less favorable, because
they increase the rate of the reversereactionand the rate of the forward reaction
equally.
Example 9.19
Which of the following statements is NOT true about catalysts?

A. Catalysts do not react in the reaction pathway.
B. Catalysts are not consumed in the reaction pathway.
C. Catalysts change the reaction pathway.
D. Catalysts allow the reaction to react more quickly.
Solution
The question asks for a "NOT true" statement. This means that you are searching
for the false statement in the answer choices. Catalysts do react in the reaction
pathway; otherwise, they would not lower the activation energy of a reaction. If
this seems strange, think about any acid-catalyzed mechanism from organic
chemistry. The acid protonates a reactant to increase its reactivity. A good
example is the protonation of a carbonyl to make the OH group. Upon
protonation, the carbonyl becomes more electrophilic. Once the reaction is
complete, the proton comes off of the carbonyl. This makes statement A a false
statement. To be sure about choosing A, remember that catalysts are regenerated
at the end of a reaction, so they are not consumed in the reaction. Choice B is
therefore true. Catalysts do change the reaction pathway (to one of lower
energy), so choice C is true. Catalysts lower the activation energy so that
reactions may proceed more quickly. This makes choice D true. The only false
choice is choice A.
Example 9.20
In which of the following values is the concentration of a homogeneous catalyst

NOT directly involved?
A. The equilibrium constant (K)
B. The rate constant (k)
C.
The reaction rate
D. Both the equilibrium constant (K) and the rate constant (k).
Solution
A catalyst (homogeneous or heterogeneous) does not affect the thermodynamics

of a reaction. By definition, catalysts change only the reaction rate for a given
reaction. A catalyst is therefore not involved in the equilibrium constant (K).
This makes choice A correct. A catalyst is definitely involved in the reaction rate,
because it is involved in the rate constant.
226
The Berkeley Review
Kinetics
Passages
10 Passages
80 Questions
Suggested Kinetics Passage Schedule:

I:
After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, III, IV,VII, & X
II:
Following Task I: Passages II, V, & VI, (23 questions in 30 minutes)

Ill:
Review: Passages VIII, IX & Questions 73 - 80

Berkeley
Kinetics Study Passages

I.
II.
Reaction Rate from Visible Spectroscopy
(1 -7)
(8- 14)
Michaelis-Menten
III.
Reaction Rate from Graph
(15 - 21)
IV.
Catalyst Turnover Rate
(22 - 28)
Half-life Calculations and First-Order Decay
(29 - 35)
nucleophilic Substitution Rate
(36 - 44)
VII.
Cobalt-Exchange Mechanism
(45 -51)
VIII.
Oxygen-Transfer Mechanism
(52 - 58)
Chelating Effect
(59 - 65)
Proposed Mechanism
(66 - 72)
(73 - 80)
V.
VI.
IX.
X.
Kinetics Scoring Scale

Raw Score
MCAT Score
70 - 80
13 - 15
53 - 69
10 - 12
37 - 52
7 -9
26 - 36
4-6
1 - 25
1 -3
2.
A. a product.
Reaction 1 represents a generic reaction between two

reactants to form two moles of a single product.
A + B
The peak at Xmax = 684 is BEST described as:

B. a reactant.
C. a catalyst.
2C
D. an intermediate.
The reaction is monitored over time using a spectrometer

with a wavelength range from 200 nm to 800 nm. The three
spectra in Figure 1 represent the reaction initially, the
Which of the following statements is NOT true

regarding absorbance?
reaction after one minute, and the reaction after two minutes.
A. As the length of a cuvette increases, the absorbance

increases.
B. The concentration is directly proportional to

absorbance.
C. The absorbance always increases when the

temperature increases.
D. Molar absorbtivity constants are specific for each
individual compound.
The rate of reaction found by monitoring the peak at
547 nm would be:
550
400
700
Wavelength (nm)
A.
AAbs
At
B. -
AAbs
At
C.
AAbs
At X [Clink
AAbs
D.
550
400
At X [C]init
700
Wavelength (nm)
Which of the following statements is TRUE regarding

the rate of reaction?
A. Products appear at a constant rate throughout the

reaction.
B. Products appear at a gradually decreasing rate

throughout the reaction.
400
550
C. Products appear at a gradually increasing rate

throughout the reaction.
D. Reactants disappear at a constant rate throughout
700
the reaction.
Wavelength (nm)
What CANNOT be determined from the experiment?
Figure 1
A. The rate of disappearance of A

B. The rate of appearance of C
The absorbance for each peak can be converted into

solute concentration using Equation 1:
C. The concentration of B after two minutes
Abs = [C]l
D. The order of the reaction with respect to A
Equation 1
Which assumption is NOT true?
The term Abs refers to the absorbance of light, 6 is the

molar absorbtivity, [C] is the concentration in solution, and 1
is the path length of the cell. The peak appearing just below
700 nm is found to belong to the product, C.
A A[A]- *A[C]
At
B.
At
1.
To monitor the reaction at constant wavelength, it

would be BEST to lock the setting at:
C.
D.
B. 545 nm
At
At
2A[A]_A[C]
At
C. 625 nm
2A[B]_A[C]
At
A. 470 nm
At
A[B] _ i A[Cj
At
D. 695 nm
229
9.
A. It helps to align the reactants correctly.

B. It lowers the energy of the transition state.
The kinetics of enzymatic processes obeys the rules of

Michaelis-Menten kinetics. Michaelis-Menten kinetics for
C. It increases the reaction rate.

D. It makes the reaction more exothermic.
enzymatic processes is based on enzymatic reactions being

carried out in two steps. The first step is the rapid formation
of the enzyme-substrate complex. The second step is the
slowstep, in which the enzymeis regenerated and the product
is formed. A general reaction mechanism is shown in Figure
10. When the catalyst is saturated, what is the reaction order

with respect to substrate?
1.
ES
k2
Which is NOT true about the role of an enzyme?
A. Zero-order
B. First-order
C. Second-order
D. Third-order
Figure 1
where E is the enzyme, S is the substrate, ES is the enzymesubstrate complex, and P is the product.
The first step is a rapid equilibrium, so the [ES] remains
11. Given the following equation for the reaction rate, what
is true when the reaction rate (v) is equal to one-half of
the maximum reaction rate (vmax)?
constant, unless the substrate concentration diminishes to a
level where it is comparable to the enzyme concentration. At

this point, the rate becomes dependent on the substrate.
Figure 2 illustrates this behavior:
max
[S]
kM + [S]
A.
B.
C.
D.
The reaction is first-order;

The reaction is first-order;
The reaction is zero-order;
The reaction is zero-order;
[S] = kj^.
Vmax = kj^.
[S] = kMVmax = k^.
12. Which graph BEST shows [ES] and [E] as a function of

time?
[Substrate]
A.
Figure 2
The reaction obeys first order kinetics until the enzyme

is saturated and the enzyme-substrate concentration remains
constant. The rate of the reaction obeys Equation 1, where
the k2 is the rate constant for the rate-determining step, and
the [ES] is found using the steady state approximation.
Rate = k2[ES]
[ES] =
D.
[E][S]
(^LM) +[S]
3K
Equation 1
The relationships between the rate data can be found
[ES]-
The enzyme-substrate complex can be classified as

[E]
13. The rate for an enzymatically catalyzed process that

obeys the laws of Michaelis-Menten kinetics is:
A. A product
B. A reactant
A.
B.
C.
D.
C. A transition state*
D. An intermediate
Time
Time
through simple algebraic manipulation.
8.
Time
Time
230
rate = kj [Enzyme]
rate = k2 [Enzyme]
rate = ki [Enzyme-Substrate complex]
rate = k2 [Enzyme-Substratecomplex]
14. Which graph accurately shows substrate concentration

as a function of time for an enzymatic process that
begins with the catalyst saturated with substrate?
A.l
If the rate constant, k, is known for a standard reaction at
a series of temperatures, the Arrhenius constant, A, and

activation energy, Eact, can be determined using Equation 1:
B.
lnk = -E^t + lnA

RT
Equation 1
The Arrhenius constant takes into account collision
Time-
Time-
Time
Time-
frequency and the orientation of the molecules. For instance,

in an Si\|2-reaction, not all collisions result in a reaction.
Only the collisions oriented with the nucleophile aligned to
attack the electrophile from the backside of the leaving group
result in a reaction. Although the rate of a reaction can
change with varying reactant concentrations, the rate constant
for the reaction is constant throughout the reaction.
Reaction 1 is a one-step chemical reaction that was
carried out in CCI4 solvent (an aprotic non-polar solvent) to
determine the relationship between temperature and the rate
constant (k). The gases were bubbled into two separate
solutions of carbon tetrachloride to a saturation point. The
two solutions were then mixed, and the reaction was
observed.
S03(g) + NO(g) -> S02(g) + N02(g)

Reaction
Table 1 shows the results of six trials carried out at
various temperatures on the Celsius scale.

T (C)
Mr1)
log k
T
0
3.66 x 10-3
7.87 x 10"7
-6.10
25
3.36 x 10"3
3.46 x 10"5
-4.46
35
3.25 x 10"3
1.35 x 10"4
-3.87
45
3.14 x 10"3
4.98 x 10"4
-3.30
55
3.05 x IO-3
1.50 x 10-3
-2.82
65
2.96 x IO-3
4.87 x 10"3
-2.31
Table 1
The values in the chart contain slight errors, due to

mechanical error within the UV-visible spectrophotometer
used to measure the reactant and product concentrations. The
values in this chart show a correlation between the reaction
temperatureand the rate constant for the reaction.

15. As temperature increases, which of the following are
observed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
231
k
k
k
k
increases; reaction rate increases.

increases; reaction rate decreases.
decreases; reaction rate increases.

decreases; reaction rate decreases.
16. Which of the following represents log k as a function of
2 0. Why is the initial rate observed in reaction studies?
1?
A. As a reaction proceeds, it slows. The same period

in the reaction must be compared to be consistent.
B. As a reaction proceeds, its rate increases. The same
period in the reaction must be compared to be
B.
A.
60
o
/
T
C.
consistent.
C. Only the initial rate can be accurately measured.

D. Any rate can be measured, but the initial one is
most convenient.
D.
21. To measure the rate of a reaction, which of the
following CANNOT be observed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The rate of appearance of product

The rate of disappearance of reactant
The change in intermediate concentration over time
The change in reactant and product concentration as
a function of time
17. Which of the following rate equations applies to

Reaction 1?
A. rate = k[S03]
B. rate = k[N0]
C. rate = k[S03][N0]
D. rate = k[S03]2
18. When the solvent for the reaction is changed, the rate
varies in a predictable manner. Which of the following
variables is MOST affected by the change in solvent?
A. Activation energy
B. Temperature
C. Reactant concentration
D. The Rvalue
19. When plotting In k as a function of J-, the slope of the

T
line is equal to which of the following?

A. Eact
B. -Eact
C.
Eact
R
D.
Eact
R
232
22. Which of the following graphs BEST represents the

formation of product as a function of time in a system
initially saturated with reactant relative to the catalyst?
Heterogeneous catalysis differs from homogeneous

catalysis in the phase of the catalyst. As implied by the term
"heterogeneous," the catalyst in heterogeneous catalysis is
not evenly distributed through the solution. A common
example involves hydrogenation of an alkene using platinum
metal as a catalyst. The catalysis takes place only on the
surface of the platinum, and not throughout the solution.
A.
B.
This means that the rate of reaction varies with the surface
area of the catalyst, not with its concentration.
Time
In homogeneous catalysis, the catalyst is evenly

distributed throughout the solution, and the catalysis takes
place evenly throughout the solution. A common example
of homogeneous catalysis is the addition of hydronium ion to
solution to assist in the acid catalysis of ketal formation from
a ketone. The hydronium ion is evenly distributed in
solution. In homogeneous catalysis, the rate of the reaction
varies with the concentration of the catalyst.
Time
Time
To determine the strength of a hydrogenation catalyst,

the Reaction 1 was employed using four different catalysts.
The turnover rate was observed and recorded for each of the
catalysts. The turnover rate is defined as the rate of the

reaction divided by the number of active catalytic sites. The
units for turnover rate is reactions per second at the catalytic
23. Which catalyst can be used in the LOWEST

concentration to obtain a set rate?
site.
H3C
\
c=c
H3C
H3C
CH2CH3
/
\
H2
CH2
Reaction
A. (Me3P)3RhCl
-C C^H
B. Pd/Pd02
C. Pt/Pt02
H3C
cat
CH2CH3
\
CH2
D. (Me5C5)2IrCO
24. For a catalyst in an industrial system, the number of

active sites affects the turnover rate. What can be
concluded about the maximum turnover rate of one
Table 1 below lists the catalyst versus the turnover rate

associated with each of the four catalysts:
catalytic site, if the catalyst contains three catalytic sites

butthecatalyst is NOT saturated with reactant?
Catalyst
Turnover rate iOOLJ
(Me3P)3RhCl
8000
Pd/Pd02
26,500
assuming the three catalytic sites react equally.
Pt/Pt02
35,000
B. The maximum turnover rate of one catalytic site is
(Me5C5)2IrCO
6500
A. The maximum turnover rate of one catalytic site is

less than one-third of the observed turnover rate,
greater than one-third of theobserved turnover rate,

assuming thethree catalytic sites react equally.
Table 1
C. The maximum turnover rate of one catalytic site is

exactly one-third of the observed turnover rate,
The experimental values are obtained from reaction rate

studies using UV-visible spectroscopy. The reaction rate is
divided by the surface area of each catalyst, which is best
assuming the three catalytic sites reactequally.

D. The turnover rate of one catalytic site is exactly
one-third of the observed turnover rate, assuming
the three catalytic sitesdo NOTreactequally.
approximated by the shape of the material on which the

catalysts is plated. In industrial processes, the catalysts are
often applied to the surface of an inert material, such as
graphite. This is done to maximize the surface area of the
material, while keeping it a material large enough to filter
out of solution easily at the end of the experiment.
233
25. Which of the following is NOT an example of
heterogeneous catalysis?
A.
B.
C.
D.
First-orderdecay processes follow a predictable pattern of

decreasing concentration over time. The concentrationat any
given time can be calculated using Equation 1, if the initial
concentration,the time, and the rate constant for decay are all
known. Equation 1 applies only to a first-order decay
(H3C)2CO + H2 with Pd/Pd02 -> (H3C)2CHOH

H3CCOCI + C6H6 with AICI3 -> C6H5COCH3
H2CCH2 + H2 with Pt/Pt02 -> H3CCH3
CH4 + CO with (Me3P)3RhCl -> H3CCHO
process.
Ct = Cie-kt
Equation 1
where Q is the concentration at time t, Q is the initial

concentration, k is the rate constant, and t is time.
2 6. What is always TRUE about a catalyst?

A. A catalyst is always consumed in a reaction.
B. A catalyst is always produced in a reaction.
The half-life for a first-order decay process is constant

over the course of the decay. If the half-life is known, then
the rate constantfor a first-order decay process can be found,
as shown in Figure 1 below:
C. A catalystis alwaysregenerated duringa reaction.

D. A catalyst is always altered in a reaction.
Ct = C;e-kt
Q B e-kt
att= ty2, i =1
Cj
1 = e"ktlfe
27. If a catalytic site has a binding affinity for the product,
what will be observed over time?
lnl =
A. Both the turnover rate and the overall reaction rate
-kM.
increase.
kty, = - In 1 = In 2
B. Both the turnover rate and the overall reaction rate
decrease.
k = -ln_2 = 0.693
C. The turnover rate increases, while the overall
ty2
reaction rate decreases.
ty2
Figure 1
D. The turnover rate decreases, while the overall
The half-life can also be determined from the rate
reaction rate increases.
constant using the same relationship. In summary, the rate

constant and the half-life for a first-order decay process are
inversely proportional.
29. Which of the following graphs does NOT depict firstorder decay behavior?
28. Why is a heterogeneous catalyst applied to the surface
A.
of an inert solid for industrial reactions?

A. To maximize the surface area
B. To increase the concentration
C. To makethe catalystmorebuoyant
D. To make the catalyst less soluble
234
3 4. What must be TRUE about a reaction that fits the graph
30. If k is doubled, then the half-life of a first-order decay:
below?
A. increases by a factor ofe2.

B. increases by a factor of 2.
C. decreases by a factor of 2.
D. decreases by a factor ofe2.
[Reactant]
A. The reaction is second-order at high [Reactant] and
31. What is TRUE about the value of half-life for a
first-order at low [Reactant].
reaction?
B. The reaction is first-order at high [Reactant] and
A. The value of the half-life is constant in first-order
second-order at low [Reactant].
reaction, while it decreases with time in a zero-order
C. The reaction is zero-order at high [Reactant] and
reaction.
first-order at low [Reactant].
B. The value of the half-life is constant in first-order
D. The reaction is first-order at high [Reactant] and
reaction, while it increases with time in a zero-order
zero-order at low [Reactant].
reaction.
C. The value of the half-life is constant in both zeroand first-order reactions.
D. The value of the half-life decreases with time in

both zero- and first-order reactions.
3 5. Which of these reactions has a constant half-life?
A. One step: X + X- X2
B. One step: X + Y - XY
C. Two steps: X + Y-Z + Q->W + Y

32. What are the units of the rate constant for a first-order
D. One step: X -> A + B
reaction?
A. sec
B. -L
sec
C. [M]-sec
D.
M
sec
33. What period of time is required to reach the point in a

first-orderdecay where only 20% of the original reactant
remains?
A. t = In 5 x k
B. t = lnlxk
5
C. 1= -*In5
D. 1= - ^
k
235
39. What would the apparent reaction order be with the

following concentrations?
In both organic and inorganic chemistry, one of the most

common mechanistic questions is, "Does the leaving group
leave first, or does the nucleophile attack first?" In organic
chemistry, the two reaction mechanisms are referred to as
SnI and Sjsj2. In inorganic chemistry, the two reaction
mechanisms are referred to as associative (SN2-like) and
dissociative (Sn 1-like). A researcher ran the same
nucleophilic substitution reaction four times at the same
temperature, varying the concentration of reactants with each
[CH3SNa] = 1.25 M
A. Zero-order
B. First-order
C. Second-order
D. Third-order
40. The following reaction is said to proceed by a

dissociative mechanism. If the concentration of
trial. Table 1 below lists the data for the four trials:
[CH3SNa]
[CH3CH2I]
0.10 M
0.15 M
0.10 M
0.25 M
0.20 M
0.20 M
0.15 M
0.30 M
Co(en)2NH3Cl2+ were todouble, and the concentration
Rate (M/sec)
2.10
3.52
5.58
6.33
x
x
x
x
of NH3 to triple, the new reaction rate would be

changed in what way?
10-5
10-5
10"5
10"5
Co(en)2NH3Cl2+ + NH3 - Co(en)2(NH3)23+ + Cl'

A.
B.
C.
D.
Table 1
CH3SNa + CH3CH2I -> CH3CH2SCH3 + Nal

Reaction
[CH3CH2I] = 0.05 M
It would be twice as large.

It would be three times as large.
It would be four times as large.
It would be six times as large.
41. Which of the following does NOT increase the rate of
The data in Table 1 were collected by monitoring the

formation of thio ether in Reaction 1 by UV spectroscopy.
The rate of the reaction is assumed to equal the rate of
formation of the thio ether. There were no major side
productsobservedduring the reaction. The data were repeated
in subsequent trials of the experiment. The reproducibility of
an associative concerted reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Increasing the temperature

Adding solvent
Adding one of the reactants
Using a less viscous solvent
the data helps to substantiate the conclusions of the

experiment.
42. What is the rate constant for the ethyl iodide
36. If methanol were used in place of sodium methyl
substitution reaction listed in Table 1?
sulfide, then the reaction would show which of the
A. 1.40x10-3 M/^
B. 3.15x10-3 [MI/^
following changes under identical conditions?

A. The reaction rate would increase.
B. The reaction rate would stay the same.
C. 1.40 x10-3 VtMI-sec

D. 3.15 x10-3 V[M]sec
C. The reaction rate would decrease.
D. The reaction rate would exactly double.
37. What would the rate be, if the reaction were run with
4 3. The reaction order of the dissociative mechanism is:
the following concentrations?
[CH3SNa] = 0.25 M
A. zero-order.
[CH3CH2I] = 0.10 M
B. first-order.
A. 2.10 x10-5 IM]/sec

B. 3.52 x10-5 M/^
C. 5.58 x10-5 M/^
C. second-order.
D. third-order.
44. Which of the following statements is INVALDD with

respect to the rate of an SnI reaction?
D. 6.33 x10-5 [M]//sec
A. The reaction rate varies with electrophile

concentration.
3 8. What is the reaction order of Reaction 1?
B. The reaction rate varies with nucleophile

concentration.
A. Zero-order
B. First-order
C. The reaction rate varies with temperature.
C. Second-order
D. The reaction rate varies with solvent.
D. Third-order
236
Passage VII (Questions 45 -51)
4 7. Which of the following kinetic relationships is predicted

for Reaction 1 using steady-state approximation?
Mechanisms for chemical reactions are either supported
A. ki [[(NH3)5CoCl]2+][OH-]
or disproven by data. For a mechanism to be accepted by the

scientific community, it must be capable of predicting
reactivity and of holding form, even under varying reaction
conditions. Two common procedures for evaluating the
validity of a mechanism are isolating an intermediate in the
reaction and studying the effect on the reaction rate when
varying the concentration of components. The rate depends
on only the rate-determining step, so any altering of the
concentrations of species involved in the rate-determining
= (k., + k2) [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+] [H20]
B. kj [[(NH3)5CoCl]2+][OH-]
= (k., + k2) [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+]
C. kj [[(NH3)5CoCl]2+][OH-]
= k., [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+] [H20]
+ k2[[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+]
D. ki [[(NH3)5CoCl]2+][OH-]
step results in a change in the reaction rate. Conversely, if

thespecies you alteris not in the rate-determining stepof the
= k.,[[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+]
+ k2 [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+] [H20]
mechanism, then the rate is not affected. Reaction 1 below

has been analyzed by kinetics:
2+
[(NH3)5CoCl]
2+
[(NH3)5CoOHr +C1
+ OH
Reaction
48. Which of the following statements is TRUE about the

relative acidity of the cobalt compound?
A. PKaNH3>pKa [(NH3)5CoCl]2+].
B. PKaNH3 =pKa [(NH3)5CoCl]2+].
C. PKaNH3<pKa [(NH3)5CoCll2+].
Figure 1 lists the currently accepted three-step

mechanism for Reaction 1:
Step I (fast):
[(NH3)5CoCl]2+ +OH'
Step II (slow):
[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]H
:l
k2
D. There is no comparison between the two.
[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl] +H20
[(NH3)4CoNH2]
2+
49. Which of the following statements is TRUEwithregard
+C1
to the rate of reaction for the reaction presented in the

passage?
A. The rate increases as both the pH and temperature
Step IH (fast):
[(NH3)4CoNH2]2+ +H20
2+
[(NH3)5CoOH]
increase.
B. The rate decreases as both the pH and temperature
Figure 1
increase.
Theratedatawere gathered by observing the formation of

intermediates and products over time. The concentration of
intermediates and products is found by monitoring the
absorbance of various species using UV-visiblespectroscopy.
The peak for the intermediate grew initially and then remained
C. The rate increases as the pH increases, while the

rate decreases as the temperature increases.
D. The rate decreases as the pH increases, while the

rate increases as the temperature increases.
constant until the end of the reaction, when it decreased to
zero. The peaks for productsalso grow over time.
50. A catalyst does all of the following EXCEPT:
45. What is the rate-determining step in the proposed
A. affect the rate-determining step.
mechanism?
B. increase the reaction rate.
A. Step I
B. Step II
C. Step in
C. lower the activation energy.
D. increase the equilibrium constant.
D. Both Step I and Step II are rate-determining.
51. Whatare the units for kobs in the rate equation, if rate
46. Addition of water to the reaction would have what
kobs I[(NH3)5CoCl]2+][OH-]?
effect?
A. [M^sec1
B. [Mlsec"1
A. It would increase the reaction rate.
B. It would have no effect on the reaction rate.
C. sec-1
C. It would decrease the reaction rate.
D. [Ml^sec'1
D. It would make the reaction third-order.
237
53. Addition of a catalyst to a reaction results in which of

the following?
The mechanism for a reaction can be inferred from the

kinetic data.
A. An increase in the forward reaction rate only

B. An increase in the amount of SO3 formed
The kinetic data determine the reactants that
affect the rate of a reaction.
The reactants in the rate-
C. An increase in both the forward and reverse reaction
determining step can be used to predict a mechanism to match
rates
the kinetic data. If one of the reactants does not affect the rate
D. An increase in the amount of both S02 and 02
of the reaction, then the reaction must be a multi-step

reaction. A one-step reaction shows a rate dependence on all
of the reactants. Reaction 1 was observed at varying initial
concentrations for the reactants. The temperature was held
constant for each trial.
2 S02(g) + 02(g) -> 2 S03(g)

Reaction
54. The mechanism for the reaction is MOST likely to be

Table 1 lists the initial reaction rate for four trials of
Reaction 1, carried out at varied concentrations.
initial rate 1J
PS02 ink P02 init
2.17 x 10-2
0.60 atm
0.40 atm
2.13 x 10-2
0.60 atm
0.80 atm
8.66 x 10-2
1.20 atm
0.40 atm
8.72 x lO"2
1.20 atm
0.80 atm
A. Fast:
Slow:
B. Slow:
Fast:
S02(g) + 02(g) -> S03(g) + O(g)

S02(g) + O(g) -> S03(g)
S02(g) + 02(g) - S03(g) + O(g)
S02(g) + O(g) -> S03(g)
C. Fast:
Slow:
D. Slow:
Fast:
S02(g) + S02(g) - S03(g) + SO(g)

SO(g) + 02(g) -> S03(g)
S02(g) + S02(g) -> S03(g) + SO(g)
SO(g) + 02(g) -> S03(g)
Table 1
The reaction order in terms of each reactant can be
determined from the data Table 1. Because oxygen shows no

5 5. What is the relative change in concentration over time
between oxygen and sulfur trioxide?
effect on the reaction rate, the reaction is said to be zero-order
with respect to oxygen gas. The fact that oxygen is zeroorder simply means that oxygen is not involved in the ratedetermining step of the reaction. The same results were
observed when the reaction was repeated at different
temperatures. The reactions rates were greater at higher
A. A[Q2]-[2Ats3]
At
At
B. A[0l]- 2A[S3]
At
temperatures, but the reaction order remained the same for
At
both sulfur dioxide and oxygen gas.
C. A[02l = + IA[S03l
52. Which of the following accurately reflects the
D. A[02l- lA[SQ3]
At
correlation between the initial rate and the concentration
At
At
At
of sulfur dioxide?
A.
B.
56. As the reaction proceeds, what is observed for the total

pressure of the system?
[S02]
C.
A. The total pressure increases at a constant rate.

B. The total pressure decreases at a constant rate.
C. The total pressure increases at a gradually
decreasing rate.
[S02]
D.
D. The total pressure decreases at a gradually

decreasing rate.
[S02]
[S02]
238
5 7. Which of the following changes does NOT increase the

rate of a reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The rate at which a metal takes on ligands depends on

several factors. The strength of the coordinate covalent bond
between the metal and the original ligand (leaving group)
plays a major role. The frequency of collision between the
new ligand and the transition metal complex also plays a
role. Unique to transition metal substitution chemistry is the
chelating effect. The chelating effect is observed when a
Increasing the temperature of the reaction

Decreasing the volume of the container
Adding sulfur dioxide to the mixture
Adding oxygen to the mixture
ligand is polydentate (possesses more than one lone pair to be

shared with the metal), in which case the second coordinate
covalent bond forms more rapidly than the first. This is to
say that once one site has been coordinated, the chance for
collision of a second lone pair with the transition metal has
increased over that of ligands free in solution. The net result
is that it is easier for a polydentate chelating agent to form
subsequent bonds to a metal than its first bond. Polydentate
chelating agents have two or more lone pairs to share.
58. When the same experiment was carried out at elevated

temperatures, it was observed that the rate began to vary
with oxygen concentration. How is this best explained?
A. The mechanism of the reaction changed so that
oxygen was now involved in the rate-determining

step.
A researcherset up an experiment to study Reaction 1, in

an effort to support the concept of the chelating effect. A
B. The mechanism of the reaction changed, so that
oxygen was no longer involved in the rate-
series of hexa-coordinate metals with three sites bound by a
determining step.
polymer and the otherthreesites bound by phosphine ligands

was exposed to a compound containing three amine
functional groups (H2NCH2CH2NHCH2CH2NH2). The
reactant has a visible absorption at Xmax = 519 nm. The
product transition metal complex has a visible absorption at
Xmax = 465 nm. The rate of the reaction is monitored by
visiblespectroscopy. Reaction 1 is drawn below:
C. The bond energy of oxygen is lower at higher

temperatures.
D. The bond energy of sulfur dioxide is greater at

higher temperatures.
polymer
H2NCH2CH2NHCH2CH2NH2
V^
O... NH2-^
3 PR3 + polymer
M NH
Reaction
The rate of the reaction can be monitored by either the
disappearance of reactant or the appearance of product. A

normal substitution reaction on a transition metal complex
shows either first-order or second-order kinetics. In either
case, the observed rate gradually decreases over time. The

chelating effect predicts that the rate of formation of
phosphine actually increases with timefor a shortperiod.

59. Which method is NOT effective for monitoring the
reaction rate?
A. Monitoring the appearance of polymer-MC4Hi3N3

B. Monitoring the disappearance of PR3
C. Monitoring the disappearance of C4H13N3
D. Monitoring the disappearance of polymer-M(PR3)3
239
60. Which of the following is TRUE for the observed

reaction rate of a generic reaction?
64. Which of the following statements CANNOT be true
A. The observed reaction rate increases over time
I. Adding methyl groups to the nitrogens of the

triamine species reduces the reaction rate.
about Reaction 1?
during an endothermic reaction.

B. The observed reaction rate is greater, if a higher
energy product is formed.
C. The observed reaction rate is greater, if a higher
energy transition state is formed.
D. The observed reaction rate is greater, if a lower
energy transition state is formed.
II. Steric hindrance forming the transition state

complex increases the reaction rate.
DJ. Increasing the temperature lowers the energy level

of the transition state.
A.
B.
C.
D.
I only
Ilonly
I and II only
II and m only
61. How can it be explained that the exchange rate for the
first phosphine is slower than that of the second and
third phosphines?
6 5. Which of the following does NOT increase the reaction
A. The second and third phosphines bind the metal
rate?
more tightly, due to increased steric hindrance after

the first phosphine has left.
A. Using one bidentate ligand in lieu of two
B. The second and third phosphines bind the metal

more tightly, due to reduced steric hindrance after
the first phosphine has left.
C. The nucleophilecan more easily displace the second
and third phosphines, due to the chelating effect.
D. The nucleophile cannot displace the second and
third phosphines as easily, due to the chelating
monodentate ligands
B. Adding a catalyst that weakens the leaving group

bond to the transition metal
C. Adding solvent to a saturated solution

D. Increasing the temperature of the solution
effect
62. If in one reaction the R group of the phosphine is

methyl (CH3), what is observed when the methyl is
replaced by ethyl (CH2CH3)?
A. The reaction rate increases with the ethyl, because
steric hindranceof the leaving group has increased.
B. The reaction rate decreases with the ethyl, because
steric hindrance of the leaving group has increased.
C. The reaction rate increases with the ethyl, because
steric hindrance of the leaving group has decreased.
D. The reaction rate decreases with the ethyl, because
steric hindrance of the leaving group has decreased.
63. The FASTEST reaction is observed with which of the
following conditions?
A. A one-step reaction where a strong bond is broken
and a weak bond is formed.
B. A one-step reaction where a weak bond is broken

and a strong bond is formed.
C. A two-stepreaction wherestep I requires breaking a

strong bond and step n forms a strong bond.
D. A two-stepreaction wherestep I requiresbreaking a

strong bond and step II forms a weak bond.
240
68.
Which graph accurately shows the product concentration

as a function of time for a first-order reaction?
The following reaction can be carried out in the gas

phase. Gas phase mechanisms are very different from
solution phase mechanisms, in that the solvent can be
involved in the transition state in a solution phase reaction.
C=0(g) + H20(g) -> C02(g) + H2(g)
Reaction I
Two chemists propose mechanisms to explain the

reactivity of the overall reaction. Chemist I proposes the
following two-step mechanism.
Time
Time
Time
Time
StepI: h;o^h :C=2:-^^-C-=d

H
,+-C'=0*
Step II:
k2
69. Mechanism II would be preferred over Mechanism I
0=
because:
A. carbocations are stabler than free radical carbons.
B. anions are highly stable in the gas phase.
Mechanism I
C. it requires less energy to breaka covalent bond in a

heterolytic fashion than a homolytic fashion.
Chemist II takes issue with the mechanism proposed by
Chemist I, stating that charged molecules are highly unstable

in the gas phase. As an alternative, Chemist II proposes the
following three-step free radicalmechanism:
Step
1 ^&k^-^ H~6=o
Step II:
O.Of
HO-
C=
D. free radicals are stabler in the gas phase than ions.
7 0. Intermediates are defined as:
+ HO-
A. unstable with no lifetime.

B. unstable with a short lifetime.
C. highly stable with no lifetime.

D. highly stable with a short lifetime.
\
c=o
Step HI:
71. If Step II is the rate-determining step in Mechanism I,
i^c=o
then all of the following predictions are valid EXCEPT:

A. Labeled oxygen in CO would notbe found in C02.
B. Adding H20 would increase the rate, because
o=C=0
H
H
[H2C02] would increase.

Mechanism II
C. Removing CO would decrease the rate, because
Both mechanisms have their respective strengths and

weaknesses. Key features to observe include the bond
dissociation energyand the stabilityof intermediates.
[H^C^] would decrease.
D. If the temperature were held constant, the rate

would decrease as the reaction proceeds.
66. If the rearrangement step in Mechanism I is slower than

the addition step, what is true about the reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
72. With which observation would BOTH mechanisms

agree?
The reaction is one-step, and rate = ki[H20][CO].

The reaction is one-step, and rate = k2[H2C02].
The reaction is two-steps, and rate = k\ [H20][CO].
The reaction is two-steps, and rate = k2[H2C02].
A . Doubling the [H20] doubles the rate.
B. Carrying out the reaction in ether solvent would

yield the same results.
C. As the temperature increases, the reaction rate
increases.
67. A catalystplays what role in the reactionmechanism?

A. It increase the value of Keq.
D. The Keq is greater with amore stable intermediate.
B. It decreases the value of AG.

C. It increases the value of AH.
D. It decreases the value of the activation energy.
241
77. Given the following data, what is the concentration of
Questions 73 through 80 are NOT based on a descriptive
X at time t = 3?
passage.
73. As AGact increases, which of the following statements

is TRUE?
I. A larger temperature is needed to obtain the same

reaction rate.
II. Fewer molecules have the amount of energy

necessary to overcome the activation barrier.
EI. A catalyst further increases AGact-
Time
[X] (M)
1.00
0.56
0.35
0.25
A. 0.33 M
B. 0.31 M
A.
B.
C.
D.
I only
II only
monly
I and n only
C. 0.30 M
D. 0.28 M
74. For a first-order reaction with k = .0693 sec"1, what is

the half-life, given In 2 is 0.693?
7 8. Whichof the following graphs BEST represents [B] as a

function of time for the following reaction?
A. 10 seconds
B.
2A -> B + C
1 second
C. 0.10 seconds
D. 0.01 seconds
75. For the hypothetical reaction listed below, the rate of
disappearance ofAis0.450 -^-.

sec
2A - B + C
The rate of appearance forB is which of the following?

A. 0.225-M.
sec
B.
0.450 îsec
C. 0.900 M.
sec
D. -0.450 -M.
Time
Time
sec
76. Which of the following is NOT true about an

intermediate?
7 9. The rate-determiningstep in a two-step reaction is:
A. The intermediate is in its highest concentration just

after the start of the reaction.
B. Intermediates have finite lifetimes.
A.
B.
C.
D.
C. An intermediate is in its highest possible

concentration when it is formed after the rate-
always the first step.

always the second step.
always the fastest step.
always the slowest step.
determining step of the reaction.
D. An intermediate is in its highest possible

concentration when it is formed before the rate-
determining step of the reaction.
242
8 0. The HIGHEST intermediate concentration is found with
which of the following graphs?

A.
f
u
i
Reaction Coordinate
B.
t
6
tt,
Reaction Coordinate
C.
t
B
PL,
Reaction Coordinate
D
"Time flies by when you're doing chemistry!"
I
B
fl
LL,
Reaction Coordinate
2.
3.
4. B
6. D
7.
12.
D
D
9. D
8.
13.
18.
23.
28.
33.
38.
43.
48.
53.
58.
63.
68.
73.
78.
14. A
19.
24. B
29.
34.
1.
11.
17.
C
c
22.
32. B
37. B
41.
42.
46.
47. C
52. D
16.
21.
26.
31.
36.
D
D
C
D
71. A
76. C
51.
56.
61.
66.
243
27. B
57. D
62. A
67. D
72.
77.
5. B
10.
15.
20.
25.
30.
35.
39. B
44. B
40.
A
C
49. A
50. D
54.
55. D
60. D
65. C
59. B
64. D
69.
74. A
79. D
A
A
B
C
D
45. B
70. B
75. A
80. C
ENOUGH KINETICS FOR NOW!
Kinetics Passages Answers

Reaction Rates from Visible Spectroscopy
Choice B is correct. At 625 nm, there is no peak throughout the experiment, so choice C should be eliminated
immediately. The largest initial peak of the three remaining choices occurs at 545 nm. The peak at 695 nm at t
= 2 is also large, but it is difficult to monitor product formation, because it is not possible to calibrate the
machine in the beginning, given that initially there is no peak for products. It is best to monitor the largest
peak associated with a reactant, because at that wavelength, there is the greatest absorbance. The greater the
initial absorbance, the greater the change in absorbance. This leads to the best results when monitoring the
change in absorbance. The best answer is choice B.
Choice A is correct. Because the peak at 684 nm is growing as the reaction proceeds, the peak is best described
as belonging to a product. The best answer is therefore choice A. A reactant peak disappears over time, as seen
with the peaks at 470 nm and 547 nm. A catalyst peak remains fairly constant throughout the course of the
reaction. An intermediate peak grows and then holds steady for a while before gradually dropping off to zero
at the end.
Choice C is correct. The absorbance is directly proportional to the cell length, the molar absorbtivity constant,
and the concentration according to the equation. This makes choices A and B true. The molar absorbtivity
constant is specific for each compound, so choice D is true. Onlychoice C can be false. The absorbance can vary
with temperature as the compound and concentration vary, but not necessarily in a predictable manner. The
change is not known, so the word "always" makes choice C invalid.
Choice B is correct. The peak at 547 nm belongs to a reactant, as is shown by its gradual decrease in
concentration over the course of the reaction. The rate at which the peak at 547 nm diminishes is equal to the
rate of disappearance of reactant, which is the negative of the rate of appearance of product. We define
reaction rates according to the formation of product, so the reaction rate is the negative of the change in
absorbance. The value for reaction rate should always be positive or zero. The concentration and absorbance
are directly proportional, so their changes should be proportional. The best answer is choice B.
Choice B is correct. Products appear at a gradually decreasing rate, because the reaction rate slows over time
until it reaches zero. The products show their biggest change in concentration initially, and the magnitude of
the change decreases with the reaction time. The best answer is choice B. The rate slows because the reaction
slowly runs out of reactant as it approaches equilibrium.

6.
Choice D is correct. The order ofthe reaction cannot be determined without running the reaction at least twice.
The order refers to the dependency of the rate on the reactant concentrations. The concentration of one of the
reactants must be varied between two separate trials to determine its effect on the rate. All other variables
must be held constant. The best choice is D.
7.
Choice C is correct. The product appears at twice the rate at which the reactants disappear, because of the 1to- 2 ratio ofreactants to the product in the balanced equation. This factor is important in most instances, but in
this particular question, the answer can be found based solely on the negative sign. Because the product (C)
appears while the reactants (A and B) disappear, the rates of change for compounds A and B relative to
compound Cmust differ by a negative sign. Anegative sign is present inevery answer choice except for choice C,
making choice C the best answer.
Michaelis-Menten Kinetics
Choice D is correct. The enzyme-substrate complex is detectable by spectroscopy, meaning it has a measurable
lifetime, so it cannot be a transition state. Transition states are short-lived species that cannot be detected.
Choice C is eliminated. The enzyme-substrate complex is present neither in the beginning nor at the end of the
reaction, meaning that choices A and B are eliminated. It is best described as an intermediate, so the best
answer is choice D.
244
Section IX Detailed Explanations
9.
Choice D is correct. The enzyme is a catalyst, and like all catalysts, it lowers the activation energy (the
energy of the transition state complex in the rate-determining step) and thus increases the reaction rate. This
eliminates choices B and C. An enzyme is special in that it is chirally active, and thus it is responsible for
aligning the reactant molecules correctly. This eliminates choice A, because it is a valid statement. Catalysts
do not affect the thermodynamics of the reaction, as they are not present in the reactant or product. This means
that the reaction cannot be made more exothermic by an enzyme. Thus, choice D is a false statement, and
therefore the best answer.
10.
Choice A is correct. Because the rate does not change upon the addition of substrate once the enzyme is
saturated, the reaction obeys zero-order kinetics (which is confirmed by the fact that there is no change in rate
over time). It is alluded to in the last paragraph of the passage that the reaction has lost its first-order
behavior by becoming zero-order. It is best if you were to select choice A. Zero-order reactions have constant
reaction rates, which according to Michaelis-Menten terminology is known as Vmax.
11.
Choice A is correct. This is a classic Michaelis-Menten kinetics question, which is best solved through
mathematical substitution and manipulation. The calculation is as follows:
V
[S]
2
Vx
Vmax[S]
kM + [S]
kM + [S] = 2[S] = kM = [S]
kM + [S]
The reaction is first-order, because the enzyme is not saturated when the reaction rate is one-half of Vmax, so
the reaction rate depends on the substrate concentration ([S]). The math shows that kM = [S], making choice A
the best answer choice.
12.
Choice D is correct. The enzyme-substrate complex is an intermediate. Therefore, it should not be seen in the
beginning and at the end of the reaction. It should be present only during the course of the reaction. This
eliminates choices A and C. The enzyme starts and finishes with the same quantity; but because it is converted
to the enzyme-substrate complex during the reaction, its concentration dwindles to zero in the middle of the
reaction. This is best described by choice D. From the graphs, it can be seen that the intermediate is in a
steady-state concentration only during the middle of a reaction. This is why the steady-state approximation
only applies during the middle of a reaction, once equilibrium between the intermediate and reactants has been
established.
13.
14.
Choice D is correct. The relevant information is given directly in the passage, so your answer should be the
obvious choice of answer D. If you chose not to read the passage, then you should at least know that the
reaction when the enzyme is saturated has its second step as its slowest, (and thus rate-determining) step.
Choice Ais correct. Because the catalyst is initially saturated, the reaction proceeds according to zero-order
kinetics, which can be viewed as uniform decay at a constant rate. This is seen with all four answer choices.
The reaction evolves slowly from zero-order to first-order, meaning that no sharp changes should be observed.
This eliminates choice D. Choice C should be eliminated, because the erratic rate behavior shown at the end
of the reaction would not be observed. Choice Bshould be eliminated, because the reaction rate should be
constant, and then gradually slowly down, not speed up. The graph that best shows zero-order kinetics slowly
evolving into first-order kinetics is choice A.
Reaction Rates from Graphs
15. Choice Ais correct. From the equation, as Tincreases, the value for ^ decreases. This means that the value
of - ImI increases. Because - ^
RT
is directly proportional to In k, In k must also increase, as does k. The
RT
ultimate conclusion is that k increases with T. The reaction rate also increases with T, so answer A is correct.
16. Choice Ais correct. Equation 1, the rate equation, is the equation of a line where y is In kand xis T" . This
eliminates choices Cand D. As log k increases (as you read down the chart), the value of T"1 increases. This
makes graph A correct.
245
17.
Choice C is correct. It is stated in the passage that the reaction is a one-step reaction, so the rate depends on
both reactants. The reaction is second-order when there are two reactants and the mechanism is concerted. The
correct answer is choice C, rate = k[SC>3][NO].
18.
Choice A is correct. The temperature and R constant are independent of any other factors. This eliminates
choices B and D. The concentration of all solutes (including the reactants) is affected by changing the solvent,
but only by the quantity of solvent added, not the type of solvent. In one liter of solution, the concentration is
the same, independent of the solvent. This means that changing solvent may not necessarily change the
concentration of reactants. The question emphasizes a change in the type of solvent, not a change in the amount
of solvent (concentration). This makes choice A the best answer. The activation energy is affected, because the
solvent can solvate the transition states and thus stabilize or destabilize the transition state. Changing the
stability of the transition state changes the activation energy, so changing the solvent affects the reaction
rate. If you need a tangible example to support this notion, consider nucleophilic substitution reactions. A
polar/protic solvent favors an Sfsjl-reaction while a polar/aprotic solvent favors an Sj\j2-reaction.
19.
Choice D is correct. Viewing Equation 1 as the equation for a line, In k is the y-term and T"1 can be considered to
E
be the x-term. Tlie slope is - ^- and the y-intercept is In A. The question asks for the slope, so choose D is the
best answer.
20.
Choice A is correct. The reaction rate depends on the concentration of the reactant, so the reaction rate
decreases as the reaction proceeds, because the reactant concentration decreases over the course of the reaction.
The fact that the rate decreases eliminates choice B. In reality, the rate at any given time can be measured
accurately, but precisely the same time interval in the course of the reaction must be measured in each trial for
the values to be comparable. In practicality, the rate is determined after the concentration has been measured
for the duration of a reaction. The rate at any point in the reaction is thus easy to measure. This eliminates
choice C. The initial rate is chosen primarily because that time can most accurately be repeated in subsequent
trials, which assures that the time of the reaction is the same in each comparative trial. This makes choice A
the best choice.
21.
Choice C is correct. The rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of appearance of product and/or the rate of
disappearance of reactant. This means that either the rate of appearance of product or the rate of
disappearance of reactant can be monitored to determine the reaction rate. This eliminates choices A and B.
The intermediate concentration should remain fairly constant in a multi-step reaction; but in a one-step
reaction, there is no intermediate formed. This means that choice C is an invalid statement and thus the
correct answer selection. Choice D is eliminated, because by definition, the rate of a reaction is the change in
reactant and product concentration as a function of time.
22.
Catalyst Turnover Rate
Choice A is correct. If the catalyst is the limiting reagent in the rate-determining step, then the catalyst
regulates the rate of the reaction. The reaction can go only as fast as free sites on the catalyst open up. This
means that the reaction proceeds at a constant rate (the rate at which the catalyst can reopen catalytic sites
after binding a reactant molecule) until the reactant begins to be depleted. The product forms at a constant rate
until the reaction reaches a point where the catalyst is no longer the limiting reagent. At this point, it follows
standard kinetics by gradually slowing to a stop. The graph that shows this best is choice A. Choice D shows
a change in rate that is too abrupt. The reaction gradually slows, rather than abruptly stopping. Choice C
shows a reaction that gradually speeds up, then abruptly stops. There is no common scenario that would
produces such results. Choice Bis just tossed in there to complete the four choice per question requirement, and
should be eliminated immediately.
23.
Choice C is correct. The catalyst that can be used in the lowest concentration is the one with the greatest
turnover rate. The passage does not discuss the lifetime of a catalyst, so only the rate of reaction need be
considered. Table 1 lists the turnover rate of the four choices. The fastest turnover rate is 35,000 reactions per
second, so the catalyst that can be used in lowest concentration and still have a fast reaction rate is Pt/PtC>2.
The best answer is choice C. The rate of a catalyzed reaction depends on catalyst concentration and turnover
rate.
Copyright by The Berkeley Reviewa^
246
24.
Choice B is correct. If all three catalytic sites react equally, then it can be assumed that each site has a
turnover rate of one-third that of the observed turnover rate for the catalyst. Because the catalyst is not
saturated, the observed turnover rate is less than the maximum turnover rate for the catalyst. Combining these
relationships yields the following:
Maximum site rate= i- Maximum catalyst turnover rate >1 Observed catalyst turnover rate = Observed site rate
3
This assumes that the maximum turnover rate per catalytic site is equal to or less than one-third of the
maximum turnover rate for the catalyst. Choice A can be eliminated, because the maximum turnover rate of one
catalytic site is greater than, not less than, one-third of the observed turnover rate. Because the maximum
turnover rate per catalytic site is therefore greater than one-third of the observed turnover rate for the
catalyst when it is not saturated, the best answer is choice B. The maximum turnover rate of one site equals onethird of the observed turnover rate only when the catalyst is saturated. Because the catalyst is not saturated,
choice C can be eliminated. If the sites do not react equally, then no solid conclusion can be drawn. This
eliminates choice D. Pick choice B.
25.
Choice B is correct. A heterogeneous catalyst does not evenly distribute itself in solution. This is most
commonly observed when the catalyst is in the solid phase and the reaction is either a gas phase or solution
phase reaction. Aluminum trichloride is a Lewis acid that dissolves into solution evenly to react throughout
the solution with the acid chloride. Tlie three metal catalysts listed as other choices (Pd/Pd02, Pt/Pt02, and
(Me3P)3RhCl) are from Table 1 of heterogeneous catalysts, so they are all examples of heterogeneous catalysts.
The best choice is answer B.
26.
Choice C is correct. A catalyst by definition is neither consumed or produced in a reaction, so choices A and B
are eliminated. A catalyst is regenerated in the reaction, which means that the correct choice is answer C. A
catalyst is not altered in a reaction, unless it undergoes an undesirable reaction that renders it useless. The
word "always" appearing the answer choice should get your attention, but because it is present in all of the
answer choices, we can disregard any concerns.
27.
Choice B is correct. If the product has a binding affinity for a catalytic site, then it does not release from the
catalytic site as easily. This means that the product competes with the reactant for the catalytic site. Less
free catalyst is available for the reactant as more of the product is formed. Because increasingly more product
is formed as the reaction proceeds, the catalytic turnover rate slows as the reaction proceeds. This means that
both the reaction rate and the turnover rate slow as the reaction proceeds. That makes choice B correct. This is
known as feedback inhibition.
28.
Choice A is correct. The turnover rate for a heterogeneous catalyst in the solid phase depends on its surface
area. The more surface area, the more active sites available to reactant. To maximize the surface area, a solid
catalyst can be powdered. An alternative to powdering the catalyst is to apply a thin coating of the catalyst
to the surface of an inert solid. As mentioned in the passage, carbon is often chosen as the inert solid, because
metals can be reduced onto the surface of carbon through electroplating. Choose A as the best answer to this
question. The other advantage to plating a metal catalyst onto the surface of an inert solid is the ease with
which the catalyst can be removed (filtered) from solution once the reaction is complete. A large chunk of solid
can be removed from solution rather easily.
Half-Life Calculation and First-Order Decay
29.
Choice C is correct. For a first-order reaction, the rate does in fact decrease with time, so choice A accurately
depicts a first-order reaction. For a first-order reaction, the half-life remains constant, so the decay of reactant
and formation of products is greatest initially, and slowly the rate tapers off. The concentration is based on an
exponential relationship, so the graphs of both the disappearance of reactant and formation of product
appears as they do in choices B and D. In choice C, the graph shows a steady rate throughout the process,
which is true for zero-order reactions, but not for first-order reactions. The best answer is choice C.
30.
Choice C is correct. Because the product of the half-life and rate constant (t,/ x k) is In 2 (a constant), the halflife and rate constant are inversely proportional to one another. This implies that if the rate constant is
doubled, the half-life is cut in half. The best answer is choice C.
247
31.
Choice A is correct.
One notable feature of a first-order reaction is that the half-life remains constant
throughout the reaction. This eliminates choice D. The rate for a zero-order reaction is constant, so it takes
more time to go from 100% reactant to 50% reactant than it does to go from 50% reactant to 25% reactant. This
means that for a zero-order reaction, the half-life is decreasing with time. The best answer is choice A.
32.
Choice B is correct. Because the product of the rate constant and the half-life is a constant, the units of the rate
constant must cancel the unit of half-life. The unit of half-life is simply time, so the units of the rate constant
must be inverse time (see'*). The best answer is choice B.

33.
Choice D is correct. Twenty percent is one-fifth, so in the derivation in the passage, simply substitute one-fifth
for one-half. The math is shown below, which leads you to select choice D.
Q _ e-kt . e-kt _ I
Ci
In 1 = - kt ;. - In 1 = kt
5
In 5 = kt
t - In 5
k
34.
Choice C is correct.
At low reactant concentration, the half-life of the reaction remains constant, which
implies that the reaction is first-order at low concentrations. At higher concentrations, the half-life increases
as the reactant concentration increases. Because a zero-order reaction has a constant rate, the first fifty percent
of reactants takes longer to decay than the next twenty-five percent (the second half-life). This means that as
the concentration increases, the half-life increases for a zero-order reaction. The graph shows zero-order
behavior at higher reactant concentrations. The best answer is choice C. You may recall from enzyme kinetics
that at high substrate concentration, the reaction is zero-order (saturated), but at lower substrate
concentrations, the reaction becomes first-order.
35.
Choice D is correct.
A constant half-life is associated with a first-order reaction.
A first-order reaction
depends on just one reactant in its rate-determining step. In choices A and B, there is one step, but they each
have two reactants, so both of them are second-order. In choice C, there are two steps, but both steps involve
two reactants, so no matter which step is rate determining, the reaction is second-order. In choice D, there is
one step and just one reactant, so the reaction is first-order.
36.
Nucleophilic Substitution Reaction Kinetics
Choice C is correct. Because the overall reaction is second-order, there is a first-order rate dependence on the
nucleophile. Methanol is not as good a nucleophile as the methyl sulfide, so the reaction rate should decrease
with methanol. To support this idea, methyl sulfide is a stronger base than methanol, so methyl sulfide is a
stronger lone pair donor than methanol. This makes choice C the best answer.
37.
Choice B is correct. The reaction is second-order, so rate = k [CH3SNa][CH3CH2i]. The concentration values
given in this problem correspond to the values given in the second row of the chart within the passage, except
in the reverse order (which does not matter in this case, since the reaction is first-order with respect to both
substrates). Rate = k [0.25] [0.10] =3.52 x10"5, so answer Bis the right choice.
38.
Choice C is correct. It is stated in the passage that the reaction is a substitution reaction, which depends on
either one or two reactants. This makes it either an Sjsjl reaction, and thus a first-order reaction, or an Sf\j2
reaction, and thus a second-order reaction. To determine the dependence on both reactants, hold the
concentration of one of the reactants constant, and observe how the rate changes with an increase in the
concentration of the other reactant. Comparing the data for the first two trials, [CH3CH2I] is increased by a
factor of five-thirds, while [CH3SNa] remains constant. The rate between the first two trials also increases by
a factor of five-thirds. This implies that the reaction is first-order with respect to CH3CH2I. There are no
two trials to compare where [CH3CH2I] stays constant. This is where intuition comes into play. From Trial 1 to
Trial 4, [CH3CH2I] increases by a factor of two, while [CH3SNa] increases by a factor of 1.5. If the reaction
depends only on [CH3CH2I], then the rate will increase by a factor of two, while if the reaction depends on
both, the rate will triple. The rate does in fact triple, so the reaction rate depends on both reactants. The
reaction is second-order, meaning it is an Sjsj2 reaction. Choose C.
248
39.
Choice B is correct. According to Table 1, the reaction is second-order; but since [Ch^SNa] is much larger than
[CH3CH2I], we can disregard the reactant in high concentration ([CH^SNa]) in the rate equation. The normal
rate law for a second-order reaction is rate = k [CH3SNa][CH3CH2l]; but because [CH3CH2I] [CH3SNa],
the rate law is given as rate = k0bs [CH3CH2I], because throughout the duration of the reaction, the [CH3SNa]
stays relatively constant so it does not act as a variable. It becomes engulfed by k0bs. Thus, even though the
reaction is truly second-order, it appears to be first-order due to the vast difference in concentrations. This is
referred to as pseudo first-order. The best answer is B.
40.
Choice A is correct. Since the reaction mechanism is dissociative, the rate of the reaction can be only as fast as
the reactant that dissociates. This also means that the rate of the reaction depends on the concentration of the
species that dissociates. In this case, Co(en)2NH3Cl2+ is the only reactant in the rate-determining step, so
doubling its concentration will in turn double the reaction rate. The new reaction rate is twice as large as the
reaction rate was before doubling the reactant concentration. The nucleophile NH3 has no direct effect on the
rate. Choose A for success and correctness.
41.
Choice B is correct. Increasing the temperature of a system increases the reaction rate, by providing the
reactant molecules more energy to overcome the activation barrier. Choice A is thus eliminated. Adding
solvent lowers the concentrations of all species in solution, including the two reactants in the rate determining
step. Adding solvent decreases the reaction rate, so choice B does not increase the reaction rate. The best
answer is choice B. Adding a reactant in the rate determining step increases the reaction rate. The reaction is
concerted (one-step), so all reactants are involved in the rate determining step. This means that addition of one
reactant increases the reaction rate, so choice C is eliminated. Using a less viscous solvent in a one-step reaction
allows the molecules to move through solution faster, and thus collide more frequently. An increase in collision
frequency causes an increase in reaction rate, so choice D is eliminated.
42.
Choice C is correct. According to the data in Table 1, the reaction order for the ethyl iodide substitution
reaction is second-order, so the rate is proportional to the product of reactant concentrations. This makes the
rate law for the reaction equal to k [CH3SNa][CH3CH2l]. The rate constant can be solved for by substituting
any row ofdata points from the table. Choosing the first row of data points yields: 2.10 x 10~5 = k [0.15][0.10],
and solving for k yields:
=2-10xl0"5M/s =L40 x10-3 [M]
k =
s~l, choice C.
0.015 M'
43.
Choice B is correct. A dissociative reaction mechanism is synonymous with the Sj\jl reaction mechanism in
organic chemistry, which is known to be a first-order reaction. In inorganic chemistry, a dissociative

mechanism means a ligand dissociates (leaves) first before another one attaches to the central metal. Choice B
is the best answer.
44.
Choice B is correct. The rate of an Sfsjl reaction depends exclusively on the electrophile concentration, since the
electrophile must dissociate (the leaving group must leave) before a nucleophile can attack. The dissociation
reaction of the electrophile is the rate-determining step, so answer choice B is not a valid statement. The
nucleophile has no influence on the rate of an S^l reaction. The rest of the choices are valid with respect to the
rate of an Si\jl reaction.
Cobalt-Exchange Mechanism
45.
Choice B is correct. As stated in the passage, the slowest step of the three steps is Step II. A reaction can
proceed only as fast as the slowest step in the mechanism, so the rate-determining step must be Step II. Choice
B is the best answer.
46.
Choice C is correct. Adding water to the reaction mixture would push the Step I reaction backwards, generating
more reactants ([(NH3)5CoCl]2+ and OH") and consuming the intermediate product ([(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+).
The rate-determining step, Step II, depends on the concentration of the product from Step I
[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+. Thus, a decrease in products from Step I slows down the rate-determining step, thereby
decreasing the overall reaction rate. Tlie best answer is choice C. Choose C for sensations of correctness and
satisfaction.
249
47.
Choice C is correct. The steady state approximation says that after an initial period of time, balance within
the reaction takes place, and the concentration of any intermediates stay relatively constant (in a steady
state). This means that the rate at which the intermediate is produced is equal to the rate at which it is
consumed. The intermediate in this case is [(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+, which is held constant by being in the rate-
determining step. It is formed by the forward reaction in Step I and consumed by both the reverse reaction of
Step I and the forward reaction of Step II. Water is involved only in the reverse reaction of Step I, so water
must appear only with k_i- This eliminates all choices except C, which is the correct choice. In choice C, the
rate law for the reaction that forms the intermediate is set equal to the sum of the rate law for the reverse
reaction of Step I and the forward reaction of Step II.
48.
Choice A is correct. Because of the bulky metal group attached to NH3, the lone pair is withdrawn from the
nitrogen, which increases the acidity of the protons bonded to nitrogen. This is verified by Step I, where the
hydroxide anion (OH") deprotonates a proton from the NH3 that is attached to the cobalt. Hydroxide anion is
not strong enough to deprotonate ammonia normally, so the cobalt complex must have increased the acidity of
ammonia. Increased acidity results in the lowering of the pKa, so choose A for best result. The metal acts like a
Lewis acid, and the ammonia acts like a Lewis base.
49.
Choice A is correct. As pH is increased, the [OH"] is increased, so the equilibrium of Step I is pushed to the
product side, resulting an increase in [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+]. As [[(NH3)4Co(NH2)Cl]+] increases, the rate of
the reaction increases. So, as the pH increases, it can be concluded that the rate of the reaction increases. A
temperature increase always affects the reaction rate, so pick A.
50.
Choice D is correct. A catalyst does not increase the equilibrium constant (product yield). A catalyst increases
only the ease and rate at which the reaction proceeds to the products. That is, it lowers the activation energy
which speeds up the rate-determining step, which increases the reaction rate. Choice D is not characteristic of
a catalyst.
51.
Choice D is correct. The units for rate are molar per second, and the units for concentration are molar. Solving
for the units of k0bs gives us M'V1, which makes choice D the best answer.
kobs -
M/sec _ Vsec _
rate
product of concentrations
M-sec
Oxygen-Transfer Mechanism
52.
m2
Choice D is correct. Table 1 shows that when the partial pressure (and thus the concentration) of sulfur dioxide
is doubled, and the partial pressure of oxygen remains constant, then the rate of the reaction is quadrupled.
This means that there is an exponential relationship between the initial rate and sulfur dioxide. This is best
shown in choice D.
53.
Choice C is correct. A catalyst lowers the activation energy for a reaction. According to the principle of
microscopic reversibility, the same pathway that is taken for the forward reaction is also taken for the reverse
reaction. This means that a catalyst lowers the activation energy for both the forward and the reverse
reactions by the same amount. Consequently, the forward and reverse reaction rates are both lowered, making
choice C the best answer.
54.
Choice D is correct. Because the reaction rate does not depend on oxygen gas, O2 cannot be involved in the ratedetermining (slowest) step of the reaction mechanism. This eliminates choices B and C. Because the rate
depends on the square of the partial pressure of sulfur dioxide, SO2 must be in the rate-determining (slowest)
step twice. This is demonstrated by the slowest step involving two molecules of SO2. This eliminates choices
A, making the best choice D.
55.
Choice D is correct. For every one oxygen molecule lost, two sulfur trioxide molecules are gained. This means
that the equality between the two rates must contain both a negative sign and a factor of 2. Choices A and C
are both eliminated because they both lack a negative sign in the equality. The magnitude of the rate of
consumption of oxygen is one-half that of the magnitude of the rate of formation of sulfur trioxide, so choice D
is the best answer.
250
56.
Choice D is correct. Because three gas molecules lie on the reactant side of the equation and only two gas
molecules lie on the product side of the equation, the total pressure of the system decreases as the reaction
proceeds forward. The reaction is fastest initially, so the pressure shows the greatest reduction in the early
stages of the reaction. As the reaction slows, so does the rate at which the total pressure of the system
decreases. The total pressure decreases, but at a gradually decreasing rate, until it comes to rest. Choice D is
the best answer.
57.
Choice D is correct. The rate of the reaction increases when the temperature increases, so choice A is valid and
thus eliminated. Decreasing the volume of the container increases the concentration of the reactants, so the
rate increases. Choice B is valid and thus eliminated. Because sulfur dioxide shows a dependency on the rate
of the reaction, choice C is valid and thus eliminated. As shown in Table 1, there is no effect on the rate when
oxygen is added. Choice D is the best answer.
58.
Choice A is correct. The only way that the rate could depend on oxygen would be if the rate-determining step
involved oxygen. At the temperature of the original experiment, oxygen was not involved in the ratedetermining step. Adding a catalyst sometimes lowers one step of a reaction enough so that it is no longer the
rate- determining step. In this case, the increased temperature gives rise to an altogether different mechanism,
where oxygen is now involved in the rate determining step. This is sometimes seen with thermodynamic versus
kinetic control reaction mechanisms, where a change in the system temperature changes the mechanism the
reaction proceeds by. The best answer is choice A.
Chelating Effect
59.
Choice B is correct. To monitor the rate of a reaction, one must monitor either the appearance of product or
disappearance of reactant. The products are polymer-MC4Hi3N3 and PR3, so the reaction can be monitored by
the appearance of either one. Choice B suggests monitoring by the disappearance of PR3, which would not
work. The reactants are C4H13N3 and polymer-M(PR3)3, so it is correct to monitor the reaction by their
disappearance. Choice B is the best answer.
60.
Choice D is correct. An endothermic reaction absorbs heat, so that over time, the reaction cools tlie solution. As
the solution cools, the reaction rate decreases, resulting in a lower observed reaction rate. This eliminates
choice A. A higher energy product is associated with an endothermic reaction (or less exothermic reaction), so
the rate decreases, because the heat energy in the system decreases. Choice B is eliminated. A higher energy
transition state requires more activation energy, so the rate decreases. This eliminates choice C. The correct
answer must be choice D because of the lower activation energy associated with the lower energy transition
state.
61.
Choice C is correct. The ligand replacing the phosphines is a tridentate ligand. Therefore, after the new
ligand attaches, the second and third lone pairs of the tridentate ligand can more easily bind the metal and
displace the phosphine. This is known as the chelating effect and makes choice C the best answer choice. The
chelating effect is greatest in associative (Si\j2-like) mechanisms where there is a rate dependence on the
nucleophile. The chelating effect is weakest in dissociative (Sisjl-like) mechanisms where there is no rate
dependence on the nucleophile.
62.
Choice A is correct. The ethyl substituent is larger than the methyl substituent, so the triethyl phosphine is
bulkier than the trimethyl phosphine. This makes the triethyl phosphine a better leaving group. The rate of
the reaction increases with the ethyl substituents, making choice A the best answer. Whether the reaction
mechanism is associative or dissociative, the leaving group affects the reaction rate.
63.
Choice B is correct. Any time that a strong bond must be broken it slows the reaction rate. A one-step reaction is
faster than a two-step reaction as a general (but not absolute) rule. The lowest activation energy is associated
with the breaking of a weak bond. The best answer is choice B.
64.
Choice D is correct. By adding methyl groups onto the nitrogens of the amine, the steric hindrance in the
transition state increases and thus the reaction rate decreases. This makes statement I a true statement. The
fact that steric hindrance in the transition state reduces the reaction rate makes statement II false (not true).
Changing the temperature affects only the free energy in the system and does not affect the energy levels of any
transition states. This makes statement III false (not true). The correct answer is therefore choice D.
251
65.
Choice C is correct. Using one bidentate ligand instead of two monodentate ligands increases the reaction rate,
because of the chelating effect. It is easier for the second lone pair of a bidentate ligand to bind the central
metal than it is for a second ligand to attach to the metal. Choice A is thus eliminated. Adding a catalyst
that weakens the leaving group's bond to the transition metal lowers the transition state energy and thus
increases the reaction rate. Choice B is therefore eliminated. Adding solvent lowers the concentration of all
species in solution, so the concentration of any species in the rate-determining step is reduced. The rate of the
reaction decreases (or remains the same, if it remains saturated), so choice C is the choice that does not increase
the reaction rate. Increasing the temperature of a reaction always increases the reaction rate. Choose C for
best results.
Proposed Mechanisms
66.
Choice D is correct. Regardless of which step is the rate-determining step in the reaction, according to
Mechanism I, the reaction is a two-step reaction, so choices A and B are eliminated. On top of that, the
question discusses two steps (rearrangement and addition), so it can't be one-step. Because the second step is
rate-determining, the rate law for the reaction is k2 times the reactant in step two (H2CO2). Choice D is the
best answer.
67.
Choice D is correct. A catalyst does not affect the thermodynamic values of a reaction; it affects only the
reaction rate and the transition state energy. Choices A, B, and C are all thermodynamic values, while choice
D involves a kinetic value. This eliminates choices A, B, and C, while making choice D the only possible
choice. The lower the activation energy (transition state energy), the greater the rate of the reaction. This
makes choice D the best answer.
68.
Choice D is correct. Choice A would represent the product formation, if the reaction proceeded at a constant
rate; but a constant reaction rate describes a zero-order reaction, not a first-order reaction. Choice B describes
the consumption of reactant in a first-order reaction. Choice C does not describe any obvious typical graph
associated with kinetics in chemistry. It shows exponential growth, but such things are more associated with
population genetics than chemical kinetics. In choice D, the product concentration is building with time, but
the rate at which it builds (slope of the tangent) is gradually decreasing, indicating that the reaction is
slowing as it proceeds. A gradually diminishing reaction rate is observed with a first-order reaction, so the
best answer is choice D.
69.
Choice D is correct. In the gas phase, free radical carbons are more stable than carbocations, so choice A is a
false statement. If choice A were a true statement, it would support Mechanism I over Mechanism II (not
Mechanism II over Mechanism I), so choice A should be eliminated. Ions in general are not stable in the gas
phase, so anions (being a sub-group of ions) are not stable, making choice B a false statement. Choice C requires
previous knowledge to be eliminated. More energy is required to break a bond in a heterolytic fashion
(resulting in ions) than to break a bond in a homolytic fashion (resulting in free radicals). Choice C should be
eliminated. If you didn't know this, then move on to choice D. Chemist II states that charged molecules are
highly unstable in the gas phase, so choice D must be valid, because free radicals are more stable in the gas
phase than ions are.
70.
Choice B is correct. Intermediates are considered to be unstable relative to products and reactants, so they are
not collected in high concentration. This eliminates choices C and D. A transition state is defined as unstable
with no measurable lifetime, so choice A can be eliminated. An intermediate is said to have a short lifetime,
so choice B is the best answer.
71.
Choice A is correct. Labeled oxygen in the reactant (CO) can still be found in the CO2, because carbon dioxide is
the only reactant that contains oxygen, so all oxygen atoms in the reactants (labeled or not) will be found in
carbon dioxide. This means that choice A is invalid. Adding H2O causes more intermediate to form, so the
reaction rate increases with the increasing intermediate concentration. This makes choice B a valid statement.
Removing CO causes less intermediate to form, so the reaction rate decreases with the decreasing intermediate
concentration. This makes choice C a valid statement. As the reactant concentration decreases, the rate must
decrease, because there are fewer collisions between reactant molecules as the concentration decreases. This
makes choice D a valid statement. Choice A is the best answer.
252
72.
Choice C is correct. Doubling the [H2O] mayor may not change the reaction rate, depending on whether water
is involved in the rate-determining step. Choice A is probably eliminated. Carrying the reaction out in a
different solvent (or in this case, using a solvent), definitely changes the reaction, meaning that one mechanism
may be preferred over the other. This eliminates choice B. Because the rate constant varies directly with
temperature, it is always true that as the temperature is increased, the reaction rate increases. Choice C is
thus the best answer. The stability of the intermediate affects the reaction rate, but should have no bearing on
the Keq for the overall reaction. This eliminates choice D. The Keq for a reaction depends on the stability of
the products and reactants.
Questions 73 - 80
73.
Choice D is correct. Be careful not to use thermodynamics when looking at kinetics in this case. AG = -RT In K,
and a reaction is favorable if AG is negative, according to thermodynamics. This is AGact however, and that is
the activation energy. As the activation barrier becomes greater, fewer molecules can overcome the activation
barrier, and more energy (heat) is needed to obtain the same reaction rate. Statements I and II are both correct.
A catalyst lowers the energy needed to form the transition state, which reduces the value of AGact- It does not
increase the value of AGact, so statement III is eliminated. Answer choice D is consequently the best answer
choice.
74.
Choice A is correct. For a first-order reaction, the half-life is found as follows:
ty2 =hi
k
As given in the problem, the value of In 2 is 0.693 and k is 0.0693 sec"1, so this is just a plug-in mathematical
problem.
ty = 0-693
= 10 seconds
0.0693 s'1
75.
Choice A is correct. Using the equation for the reaction, it is easiest to follow changes in concentration for each
component in the reaction.
2A
- 0.450
->
B
+0.225
C
+0.225
The rate of disappearance of A is twice the rate of appearance of B and C. The rate of appearance of B must be
half of the rate of disappearance of A, which is 0.225 molar per second. Select answer choice A for correctness
rewards.
76.
Choice C is correct. The intermediate is in its highest concentration just after the start of the reaction, because
it is formed from the reactant but is not yet used up to form the product. As the reaction proceeds toward
completion, the intermediate is depleted. Choice A is valid. Intermediates are defined as species that have
finite lifetimes and exist only during the course of the reaction. If the lifetime is too small to be measured, then
the species is referred to as a transition state. Choice B is therefore valid. An intermediate builds up when it
collects before the rate-determining step. This makes choice D valid and choice C invalid, which means the
latter is the best choice.
77.
Choice D is correct. To solve this problem, you must see the trend in the data. The rate of decomposition is
greatest initially, and it slows drastically with time. The data describe a second-order process, where 0.25 is
the concentration after 4 minutes. Because the half-life constantly doubles, the first half-life is 1 minute 20
seconds and the second half-life is 2 minutes 40 seconds. Tlie trend shows that significantly more X decomposes
between 2 minutes and 3 minutes than decomposes during the period between 3 minutes and 4 minutes. This
means that the [X] at the 3-minute mark is less than the midway point between 2 minutes and 4 minutes. The
correct answer must be less than 0.30 M, making choice D the best answer.
78.
Choice C is correct. B is a product, so the [B] is initially zero. This eliminates the graphs in choices A and B.
Equilibrium is represented by a flat slope, but it is reached gradually and is not the sharp point indicated in
the graph in choice D. The graph in choice C is the best representation of the reaction.
253
79.
Choice D is correct. The rate-detenriining step of a reaction is always the slowest step in the reaction. The
slowest step ina two-step reaction can beeither the first orsecond step. The best answer ischoice D.
80.
Choice C is correct. Choices A and B can be eliminated, because there is no intermediate (both reactions are
one-step). The deeper nadir (low point) between the two transition states is associated with the greater
concentration of the intermediate. This makes choice C the best answer.
254
Redox Reactions
a) Determining Oxidation States

b) Oxidation and Reduction
Section X
c) Balancing Redox Reactions

i. by the Bridge Method
ii. by the Half-Cells Method
d) Variations on Balancing
Voltage and Energy
by Todd Bennett
a) Energetics
b) Half-Reaction Potentials (EMF)
c) Cell Potentials
e'flow
c) Free Energy Change

Electrochemical Cells
Salt bridge
a) Definitions and Terminology

b) Galvanic Cell
c) Electrolytic Cell
d) Concentration Effects on Voltage
e) riernst Equation
M(s)
M ox
2+
Oxidation occurs
at the anode
M(s)
Reduction occurs
at the cathode
Redox Applications
a) Batteries
b) Electrical Devices
c)
d)
e)
f)
Chemical Applications
Electrolysis
Electroplating
Galvanizing
BERKELEY
JLJr-E.V.KE'W
Electrochemistry Section Goals

Know the definitions of terms used in oxidation-reduction chemistry.
In oxidation-reduction chemistry, there are two half-reactions which together form the overall
electron-transfer reaction. The species losing electrons is being oxidizedand is referred to as the
reducing agent. The species gaining electrons isbeing reduced andisreferred toas theoxidizing agent
Be able to balance a redox equation in neutral aqueous solution, acid, or base.
You must be able to identify the oxidationstates of atoms within the molecules, determine which
atom has gained electrons and which atom has lost electrons, and then set the stoichiometric
coefficients sothatthesame number ofelectrons lost byone reactant equals thenumber ofelectrons
gainedby the other reactant. Thisbalances the electrons in the reaction. The atoms and charges
must alsobalance, and this is often accomplished by adding either hydroxide anions or hydronium
cations along with water to the reaction.
Be able to calculate the voltage for redox reactions, given the half-cell potentials.
The voltage for a redox reaction is the sum of the half-reactionvoltages. You do not multiply the
voltageby any factor to balanceelectrons, because voltageis measured in terms of a set number of
electrons. For the free energy, the number of electrons becomesimportant, because the free energy
is expressed in terms of moles, not electrons. The equation for the free energy is: AG" = -nFE .
Be able to draw an electrochemical cell and label its components.
In an electrochemical cell, oxidation (loss of electrons) occurs at the anode and reduction (gain of
electrons) occurs at the cathode. This means that electron flow (the opposite of current) is from
anode to cathode. The counter-flow of anions is from cathode solution to anode solution, through
a membrane or salt bridge.
0&* Be able to identify a galvanic cell and an electrolytic cell.
A ejalvanic cell is characterized by a favorable redox reaction that releases energy. An electrolytic
cellis characterizedby an unfavorableredox reactionthat requires the addition of energy. A galvanic
cellhas a solid wire or a voltmeter in the wire, while an electrolyticcellhas a battery (applied voltage)
in the wire.
Understand the principle behind the Nernst equation.

The Nernst equation demonstrates that voltage depends not only on the standard reaction, but also
on the concentrations of the products and reactants. As is true of all reactions, an electrochemical
reactionbecomesincreasinglyless favorable until it reachesan equilibrium state, where in the reaction
shows no net change in concentration. At equilibrium, no energy is exchanged, so the reaction is
complete and the cell is no longer functional. The Nernst equation calculates the voltage of a cell
under any conditions, taking into account this concentration dependence.
Be able to determine the quantity of metal formed during electroplating.
Metal cations plate out on the surface ofthe cathode (electron-rich electrode) when a current is
applied to a cell. This process is known aselectroplating, a special case ofelectrolysis. The voltage
applied when electroplating must be great enough to force an unfavorable reaction to proceed.
Understand how a battery functions.

Batteries are essentially reversible cells that discharge voltage when they are acting in a galvanic
fashion, and that absorb energy when they are acting in an electrolytic fashion. A Dattery can be
made of many electrochemical cellsin serieswith a selectively-permeable membrane for ion exchange.
Understand the similarities between circuits and electrochemical cells.
In physics we discuss voltage and current, while in chemistry these arereferred to aselectrochemical
potential and electronflow, respectively. You should recognize these synonyms and know how chemical
properties of the reactants affect its physical values (e.g.,electron affinity and reduction potential).
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Introduction
Electrochemistry
Electrochemistry addresses chemical reactions that involve electron transfer.
Electrochemistry is found in general chemistry (i.e., electrochemical cells), biology
(i.e., anabolism and catabolism), organic chemistry (i.e., gain and loss of oxygen
atoms by carbon), and physics (i.e., voltage generated by batteries). Because of the
abundance and breadth of electrochemical applications, it is one of the key topics to
fully understand before sitting for your MCAT. We shall start with a general
chemistry perspective by identifying changes in oxidation states and accounting for
electrons to help us answer oxidation-reduction questions. The number of electrons
lost by the molecules being oxidized equals the number of electrons being gained by
the molecules being reduced. The reactant being oxidized experiences an increase in
oxidation state and the reactant being reduced experiences a decrease in oxidation
state.
When electrons are exchanged in an oxidation-reduction reaction, large quantities of

energy are involved. Of the different types of chemical reactions (including
oxidation-reduction, composition, decomposition, substitution, acid-base, and
precipitation), oxidation-reduction reactions generate the greatest change in free
energy and enthalpy. As a consequence of the large amount of energy involved in
oxidation-reduction reactions, they are used as the chemical source of energy for
many everyday devices. Most fuels and power sources stem from oxidationreduction reactions. Common examples include hydrocarbon fuels for combustion
engines, and oxidation-reduction reactions involving transition metals used in
batteries. While chemists keep track of the energy associated with an oxidationreduction reaction, physicists and engineers develop devices to harness this energy.
We need to make sure that our rules and concepts can be used to answer both
chemistry and physics questions.
To harness the energy of electron transfer in chemical reactions, electrochemical cells

are designed to separate the oxidation half-reaction from the reduction half-reaction.
Electrons are transferred through a wire from the molecule releasing the electrons
(located in the anode) to the molecule gaining the electrons (located in the cathode).
The energy associated with electron flow can be converted into mechanical work,
heat, light, and translational energy for particles. The role of a chemist in all of this is
to design an energy source that efficiently generates electron flow. This is done
through galvanic cells and batteries. We will address the difference between a
galvanic cell and a battery later in this section. To understand electrochemical cells,
you must be able to identify the direction of the electron flow and determine the
energy and voltage associated with the process. Electromotive force determines the
cell voltage, which can be converted into an amount of energy that is proportional to
the number of electrons involved in the overall oxidation-reduction reaction.
Electrochemistry also entails reactions that naturally occur in an oxygen rich

environment. Oxygen in the air oxidizes (rusts away) most metals with which it
comes in contact. Natural oxidation is facilitated in the presence of moisture or a
conducting solvent. We shall consider simple biological examples. We will also
consider chemistry concepts such as galvanizing. Galvanizing is a protective process
that involves plating a more reactive metal onto a less reactive metal, so that this
more reactive species (the sacrificial metal) is the one oxidized by air, rather than the
material being protected. Repairs to oxidized metals can be made using
electroplating, which lays a coat of a conducting material onto its surface. This
works only if the material can conduct electricity. Oxidation-reduction chemistry can
also be used to form pure liquids and gases. This procedure is referred to as
electrolysis, and we will address it briefly. Electrochemistry, in summary, covers a
ton of applications.
257
General Cheitlistiy
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Redox Reactions
Determining Oxidation States
Each atom within a molecule shares at least one electron with each neighboring
atom to which it is bonded. Oxidation states of an atom result from electronic
bookkeeping. Oxidation states are based on an all-or-nothing approach to

electron-sharing. Bonding electrons are viewed as being completely associated
with the more electronegative atom. Within a bond, the more electronegative
atom is considered to take all of the electrons, while the less electronegative atom
is considered to get none of the bonding electrons. Determining the oxidation
state of an atom within a molecule requires comparing the electronegativity of
the atom of interest with the electronegativity of all atoms to which it is bonded.
The oxidation state is a sum of these bonding values. Drawn in Figure 10-1
below are the oxidation states for a series of molecules.
Hydrogen:+1
Oxygen:-1-1 =-2
/ , ,-^ ,+V - , \
\ h-^-ci==o j
Sulfur:+1+1 +1+1=+4
Hydrogen: +1
l\\'.-
Chlorine: -1 +1 + 1 = +1
Oxygen:-1-1 =-2
yB
^-'~'-..
( Ht^'~ftjJÔ<^+ '~\
\ XÔ ^. ./^H i
Hvdrogen: +1
. + 11 +\
'
+N
>V
Oxygen: 0 -1 = -1
;>< - \/ +
!. HfO r--: O-rH I

..._y \.._.''
\.. _.y v. _..y
Figure 10-1
Oxygen usually has an oxidation state of -2 (except in molecular oxygen, when

it's 0 and peroxides, when it's -1) and hydrogen usually has an oxidation state of
+1 (except in hydrides, when it's -1 and molecular hydrogen, when it's 0). For
example, in H3P03, H is +1 and O is -2. In order for H3PO3 to be neutral, the
sum of the oxidation states must be zero, so the oxidation state of P must be +3.
In addition, know that alkali metals (group I metals) usually have an oxidation
state of +1, alkaline earth metals (group II metals) usually have an oxidation state
of +2, and halogens usually have an oxidation state of -1 (except in oxyacids and
molecular halogens). Let's consider SOCI2. The oxidation state of sulfur in
SOCI2 is +4 because oxygen is -2 and chlorines are -1 each. For the molecule to
be neutral, the oxidation state of sulfur must be +4. The sum of the oxidation
states of the atoms within a molecule must equal the charge of the molecule.
Example 10.1
In which of the following compounds is the oxidation state of phosphorus the

GREATEST?
A. P406
B. P4
C. PH3
D. POCI3
Solution
Using the idea that hydrogen carries an oxidation state of +1, chlorine -1, and
oxygen -2, the oxidation state of phosphorus can be found in each compound. In
P4O6/ the oxidation state is +3. In P4 (and every pure element), the oxidation
state is 0. In PH3, the oxidation state is -3. Finally, in POCI3, the oxidation state
is +5. This makes the oxidation state of phosphorus highest in POCI3, choice D.
258
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Oxidation-reduction reactions involve the transfer of electrons from the reducing

agent (reductant) to the oxidizing agent (oxidant). The consequence of electron
transfer in a chemical reaction is a change in the oxidation states of at least two
atoms.
If the oxidation state increases due to the loss of electrons, then that
process is oxidation. If the oxidation state decreases due to the gain of electrons,
then that process is reduction. In every redox reaction, there must be both
oxidation and reduction. To help remember the definitons, use the mnemonic
"Leo the red cat say 'GER'." This tells us loss of electrons is oxidation, gain of
electrons is reduction, and reduction occurs at the cathode. Listed below are
some common electrochemistry terms you must know.
Oxidation: A lossofelectrons byan atom, residting in an increase in oxidation state.

Reduction: A gain ofelectrons by an atom, resulting in a decrease in oxidation state.
Oxidizing agent: The reactant doing the oxidizing, getting reduced in the process.
Reducing agent: The reactant doing the reducing, gettingreduced in the process.
A few useful things to know about oxidizing agents and reducing agents are:
Oxidation (LEO)
Reduction (GER)
Loss of electrons
Gain of electrons
Oxidizing Agent
Reducing Agent
Gets oxidized/Cause reduction Gets reduced/Cause oxidation
Ox State increases
Ox State decreases
Rich in H/Poor in O/e" rich
Gain of Bonds to O
Gain of Bonds to H
Metal in low oxidation state
Loss of Bonds to H
Loss of Bonds to O
Catabolism
Anabolism
LiAlH4, NaBH4, Pd/H2

N2H4/OH-, NADH, FADH2
Rich in O/Poor in H/e" poor

Metal in high oxidation state
Cr03/H2S04, KMn04/OH*
RCO3H, O3, NAD+, FAD
Example 10.2
Which of the reactions below represents oxidation-reduction?

I:
HBr(g) + Alfe) -> H2(g) + AlBr3(s)
II:
HC\04(aq) + Ti(OH)2(aq) -> HC\0(aq) + TiC^fs) + 2 H2O0)
III:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Na2CC>3(aq) + HC\(aq) -> H20(/> + C02(g) + NaC\(aq)
I only
II only
I and II only
I and III only
Solution
In Reaction I, the oxidation state of hydrogen changes from +1 (in HBr) to 0 (in
H2), so hydrogen is reduced. Aluminum changes from 0 (in Al) to +3 (in AlBr3),
so aluminum is oxidized. This makes Reaction I an oxidation-reduction reaction.
In Reaction II, the oxidation state of chlorine changes from +7 (in HC104) to +1
(in HCIO), so chlorine is reduced. Titanium changes from +2 (in Ti(OH)2) to +4
(in Ti02) so titanium is oxidized. This makes Reaction II an oxidation-reduction
reaction. This makes choice C correct. Reaction III is an acid-base reaction in
which no oxidation states change. Protons are transferred, but not electrons.
Example 10.3
Which compound is the oxidant (oxidizing agent) in the reaction below?

HCKaq) + KMnOtfaq) + FeC\2(aq) - MnCl2(fl^ + FeCtyfl^ + H2O0) + KCUaq)
A.
B.
C.
D.
HCKaq)
KMnOtfaq)
FeC\2(aq)
MnC\2(aq)
259
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Solution
Oxidizing and reducing agents are reactants, so choice D, MnCl2, is eliminated

immediately. Oxidizing agents (oxidants) get reduced, thus causing oxidation.
Thus, we are looking for the reactant that has an element that finishes with a
lower oxidation state. Mn in KMn04 has an oxidation state of +7. Once reduced,
Mn (in MnCl2) has an oxidation state of +2. Manganese is reduced from +7 to +2

in the reaction. The reactant containing Mn is the oxidizing agent. This makes
choice B, KMn04, the best answer. In the reaction, Fe is oxidized from +2 to +3,
making FeCl2(the iron containing reactant) the reducing agent.

Biological Oxidation-Reduction
Oxidation-reduction reactions are quite common in organic chemistry and

biochemistry. During you MCAT studies, it is inefficient to try to memorize
several biochemical pathways and organic chemistry reactions. The test writers
are typically good about feeding you details in the passage. What will help
greatly in your preparation is seeing the common themes within each of the
various types of reactions. From an organic chemistry and biochemistry
perspective, oxidation is often the gain of bonds to oxygen and/or the loss of
bonds to hydrogen. For instance, dehydrogenation (loss of H2) is an oxidative
process. From an organic chemistry and biochemistry perspective, reduction is
often the loss of bonds to oxygen and/or the gain of bonds to hydrogen. For
instance, conversion from a ketone into a secondary alcohol (loss of a bond to O)
is a reductive process.
Generally speaking, organic and biological oxidizing agents are rich in oxygen
and poor in hydrogen (i.e., Na2Cr04/ KMn04, NAD+, and FAD) and reducing
agents are poor in oxygen and rich in hydrogen (i.e., NaBH4, LiAlH4, NADH,
and FADH2). It might also prove useful to note that like in organic chemistry
where a certain reagent can carry out a specific reaction, biochemical reagents
show a similar repeated reactivity. As a general rule, NADH reduces carbonyls
while FADH2 reduces alkene double bonds. Such knowledge can make several
biochemical pathways easier to process. Consider glycolysis for instance.
Simply put, it's the breakdown of a six-carbon molecule with a carbonyl group
into two three-carbon molecules. Because it's a breakdown (catabolic process,
therefore oxidation), it requires an oxidizing agent. Oxidizing agents are poor in
H, so it requires either NAD+ or FAD. Because it involves a carbonyl and not an
alkene double bond, it requires NAD+ and not FAD. Figure 10-2 demonstrates
this approach to glycolysis.
1 6-Carbon carbonyl compound
Breakdown
2 3-Carbon carbonyl compounds
Involves Breakdown (6C -> 3C), so it is Oxidative/Catabolic
1)
2)
Gets oxidized, so it needs an oxidizing agent (Compound poor in H)
3)
Involves a carbonyl,so it requires NAD+ (NAD for C=0 and FAD for C=C)
CH2OH
o^
2H20
o:0
HO
OH
2 ATP
2 ADP
2NAD+
2 NADH
oxidizing agent
(poor in H)
Glucose
4 ADP
4 ATP
CH,
Pyruvate
Figure 10-2
260
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Balancing Redox Reactions (Balancing Electrons, Charges, and Atoms)

Balancing redox reactions may be accomplished using either the bridge method
or the half-cell method. The bridge method involves connecting atoms that have
changed oxidation states and determining the number of electrons that have
been exchanged. The half-cell method involves breaking the reaction into two
sub-reactions: oxidation and reduction.
In either method, you start by

determining the oxidation states of atoms within the reactant and product
molecules, you balance the reaction electronically by having equal numbers of
electrons involved in the oxidation and reduction half-reactions, and you balance
the charges and atoms last. Balancing oxidation-reduction reactions entails

following a basic recipe. The recipe, shown below, is true for the half-cell and the
bridge methods.
First:
Determine the oxidation states of the atoms.
Second: Identify how many electrons are involved in the oxidation half-reaction
and how many electrons are involved in the reduction half-reaction.
Third:
Balance the electrons (by cross-multiplying the half-reactions).
Fourth: Balance the charges on each side of the equation by adding H+ to the
side with either excessive negative charge or insufficient positive charge
Fifth:
(or OH" to the side with either excessive positive charge or insufficient
negative charge).
Balance the atoms by adding water to the appropriate side of the
reaction.
Bridge Method (Connect-the-Reactants Method)
Balancing by the bridge method entails connecting the oxidizing agent to its
reduced product and the reducing agent to its oxidized product, thereby creating
a so-called bridge. The electron count in each bridge must be the same. To
accomplish this, the bridges are cross-multiplied as shown below:
Consider the following reaction: W(s) + Zr2"1" -> V3+ + Zrfs)

First:
The oxidation state of W(s) is 0, while the oxidation state of vanadium in
V3++ is +3. The oxidation state of zirconium in Zr2+ is +2, while the
oxidation state of ZrCs) is 0.
Connect like reactants and products by a bridge.
Oxidized by 3e'
W(s) + Zr2+
0
+21
*-
V3+ + 2x(s)
+3
0|
Reduced by 2e'
Third:
To balance the electrons, cross-multiply the two bridge half-reactions.

The oxidation half-reaction is multiplied by 2 and the reduction halfreaction is multiplied by 3.
Following the three steps yields the following balanced reaction.

2 Wis) + 3 Zr2+ -> 2 V3+ + 3 Zr(s)
This particular example was straight-forward, and likely could have been done
by inspection. More challenging cases involve the balancing of charges and
atoms, which is accomplished by adding either hydroxide or hydronium,
depending on the pH, and then water.
261
General ChemiStiy
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Consider the balancing of the following reaction in a basic solution:

W03'(aq) + Ti(OH)2(aq) - WO(s) + Ti(OH)4fa^
First:
The oxidation state of vanadium in VO3" is +5. The oxidation state of

vanadium in VO is +2. The oxidation state of titanium in Ti(OH)2 is +2.
The oxidation state of titanium in Ti(OH)4 is +4.
Connect like reactants and products by a bridge.
Reduced by 3e"
I + 2 I
VOjTmj) + Ti(OH)2(aq)
+4
--- WO(s) + Ti(OH)A(aq)

Oxidized by 2e"
Third:
To balance the electrons, cross-multiply the two bridge half-reactions.

The oxidation half-reaction is multiplied by 3 and the reduction halfreaction is multiplied by 2.
2 x 3e"
2WO{(aq) + 3Ti(OH)2fo^
2WO(s) + 3 Ti(OH)4(aq,
3x2e
Fourth: The net charge on the left side of the equation is 2 (-1) = -2, while the net
charge on the right side of the equation is 0. Because the reaction is
carried out in base, hydroxide is added to balance charges. To balance
the charges, 2 OH- are added to the right side, making the net charge on
each side of the equation -2. This yields the following:
2 W03-(aq) + 3 Ti(OH)2(fl^ - 2 WO(as) + 3 Ti(OH)4(^ + 2 OH'(aq)
Fifth:
To balance atoms, count the H atoms on both sides. There is an excess
of 8 H atoms (14 - 6 = 8) on the right side of the equation so 4 H20 are

added to the left side of the equation to balance the hydrogen atoms.
This leaves the following overall balanced equation:
4H2Od) + IWO^'faq) + 3Ti(OH)2fa^ -> 2VO(s; + 3Ti(OH)4(aq) + 2 0H'(aq)
Example 10.4
In acidic solution, what is the balanced form of the following reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Bi03"fn^ + Mn2+(aq) - Bi3+(aq) + Mn04 (aq)

8 H+(aq) + 3 Bi03-fo^ + 2 Mn2+(aq) -> 5 Bi3+(aq) +2 Mn04"fa^ + 4 H2Od)
14 H+(aq) + 5 Bi03"(fl^ + 2 Mn2+(aq) -> 5 Bi3+fa^ + 2 MnO^faq) + 7 H2Of/)
12 H+(aq) +5 Bi03-fa^ +2 Mn2+fa^ -> 5 Bi3+(^ + 2 Mn04'(fl^ + 6 H2O0)
14H+(aq) + 3 Bi03"f^ + 2 Mn2+rn^ -> 3 Bi3+(aq) + 2 MnC>4'(aq) + 7 H2O(0
Solution
First, the electrons must be balanced. The oxidation state of Bi changes from +5
to +3 (Bi is reduced by 2 electrons) while the oxidation state of Mn changes from
+2 to +7 (Mn is oxidized by 5 electrons). To balance the electrons, the bismuth
compounds must be multiplied by 5 and the manganese compounds must be
multiplied by 2. This eliminates choices A and D. Charge must also balance. In
choice B, the reactant side charge is +14 -5 +4 = +13 and the product side charge
is +15 -2 = +13. The charges balance in choice B, making it the best answer.
262
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStiy
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Half-Cell Method (Separate the Half-Reactions Method)

Balancing by the half-cell method entails separating, and independently
balancing the half-reaction of the oxidizing agent to its reduced product and the
half-reaction of the reducing agent to its oxidized product. The electron count in
each half-reaction must be equal. To accomplish this, the half-reactions are crossmultiplied. This method is shown below:
Consider the balancing of the following reaction in a basic solution:
MnOâq) + Znfs) - Mn02<s) + Zn(OH)42"fa^

First:
The oxidation state of manganese in Mn04" is +7, while in Mn02, the

oxidation state of manganese is +4. The oxidation state of zinc in Zn is
O, while in Zn(OH)42" the oxidation state of zinc is +2. Using this

information, the half-cell reactions can be drawn:
Third:
Reduction half-reaction:
Mn04" + 3 e" Mn02
Oxidation half-reaction:
Zn - Zn(OH)42' + 2 e"
To balance the electrons at six for each half-cell reaction, the reduction
half-reaction must be multiplied by 2 and the oxidation half-reaction

must be multiplied by 3.
Reduction:
2 (Mn04" + 3 e" -> Mn02)
Oxidation:
3 (Zn -> Zn(OH)42' + 2 e")
This leads to the electronically balanced half-reaction equations:

Reduction:
2 Mn04" + 6 e" - 2 Mn02
Oxidation:
3 Zn -> 3 Zn(OH)42" + 6e"
Fourth: For the reduction half-reaction, the net charge on the left side of the
equation is -8, while the net charge on the right side of the equation is 0.
For the oxidation half-reaction, the net charge on the left side of the
equation is 0, while the net charge on the right side of the equation is 12. Because the reaction is carried out in base, hydroxide is added to
balance charges. To balance the charges, 8 OH- are added to the right
side in reduction half-reaction and 12 OH- are added to the left side in
oxidation half-reaction. Net charge does not have to equal zero on both
sides of a reaction, it just has to be equal on both sides. This yields the
following half-reactions:
Fifth:
Reduction:
2 Mn04" + 6 e" -> 2 Mn02 + 8 OH"
Oxidation:
3 Zn + 12OH" -> 3 Zn(OH)42" + 6e"
To balance atoms in the reaction, count the H atoms. There is an excess
of 8 H atoms on the right side of the reduction half-reaction, so 4 H2O

are added to the left side to make the hydrogens balance. The atoms are
already balanced in the oxidation half-reaction.
Reduction:
4 H2O + 2 Mn04* + 6 e" -> 2 Mn02 + 8 OH"
Oxidation:
3 Zn + 12OH" -> 3 Zn(OH)42" + 6e"
The two half-reactions are added to complete our balancing process, yielding the
final balanced reaction:
4 H2O0) + 2 Mn04-(aq) + 3Zn(s) -> 2 Mn02(s) + 3Zn(OH)42"^ + 2OWaq)

263
General ChemiStiy
Electrochemistry
Redox Reactions
Potentially Difficult Species (Compounds with Multiple Redox Sites)

Balancing redox reactions is easy when you follow the procedure just outlined in
the previous section. However, there are a few pitfalls of which you should be
aware. They involve compounds with multiple atoms undergoing oxidation or
reduction. Reaction 10.1 and Reaction 10.2 are examples of reduction halfreactions with multiple atoms within a molecule being reduced.
Cr2072" + 6 e" - Cr203
H2O2 + 2 e" -> 2 OH'
Reaction 10.1
Reaction 10.2
Example 10.5
What are the coefficients after the following reaction is balanced in base?
H202 + V02+ -> V02+ + OHA.

B.
C.
D.
1 H2O2
1 H202
2 H202
2 H202
+
+
+
+
2 V02+
2 V02+
2 V02+
2 V02+
-> 2 V02+ + 2 OH' +

+ 2 OH" -> 2 V02+ +
-> 2 V02+ + 2 OH" +
+ 2 OH' -> 2 V02+ +
2 H20
2 H20
2 H20
2 H20
Solution
The oxidation state of oxygen in H2O2 is -1, while in OH", the oxidation state of
oxygen is -2. The oxidation state of vanadium in V02+ is +4, while in V02+ the
oxidation state of vanadium is +5. Two oxygen atoms per peroxide molecule are
reduced, so the peroxide reduction half-reaction requires two electrons (as
shown below). The vanadium oxidation half-reaction releases one electron.
H202 + 2 e- -> 2 OH-
Upon cross-multiplying the half-reactions, the ratio of peroxide to vanadium
oxide dication (V02+) is 1 : 2, eliminating choices C and D. Although it seems

that hydroxide should be on the product side of the reaction, the charges, oxygen
atoms, and hydrogen atoms do not balance in choice A. This eliminates choice
A. Choice B is correct, because hydroxide is added to the reactant side to balance
charges. This cancels out the hydroxide formed upon the reduction of peroxide.
Example 10.6
What is the ratio of silver species to aluminum species in the following reaction?
AgOH(aq) + AKs) -> Agfsj + AlC^-faq)
A.
3:1
B.
1:3
3:2
D.
2:3
Solution
In this example, the silver atom is being reduced by one electron and the
aluminum atom is being oxidized by three electrons. This means that balancing
yields a ratio of three silver species (AgOH) to one aluminum species (AI). The
ratio of the silver species to aluminum species is 3 :1, choice A.
You may have experienced Example 10.6 first hand (or more appropriately, "first
tooth"), if you have ever bitten into a piece of aluminum foil with a tooth
containing an old silver filling. This experience is rather jolting.
264
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Voltage and Energy
Electrochemistry
Voltage and Energy

Energetics
Electrochemistry involves the transfer of energy in oxidation-reduction reactions.
Energy is released in the form of electrical flow. The driving force is a voltage
(Joules per Coulomb). Current is the result of a potential difference (voltage)
between two points that have an electrically conducting medium between them.
This is definitely the case when biting on foil with a silver filling. The task of
interest becomes converting this less than pleasurable jolt into a productive form
of energy (such as heat, light, or mechanical work). The first step involves
determining the voltagethat is generated by an oxidation-reduction reaction.
Electrons flow from the species with the lower electron affinity to the species
with the greater electron affinity. However, we do not calculate the energetics of
the reaction based on electron affinity difference, we use electromotive force
(emf). Electromotive force is a voltage, and exhaustive tables havebeen produced
that list the emf values associated with hundreds of half-reactions.
Half-Reaction Potentials (Standard emf Values Relative to Hydrogen)
The energetics of half-cells are measured relative to the reduction of hydronium

intohydrogen. The reduction of two protons (H+) to form hydrogen gas (H_) is
defined as the reference standard, and assigned an emf of zero volts.
Any
compound that can be reduced more favorably than a proton has a positive
reduction potential. Likewise, any compound for which reduction is less
favorable than a proton has a negative reduction potential. Oxidation values are
relative to the oxidation of hydrogen gas, H2(g). Any compound that can be
oxidized more favorably than a hydrogen gas has a positive oxidation potential.
Likewise, any compound for which oxidation is less favorable than hydrogen gas
has a negative oxidation potential. Table 10.1 is an abbreviated list of some of
common reduction half-reactions and their corresponding emfvalue.
Half Reaction
E"(V)
Half Reaction
E'(V)
Half Reaction
E(V)
Au3+ + 3e' - Au
1.50
2H+ + 2e" -> H2
0.00
Mn2+ + 2e' -> Mn
-1.18
Cl2 + 2e" -> 2 Cr
1.36
Ni2+ + 2e" -> Ni
-0.23
Al3+ + 3e- -> Al
-1.66
Pd2+ + 2e" -> Pd
0.99
Fe2+ + 2e- -> Fe
-0.44
Mg2+ +2e" - Mg
-2.37
Ag+ + le" -> Ag
0.80
Cr3* + 3e" -> Cr
-0.73
Na+ + le" - Na
-2.71
Cu2+ + 2e" -> Cu
0.34
Zn2+ + 2e" -> Zn
-0.76
K+ + le" - K
-2.92
Table 10.1
Example 10.7
Which of the following species is the strongest reducing agent?

A. Cl2
B.
Cu
C. Mg2+
D. Zn
Solution
Reducing agents get oxidized, so we need to reverse the reactions in Table 10.1.
This eliminates choices A and C, because CI2 and Mg2+ cannot oxidize further.
Between Zn and Cu, the more favorable oxidation (reverse reaction from Table
10.1) is found with zinc (0.76 > -0.34). Choice D is the best answer.
265
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Voltage and Energy
Most tables list reduction half-reactions, rather than oxidation half-reactions.
Reduction half-reactions with larger (more positive or less negative) emf values,
are more favorable than reduction half-reaction with smaller emfvalues. Table
10.1 can be used to determine relative strength of an oxidizing agent. Of the
reactants listed in Table 10.1, Au3+ is the strongest oxidizing agent, because it is
the species that undergoes most favorable reduction half-reaction. Conversely,
of the products listed in Table 10.1, K is the strongest reducing agent, because it
is the species that undergoes most favorable oxidation half-reaction. Reactions in
Table 10.1 can be reversed to show oxidation half-reactions. When the half-
reaction is reversed, the sign of emfchanges, but the magnitude does not.
There is a pattern within the table. Generally speaking, precious metals do not
readily oxidize, which is what makes them so ideal for currency. As such, the
cations of precious metals such as gold, silver, platinum, palladium, and to a
small extent copper have relatively high reduction potentials. On the other end
of the spectrum are the alkali and alkaline earth metals, which have relatively
low ionization energies, so they are easily oxidized. As such, the cations of alkali
and alkaline earth metals suchas sodium, potassium, and magnesium have very
negative reduction potentials. Viewing redox questions using a periodic trend
perspective can sometimes make a question easier. For instance, lithium metal is
a better reducing agent thancalcium metal, because alkali metals are moreeasily
oxidized than alkaline earth metals given their lower ionization energies. Lastly
there are the transition metals that tend to make up the bulk of the reduction
table. They have no predictable periodic trends,so there is no clearpattern with
their reduction potentials.
Example 10.8
Which of the following species is thestrongest oxidizing agent?

A. Ca2+
B.
Li+
C. Pt2+
D. Zr2+
Solution
Oxidizing agents get reduced, so we need to determine which species will most
readily gain electrons. None of the reactions are listed in Table 10.1, so we must
depend on periodic trends and intuition. Choice A, Ca2+, is an alkaline earth
metal, soit is stable asa +2 cation. As such, Ca2+ does not have a strong drive to
gain electrons, so it will not be a strong oxidizing agent. Choice A is eliminated.
Choice B, Li+, is an alkali metal, so it is stable as a +1 cation. As such, Li+ does
not have a strong drive to gain electrons, so it will not be a strong oxidizing
agent. Choice Bis eliminated. Choice C, Pt2+, is a valuable metal, soit ishighly
probable that it is unstable as a cation and prefers to be in its metallic state. As
such, Pt2+ likely has a strong drive to gain electrons, so it is a strong oxidizing
agent. Choice C is the best answer so far. Choice D, Zr2+, is a transition metal,
so it's hard to know how it will react. You may notice that the currency metals
are later in the transition metal block of the periodic table, so zirconium beingon
the left side is probably willing to give up electrons and becomea cation. It's not
ideal reasoning, but choice D is not the best answer. Choice C is the best answer.
266
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Voltage and Energy
Cell Potential (Voltage Associated with Redox Reactions Pairs)
The cell potential for an oxidation-reduction reaction is a sum of the oxidation

half-reaction potential and the reduction half-reaction potential. This is shown as
Equation 10.1 below:
ereaction = deduction + eoxidation
(10.1)
The values for e are listed in terms of voltage, which is independent of the
number of electrons in the reaction. Voltage is defined as joules per coulomb, so
the number of electrons in a reaction is not pertinent, given that a coulomb of
charge is the same amount, no matter how many electrons are exchanged in a
reaction. This is to say that a coulomb represents a fixed number of electrons.
Whether a coulomb of charge is gathered one electron at a time or three electrons
at a time, there is a fixed amount of energy per coulomb. The emf value for the
oxidation-reduction reaction from Example 10.6 is determined by a standard
procedure, as shown below:
AgOH(aq) + Alto - Ag(s) + AlOz-(aq)
The half-cell reactions are:
Alfs) -> A\3+(aq) + 3 e"
Ag+(aq) + 1 e' -> Agte)
From Table 10.1,the e for two corresponding reduction half-reactions:
A\3+(aq) + 3 e" -> AKs) ered = -1.66V
Ag+(aq) +1 e" -> Agfs) ered = 0.80V
The Al half-reaction must be reversed to fit the overall reaction, because Al is
oxidized in the reaction. When reversing the Al half-reaction, the emf sign is
reversed too. However, it should be noted, when you multiply a reaction by an
integer, you do not multiply the emf by an integer. Reduction potential is an

intensive property that does not change with conditions. This means that voltage
does not depend on the number of electrons in the reaction. The following value
is determined for the silver-aluminum oxidation-reduction reaction:
Oxidation:
AKs) -> A\3+(aq) + 3 e"
1.66 V
Reduction:
Overall:
3Ag+(aq) + 3e' -> 3Ag(sJ

3Ag+(aq) +Al(s) -> 3Agto +A\3+(aq)
0.80 V
2.46 V
Emf values need not be memorized, but in general, the greater the electron
affinity, the greater the reduction potential. Likewise, a lower the ionization
energycorresponds to a greater the oxidation potential.
Example 10.9
What is the emf for the following oxidation-reduction reaction?

A.
2.38 V
B.
1.70 V
C.
1.02 V
D. 0.68 V
Solution
The redox half-reactions are: C\2(g) +2e" - 2Cl'(aq) and CuCs) -Cu2+(aq) +2e\
According to Table 10.1, the emf for the reduction of chlorine gas is + 1.36V and
theemf for the oxidation of coppermetal is - 0.34V. This means that the overall
reaction voltage is 1.36 - 0.34 = 1.02 V. Choice C is the best answer.
267
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Voltage and Energy
Free Energy Change (Conversion from Voltage to Energy)

In the same manner that energy is exchanged when bonds are broken and
formed, energy is exchanged when an electron is transferred from one atom to
another. However, unlike electromotive force (cell potentials), the energy

associated with an electrochemicalcell depends on the number of electrons. Free
energy is considered in units of joules per mole of electrons. The energy per
mole of electrons can be determined from the cell voltage. Equation 10.2 is the
equation for free energy in an electrochemical cell:
AGreaction = -nFecell
(10.2)
where F = 96,500 C per mole and n = electrons per reaction

A positive electromotive force (cell voltage) is associated with a favorable
oxidation-reduction reaction, while a negative free energy change (AG) is

associated with a favorable oxidation-reduction reaction.
Example 10.10
How much work can be done by a 1.60 V cell where there is one electron in the
oxidation half reaction and from which 1.00 mole of electrons flow?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.772xlO5J
1.286 xlO5 J
1.554 xlO5 J
1.882 xlO5 J
Solution
The units for work are Joules (Newton-meters). By keeping units in mind,
calculations can be made far easier. This is even truer in physics than chemistry,
where there are more units. Work is a form of energy, so the equation to use in
solving this question is:
w = nFe
The sign is ignored, because all of the answer choices are positive numbers.
Substitutinginto the equation yields the following:
w=1mole electrons x96,500 C/mole electrons *1.60 J/c =(96,500 x1.60) J

This multiplies out to be just less than 1.6 x 105 Joules, which makes choice C the
best answer. The important conceptual message here is that energy is
proportional to both cell voltage and the number of electrons involved in the
oxidation-reduction reaction.
268
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Definitions and Terminology
Electrochemical cells convert energy produced in a chemical reaction and electric

flow (current). This is accomplished by separating the oxidation half-reaction
from the reduction half-reaction, and connecting the two half-reactions by using
a conducting wire. Rather than generate heat energy, the reaction generates
electrical flow that travels from the reducing agent to the oxidizing agent.
Electrical flow is a form of energy, just as heat, light, and mechanical work are
forms of energy.
There are some standard terms that hold true for all electrochemical cells. These
terms can be a source of confusion, because, physicists, biochemists, and

chemists focus on different aspects of electrical devices and components such as
the anode and cathode, so each scientist defines the terms slightly differently. A
primary goal of this section is to develop a generic set of definitions that can be
used in electric circuits, electrochemistry, and electrophoresis. The following
terms are fundamentally defined to hold true for all electrical circuits, electric
fields, and electrochemical cells.
Oxidation occurs at the anode, therefore, electronsflowawayfrom the anode.
Reduction occurs at the cathode, therefore, electronsflow towards the cathode.
Cells are cyclic, therefore, ions must flow to balance the charge difference caused
byelectron flow.
Anions migrate towards the anode and cations migrate towards the cathode
through electricfields.
Physicists often concern themselves with the flow of charge through a wire
(current or electron flow), so they assign charges to the anode and cathode of a
discharging battery according to the type of flow that the poles of the battery
induce. Electrons flow from the anode to the cathode, so a physicist reaches the
conclusion that the anode of a battery carries a negative charge (repelling the
electrons) and the cathode of a battery carries a positive charge (attracting the
electrons). Conventional usage among physicists denotes the cathode of a
batteryby a positivesign, and the anode is denoted by a negative sign.
Biochemists focus on the flow of ions through electrical fields (gel electrophoresis
occurs between the charged plates of a capacitor). They assign charges to the
anode and cathode of a charged capacitor according to the type of ions they
attract. Anions migrate to the anode because of the anode's positive charge
build-up (the anode haslostelectrons). A biochemist concludes that theanode of
a capacitor carries a positive charge (attracting anionic molecules). Cations
migrate towards the cathode, because of the cathode's negative charge build-up
(the cathode has gained electrons). A biochemist concludes that the cathode of a
capacitor carries a negative charge (attracting cationic molecules).
Physicists and biochemists define the anode and cathode differently, because
they arelooking at different circuit elements (discharging battery versus a charging
capacitor). Both perspectives are valid. They each are specific for their topic of
interest. In electrochemical cells, we have both electron flow and ion migration,
so we need a more general set of rules. To achieve that, we start by presenting

the cathode and anode according to a multi-discipline perspective.
Cathodes have a positive core and accumulate negative charge on their surface,
as current flows. Anodes have a negative core and accumulate positive charge
on their surface, as current flows.
269
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Figure 10-3 shows the circuit notation for a battery and capacitor from this
universal perspective.
Discharging battery
e'flow
Anode
Cathode
e' flow
a
T3
o
OS *
I
"3
X> +
0)
tp +
to
u
to
X,
JC
(J
>
43
>
'JO
(8
'55
bO
<u
Electric field of a charged capacitor
Cathode plate
(accumulates - charges)
Anode plate
(accumulates + charges)
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-3 shows the flow of electrons through a wire, the migration of ions
through a field, the poles ofa battery, and the plates of a charging capacitor. All
of the terms are addressed, so any observations in Figure 10-3 are universal for
all electrical devices. The universal rules for electrical circuits, electric fields and
electrochemical cells are thus:
1.
Electrons flow from the anode to the cathode
2.
Cations migrate to the cathode

Anions migrate to the anode
3.
The physical make-up of an electrochemical cells allows for the transfer of

electrons from the reductant (material being oxidized) to the oxidant (material
being reduced). This is accomplished by placing the oxidation half-reaction in
the anode and the reduction half-reaction in the cathode. Figure 10-4 shows a
generic electrochemical cell, where the reactions and components are defined.
flow
Voltmeter/ Ammeter
w """x
e" flow
K2>
anions
<-
Salt Bridge
IF
Anode
Cathode
(Oxidation)
(Reduction)
UqX(s) -* U0^+(aq) + 2e"
Mred2+fo7>> + 2 e" - Mre(i(s)
Oxidation occurs at the anode
Reduction occurs at the cathode
Figure 10-4
270
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
The salt bridge (or porous membrane in some cells) allows for the flow of ions
(specifically anions). Salt bridges are not made of salt. They contain an aqueous
solution, held in by a membrane, through which ions can diffuse from one halfcell into the other half-cell. Anions flow in the direction opposite to the direction
of the electron flow, in order to balance out the distribution of charge associated
with moved electrons. The salt bridge completes the loop. Without a salt bridge,
or some form of anion transfer, the circuit is incomplete and the cell could not
produce energy. Components of a cell carry out specific tasks. For instance,
reduction occurs at the cathode and oxidation occurs at the anode. In
electrochemical cells where both electrodes involve a reaction with a cation and
metal, cathodes plate out (cations in solution are converted into a metal coating
on the surface of the electrode) and anodes dissolve (the metal coating on the
surface of the electrode is converted into cations which dissociate into solution).
In addition to cell layout, there is also standard line notation for cells. It is a
standard representation that test writers can use instead of drawing out the
electrochemical cell. When reading left to right, it goes from anode to cathode,
and reactant to product within each half-reaction electrode. It follows the format
shown in Figure 10-5:
MoxidationfcJ |yM M0xidation2+M I IzM Mreduction2"W IMreductionfc>
Reactant in anode | Product in anode | | Reactant in cathode | Product in cathode

Figure 10-5
The oxidation half-reaction in Figure 10-5 is Moxidation^ - Moxidation2+fa^/

and the reduction half-reaction is MredUction2+fa^ -> Mreduction^- The molarity
of the cation in each cell is given with the individual cell, which in Figure 10-5
are represented by the letters y and z.
Example 10.11
Acell is composed ofZn metal in0.10 MZn2+(aq) solution in one half-cell and Cu
metal in 0.10 M Cu2+(aq) solution in the other half-cell. The metal plates are
connected by a wire, and the solutions are connected by a salt bridge in the
standard cell manner. After a given amount of time, it is expected that:
A. zinc metal dissolves away.
B. copper metal dissolves away.
C. both zinc metal and copper metal dissolve away.

D. zinc cation precipitates out as zinc metal.
Solution
The first task is to determine which metal is being oxidized and which cation is
being reduced. This requires using the Table 10.1. The reduction half-cell
potential for Cu2+(aq) -> Cufs) is 0.34 V and the reduction half-cell potential for
Zn(s) -> Zn2+(aq) is -0.76 V. For a positive cell potential, zinc must be oxidized
and copper cation must be reduced. Because zinc is being oxidized, zinc metal
dissolves away. This makes choice A the best answer.
There are two types of electrochemical cells we shall consider. They are galvanic
(a spontaneous cell with e > 0) and electrolytic (a non-spontaneous cell with e <
0 and an applied voltage present to power the cell). Galvanic cells release energy
in the form of electrical flow. Electrolytic cells are used for the storage of
electrical potential, as is seen when recharging a battery. Electrolytic cells are
also used in electrolysis (used to purify gases) and electroplating (used to purify
metalsand coat conducting surfaces). Because the voltage can be controlled, the
rate of plating (dependent on the current) can be controlled.
271
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Galvanic Cell (Voltaic Cell)
Galvanic cells discharge voltage, which means that they harness the energy of a
favorable oxidation-reduction reaction. The oxidation-reduction reaction of a
galvanic cell has a negative AG and a positive emf. By convention in chemistry,

galvanic cells are drawn with the anode on the left and the cathode on the right.
Electrons flow naturally from left to right (anode to cathode) through a wire
connecting the two electrodes, because the reaction is favorable. A salt bridge
must be present to allow spectator anions to migrate from the cathode solution to
the anode solution. The spectator anion is often chloride or nitrate, because of
their high solubility and lackof base properties. Drawn in Figure 10-6 below is a
galvanic cell comprised ofa zinc anodeand copper cathode with a saltbridge.
flow
/x
e" flow
cr
pa.^!^wa?^rgrm^'WigiwyiwwMff..^.j..wi|L'i<
Cotton string saturated

with a chloride salt
SE
Zn
rl OX = +0.76V
Ms)
Anode
ered = +0.34V
ce|| = + I.IOV
Zn(s) -> Zn2+(aq) +2e
Cathode
.2+,
Cuz+(aq)
+ 2 e" -> Cu(s)
Figure 10-6
Over the life of the cell, the anode dissolves away and the cathode plates out.
Higher quality electrochemical cells use a membrane that selects for anion flow.
The voltage for a cell is calculated by summing the reduction half-cell potential
and the oxidation half-cell potential, as shown in Equation 10.1. To increase the
voltage for a galvanic cell, the concentrations of the ions in the cathode solution
can be increased or the concentration of the ions in the anode solution can be
decreased. The more a reaction can proceed in the forward direction, the greater
its voltage. A change in cation concentration changes voltage only slightly. To
increase voltage significantly, multiple cells are aligned in series. This is why
multiple batteries are hooked up in line in many battery-operated devices.
Example 10.12
How many ofthegalvanic cells shown in Figure 10-5 and in whatalignment are
required to attain a potential of approximately 5.5volts?
A. 5 in parallel
B. 6 in parallel
C.
5 in series
D.
6 in series
Solution
According to Table 10.1, the reduction half-reaction potentials for zinc dication
and copper dication are - 0.76V and + 0.34V respectively. The cell voltage for the
galvanic cell shown in Figure 10-5 is 0.34 - (- 0.76) = 1.10 volts. To have an
overall voltage of 5.5 V, you would need five times the standard cell voltage.
This means that five cells are needed, so choices B and D are eliminated.
Voltages add in series, so the five galvanic cells would need to be aligned in
series. Choice A is eliminated and choice C is the best answer.
272
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Electrolytic Cell
Like all electrochemical cells, an electrolytic cell involves two half-cells that are
separated to allow for electrons to flow from the site of oxidation to the site of
reduction. However, an electrolytic cell is based on a chemical reaction going in
the thermodynamically unfavorable direction. Energy must be added to the

electrolytic cell to accomplish this. This means that electrolytic cells must be
connected to a voltage source. The sequence of circuits in Figure 10-7 shows two
batteries opposingone another, which is analogous to an electrolytic cell. If two
batteries oppose one another in series, then the electron flow direction is
determined by the relative magnitudes of the voltage sources. The greater
voltage source dictates the direction of electron flow. This is the reason why a
voltage source is added to an electrolytic cell to oppose the natural flow of
electricity from the chemical reaction.
A"
Withoutthe voltages, the direction
The larger voltage dictates the
of the electron flow is uncertain.
direction of the electron flow.
Q e"flow
A|
e flow
4V
1 o
53
-2V
e* flow C\' >SÂe ' flow
The poles of the lower battery are

reversed by he forced electron flow.
Electrons flow in a counterclockwise

direction, charging the lower battery.
Figure 10-7
In an electrolytic cell, the applied voltage must exceed the natural voltage in
order to force the reaction to proceed in the reverse direction. An electrolytic cell
is the reverse of a galvanic cell, with electrodes being reversed because of the
applied voltage. If the applied voltage is not high enough, then the reaction does
not proceed in the reverse direction, and nocharge isstored. Figure 10-8 shows
thesamehalf-reactions (except now they are reversed) as seen in Figure 10-6.
flow
e" flow
''iiafe>. is
Cathode
Zn2+(aq) + 2 e -> Zris)
Cufs) -> Cu (aq) + 2 e
Zn2+ is reduced at the cathode

where it plates out as Zn(s)
Cufe) is oxidized at the anode

2+
whereit dissolves away as Cu
Figure 10-8
273
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Concentration Effects on Cell Voltage

Galvanic cells eventually die out, so reactant and product concentrations must
affect cell voltage. There are three ways to address this: first by observation of a
battery-operated device (a flashlight is a good example), second by using Le
Chatelier's Principle, and finally by a more rigorous mathematic calculation
(using the Nernstequation). Ifone observes the light emitted by a flashlight over
time, the intensity is constant for several hours before the light dims and then
rapidly diminishes to zero over a few minutes. Figure 10-9 shows light intensity
(a direct measure of cell voltage) as a function of time.
8
.5
&o
IS
i
<U
>
O
Time
Figure 10-9
A good explanation for this observation is provided by Le Chatelier's principle.

As more reactant is added to a reaction, the reaction becomes more favorable, so
it produces more energy. Likewise, as more product is added to a reaction, the
reaction becomes less favorable, so it produces less energy. Over the course of a
reaction, reactants are converted into products, so the reaction becomes
gradually less favorable until it reaches equilibrium, where it stops. Once at

equilibrium, the reaction can give off no more energy. As a galvanic cell runs,
reactants (cathode cations) are consumed and products (anode cations) are
formed. This lowers the favorability, the energy, and the voltage of the cell. To
maximize cell voltage, the reactants must be maximized and the products must
be minimized. In fact, no products are needed to get the reaction to start.
Example 10.13
Which ofthefollowing cells hastheGREATEST voltage?

A. Zn(s) | 0.10 MZn2+(aq) | | 1.00 MCu2+(aq) \ Cu(s)
B. Zn(s)
l.00MZn2+(aq) | | 0.10 MCu2+(aq) Curs)
C.
NKs)
D.
Ni(s)
| 0.10 MNi2+(aq) \ | LOOM Ag+fog)
j1.00MNi2+faj) | | O.lOMAg+faq)
Agfs)
Agfs)
Solution
Toanswer this question, we mustby first useTable 10.1 to get emf values for the
standard half reactions and then consider ion concentrations to determine if the
actual voltage is higher or lower than the standard voltage. The zinc oxidation
half-reaction produces +0.76 Vand the copper reduction half-reaction produces

+0.34 V. A standard zinc/copper cell produces +1.10 V. The nickel oxidation
half-reaction produces +0.23 Vand the silver reduction half-reaction produces

+0.80 V. A standard nickel/silver cell produces +1.03 V. This eliminates choices
C and D. To decide between choices A and B, we must consider the ion
concentration. The greater voltage is found in the cell with most reactants and
least products. A cell richer in reactant cations than product cations will have a
cell voltage slightergreater than the standard voltage.
274
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
In the zinc/copper galvanic cell, Cu2+is a reactant (it's being reduced) and Zn2+
is a product (it's being formed from the oxidation of zinc metal). The cell with
the greatest voltage is the cell with more copper cation and less zinc cation. This
is choice A. As a point of interest, because concentration affects the voltage, emf
tables are measured starting at standard conditions of 25C, 1 atm, and 1.00 M
concentration of ions. And because temperature affects the equilibrium, it affects
the voltage. That's why when flashlight batteries appear to have died, they work
again for a short time after the flashlight is switched off for a brief interval to cool
down. As the batteries cool, the reaction is no longer at equilibrium, because
equilibrium changes with temperature.
Electrochemical potential can be generated when an anode and cathode contain

the same species, but at different concentrations. This is what is known as a
concentration cell. Concentration cells have no common application in chemistry,
but the effect of concentration is observed as a cell loses reactant and gains
product. Using the Nernst equation, it is possible to calculate the effect of

concentration on the voltage of an electrochemical cell. This is observed with
action potentials in physiology, but we will not address thathere. The key fact is
that as a cell runs down, voltage drops because reactants are depleted.
Nernst Equation
The effect of half-cell concentrations on voltage can be quantified according to
the relationship between the reaction quotient (Qrx) and the equilibrium constant
(Keq). For an oxidation-reduction reaction with Keq greater than 1.0, ifthere are
more reactants than products, then the cell voltage is greater than the standard
cell voltage. If there are fewer reactants than products, the cell voltage is less
than thestandard cell voltage. In a general sense, the following estimate is valid:
Zn(s) | 0.10MZn2+fa^ | | LOO MCu2+(^ | Cu(s)

cell voltage is: 1.10 V + a little bit
Zn(s) | 1.00 MZn2+(aq) \ | 0.10 MCu2+(aq) \ Cu(s)

cell voltage is: 1.10 V - a little bit
The Nernst equation can be used to determine the exact value of the quantity
represented by "a little bit" in the relationships above. The Nernst equation is
derived from standard thermodynamic principles. The energy of any reaction,
including electrochemical reactions, is the energy released as the reaction
proceeds from its starting point to equilibrium. You should recall from
thermodynamics that AG" is RT lnKeq (the energy of reaction starting at standard
conditions) and Qrx is the reaction quotientat initial conditions. This means that
the following relationship holds true.
Energyinitial-to-equilibrium = Energyjnjtial-to-standard +Energystandard-to-equilibrium

Thisequation translates in a free energy relationship as:
AGOVerall = AG + RT mQrx
Substituting -nFcell for AGoverall and -nFe for AGin the equation yields:
-nFEceii = -nF + RT lnQrx
Upon dividing both sidesof theequation by - nF, we get, Equation 10.3:
ê"
nF
(10.3)
275
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Converting from natural log to base-10 log is done by multiplying by 2.3, which
converts Equation 10.3, the Nernst equation, into Equation 10.4:
cell = - 2.3RJlogQrx
nF
(10.4)
By substituting8.314 for R, 298 forstandard T, and 96,500 for F, we get a working

equation, Equation 10.5:
n
6^rx
(10.5)
Equations 10.4 and 10.5 are derivations of the Nernst equation, which puts a
quantitative value on the effects of concentration on cell voltage. The equation
looks intimidating, but the likelihood of using in a detailed calculation on the
MCAT is minimal. Conceptually, however, it is useful for determining relative

voltages of different electrochemical cells. For instance, in the two zinc/copper
examples in answer choices A and B in Example 10.13, Q is 10 in choice A and Q
is 0.1 in choice B. There are two electrons in the reaction, log 10 is equal to 1.0
and log 0.1 is equal to -1.0. This means that the voltage of the cell in choice A is
1.10 + 0.03 = 1.13 V and the voltage of the cell in choice B is 1.10 - 0.03 = 1.07 V.
Because 0.03 is small compared to the standard emf for the cell, the conceptual
method using equilibrium principles is more than adequate for arriving at an
answer. The small magnitude of the difference in voltage as concentration goes
from 1.00 M to 0.10 Malso explains why cell voltage remains relatively constant
during the lifetime ofa galvanic cell. While ionconcentration affects the voltage,
it does not significantly affect the voltage until the ratio of products to reactants
is either extremely high or extremely low. The Nernst term for concentration is
on the millivolt scale, making it useful in cell physiology, but not in general
chemistry.
Example 10.14
What is the voltage an electrochemical cell with an anode of zinc metal in 0.01 M
Zn(N03)2(aq) and a cathode of zinc metal in 1.00 M AgNOtfaq)?

A.
2.42 V
B.
2.30 V
C.
1.62 V
D.
1.50 V
Solution
First, we must identify the half-reactions.
Oxidation : Znfs) -> Zn2+ + 2e'
Reduction : Ag+ + 1e" - Ag(s)
The standard cell potential for the reaction is found using values from 10.1 and
substituting into Equation 10.1:
= 0.80 V - (-0.76 V) = 1.56 V
The actual cell voltage is slightly higher than 1.56, because there is a higher
cation concentration in the cathode than in the anode. We can safely choose
choice C at this point. Theexact value is found using Equation 10.5:
E^,, =e - 059 log [Zn2+anode] =156V . O059loga0L

11
[Ag+cathodeJ2
I2
Cei] = 1.56 - 0.03 (log 0.01) V = 1.56 + 0.06 V = 1.62 V

Choice C is the best answer.
276
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Redox Applications
Redox Applications
Batteries
Batteries are essentially a galvanic cell or a group of galvanic cells in series.

Batteries convert electrical potential energy into direct current. By using a
reversible oxidation-reduction reaction, a battery can act as either a galvanic cell
or an electrolytic cell. As the battery discharges current (releases voltage), it is
acting as a galvanic cell. By applying an opposing voltage to a battery, it can be
recharged. As the battery absorbs current (recharges voltage), it is acting as an
electrolytic cell. Batteries have a membrane that is highly selective, so that only
spectator ions can pass. By keeping the two electrodes (half-reactions) separate,
it is possible to discharge and recharge a battery for eternity. Eventually,entropy
and chemical side-reactions will deteriorate the battery; but until that time, it can
be used as a reliable power source. The lead car battery found in most cars can
be discharged and recharged roughly 2000 to 3000 times.
Example 10.15
Whatis the cellpotential of the following reaction used in a typical car battery?
Overall reaction:
?b(s) + PbOtfaq) + H2S04(aq) -> VbSOâq) + 2 H2Od)

Half-reactions:
Pb02(aq) + 3 H+(aq) + HSO^fo^ + 2 e' -> ?bSO(aq) + 2 H2O0)

PbS04ffl^ + H+(aq) + 2 e" - ?b(s) + HSO^'iaq)
A.
cell = L69 V
ecell = -0.35 V
1.02 V
B.
1.34 V
C.
2.04 V
D. 4.08 V
Solution
The second half-cell reaction must be reversed, so that when it is added to the
first half-reaction, the sum is the overall reaction. This means that the emf must
also be reversed. The cell potential for the battery is 1.69 - (-0.35) = 2.04 Volts,
choice C. To achieve 12 volts total (as most standard car batteries provide), six
cells must be aligned in series. This explains why there are six cells in waterbased batteries to which you must add distilled water, ifyou havesuch a battery.
The dry cell batteries with which wearemost familiar (used topower flashlights,
portable radios, and other devices) are alkaline based. They typically employ the
oxidation of zinc metal coupled with the reduction of manganese dioxide
(Mn02). A graphite rod serves as the conducting material through which
electrons are transferred. A paste made of Mn02 in NH4CI surrounds the
graphite rod in the interior of the battery. This paste is in turn surrounded by
insulated zinc which is connected a cap at the end of the battery. If the battery is
placed into a circuit, then the cap is connected to the graphite rod, resulting in
the transfer of electrons from the zinc to the manganese dioxide, through the
circuit. Graphite is a good conductor because of its conjugation, but it has an

internal resistance of roughly 15 Q. As a result, batteries heat up when they are
in use. Theemf is not significantly affected, but the equilibrium of the reaction is.
277
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Redox Applications
Electrical Devices (Conversion of Electrical Flow into Work or Energy)

Some common devices are designed to convert electrical flow into other forms of
energy, such as light, heat, and mechanical work. Knowing the basic schematics
of how such devices operate will help you on the MCAT. Listed below are some
typical examples of the conversion of electrical flow into other energy forms.
Fluorescent Tubes
Fluorescent tubes work by creating a potential difference between two plates

(i.e., one plate builds up a positive charge by losing electrons as the other plate
builds up a negative charge by gaining electrons). A gaseous ion between the
plates is accelerated towards the oppositely charged plate (and away from the
like-charged plate). Acceleration increases the kinetic energy of the particle until
it collides with another gas particle. Some of the ion's kinetic energy is
transferred to the other particle, which absorbs this energy by exciting an
electron. When this excited electron relaxes back to its ground state, a photon is
emitted from the gas particle in the tube. The energy of each photon is random,
although the average energy of an emitted photon depends on the density of the
gas, the length of the tube, and the plate charges. The inside surface of the tube
is coated with either a fluorescing or phosphorescing agent to convert ultraviolet
radiation into visible light.
Fluorescent tubes use alternating current. If direct current were used, then the
plates would retain their same charge. As such, the ion in the tube would
accelerate in one direction until striking the oppositely-charged plate. After
reaching the plate, the ion would no longer move. The tube would be finished,
and thus only a short flash of light would be produced. In order for the tube to
function, the ion must move back and forth, which occurs as the plates reverse
charges because of the alternating current. This means that fluorescent tubes
actually produce pulsing light, much like a strobe lamp. The frequency is too
fast for the human eye to detect, so the bulbs appear to produce continuous light.
For this to work, the frequency of the pulsing light cannot be a harmonic of the
eye's processing frequency, otherwise we'd see every second or third flash.
Example 10.16
Whywould it be dangerous to use fluorescent lightingin saw mills?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Because the tubes emit light at frequency that could deteriorates lubricants.
Becausethe tubes emit light that could decompose wood.
Because the tubes emit light that could be in phase with the saw blade.
Because the tubes emit light that could initiate combustion.
Solution
The fluorescent bulb emits light that is periodic. Under certain circumstances,
the spinning saw blade in a saw mill could appear to be in phase with the light.
It could be perfectly in phase with the light, or it could be that the symmetry of
the blade is such that a tooth appears to be in the same spot during each flash.
The result would be an optical illusion that would make the spinning saw blade
appear to be stationary. Generally speaking, spinning saw blades that appear
stationary to the eye can be dangerous to the touch. Choice C is the best answer.
Heating Coils
Conventional heaters function by having a coiled wire through which current

passes. A fan blows air across the surface of the hot coils, removing heat energy
from the coils via convection. Electrical flow is converted into heat by the
resistance in the wire. Eachcoil is thin, so resistance is high. Coils are employed
to maximize surface area. Heat is transferred only at an interface between
mediums, so more surface area allows for more heat transfer.
278
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry
Electrochemistry
Redox Applications
Incandescent Light Bulbs

Incandescent bulbs convert electrical flow into light by passing current through a
resistor in a vacuum. The thermal energy builds up in the resistor, but it cannot
be dissipated through convection or conduction in a vacuum (due to the absence
of a medium). The only way to release energy to the environment is through
radiation of light causing the hot bulb filament to glow. The bulb emits
electromagnetic radiation of many frequencies.
Incandescent bulbs are spherical to maintain their structural stability. It is nearly

a vacuum inside the bulb, so the spherical shape prevents the atmospheric
pressure from crushing the bulb. Gas-filled bulbs are typically more tubular than
evacuated incandescent bulbs. An added benefit is the inert nature of a vacuum,
which protects the filament from oxidation. If preventing oxidation were the
only consideration when designing the bulb, then some incandescent bulbs
might be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen or a noble gas. This is not the
case. If an incandescent bulb were filled with an inert gas, then the increase in
temperature would cause the gas to build up pressure inside the bulb, which
could rupture the bulb.
Example 10.17
Why is the filament thin and made of tungsten?

A. It is thin to maximize resistance, and tungsten is used because its low
thermal coefficient of expansion.
B. It is thin to maximize resistance, and tungsten is used because its high heat of
fusion.
C. It is thin to maximize resistance, and tungsten is used because its low

ionization energy.
D. It is thin to minimize resistance, and tungsten is used because its high

sublimation point.
Solution
A thin filament maximizes resistance, and thus removes more energy from the
current (P= I2R). This eliminates choice D. Tungsten is chosen because it has the
highest melting point of any conducting metal. The temperature of the filament
is extremely high, so a filament with a high melting point must be used to avoid
having the filament melt and break the circuit. A high melting point is
associated with a large enthalpy of fusion, so choice B is the best answer. A
material with a low melting point would be found in a fuse. A fuse is designed
to break when current exceeds a certain value, which is why metals used to make
fuses generally have a low melting point.
Electric Motors
Electric motors function by means of a magnetic field induced by electrical flow.

When current flows through a loop, a magnetic field with specific orientation is
generated. By allowing the induced field to interact with an external, stationary
magnetic field, a torque can be exerted upon the loop (depending on the
orientation of the fields). The loop rotates to align with the existing stationary
magnetic field (rotating up to a maximum of 180"). When the current is reversed,
the induced magnetic field reverses, and thus opposes the external, stationary
magnetic field. Torque is again generated, so the loop rotates another 180 to
realign. By repeating this process (using alternating current through the loop),
the loop spins, generating mechanical work that can turn the axis of a motor.
The loop may actually be a series of loops comprising a solenoid.
279
General Chemistry
Electrochemistry
Redox Applications
Chemical Applications (Common Usage of Redox Reactions)
In addition to being responsible for most of the energy used to power household
devices and heavy equipment, redox chemistry is also useful industrially for the
purification of materials, the production of catalytic surfaces, and cosmetic
applications in automobile accessories and jewelry plating. The surface of any
material that can conduct electricity can be the site of an electrochemical reaction.
This means that the different processes involve different reactants and different
materials for the electrodes. Given that the MCAT test writers often present
applications of physical science concepts, the important message is not that you
understand each application in detail, but that you can answer electrochemistry
questions based on the reactions and processes they giveyou in the passage.
Electrolysis
Electrolysis involves the application of a voltage (addition of electrical energy) to

carry out an overall unfavorable process. This is what an electrolytic cell does as
well. The goal of electrolysis is not to store charge, however, but to generate less
favorable compounds. It is commonly used to obtain pure samples of gases
(such as oxygen and chlorine) and reduced metals that naturally found in an
oxidized state under ambient conditions (such as sodium and calcium). Shown
below is Reaction 10.3, the electrolysis reaction of water to form oxygen gas and
hydrogen gas and Reaction 10.4, the electrolysis reaction of hydrochloric acid to
form hydrogen gas and chlorine gas.
2 H2Od) -> 2 H2(g) + 1 02(g)
2 HCKaq) -> 1 H2(g) + 1 Cl2(g)
Reaction 10.3
Reaction 10.4
Because hydrogen ion is reduced in both Reaction 10.3 and Reaction 10.4, it
forms on the cathode (reduction occurs at the cathode), and the bubbles of
hydrogen gas can be collected as they rise from the cathode. Chlorine gas and
oxygen gas can also be collected, but from the anode. Generally, the anode and
cathode plates in an electrolysis apparatus are made of an inert material that can
conduct electricity. Materials commonly used include carbon (in its graphite
allotrope) and platinum. Figure 10-10 below is the basic schematic of an
electrolysis apparatus as applied to Reaction 10.3.
Cathode
Anode
(Reduction):
(Oxidation)
2 H20(l) + 2 e" - H2(g) + 2 OK(aq)

Reduction occurs at the cathode, which
H2Od)
- 2 H+(aq)+]/202(g)+2e'
Oxidation occurs at the anode, which
is the left submerged electrode, because
is Hie right submerged electrode,
it is connected to the anode terminal of
because it is connected to the cathode
the applied voltage.
terminal of the applied voltage.

Figure 10-10
To carry out an electrolysis reaction, the applied voltage must be great enough to
overcome the negative voltage of the unfavorable redox reaction. If an
excessively large voltage is applied to the cell, then other unfavorable reactions
can take place, resulting in multiple products being formed. The ideal scenario is
to apply a voltage that is slightly in excess of the absolute value of the voltage for
280
The Berkeley Review
GCtlCral ChCIlllStry
Electrochemistry
the unfavorable oxidation-reduction reaction.
Redox Applications
Because the half-reactions both
have water as the reactant, they need not be separated into half-cells.
Example 10.18
When a voltage is applied to the following reaction in the electrochemical cell
below, what is true of the gases that form on each electrode and the solution?
2 H2Od) + 2 CV(aq) -> 1 H2(g) + 1 Cl2(g) + 2 OH'(aq)
il
i.
,U-a
A. H2(g) bubbles form on the left electrode, Cl2(g) bubbles form on the right
electrode, and the pH of the solution gradually increases.
B. H2(g) bubbles form on the right electrode, Cl2(g) bubbles form on the left
electrode, and the pH of the solution gradually increases.
C. H2(g) bubbles form on the left electrode, Cl2(g) bubbles form on the right
electrode, and the pH of the solution gradually decreases.
D. H2(g) bubbles form on the right electrode, Cl2(g) bubbles form on the left
electrode, and the pH of the solution gradually decreases.
Solution
Because the applied voltage is drawn the way it is, then according to convention,
electrons are considered to be flowing from the right to left. As a result,
reduction takes place on the left electrode, and oxidation takes place on the right
electrode. H2(g) results from reduction, so it forms at the cathode (left electrode).
Hydrogen gas forms bubbles on the left electrode, and chlorine gas forms
bubbles on the right electrode. This eliminates choices B and D. Because
hydroxide anion is formed as a by-product, the solution becomes basic over time,
causing the solution pH to increase. This makes the best answer choice A.
Electroplating
Electroplating is the process of reducing ions in solution onto the surface of a

conducting material. Reduction occurs at the cathode, so the cathode gains a thin
film of the reduced metal on its surface. Practical applications of this include
gold-plated jewelry, chrome-plated car parts, and platinum-plated carbon
matrices used in catalytic processes. Electroplating can be used to convert your
copper necklaceinto a beautiful gold necklace (vastly increasingyour desirability
at the local discotheque). The copper necklace is placed at the electrode poll in
the cathode cell, which is filled with a solution of gold cations. Gold is reduced
and consequently plates out onto the surface of the copper.
Electroplating requires a voltage source so that the current (and thus rate of
plating) can be controlled. Electroplating is used to maximize the surface area of
a catalytic metal, such as platinum and palladium. Catalytic metals are often
plated onto the surface of graphite, so that all of the molecules of the precious
metal are on the surface, and involved in catalysis. This maximizes the utility
(surface area) and makes recovery easier (a large solid can be filtered more easily
than a small solid). Because the carbon matrix of graphite contains extensive
conjugation, graphite conducts electricity, making it a material that can be used
as an electrode. You may recall from organic chemistry that hydrogenation of an
alkene employed platinum metal on a carbon support ,Pt(C).
281
General CheitllStry
Electrochemistry
Redox Applications
Galvanizing
Metals exposed to the environment will oxidize over time. This is especially true
when they are exposed to salt water, because salt water conducts electricity
better than fresh water and air. To prevent against this, a metal can be
galvanized. Galvanizing involves the addition of a more reactive metal (known
as the sacrificial metal) to be preferentially oxidized over the metal being

preserved. Consider a steel-hulled boat for instance. The boat rests in salt water
for most of its life, so it oxidizes at a rapid pace. To avoid this, the steel is
galvanized by adding a metal that is easier to oxidize than iron (the major
component of steel). A thin, reactive metal plate is added to the surface of the
steel hull to prevent the iron in steel from rusting away. Because ions conducts
electricity, the galvanizing plate can be placed anywhere on the hull, as long as
it's in direct contact with the iron and not submerged in the water.
Example 10.19
Which of the following metals can be used to galvanize steel?

A.
Iron
B.
Nickel
C.
Potassium
D.
Zinc
Solution
When galvanizing steel, the goal is to protect iron. The metal added must be
more reactive than iron, which has an oxidation potential of +0.44 V according to
Table 10.1. Iron is the component in steel that needs to be protected, so iron
cannot be added to protect iron from oxidation. Choice A is eliminated. Nickel
is not reactive enough, with an oxidation potential of +0.23 V, so choice B is
eliminated. Potassium is too reactive with an oxidation potential of +2.92 V.
Potassium would explode in water, and while this would in fact minimize the
oxidation of iron in steel, as a general rule, exploding boats are not as effectiveas
non-exploding boats! This eliminateschoice C. Zinc is slightly more susceptible
to oxidation than iron, with an oxidation potential of +0.76 V, so zinc is a good

galvanizing material. Choice D is the best answer.
282
The Berkeley Review
Electrochemistry
Passages
14 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Electrochemistry Passage Schedule:

I:
After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages II - III & XII - XIII
II:
Following Task I: Passages I, IV, VII, VIII, & XI (34 questions in 44 minutes)
Ill:
Review: Passages V -VI, IX - X, XIV 6* Questions 94 - 100

IIerkeley
R-E-V-I-r>W
'
,1
Electrochemistry Study Passages
I.
II.
(1 -7)
Water-Based Redox Reactions
pH Meter and Calomel Cell
(8- 14)
III.
Metallurgy
(15 - 20)
IV.
Electrochemical Titration
(21 - 26)
Redox Titration
(27 - 33)
Purification of Metals
(34 - 40)
Galvanic Cell
(41 -47)
Photochemical Cell
(48 - 54)
Batteries
(55 - 60)
Electrolysis
(61 -67)
Electrolysis of HCl
(68 - 74)
Standard Cells
(75-81)
XIII.
Corrosion Prevention
(82 - 87)
XIV.
Electroplating Experiment
(88 - 93)
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
Electrochemistry Scoring Scale

Raw Score
MCAT Score
84- 100
13- 15
66 -83
10 - 12
47 -65
7 -9
34-46
4-6
1 -33
1 -3
(94 - 100)
What is the oxidation state of chlorine in both HOCl

and HCl?
Many oxidation-reduction reactions take place in water,

because water provides the medium through which electrons
may transfer. The presence of ions in the aqueous solution
enhances the conductivity of water. Reactions 1 through 4
are some aqueous-based oxidation-reduction reactions where
A. +1 in HCl and+1 in HOCl

B. +1 in HCl and-1 in HOCl
C. -1 in HCl and+1 in HOCl
D. -1 in HCl and-1 in HOCl
water acts as a reactant:
What is the ionization energy of Rb metal?
Br2(g) + H20(l) -> HOBr(aq) + HBr(aq)

Reaction
A. The value is greater than 1000 ^J .
mole
C\2(g) + H20(l) - HOC\(aq) + HCl(aq)

Reaction
B. The value is less than 1000, but greater than 495.9
kJ
mole
K(s) + H20(l) -> KOH(aq) + -H2(g)
C . The value is less than 495.9, but greater than 418.7
Reaction
kJ
mole
Na(s) +H20(l) -> NaOH(aq) + *-H2(g)
D. The value is less than 418.7 -&-
Reaction
mole
In Reactions 1 and 2, water is not being oxidized or

reduced. The water counteracts the charges of the halides. In
Reactions 3 and 4, the hydrogen of water is being reduced to
form hydrogen gas. A correlation can be drawn between
ionization energy of the species and the electromotive force
associated with oxidation of the species. A lower ionization
energy correlates to a more favorable oxidation. The first
ionization energy for each of the non-aqueous reactants is
What forms when lithium metal is added to water?

A . No reaction is observed.
B. Lithium hydroxide (LiOH) and lithium hydride

(LiH) form.
C . Only lithium hydroxide (LiOH) forms.

D. Only lithium hydride (LiH) forms.
listed in Table 1.
Compound
In the reaction of potassium metal in water, what are

the oxidizing and reducing agents?
Ionization Energy ( * j
'mole'
Br2(g):
987.2
C\2(g):
1251
K(s):
418.7
Na(s):
495.9
Table
A. The oxidizing agent is K (potassium), and

reducing agent is H2 (hydrogen gas).
B. The oxidizing agent is H2 (hydrogen gas), and
reducing agent is K (potassium).
C. The oxidizing agent is K (potassium), and
reducing agent is H2O (water).
D. The oxidizing agent is H2O (water), and
reducing agent is K (potassium).
The same relative reactivity of the species observed in
the
the
the
the
water can be observed in other solvents, but not with the
same absolute energy values as those found in water solvent.

1.
Which of the following statements must be TRUE

about redox chemistry in water?
Which of the following processes does NOT involve the

loss of an electron?
I. Metals are more easily oxidized than nonmetals.
A. Oxidation
B.
II.
C . Conversion of oxidation state from -1 to 0
III.
D. Electron affinity
2.
Metals in
water form metal oxides and metal
hydroxides.
Ionization
Nonmetals in water form metal oxides and metal
hydroxides.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Which of the following reactions is the MOST

favorable (has the MOST positive value for E)?
A . 2 K(s) + Br2(g) -> 2 KBr(aq)
I only
II only
I and II only
II and III only
B. 2 Na(s) + Br2(g) - 2 NaBr(aq)

C . 2 K(s) + Cl2(g) -> 2 KC\(aq)
D. 2 Na(s) + Cl2(g) -> 2 NaC\(aq)
285
9.

A pH meter is an instrument that uses two electrodes to
measure the potential difference between a solution of
unknown pH and a standard solution of known pH. Because
the potential difference between the solutions is dependent
upon the [H+], it is possible to determine the pH from the
voltage of the cell. A typical standard cell employed in the
electrode of a pH meter is the calomel half-cell, which is
A. HC\(aq)
B. NH^(aq)
C. NaOH(aq)
D. KCl(aq)
10. Which of the following would be observed after base is

added to a solution monitored by a pH meter?
shown as Reaction 1 below:
A.
B.
C.
D.
rig2C\2(s) + 2 e- -> 2 Hg(l) + 2 C\-(aq)

Reaction
To reduce the reading on a pH meter, which of the

following can be added to a solution?
The standard Ece|| for the calomel half-cell is 0.285 V.

Combining this with the Nernst equation provides the
equation used to calculatepH. The Nernstequation is:
Both E0t,served and pH would increase.

E0bserved would increase and pH would decrease.
E0bserved would decrease and pH would increase.
Both Eobserved ar|d pH would decrease.
11. If the Eceii were actually 0.300 V rather than 0.285 V

then what would be true of the pH measured by the pH
meter, assuming that no correction is made?
Eobserved = Ece|| - 0.0592 log [H+]

Equation 1
A. The pH determined by the pH meter would be too

high, because the Eceii in calculation is too high.
B. The pH determined by the pH meter would be too
high, because the Ece|| in calculation is too low.
C. The pH determined by the pH meter would be too
low, because the Ece|i in calculation is too high.
D. The pH determined by the pH meter would be too
low, because the Ecen in calculation is too low.
Using Equation 1, it is possible to calculate the pH of a

solution from the observed voltage of the cell, because the
electrode of the pH meter contains the calomel cell. When

in contact with the calomel half-cell through a porous
membrane, the unknown solution experiences a potential
difference. The electrode probe of a pH meter is shown in
Figure 1.
To circuit with voltmeter
12. In the calomel half-cell, which of the following is

TRUE?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Chlorine in Hg2Cl2fa) is reduced.

Chlorine in Hg2Cl2(s) is oxidized.
Mercury in Hg2Cl2(s) is reduced.
Mercury in Hg2Cl2(s) is oxidized.
13. What is the pH of a solution that shows E0DServed =
Reference half-cell
0.699 V?
Porous bulb
<0)
A. 0.7
B.
1.0
C. 4.1
Figure 1
D. 7.0
Getting an accurate reading of the pH requires that the

bulb be neutralized and dried before it is placed into an
unknown solution. To preserve the lifetime of the electrodes,
they are stored in saturated chloride solutions. Cells must be
refilled at least three times per year to prevent crystallization
of the salt caused by the evaporation of water.
8.
14. Which of the following does NOT affect the pH of the

solution?
A. A change in temperature
B. A change in the volume of water solvent

C. A change in the type of solvent
D. A change in the position of the electrode in
A pH meter would yield what reading in a 0.010 M

HCl(aq) solution?
solution.
A. .01
B.
C. 2
D. 7
286
16. What is the oxidation state of gold in Au(CN)2"?

A. +3
Metallurgy is the process by which metals are purified.

Impure metals are often extracted as a pure salt (usually
through precipitation), and the salt is purified by either
electrolysis or an oxidation-reduction reaction (single
displacement). Listed below are industrial methods for
purifying gold, zinc, mercury, silicon, and phosphorus.
B.
+1
C. -1
D. -3
Gold: Impure gold ores are treated with aqueous cyanide

anion in the presence of oxygen gas. Other contaminants in
the ore are filtered out. The gold cyanide complex is then
reduced by zinc metal, leaving pure gold behind.
17. In the purification of zinc metal, which of the following

statements must be true?
I. Sulfur is reduced in the overall process.

II. Zinc is reduced in the overall process.
Rx 1: 4 Au(s) + 8 CN'(aq) + 02(g) + H20(l) ->

4 Au(CN)2'(aq) + 4 OH-(aq)
III. Oxygen gas is the oxidizing agent.

A.
B.
C.
D.
Rx 2: Zn(s) + 2 Au(CN)2-(aq) -> Zn(CN)42'(aq) + 2 Au(s)

Zinc: Zinc sulfide is mined and then purified by exposure to
a hot stream of oxygen gas. The zinc oxide that forms is
treated with finely powdered carbon at 700C to generate
carbon monoxide and pure zinc metal.
II only
Ill only
I and II only
II and III only
Rx 3: 2 ZnS^) + 3 02(g) -> 2 ZnO(s) + 2 S02(g)

Rx 4: ZnOfs) + C(s) -> Zn(s) + CO(g)
18. What is the reduction half-reaction in the purification of

silicon?
Mercury: Like zinc, mercury sulfide is mined and then

purified by exposure to a hot stream of oxygen gas. The
mercury oxide that forms is heated to drive off O2 gas.
A. C(s) +2e" -> CO(gJ
B. C(s) +2e" + _02(g)-> CO(g)
C. S\02(s) +2e" -> S\(l) + 022-(g)

D. S\02(s) +4e" ^ Si<7) + 2 02-(g)
Rx 5: 2 HgS(s) + 3 02(g) -> 2 HgO(s) + 2 S02(g)

Rx 6: 2 HgO(s) + heat -> 2 Hg(s) + 02(g)
Silicon: Silicon oxide (known as sand) is treated with finely
powdered carbon at 1350*C to yield carbon monoxide and

pure silicon (a liquid at that temperature).
Rx 7: Si02(M+ 2 C(s) -> S\(l) + 2 CO(g)
19. Which reactions involves the oxidation of oxygen?
(1350C)
A.
B.
C.
D.
Phosphorus: Calcium phosphate (found in tooth enamel) is

treated with silicon dioxide and finely powdered charcoal to
yield calcium silicate, carbon monoxide, and pure phosphorus
(occurring naturally in the tetra-atomic state).
The
The
The
The
purification of gold, zinc, and silicon

purification of mercury
purification of gold, zinc, and mercury
purification of phosphorus
Rx 8: 2 Ca3(P04)2(5) + 10 C(s) + 6 S\02(s) -

6 035103(5) + 10 CO(s) + Ptfs)
20. In the purification of mercury metal:
The multi-reaction processes require some form of

purification between the two reactions. Often, filtering the
product mixture through a molecular sieve works well. This
removes any impurities that are too large to fit through the
pore, or too small to be caught, depending on the design on
the sieve. Crystalline oxides are assumed to be pure.
A. mercury is reduced by one electron when HgO is

heated.
B. mercury is oxidized by two electrons when HgO is

heated.
C. mercury is oxidized by two electrons when HgS is

treated with oxygen gas.
D. sulfur is oxidized by six electrons when HgS is
treated with oxygen gas.
15. What is the role of CN" in the first reaction in the
purification of gold?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The
The
The
The
cyanide serves as a reducing agent.

cyanide serves as an oxidizing agent.
cyanide serves as a Lewis acid.
cyanide serves as a Lewis base.
287
Equation 1 can be used to determine the exact voltage at
any point during the titration prior to the equivalence point.

Equation 2 can be used to determine the exact voltage at any
point during the titration after the equivalence point.
To test the Nernstequation, a student titrates the cathode

cell of a zinc-lead galvanic cell with potassium dichromate
(K2Cr207) under acidic conditions. The lead dication forms
an insoluble precipitate (PbCr20-j(s)) with the dichromate
2+i
Eobs =Ece- Q.Q52. logtZiU

[Pb2+]
dianion. As the lead concentration lowers, the cell potential

decreases. Reaction 1 is the oxidation-reduction reaction of
Equation 1
lead dication with zinc metal.
Pb2+(aq) + Zn(s) ->
.3+1
2+i
Hobs =Ecell-0-059. log rZn'+HCr"!
Zn2+(aq) + Pb(s)
Reaction
[Cr2072-]
Equation 2
Figure 1 shows the titration apparatus and the two half-cells

of the electrochemical cell.
Figure 2 graphs the voltage as a function of time for the
A voltmeter measures the
experiment.
potential difference throughout theduration of thereaction.
0.1 MCr207 (aq)
0>
f
o
>
mL 0.10 MCr2072'(aq) added

Figure 2
21. The reduced voltage prior to reaching the equivalence

point can be attributed to which of the following?
A. The precipitation ofPb2+(a^) from solution
Figure 1
B. Competing
reduction
half-reactions
between
Pb2+(aq) and Cr2072'(^)

C. Aredox reaction with Pb2+(aq) and Cr20-j2'(aq)
The voltage of the cell drops negligibly until just before

the equivalence point, where it drops rapidly. Once the lead
has been completely precipitated, excess dichromateanion can
D. Competing
oxidation
half-reactions
between
Pb2+(a<7) and Cr2Q-j2-(aq)
be reduced, as shown in Reaction 2.
14 H+(aq) + Cr20-j2-(aq) + 3 Zn(s) -

3 Zn2+(aq) + 2 Cr3+(aq) +7 H20(/)
Reaction
22. The higher maximum voltage following the equivalence

point can be attributed to which of the following?
A. Pb2+(fl<7) has a
Cr20727^B. Cr20-j2'(aq) has
Pb2+(aq).
C. Pb2+(a<?) has a
Cr2072-(a^.
D. Cr20-j2~(aq) has
Pb2+(fl<7).
The following voltage data can be used to determine the

exact voltage at any point during the titration. Before
equivalence, the voltage depends on the reaction of lead
dication and zinc metal.
After equivalence, the voltage
dependson the reaction of dichromateanion and zinc metal.
Pb2+(a<?) + 2 e" -> Pbf*;
E =-0.13 V
Zn2+(aq) + 2e' - Zn(s)
E = -0.76 V
Cr20j2-(aq) + 14 H+(aq) + 3 e"
>
2 Cr3+(aq) + 7 H20(/)
lower oxidation potential than

a lower oxidation potential than
higher reduction potential than

a higher reduction potential than
E = +1.33V
288
23. Given that zinc sulfate and lead sulfate are used in the
reaction, what is the role of sulfate anion?

Oxidation-reduction (redox) titration can be used to
ascertain the concentration of metal cations in solution.
A . To be oxidized
B. To be reduced
Other methods, like ultraviolet or visible spectroscopy and
C . To precipitate excess dichromate

D. To migrate through the salt bridge
precipitation may also work. The best method is solutiondependent. A redox titration is similar to an acid-base
titration, except that the titrant is an oxidizing or reducing

agent. For a cation such as titanium +2, an oxidizing agent
can be added quantitatively to convert titanium dication to a
+4 charge. You must balance the redox reaction to know the
24. Why should the circuit be left open until the start of the
titration?
stoichiometric ratio of the titrant to the reactant.

A student fills three flasks with iron sulfate solutions to
A . To prevent the cell from charging voltage

B. To prevent the cell from exchanging electrodes
C. To prevent the lead and zinc from crossing through
the salt bridge
D. To prevent the cell from depleting voltage
be titrated by an oxidizing agent. The oxidation state of the

iron is initially +2. After titration, the iron is oxidized into a
+3 cation. This means that the oxidizing agent removes one

electron from each iron dication. Iron sulfate is fairly soluble
in water, so it completely dissociates when mixed into water:
The contents of each of the three flasks are listed in Figure 1.

Flask 1: 1.52 grams FeS04 is added to enough water to
make 100 mL solution.

25,
What must be true about the zinc half-cell?
A . It is the oxidation half-cell found at the anode.
B. It is the oxidation half-cell found at the cathode.
C . It is the reduction half-cell found at the anode.
Figure 1
D. It is the reduction half-cell found at the cathode.
The molecular mass of FeS04 is 152 grams per mole.

A 20.00-mL aliquot from each of the three flasks is titrated
with 0.020 M KMn04(aq) solution in three separate

titrations.
The unbalanced equation for the oxidationreduction reaction that takes place between permanganate
2 6. The observed voltage reaches a minimum when:
A.
B.
C.
D.
anion and iron dication is shown in Reaction 1.
[Pb2+]init > [Cr2072-]added.

[Pb2+]inii = [Cr2072-]added.
mL 0.1 M Pb2+init > mL 0.1 MCr2072-added.
mL 0.1 M Pb2+jnit = mL 0.1 M Cr2072-added.
Fe2+(aq) + MnOffaq)-* Fe3+(aq) + MnO(s)

Reaction
Fe2+(aq) solution is clear and Mn04~(aq) is a purple

solution, which causes some difficulty in reading the volume
of titrant in the burette. Fe3+(aq) solution is clear and

MnO(s) is a brown solid that precipitates from the solution.
As such, each titration can be monitored by observing the

solution's color. When the equivalence point is reached, the
titration is stopped and the volume of titrant added is recorded.
If the concentration of the titrant solution is known, then the
initial concentration of the Fe2+(aq) solution can be

determined.
Conversely, the concentration of the titrant
solution can be determined, if the concentration of the initial
iron dication solution is known. Equation 1 is used to

determine the concentration of either species. Deviations
from the formula are found with reactions that have different
coefficients.
eq x MS0|uti0n x Vsoiulion = eq x Mtjtrant x V,jtram

Equation 1
where eq is equivalents, M is molarity, and V is volume.
289
27. The endpoint of the titration of ferrous cation by

permanganate anion can be detected by which of the
following observations?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The
The
The
The
3 2. Given the values for the reduction half-cells of Fe2+ and

Fe-*+, what is the E for the oxidation half-reaction of
the titration of Flask I ?
clear solution turning and remaining brown

brown solution turning and remaining clear
violet solution turning and remaining clear
clear solution turning and remaining violet
Fe3+ + 3e--> Fe
-0.04 V
Fe2+ + 2e"-> Fe
-0.44 V
A. +0.76 V
B.
+0.40 V
C. -0.40 V
D. -0.76 V
28. If a 20.00-mL sample from flask 2 were to require a

17.50-mL aliquot of Na2Cr207(a</) solution of
unknown concentration to reach the endpoint, then what
would a 20.00-mL sample from Flask 3 require to reach
equivalence?
A.
B.
C.
D.
33. The BEST container for the titration would be made of
A 70.00-mL aliquot of Na2Cr207(a</) solution

A 25.00-mL aliquot of Na2Cr207ffl</) solution
A 17.50-mL aliquot of Na2Cr207(a<jr) solution
A 8.75-mL aliquot of Na2Cr207(a<?) solution
which of the following materials?

A. Aluminum metal
B.
Glass
C. Copper metal
D. Polyethylene
29. Which of the following is the reducing agent in the

titration of Flask 1 with KMnOtfaq) solution?
A. KMnOâq)
B. MnO(s)
C. Fe2+(aq)
D. Fe3+(aq)
30. Which of the following is the oxidizing agent if the

solution in Flask 2 were treated with Na2Cr207(a^J?
A. Na2Cr207(fl</J
B. Cr203(s)
C. Fe2+(a<jr)
D. Fe3+(aq)
31. Which of the following is the ratio of Na2Cr207(^) to
Fe^+(aq) in the titration of Flask 2, where Cr2072"(a<?)

is reduced into Cr203(s)?
A.
B.
C. 2
D.
290
36. What is the oxidation state of gold in AUCI4"?

-3
Most precious metals can be found in nature as an ore

with an oxide coating. An ore is defined as an alloy of two
A.
B.
or more metals homogeneously mixed. The oxide layer on

the outside of the ore protects the inner core from oxidation.
C.
+ 1
D.
+3
This occurs because metal
in the core cannot transfer
electrons through the oxide coating.
To isolate selected
precious metals, the ore is extracted in its entirety and then

selectively treated to separate the metals, often in ion form.
Gold, for instance, is purified by first converting it to
37. Since silver is in a column of the periodic table that
AUCI4" and then selectively precipitating the AUCI4" anion

from solution with a specific cation. The gold in the anion
is then reduced to pure gold metal. The reduction of gold
occurs when current is applied to the cathode solution,
causing gold to plate out onto the cathode (which must be an
expresses filled d-shell stability when electrons fill the

orbitals, what electronic configuration is observed with
silver cation (Ag+)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
inertelectrode from which gold can be removed easily).
Recently, scientists have aimed their research at

techniques useful for mining precious metals from seawater.
The plan involves running a microscopic net lined with
sequestering agents that selectively bind target metals. The
selectivity can be carried out by cation size or binding
strength of the ligands in the sequestering agent.
Once the sequestering agent binds the metal, it can be
38. A sequestering agent should contain which of the

following structural features?
isolated and the metal can be released by lowering the pH
A.
B.
C.
D.
drastically. The free precious metal cations can then be

reduced byapplying a current to the solution and plating the
metal onto the cathode. Table 1 shows the standard reduction
potentials for some precious metals in water:

Ag+(aq) + 1 e" -> Ag(s)
0.80 V
Pl2+(aq) + 2e"-> Pt(s)

Au3+(aq) + 3 e" -> Au(s)
1.20 V
Table
[Kr]5s24d8
[Krtfs1^9
[Krtfs1^10
[Kr]4d10
1.50 V
Atoms with no lone pairs of electrons

Atoms able to donate electron pairs
Atoms without completed octet valences
Atoms that are good Lewis acids
39. Which of the following is the mass percent of gold in

AuCl4"?
A . Less than 25%
34. Gold trication could be recovered in the form of gold
metal by adding which of the following to the solution?
A. C\2(g)
D. Greater than 75%
B. Ag+(aq)
C. Zn(s)
D. Pt2+(oq)
40. Which of the following reactions would produce the
LOWEST (or most negative) voltage?
35. Because the CV(aq) anion is NOT oxidized by the
A. Ag+(aq) + CI' -> Ag(5) + - C\2(g)
Ag+(aq) cation, it can be safely assumed that the

reduction potential of C\2(g) is which of the following?
B. Pi2+(aq) + 2 CI" -> Pt(s) + Cl2(g)
C. Au3+(a<?) + 3CI" -> Au(s) + 2- Cl2(g)
A . Less than -0.80 volts
D. All of the above reactions would require the same

voltage.
B. Between -0.80 and 0.0 volts

C . Between 0.0 and 0.80 volts
D . Greater than 0.80 volts
291
43. Which of the following combinations does NOT result

in a galvanic cell when the reduction half-cell carries an
E" value greater than zero?
The galvanic cell utilizes a favorable redox reaction to

release energy in the form of electron flow. The cell is
composed of two half-cells: an oxidation half-cell and a
A.
B
C
D
reduction half-cell. The oxidation half-reaction takes place in

the anode half-cell, so electrons are released from the anode
half-cell.
The reduction half-reaction takes place in the
E
E
E
E
oxidation < 0;
oxidation > 0;
oxidation < 0;
oxidation > 0;
|E
|E
P
|E
reductionl >
reductionl >
reductionl <
reductionl <
P
P
P
p
oxidationl
oxidationl
oxidationl
oxidationl
cathode half-cell, so electrons are absorbed at the cathode half-
cell. Figure 1 shows a standard galvanic cell.
4 4. What is NOT true about a galvanic cell?
VySwitch
A. The electron flow is from the anode to the cathode.

B. Reduction occurs at the cathode.
Voltmeter/Ammeter
C. The voltage of the cell decreases as the cell runs in

the discharging direction.
D. Ecen starts greater than zero and finishes when
Ecen is less than zero.
I.-IM,, ,m-. ,j..j,wjma*
!w,rffWgcx-if1-Ti-r'i'!TJiS'M3sag
Salt Bridge
(allows for anion flow)
1.0 MNi
2+
45. What BEST describes the initial composition of a

galvanic cell?
1.0 MCu
A. The cathode half-cell contains a cation in a high
Anode
oxidation state, and the anode half-cell contains a
Figure 1
metal with a low ionization energy.

B. The cathode half-cell contains a cation in a high
Cu2*^) + Ni(s) -> Cu(s) +N\2+(aq)

Reaction
metal with a high ionization energy.
The overall voltage of the cell is the sum of the half-cell

voltages for the two component reactions. Equation 1 shows
C. The cathode half-cell contains a cation in a low
this calculation.
metal with a low ionization energy.
E'cell = Ered + Eox
D. The cathode half-cell contains a cation in a low
Equation 1
metal with a high ionization energy.
By definition, a galvanic cell has a positive cell voltage

overall. Reduction is defined as the gain of electrons, so
reduction occurs at the cathode of a battery.
46. What is the ratio of reducing agent to oxidizing agent in

the following reaction?
41. In a galvanic cell, oxidation occurs at the:
MnOffaq) + A\(s) - MnO(s) + A\02'(aq)
A . anode, because electrons flow from the anode to the

A. 3:5
cathode.
B. 5:3
B. cathode, because electrons flow from the anode to
C. 2:3
the cathode.
D. 3:2
C. anode, because electrons flow from the cathode to

the anode.
D . cathode, because electrons flow from the cathode to
47. What must occur after the switch is closed in the cell
the anode.
shown in Figure 1?
I. Copper metal builds up on the cathode.
II. The overall cell voltage is greater than 0.00 V.
42. Which of the following half-reactions could occur at the

anode in a galvanic cell?
III. Anions flow through the salt bridge from the

cathode to the anode.
A . C\2(g) + 2 e" -> 2 C\'(aq)
B. Na+(g)+ I e" - Na(s)

C. WOy(aq) + 3 e" -4 WO(s)
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. II and III only
D. Cr20$(s) -> Cr042-(tf<7) + 3e"
D. I, II, and III
292
50. According to the diagram of the cell, photons of light

directly cause which of the following?
Photoelectric cells function by absorbing photons and
A . The anode to be oxidized
converting photon energy into electrical flow (electricity).

The electricity is generated when the photon strikes an
ionizing plate (an electrode) and discharges an electron from
the ionizing plate. Energy is collected and stored as a
potential difference in the form of an electrochemical cell
(battery). Electrons that through the wire from one electrode
B. The anode to be reduced
C. The cathode to be oxidized

D. The cathode to be reduced
to the other electrode can also be stored.

A potential
difference, known as capacitance, potential builds up across
the two plates. A photoelectric cell is shown in Figure 1.
5 1. The BEST material for the anode (ionizing plate) would

be which of the following?
A. A metal
B.
Wire
A metal oxide
C. A nonmetal
D . A nonmetal oxide
52. The overall conversion of energy in a photoelectric cell

Photon
is from:
Membrane
A.
B.
C.
D.
(Storage plate)
(Ionizing plate)
Figure 1
The incident photon must have an energy high enough to

overcome the electrical potential for the cell; otherwise, the
cell cannot build up charge difference. Cells are built with a
negative (unfavorable) E value so that upon the addition of
energy, they build up a charge that can be discharged later.
Equation 1 shows the conversion between the standard free
energyand the standard cell voltage:
potential energy to electrical energy.

electrical energy to potential energy.
radiation energy to electrical energy.
radiation energy to potential energy.
5 3. When the cell discharges, it will:
A. dissipate the most energy initially, because it has

the highest voltage at the start.
B. dissipate the least energy initially, because it has
AG" = -nFE
the highest voltage at the start.
where F = 96,500 C and E = Ered + Eox-
C. dissipate a constant amount of energy, because the
Equation 1
cell has a constant

discharging period.
The efficiencyof the cell is determined by comparing the
voltage
throughout
the
D. dissipate an increasing amount of energy, because

the anode is dissolving throughout the discharging
energy of the incident photon relative to the stored energy of

the cell. An efficient cell dissipates little or no energy.
period.
48. An electrolytic cell:
A. produces energy by way of a favorable oxidation54. What is true about the current, I, at points a, b, and c in
the following circuit?
reduction reaction,
B
produces energy by way
of
an
unfavorable
oxidation-reduction reaction,
Zn|0.1MZn2+ 0.1M Cu2+|Cu
stores energy by way of a favorable oxidationreduction reaction.

D
2Q
stores energy by way of an unfavorable oxidation-
vww-
reduction reaction.
WVNAA
4Q
49. For a photochemical cell to work, the energy of the
A.
B.
C.
D.
photon absorbed must exceed:

A . the AG for oxidation at the anode.
B. the AG for the overall oxidation/reduction reaction.
C . the ionization potential for the anode.

D . the electron affinity for the cathode.
293
/a>/b>/c
/c>/b>/a
/c>/a>/b
/b>/c>'a
All of the cells function in a similar manner, allowing

substitutions to be made to achieve different voltages. The
lifetime of a battery is determined by the quantity of species.
Dry cell batteries are small and have a long lifetime, so

they are common in such household products as flashlights
and radios. They contain no aqueous solution through which
ions migrate, but instead contain a gelatinous paste of
concentrated aqueous NH4CI. It is essential that selected ions
can easily flow through the membrane. A similar battery is
the alkaline manganese cell, which exploits the same
reaction, but in a basic medium.
55. What is the overall balanced reaction for a
A . Cd + 2 Ni02H + 2 OH" -> Cd(OH)2 + 2 Ni(OH)2

B. Cd + 2 Ni02H + 2 H20 -> Cd(OH)2 + 2 Ni(OH)2
C. 2 Cd + Ni02H + 2 OH' -> 2 Cd(OH)2 + Ni(OH)2
In a basic medium, the
battery employs the following two half-cell reactions:

Anode:
nickel-
cadmium battery?
D. 2 Cd + Ni02H + 2 H20 -> 2 Cd(OH)2 + Ni(OH)2
Zn + 2 OH" -> ZnO(s) + H2O + 2 e"
Cathode: Mn02 + _ H2O + 1 e" -_ Mn203 + OH'

56. What is the oxidation state change for manganese in the
Zn/Mn02 battery?
In lieu of manganese oxide, the cells can also use silver

oxide and mercury oxide. In acidic medium, the dry cell
battery employs the following two half-cell reactions.
Anode:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Zn -> Zn2+ + 2 e"
Cathode: Mn02 + NIV + 1e* -> _ Mn203 + _ H2O + NH3

The overall cell potential (E) for the dry cell battery is
slightly greater than 1.50 V. The nickel-cadmium battery is
a rechargeable battery as well. The nickel-cadmium battery
(also known as the nicad battery) is found in calculators and
goes
goes
goes
goes
from
from
from
from
+4
+4
+2
+2
to
to
to
to
+6
+3
+6
+3
57. Which of the following reactions represents the cathode

reaction in a zinc-mercury oxide battery at pH = 10?
A. Zn - Zn2+ + 2 e'
B. Zn + 2 OH" -> ZnO(s) + H2O + 2 e"
electric shavers. The following two reactions are employed

for the nickel-cadmium battery:
Anode:
Mn
Mn
Mn
Mn
C. HgO + 2 NH4+ + 2 e" -> Hg + H20 + 2 NH3

D. HgO + H20 + 2e-->Hg + 2 0H-
Cd + 2 OH' -> Cd(OH)2 + 2 e"
Cathode: NiOOH + H20 + 1 e" -> Ni(OH)2 + 1 OH"
A typical nickel-cadmium battery has a fairly low

voltage. The outer wall of the anode solution is initially the
58. Which of the following reactions CANNOT take place
cadmium metal, but as the cell runs, the cadmium dissolves
at the anode?
away. Figure 1 shows a cross section of a typical nicad

battery. As drawn, the outer casing contains zinc metal (in
lieu of cadmium) in a basic potassium hydroxide solution.
The cathode is made of HgO (Ni02H in typical nicad
A. 2 FeO + 2 OH" -> Fe203 + H20 + 2 e"

B. Ag20 + H2O + 2 e" -> Ag(s) + 2 OH"
C. Ti(OH)2 + 2 OH" -> Ti02 + H20 + 2 e'
D. V203 + 40H"-> V205 + 2H20 + 4e-
batteries), which reduces on the surface of a stainless steel
electrode. The electrons flow to the top of the cathode. The

insulation holds the cell together.
5 9. The electrons in a dry cell battery flow from the:
Cathode
nsulation
A. outer casing to the surface of the stainless steel cap.

B.
left wall of the core to the other wall of the core.
C. bottom of the insulator to the top of the stainless

steel cap.
D. stainless steel cap to the wall of the core.
6 0. What occurs with a nickel-cadmium battery over time?

medium
HgO in a basic
Zn(OH)2/KOH
A.
B.
C.
D.
Solution of Zn powder in KOH
Figure 1
294
Electrons build up in the anode.

Cadmium metal builds up in the anode.
Nickel hydroxide builds up in the anode.
Cadmium hydroxide builds up in the anode.
62. In an electrolytic cell with a molten salt, the:

A . boiling point of the electrode must be less than the
melting point of the salt.
B. melting point of the electrode must be less than the
melting point of the salt.
boiling point of the electrode must be greater than
the melting point of the salt,
melting point of the electrode must be greater than
D
the melting point of the salt.
Electroplating, a typeof electrolysis, is a technique used

either to purify a gas or to obtain a pure solid from an
oxidized metal. For instance, sodium metal and chlorine gas
can be obtained by treating molten sodium chloride salt with

a current of substantial voltage. The applied voltage must be
greater than the voltage released upon the oxidation of sodium

metal to sodium cation, coupled with the reduction of
chlorine gas to chloride anions. If aqueous sodium chloride
were used, then hydrogen gas would be obtained rather than
sodium metal, because less voltage is required to reduce protic
hydrogen cations than sodium cations. Table 1 shows the

voltages for selected reduction half-reactions:
Reaction
emf
Cl2(g) + 2 e- -> 2 Cl-
1.36 volts
solution?
Br2(l) + 2e- -> 2Br
1.09 volts
Cu2+ + 2e~ - Cu(s)
0.34 volts
2H+ + 2e" -> H2(g)
0.00 volts
Ni2+ + 2 c- -> Ktfs)
-0.23 volts
Zn2+ + 2 c- -> Zn(s)
-0.76 volts
Mn2+ + 2 e" - Mn(s)
-1.18 volts
A. When the oxidation potential of the cation is larger

than the oxidation potential of hydrogen in water
B. When the oxidation potential of the cation is less
than the oxidation potential of hydrogen in water
C . When the reduction potential of the cation is larger
than the reduction potential of hydrogen in water
D. When the reduction potential of the cation is less
than the reduction potential of hydrogen in water
Table
6 3. When must a molten salt be used rather than an aqueous
A standard electrolysis apparatus is shown in Figure 1.

There is no salt bridge required when both electrodes exist in
the same cell.
6 4. What is TRUE about the left electrode of the standard
electrolysis cell that releases hydrogen and chlorine

gases from aqueous hydrochloric acid?
A . The left electrode is the anode, where H2(g) forms.
B. The left electrode is the anode, where C\2(g) forms.
C. The left electrode is the cathode, where H2(g)
forms.
D. The left electrode is the cathode, where Cl2(g)
Figure 1
forms.
Reduction occurs at the cathode and oxidation occurs at
the anode. The voltage necessary to run the cell increases

over time, because the concentrations change as the cell runs.
Equation 1, the Nernst equation, determines the cell voltage

as the concentrations vary, where Q is the ratio of the anode
65. Which of the following reactions would NOT be
cation concentration to the cathode cation concentration.
observed when the indicated voltage is applied?
Eobserved =E'cell -Qiî log Q
A.
B.
C.
D.
Equation 1
61. When aqueous sodium chloride undergoes electrolysis,

at 25C, what are the gases formed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
NiCl2(7)->
ZnCl2(0->
NiBr2(/)->
ZnBr2(/)->
Ni(s)
Zr\(s)
Ni(s)
Zn(s)
+ C\2(g) from 1.75 V

+ C\2(g) from 2.25 V
+ Br2(D from 1.60 V
+ Br2(l) from 1.50 V
Na(g) and C\2(g)

H2(s) and Cl2(g)
Na(g)and02(g)
H2(g)and02(g)
295
66. Why does copper metal plate from CuChfaq). while

nickel metal does NOT plate from NiChfw//?
A
B
C
D

Pure gases can be obtained through a process known as
E red(Cu2+) > E;red(H+) > E red(Ni2+)

Ereti(Ni2+) > E'red(H+) > E red(Cu2+)
Hied(Cu2+) > E;red(Ni2+) > E'red(H+)
Ered(H+) > Ered(Cu2+) > E red(Ni2+)
electrolysis. Electrolysis is the cleaving of a compound using

an applied voltage. A typical example is the conversion o\'
water liquid into hydrogen gas and oxygen gas. Electrolysis

can also be used to form metals from cationic salts. Figure I
is a schematic layout of an electrolysis cell used industrially
to make chlorine gas from aqueous sodium chloride:
67. Which of the following electrolysis reactions can be

carried out in an aqueous solution, as well as in a
>0(D
molten salt?
A.
B.
C.
I).
CuBv2(l) -> Cu(s) + Br2(D

MnCb(7J- Mn(s) + C\2(g)
ZnC\2(l)-> Zn(s) + C\2(g)
NiBr2(/j -^ Nir.v> + Br2(i)
1.00 i\
NaCl(aq)
Figure 1
The oxidation of chloride anion must use less voltage

than the oxidation of the oxygen of water; otherwise, tlie
reaction would have to be carried out in the absence of water.
Sodium transfers electrons from the cathode ol' the applied

voltage in the lower electrolytic region to the hydrogens of
water in the upper galvanic region. Because the voltage is
reducing sodium, the applied voltage must be high enough to
reduce sodium cation and oxidize chloride anion. Heat energy
is released when the sodium metal reduces the hydronium ion
in water.
The appropriate half-cell reactions for the
electrolysis apparatus shown in Figure I are listed below:
Cb(,c) + 2e- -> 2 C\-(aq)
+1.36 V
Ni\+(aq) + I e" -> Nz(s)
- 2.71 V
H+(aq) + 1e" - _ H2(<-)
().()() V
68. Overall, what occurs in the cell as written?

A . Na is oxidized, and CI" is reduced.
B. Na is reduced, and CI" is oxidized.

C . H+ is oxidized, and CI" is reduced.
I) . H+ is reduced, and CI" is oxidi/ed.
(.<,.
296
74. Which of the following is the STRONGEST reducing
69. What must be true regarding the applied voltage in

Figure I?
agent?
A. Na+fa^
A . It must lie between 0 and 1.36 volts.

B.
It must lie between 1.36 and 2.71 volts.
B. Na(s)
C . It must lie between 2.71 and 4.07 volts.
C. Cl(aq)
D. H20?J
D . It must be greater than 4.07 volts.
70. The overall reaction is:
A . NaCKaq) + HC\(aq) -> H2(g) + Na(s) + C\2(g)
B. Na+(aq) + H20(l) -> H2(g) + Na(s) + 02(g)

C . NaC\(aq) + H20(l) -> H2(g) + NaOH(oq) + C\2(g)
D . NaClf^) + H2(g) - H20(l) + Na(s) + C\2(g)
71. Which of the following statements describes sodium

cation in the electrolysis cell?
I. Sodium cation is more favorably reduced than

hydronium cation.
II.
Sodium cation is
reduced in
the
salt
solution
segment of the cell, because it can cross the

membrane into mercury metal.
III. The [Na+| in the NaClfo^ solution that enters the
electrolytic cell is greater than the [Na+] in the

NaCKaq) solution that leaves the cell.
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, and III
72. Electron flow is defined as moving:
A. from anode to cathode in both the battery and

electrolytic cell.
B. from cathode to anode in both the battery and
electrolytic cell.
C. from anode to cathode in the battery, and from
cathode to the anode in the electrolytic cell.
D. from cathode to anode in the battery, and from
anode to the cathode in the electrolytic cell.
the
the
the
the
73. In an electrolytic cell, what must be TRUE about the

reaction and applied voltages?
A . Both values are positive; Eapp|jetj > Erxn.

B. Both values are positive; Eapp|jecj < Erxn.
C Eappiicd > 0 and Erxn < 0; Eapp|ied > |Erxn|.

D Eappiicd > and Erxn < 0; Eapp|jed < |Erxn|-
297
Passage XII (Questions 75-81)
75. Which of the following statements conectly describes

the anode and electron flow in Cell 1?
A researcher sets up an electrochemical cell, Cell 1

shown in Figure 1, by placing a strip of zinc metal into a
solution of 0.10 M ZnS04(aq) in the left half-cell and a strip
of copper metal into a solution of 0.10 M CuS04(aq) in the
right half-cell. The two metal strips are connected by a
conducting wire passing through a voltmeter. The half-cells
then are connected by a string soaked in Na2S04(aq).
A. The anode is the zinc electrode, and the electron
flow is from right to left.

B. The anode is the zinc electrode, and the electron
flow is from left to right.

C. The anode is the copper electrode, and the electron
flow is from right to left.
D. The anode is the copper electrode, and the electron
flow is from left to right.
76. All of the following are observed, once the switch in

Cell 2 is closed, EXCEPT:
A . electrons flow from left to right, gradually slowing,

until to no electron flow is observed.
B. the mass of the left copper electrode decreases,

while the mass of the right copper electrode
increases.
Figure 1
C. the copper cation concentration in the right

electrode decreases to a value of roughly 0.50 M.
The researcher creates a second cell, Cell 2 shown in
Figure 2, by placing a strip of copper metal into a solution

of 0.001 M CuS04(a<?; in the left half-cell and a strip of
copper metal into a solution of 1.00 M CuS04(aq) in the
right half-cell. The two metal strips are connected by a
conducting wire passing through a voltmeter. The half-cells
are then connected by a string soaked in Na2S04^J.
D. the copper cation concentration in the left electrode
increases to a value of approximately 1.00 M.
77. If the string in Cell 1 were replaced by a copper wire,

then which of the following would be the cell potential
for Cell 1?
Conducting wire
A.
1.46 V
B.
1.10 V
C. 0.76 V
D. 0.00 V
78. Cell 1 is BESTdescribed as which of the following?

A . An electrolytic cell
Figure 2
B. A concentration cell
C. A galvanic cell
D. A charging cell
Cell I is a standard cell, while Cell 2 is a concentration
cell. The driving force in a concentration cell is the

equilibrating of concentrations in the two half-cells. Table 1
lists reduction potentials for some standard half-reactions:
Half-reaction
79. Given that the cell potential can be calculated by the

following formula, what is the cell potential in Cell 2?
Ecell
Ag+ + le" > Ag
0.80 V
Cu2+ + 2e" -> Cu
0.34 V
Fe3+ + 3e" > Fe
-0.04 V
Ni2+ + 2e- -> Ni
-0.23 V
B. 0.089 V
Fe2+ + 2e" - Fe
-0.44 V
C. 0.517 V
Cr3+ + 3e- -> Cr
-0.73 V
Zn2+ + 2e" -> Zn
-0.76 V
Al3+ + 3e" -> Al
-1.66 V
Table
E = E- 0.059
logQ
A. 0.177 V
D. 0.429 V
298
80. What is the standard cell potential for Cell 1?

A.
1.10 V
Items made from metal are subject to corrosion, an airinduced oxidation of metal in the presence of moisture.
Water serves as a solvent through which anions and cations
may flow, to assist in carrying out the oxidation-reduction
process. Many techniques have been developed to minimize,
B. 0.42 V
C. 2.20 V
D. -0.42 V
and even eliminate, the effects of corrosion. The techniques
of interest are galvanizing, coating, and cathodic protection

(the insertion of sacrificial metal).
Galvanizing: Galvanizing mixes two metals of different

oxidation potentials. The sacrificial metal is oxidized first,
leaving behind the other metal in its elemental form. For
instance, iron can be galvanized with zinc so that zinc
oxidizes away, leaving the iron intact. If zinc were not
present, iron would be oxidized and eventually weaken.
81. What are the coefficients when the following equation is

balanced?
H20(/J
+ <Z\Oy(aq)
+ Mg(s) ->
CV(aq) + Mg2+(aq) + OW(aq)

A. 2
->
2 :4
B.
3 ->
3 :3
Coating: Coating is the process of plating the surface of a
C. 3
3 ->
3 :6
metal with a material that are not oxidize.
3 :6
chromium, tin, and aluminum form oxide coatings through

which electrons cannot transfer. The coating serves to
D. 3
3 ->
For instance,
insulate the metal from the environment.
Cathodic protection: Cathodic protection involves running

a wire through the material and connecting the end of the
wire to an easily oxidized metal. The sacrificial metal is
oxidized, leaving the guarded metal intact. This technique
is often used to protect long iron pipelines.
To apply these techniques, the electromotive potentials

for each component in the mixture must be known. Table 1
lists the emffor favorable half-reactions of selected metals.
Ca2+(aq) + 2e"
2.87 V
2.36 V
>
Mg2+(aq) + 2e"
Al*+(aq) + 3e-
Mn(s)
>
Mn2+(aq) + 2e"
1.18 V
Pd2+(aq) + 2e"
>
Pd(s)
0.99 V
Zn(s)
->
Zn2+(aq) + 2e*
0.76 V
Fe(s)
>
Fe2+(aq) + 2e"
0.44 V
Cu2+(aq) + 2e"
>
Cu(s)
0.34 V
Nif.vj
>
N\2+(aq) + 2e"
0.28 V
Pb(s)
>
Pb2+(aq) + 2e"
0.13 V
Ca(s)
>
Mg(s)
>
AKs)
Table
1.66 V
The emf for an oxidation or reduction half-reaction not

listed in Table I can be determined, if two or more reactions
that sum to that half-reaction are known. Hess's law is used
to determine AG values, but not the emf values. The overall
AG value is found by summing the AG values for the
component reactions. TheAG" for each half-reaction is found

from the emfvalues given. The emf for the overall reaction
is found using Equation 1.
AG = -n^
Equation 1
299
To calculate the emffor theoxidation of Cr to Cr3+, the

AG" for oxidation of Cr to Cr2+ and Cr2+ to Cr3+ may be
used.
The
two
oxidation
half-reactions,
and
their
corresponding AG" and emf values are shown below:
CrW
-> Cr2+(aq) + 2e- e = +0.89V
AG =-2(0.89)7
Cr2+(aq) -> Cr^(aq) + le' e = +0.41 V
AG =-(0.41)7
85. Which of the following reactions is NOT favorable as

written?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Al^ + Cr*+(aq) -> Crf*; + AI3+(7/</J

Mn(s) + Pd2+(o<7; -> Pd(s) + Mn2+(aq)
Zn(s) + N\2+(aq) -> N\(s) + Zn2+(aq)
Pd(i-) + Cu2+(^ -> CuW + Pd2+(Y/^
The emf for the oxidation of Cr to Cr3+ is calculated

from the AG0 for oxidation of Cr to Cr3+ as follows:
Cr(s)
->
Cr*+(aq) +3e-AG =-2(0.89)7+-(0.41)7
e' =-AG/nr= -[-1.787+ (-0.41 ^]/3y= 2.197/3y.= 0.73 V
86. Which of the following graphs represents the mass of

zinc metal and iron metal in a galvanized steel sample
82. Given the following reaction and its corresponding e
over time?
value, what is the emf value for the oxidation of iron
Zn
Fe
metal to iron trication?

A.
Fe2+(aq) -> Fe3+(fl^ + le"
e=-0.77 V
A. 2(+0.44) + (-0.77)
3
B 2(+0.44) - (-0.77)
3
(+0.44) + 2(-0.77)
3
Time
D (+0.44) - 2(-0.77)
3
83. Given that Cu2+(aq) + e" -> Cu+(aq) has e = 0.15 V,

what is the free energy change for the following
reaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Time
Time
Cu(s) -> Cu+(aq) + e"

AG = [2(-0.34) +0.15)]7
AG = [2(-0.34) - (0.15)]7
AG = [2(0.34)+ (0.I5)]7
AG = [2(0.34) -(0.15)]7
87. Which of the following would NOT form a protective

oxide coating on copper?
A. Aluminum
B. Chromium
84. Which of the following is NOT possible as a sacrificial
C. Tin
coating to protect the indicated metal?
A.
B.
C.
D.
D. Palladium
Aluminum as the sacrificial metal to protect iron

Zinc as the sacrificial metal to protect copper
Zinc as the sacrificial metal to protect iron
Nickel as the sacrificial metal to protect zinc
300
89. Why is it NOT possible to electroplate onto a plastic
Passage XIV (Questions 88 - 93)
material?
A student sets up an experiment to determine the effects

of the cell potential, concentration, and current on the degree
of electroplating. In the first experiment, the student sets up
A. The plastic melts at the high temperatures required

for electroplating.
B. The plastic is oxidized by the current.
six solutions with the following contents:

Solution 1:
0.10 M AgN03(a^
Solution II:
1.00 M AgNOâq)
Solution III:
0.10 M ZnSO^J
Solution IV:
1.00 M ZnS04(^
Solution V:
0.10 M CuSO^;
Solution VI:
1.00 M CuSO^;
C. Plastic is
an
insulator and does not
conduct
electricity.
D. Plastic is too malleable to allow for electroplating.
90. Which of the following graphs shows the relationship

of mass as a function of time for Solutions I and IV?
Into each solution, an inert electrode weighing exactly
5.00 grams is inserted. A steady current of electricity is

applied toeach electrode for the duration ofone minute for all
six solutions. The electrode is then removed and the mass is
measured.
The degree of plating can be determined by
subtracting the original mass of the electrode from the final

mass ofthe plated electrode. The mass for each electrode after
it is removed is listed below:
Solution I:
Solution II:
Solution III:
Solution IV:
Solution V:
Solution VI:
6.187 grams
6.182 grams
5.360 grams
5.358 grams
5.347 grams
5.350 grams
Time
The difference between the solutions in the mass after
plating of the electrode is attributed to both the difference in

molecular mass for each element, and the number of electrons
required to reduce each cation. The degree of plating can be
9 1. Electroplating results from:
calculated, if the current and the duration of time are both
A.
B.
C.
D.
known. The conversion from coulombs to moles involves
Faraday's constant (96,500 coulombs/mole).
The procedure in this experiment can be used to form

pure samples of metal. The metal coating adheres to the
electrode until it is removed using the application of some
the
the
the
the
oxidation
reduction
oxidation
reduction
of a
of a
of a
of a
metal into a cation.

metal into a cation.
cation into a metal.
cation into a metal.
92. Which of the following is a desirable property of a
force. This technique is used in the purification of gold.

Electroplating is also used in the application of protective
metal coatings to materials. Chromium can be applied to
metal to be used to coat a structural beam that will be
exposed to moisture?
A.
B.
C.
D.
metal surfaces in this manner.
88. Approximately what mass would be expected for a
Its cation has a large positive reduction potential.

The metal has a large positive reduction potential.
Its cation has a large positiveoxidation potential.
The metal has a large positiveoxidation potential.
solution of Cd2+, if it were exposed for one minute to

the same current and electrode used in the experiment?
93. If an equal current is applied for an equal duration of

time to separate flasks containing the aqueous ions
Cu2+, Zn2+, Ag+, and Au3+, which ion yields the
A . A mass less than 5.347 grams
B. A mass greater than 5.350 grams, but less than
MOST precipitated metal by mass?
5.358 grams
C. A mass greater than 5.360 grams, but less than
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.182 grams
D. A mass greater than 6.182 grams
301
Cu2+
Zn2+
Ag+
Au3+
99. Which of the following graphs represents voltage as a

function of time for a galvanic cell obeying the Nernst
equation?

94. Tarnish on silver is attributed to Ag2S forming on the
surface. By placing silver in an aluminum pan and
adding aqueous baking soda (NaHC03), the tarnish can
be removed. Which of the following equations shows
that reaction taking place?
E = E'-M59 logQ
n
A.
A. Ag2S(s) + 2 NaHCOi(aq)
- H2(g) + 2 Ag(s) + Na2S(s;
B. Ag2S(s) + 2NaHC03(aq)
-> C02(g) + 2 Ag(s; + S(s)
C . Ag2S(s) + 2 A\(s) -> 2 Ag(s) + Al2S(s)
D . 3 Ag2S(s) + 2 A\(s) - 6 Agf$; + AfyStfs)
95. Given that AC' = -RT In K and AG* = -nFE, which of
the following equations holds true?

A. -RTlnK = nFE
nFE
B. lnK =
RT
nFE
C. lnK = RT
100. Aluminum metal is formed according to the Hall

process. The reaction for the Hall process is drawn
D. lnK = -HT_
nFE
below:
2 A\2Ot,(solution) + 3 C(s) - 4 A\(s) + 3 C02(g)
96. What are the coefficients for the following oxidationreduction reaction?
What must be true for this reaction?
Cr(s) + Hl(aq)-> H2(g) + Crl3(s)

A. 2
B.
: 3
A . Aluminum oxide is reduced.

B. Carbon is reduced.
: 2
: 3
: 4
C. 2
: 3
: 2
D. 4
: 3
: 4
C. Aluminum metal is oxidized.

D . Carbon dioxide is oxidized.
97. If a solution of 1.0 M ZnC\2(aq) were exposed to a 9.65

ampere current for 1,000 seconds, how many grams of
zinc metal would plate onto the cathode?
(F = 96,500 C/mole electrons)
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.269 grams Zn
6.538 grams Zn
9.807 grams Zn
13.076 grams Zn
98. What is the cell potential for the following cell? The
reduction potentials of nickel and magnesium are -0.23
V and -2.37 V, respectively.
Mg(s) + Ni2+(a</) -> N\(s) + Mg2+(aq)

A. 5.20V
B. 4.28 V
1.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
4.
9. A
5. C
10. A
II. B
12. C
13. D
14. D
15. D
16. B
21. A
17. D
19. B
24. D
20.
22. D
18. D
23. D
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30. A
34.
31. D
36. D
32. C
37. D
33. B
38. B
41. A
42.
43.
46. B
47. D
51. A
52.
56. B
57.
61. B
66. A
35.
40.
39. C
44. D
45.
49. B
54. C
50. A
48. D
53. A
58. B
59.
60.
62. D
63.
64.
65.
67. A
72. A
68.
71.
76.
77.
78.
55. B
69. D
73. C
74. B
75. B
79. B
80.
84. D
85. D
90. A
70. C
A
81. D
82. A
83. D
86. A
87. D
92. A
97. A
88. C
89. C
93. C
94. D
95. B
98.
99. D
100. A
91.
C. 2.60 V
C
C
96. A
D. 2.14V
302
NOW THAT WASN'T THAT BAD!
Electrochemistry Passage Answers

1.
Water-Based Redox Reactions
Choice D is correct. You should recall the mnemonic "Leo the red cat says 'ger'.", which tells us amongst other
things that loss of electrons is oxidation. Because the loss of an electron from a compound is referred to as
oxidation, choice A is a valid statement and thereby eliminated.
When an element loses one electron, the
process is referred to as ionization (the ionization energy is the energy required to lose an electron if you recall),
so choice B is a valid statement and thereby eliminated. To convert an oxidation state from -1 to 0 requires
losing an electron, because the new oxidation state is more positive (less negative) than the initial oxidation
state. This makes choice C a valid statement and thereby eliminated. The best answer must be choice D. The
electron affinity is the energy released when an element gains an electron, meaning that choice D does not
involve the loss of an electron, but rather the gain of an electron.
2.
Choice C is correct. The most favorable reaction involves the most favorable oxidation half-reaction coupled
with the most favorable reduction half-reaction. Potassium is less electronegative than sodium, so potassium
gives off an electron more easily. This means that the oxidation potential for potassium is more positive than
the oxidation potential for sodium. This eliminates choices B and D. Chlorine is more electronegative than
bromine, so chlorine gains an electron more easily. This means that the reduction potential for chlorine is more
positive than the reduction potential for bromine. This eliminates choice A. The best overall reaction (most
favorable and with the largest cell voltage) is the reaction of potassium with chlorine. This makes choice C
the best answer.
3.
Choice C is correct. The oxidationstates of hydrogen and oxygen in HCl and HOCl are +1 and -2, respectively.
The oxidation state of chlorine can be found by looking at the difference in the two compounds in question. In
HCl, the oxidation state of chlorine must be -1, to offset the +1 of H and keep the overall compound neutral. In
HOCl, the oxidation state of chlorine must be +1, to offset the +1 of H and -2 of O and keep the overall
compound neutral. This makes choice C thecorrect answer choice.

4.
Choice D is correct. Rubidium, Rb, lies below potassium and sodium in the alkali metal column of the periodic
table. Because Rb is lower in the periodic table, Rb has a lower ionization energy than either potassium (K) or
sodium (Na). This results in a value for the ionization energy of Rb that is lower in magnitude than that of
both potassium or sodium, so it is less than either 495.9 or 418.7 kj per mole. The best answer is choice D, less
than 418.7 kj per mole.
5.
Choice C is correct. Because lithium is in the same column of the periodic table as sodium and potassium, the
reaction of lithium with watershould produce similar products as the other alkali metals, but with different
energy. Both sodium and potassium when added to water produce metal hydroxide and hydrogen gas. No
metal hydride forms, so choices B and D are eliminated. There is a reaction, so choice A is eliminated.
Although both hydrogen gas and lithium hydroxide are produced in the reaction, "only lithium hydroxide" is
the best answer of the choices. Choose answer C.
6.
Choice D is correct. The oxidizing agent is the reactant that gets reduced and the reducing agent is the reactant
that gets oxidized. Potassium metal is oxidized by water, so potassium must be the reducing agent. This
eliminates choices A and C. Water is a reactant, not hydrogen gas, so choice Bis eliminated. The best answer is
choice D.
7.
Choice C is correct. Metals have a lower ionization energy than nonmetals, so metals are more easily oxidized
than nonmetals. This can be confirmed from the highly positive reduction potentials of nonmetals and the
highly positive oxidation potentials of metals. Statement I is therefore a valid statement. From Reactions 3
and 4, we can conclude that metals form metal hydroxides in water. Several metal hydroxides undergo
dehydration to form metal oxides when the water is removed. Calcium and magnesium are examples of metals
that form both oxides and hydroxides in water. Although the passage does not provide enough information, we
can lean towards the belief that metals form both oxides and hydroxides in water. This makes statement II a
valid statement. From Reactions 1 and 2, it can be inferred that nonmetals do not form metal oxides and metal
hydroxides. Nonmetals cannot turn into metals, sostatement III is invalid. The best answer is choice C.
Copyright by The Berkeley Reviewr
303
Section X Detailed Explanations

8.
pH Meter and Calomel Cell
Choice Cis correct. The pH of the solution is found using the fundamental equation: pH =-log [H+]. In this
question, the concentration is given as 0.010 M, so pH =-log (.01) =-log 10"2 =2. There isn't much to this question
beyond basic log math. Pick choice C for optimum satisfaction.

9.
Choice Ais correct. Reducing the pH ofa solution requires making the solution more acidic or less basic. Either
change will result in an increase in the [H+], but the answer choices all describe addition of something to the
solution, so we must be adding an acid in order to lower the pH. Only the addition of HCKaq) (choice A) would
result in an increase in the [H+]. Choose Afor that feeling of successful question answering. Answer choices B
and C are bases, sowhen they are added tosolution, the result is a decrease in the [H+J. Choice D is a neutral
salt, meaning that the only affect it has is to dilute the solution, which results in a decrease in the [H+] and
[OH"]. Although the solution would adjust to reestablish equilibrium, and that could involve either an overall
small decrease orsmall increase in the [H+], we donot have enough information tochoose D.
10.
11.
Choice Ais correct. As base is added, the concentration of hydronium ion decreases. As [H+I decreases, the pH
of the solution increases, which eliminates choices Band D. Equation 1can be used to correlate Eobserved and
pH: E0bserved =ECell -0.0592 log [H+]. As [H+] decreases, the log [H+] (which equals -pH) gets more negative.
This means a larger negative number is subtracted, thus making the number more positive. This makes the
value of E0bserved increase as the solution becomes more basic. Pick choice Atoday and smile tomorrow.
Choice Bis correct. The pH measured by the pH meter is determined using Equation 1, avariation on the Nernst
equation. Let's start by making two assumptions: (1) The Eobserved is aset value and (2) 0.285 Vis being used for
E in the calculation rather than 0.300 V. Plugging these values into Equation 1yields the following:
Actual E0bserved =(Value that is too small for Ecen) - 0.0592 log [H+]
In order to make the relationship hold, the value for [H+] being plugged in must be smaller than the actual
value for [H+J. This means that the calculated [H+] is lower than the actual [H+], so the calculated pH is
higher than the actual pH. This means that the measured [H+] is too low, so the pH reading is too high. This
is best explained in answer choice B.
12.
Choice Cis correct. From Reaction 1in the passage, it can be seen that Hg2Cl2(s) is gaining electrons, which is
defined as reduction. This eliminates both choice Band choice D. In Hg2Cl2(s), the oxidation state of mercury
is +1, so mercury in the reactant has an oxidation state of +1 and 0in the product. Mercury is the atom being
reduced in the reduction half-reaction. Chlorine has an oxidation state of -1 before and after the reaction This
means that chloride is simply a spectator ion, and it does not get involved in the oxidation-reduction reaction.
In light ofthis revelation, the best answer choice for this question must be choice C.
13.
Choice Dis correct. Again, Equation 1from the passage must be used. Eobserved =Ecei|
the Eobserved is 0.699V yields:
0.0592 log [H+] with
0.699 = 0.285 - .0592 (log [H+]) => 0.414 = -.0592 (log [H+])
^ -0414. = -|0g[H+] = pH .-. pH = 0-414 = 4L4 = 42 = 7
0-0592
6
F 0.0592 5.92 6
The pH is approximately 7and the closest answer choice is 7.0, so you really should pick Dfor MCAT success.
14. Choice Dis correct. Achange in temperature will always shift the equilibrium of a chemical reaction. Because
the equilibrium of the reaction affects the [H+], the pH of the solution is affected by a change in the
temperature. Choice A is a valid statement, and thereby eliminated. Because the pH of the solution is
dependent on the hydronium ion concentration ([H30+]), and a change in the volume of solvent changes the
IH30+], achange in the volume of water solvent changes the pH. Addition of water will tend to push the pH
towards 7. Choice Bis a valid statement, and thereby eliminated. The degree to which a proton can dissociate
into solution depends on the solvent, so the IH30+] and therefore pH vary with the type of solvent as well.
Choice Cis a valid statement, and thereby eliminated. The solution is homogeneous, so no matter where the
electrode probe is positioned within solution, it should read the exact same [H30+], so pH does not vary with
position of the electrode. Choice D is an invalid statement, so it is the best choice.
304
Metallurgy

15.
Choice D is correct. In Reaction 1, gold metal is oxidized by oxygen and ligated by the surrounding cyano anions.
This means that the cyanide anion is a ligand (lone pair donor) that binds the gold cation. The cyanide ligand
is simply acting as a Lewis base when it donates a lone pair of electrons to the central gold cation. The best
answer is choice D.
16.
Choice B is correct. The sum of the oxidation states of the atoms in any compound must add up to the overall
charge on the compound. The cyanide ligand carries a -1 charge, so the gold cation must carry a +1 charge, in
order for the sum of the two cyanide ligands and one gold cation to have a -1 charge. In this case, the charge on
the gold is also its oxidation state, so the best answer is choice B.
17.
Choice D is correct. In the purification of zinc metal, sulfur goes from a -2 oxidation state in zinc sulfide to a +4
oxidation state in sulfur dioxide, so sulfur has been oxidized.
This means that statement I is not a valid
statement, which eliminates choice C. Zinc goes from a +2 oxidation state in zinc sulfide to an oxidation state
of 0 in zinc metal, so zinc has been reduced.
This means that statement II is a valid statement, which
eliminates choice B. Oxygen gas gets reduced upon oxidizing sulfur in the first reaction, so oxygen gas is the
oxidizing agent. This means that statement III is a valid statement, which eliminates choice a and makes
choice D the best answer.
18.
Choice D is correct. In the purification of silicon, silicon is reduced from an oxidation state of +4 in Si02 to an
oxidation state of 0 in pure silicon. The silicon is therefore reduced by a total of four electrons, making choice D
the only possible choice. The reaction does not need to be balanced; the four electrons are enough to distinguish
the best answer from the other choices.
19.
Choice B is correct. In Reaction 1, oxygen goes from an oxidation state of 0 in 02(g) to -2 in OH'. This means that
oxygen is reduced and not oxidized in the purification of gold. This eliminates choices A and C. In Reaction 3,
oxygen goes from an oxidationstate of 0 in 02(g) to -2 in both ZnO and S02. This means that oxygen is reduced
and not oxidized in the purification of zinc. This reaffirms the elimination of choices A and C. In Reaction 5,
oxygen goes from an oxidation state of 0 in 02(g) to -2 in both HgO and S02, but in Reaction 6 it goes from -2 in
HgOto 0 in 02(g). In Reaction 6, oxygen is oxidized. In Reactions 7 and 8, oxygen remains with an oxidation
state of -2 in all compounds, so it is neither oxidized nor reduced. Oxygen is only oxidized when heat is applied
to mercuryoxide, so choice B is the best answer. You could have reached this conclusion faster by noticing that
all of the reactions listed in the passage show oxygen in a reduced form in the final product, except when it
exists as oxygen gas in Reaction 6. The best answer is choice B.
20.
Choice D is correct. Mercury is not oxidized in Reaction 5; it remains with an oxidation state of +2. This
eliminates choiceC. Sulfur goes from -2 in HgS to +4 in S02, so sulfur is in fact oxidized by six electrons. This
makes choice D the best answer. Mercury is reduced by a total of two electrons in Reaction 6, so choices A and B
are both incorrect.
21.
Electrochemical Titration
Choice A is correct. As we read in the passage, the dichromate anion precipitates out of solution as an ionic
solid with lead dication. As the concentration of Pb2+ decreases because of this precipitation, the observed
voltage decreases. This is reasonable, because the denominator of the Q term in the Nernst equation becomes
smaller, making the overall value of Q larger. The result is that the cell voltage decreases. This is best
explained as choice A. The last three choices should be eliminated, because Pb2+(aq) and Cr2Oj2'(aq) do not
react with one another by any redox reaction, only a precipitation reaction.
22.
Choice D is correct. The lead-zinc galvanic cell has an Ecell of -0.13 - (-0.76) = 0.63 V. The dichromate-zinc
galvanic cell has an Ecell of 1.33 - (-0.76) = 2.09 V. Regardless of the concentration difference between the zinc
cation and the other species in solution, the Ecell for the dichromate-zinc cell is so much greater than the lead-
zinc cell that the E0bServed is greater for the dichromate-zinc cell. The reason is that the reduction potential of
dichromate (1.33 V) is much higher than the reduction potential of lead (-0.13 V). The best answer is choice D.
Choices A and Bcan be eliminated, because dichromate (Cr2072') and lead dication (Pb2+) do not get oxidized,
according to the reactions presented in the passage. Even if they could be oxidized, their presence in the
cathode half-cell requires that they undergo reduction rather than oxidation. From the numerical data
presented, choice D is true, while choice C is false.
305
23.
Choice D is correct. Sulfate anion is present at the start and finish of the reaction, so it has not undergone any
change in oxidation state whatsoever. The sulfate anion is simply a spectator ion that balances out the
positive charge in each cell. This eliminates choices A and B. Sulfate and dichromate are both anions, so they
will not form a precipitate. This eliminates choice C. The lead cation is reduced at the cathode so the [Pb2+] is
decreased; while zinc metal is oxidized at the anode, so the [Zn2+] is increased. This means that the sulfate
anion must flow from the cathode to the anode through thesalt bridge to keep the net charge in each half-cell
balanced. The best answer is therefore choice D.
24.
Choice D is correct. When the switch is closed, the circuit is complete, and the cell will begin to produce
electricity.
As the cell produces electricity, the [Pb2+] slowly decreases.
This prevents the accurate
measurement of the amount of lead present in the cathode half-cell, so determination of the exact equivalence
is not possible. Given the answerchoices, the best answer is choice D, because the voltage is depleted. Choice
A is out, because voltage is depleted in a galvanic cell, not stored. Choice B is a throwaway choice, and
regardless of whether the circuit is open or closed, the lead and zinc can possibly migrate through the salt
bridge, eliminating choice C.
25.
Choice A is correct. Zinc metal isbeing oxidized into zinc cation (zinc is losing electrons), so choices C and D are
eliminated. Oxidation occurs at the anode, so choice A is the best answer. You should recall that oxidation
occurs at the anode and reduction occurs at the cathode. Recall that in the mnemonic "Leo the red cat says
'ger'.", red cat means that reduction occurs at the cathode. By default, we can conclude that oxidation occurs a t
the anode.
26.
Choice D is correct. The observed voltage reaches a minimum when the concentrations of lead and dichromate
are closest to zero, which results from their precipitating one another out of solution. This occurs when the
moles of Pb-+ present initially equals the moles of Cr2072" added. When volume is multiplied by molarity,
the result is moles ofsolute. Choices A and B deal with molarity and not moles, so they are both eliminated.
Only choice D lists when the moles of the twospecies are thesame, so pick choice D and be a star-studded chem
trooper.

27.
Redox Titration
Choice D is correct. The solution in the flask starts clear while the solution in the burette starts as dark purple.
When the titrant is added to the solution, the solution will become slightly purple for a brief instant, until the
ferrous cation (Fe2+ (aq)) consumes the permanganate anion (MnO^fa^) and returns to being a clear solution with
a small amount of brown precipitate falling out of solution. The endpoint of titration occurs when the initially
clear ferrous solution turns and remains purple because of the unreacted excess permanganate that remains in
solution following the complete oxidation of Fe2+ by Mn04" (KMn04 is the oxidizing agent). MnO is a solid, so
the solution does not turn brown, but a brown precipitate forms on the bottom of the flask.
This eliminates
choices A and B. Over-titration with KMnOâq) results in the purple color remaining in solution. It turns clear
only if the KMn04 reacts. The lingering ofthe purple color indicates that the reaction is complete. Choice D is
clearly (or more so purply) the best answer.
28.
Choice Ais correct. Flask 3 has twice as much solute by weight and half the volume of solution compared to
Flask 2. Relatively, as measured in grams per liter, the following is true:
MRask3 = Double the mass x M|;|ask, 2 x^ ^ . 4 x M

Hall the volume
Flask 3 has four times the concentration of Flask 2, as measured in grams per liter. It is given that Flask 2
requires a 17.50-mL aliquot of Na2Cr?07rn^ to reach equivalence, so Flask 3 (containing 20.00 mL solution) will
require four times the volume of titrant (4 x 17.50 mL) = 70.00 mL Na2Cr207{aq) solution as Flask 2 required.
Flask3 requires a 70.00-mL aliquot, so choice A is the best answer.
29.
Choice C is correct. No matter what flask we consider, Fe2+ is reacting with M1-1O4- to form Fe2+ and MnO.
Reactants serve as the reducing and oxidizing agents, so choices B and D can be eliminated.
We know that
KM1-1O4 i-s the oxidizing agent in the reaction (it loses oxygen atoms, so it is the reactant that gets reduced), so
Fe-+ must be the reducingagent. Based on this, you must choose choice C. The Fe2+ ion is oxidized to Fe3+, so i t
gets oxidized and causes reduction, thus defining itself as the reducing agent of the reaction.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review,
306
30.
Choice A is correct. In Flask 2, FeS04 is present initially. We shall focus on the ferrous cation (Fe2+ (aq)),
because the passage shows that it is the ferrous cation and not the sulfate anion that is reacting when a strong
oxidizing agent isadded. Instead ofusing KM1-1O4 for the titration, the ferrous cation solution is reacting with
a Na2Cr207(7?r/) solution, also a conpound rich in oxygen like potassium permanganate.
Because sodium
dichromate and potassium permanganate are both rich in oxygen, we can assume they are both acting as
oxidizing agents. Na2Cr207(7?</,) acts similarly to KMn04, so it must be the oxidizing agent. Choice A is the
best answer. The reaction is shown below:
8 H+ + 6 Fe2+ + 1 Na2Cr207 -> 6 Fe3+ + 1Cr203 + 2 Na+ + 4 H20

31.
Choice D is correct. To balance the reaction, first, you should write out the unbalanced equation:
Fe2+ + Na2Cr207 -* Fe3+ + Cr203

From here, the first step is to balance the electrons in the two half-reactions. The ferrous (+2) cation loses one
electron, while the dichromate gains three electrons per chromium (and thus six electrons per compound). To
balance the electrons, the ferrous and ferric (+3) cations must both be multiplied by a factor of six.
6 Fe2+ + 1 Na2Cr207 -> 6 Fe3+ + 1Cr203

Thissolves the question and allows you to choose answer choice D.
On the MCAT, you should stop at this point and not waste time going further. Because this is a learning
environment, however, we will continue to balance the reaction completely. From here, the next step is to
balance the charges on each side of the reaction. The reactant side has a +12 net charge, while the product side
has a +20 net charge. To balance the charges requires that an additional +8 be added to the reactant side of the
equation. This is done by adding 8 H+ to the left side of the reaction.
8 H+ + 6 Fe2+ + 1 Na2Cr207
-+
6 Fe3+ + 1 Cr203 + 2 Na+
overall charge = +20
The final step is to balance the atoms in the equation. There are seven oxygen atoms on the reactant side and
only three on the product side. The product side requires four more oxygen atoms, so to balance the atoms, 4 H20
must be added to the product side:
8 H++ 6 Fe2++ 1 Na2Cr207
6 Fe3++ 1C17O3 + 2 Na++ 4 H20
The ratio of Na2Cr207Cn^ to Fe3+(aq) is confirmed to be 1 : 6. This correlates to answer choice D. The ratio can
be found quickly by comparing the oxidation and reduction counts. Fe is oxidized by one electron, while the
chromium compound is reduced by three electrons per chromium (from +6 to +3). Because there are two
chromium atoms in Na2Cr?07, the total amount of electrons necessary to reduce the compound is six (2x3
electrons). This makes the ratio 1 : 6.
32.
Choice C is correct. The oxidation half-reaction of Flask 1 is Fe2+ -> Fe3+ + le"
Component reactions:
Fe2+ +2e' -> Fe
-0.44 V
Fe - Fe3+ + 3e"
0.04 V
When the two reactions are added together, the overall oxidation half-reaction in the titration is found. This
means that the E for the half-reaction can be found by summing the two voltages. E = -0.44 + 0.04 = -0.40 V.
Choice C is the best answer.
33.
Choice Bis correct. The best container is made ofan inert material, which means that we are looking for least
reactive material material. Glass (Si02) has silicon already in its fully oxidized form, so glass is unreactive
with respect to oxidation-reduction chemistry. Glass is thus the best material in which to carry out the
titration. Aluminum readily oxidizes, copper slowly oxidizes, and polyethylene (a hydrocarbon) oxidizes over
time in air. The best answer is choice B.
Purification of Metals
34.
Choice C is correct. Gold trication (Au3+) has a reduction potential of 1.50 V, so almost any compound that can
be oxidized can reduce gold trication. The C\2(g) molecule has chlorine atoms with oxidation states of 0, so they
won't be oxidized (lose electrons to become cations). This eliminates choice A. Ag+ is oxidized in its cation
307
form, so Ag+ cannot be oxidized any further. This eliminates choice B. Pt2+ is already oxidized as it is, so it too
cannot be oxidized any further. This eliminates choice D. The best choice is zinc metal (Zn(sj) which readily
loses two electrons. The best answer is choice C.
35.
Choice D is correct. According to Table 1, the reduction potential for silver cation is 0.80 volts. This means that
because chloride anion is not oxidized to Cbf^'j by silver cation, the oxidation potential of CI" to C\2(g) must less
than (more negative than) -0.80 volts. Reversing this reaction means that the reduction potential of C\2(g) to
CI" must be greater than +0.80 volts. This makes choice D the best answer. You should have been instinctively
inclined to zero in on either choice A or choice D without knowing anything about the numerical values, because
they are the extreme answers that exclude the other choices.
36.
Choice D is correct The chlorine atoms in the compound each have an oxidation state of -1. This means that
for the overall charge of the compound to be -1, the oxidation state of the gold must be +3, because 4 (-1) + (+3) =
-1). The best answer is choice D.
37.
Choice D is correct. Silver metal (Ag) has an electronic configuration of [Kr^s^d10 when neutral (rather than
[Kr]5s24d9), because of the filled d-shell stability associated with the d^ electronic configuration. When
silver metal becomes a cation, it loses the electron from the outermost shell. This would be the 5s1 electron that
38.
silver loses, which leaves an electronic configuration for Ag+ of: [Kr]4d10. The best answer is choice D.
Choice B is correct. A sequestering agent is employed to bind a metal cation, so it must be capable of donating a
lone pair of electrons to a metal cation in a chelating fashion. Sequestering agents donate electron pairs, so they
are Lewis bases. This eliminates choice A and makes choice B the best answer. Atoms with incomplete
valences (unfilled valence shells that lack an octet) can accept electrons, which makes them good Lewis acids.
This eliminates both choice C and choice D. Choice B is the best answer.
39.
Choice C is correct. The mass percent of Au in AuCLj" requires comparing the mass of gold to the mass of the
entire anion, although the mass of the additional electron is negligible. The mass percent of Au in A11O4" can
be solved as follows:
Mass Au
MassAuCLf
197
197 + 4(35.5)
12Z
197 + 4(35.5)
197
197 + 142
> i, eliminating choices Aand B.

2
= 197 < 270 _ 3 eliminating choice D.

339
360
This leaves only choice C, which you should pick for best results. The actual value can be approximated rather
closely as follows: 1^_Z = 197 . a ]ittie = 591. a ]itt]e =59o/o . a HttIe Math trjcks ljke thjs on] wQrk f
339
333
999
about five percent of test takers, so if it seems obscure, then don't consider it.
However, if the math seems
intuitive, then you may wish to employ such techniques to approximate answers quite closely.
40.
Choice A is correct. Since the metal cations are reduced by chlorine gas in each case, we can simplify this
question. Because chlorine is oxidized in each answer choice, the question of which reaction generates the
lowest voltage is really a question of which cation has the lowest reduction potential. The lowest reduction
potential, according to the data in Table 1, is found with Ag+. This makes choice A the best answer.
41.
Galvanic Cell
Choice A is correct. This is a question of whether you know your electrochemical cell rules.
In all
electrochemical cells, oxidation occurs at the anode, so electrons are lost from the anode and hence flow from
the anode to the cathode. The best answer is choice A.
42.
Choice D is correct The mnemonics "oxan" and "red cat" tell us that oxidation occurs at the anode and reduction
occurs at the cathode. Because oxidation occurs at the anode, and the loss of electrons occurs with oxidation, the
electrons must be found on the product side of the reaction. That's only true in choice D, so choice D must be the
best answer.
43.
Choice C is correct In a galvanic ceil, the ErecjUction + Eoxidation must be a positive value (greater than 0 volts).
If Eoxidation is greater than 0 volts, the overall voltage is positive, so choices B and D are galvanic cells,
meaning they are eliminated. The only way that Ecen can be less than zero when Ereciuction is positive, is when
Eoxidation is a negative value with a magnitude greater than EredUction- Tne best answer is choice C.
308
44.
Choice D is correct. In all electrochemical cells, electron flow is from the anode to the cathode, and reduction
occurs at the cathode. This makes both choices A and B true in a galvanic cell, so they can be eliminated.
Choice C is true according to the Nernst equation, because the cell eventually dies out once the voltage has
dropped. The voltage never drops below zero, however, so choice D is not true. The best answer is choice D,
because the cell stops when the voltage equals zero (not when it is less than zero).
45.
Choice A is correct. The reduction of the cation in the cathode is most favorable when it starts with a high
oxidation state. This eliminates choices C and D. If the cell is to be favorable (galvanic) , then the anode
should contain a metal that is easily (favorably) oxidized. This describes a metal that has a low ionization
energy. The best answer is thus choice A.
46.
Choice B is correct. To answer this question, the reaction must first be balanced. The oxidation and reduction
ha If-reactions are shown below.
Oxidation: AKs) - A102 (aq) + 3 e"
Reduction: MnC>4'(aq) + 5 e* -> MnOfeJ
To balance the reaction from an electronic standpoint (at fifteen total electrons transferred in each halfreaction), 5 AKs) are needed to react with 3 Mr\04'(aq). Because AKs) is oxidized, it is the reducing agent,
making Mn04'(aq) the oxidizing agent. The ratioof reducing agent (Al) to oxidizing agent (Mn04") is therefore 5
: 3. The best answer is choice B.
47.
Choice D is correct. Reduction occurs at the cathode, so copper cations in solution plate out onto the surface of
the electrode. This makes Statement I a valid statement. This eliminates choice C. A galvanic cell by
definition involves a favorable reaction that produces power (releases energy as it runs). The voltage of a
favorable reaction is greater than 0.00 volts, so Statement II is a valid statement This eliminates choice A. To
balance the flow of electron charge from anode to cathode, anions flow from cathode (where the positive
charge diminishes due to reduction) to the anode (where the positive charge increases due to oxidation)
through the salt bridge. This makes Statement III a valid statement. Because all three statements are valid,
the best answer is choice D.

48.
Photochemical Cell
Choice D is correct. By definition, and as stated in the passage, the oxidation-reduction reaction in an
electrolytic cell is unfavorable thermodynamically. This eliminates choices A and C. Energy must be supplied
by an external source for an electrolytic cell to run. The electrolytic cell can build up potential energy that can
be released later (the energy can be discharged in the form of a galvanic cell). Because they store energy,
choice B is eliminated. The best answer is therefore choice D.
49.
Choice B is correct The first sentence of the second paragraph states that the energy of the photon must be
high enough to overcome the electrical potential for the cell. This makes choice B the best answer. Choices A
and C are thesame answer juststated differently, so they cannot both be correct on a multiple-choice exam. The
electron affinity for the cathode is usually favorable, sono energy should be required for the gain of an electron
by the cathode. This eliminates choice C. The energy to move the electron comes from the incident energy of
the photon and the electron affinity of the cathode (attraction to the storage plate).
50.
Choice A is correct. Photons of high enough energy strike the ionizing plate and emit an electron. This is in
essence the photoelectric effect. The ionizing plate loses an electron, so it has been oxidized. Choices Band D
are eliminated. By definition, the anode loses electrons (gets oxidized), which makes choice A the best answer.
51.
Choice A is correct. The best material is one that can be oxidized very easily. A nonmetal and nonmetal oxide
do not readily lose electrons, because of the high electron affinity (and electronegativity) of nonmetals. A
metal oxide is in a higher oxidation state than the neutral metal, so metal oxides are less able to share their
electrons than metals. Metal oxides have already been oxidized. The best answer for this question is a metal,
choice A.
52.
Choice D is correct. As is stated in the first paragraph of the passage, a photoelectric cell absorbs a photon,
which then emits an electron that flows through a wire in the circuit, ultimately to be stored in a capacitor or
battery. The overall process involves converting a photon into potential energy. A photon is electromagnetic
radiation, so the best answer is choice D, the conversion of radiation into potential energy. Pick choice D if you
want to be outstanding in electrochemistry.
309
53.
Choice A is correct. If you believe the Nernst equation, then the voltage is constantly dissipating as a cell runs.
The greatest amount of energy is released initially, because that is when the voltage (joules per coulomb) are
the greatest. This is best described by answer choice A. If you have any doubt about this, think about how a
flashlight slowly becomes dimmer rather than brighter over time or how your computer and cell phone run out
of stored energy and need to be recharged. The change in voltage is minimal for most of the rundown period, but
nonetheless evident.
54.
Choice C is correct. In this atypical depiction of a circuit, the zinc electrode and copper electrode represent the
poles of a battery. For this question it doesn't matter which is the anode or cathode, as long as you know it is a
DC circuit. According to Kirkhoff's junction rule (7C= fa + lb), the current at point c (/c) should be the greatest,
because it has not been split into parallel pathways (a and b). This eliminates choices A and D. The resistors
are in parallel, so the current is split between the two resistors. The greatest current flows through the
pathway of least resistance. You may recall that current and resistance are inversely proportional to one
another. The best answer is choice C, because the resistance is less through the resistor through which current a
flows.
55.
Batteries
Choice B is correct. The two half reactions for the nickel-cadmium battery are given in the passage as:
Anode:
Cd + 2 OH" -4 Cd(OH)2 + 2 e"
Cathode: NiOOH + H20 + 1 e" -^ Ni(OH)2 + 1 OH"
To find the overall balanced equation, the number of electrons in each half-cell must be the same. In the
oxidation half-cell, two electrons are produced, while in the reduction half-cell, only one electron is consumed.
This means that the reduction half-cell must be multiplied by two. This yields the following two half-cells
that upon addition yield the overall reaction:
Anode:
Cd + 2-OH-- -* Cd(OH)2 + 2-e"
Cathode: 2 NiOOH + 2 H2Q + 2-e" -> 2 Ni(OH)2 + 2-044'

Overall:
Cd + 2 NiOOH + 2 H20 -> Cd(OH)2 + 2 Ni(OH)2
The best answer is choice B.
56.
Choice B is correct. In the reduction half-cell, Mn02 is converted to Mn203. In Mn02, the oxidation state of Mn
is +4. In Mn203, the oxidation state of Mn is +3. These can be determined by assuming that the oxidation state
ofoxygen is -2 in all of the compounds. The oxidation state of Mn goes from +4 to +3. Because zinc is oxidized,
manganese must be reduced, making choices A, C, and Dincorrect. The best answer is choice B. Only one electron
is absorbed, so it should be reduced by one electron.
57.
Choice D is correct Reduction takes place at the cathode, so choices A and B are immediately eliminated.
Because at a pH equal to 10 the solution is basic, the best answer must be choice D. Ammonium cation (NH44")
cannot exist at a pH of 10, because it has a pKa value less than 10. It would exist predominantly as ammonia
(NH3) in a pH = 10 solution. The cell is basic, so choice D is the best answer.
58.
Choice B is correct. Oxidation takes place at the anode, meaning that the reaction that cannot occur at the
anode is reduction. In choice B, the reactant side of the equation shows electrons, meaning that electrons are
gained in that reaction. A gain of electrons is the definition of reduction, so choice B cannot occur at the anode.
59.
Choice A is correct. The flow of electrons in any electrochemical cell is defined as being from the anode to the
cathode (from the oxidation half-cell to the reduction half-cell). The trick to this question is therefore
deciding where the anode and cathode actually are. The core of the dry cell battery carries out the oxidation
half-reaction, while the stainless steel cap is the electrode on which manganese is reduced. In the battery
drawing in Figure 1, the stainless steel cap is defined as the cathode. This means that the correct answer must
have the electron flow going towards the stainless steel cap. This eliminates choices B and D. The insulator
does not get involved in the reaction or the flow of electrons (hence the term "insulator"). This means that
choice C is eliminated and makes the best answer (and only choice remaining) choice A. The electrons flow
from the metal being reduced, which is found in the outer casing (as stated in the passage).
310
60.
Choice D is correct. Electrons do not build up in an electrochemical cell (a battery); potential difference builds
up. The electrons flow, but they do not exactly collect (like they do in a capacitor). On top of that, electrons are
lost from the anode, so even if they could build up, it would not occur at the anode. Choice A is therefore
eliminated. Cadmium is oxidized in the reaction, meaning that cadmium metal disappears and does not build
up, whether it's at the anode or the cathode. Choice B is therefore eliminated. Nickel hydroxide is a product
of the reaction, so nickel hydroxide builds up somewhere. Nickel hydroxide does not build up at the anode,
however, because nickel hydroxide is formed from the reduction half-reaction, so it builds up at the cathode,
according to the two half-cell equations. Choice C is therefore eliminated. Cadmium hydroxide is formed from
the oxidation half-reaction, so it builds up at the anode. The best answer is choice D.
Electrolysis
61.
Choice B is correct. It is easier to form hydrogen gas than sodium gas (consider that hydrogen reduces more
readily than sodium, and that sodium does not readily vaporize), so choices A and C are eliminated. The
reduction potential of sodium is negative, while the reduction potential of protons from water is zero. It is
easier to oxidize chlorine than oxygen gas (chlorine is less electronegative), so chlorine gas will form rather
than oxygen gas. This results in the formation of H2() and C\2(g), so the best answer is choice B.
62.
Choice D is correct. The electrode must remain solid to allow for a reaction to take place on its surface. The
electrode cannot melt into the molten salt or there would be no plate on which the reduction half-reaction could
take place. If it melted, then the electrolysis cell would not work. This means that the melting point of the
salt must be lower than the melting point of the electrode. The possible materials for an electrode is therefore
limited. The best answer is choice D.
63.
Choice D is correct A molten salt is used rather than an aqueous solution when the salt is less reactive than
water. This is to prevent water from reacting rather than the salt. When dealing with water, the reduction
half-reaction H20 + 2e"^ H2(^) + O2"^) and the oxidation half-reaction H20 -> 2 H+iaq) + _ 02(g) + 2 e" must
always be considered. When the reduction potential of the cation is negative, then it is more favorable to
reduce the protons of water. Thus, the reaction must becarried out on the molten salt. This means that a molten
salt should be used when the reduction potential of the cation is less than the reduction potential of hydrogen
in water. Choice D is the best answer.
64.
Choice C is correct The left electrode, according to the diagram in Figure 1, is the cathode. Reduction occurs a t
thecathode, so the product from reduction forms at the cathode. Hydrogen gas is formed when protic hydrogen
is reduced, sohydrogen gas is the correct choice. The best answer is choice C. Chlorine gas is formed upon the
oxidation of chloride anions.
65.
Choice D is correct. For an electrolysis reaction to take place, the applied voltage must be greater than the
voltage released when the cell runs in the favorable direction (the standard potential). The standard cell
potential can be found from the values in Table 1. The total voltage generated when chlorine gas oxidizes
nickel metal is 1.36 volts plus 0.23 volts (negative -0.23 volts for nickel). The result is a value of 1.59 volts.
Upon adding 1.75 volts in the reverse reaction (in series but aligned in an opposing direction), the unfavorable
reverse reaction transpires. This makes choice A valid. The voltage released when chlorine gas oxidizes zinc
metal is 1.36 volts plus 0.76 volts. The result is a value of 2.12 volts. Upon adding 2.25 volts, the reverse
reaction (unfavorable reaction) transpires. This makes choice B valid. The voltage released when bromine
liquid oxidizes nickel metal is 1.09 volts plus 0.23 volts. The result is a value of 1.32 volts. Upon adding 1.60
volts, the reverse reaction (unfavorable reaction) transpires. This makes choice C valid. The voltage released
when bromine liquid oxidizes zinc metal is 1.09 volts plus 0.76 volts. The result is a value of 1.85 volts. Upon
adding only 1.50 volts, the reverse reaction (unfavorable reaction) cannot transpire. This makes choice D
invalid and thus the not true choice. Choice D is the best answer.
66.
Choice A is correct. Nickel cannot plate from an aqueous solution when a voltage is applied, because a proton
has a higher reduction potential than nickel dication. The applied voltage causes the protons of water, rather
than nickel dication, to be reduced. The higher the reduction potential, the more likely a that species will be
reduced, implying that the reduction potential of copper must be greater than the reduction potential of
protons. This is best shown in answer choice A. The answer could also have been found by reading Table 1.
67.
Choice A is correct The reaction that can be carried out in an aqueous solution is the reaction where the cation
of the salt is more easily reduced than the proton of water. (Does this question sound familiar?) Because the
3 11
reduction potential of a protic hydrogen is defined as being 0 V, this question is reduced to asking :"Which of
the following metals has the most positive reduction potential?" According to the numbers in Table 1, only
copper cation has a positive reduction potential (out of copper, manganese, zinc, and nickel). The best answer
(and only positive answer) is choice A.
68.
Electrolysis of HCl
Choice D is correct In the electrolytic portion (lower half) of the overall cell, chlorine gas is released. This
means that chloride anion loses an electron to form chlorine gas. Because CI" (chloride) is oxidized, choices A
and C are eliminated. The sodium metal produced in the lower cell ultimately serves to reduce hydronium ion
in water to hydrogen gas in the upper portion (galvanic section). Choice D is the best, because H+ is reduced to
H2(g) in the overall cell reaction. This question could be a bit tricky if you didn't focus on the fact they were
asking for the overall process.
69.
Choice D is correct The applied voltage causes the unfavorable reaction in the lower electrolytic portion of
the electrolysis cell. The lower reduction and oxidation half-reactions are:
Na+(aq) +1e" -> Nad) with Ece|| (reduction) ="2.71 V
CV(aq) -> _ Cl2(g) +1e" with Ece|i (oxidation) =-1-36 V.
The overall voltage is -4.07 V, so a voltage greater than 4.07 V must be applied to force the unfavorable
reaction. The best answer is choice D.
70.
Choice C is correct. Both hydrogen gas (H2(g)) and chlorine gas (C\2(g)) are released from the cell, so they must
both be products, which eliminates choices Band D. In the upper portion of the cell, NaOHfa^ is produced,
which makes choice C the best answer.
71.
Choice Ciscorrect Because the reduction potential of sodium cation is negative and the reduction potential of
hydronium ion is zero (see the reactions), Statement I is a false statement. This eliminates choices A, B, and D
and in doing so leaves only choice C as a possible answer choice. Rarely does this occur on theMCAT, where one
statement can determine the best answer by itself, but on those rare occasions, be grateful. Still, in the interest
of writing a complete explanation, let us consider the other statements. In the electrolytic portion of the cell,
sodium metal is formed, because the electrons are delivered from the cathode into the mercury liquid, and
sodium metal flows through mercury, whilehydrogen gas does not. This makes Statement II a true statement.
Because there are some sodium cations that are transferred to the upper cell to form NaOH, the [NaCl] entering
the cell must be greater than the [NaCl] leaving the cell. This makes Statement HI a true statement, and thus
confirms that choice C is the best answer.
72.
Choice A is correct By definition, reduction occurs at the cathode and oxidation occurs at the anode, in a
battery, a galvanic cell, and an electrolytic cell. Oxidation involves loss of electrons, so electrons must' flow
from the anode. Reduction involves gain ofelectrons, so electrons must flow to the cathode. Overall, the flow
of electrons is always from anode to cathode, so choice A is the best answer.
73.
Choice Cis correct An electrolytic cell is defined as acell that carries out an unfavorable reaction by applying
an external voltage ofadequate magnitude. This means that the reaction voltage is negative, so to have the
reaction occur, the applied voltage must be positive, with the absolute value of the applied voltage greater
than the absolute value of the voltage of the reaction. When the two values are summed, the overall cell
voltage must be positive. The best answer is choice C.
74.
Choice Bis correct The strongest reducing agent is the compound (or element) that is most easily oxidized.
Sodium cation cannot give up an electron (because it would lose its noble gas electronic configuration), so choice
A can be eliminated. The reactions in the passage are reductions, so the product formed from the least
favorable reduction is the most favorably oxidized, and thus the strongest reducing agent. This makes choice B
the best answer. You might also note that an alkali metal would give up electrons more readily than hydrogen
or a halogen. This means that you could have solved this question by either using the values in the passage or
using periodic trends.

75.
Standard Cells
Choice Bis correct. The net reaction for Cell 1 is favorable, if the zinc electrode is oxidized and the copper
electrode is reduced (an electrochemical cell is favorable when Ecell is positive). Thus, the electron flow must
312
be from the Zn electrode (anode) to the Cu electrode (cathode). Because the copper electrode is not the anode,
choice C and choice Dare both eliminated. Since, by definition, electron flow is always from the anode to the
cathode, and the Zn electrode (anode) is on the left, the electron flow must be from the left. Referring to the
illustration of Cell 1 in the passage, the electron flow is from left to right, so, choice B is the best answer.
76.
Choice D is correct. Cell 2 is a concentration cell, given the different concentrations in each half-cell.
The
electrons flow in such a way that the concentration ofCu2+ in each half-cell becomes equal over time. When
electrons flow from the anode, the copper electrode dissolves into solution, resulting in an increased Cu2+
concentration in solution and a reduced mass of the electrode. This means that the half-cell with the lower
concentration of Cu2+ is the anode, and the half-cell with the greater concentration ofCu2+ is the cathode. The
half-cell on the left is less concentrated (making it the anode), so electrons flow from the left to the right as
drawn. This makes choice A a valid statement, so it is eliminated. The left copper electrode dissolves away
and thus decreases in mass, while the right copper electrode plates out and thus increases in mass. This makes
choice B a valid statement, so it is eliminated.
In a concentration cell, the electrons flow from the less
concentrated half-cell to the more concentrated half-cell, until the two cells have equal Cu2+ concentration.
The electrons flow from the half-cell with 0.001 M Cu2+ to the half-cell with 1.00 M Cu2+. The Cu2+ ions in the
1.00 Msolution get reduced. The Cu2+ concentration decreases from 1.00 M until both cells are equally
concentrated. The final concentration is the average of the two initial concentrations, which is 0.5005 MCu2+.
This makes choice C a valid statement and choice D an incorrect statement, so choice D is the best answer.
77.
Choice D is correct. The cell would no longer be complete without the saturated aqueous salt string, which
serves as a salt bridge to complete the circuit Copper wire does not allow for the flow of sulfate anions from one
half-cell to the other half-cell, so the cell potential is 0 volts. Choice D is the best answer.
78.
Choice C is correct. Cell 1 does not use external power to produce chemical change, so it is not an electrolytic
cell. The two half-cells do not differ in cation concentration, so it is not a concentration cell. The cell is set up so
that energy from a spontaneous redox reaction is converted into electrical energy (electrical energy is
discharged), which describes a galvanic cell. Choice C is the best answer. "Nernst cell" is a fictitious term,
albeit a convincingly misleading answer choice.
79.
Choice Bis correct. You are given the Nernst equation = - ^9 log Q, where Q =
.
6
H
n
[Cathode]
q = 0-001 M = 0001/ n = 2 moles ofelectrons, and e = 0
1.000 M
Plugging the values into the equation yields:
e = e - 0,059 iogQ = 0 -0.Q59 log (.001) = (-0.0295)(-3) = 0.0885 V

n
The cell potential in Cell 2 (the concentration cell) is calculated to be 0.089 V, so choice B is the best answer.
80.
Choice A is correct. The half-reactions are listed as reduction reactions in Table 1, so be sure to change the sign
for zinc oxidation from negative to positive. The largest positive cell potential for Cell 1 is obtained when zinc
metal is oxidized and copper cation is reduced. In an electrochemical cell, there must always be both a
reduction half-reaction and an oxidation half-reaction. The numerical value for Ecc|| is calculated from the
following equations and half-cell potentials:
Cu2+ + 2e"->Cu
Zn ->Zn2+ + 2e"
+0.34 V
+0.76 V
+1.10 V
The cell potential of Cell 1 is therefore 1.10 V, answer choice A.
81.
Choice D is correct. Starting with H20 + CIO3" + Mg -> CI" + Mg2+ + OH", first balance the electrons either
through the bridge method or the half-cell method. Magnesium goes from an oxidation state of 0 to +2, so 2
electrons are lost. Chlorine goes from an oxidation state of +5 to -1, so 6 electrons are gained. This needs to be
balanced so that there are 3 magnesiums for every 1 chlorine.
? H20 + 1CIO3- +3 Mg ->1CI" +3 Mg2+ + ?OH"

3 13
Choices A and C are eliminated, because they do not have the correct ratio of magnesiums to chlorines. After
the electrons, the charges must be balanced. The overall charge on the left side is -1 due to the chlorate anion,
and the overall charge on the right side is +5 due to the three magnesium cations and one chloride anion.
?I-bO + 1CIO3- +3Mg
->
overall charge = -1
1CI" +3 Mg2+ +?OH"

overall charge = +5
To balance charge, six hydroxide anions are added to the right side of the equation. This eliminates answer
choice B, narrowing the answer down to choice D. The last step of the balancing, if you wish to go on (although
you could stop here), is to balance the atoms. To balance atoms, water is added to the left side of the reaction.
?H20 +1CIO3- +3 Mg
->
overall charge = -1
1CI" +3 Mg2+ +6OH"

overall charge = -1
There are six oxygen atoms on the right, and only three on the left, so three waters must be added to the left
side of the equation. Adding three waters results in the following balanced equation:
3 H20+ 1CIO3- +3Mg - 1CI" + 3 Mg2+ +6OH"

The coefficients of the balanced equation are 3:1 : 3 -> 1 : 3 : 6, so choice D is the correct answer.
You could have also gotten the best answer by process of elimination, where three wrongs make a right. Choice
B can be eliminated immediately, because the charges don't balance out (-1 on the left side and +2 on the right)
and the hydrogen atoms don't balance. Choice A is eliminated, because the reactant side would have five
oxygen atoms total while the product side would only have four oxygen atoms. Lastly, choice C is eliminated,
because the reactant side would have nine oxygen atoms total while the product side would only have six
oxygen atoms. A quick inspection of choice D shows that each side has a net charge of -1 and that each side has
six oxygen atoms and six hydrogen atoms. Often times on multiple choice questions involving full balancing of
oxidation-reduction reactions it is easier to find the best answer by a process of elimination. Such an approach
will save you time in the long run.
82.
Corrosion Prevention
Choice A is correct. By using the chromium sample as a reference, the following mathematical process can be
employed to determine the electromotive force (emf) for the iron system (given that AG" = -n !fz):
Fe(s)
->
Fe2+(aq) + 2e'
=+0.44V
AG = -2#0.44)
Fe2+(ag)
->
Fc3+Unp +le" c =-0.77 V
AG =-l#-0.77)
Fe(s)
Fe3+fflqJ +3e'
AG = -2^0.44) + [-1 #-0.77)]
E. =-AC/n if =-[-2*044) +(-1 y(-0.77))]/3i/. =-|-2(+0.44) +(0.77)]/3 =|2(+0.44) -(0.77]/3

83.
Choice D is correct By using the chromium sample as a reference, the following mathematical process can be
employed to determine the free energy change (AC) for the copper system:
Cu(s)
->
Cu2+(aq) + 2e"
= -0.34 V
AG* = -2 #-0.34) = +2/(0.34)
Cu2+(aq)+lc- ->
Cu+(aq)
=+0.15 V
AG =-l;/iP.15)
CufsJ
Cu+(aq) + le"
->
AG: = +2/(0.34) - 1#+0.15)
AG(Cu(s) -* Cu+(aq)) = +[2#0.34) - 1#+0.15)] = [2(0.34) - (0.15)]/

The best answer is choice D.
84.
Choice D is correct. To be a sacrificial metal, the metal must have a higher oxidation potential than the metal
being protected (salvaged). Aluminum oxidizes more favorably than iron, zinc oxidizes more favorably than
copper, and zinc oxidizes more favorably than iron. This eliminates choices A, B, and C. Because zinc oxidizes
more favorably than nickel, protecting zinc with nickel would not be effective. The best answer is choice D.
85.
Choice D is correct. The reaction that is not favorable is the one with a negative reduction potential ( < 0). In
choice D, the standard cell voltage is 0.34 - 0.99 = -0.65, which is an unfavorable reaction (because of the
negative voltage). The reaction is drawn below:
,K,
314
Oxidation: ' = -0.99 V
Pd(s) +Cu -+(aq)
Cu(s)
Reduction:
+ Pd" (aq)
' = +0.34 V
The cell potential for the aluminum-chromium (III) cell is 1.66 - 0.73 = 0.93 V. The cell potential for the
manganese-palladium (II) cell is 1.18 - 0.99 = 0.19 V. The cell potential for the zinc-nickel (II) cell is 0.76 - 0.23
= 0.53 V. The cell potential for the chromium half-reaction is taken from the passage, while the cell
potentials for the other half reactions (aluminum, manganese, palladium, zinc, and nickel) are all from Table
1. The only unfavorable reaction is choice D.
86.
Choice A is correct. Because zinc is the sacrificial metal in galvanized steel, it will decay (oxidize) away first
before any of the iron will decay. The mass of the zinc will steadily decrease to zero before any iron begins to
oxidize away. This means that the dashed line should decrease until reaching zero while the solid line should
remain flat until the dashed line reaches zero, at which time the solid line will begin to drop. Choice A is the
best answer.
87.
Choice D is correct. The passage states that aluminum, tin, and chromium can be used to form protective oxide
coatings. If you did not read the passage, then the answer can be found by looking at the reaction between
palladium oxide and copper. From the data in Table 1, the reduction potential for palladium dication (present
in PdO) is e = 0.99 V. The oxidation potential for copper metal is e = -0.34 V. The standard cell potential (e)
for the following reaction is thus 0.65 V:
PdO(s; + Cu(sJ -^ Pd(s) + CuO(s)
A palladium oxide coating on copper would actually oxidize the copper metal into copper cation rather than
protect the copper from oxidation. An oxide coating of palladium would be effective, so choice D is the best
answer.
Electroplating Experiment
Passage XIV (Questions 88 - 93)
88.
Choice C is correct In the experiment, the cation solutions are exposed to the current for one minute. Like zinc
and copper, cadmium cation (Cd2+) takes two electrons to be reduced. Because cadmium has an atomic mass
greater than that of both copper and zinc, the mass of the electrode is greater than the electrodes for Solutions
III, IV, V, and VI. The mass of the Cd-plated electrode must be greater than 5.360 grams (the mass of the
heaviest zinc plated electrode), which eliminates choices A and B. To form the same mass as the silver cation,
cadmium would have to have twice the atomic mass of silver. The atomic mass of cadmium (112 g/mole) is less
than twice the atomic mass of silver (2 x 107 g/mol), so the mass of the Cd-plated electrode must be less than
6.182 grams (the mass of the lightest silver plated electrode). This eliminates choice D. The best answer is
choice C.
89.
Choice C is correct. To carry out electroplating, a current must mn through some conducting material suspended
in a solution of ions. The negative charge builds up on the surface of the material where cations in the solution
migrate to get reduced and thus can plate out (onto the surface of the metal). If the material does not conduct
electricity, negative charge cannot build up on its surface. Plastic is an insulator, not an electrical conductor,
making choice C the best answer. Choice A should have been eliminated, because high temperatures are not
required for electroplating. Choice B should be eliminated, because a current of electrons causes reduction, not
oxidation. Choice D should have been eliminated, because malleability does not affect electroplating.
90.
Choice A is correct Because Solution I has a lower concentration of metal cations than Solution IV, Solution I
finishes plating out before Solution IV. As such, the line for Solution I should go flat before the line for Solution
IV. This means that either choice A or choice D is the best answer. Silver has a greater mass than zinc, and it
requires only one electron for complete reduction, so the electrode of Solution I has a greater initial increase in
mass per unit time than solution IV. This can be seen in choice A where Solution I shows a steeper slope than
Solution IV. You could have also noted that because Solution IV has tens times the molarity of metal, that
Solution IV should have a higher mass than Solution I once both lines have flattened.
315
91.
Choice D is correct. Electroplating results from theconversion ofcations in solution into plated out metal atoms
on the surface of the cathode. To convert a cation to a neutral element, electrons must be added. The gain of
electrons is defined as reduction, so choice D best describes the process.
92.
Choice A is correct. A good protective metal coating is one that does not oxidize away. This means that it must
be unfavorable for the metal to oxidize away, which would imply that the metal has negative oxidation
potential. A negative oxidation potential for the metal would result in a positive reduction potential for its
corresponding cation (the reverse reaction). This makes choice A the best answer. This also explains why
choice D can be eliminated. Choice B is incorrect, because the reduction of a metal to an anion is not known to
occur. This not only would not be a desirable property, but it would be impractical. A large positive oxidation
potential for its cation just means that the cation can further be oxidized to a larger positive charge, making
choice C a bad choice.
93.
Choice C is correct. Because the charge on the silvercation is +1, twiceas many moles of silver metal (Ag) form
as both copper metal (Cu) and zinc metal (Zn) for a given amount of electrons. Three times as many moles of
silvermetal (Ag) would form as gold metal(Au) fora given amount of electrons. To find the masses formed, the
moles formed must be multiplied by the atomic mass of the element. The answer choice with the greatest value
from moles times molecular mass is the best answer choice. Silver has an atomic mass of 107.9, and it requires
oneelectron per ion,so one moleofelectrons produces 107.9 grams of silver. Copper has an atomic mass of 63.5,
but it requires two electrons per ion, so only 31.75 grams form from one mole of electrons. Zinc has an atomic mass
of 65.4, but it requires two electrons per ion, so only 32.7 grams form from one mole of electrons. Gold has an
atomic mass of 197.0, but it requires three electrons per ion, so only 65.67 grams form from one mole of electrons.
The greatest mass of metal following the addition of one mole of electrons results from the silver cation, so
choice C is the best answer. You should note that by adding equal current for an equal amount of time, the
question has told you that an equal number of electrons have been added.
Questions 94 -100
94.
Choice D is correct. Choice A can be eliminated, because both the H+ and the Ag+ are reduced in the reaction as
given, and nothing is oxidized. An oxidation-reduction reaction must have both an oxidation half-reaction and
a reduction half-reaction. If choice B were true, then tarnish could never occur, because the reduction of silver
would be carried out by the sulfide anion it binds. Choice C is eliminated, because Al cannot exist in a +1
oxidation state. The best answer is choice D, because the oxidation state of aluminum (which was oxidized) is
+3. Pick choice D and feel happy.

95.
Choice B is correct. Setting the two equations equal to each other yields: -RT In K = - nF\ Upon canceling out
the negative sign, this becomes RT In K = nF. Choices A and C are therefore wrong and eliminated. Dividing
both sides by RT yields choice B: In K =
nF
RT
96.
Choice A is correct By simply balancing the atoms in the equation (and not worrying about electrons), we find
that the coefficients should be 2 : 6 : 3 : 2, so choice A is the best answer. Sometimes it is easier to balance by
inspection than to balance by the redox method. A simple guideline to follow is: "If the molecules are a 11
uncharged, then balance by inspection."
97.
Choice A is correct. First, convert the current units into coulombs: C = amps x sec. = (9.65 amps)(1000 sec) = 9650
C. One mole of electrons carries a charge of 96,500 coulombs (C), and each mole of Zn dication requires two moles
of electrons to be reduced to zinc metal. The molecular weight of Zn is 65.38 g. By substitution:
9650 C
lmolee\flmoleZn\ /65.38 grams Zn

96,500 C)' 2mole e" '\ 1mole Zn
= 3.269gZn
Choice A is the best answer.
316
98.
Choice Dis correct Magnesium is oxidized, and nickel dication is reduced. The half-reactions for the given
cell are as follows:
Mg -> Mg2+ + 2e"
2.37 V
Ni2+ + 2e" - Ni
-0.23 V
Because Mg is oxidized, not reduced, the value for the reduction potential must be reversed to +2.37 V. The cell
potential is 2.37 + (-0.23) = 2.14 V. Choice D is the best answer.
99.
Choice D is correct. The Nernst equation predicts logarithmic decay of the voltage. The log value is
multiplied by a small term, making the decay insignificant until the last few moments of the decay. This is
best shown in choice D. Choice A is close, but the linear decay at the end is inaccurate.
100.
Choice A is correct. Because aluminum and carbon dioxide are products in the reaction, choices C and D are
eliminated. Carbon is oxidized to carbon dioxide, and aluminum oxide (AI2O3) is reduced to aluminum metal.
"Chem is part of a nutritious breakfast!"
317
Notes
318
The Berkeley Review
Notes
319
General Chemistry
sections vi - x
Section Answers
General Chemistry Bubble Sheet

(Make five copies, one for each section of the book.)
CD CD CD CD
37. CD CD CD CD
73. CD CD
2. CD
CD CD CD
38. CD CD CD CD
74. CD
3. CD
CD CD CD
39. CD CD CD CD
75.
4.
CD CD CD CD
40. CD CD CD CD
76. CD CD CD CD
5.
CD CD CD CD
41. CD CD CD CD
77. CD CD
6.
CD CD CD CD
42. CD CD CD CD
78. CD CD CD CD
7.
cd CD CD CD
43.
CD CD CD CD
79. CD CD CD CD
8. CD CD CD CD
44. CD CD CD CD
80. CD CD CD CD
9. CD CD CD CD
45. CD
81. CD CD
1.
CD CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD CD
CD CD
CD CD
10. cd CD CD CD
46. CD CD CD CD
82.
11.
CD CD CD CD
47. CD CD CD CD
83. CD CD
CD CD
12.
CD CD CD CD
48. CD CD CD CD
84. CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD
49. CD CD CD CD
85. CD CD
CD CD
14.
CD CD CD CD
50. CD CD CD CD
86. CD CD CD CD
15.
CD CD CD CD
51.
CD CD CD CD
87. CD CD CD CD
16. CD CD CD CD
52.
CD CD CD CD
88. CD CD CD CD
17. CD
53. CD CD CD CD
89. CD CD CD CD
13. CD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD CD
18. CD CD CD CD
54.
CD CD CD CD
90. CD CD CD CD
19. CD CD CD CD
55.
CD CD CD CD
91. CD
20. CD CD CD CD
56. CD CD CD CD
92.
21. CD cd CD CD
57. CD CD
93. CD CD
22. CD CD CD CD
58. CD CD CD CD
94. CD
23. CD CD CD CD
59. CD CD CD CD
95.
24. CD CD CD CD
60. CD CD CD CD
96. CD CD
25. CD CD CD CD
61.
26. CD CD CD CD
62. CD
27. CD CD CD CD
63. CD CD
28. CD CD CD CD
64. CD CD CD CD
29. CD CD CD CD
65. CD CD CD CD
30. CD CD CD CD
66.
31. CD <d CD CD
67. CD CD CD CD
Chemistry
32. CD CD CD CD
68. CD CD CD CD
Section
33. CD CD CD CD
69. CD CD CD CD
34. CD CD
70. CD CD CD CD
Raw
Score
CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD CD
CD CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD CD
CD CD
97. CD CD CD CD
98. CD CD CD CD
99. CD CD CD CD
100. CD CD
CD CD
CD CD CD CD
35. CD CD CD CD
71.
CD CD CD CD
Estimated
36. CD CD CD CD
72.
CD CD CD CD
Scaled Score
Copyright The Berkeley Review
320
The Berkeley Review

The
BERKELEY
PERIODIC TABLE OF THE ELEMENTS
He
4.0
1.0
9
10
Li
Be
Ne
6.9
9.0
10.8
12.0
14.0
16.0
19.0
20.2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Na
Mg
Al
Si
Ar
23.0
24.3
27.0
28.1
31.0
32.1
35.5
39.9
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Sc
Ti
Cr
Mn
Fe
Co
Ni
Cu
Zn
Ga
Ge
As
Se
Br
Kr
401
45.0
47.9
50.9
52.0
54.9
55.8
58.9
58.7
63.5
65.4
69.7
72.6
74.9
79.0
79.9
83.8
39.1
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Rb
Sr
Zr
Nb
Mo
Tc
Ru
Rh
Pd
Ag
Cd
In
Sn
Sb
Te
Xe
85.5
87.6
88.9
91.2
92.9
95.9
(98)
101.1
102.9
106.4
107.9
112.4
114.8
118.7
121.8
127.6
126.9
131.3
55
56
Cs
Ba
132.9
1373
87
88
Fr
Ra
(223)
226.0
57A
Lat
138.9
89
Ac8
227.0
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
Hf
Ta
Re
Os
Ir
Ft
Au
Hg
TI
Pb
Bi
Po
At
Rn
178.5
180.9
183.9
186.2
190.2
192.2
195.1
197.0
200.6
204.4
207.2
209.0
(209)
(210)
(222)
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
Rf
Db
Sg
Bh
Hs
Mt
Uun
Uuu
Uub
(261)
(262)
(263)
(262)
(265)
(266)
(269)
(272)
(277)
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Ce
Pr
Nd
Pm
Sm
Eu
Gd
Tb
Dy
Ho
Er
Tm
Yb
Lu
140.1
140.9
144.2
(145)
150.4
152.0
157.3
158.9
162.5
164.9
167.3
168.9
173.0
175.0
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
111
Pa
Np
Pu
Am
Cm
Bk
Es
Fm
Md
No
Lr
(252)
(257)
(258)
(259)
(260)
232.0
(231) 238.0 (237)
(244)
(243)
(247)
(247) (251)

(The Berkeley Review) The Berkeley Review MCAT Gen

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(The Berkeley Review) The Berkeley Review MCAT Gen

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(The Berkeley Review) The Berkeley Review MCAT Gen

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What topics are covered in sections VI through X?

What topics are covered in sections VI through X?

What are the goals of section VI on gases?

What are the goals of section VI on gases?

General

Phases & Phase Changes

P.O. Box 40140, Berkeley, California 94704-0140

Cover Design by MacGraphics.

Terminology and Concepts

b) Kinetic Molecular Theory of Gases

a) Applying Qas Laws

Gas System Properties

a) Qas Speed and Velocity

Gas mixture is richer in

c) Effusion and Infusion

in the heavier gas on

the lighter gas on the

the left side of the tube

Gases Section Goals

Have a solid understanding of the kinetic theory of gases.

Know hentouseAvogadro's, Boyle's, andCharles's laws from thevariables presented in thequestion.

Be able to determine the partial pressure of a gas within a mixture.

component gasparticles. Thepartial pressure due toonecomponent in themixture canbedetermined

Gases and Gas Laws

Gases and Gas Laws

conceptual relationships can be determined from calculations as well. The first

temperature (at high temperature, molecules have the energy to overcome

molecules becomenegligible. This is the basis of the kinetic theory of gases.

Exclusive MCAT Preparation

Gases and Gas Laws

Terminology and Concepts

Gas Phase Definitions

Pressure (P; standard unit is arm.)

Collision frequency and collision force

Volume (V; standard unit is liters)

Mean free path

Moles (n; standard unit is moles)

Temperature (T;standard unit is K)

Average kinetic energy

It is imperative to have a well-developed glossary in your memory by the time

Copyright by The Berkeley Review